CMM Calypso 4 0

CALYPSO
Metrology Software
User guide
This manual must not be circulated or copied, or its contents utilized

and disseminated, without our express written permission. Persons
misusing this manual are subject to prosecution.
All rights reserved, especially in cases of granting a patent or registering a utility model.
Subject to modifications.
Carl Zeiss does not grant any warranty on this material and no implied
warranties on commercial quality and the suitability for a certain purpose.
Carl Zeiss cannot be held liable for errors included in this document,
accidental damage or damage resulting from the provision, function
or use of this manual.
All product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of the corresponding proprietors.
Carl Zeiss
Industrial Metrology Division
D-73446 Oberkochen
Germany
CALYPSO User guide

Revision:
4.0
Date:
04/04
Order number: 61212-2010602
Preface
The Calypso User guide is designed for users who want to learn to use
Calypso or have a task to complete and want to find out how to
accomplish it in Calypso. This guide contains examples and step-bystep instructions. Consequently, it enables new and experienced users
to find the information they need.
The reference information on windows and dialog boxes is in the
Calypso dialog reference in the Online Help.
Overview of Topics
Included in this User guide:
Chapter 1 Introduction on page 1-1
Hints for working with Windows NT, and provides background
information illustrating Calypsos basic procedures and general
concepts.
Chapter 2 Dynalog and Dynalog P control consoles on page
2-1
Describes how to operate Calypso using the Dynalog P control
panel.
Chapter 3 Working with the CAD window on page 3-1
Describes the possibilities of the CAD window and how to use
them. You also get information on how to work with CAD data.
Chapter 4 Preparing the measurement plan on page 4-1
Describes how to open a measurement plan and the prerequisites
necessary before you can run a measurement plan automatically.
Chapter 5 Defining features on page 5-1
Describes the definition of the measurement features (e.g. a plane
or cylinder), explains how to create a measurement strategy and
how to work with scanning.
Chapter 6 Defining characteristics on page 6-1
Describes the principles of the fitting methods that Calypso uses
and shows how to define characteristics.
Chapter 7 Editing the measurement plan on page 7-1
Explains how to manage a test measurement plan, work with the
toolbox options, customize presentation protocols and work with
the routes of the CMM. Additionally, this chapter describes the use
of the probe changer and audiovisual user information.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Preface
Chapter 8 Running a measurement plan on page 8-1

Describes how to start CNC runs and how to work with the
measurement results.
Chapter 9 Viewing, presenting and editing measuring results
on page 9-1
Describes which types of protocols are available and how to work
with them. It also describes how to save the measurement results
as files of different formats.
Chapter 10 Duplex mode on page 10-1
Contains the instructions for preparing, performing and evaluating
measurements with dual horizontal-arm CMMs.
Chapter 11 Managing Calypso on page 11-1
Shows how to install Calypso, how to view and modify all of
Calypsos system settings.
Chapter 12 Auto-Run interface on page 12-1
Explains how the system administrator sets up an Auto-Run
interface and how users work with Auto-Run.
Chapter 13 DMIS import (option) on page 13-1
Explains the basics and the procedure for importing DMISprogrammed measurements into Calypso.
Chapter 14 DMIS export (option) on page 14-1
Explains the basics and the procedure for exporting Calypso
measurement plans as DMIS-programmed measurements.
Chapter 15 Parameter-coded measuring runs (option) on
page 15-1
Explains the basics of the PCM programming language. It also
provides directions for and examples of using PCM with Calypso,
with formulas, input and output parameters, conditions and loops.
Chapter 16 Curve measurement (option) on page 16-1
Contains the basics of curve measuring, how to set up curve
features and characteristics, and how to operate on the results.
Chapter 17 Qualifying the RDS with CAA (option) on page
17-1
Describes how to calibrate an RDS on a system with the RDS-CAA
option (Computer Aided Accuracy). A small number of physical
probings is all that is needed to calibrate all 20 736 possible
angular positions of an RDS.
Chapter 18 Determining measuring uncertainty (OVCMM)
(option) on page 18-1
Describes the configuration and use of the OVCMM. This is used
to calculate the measurement reliability of the measurement plan
results.
Preface
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Chapter 19 Characteristic input (option) on page 19-1

You can use the Characteristic Input option without a connected
CMM to import suitable CAD data, convert this data into a
measurement plan, test and correct this measurement plan and
output it as a Calypso measurement plan.
Chapter 20 Stylus simulation and stylus system library (option)
on page 20-1
If you have used the stylus system library to copy the styli of your
CMM virtually, Calypso is able to simulate the stylus movements
in the CAD window.
Chapter 21 VAST Navigator (option) on page 21-1
With the VAST Navigator, you can achieve maximum precision during high-speed scanning thanks to the refined equipment technology, control technology and algorithms. Tangential probing and
helical scanning now become possible.
Chapter 22 Automation (option) on page 22-1
Describes the Automation option, with which automation projects
can be realized in combination with the CMM OS.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Preface
Supplementary literature
Simply Measure And what you should know to do it right,
A metrology primer
Carl Zeiss, Industrial Metrology Division,
order number: 612302-9002
The Zeiss Training Block

You can order the training block from
Carl Zeiss, Industrial Metrology Division,
D-73446 Oberkochen, Germany.
Order No.: 600331-8052-000
Preface
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Text conventions
The following text conventions and symbols are used in this manual:
Example
Description
Features
Textual element of graphical user interface.
Comment
The Comment button on the screen.
C:\windows\w.ini
The file w.ini in the directory windows on

drive C:\.
Guide your actions... A passage containing important information.

Welcome to
Cross-reference. If the book is displayed
Calypso on page 1-2 online, you can click on the cross-reference to
follow the link.
Plan CNC-Start
CNC-Start
The CNC-Start item in the CNC-Start

submenu of the Plan menu.
Ctrl-a
Press and hold down the Ctrl key and press

lowercase letter a.
Symbols
Three special icons are used in this book; they always contain
important information. The icons appear in the margin, beside the
associated text.
hss
Danger
Special care is necessary in this case. The warning triangle warns the
user about potential danger of injury.
Failure to comply with the warning could result in injury to the user.
Important
This symbol calls attention to a situation that could result in incorrect
measurements, disruptions in the measurement process, collisions or
damage to the equipment and the workpiece.
NOTE
This symbol represents important and helpful additional information.
hss
hss
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Preface
Preface
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Contents
Chapter 1
Introduction
Welcome to Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
How to start Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Calypso user desk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Working with Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Restructuring, saving and loading toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Important terms in Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Measurement plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Coordinate systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Clearance planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Measurement plan-oriented measuring with Calypso . . 1-14
Chapter 2
Dynalog and Dynalog P control consoles

Overview of Dynalog and Dynalog P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Operating Calypso with Dynalog P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
How to configure Calypso for Dynalog P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Particularities for the operation of Dynalog P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Operating Calypso with the Dynalog control console . . . 2-6

How to configure Calypso for Dynalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Operating the touchpad of Dynalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Function keys on the Dynalog control console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Operating the toolboxes via Dynalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Example: Operating sequence on the Dynalog control console . . 2-11
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Contents
Chapter 3
Working with the CAD window

Basics about the CAD window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Buttons in the CAD window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Chapter 4
Preparing the measurement plan

Measurement plan basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
How to create a new measurement plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
How to open an existing measurement plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
How to load a file with default names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
List of the prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Homing the CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
How to establish the connection to the CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
How to move the CMM to the home position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Installing and qualifying stylus systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

How to install a stylus system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Editing stylus systems and styli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Qualifying the styli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Qualifying stylus system with measurement plan . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Qualifying the reference sphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
How to print the stylus data list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Contents
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Setting the base / start alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48

Part alignment basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
How to load an existing base alignment/start alignment . . . . . . . 4-52
How to create a new base / start alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
How to adapt a base / start alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
How to edit an existing base / start alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Moving or rotating the base / start alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Rotate reference axis by secondary reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Loading a secondary alignment for a base / start alignment . . . . 4-71
Calculating base alignment back to CAD origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
How to delete a base alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
How to set a base alignment to zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Alternative alignment methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Prerequisites for the rotary table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

General information on using the rotary table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
How to log in the rotary table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
How to position the rotary table manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Qualifying the rotary table axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Measuring features with a rotary table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
Using the rotary table passively . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
RT clearance planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Measuring a feature in a number of rotary table positions . . . . 4-111
Rotational pattern of a feature with rotary table coupling . . . . . 4-113
Defining the clearance planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115

Clearance planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
How to define the clearance planes with the CMM . . . . . . . . . 4-116
How to define the clearance planes manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
How to define the clearance planes by probing . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
How to generate the clearance planes automatically . . . . . . . . 4-119
How to test the clearance planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
How to block edges of the clearance plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
Editing measurement plan settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122

How to edit measurement plan settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Editing the measurement plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124

61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Contents
Temperature compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

How to activate temperature compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
How to determine the temperatures by manual probing . . . . . . 4-128
How to configure automatic temperature probing (CNC) . . . . . 4-129
How to enter temperatures manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
Chapter 5
Defining features
Defining features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Definition template for features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Automatic feature recognition and automatic feature end . . . . . . 5-5
Importing features from CAD files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
How to import features from the CAD model to the measurement plan
5-13
Multiplying features by patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Copying properties of features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Color-coding of features buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Tips and tricks for defining features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Details on definition of the features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Point feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Circle feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Plane feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
2-D Line feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
3-D Line feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Cylinder feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Cone feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Sphere feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
3-D Curve feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
3D Curve feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Ellipse feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Slot feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Rectangle feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Offset Plane feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Symmetry Point feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Radius Point feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Contents
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Sphere Point feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Angle point feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
General surface feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
General curve feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Additional features Holos and Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Free Form Surface additional feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Turbine Blade additional feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Greater accuracy by gage correction qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Linking features in constructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

How to define constructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Defining features by recalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Perpendicular construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
Intersection construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Symmetry construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
Edge Point construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
Projection construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Minimum Point construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Maximum Point construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Minimum Result construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Maximum Result construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Average-Feature construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Cone Addition construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
Plane with Offset construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Circle in contour best fit construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
Defining a measurement strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85

How to use the context menu of the strategy list . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
Point list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
Alternative probing methods (self-centering probing) . . . . . . . . . 5-88
Automatic stylus search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
Path generation measuring features automatically . . 5-95

How to add a path generation method to the strategy list . . . . . 5-96
General settings for the path generation method . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
Features you can measure with path generation . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Contents
Chapter 6
Defining characteristics
Basics about characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Calculation of geometric elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Best-fit methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Defining characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

How to insert characteristics into the measurement plan . . . . . . . 6-7
Characteristic definition templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Connecting a characteristic to a feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
How to assign characteristics to certain features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Characteristics with indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
How to define nominal values and tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Defining custom tolerance tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Filtration and outliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
How to set and activate a filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
How to eliminate outliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Copying properties of characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
About the color-coding of Characteristics buttons . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Details on defining characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42

Setting references for characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
List of characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
DIN ISO 1101 Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
DIN ISO 1101 Flatness In A Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
DIN ISO 1101 True Position with Best Fit of Bore Pattern . . . . . . 6-52
Characteristics in practice (instructions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Chapter 7
Editing the measurement plan

Managing measurement plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
How to save a measurement plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
How to rename a measurement plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
How to copy a measurement plan to a floppy disk . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
How to delete a measurement plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Editing features of the measurement plan . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Contents
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Adding features or characteristics to a measurement plan . . . . . . 7-5

How to edit features or characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
How to copy features or characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
How to move features or characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
How to delete features or characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
How to work with the Waste Basket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Grouping and ungrouping characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
How to rename features, characteristics and groups . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
How to undo changes in the measurement plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
How to find a measurement plan feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Editing the entire measurement plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Editing a measurement plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Mirroring a measurement plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Combining several measurement plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Using macros in the measurement plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

Basics about macros in measurement plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Using macros in Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Toolboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Creating and using custom toolboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
How to work with a custom toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Deleting a custom toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Sizing and moving toolboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Editing the travel paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

About travel paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Clearance planes/clearance groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Checking the travel paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Editing travel paths between features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Editing travel paths within a feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Stylus system changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43

Renishaw MCR20 stylus system changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
SCR200 stylus system changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
ACR3 stylus system changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Stylus system changer for RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Contents
Defining the RDS geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

Setting up the initial stylus system changer configuration . . . . . . 7-49
Defining the master stylus length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
How to add holders to the configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
Approach parameters for the stylus system changer . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
How to define the position of a holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
How to define the holder positions of an SCP600 . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
How to define the holder positions of an ACR3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
How to define the holder positions of an MCR20 . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
How to define the holder positions of an SCR200 . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
How to assign a stylus system to a holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
How to perform an automatic stylus system change . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
How to perform a semiautomatic stylus system change . . . . . . . 7-63
How to change the stylus system assigned to a holder . . . . . . . . 7-64
Multimedia user information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65

How to add user information to a measurement plan . . . . . . . . . 7-65
How to view user information for a measurement plan . . . . . . . 7-66
Chapter 8
Running a measurement plan

Defining the scope of measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Entering printout header data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Starting a measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
How to start a CNC run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
How to start a manual run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Monitoring measurement plan runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Reaction following a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Contents
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Chapter 9
Viewing, presenting and editing measuring

results
Result printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Defining printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
How to display printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
How to print the measuring results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Examples of printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Preparing custom printouts and compact printouts . . . . 9-14

Structure of custom printouts and compact printouts . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Designing printouts with the Header Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
How to display variations

in form and location graphically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Output of form or location plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Format files for form and location plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Working with the form and location plot Window . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Saving measuring results to files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45

How to define paths and names individually for output files . . . . 9-46
How to save the measuring results as files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Copying the measuring results file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
How to configure the PDF output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Programmed access to measuring results . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51

Permitting access to measuring results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Syntax of the CalypsoInterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Example: VBScript Application (WSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Converting measuring results for qs-STAT . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62

How to save Calypso measuring results in QDAS format . . . . . . . 9-64
Controlling the conversion with QDASCONV.CON . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
Chapter 10
Duplex mode
Duplex mode with Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Preparing for duplex mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Files for duplex mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Contents
Establishing the connection and coupling the measuring ranges . 10-5
Using duplex mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Measuring with a duplex CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Chapter 11
Managing Calypso
Installing Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
How to install Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Installing a Service Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

How to decompress the Service Pack files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
How to install the program files contained in the Service Pack . . 11-8
If a software error occurs the error report . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

How to use the error report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Modifying the system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Settings you can view or modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Chapter 12
Auto-Run interface
Basics about Auto-Run interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Layout of the Auto-Run interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Basics about desks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Basics about measurement plan icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Basics about pallets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Basics about branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Basics about keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Working with Auto-Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7

Your user privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Preparing a measurement start for Auto-Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Starting a measurement in Auto-Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Entering printout header parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Controlling measuring runs in Auto-Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
When a measurement in Auto-Run is complete . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Displaying printouts subsequently . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Contents
10
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Auto-Run for system administrators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16

Configuring Auto-Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Mapping the workpieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
Mapping a pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
Defining measuring runs for a pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
Keywords for icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29
Branches between desks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
Preparing a measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31
Administrating Auto-Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-39
Chapter 13
DMIS import (option)

Basics about DMIS measurement plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Which DMIS commands are supported? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Special features of measurement plans imported from DMIS . . . 13-3
Configuring DMIS import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Importing measurement plan from DMIS . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
How to import and start a DMIS program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Evaluating reports about the DMIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Chapter 14
DMIS export (option)

Basics about DMIS export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Exporting measurement plan to DMIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Requirements for the DMIS export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
How to export a measurement plan to DMIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Chapter 15
Parameter-coded measuring runs (option)

Introduction to PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Using PCM in Calypso first steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Variable measurement plans in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Parameter files for measurement plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Conditions and parameters for the run structure of Calypso . . . . 15-7
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Contents
11
Variables, parameters and formulas in Calypso . . . . . . . 15-9

Formulas and functions in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
Programming with PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Entering parameters and formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15

How to enter parameters for a measurement plan directly . . . . 15-15
How to enter formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
Setting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19
Inserting loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22
Basics about input and output parameters in PCM . . . . . . . . . . 15-28
Basics about the point generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-32
How to test a PCM printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-34
Working with PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-35

Searching for a PCM text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-35
How to test PCM commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-36
Examples for PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-37

Example for PCM: Using variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-37
Example for PCM: Condition with alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-38
Example for PCM: Principle of parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-39
Example for PCM: Loading parameter values into a curve . . . . . 15-41
Example for PCM: Defining curve using cosine function . . . . . . 15-42
Example for PCM: Rechecking characteristic after tolerance excursion
15-42
Example for PCM: Parameterizing an alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-44
Example for PCM: Loading a PCM file via dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-44
Example for PCM: Defining loop with linear offset . . . . . . . . . . 15-45
Example for PCM: Nested loop for field (array) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-46
Example for PCM: Parts family and variant control . . . . . . . . . . 15-48
Example for PCM: ASCII parameter file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-50
PCM quick reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-51

PCM syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-51
Variables in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-52
Arithmetic and comparative operators in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-53
Mathematical functions in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-54
Character string functions in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-56
Contents
12
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
PCM functions: Input and output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-57

PCM Functions: File commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-60
PCM functions: Measurement-specific functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-62
PCM functions: CMM-specific functions and travel commands . 15-64
PCM functions: System commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-68
PCM functions: Custom printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-70
Overview: Conditions in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-72
Overview: Loops in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-73
Chapter 16
Curve measurement (option)

Basics about curve measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Performing curve measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Defining the curve feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5

2D curves, 3D curves and lift curves differences . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
Defining nominal data for a curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
How to import the files for nominal definition of a curve . . . . . . 16-8
How to generate a curve with the point generator . . . . . . . . . . 16-11
Creating nominal values of a curve by digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12
How to enter nominal data of the curve point by point . . . . . . 16-21
How to adopt nominal data of the curve from the CAD model . 16-22
Working with curve nominal data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-23
Checking the clearance planes of a curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-30
Defining tolerances for a curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-31

How to define tolerance for the whole curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-31
How to define tolerances for individual segments . . . . . . . . . . . 16-33
How to define jump tolerance for the whole curve . . . . . . . . . . 16-34
Defining the result calculation of a curve . . . . . . . . . . . 16-36

Calculation of deviations for the curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-36
Projection of the results for the curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-37
Using curves in the CAD model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-39

The commands in the context menu for curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-39
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Contents
13
Measuring strategy for the curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-41

Options for displaying points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-41
How to work with the point list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-42
Scanning a known contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-46

Scanning method for curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-46
How to divide a curve into segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-49
Characteristics for the curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-52

Defining curve slope characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-52
Defining curve stroke characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-54
Defining curve distance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-56
Defining curve expansion characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-57
Defining curve form characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-58
Working with the results of curve measurement . . . . . 16-60

How to calculate the deviations of a curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-60
How to optimize the coordinate system with best-fit alignment 16-61
How to calculate the curve's center of mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-62
How to obtain a best fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-63
How to limit search distances during curve evaluation . . . . . . . 16-66
Smoothing a curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-67
Sorting the points in a curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-68
Limiting the evaluation of the curve values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-70
How to eliminate outliers from a curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-71
How to add an offset to a curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-73
How to set the deviation calculation for threads . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-74
How to format the printout for the curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-74
Graphical evaluation of deviations for curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-75
Chapter 17
Qualifying the RDS with CAA (option)

Principles of qualifying RDS-CAA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Qualification of the RDS on the CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Establishing the preconditions
for qualification of the RDS on the CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
How to perform qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
Contents
14
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Qualifying the stylus system with RDS-CAA . . . . . . . . . . 17-7

General information about qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
Qualifying stylus systems and styli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
Qualifying stylus systems and styli with RDS-CAA . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
Chapter 18
Determining measuring uncertainty

(OVCMM) (option)
Basic principles of the OVCMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Uncertainty of measuring results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Influencing variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Cooperation in determining error sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Configuring the OVCMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5

How to determine the stylus characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
Using the OVCMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9

How to activate the OVCMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
Results of the OVCMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
Chapter 19
Characteristic input (option)

Basics about the characteristic input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
Requirements for the import and export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
Generating a measurement plan from CAD data . . . . . . 19-5

How to prepare for generation of the measurement plan . . . . . . 19-6
How to create a measurement plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7
How to edit the generated measurement plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-10
Setting the base alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-11
How to define the clearance planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-11
How to assign the styli in the generated measurement plan . . . 19-12
How to test and save the generated measurement plan . . . . . . 19-12
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Contents
15
Chapter 20
Stylus simulation and stylus system library

(option)
Stylus simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
Controlling the stylus simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
How to position the CAD model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4
Stylus system library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5

Working with the stylus system library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6
How to load, modify and save styli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7
Editing the table of attributes for simulated styli . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-8
Assembling a stylus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9
How to enable styli for the simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-15
Chapter 21
VAST Navigator (option)

What are the capabilities of the VAST Navigator? . . . . . 21-2
VAST parameters in the Measurement Plan Editor Features . . . . 21-3
Ideal scanning speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4

Scanning at ideal speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5
Dynamic stylus qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-7

Working with virtual reference spheres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8
How to perform dynamic stylus qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-11
Travel paths during dynamic stylus qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-13
Tangential probing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-15

How to activate tangential probing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-16
Helical path generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-18

How to probe cylinders with the helical method . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-18
Edge deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-21

How to activate edge deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-22
Contents
16
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Chapter 22
Automation (option)
Basics about automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
Using the AAI interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3
How to configure the AAI interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3
How to activate the AAI interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-5
How to start the AAI interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-5
Manual mode and automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-5
How to stop the AAI interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-7
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Contents
17
Contents
18
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Chapter
Introduction
.................................................................................................................................
It is well worth recalling what you learned in the Calypso Basics

course before you start work.
The most important points are starting Calypso, an overview of the
Calypso user desk and a short explanation of important terms you
need for measuring with Calypso.
This chapter contains:

Welcome to Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
How to start Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Calypso user desk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Important terms in Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Measurement plan-oriented measuring with Calypso . . . . . . . . . 1-14
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
1- 1
Introduction
Welcome to Calypso
From now on, Calypso will be the tool you use for fast, accurate and
convenient measuring.
Calypso was developed to make the job of measuring easier for you.
To this end, it utilizes the entire know-how pool of Carl Zeiss, the
technology leader in the world of metrology.
Straightforward
programming
Calypso automatically recognizes the geometric elements you probe

and responds by generating probing paths and strategies, retract
movements and routes between the elements.
In contrast to conventional software, the styli are qualified with the
aid of CNC programs. As a consequence you need only perform the
first probing of the reference sphere manually, Calypso will perform all
of the remaining steps for you.
In Calypso, you enter the measurement parameters in accordance
with a predefined structure, which means that nothing can be
inadvertently omitted. You will find, for example, that the parameters
in the input menus offer you default values. There are only a few
items that call for manual input, and they are highlighted to draw
your attention to them right away. Logical sequences, indicators,
prompts for confirmation, and plausibility checks matching the
individual characteristics are all in place to make sure that you omit
nothing and to make measuring as straightforward as possible.
You see what you're

measuring
Calypso offers you a clear view of the workpiece at all times. The CAD
model is right in front of you on the screen and you can follow every
detail as measurement proceeds. Of course, you also have the option
of directly importing CAD data so that you can quickly generate errorfree measurement programs of your own.
Versatile measurement
logs
You can be sure that you'll have the results of measurement without
delay, and afterwards you can still depend on Calypso to help. You
can customize measurement logs to suit your needs and preferences,
for example you can assign colors to tolerance overshoots or select
full-graphics display modes for the results.
If you want to import the results into other mainstream Windows
applications, Calypso can export the result files, so you can present
the data as graphics or in table form, or in presentation programs
whatever your customer wants.
NOTE
hss
1-2
The Calypso Light version allows you to use all the standard functions
of Calypso. Only a few additional and extended functions cannot be
started in Calypso Light.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to start Calypso
How to start Calypso

Follow these steps to start and log into Calypso:
1 Turn your computer on.
2 Log in to Windows.
You do this by pressing Ctrl, Alt and Del in response to the system
prompt.
3 Wait for the Windows desktop to appear and double-click on the
Calypso icon.
If the icon does not appear on the desktop, select Start
Programs Zeiss Calypso.
Calypso begins loading. Before the first Calypso screen is
displayed, the Visual Works and ACIS 3D Toolkit programs are
loaded and you will see their respective windows displayed briefly.
These programs are necessary for Calypso to run.
NOTE
hss
Never close Visual Works and ACIS 3D Toolkit when Calypso is

running.
The Log In dialog box appears on the screen.
NOTE
hss
If you click on Memos, the Memo Editor window will open in which
you may find information left for you by the operator on the previous
shift.
4 Select your user name from the User Name list.
5 Type in your password and click on OK.
When you log in for the first time, Calypso prompts you to confirm
your password:
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
1-3
Introduction
6 Type in your password again and click on OK.

Once you have logged in, the Calypso user desk appears on the
screen.
NOTE
hss
Consult your system administrator if you encounter problems when

logging in.
1-4
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Calypso user desk
Calypso user desk

The Calypso user desk appears on your screen once you have logged
in. This graphic shows the Calypso user desk with an open
measurement plan. The CAD window contains the model of the
workpiece.
Menu bar
Toolbar
Measurement
plan icons
Measurement
plan area
CAD window
CAD icons
The user desk and its principal fields are described briefly below:
Menu bar
The main menu options contain pull down sub-menus with the
basic commands for working with Calypso.
Toolbar
The toolbar contains icons that you can use to run frequently
required commands quickly.
You can use the Toolbar editor to specify which icons appear in
what order in the toolbar.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
1-5
Introduction
Measurement plan area

Three main windows can be displayed alternately using the
measurement plan icons:
Prerequisites
This is where you find the dialogs for preparing the
measurement plan.
Features
This is where you create lists of the features and work on their
templates.
Characteristics
This is where you define the characteristics in the order in which
they are carried out in the CNC run, and where you work on
their templates.
CAD window
The CAD window contains a three-dimensional model of the
workpiece and each feature. The model is constantly updated
when you define new features or edit existing ones.
NOTE
hss
The view requires a certain period of time to create itself. If you do not
require the display of the model in the CAD window, select CAD
View Hide CAD View.
CAD icons
The icons start functions and commands with which you can edit
the features in the CAD window.
Working with Calypso

You can work with Calypso the same way as with many Window
software packages: using the keyboard and mouse. You can use a
mouse with 2 or 3 buttons.
Two-button vs. threebutton mouse
The table shows which key combinations of a two-button mouse

corresponds to the keys of the three-button mouse.
Two-button mouse
NOTE
Three-button mouse
Left button
corresp. to
Left button
Right button
corresp. to
Middle button
Ctrl + right button
corresp. to
Right button
Alt + right button
corresp. to
Alt + right button
The descriptions in this document are based on a two-button mouse.
hss
1-6
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Calypso user desk
Calypso offers shortcuts that enable you to call functions quickly via
the keyboard.
Routines
If you are unwilling or unable to use the keyboard for entries, you can
also make entries using the mouse.
The context menu is available in lists and in the CAD window in
addition to the menu items in the main menu and submenus.
Clicking through lists
with open windows
In the lists of features and characteristics, you can open the definition
template for each item which defines the respective element. You can
open additional dialog boxes and sub-windows from within the
definition template.
By clicking another element in the list or "scrolling through the list"
by means of the arrow buttons, the open window for the new
element is updated. Thus, it is not necessary to close the lower-order
windows and to open them again for the other element.
Thus, you can first open the strategy window for a feature, for
example, and then view and edit the strategy for any other feature
desired without having to close the strategy window prior to this.
NOTE
hss
All changes made in the open dialog boxes are accepted and saved
automatically.
Using shortcuts
If a shortcut is available for a menu item, it is shown next to the menu
item in the menu. You can use the following shortcuts in Calypso:
Shortcut
Function
Ctrl+N
Create new measurement plan
Ctrl+O
Open measurement plan
Ctrl+S
Saving measurement plan
Ctrl+F
Open the Search dialog box
Ctrl+A
Select all
Ctrl+Z
Undo last action
Ctrl+C
Copy selection to the Clipboard
Ctrl+X
Cut selection
Ctrl+V
Paste selection from the Clipboard
F2
Rename selected feature
Del
Delete selected feature
Esc
Close box without applying the changes
Return
Close box and apply changes
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
1-7
Introduction
Shortcut
Function
Right
Open feature and characteristic window for the selected feature
Ctrl+Right
Open strategy window for the selected feature
Alt+Right
Open evaluation for the selected feature
Alt+F4
Exit Calypso
How to enter alphanumeric characters with the

mouse
If you prefer using the mouse to enter text and digit strings, Calypso
can display an input field with a keyboard. You generate entries in the
current input field by pointing to the individual keys with the mouse
pointer and clicking.
To activate this functionality:
1 Select View Configuration.
The Datum Features dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Activate the Use typewriter for inputs check box.

3 Click on Close.
The window will be closed. From now on, the Typewriter dialog box
will appear on the screen whenever a change is made to an input
field.
How to use context menus

Calypso, like many Windows software packages, has context menus
that change depending on where you are in the software.
To open a context menu:
1 Click with the right mouse button.
The context menu appears on the screen.
1-8
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Calypso user desk
2 Click on the command of your choice.

Usually, the context menus offer commands that are available in the
main user desk menu. Sometimes, however, the context menus offer
commands that are available nowhere else. If you are trying to
perform a task and cannot figure out how to do it, try clicking the
right mouse button to view the options in the context menu, and you
may find the function you need.
Context menu for
features
In the context menu of a feature, use the Details submenu to open

the Clearance Data, Evaluation (Feature) and Strategy dialog
boxes. Thus you can edit a feature without opening the feature
beforehand.
Restructuring, saving and loading toolbars

You can use the Toolbar Editor to specify which icons appear in
what order in the toolbar.
This provides all the functions of the menus and submenus that have
graphical icons, as well as the additional icons of the toolbar (find
function, transfer format, help, work report, waste basket and
output).
NOTE
hss
In every configuration, the right end of the toolbar form the icon
group for stylus administration. This stylus group cannot be deleted,
and its icons cannot be selected.
You can only add icons to the toolbar according to the space available
above the user desk. As soon as the space has been used up, the
toolbar editor refuses to insert additional icons. You have to remove
another icon first.
Toolbar per user
The toolbar currently used in the user desk is saved on a user-specific

basis: After you have logged in under your user name, Calypso
automatically displays your toolbar.
Saving and loading

toolbars
You can save each toolbar under a separate name and reload them at
any time to adopt them as your current toolbar in the user desk.
The toolbars are saved as *.config files.
Restoring the standard
The standard toolbar in its existing form can be restored at any time
using Presetting, and activated for your user desk using Accept.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
1-9
Introduction
How to restructure your toolbar

In order to create and adopt a new toolbar:
1 Select View Toolbar Editor.
Two dialog boxes open. In the upper window, the current working
state of the toolbar is displayed. In the lower window, all the
available graphical icons are shown in a list.
2 Select the representation of the available icons that is most suitable

for you:
All buttons: All icons appear successively in a list.
Arranged by menu: All the icons appear in a hierarchical list
according to menu items of the main menu.
3 Select the desired icon and, if appropriate, enable the check box
for the spaces to be inserted.
4 To append the icon at the right end of the toolbar (in front of the
stylus group): Click on Insert at end.
- or To insert the icon in another position in the toolbar: Select the icon
in the upper window afterwards and click on Insert before
selection.
The toolbar in the upper window is extended accordingly.
If there is no more space for the icon to be inserted, a message
appears.
5 In order to remove an icon from the toolbar: Select it in the upper
window and click on Remove button.
1-10
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Calypso user desk
6 When the toolbar corresponds to your wishes: Save it using Save

as ... if you want to adopt it into your user desk later.
- or If appropriate, click on Accept to let the toolbar take effect
immediately for your user desk.
7 Click on OK to close the two dialog boxes.
Operation with the keyboard

In both windows, you can operate all the functions with the keyboard
(corresponds to Windows standard). In particular, you can use Enter
(= double-click) to insert the marked icon at the end of the toolbar;
with Ctrl+Enter (= Ctrl + double-click) a space is inserted before it.
Operation with the mouse (drag & drop)

You can also use the mouse (drag & drop) to drag icons from the
list in the lower window into the toolbar in the upper window.
If you press Ctrl at the same time, a space is inserted in front of the
icon. If you press Shift at the same time, a space is inserted behind
the icon. If you press both keys, spaces are inserted both in front of
and behind the icon.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
1-11
Introduction
Important terms in Calypso

It is a good idea to familiarize yourself with the most important basic
terms of Calypso so that you will be able to understand the following
chapters and make optimum use of the features offered by this
program
Features
There are two types of feature in Calypso:
A physical feature of a workpiece, such as planes (lateral surfaces)
and cylinders (holes), etc.
A constructed feature that does not physically exist. Features of
this nature are needed for lines of intersection and cylinder axes,
for example.
Automatic feature
recognition
Calypso automatically recognizes most geometric features as you

move the CMM stylus to probe them. The softwares measurement
algorithm is smart and takes into account the location of
measurement points as well as the probing direction. For example, if
you take measurements at three points on a workpiece, Calypso will
determine whether the feature is a line, plane or circle.
Characteristics
An engineering drawing requirement. You use characteristics to
specify the size, shape or location of features along with any
applicable nominal and tolerance values (e.g. the diameter of a hole,
the perpendicularity of a hole to a plane and the distance between
two planes).
Measurement plans
A measurement plan is Calypsos version of what you might be
familiar with as a part program or control data. A measurement
plan contains the information the system needs to perform a
measurement, for example:
the characteristics with their tolerances
the features
the names of the stylus systems
the part alignment
the clearance planes around the workpiece
1-12
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Important terms in Calypso
user-defined video clips, if applicable.

The measurement plan is displayed as three lists with icons that
represent the characteristics, the features and the other components
to be evaluated.
There are two ways of generating measurement plans:
You can begin by using the CMM to define the parts features that
you want to measure and the characteristics to evaluate for those
features.
Or you can create the characteristics first and then measure all the
requisite features.
Once you have created a measurement plan, you can run it to
automatically evaluate the characteristics on a specified workpiece.
Coordinate systems
For exact location definition and reliable performance of
measurements, precisely defined and convertible coordinate systems
are essential.
Machine coordinate
system
The machine coordinate system is the basis of movement commands

and measurements of the CMM. For concrete measurements on a
workpiece, however, this is very impractical. A coordinate system
referred to the workpiece must be used as the user-defined reference
coordinate system of a measurement plan.
Part alignment
A part alignment is bound to the workpiece. For Calypso and the

CMM, it locates the position and alignment of the workpiece on the
measuring table. There may be several part alignments for a single
workpiece.
Base alignment
One of the part alignments is defined as the base alignment for the
measurement plan. All other part alignments can be converted to this
base alignment.
Feature's local
coordinate system
In addition, you can also use the features local coordinate system
(FLCS) for each feature; the zero point and alignment of this
coordinate system are defined in a specified manner by the feature.
Clearance planes
Six planes define a safe area around a part and any associated fixture
where the stylus can move without risk of collision. Outside the cube
formed by these planes, the stylus can be moved without risk of
collision.
Calypso determines the parts clearance planes using only two
positions.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
1-13
Introduction
Measurement plan-oriented measuring with

Calypso
Calypso is used for quality assurance and is a powerful tool for
measuring workpieces quickly and reliably. When you measure with
Calypso, you begin by creating a measurement plan containing all the
requisite tolerances and nominal data in the form of characteristics
and all the requisite geometric data in the form of features.
Working close by the machine and from a remote

position
Your measurement determines how you define the characteristics and
features. You can adopt the values Calypso suggests as default for the
respective nominal values and tolerances when probing the
workpiece.
Alternatively, you can import data directly into the measurement plan
from a CAD file or enter the values manually. Calypso supports you
through these steps with automatic feature recognition and an
extensive library of tolerance tables.
Calypso Planner
These functions make it easy to generate a measurement plan away

from the machine. The Calypso Planner makes it possible to work on
a computer without a connected CMM in the Simulation operating
mode.
Common to all these procedures is the fact that the characteristics
and features, once defined, are grouped in the measurement plan.
This means that random samples taken from series production can be
measured automatically without any need for manual probing.
Output of measuring results

The measuring results are output in standardized printouts. The
measuring results can also be exported from Calypso and edited in
other applications (e.g. statistics programs).
1-14
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Measurement plan-oriented measuring with Calypso
This user guide takes you through the process step-by-step, all the
way up to the measured results. The diagram below illustrates the
path we are going to follow.
Drawing
CAD data
Workpiece
Defining features page 5-2

Defining characteristics page 6-7
Work
planning
Preparing the measurement plan page 4-12

Editing the measurement plan page 7-2
Running a measurement plan page 8-1
Quality
control
Viewing, presenting and editing measuring results
page 9-1
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
1-15
Introduction
1-16
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Chapter
Dynalog and Dynalog P

control consoles
.................................................................................................................................
Your measuring jobs are generally performed with two separate units:
a control console and a PC. With the control console, you directly
control the CMM. With the PC, you work on the design of your
measurement plan via Calypso.
The instructions in this document assume that a standard control
console and a PC are used. The use of a Dynalog or Dynalog P control
console offers additional options.
The Dynalog control consoles are a combination of a computer
keyboard, mouse and CMM control console. You have full
functionality and maximum user friendliness in one place.
You will find a complete description of the respective Dynalog control
console in the manual that was supplied with your control console.
This document describes how to configure Calypso for use with
Dynalog or Dynalog P and the particularities to be observed during
operation.

Overview of Dynalog and Dynalog P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Operating Calypso with Dynalog P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Operating Calypso with the Dynalog control console . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2-1
Overview of Dynalog and Dynalog P

The Dynalog and Dynalog P control consoles have the same apparent
construction but are different in their functionality.
Vertical function keys
Display
Horizontal function keys

F1-F12
Touchpad
Keyboard
The functions of the individual components on the device surface are

as follows:
Display: corresponds to a PC monitor. This is where you see the
user desk and dialog boxes of Calypso.
Keyboard: corresponds to the keyboard of the Calypso computer
(American keyboard layout).
Function keys: are divided into 2 groups.
Group
Dynalog
Dynalog P
Horizontal keys F1 to F12
are assigned to fixed Calypso

functions.
correspond to the function keys

of the computer keyboard.
Vertical keys
are only assigned if you have

defined a toolbox in Calypso.
can create direct machine

commands.
Touchpad: The touchpad replaces the mouse that you would

normally have connected to your PC (see Particularities for the
operation of Dynalog P on page 2-4 or Operating the
touchpad of Dynalog on page 2-8).
Joysticks: The joysticks are used for manual control of the CMM.
2-2
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Operating Calypso with Dynalog P

With the Dynalog P, you can operate Calypso parallel to the Calypso
computer. With the exception of a few peculiarities, you operate
Calypso in the same way as on a Calypso computer.
In the system setup, you have to perform a one-time initialization of
Calypso for using Dynalog P. Only after this are the keyboard, function
keys and touchpad set for Calypso.
Additionally, to operate Calypso with Dynalog P, you need only
familiarize yourself with the touchpad function and the vertical
function keys including the second shift key.
How to configure Calypso for Dynalog P

NOTE
hss
Note that on the Calypso computer the keyboard must be operated

with an American keyboard driver, as Dynalog P uses the American
keyboard layout (QWERTY).
To configure Calypso for Dynalog P:
1 Start Calypso on the Calypso computer and log on.
2 Select Extras Workroom CMM and click on the Panel
bookmark.
You will see the window for the choice of the control console:
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2-3
3 Choose DYNALOGp from the Panel group.

4 Click on the Control bookmark and on Connect.
5 Click on OK to save the setting and close the dialog box.
This concludes the installation of the Dynalog P control console on the
computer. From now on you can operate Calypso in parallel via
Dynalog P.
Particularities for the operation of

Dynalog P
In principle, the Dynalog P works in the same way as a standard
control console.
Moreover, the keyboard and touchpad work exactly the same way as
on the Calypso computer. In a manner of speaking, you control the
Calypso computer remotely using Dynalog P.
You will therefore be able to follow all the instructions in this
document without restriction as soon you have familiarized yourself
with the operation of the touchpad.
Operating the
touchpad
The touchpad fully replaces the mouse. You move the pointer on the
screen by moving a finger of your hand instead of moving the mouse.
To familiarize yourself with the touchpad, place the tip of any finger
on the control surface of the touchpad and watch the mouse pointer
on the screen.
When you move your finger across the control surface, the mouse
pointer on the screen follows the movement of your finger.
You single-click by tapping on the control area once with the tip of
your finger.
You double-click by tapping on the control area twice in quick
succession with the tip of your finger.
Function keys
The horizontal function keys F1 to F12 have the same function as on

the PC.
Some of the vertical function keys trigger direct machine commands,
which are listed on the mask. For example, the vertical function keys
on the left initiate the functions Slow / Fast Move, Inverse Move (X<-> -X, Y<--> -Y) etc.
2-4
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
A special feature is the double shift key:

The shift key in the keyboard has the same function as that on the
PC.
The shift key for the machine commands (on the left above the
keyboard) is used both to release the secured joysticks and to
switch to the RDS mode.
To release the secured joysticks, you have to press the shift key
briefly.
To switch the joysticks to the RDS mode, you have to press the key
for slightly longer (approx. 3 - 4 seconds). In the RDS mode, you
can move to RDS angle positions manually with the joysticks.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2-5
Operating Calypso with the Dynalog control

console
With the Dynalog control console, you can operate Calypso parallel to
the Calypso computer. With the exception of a few peculiarities, you
operate Calypso in the same way as on a Calypso computer.
Configuring Calypso for
Dynalog
In the system setup, you have to perform a one-time initialization of

Calypso for using Dynalog. Only after this are the keyboard, function
keys and touchpad set for Calypso.
Particularities for the

operation
To operate Calypso with the Dynalog control console, you must

familiarize yourself with the functions of the touchpad (Operating
the touchpad of Dynalog on page 2-8).
On the Dynalog control console, the horizontal function keys are
assigned differently than on the PC (Function keys on the Dynalog
control console on page 2-9).
When using a toolbox, Dynalog facilitates the integration of toolbox
features in your measurement plan (Operating the toolboxes via
Dynalog on page 2-10).
An additional special feature is the double shift key:
The shift key in the keyboard has the same function as that on the
PC.
The shift key for the machine commands (on the left above the
keyboard) is used both to release the secured joysticks and to
switch to the RDS mode.
To release the secured joysticks, you have to press the shift key
briefly.
To switch the joysticks to the RDS mode, you have to press the key
for slightly longer (approx. 3 - 4 seconds). In the RDS mode, you
can move to RDS angle positions manually with the joysticks.
The operating sequence with a Dynalog control console is shown in
an example (Example: Operating sequence on the Dynalog control
console on page 2-11)
How to configure Calypso for Dynalog

To configure Calypso for Dynalog:
1 Start Calypso on the Calypso computer and log on.
After that you will be in the user desk of Calypso.
2-6
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Operating Calypso with the Dynalog control console
2 Select Extras Workroom CMM and click on the Panel

bookmark.
You will see the window for the choice of the control console:
3 Choose DYNALOG from the Panel group.

4 Click on the Control bookmark.
5 Click on Connect.
You are returned to the Calypso user desk.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2-7
7 Select Extras Workroom Environment and click on the

Dynalog bookmark.
8 Activate the Dynalog keys check box and click on Apply and OK.
You are returned to the Calypso user desk.
This concludes the installation of the Dynalog control console on the
computer. You can now operate Calypso via Dynalog.
Operating the touchpad of Dynalog

The touchpad fully replaces the mouse. You move the pointer on the
screen by moving a finger of your hand instead of moving the mouse.
To familiarize yourself with the touchpad, place the tip of any finger
on the control surface of the touchpad and watch the mouse pointer
on the screen.
When you move your finger across the control surface, the mouse
pointer on the screen follows the movement of your finger.
You single-click by tapping on the control area once with the tip of
your finger.
You double-click by tapping on the control area twice in quick
succession with the tip of your finger.
2-8
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Function keys on the Dynalog control

console
The horizontal function keys F1 to F12 on the Dynalog control
console activate special functions that facilitate working with Calypso.
The table shows a description of the function of each function key
and the actions released.
Key
Function
Action executed
F1
Help
Starts the Online Help system.
F2
Open the menu of the

marked feature
Opens the appropriate dialog box if you have marked a feature

(e.g. a characteristic) beforehand. This key corresponds to a
double-click.
F3
OK
Saves the settings and closes the active window.
F4
Cancel
Closes the active window without saving the settings.
F5
Save measurement plan
Saves the current measurement plan.
F6
Run measurement plan
Runs the current measurement plan. To do so, you must be in

the user desk of Calypso.
F7
Open workroom/user
desk
When you are in the user desk, you call the workroom.
When you are in the workroom, you call the user desk.
F8
Call measurement plan

settings
Opens the dialog box for the measurement plan settings.
F9
Show/hide
default printout
Displays the default printout.

Moves the default printout to the background.
F10
Delete probing
Deletes the last probing while presently measuring a feature.
F11
Show
toolboxes
Lists all toolboxes that have been defined. The names of the
toolboxes are displayed in a separate window. The toolbox that
was last displayed is active.
F12
Show tags
Shows the tags of the vertical function keys if you have defined
a custom toolbox beforehand (see Operating the toolboxes
via Dynalog on page 2-10).
Hides the tags of the vertical function keys if they were made to
show previously.
NOTE
hss
Print this table and use it as a reference for the assignment of the
keys.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2-9
Operating the toolboxes via Dynalog

The Dynalog control console renders working with the toolboxes
considerably more comfortable. If you have defined a toolbox, you
can use the vertical function keys of the Dynalog control console to
insert the features defined in the toolbox in the measurement plan
list.
Calypso automatically assigns the features defined in the toolbox to
the vertical function keys.
To show the assignment of the vertical function keys, press the F12
function key on the Dynalog control console:
For additional information about the definition of toolboxes, please

refer to Toolboxes on page 7-26 and for information about the
assignment of the Dynalog functions keys, please refer to Function
keys on the Dynalog control console on page 2-9.
2-10
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Example: Operating sequence on the

Dynalog control console
The example shows the operating sequence on the Dynalog control
console. The following illustrations show how to transfer the True
Position characteristic from your toolbox to the measurement plan
and to open the definition template of the characteristic in which you
can make additional settings.
The prerequisite is that the True Position characteristic is included in
a custom toolbox.
1 Press the F12 function key to display the tags together with the
characteristics of the toolbox.
2 Press the vertical function key that includes the True Position
characteristic, e.g. L2.
The characteristic is transferred to the measurement plan.
1. F12 function key
2. L2 function key
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Result: The characteristic is

entered in the measurement plan.
2-11
3 Press the F2 function key to open the definition template.

The definition template is opened.
Result: The definition

template is opened.
3. F2 function key
4 To go to the Feature button, press the Tab key several times to

define a feature.
5 Press the F2 function key to open the selection dialog box.
The dialog box appears on the screen.
4. Tab key
5. F2 function key
Result: The selection

dialog box opens.
6 Use the tab key to mark a feature and press the F3 function key.
The dialog box will be closed.
2-12
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7 Press the F3 function key again to close the definition template.

The characteristic has been defined and your settings have been
recorded. The measurement plan appears again on the screen.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2-13
2-14
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Chapter
Working with the CAD

window
.................................................................................................................................
The CAD window shows a graphic of the workpiece and its features
while you work on a measurement plan. This graphical image is
known as the CAD Model. You see each feature in the CAD
window. This means you have complete control over your
measurement plan because you can see it right away if you make a
mistake in defining a feature.
You will soon come to appreciate the CAD window as a very
important and useful tool for your day-to-day work with the system.

Basics about the CAD window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Buttons in the CAD window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
3-1
Basics about the CAD window

The CAD window is where you view a CAD file containing the
workpiece you want to measure.
NOTE
hss
The view requires a certain period of time to create itself. If you do not
require the display of the model in the CAD window, select CAD
View Hide CAD View.
A workpiece shown in this way is called the CAD model. In the CAD
window, you can, among other things, rotate, enlarge or move this
model depending on the view you require for the respective work
step.
NOTE
hss
The CAD window is only for viewing a CAD file. You cannot edit the
CAD data on which it is based; all you can do is add or remove
features and probing points to the loaded CAD model.
It is possible to save the displayed CAD model and to process the CAD
data created from it in a CAD program (not in Calypso Light).
Load settings
If you do not need the complete CAD model with all functions, you
can reduce the amount of data and thus the loading times.
Depending on the setting, only one view of the CAD model or only
the number of geometric elements is loaded:
You can, for example, rotate, move or enlarge the view of the CAD
model but you cannot extract any features from it.
In the display of the geometric elements, the CAD model is not
shown.
Stylus simulation
If you have the stylus simulation and stylus toolbox options, you
can display the stylus currently in use in the CAD window and
conveniently trace the stylus movements during the CNC run or its
simulation (see Stylus simulation and stylus system library (option)
on page 20-1).
Output of the CAD

model as plot
You can include a saved CAD model in your evaluations and, for
example, output it as a plot.
3-2
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Basics about the CAD window
The illustration shows the CAD window and buttons.
CAD window
CAD buttons
The CAD window buttons allow you to manipulate the model of the
workpiece in the CAD window. Most of the functions can also be
selected from the CAD menu on the user desk.
NOTE
hss
If you are using the Calypso Light version, you cannot use the
functions of the CAD menu.
Show selected Feature(s) only
Zoom out
Rotate -> by increments
Show all Calypso Features
Use Mouse to
Use Mouse to
Zoom
Show Solid Model
Rotate <- by
increments
Zoom in
Switch to feature menu
61212-2010602
View
Use Mouse to
Pan CAD Image
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Select
rotation
Render
Fit to
CAD
3-3
Working away from the

machine
Once you have loaded a CAD file of a workpiece, you can work your
way through the preparations without having to use the CMM. You
use the mouse to define features and their probing points.
You can also generate an entire measurement plan on the basis of the
CAD model.
Simulating probing with the mouse

The CAD window enables you to define probing points and entire
features with the mouse. You just click with the mouse on the
requested CAD window.
Defining probing points
in the CAD window
This allows you to add further probing points to existing features. In

this case, the definition template of the corresponding feature has to
be open. The probing points will be added to the existing point list.
Defining features in the

CAD window
You can also define new features in a plane of the part alignment
with probing points. The list of features has to be open for this
purpose. The mouse takes over the function of the stylus which
means that you have the full functionality of automatic feature
recognition at your disposal (see How to define features using
automatic feature recognition on page 5-7).
3-4
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Buttons in the CAD window
Buttons in the CAD window

The table below lists the buttons available in the CAD window and
outlines their functions.
You can access additional information by opening this section in the
Online Help.
Dialog element
Function
Show selected
Feature(s) only
Shows only selected features by bringing them to the foreground

and hides the rest of the model. You must first select a feature
from the list of features in the measurement plan area or by
clicking directly on the feature in the CAD model.
Show all Calypso

Features
Shows all features. This button is useful if the CAD window

shows only selected features or shows the solid or rendered
model.
Show Solid
Model
Creates a solid model by extending the features to the

boundaries of the clearance planes. This solid model can then be
rendered into a three-dimensional model with illuminated sides
by using the Render button.
To return to a view of the features of the model, click on the
Show all Calypso Features.
The selection list of this button offers you the following options:
Select Already Extracted Features
Define Points
Define a Space Point
Define Circle on a Cylinder
Define Line on a Plane
Distance Measurement
Extract Features
View
Changes the view of the model. You can load a view or choose
one of the following views: isometric (or 3D), +X or -X (left or
right side), +Y or -Y (front or back), +Z or -Z (top or bottom). The
default view is isometric. Choosing the isometric view also resets
the model to the home position if it has been rotated.
Zoom out
Each time you click on this button, the view zooms out a little
further. This provides you with a complete representation of the
model and, e.g. with the Use Mouse to Pan CAD Image
button, you can move the model anywhere you like in the
window.
Use Mouse to
Zoom
Allows you to select an area of the model to zoom in on.

This button remains enabled until you click on either the Use
Mouse to Pan CAD Image or Use Mouse to Rotate CAD
Image button.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
3-5
Dialog element
Function
Zoom in
Zooms in for a closer view of the model. Each time you click on
this button, the view zooms in a little further.
Use Mouse to Pan Allows you to move (or pan) the CAD model around the CAD
CAD Image
window.
This button remains enabled until you click on either the Use
Mouse to Zoom or Use Mouse to Rotate CAD Image .
3-6
Select
Rotation mode
Sets the rotational axis of the CAD model to X, Y, Z or free axis

(which rotates the model around the center of the CAD
window).
To rotate the model, click on the Use Mouse to Rotate CAD
Image.
Rotate>
by increments /
mouse click
Rotates the CAD model 10 degrees clockwise about the selected

axis.
Use Mouse to
Rotate CAD
Image
Allows you to rotate the CAD model about the axis selected with
the Select Rotation mode button .
Rotate -> by
increments /
mouse click
Rotates the CAD model 10 degrees counterclockwise about the

selected axis.
Render
Toggles the view of the CAD model as a three-dimensional solid

with illuminated surfaces.
If you want to create a solid model prior to rendering, first click
on the Show Solid Model button, then click on the Render.
Fit to CAD
window
Fits the CAD model into the CAD window. This is useful if the
image is enlarged beyond the window size or shifted out of the
window area.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Chapter
Preparing the measurement

plan
.................................................................................................................................
You have to prepare the measurement plan before you can move on
to defining the features and characteristics in Calypso. Calypso shows
you what to do by presenting the List of prerequisites in the
measurement plan area as soon as you open a new measurement
plan. Work through the prerequisites in the order in which they
appear in the list to be sure that you do not omit any of the settings
you need in order to measure the part.

Measurement plan basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
List of the prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Homing the CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Installing and qualifying stylus systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Setting the base / start alignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Prerequisites for the rotary table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Defining the clearance planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
Editing measurement plan settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
Editing the measurement plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Temperature compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-1
Measurement plan basics

You always define the measuring jobs in a measurement plan. A
measurement plan consists of any sequence of characteristics that
you want to test on a workpiece. This includes all information from
the features that the CMM requires to all information that is
important for measuring. This information comprises the stylus
system, the part alignment, the clearance planes and, if applicable,
user-defined video clips. The measurement plan for Calypso is what
you might call a workpiece program.
There are five basic steps in creating a new measurement plan in
Calypso. The table lists those steps and shows you where to refer to in
this guide for detailed information.
Basic steps for creating a measurement
plan
Refer to this section for details
Step 1: Open the new measurement plan and name

it.
How to create a new measurement plan

on page 4-4
Step 2: Satisfy the prerequisites for measurement.
List of the prerequisites on page 4-12
Step 3: Define the part's features that you want to

measure.
Defining features on page 5-2
Step 4: Define the characteristics for which these

features are to be checked for compliance.
Defining characteristics on page 6-1
Step 5: Run your measurement plan.
Defining the scope of measurement on

page 8-2
To define the features and characteristics for a measurement plan,

secure the workpiece to the measuring table of the CMM and probe
its features. Calypso recognizes the features automatically, but you
also have the convenient option of changing the default nominals
and tolerance values proposed by Calypso in accordance with the
specifications.
Note that although it may be the most common way to first define
features (step 3) and then define characteristics (step 4), Calypso does
not restrict you to this order. You can also lay out the sequence of
characteristics first and then begin defining features and associating
them to characteristics.
Once you have created a measurement plan, you can run it to
evaluate the defined characteristics on a specified part automatically
(CNC). You can also edit the measurement plan and add
characteristics and features or change the order in which they are
evaluated.
4-2
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
NOTE
hss
Another way to create measurement plans is to use the DMIS Import

option. If you have purchased this option, you can import runs
programmed in DMIS into Calypso and thereby convert them to a
regular Calypso measurement plan (see Chapter 13 DMIS import
(option) on page 13-1).
Evaluations
Calypso creates evaluations for each measurement plan. You can also
combine two or more measurement plans and create combined
assessments (Combining several measurement plans on
page 7-16). The measurement plans you combine in this way need
not necessarily be on the CMM they can be created and run on
CMMs at different points in the network.
Measurement plans in
the file system
Each measurement plan is saved in a directory of its own in the

Calypso file system; the directory bears the name of the measurement
plan. The measurement plans themselves all have the same name,
inspection. Thus, the path to the measurement plan, for example, is
called cylinder block 1: ...\calypso\home\om\workarea\cylinder
block 1\inspection.
Names in the
measurement plans
By default, Calypso assigns fixed names to the features, characteristics

and utilities that are inserted in the measurement plan, that
correspond to the language set. To avoid redundancy, a sequence
number is attached to every name. The names given in this manner
can still be changed afterwards.
Should you desire generally to have other name definitions, you may
write these name definitions in a corresponding file and load this file
into Calypso (How to load a file with default names on page 4-5).
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-3
How to create a new measurement plan

The procedure for creating a measurement plan is as follows:
1 Start Calypso (see How to start Calypso on page 1-3).
2 Select File New or click on the Open new Measurement Plan
button.
The Open new Measurement Plan window appears on the
screen.
3 Enter a name.
Important
Do not use control characters, umlauts or the German letter ,
even if these characters are supported by Windows NT or Windows
2000. Characters such as umlauts can cause problems when the
measured results are saved for qs-STAT, for example.
NOTE
Calypso uses only lowercase letters when it saves files to the hard
disk. Bear this in mind, because it means that Calypso does not
distinguish between names of measurement plans that differ only in
the use of uppercase and lowercase letters.
hss
hss
4 Click on OK to confirm.
The Calypso user desk appears on the screen. The title bar contains
the name of the new measurement plan.
How to open an existing measurement plan

Once it has been saved, a measurement plan can be opened at any
time and you can edit or run it.
1 Start Calypso (see How to start Calypso on page 1-3).
4-4
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2 Select File Open or click on the Open Existing Measurement

Plan button.
NOTE
hss
In the File menu, the four measurement plans last opened are
displayed. Selecting File <Measurement Plan> opens such a
measurement plan.
3 Go to the directory containing the measurement plan you want to
open (the name of the directory is the same as that of the
measurement plan).
4 Click on inspection and then click on OK to confirm.
The Calypso user desk appears on the screen. The title bar contains
the name of the measurement plan.
How to load a file with default names

Default names can be set for features, characteristics, some utilities,
as well for form and position plots, and then be stored in a text file.
This text file can be assigned to a newly generated measurement plan
that then utilizes the individual default names.
Depending on the need, more than one text file can be created with
diverse default names.
NOTE
hss
When a file with default names is loaded in which not all possible
default names are defined, only those names contained in the file
replace the names already defined.
To load a file with default names:
1 Select Extras Workroom Environment.
The Start page is shown at the top in the notebook. The title
shows the name of the user.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-5
2 Click on the Default Name bookmark.

The notebook page is displayed for selecting the file with the
default names.
3 Click on the Select file button.
The Select file with default name window is opened.
4 Change over to the directory in which the file with the default
names is located.
5 Select the file with the default names and click on Open.
The default names contained in the file are now valid.
If the file with the default names does not correspond to the
prescribed Format, an error message is generated.
Format of the file with default names (reference)

Calypso accepts any ASCII text file as a file with default names that
has the form indicated below.
Structure of the file
A file with default names consists of several similarly structured lines.

Each line is composed of eight entries that are each separated by a
tab.
Header line
The first line of the file, the header line, contains the following entries
(divided by a tab):
Symbol
Name lines
Comment Name1
Name2
Name3
Name4
Name5
IndexColumn
The lines with the default names follow thereafter. A separate line is
created for each element type that is supposed to receive an
individual default name.
A default name can be composed of up to five partial names from
which Calypso compiles the name. One of the partial names must
contain the start value for the sequential index. Which partial name
that is, is defined extra for each line in the IndexColumn (column 8)
by input of the column number.
An example should illustrate this:
Symbol
Comment
Name1
Name2
Circle
Bore hole Table_ Bore_
line2d
Edge
Table_ Edge_
Name3
Name4
Name5
IndexColumn
In this example, all features of the Circle type receive the names
Table_Bore_x where x is assigned a sequential number beginning
with 1.
4-6
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
The columns have the following meanings:

Column
Meaning
Symbol
The internal name used by Calypso for the corresponding feature,

e.g., circle for the circle feature.
An overview of all the internal names can be found in the online
Help by calling up this section.
Comment
Any comment that, for example, explains the allocation of a feature

to the default name.
Name1
Partial names out of which the default name is composed.

One of these columns must contain the start value for the index.
...
Name5
IndexColumn
The number of the column that contains the start value for the
index. The value range from 3 (Name1) to 7 (Name5) because the
Symbol and Comment columns are also counted. In the
example above, the index number is in the Name3 column for
which reason 5 is entered under IndexColumn.
When the first character in the specified column is not a number, the
start value 0 is used.
If still other characters follow in the specified column of a number,
they will be ignored.
Example: 42_Circle_2 designates 42 as start value, Circle
designates 0 as start value.
File with default name: Internal feature names

Individual default names can be defined for the following features of
the measurement plan:
Feature name
Internal name
2-D Line
line2d
Curve
d2Curve
3D Best Fit
bestfit3d
3-D Line
line3d
3D Curve
d3Curve
Length Of Axis
lengthOfAxis
General curve
gCurve
General surface
gSurf
Width
width
Flatness
gdtFlat
DIN Flatness
gdtFlatRef
GDT Profile
gdtProfile
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-7
4-8
Feature name
Internal name
Straightness
gdtStraightCart
Coaxiality
gdtCoa
Concentricity
gdtCon
Angularity
gdtAngle
Parallelism
gdtPar
Axial Runout
gdtRunFlat
True Position
gdtPosPol2d
Perpendicularity
gdtPerp
Roundness
gdtRound
Radial Runout
gdtRunRound
GDT Symmetry
gdtSym
Cylindricity
gdtCyl
Distance
distance2d
Cartesian Distance
distanceCart
2-D Polar Distance
distancePol2d
3-D Polar Distance
distancePol3d
Distance Symmetry Point
distance
Rotation Angle
rotationAngle
Diameter
diameter
Diameter Two
diameter2id
Plane
plane
Plane
planeOffset
Feature Angle
elementAngle
Ellipse
ellipse
Elliptical Cylinder
ellipticalCylinder
Erosion Module
erodingModule
Form
form
Gear
gear
Group
setOfTasks
Half Cone Angle
apexAngleHalf
Holos
holos
Cone
cone
Cone Angle
apexAngle
Cone Addition
coneAddition
Angle Of Inclination
inclinationAngle
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Feature name
Internal name
Alignment
coordsys
Load Alignment
recallPCS
Delete Alignment
deletePCS
Save Alignment
savePCS
Circle
circle
Circle on Cone
circleOnCone
Circle in contour best fit
circleInContour
Sphere
sphere
Sphere Point
spherePoint
Curve Form
ESCurveCurveForm
Length
len
Slot
slot
Gage Correction Qualification
gaugeCalibration
Perpendicular
perp
Maximum
maximum
Maximum Point
maxPoint
Minimum
minimum
Minimum Point
minPoint
Average
average
Average
averageGeo
Offset Plane
offsetPlane
P6 Alignment
p6Alignment
Polarposition Height
coordPolHeight
Polarposition Radius
coordPolRadius
Polarposition Angle
coordPolAngle
Projection
projection
Projection Angle One
a1id
Projection Angle Two
a2id
Point
point
Space Point Distance
gdtSpacePoint
Radius Measurement
radiusMeasurement
Radius
radius
Radius Two
radius2id
Radius Point
radiusPoint
Rectangle
rectangle
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-9
Feature name
Internal name
RPS Alignment
rpsAlignment
Intersection
intersection
Symmetry
symmetry
Symmetry Point
symmetryPoint
Stylus Qualification
probeCalib
Text element
textelement
Torus
torus
Turbine Blade
CurveBlade
Edge Point
edgePoint
Angle between Features
anglebF
Angle Point
anglePoint
X Value
xValue
Y Value
yValue
Z Value
zValue
Cylinder
cylinder
How to create and edit a file with default names

The file with the default names must be stored as an ASCII text file. It
can be created and edited with a common text editor such as
Notepad.
If you wish to create and edit the file with the default names in Excel,
proceed as follows:
To create a file with default names:
1 Enter the header line along with the lines with the default names
in Excel.
4-10
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2 Save the file in the Text (separated tabs) format:
3 Confirm the displayed dialog box that follows in Excel with OK and
Yes.
To edit the file with the default names:
1 Load the desired file with the default names into Excel and select
Text Files as file type.
2 Accept the defaults in the subsequently displayed Text
conversion assistant dialog box with Complete.
3 Edit the file in Excel.
4 After editing, save the file again in the Text (separated tabs)
format.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-11
List of the prerequisites

The list of prerequisites appears when you open a new measurement
plan or click on the Prerequisites button.
This list contains all the settings you should configure before you
create a measurement plan or run a workpiece measurement.
The prerequisites are described in the following sections:

CMM Home Position or Status: This button indicates the status
of the CMM and the connection between CMM and Calypso. If
the CMM has not yet been initialized and homed, the button is red
(see Homing the CMM on page 4-15).
Stylus System: By means of this button, the stylus system
installed at the moment is qualified (see Installing and
qualifying stylus systems on page 4-17).
Base / Start Alignment: By means of this button, the part
alignment allocated to the measurement plan is defined (see
Setting the base / start alignment on page 4-46).
Rotary Table (RT): Click on this button to activate a rotary table
for the current measurement plan and to define the settings for
4-12
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
List of the prerequisites
rotary table operation (see Prerequisites for the rotary table on

page 4-81).
Clearance Planes: Click this button to define a clearance zone
around the workpiece for CMM movements. This is required only
for CMMs with CNC capability (see Defining the clearance
planes on page 4-113).
Measurement Plan Settings: Click on this button to check and
edit the settings for the result logs (see Editing measurement
plan settings on page 4-120).
Measurement Plan Editor Features: Click on this button to
open the measurement Plan Editor Features (see Editing the
measurement plan on page 4-122).
Temperature Compensation: Click on this button to have
Calypso include the temperature of the workpiece and the X, Y
and Z scales of the CMM in the calculations (see Temperature
compensation on page 4-123).
The buttons in the list of prerequisites are color-coded to indicate their
status:
Red: This prerequisite must be completed before you can continue
with creating the measurement plan. Manual measurements,
however, can be performed.
Yellow: This prerequisite has not been completed as yet. However,
you can proceed with creating the measurement plan (the system
will use default settings).
Green: The prerequisite is concluded.
The Measurement Plan Prerequisites button itself is also colorcoded to reflect the combined status of the individual prerequisites
buttons:
Red: One or more buttons are red. You must complete the
prerequisites in question before you can run the measurement
plan. Manual measurements, however, can be performed.
Yellow: One or more buttons are yellow. You can still work,
however.
Green: All prerequisites are completed.
If you are performing measurements manually (for example, doing a
quick measurement of the diameter of a cylinder), you can proceed
even if not all of the prerequisites have been satisfied.
It is true that the CMM needs to be homed and the currently installed
stylus system must be properly qualified; but, on the other hand, you
will not yet need to satisfy the other prerequisites:
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-13
You do not have to define clearance planes unless you want to run
measurement plans automatically with Calypso.
Whether or not you include the measurement plan settings and
temperature compensation depends on the intended application.
4-14
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Homing the CMM
Homing the CMM

When you first power up the CMM, a machine zero position or home
position must be established. This home position is usually the upper
rear left corner of the measuring range when viewed from the
operator's normal position. Typically, the CMM automatically homes
itself to this position upon startup.
The button for the CMM home position in the list of prerequisites
indicates whether the CMM has been homed and whether the
connection between CMM and Calypso has been established:
Green: The CMM has already been homed and initialized and
there is a proper connection between Calypso and the CMM. This
prerequisite has been completed.
Red: You must initialize or restart the connection between the
CMM and Calypso or home the CMM.
After homing the CMM

Position of the
reference sphere
Whenever the CMM is homed, you should also redefine the position
of the reference sphere.
Even if the reference sphere was not moved, homing might have
resulted in a shift of a few micrometers in the machine coordinate
system. This shift could result in an error of similar magnitude in
measurements with different stylus systems.
You can dispense with redefining the position of the reference sphere
only when you merely install a new stylus and you are certain that this
stylus will not be used in conjunction with styli qualified beforehand.
(For further details see Qualifying the reference sphere on
page 4-40.)
Rotary table axis
If you use a rotary table: You must redefine the rotary table axis after
the CMM has been homed. (For further details see Prerequisites
for the rotary table on page 4-81.)
How to establish the connection to the CMM

You have to set up a connection to the controller before you can work
with the CMM.
!
hss
Important for SP600

When you install an SP600, you must be careful that the stylus does
not touch the workpiece nor come to rest anywhere. The weight of
the SP600 itself would, in this case, be determined incorrectly.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-15
The procedure for connecting to the CMM is as follows:

1 Select Extras Workroom CMM.
2 Click on the Connect button.
3 Click on OK.
This closes the CMM notebook.
How to move the CMM to the home position

This home position is usually the upper rear left corner of the
measuring range when viewed from the operator's normal position.
Follow these steps to home the CMM:
1 Click on the CMM Home Position or Status button.
If a valid home position exists, the CMM does not move to it again.
If the CMM has not been homed since switch-on, the system
prompts you to move the stylus to a clear position.
2 If necessary, use the joysticks to move the CMM stylus to a position
higher than the highest obstruction on the table to avoid collisions.
3 Click on OK.
The CMM moves to the home position. The CMM Home Position or
Status button should now be green.
4-16
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Installing and qualifying stylus systems

When setting up a measurement plan, you must always make certain
that you have installed and qualified the correct stylus system. In
qualifying a stylus, you indicate which stylus you are using and then
initiate a routine in which the stylus measures the reference sphere.
In case the Stylus button is green, this has already been carried out
for the stylus system displayed.
When qualifying the stylus, observe the following:
Always define and qualify stylus systems and styli within a
measurement plan. Once you have defined a stylus system and
qualified its styli, it will then be available in all other measurement
plans.
The stylus system that you use to set up a measurement plan must
be the same one that you use each time you run the measurement
plan. Calypso saves the stylus system that you used and detects a
mismatch if you try to run the plan with a different stylus system.
NOTE
hss
If the original stylus system can no longer be used, but you have a
stylus system with exactly the same configuration, select Resources
Define the stylus system for the current measurement plan
to select the suitable stylus system.
In the list of the prerequisites, the name of the stylus system is
displayed that was most recently used for measuring. When
opening an existing measurement plan, it may be that the stylus
system required for this measurement plan does not coincide with
the one currently installed. To see which stylus system is required,
choose Resources Define the stylus system for this
measurement plan. A window opens in which the name is given
of the required stylus system.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-17
How to install a stylus system

To install a stylus system:
1 Select Resources Manual Stylus System Change.
The Manual stylus system change stoplight name window is
opened.
2 When you want to install an SP600 and change the stylus system
(SP600 plate): Remove the stylus system manually from the SP600
and proceed with step 5.
3 When you want to install an SP600 and change the probe (RDS
plate), as well as in all other cases: Click on downward-pointing
red arrow in the left half of the dialog box.
The message appears on the screen: Stylus system will be
released in 5 secs.
4 Click on OK and carefully grip the stylus system that is about to be

ejected.
After a five-second countdown, the CMM ejects the stylus system.
If a trigger probe is involved, you need to deviate the stylus system
slightly to be able to remove it from the holder.
4-18
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Important
Measuring probes are ejected fully automatically, i.e. you must be
holding the stylus system in your hand at this time.
hss
5 Click on the red Up arrow on the right-hand side of the window.

The Insert stylus? prompt appears on the screen.
Do not click OK at this time.
6 Install the new stylus system. Make sure the notch in the adapter
plate is aligned with the pin on the underside of the probe.
7 Click on OK.
There is an audible sound when the electromagnet engages with
the stylus system. If you do not hear anything, gently move the
stylus system to assure a proper seat.
A popup menu appears listing available, already defined stylus
system names.
8 Click on New or select the appropriate name, if the stylus system
has already been defined and qualified.
If you have just installed a master stylus, select Master Stylus (not
for HAMs = Horizontal-Arm Machines, where the first stylus
position is taken as the reference).
9 If you have selected New, enter a name for the stylus system in the
Create New Stylus window.
10 Click on OK to close the Manual Stylus System Change
window.
The Calypso user desk will be displayed again.
If you install a stylus system that has already been qualified, the name
of the stylus system appears in the list of prerequisites alongside the
Stylus System button. If this is not the case, the stylus system must
be qualified again.
Stylus system change for TP20 or TP200

Automatic stylus
system change
The TP20 from Renishaw is designed for automatic stylus system

changes with the MCR20 stylus system changer module, and the
same is true of the TP200 with the SCR200 module (see Renishaw
MCR20 stylus system changer on page 7-44 and SCR200 stylus
system changer on page 7-45).
On a VISTA, the TP200 can be secured in the ram with a PH6. On an
Eclipse, the TP200 can be secured in the ram with a PH10.
Manual stylus system

change
Bear in mind that you can also change styli manually on the TP20 and
the TP200 (see the user data on the TP20 / TP200 and RDS).
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-19
!
hss
Caution: risk of damage!

When you change stylus systems manually without the measuring
system, the retaining solenoid is deenergized immediately. In order to
avoid damage, you must be holding the stylus system in your hand at
this time.
If there is no measuring system in the TP20 and you are preparing to
change the stylus system on the RDS plate manually, remember that
the retaining solenoid for the RDS plate will be deenergized
immediately, because the switch contact is open. There is a
consequent risk of the RDS plate dropping out and suffering damage.
Further stylus system changers

The Renishaw SP600 is intended for automatic stylus system change
in connection with the stylus system changer module SCP600.
The stylus system changer ACR3 is intended for the PH10 stylus
system with autojoint interface.
Editing stylus systems and styli

In Calypso, each stylus system and stylus is given its own unique
name. Styli are also assigned numbers. Calypso uses these names and
numbers to identify the stylus systems and styli and saves their data.
This means that each stylus system and each stylus has to be defined
in Calypso first (see How to define a new stylus system on
page 4-21).
Not until you have defined the stylus can you proceed to qualify it.
You can qualify these styli manually just as for other styli (see How
to qualify a stylus manually on page 4-29).
Styli of an RDS
When you use an RDS, the CMM can probe the workpiece from a
large number of different directions by adjusting the A and B angles.
Every RDS setting that you want to use for probing is considered to be
its own stylus and must be qualified separately (exception: you have
the RDS-CAA option installed, see Chapter 17 Qualifying the RDS
with CAA (option) on page 17-1).
Another possibility is to create a list with the angle settings for the
probe, which defines the styli at the same time. During qualification,
the CMM recognizes the styli in question, and you do not have to
qualify these manually. You can learn how to create this list at How
to create a stylus list for RDS on page 4-25.
Afterwards, you begin the qualification of the stylus system via the
Automatic qualification icon.
4-20
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to define a new stylus system

Before you can qualify a new stylus system, you have to tell Calypso
the name of the stylus system in question and what styli this stylus
system has.
To define a stylus system:
1 Click on the Stylus System button in the list of prerequisites.
The Stylus system qualification window appears on the screen.
2 Click on the Insert new stylus system button.

The Create new stylus system dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Enter the names for the new stylus system and the first stylus.
Internally, Calypso does not distinguish between upper and lower
case characters.
4 Click on OK to close the window.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-21
The names of the stylus system and the stylus are displayed in the
Stylus System and Stylus Name / No. selection lists.
If the stylus system has other styli, you now have to add them in
Calypso (see How to add further styli to a stylus system on
page 4-22).
How to add further styli to a stylus system

If a stylus system has more than one stylus, Calypso must be informed
of the other styli. After defining a new stylus system or modifying an
existing stylus system, therefore, you must add the additional styli, if
any, and qualify them.
To add further styli:
2 Click on the Insert new stylus button.
The Create New Stylus dialog box appears on the screen.
If you are adding a stylus to a stylus system defined beforehand,

the Stylus No. box automatically shows the new number in the
sequence.
3 Enter a name for the new stylus in the Stylus field.
case characters.
4 In the Stylus No. field select the number of the stylus.
The name of the stylus will now appear in the Stylus Name / No.
selection list.
6 If you wish to add another stylus, repeat steps 2 through 5.
You now have to qualify each new stylus (see How to qualify a
stylus manually on page 4-29).
How to rename a stylus

You can change the name of a stylus whenever you want, but you
cannot change the number. You might find it necessary to change a
name when you add new styli to a stylus system, for example.
4-22
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
To rename a stylus:
2 Select the stylus whose name you want to change from the Stylus
Name / No. selection list.
3 Click on the Rename Stylus button.
The Rename Stylus dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Enter a new name for the stylus.

case characters.
As you can see from the Stylus Name / No. list, the stylus has been
renamed. It is not necessary to requalify a stylus after renaming it.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-23
How to enter the data of the master stylus

If you use an RDS, DSE or PH9/10 on your CMM, you must enter the
dimensions and the installation position of the master stylus in the
system setup.
To enter the data of the master stylus:
1 Select Extras Workroom CMM Master Stylus.
This takes you to the Master Stylus tab.
2 Enter the allocation of the sensor system to the machine system

and the dimensions (length) of the master stylus:
Type
RDS
DSE
CMM
Arm 1
Arm 2 /
Individ.
Bridge
Arm 1
XS=
0 /
XM
0 / XM
0 /
0 /
55 / ZM
55 / ZM
55 / YM
135 / YM
135 / ZM
YS=
ZS=
135 /
YM
XM
4-24
61212-2010602
XM
0 / XM
73 / ZM
73 / ZM
155 /
These dimensions are valid for:
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Arm2 / Indiv.
YM
155 / YM
RST stylus system with a stylus length of 40 mm and a stylus

diameter of 3 mm
TP6 stylus system with a 20 mm extension, a stylus length of
28 mm and a stylus diameter of 3 mm.
3 Open the Control tab and click on Connect.
This activates your settings.
How to create a stylus list for RDS

To automatically generate and qualify the styli that correspond to the
various angle settings of an RDS, you can create a list that contains
the angle settings you are using. Each list is saved as a file and
corresponds to a stylus system.
Prerequisite
You have already specified the dimensions and installation position of

the master stylus (How to enter the data of the master stylus on
page 4-24).
To create a stylus list for an RDS:
2 In the upper toolbar, click on the Stylus System Management

button.
The Stylus System Management dialog will open.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-25
3 Click on the Catalog tab to bring the tabbed page with the
catalog to the front, and select the Create list menu item in the
Edit menu (lower right) .
The Create list window will open.
4 Enter the data for your stylus system, for the master stylus and for
the reference sphere.
For more information, see Create list in the Calypso Online Help.
Calypso takes the data for the reference sphere (radius, shaft
direction, shaft radius) from the Reference sphere notebook
(Reference Sphere Management button in the qualification
window).
5 Enter a name for the stylus system.
!
hss
4-26
Important
Never use the name of the currently active stylus system.
6 In the Stylus list, enter the stylus name and the corresponding
positions of the RDS (A and B angles in degrees):
You can insert rows and delete individual rows or the whole table
with the context menu. We recommend using stylus names that
contain the angular positions that helps you later choose the
correct stylus.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
!
hss
Important
Avoid RDS angle positions in which stylus shaft directions are close to
the shaft direction of the reference sphere, as there is a relatively high
risk of shaft probing in this case.
7 Click on the Save button.
The data you entered is saved in an ASCII file and a new stylus
system is created in the stylus catalog. Each row of the stylus list
creates a separate stylus.
The data path and name are assigned by default and can be
changed.
8 Close the Stylus System Management dialog.
In the Stylus system qualification window, you can now click on
the CNC Probing system qualification icon to begin qualifing the
RDS positions.
How to edit a stylus list for RDS

You can load a stylus list whenever you want and make changes in it.
The procedure for editing a stylus list is as follows:
button.
The Stylus System Management window opens.
3 Click on the Catalog tab to bring the tabbed page with the
catalog to the front, and select the Create list menu item in the
Edit menu (lower right) .
The Create list dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Click the Load button and select the file where the stylus system in
question is saved.
5 Overwrite the data to be changed.
6 Click on the Save button.
A query then appears to confirm that you really want to save the
changed file; any existing data is overwritten.
NOTE
hss
To make the modified data available, however, the stylus system must
be selected again.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-27
Qualifying the styli

A stylus must be qualified:
If you have installed a new stylus system that has not been
qualified.
If you want to requalify a stylus system, e.g., after a collision or due
to thermal changes.
On an RDS, you can automatically qualify all the angular positions of
the RDS in a single process, if you have installed the RDS-CAA
(Computer Aided Accuracy) option (see Qualifying the RDS with
CAA (option) on page 17-1).
Before you qualify styli, make sure that you have opened a
measurement plan and that Calypso knows the position of the
reference sphere (see Qualifying the reference sphere on
page 4-40).
You qualify styli in the Stylus system qualification window:
The first qualification of a stylus must be done manually.

Once the stylus has been qualified for the first time, future
qualifications can be done automatically. Using this function,
however, you can only qualify the stylus system that is currently
located in the probe.
4-28
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to qualify a stylus manually

To qualify a stylus, instruct Calypso to use this stylus to probe the
reference sphere, mounted on the measuring table, in a specific
manner (which will be explained in greater detail later).
Follow these steps to qualify a stylus manually:
2 If it is not already displayed, select the name of the stylus system
from the Stylus Systems selection list.
3 Select the name of the stylus you want to qualify from the Stylus
4 Under Geometry, select the form or function of the stylus tip
(Sphere is the standard setting).
Select Temperature stylus to qualify a temperature stylus and
Cylinder to qualify a cylindrical stylus.
5 Select the qualification mode from the Mode list:
Select Tensor if you wish to use the stylus later for scanning or
for discrete-point measurements with high precision
requirements (available only on systems such as HSS and VAST).
Select Six Points if you want to qualify the stylus by the
automatic default method.
Select Manual if, by preference or necessity, you are going to
qualify the stylus manually.
For example, you would select this mode to qualify a
temperature stylus or for the first qualification of a
cylindrical stylus (a cylindrical stylus can also be subsequently
requalified, even during the CNC run).
NOTE
hss
If the styli you use are very short, reduce the value for Taper Angle
accordingly. The smaller the taper angle, the smaller is the section of
the surface of the reference sphere which is probed for qualification.
6 Click on the Qualify Stylus button.
7 If you want to perform stylus qualification in the Tensor
qualification mode, enter the measuring force in mN that you want
to use subsequently with the stylus.
If you want to use a particularly long and thin stylus or if the
material to be probed is soft, enter a value for dynamic probing in
%.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-29
NOTE
hss
This information is stored with the stylus data and can be viewed in
the Measurement Plan Editor Features and overwritten for
individual features.
8 If you perform the qualification in the Tensor or Six Points mode:
When prompted, position the stylus over the north pole of the
reference sphere and probe it in the direction of the shank. (If your
stylus is vertical, therefore, position it over the north pole of the
sphere and probe once vertically downwards).
9 If you perform the qualification in Manual mode:
After prompting, probe at first a single point in the shaft
direction.
Manually create the probing points and return points (retract
points) in the desired order.
These points are assigned to the respective stylus.
NOTE
hss
When qualifying a cylindrical stylus, the first three points on the

cylindrical stylus must lie in a circle while the next three points need to
lie in a circle that is offset with respect to the first circle. After that,
you can make any probings that you wish.
5
4
6
3
The number of probing and support points is displayed in the

Qualify Stylus window. With Delete, you can remove the points
backwards one after the other.
If you do not set a return point after the last probing point, a
retraction will be set automatically during the CNC run later.
If the sum of the projection angles is greater than 15 degrees, a
dialog box automatically appears during the run. You can change
the angles and confirm the change with OK in this dialog box. This
allows you to adjust the values, so that the shaft direction of the
stylus is as close to perpendicular as possible with respect to the
4-30
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
calculated equatorial plane of the reference sphere and shaft

probings are avoided.
Calypso qualifies the stylus according to the mode selected. The
results are shown in the R, S, X, Y, and Z fields (see About the
results of stylus qualification on page 4-39).
10 If you wish to qualify another stylus, repeat steps 2 through 9.
11 Click on OK to return to the user desk.
The styli are now qualified and the color of the Stylus System button
is green. The qualified stylus system can now be used by all Calypso
users.
How to qualify a stylus automatically

You can program Calypso to automatically requalify the stylus of a
stylus system already qualified.
Follow these steps to qualify a stylus automatically:
from the Stylus Systems selection list.
4 Under Geometry, select the form or function of the stylus tip
(Sphere is the standard setting).
Select Temperature Stylus to qualify a temperature stylus and
Cylinder to qualify a cylindrical stylus.
5 Select the qualification mode from the Mode list:
Select Tensor if you wish to use the stylus later for scanning or
for discrete-point measurements with high precision
requirements (available only on systems such as HSS and VAST).
Select Six Points if you want to qualify the stylus by the
automatic default method.
NOTE
hss
If the styli you use are very short, reduce the value for Taper Angle
accordingly. The smaller the taper angle, the smaller is the section of
the surface of the reference sphere which is probed for qualification.
6 Click in the window on the CNC Probing system qualification
button.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-31
7 If you want to perform stylus qualification in the Tensor

qualification mode, enter the measuring force in mN that you want
to use subsequently with the stylus.
%.
NOTE
hss
8 If you perform the qualification in the Tensor or Six Points mode:
When prompted, position the stylus over the north pole of the
reference sphere and probe it in the direction of the shank. (If your
stylus is vertical, therefore, position it over the north pole of the
sphere and probe once vertically downwards).
9 If you perform the qualification in Manual mode:
After prompting, probe at first a single point in the shaft
direction.
Manually create the probing points and return points (retract
points) in the desired order.
These points are assigned to the respective stylus.
NOTE
hss
4-32
When qualifying a cylindrical stylus, the first three points on the

cylindrical stylus must lie in a circle while the next three points need to
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
lie in a circle that is offset with respect to the first circle. After that,
you can make any probings that you wish.
5
4
6
3
The number of probing and support points is displayed in the

Qualify Stylus window. With Delete, you can remove the points
backwards one after the other.
If you do not set a return point after the last probing point, a
retraction will be set automatically during the CNC run later.
If the sum of the projection angles is greater than 15 degrees, a
dialog box automatically appears during the run. You can change
the angles and confirm the change with OK in this dialog box. This
allows you to adjust the values, so that the shaft direction of the
stylus is as close to perpendicular as possible with respect to the
calculated equatorial plane of the reference sphere and shaft
probings are avoided.
Calypso qualifies the stylus according to the mode selected. The
results are shown in the R, S, X, Y, and Z fields (see About the
results of stylus qualification on page 4-39).
10 If you wish to qualify another stylus, repeat steps 2 through 9.
The styli are now qualified and the color of the Stylus System button
is green. The qualified stylus system can now be used by all Calypso
users.
Selection of the qualification method

In the Stylus system qualification window, select under Mode the
purpose and method for stylus qualification.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-33
The following qualification methods are available (depending on the

available options):
Mode
Application
Procedure
Tensor
Determination of the (static)
tensor.
(standard for
measuring probes) The tensor indicates how the
stylus bends as a function of
the applied force.
A total of 30 probings are performed at 15

points on the sphere.
Each point is probed twice with different
forces each time. The static tensor is
determined from the differences between the
respective probings.
Dyn. tensor
(only with the
VAST Navigator
option)
Determination of the static

and the dynamic tensor.
As a complement to the static
tensor, the dynamic tensor
identifies the dynamic
behavior of the stylus (i.e.,
how the stylus bends as a
function of the scanning
speed).
Three great circles are measured on the

reference sphere once at very low speed
(5 mm/s) and once at very high speed
(50 mm/s) and ratio of the two results is
determined.
You can find more details under Dynamic
stylus qualification on page 21-7.
Note: The dynamic tensor can be determined
only if the static tensor is known. If the static
tensor has not been determined yet, the static
tensor and then the dynamic tensor will be
determined automatically.
Six Points
(standard for
trigger probes)
Initial determination of the

stylus geometry.
This is suitable for all probes
with spherical stylus tips
(except for passive styli).
It is unsuitable for very short
styli and special stylus systems
(e.g. angled configurations).
At first, four points are probed for position

determination, followed by six points for stylus
qualification.
Note: This qualification takes place in
clamped mode.
Important! For measuring probes, this mode is
needed only for special measuring jobs. Slight
accuracy reductions are possible!
Manual
Always in the case of manual

CMMs.
Otherwise, only if automatic
qualification is not possible
(e.g. due to the shaft
geometry).
Also suitable for qualification
of a temperature stylus or
for initial qualification of a
cylinder stylus.
You select the probing points yourself.

The first probing point serves to determine the
probing direction. The following probings are
used to calculate the stylus geometry (results
are thus possible as of the fifth probing).
4-34
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Mode
Application
Procedure
Dyn. Tensor
Repeat
Measurement:
(only with the
VAST Navigator
option)
Repeat measurement of the

dynamic tensor without
determination of the static
tensor.
The static tensor must have
been determined in advance.
This is suitable for dynamic
stylus qualification on the
virtual reference sphere
(Dynamic stylus
qualification on page 21-7).
You will be prompted to probe in the shaft

direction. The first four points are used to
calculate a sphere. Afterward, the dynamic
tensor is determined.
Tensor Repeat
Measurement
(only with the
VAST Navigator
option)

static tensor.
Calypso automatically requalifies the static

tensor and the stylus geometry.
Any existing dynamic tensor is retained.
Geometry Repeat Repeat measurement of the

Measurement:
stylus geometry if only this has
changed.
Any existing static and
dynamic tensor is retained.
This is in principle identical to the procedure

for the Six Points mode: At first, four points
are probed for position determination,
followed by six points for stylus qualification.
However, qualification takes place in the
unclamped mode (after all, there is a valid
tensor that is not deleted).
Manual Repeat
Measurement:

stylus geometry with manual
probings if automatic repeat
measurement is not possible.
This is in principle identical to the procedure

for the Manual mode:
However, qualification takes place in the
unclamped mode (after all, there is a valid
tensor that is not deleted).
Used, e.g., for disk styli.
Qualify passive
stylus
This is the only possibility to

qualify the stylus geometry for
passive measuring probes.
This is suitable for all styli with
spherical stylus tips.
At the beginning, the dead
weight offset (EGO) must be
determined that limits the
measuring range of the probe.
Read the user guide that is
provided.
Four points are first probed for position

determination, followed by the required
number of points for stylus qualification. The
dead weight offset (EGO) is determined by
means of the Probe in direction of the stylus
shaft prompt.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-35
Qualifying stylus system with measurement

plan
Purpose of the function
If you want to qualify one or more stylus systems, you can accomplish
this in the CNC run by means of measurement plans specially
conceived for this. During this procedure, you may also use several
reference spheres (real or virtual) and carry out rapid repeat
measurements.
Using several
measurement plans
differently
This can be explained by the following example: All styli are qualified
in the Tensor mode and should be qualified again once every shift
because of possible changes in temperature. In this case, it is not
necessary to carry out a complete tensor qualification every time. This
is because, even though the geometry of a stylus changes with the
temperature, the flexibility does not.
For regular qualification, therefore, you can define a measurement
plan in which all styli are qualified with only 6 points. Select
additionally the Geometry Repeat Measurement mode.
In an additional measurement plan, you can select the Tensor mode
for the same stylus system, thus making a complete qualification.
Virtual reference
sphere
If using a virtual reference sphere (VAST Navigator option), it could be

helpful to divide the stylus system qualification into several
characteristics.
In one characteristic, define the geometry specification (tensor,
repeat measurement geometry) for all styli as well as the dynamic
qualification for those styli that can be qualified on the real
reference sphere.
Then define in further characteristics the dynamic repeat
measurement on virtual reference spheres.
Prerequisites
The following preconditions must be met before you can run the
desired measurement plan:
The positions of the needed reference spheres must be measured
with the master stylus.
Virtual positions that may be needed, must be created by being
copied in the Reference Sphere Management.
All required styli must have been qualified in the desired mode.
How to create a measurement plan for automatic

qualification
The preconditions listed below must be satisfied before you can
create a measurement plan:
The positions of all needed reference spheres must be measured
4-36
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Should virtual positions of reference spheres be needed, they must

be created by being copied in the Reference Sphere
Management.
All required styli must have already been qualified in the desired
mode.
NOTE
hss
Try to gather all the geometry data on one single reference sphere.
Use the second reference sphere or the virtual reference spheres for
the dynamic repeat measurement.
To create the measurement plan for the automatic qualification:
1 Select File New and enter in the Create new Measurement
Plan window a name for the measurement plan, e.g., Stylus
qualification.
2 Select Resources Utilities Stylus System Qualification.
A new Stylus System Qualification characteristic is created.
3 Create in the same way further Stylus System Qualification
characteristics, one for every reference sphere and for every stylus
system to be qualified (exception: master stylus).
In the CNC run, the position of reference sphere 1 is first measured
4 Open the first characteristic.
You see the data of the currently used stylus system. In the list on
the left, all available (qualified) styli of this stylus system, the
current qualification status as well as the respective reference
sphere are displayed.
On the right side, the styli that are to be qualified with this
characteristic are displayed with mode and reference sphere.
5 Select under Stylus System the Master Stylus entry.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-37
6 Highlight the stylus in the list on the right.

7 Select the mode with which the position of the reference sphere
should be determined under Mode.
Here, you can also set Geometry Repeat Measurement. The
position is measured using only 6 points, not clamped, however.
8 Select the position number of the reference sphere that is
supposed to be qualified with this feature under Reference
Sphere.
9 Give the characteristic the name Reference sphere 1 and
confirm the input with OK.
10 Edit, as in steps 4 through 9, the characteristics for all further (real)
reference spheres.
11 Define the characteristics for the qualification of the various stylus

systems.
Define using Add and Delete which styli should be qualified
with the respective characteristic.
Example: Only styli 2 and 4 of a star stylus should be qualified.
In this case, mark stylus 1, 3 and 5 and click on Delete.
For the marked stylus or styli, set the desired qualification mode
for this characteristic under Mode.
12 Select File Save to save the measurement plan.
How to run the measurement plan for qualification

NOTE
hss
4-38
If the measurement plan contains exclusively characteristics for stylus

qualification, you need not define any base alignment or clearance
plane.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
!
hss
Important
If you have changed the stylus name subsequently after creation of
the measurement plan, Calypso does not find these styli and skips
them during qualification.
In this case, you will have to transfer the respective stylus in the
corresponding characteristic from the Stylus Systems Available list
on the left back to the Selected styli list on the right.
To run the measurement plan for qualifying the stylus systems:
1 Click on the Run Measurement Plan button.
2 Select in the Start Measurement window, under Selection, the
Current Alignment, and, under Navigate-Feature To Feature,
the Use Position Points Only entry.
3 Start the measurement plan with OK.
Calypso carries out the qualification as defined in the
characteristics.
NOTE
hss
If using more than one (real) reference sphere, Calypso, when

changing to another reference sphere, always travels first in +Z to the
end of the measuring range, then to the next reference sphere in X
and Y.
Afterward, the stylus systems are qualified and you may proceed with
the desired measurement plan for measuring the workpiece.
About the results of stylus qualification

There is no correct answer for how good the standard deviation of a
stylus qualification should be. Acceptable deviation depends on many
factors: the resolution and accuracy of the CMM, the length and
rigidity of the stylus, the quality of the stylus system, the quality of the
stylus tip, and the cleanliness of the environment, among other
things. The normal standard deviation should lie in the range of a few
micrometers, however.
In order to decide whether the qualification result is acceptable,
further factors have to be taken into account (among other things,
the size of the tolerances to be determined with the stylus if the
tolerance values are accordingly large, even standard deviations of
0.005 mm can be acceptable).
You can, however, use the standard deviation as a basis for your
decision.
If in doubt, check the stylus system construction for stability and
correct assembly in accordance with the stylus system documents.
You can also clean the stylus and the reference sphere and repeat
qualification, aiming at better results.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-39
If the results are stable, it probably means that you have reached the
limit based on all of the factors mentioned above. In this case, you
can regroup the stylus system and possibly increase the rigidity
thereby. Qualification with a short, rigid stylus (e.g. the master stylus)
can determine possible systematic errors of the CMM.
Qualifying the reference sphere

The reference sphere of the CMM is a sphere of known diameter on a
metal extension, known as the stem, mounted on the measuring
table. Calypso must know the exact position of this reference sphere
for orientation and in order to analyze the qualification measurements
correctly.
You must use a master stylus for this qualification. Generally, this
master stylus is particularly identified by a red dot. The master stylus
for measuring and trigger probes is a vertical 8 mm stylus of known
length, having a ruby (tip) of known diameter. It is important to use a
defined angular setting for Renishaw probing systems and RDS.
!
hss
Prerequisites
Important
Never use the master stylus for a normal measurement during
operation.
The preconditions that have to be satisfied before you can start
qualifying the reference sphere are as follows:
You have opened a measurement plan.
The master stylus is installed.
The procedure for installing the master stylus is described in the
section entitled How to install a stylus system on page 4-18.
How to determine the position of the reference

sphere
You must always probe the reference sphere with the reference stylus
if the reference sphere was moved, if thermal conditions have
changed since the position was last determined or if the CMM was
moved to the home position.
4-40
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
To determine the position of the reference sphere:

2 Make sure that the radius of the reference sphere and the serial
number displayed on the screen match the radius and the serial
number on the qualification certificate of the reference sphere.
These values were entered by the Zeiss customer service engineer.
If they do not match the data on the certificate, proceed as
described in How to edit the data of the reference sphere on
page 4-42.
3 Make sure that the master stylus is displayed in the Stylus
Systems selection list.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-41
4 Click on the Reference Sphere Position button.

In case the master stylus has not been inserted, Calypso asks if you
really want to determine the position of the reference sphere.
If you click on No, the qualification process is discontinued.
If you click on Yes, Calypso will use the data of the currently used
stylus system.
Afterward, you are prompted to enter the orientation of the
reference sphere:
5 Select the Orientation of Reference Sphere by clicking on the

appropriate button to copy the values automatically into the input
fields.
The symbol buttons show the view of the reference sphere and the
shaft from above (from the Z+ direction) in such a way that the X
axis looks to the right and the Y axis is looking up.
You can also enter the values freely into the input fields.
6 Probe the reference sphere once in the stylus direction. You do this
by positioning the stylus over the north pole of the reference
sphere and by probing downwards.
Calypso automatically measures the reference sphere for CNCcompatible CMMs. The results are shown in the R, S, X, Y und Z
fields (see About the results of stylus qualification on
page 4-39).
7 Click on OK, to close the Stylus system qualification window.
The position of the reference sphere is now known to the system.
How to edit the data of the reference sphere

The reference sphere data is stored in the Reference Sphere
Management.
If the values of a reference sphere entered by the Zeiss customer
service engineer do not match the data on the certificate, you have
to change its settings.
If you use another reference sphere, you need to collect its data.
4-42
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
To edit the data of the reference sphere:

1 Click in the Stylus system qualification window on the
Reference Sphere Management button.
The Reference Sphere Management is opened with the data of
all reference spheres known in Calypso. The number of the
currently active reference sphere can be found behind Active
Reference Sphere.
2 To add an additional reference sphere: Select New in the menu on
the right.
An additional column is inserted in the list that initially copies over
the values from the previous column.
3 To edit the radius:
Highlight the field for the radius.
Click on the number in the gray input field at the bottom edge
of the dialog box.
Enter the number from the qualification certificate.
4 To change the serial number:
Highlight the field for the serial number.
Click on the number in the gray input field at the bottom edge
of the dialog box.
Correct the serial number.
5 If necessary, change the clearance planes to suit the type of
clamping device you are using (clearance planes for mount) and
the position of the stem.
The clearance distances define the clearance planes for qualifying
the stylus.
NOTE
hss
Minimum clearance planes are defined even when the clearances are
set to zero; the reference point is an imaginary point slightly outside
the reference sphere (depending on the axial direction), not the center
of the reference sphere.
6 Confirm your entries with OK.
The Stylus system qualification window reappears on the screen.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-43
How to print the stylus data list

You can print your current stylus data in the form of an overview. By
entering information in an initialization file, you can specify what is to
appear in the stylus data log.
To print the stylus data list:
button.
The Stylus System Management window opens. The Data page
is on top.
You may print all or only part of stylus data shown here.
3 Select in the Edit menu (lower right) the Print menu item.
The Stylus System Printout window is opened.
4 Click on the data in the list you wish to print.

5 Start printing with OK.
The selected stylus data is printed.
4-44
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Structure of the ini file for stylus printout

The probeProtocol.ini initialization file is located in the
...\Calypso\home\om\config\equip directory. It is a text file that can be
edited with a conventional editor.
The file is created automatically with default values when printing the
stylus data list for the first time.
An example illustrates the structure of the file:
Version: 1.0
% typ
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
% typ
setting:
setting:
name
available
X
1
Y
1
Z
1
R
1
S
1
ForceX
1
ForceY
1
ForceZ
1
shaftX
1
shaftY
1
shaftZ
1
Temp
1
Date
1
geometry
0
Mode
0
Paranamest3 0
aAxis
1
bAxis
1
cncCalib
0
name
value
column
5
width
12
In the first block, the name of the stylus datum appears under
name and the key for inclusion in the report appears under
available:
1 means in the report, 0 means not in the report
In the second block, the setting appears under name and the
corresponding value appears under value (column: number of
columns in the table, width: column width).
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-45
Setting the base / start alignment

The calculated alignment of a workpiece is completed in Calypso by
defining a base alignment (coordinate system). If this base alignment
can only be determined through time-consuming measurements or
scanning, you can manually define a start alignment, which will then
be used to measure the base alignment.
In order to work with base alignments/start alignments, you need to
be familiar with automatic feature recognition (see How to define
features using automatic feature recognition on page 5-7).
The tasks that can be involved in defining the base/start alignments
are as follows:
How to load an existing base alignment/start alignment on
page 4-50
If there is an existing base/start alignment that meets your
requirements, you can use it for your current measurement plan.
How to create a new base / start alignment on page 4-51
A measurement plan must be open before you can create a new
base/start alignment. There are several ways of creating a
base/start alignment, and you will have to choose one (see
Alternative alignment methods on page 4-76).
How to adapt a base / start alignment on page 4-54
If the position of the workpiece has changed but the part
alignment is still defined, you can recalculate alignment without
having to redefine the base/start alignment from scratch.
How to edit an existing base / start alignment on page 4-58
The settings (e.g. a primary reference) of an open (active) base or
start alignment can be changed at any time.
Moving or rotating the base / start alignment on page 4-60
You can offset or rotate a base or start alignment in order to
customize it to suit the positions of features on a workpiece.
How to delete a base alignment on page 4-75
How to set a base alignment to zero on page 4-76
For each of these tasks, you start from the part alignment template.
The part alignment template is described in full detail in Definition
template (coordinate system) in the Calypso Online Help.
4-46
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Part alignment basics

The part alignment is the user-defined reference coordinate system
for your measurement plan. The base alignment (see also Base
alignment on page 4-48) is a particular part alignment. It localizes
the part on the measuring table for the CMM. Why is that necessary?
In its clamped position on the table, a workpiece can be tilted or out
of line. The CMM still has to perform accurately, so before you start
measuring you have to define (compute) the position of the
workpiece relative to the axes of the CMM. This is precisely what
happens when the part alignment is computed: the part alignment is
virtually tilted and turned until certain geometric elements of the
workpiece are parallel to the CMM's axes.
The part alignment needs to locate the part within the six constraints
(three rotational and three translational).
The part alignment is based on five references:
The primary reference (rotation in space) restricts two of the three
rotational constraints; e.g., the rotation around the X and Y axes.
The secondary reference (rotation in plane) constrains the third
degree of rotational freedom, e.g., rotation around the Z axis.
Three tertiary references control the three translational constraints.
These are the origins of X, Y and Z. With these, the part alignment
is defined.
You can save several part alignments within one measurement plan.
You can define a new part alignment using Resources Utilities
Alignment or with the tool box.
Selecting the
coordinate system
The known coordinate systems in the measurement plan can be

selected and used at various positions of the measurement plan:
Features and constructions
The start coordinate system for a coordinate system according to
the standard method
Characteristics True Position, GDT Profile, Simple distance
Store erosion module, coordinate system utility
Display position and Move in Part Alignment System in the
stoplight window
Additional features Holos and Gear
Coordinate system with index

Coordinate systems determined according to the standard method
may contain a loop index and thus represent several specific
coordinate systems.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-47
This becomes the case when

using features with a pattern or a loop index for a coordinate
system determined by the standard method,
using the loop index in a special function when defining the
coordinate system.
The name of the coordinate system is then provided with an index in
brackets. For every valid index value, the coordinate system becomes
a particular coordinate system of its own.
NOTE
hss
The type of brackets selected in the loop is passed along with the
index as is the number.
n different coordinate systems are calculated for a coordinate system
that has a feature with pattern and n positions. When several
references contain patterns with varying number of positions, the
resulting coordinate system contains exactly as many positions as the
reference having the smallest number of positions.
Example: A circle and two planes have one pattern with ten features
each. If you use these features as references for the coordinate
system, a coordinate system with index is formed. This coordinate
system can take on from one to ten different positions or alignments
depending on the specific index value.
!
hss
Important
A coordinate system provided with a loop is interpreted as an iterative
alignment. For this reason, coordinate systems that should be
calculated with an index should have no loop.
Base alignment
The base alignment is a part alignment that defines the position of
the workpiece on the CMM. There is only one base alignment in every
measurement plan. In order to view, define or change the base
alignment, please read How to create a new base / start
alignment on page 4-51.
The base-alignment parameters correspond to the machine
coordinate system. The part alignments inside a measurement plan,
on the other hand, correspond either to the base alignment or to
other part alignments. They are used for the correct evaluation of the
measuring results.
When you set the base alignment, you have to decide which features
you want to use for defining the workpiece position. If these features
have already been measured, the current workpiece position will be
calculated and saved.
4-48
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Otherwise, with machine-remote programming, for example, the

workpiece position cannot be calculated until later. This can be
accomplished by loading a saved base alignment (see How to load
an existing base alignment/start alignment on page 4-50) or by
manually adapting a defined base alignment (see How to adapt a
base / start alignment on page 4-54).
It is important to differentiate between 2 processes:
The assignments of the features to the 5 references of the base
alignment are saved in the measurement plan.
The results of the calculation of the base alignment are saved in a
file.
Start alignment
A part alignment is referred to as a start alignment when it can be
used as a provisional base alignment. It must be possible to generate
by manual probing and can be permitted only once in a measurement
plan.
What is the purpose of
a start alignment?
Under certain circumstances, many features are necessary for

generating the base alignment. This is the case, for example, when
constructions are entered into the base alignments that, in turn, have
been formed from several other features. Generating the base
alignment through manual probing would, in this case, be relatively
complex. This applies also when features difficult to probe are used
for generating the base alignment.
In these situations, it is recommended to use a start alignment. A start
alignment can be built up relatively simple. Depending on the
individual case it can, for example, be built by a 3-2-1 alignment, by
simple features or also by one point in X, Y and Z each.
For a CNC run with manual alignment, it is then sufficient to probe
these few points or features. Afterward, Calypso knows the
approximate position of the workpiece and can qualify the base
alignment in the CNC run.
!
hss
Defining start
alignment
Important
Always define the base alignment first, and then the start alignment.
Otherwise, the offset between the base alignment and the start
alignment cannot be correctly calculated.
The start alignment is defined and edited in the same manner and
with the same functions as a base alignment. For this purpose, use
the Start Alignment tab in the Load, create or change base
alignment dialog box.
It is only the CNC run that cannot be set in the start alignment.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-49
Activating start
alignment
To activate the start alignment for the current measurement plan, you
must tick the corresponding check box on the Start Alignment tab.
For information on how to view, define or change the start alignment,
please read How to create a new base / start alignment on
page 4-51.
What to bear in mind when defining references

The features you choose to define a part alignment depend to a very
large extent on the geometry of the workpiece and the measuring job
you want to accomplish. Here are the basic rules:
Choose at least three different physical features. They can all
be planes, but they must not be the same plane.
Do not select parallel planes for different references (e.g. the
surface of a cube and the surface of a cylinder on top of it. In this
case, the second reference tells Calypso nothing more about the
orientation of the workpiece than the first reference did.
For each feature, spread out the points as far as possible.
The primary reference must be a three-dimensional object
(e.g. plane, cylinder or cone, or a sphere, if another sphere defines
all 3 tertiary origins).
The secondary reference must be a two-dimensional object (e.g. a
line), but can also be three-dimensional. (Or a circle or ellipse, if
other entities define both tertiary origins which belong to the
plane of the primary axis.)
The tertiary references are typically one-dimensional (a point), but
a two-dimensional or three-dimensional reference can also be
selected.
How to load an existing base alignment/start

alignment
If you have or another user has already defined a part alignment, you
can use it as a base or start alignment for your current measurement
plan if it satisfies your requirements.
4-50
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Follow these steps:

1 In the list of prerequisites, click on the Base / Start Alignment
button.
The Load, create or change base alignment window will open.
The Base Alignment tab is at the front.
2 To load a start alignment: Click on the Start Alignment tab.

3 Select the Load a saved Base Alignment or Load existing Start
Alignment option.
4 Select the name of the part alignment that you wish to load from
the list.
5 Click on OK to return to the prerequisites.
NOTE
hss
In all cases, you must match the part alignment to the position of the
workpiece. See How to adapt a base / start alignment on
page 4-54.
The Base / Start Alignment button will now be green.
When loading the base/start alignment, only the workpiece position is
changed, not, however, the definition of the features used. That is
why the model in the CAD window does not change.
How to create a new base / start alignment

If you prefer not to use the standard method to define a part
alignment, you have a choice of three other methods: 3D Best Fit (not
with Calypso Light) and RPS or P6 procedures (see Alternative
alignment methods on page 4-76).
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-51
To create a new base/start alignment:

button.
2 To create a new start alignment: Click on the Start Alignment

tab.
3 Select either Create new Base Alignment or Create new Start
Alignment.
4 From the list, select the method you want to use for alignment (see
Alternative alignment methods on page 4-76).
5 Click on OK.
The Definition template (coordinate system) window is
opened.
This dialog box has five buttons and fields for defining the five
references. Calypso automatically enters the information in the
fields when you probe the workpiece to define the requisite
features.
You do not need to probe the workpiece if you have already
measured the features required for the part alignment.
6 Make sure that the correct stylus is selected at the CMM control
console.
4-52
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7 Define a feature for the reference. There are a number of

possibilities:
The feature already exists:
Click on the appropriate button of the reference.

The Selection dialog box appears on the screen.
Select the feature of your choice from the selection list.
Click on OK.
Calypso transfers the feature to the appropriate field.
The feature does not exist in

the measurement plan as
yet:
If you are working on the CMM:

You do not have to exit the Alignment dialog box.
Probe point by point.
Calypso's automatic feature recognition engine automatically
registers the geometry of the feature.
Click on OK when you have fully defined the feature as a
reference.
Calypso will automatically transfer the feature to the
measurement plan.
If you are working away from the machine:
Click on the appropriate button of the reference in the
Alignment dialog box.
Select the New option.
Click on the appropriate button of the feature you want to
define.
Click on OK.
In the CAD window, either probe the necessary number of
points on the feature with the mouse.
- or Click on one of the buttons Define a Space Point, Define
Circle on a Cylinder, Define 2-D Line or Extract Features to
import the entire feature right away.
Calypso updates the feature definition at the left-hand side of
the dialog box.
Click on OK to close the definition template for the feature.
8 Define the features for the other references in the same way.
9 Click on OK when you have finished defining all the references.
The part alignment is saved and the dialog box is closed. The Base /
Start Alignment button will now be green.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-53
Once all of the references have been defined, Calypso will enter the
corresponding features in the appropriate fields (see the example in
the illustration below).
The default name for the measurement plan is derived from the name
of the newly calculated base alignment. You can, however, highlight
the name and overwrite it with a name of your choice. Click on the
Comment button if you want to type in and save a comment
containing additional information.
How to adapt a base / start alignment

If the workpiece was shifted, turned or tilted out of position slightly,
you will have to repeat the computed alignment. Calypso will assist
you.
To adjust the base/start alignment to suit a new workpiece position:
button.
2 To adjust a start alignment: Click on the Start Alignment tab.
4-54
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
3 Select either Change active Base Alignment or Change

current Start Alignment.
4 Click on OK.
The Definition template (coordinate system) window will
open. You can see which features were used to define the part
alignment.
5 Click on the Execute manual run now button.
Calypso guides you through the procedure for computing
alignment. The Manual CNC dialog box appears on the screen for
this purpose.
The instructions in this dialog box tell you exactly which feature
has to be probed and how often to ensure successful alignment.
This dialog box is fully described in Manual CNC in the Calypso
Online Help.
6 Using the joysticks, take the indicated number of probings on the
indicated feature of the part. The information in the dialog box is
updated after each probing. In this manner, you know how often
you have to probe.
When you take the final probing for a reference, the window
displays the feature needed for the next reference (such as 2-D
Line1).
After the probing, Calypso takes a moment to update the part
alignment and display the new image in the CAD window. Then
you are returned to the Alignment window.
7 Click on OK to save this part alignment and return to the
prerequisites.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-55
The Base / Start Alignment button will now be green.

When adjusting the base/start alignment, only the workpiece position
will be changed, not, however, the definition of the features used.
That is why the model in the CAD window does not change.
Example: How to customize a base alignment

iteratively with abortion condition
You can enhance precision by computing alignment of the part
alignment iteratively. You do this by defining a loop in the Load,
Create Or Change Base Alignment window. If you use an abortion
condition instead of defining the end of the loop by specifying a
certain number of repetitions, you can predefine the target precision
for the new part alignment.
NOTE
hss
The Automatic run check box has to be marked in the measurement

plan in the definition template of the base alignment.
1 In the Load, Create Or Change Base Alignment dialog box,
activate the radio button for the Change active Base Alignment
option.
4-56
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2 Click on Loop.
The Loop dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Click on Add.
4 Enter in the End field, e.g., 5 as number of the loop cycles.
5 Point to the Break Condition field, right-click to open the context
menu and select Formula....
6 In the Formula... window, enter the following expression:
baseSystem().valueA<0.05
This Boolean expression is checked at the end of each loop and

when it is satisfied (value of the expression = true), the loop is
stopped. The value of the valueA variable is recalculated each
time the loop is run. It stands for the approximation between the
measured alignment and the alignment stored in memory. In the
standard protocol, valueA is designated as Delta.
7 Close the Formula, Loop and Load, Create Or Change Base
Alignment dialog boxes.
8 Start the measurement plan.
Alignment terminates immediately if the workpiece has not been
moved since the alignment was last computed.
If a marginal change was made to the position of the workpiece,
alignment is computed iteratively until the difference (delta)
between two consecutive alignments is less than the value you
specified (0.05).
Refer to the default printout for information on the alignment
procedure and the results, including the value for delta.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-57
How to edit an existing base / start

alignment
When a base / start alignment is changed, the nominal values of all of
the features in the current measurement plan will be changed. The
position of the base alignment relative to the workpiece is changed.
The position of the workpiece on the CMM will also be changed if
only measured features are used.
!
hss
Important
When making changes on the base alignment of an existing
measurement plan, always do so with great care and deliberation
especially when dealing with a complex measurement plan or when
the measurement plan contains theoretical features, formulas or
parameters.
Check subsequently the nominal values of the features with regard to
their correctness.
To change a base/start alignment:
button.
2 To change a start alignment: Click on the Start Alignment tab.

3 Select either Change active Base Alignment or Change
current Start Alignment.
4-58
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4 Click on OK.
The Definition template (coordinate system) dialog box
appears on the screen. It shows which features were used to
define the part alignment.
5 If you want to replace a feature for a particular reference with
another feature which has already been defined:
Click on the button for the reference in question to open the
Selection (features) dialog box.
In the list, click on the feature you want to use.
Click on OK to confirm and close the Selection dialog box.
The feature has now been replaced.
Click on OK to return to the list of prerequisites.
6 If you want to assign a particular reference a feature that has yet to
be defined:
Click on the button for the reference in question.
The Selection (features) window will open.
Select New and choose the type of feature you want to define
(e.g. plane or 2-D straight line).
Confirm by clicking OK and use the CMM to probe the
necessary points of the feature.
Make sure that the correct stylus is selected at the CMM control
console.
As soon as you start probing, Calypso updates the feature
definition at the left-hand side of the window.
After probing, click on OK to close the feature's template.
Click on OK to return to the list of prerequisites.
After every change in the part alignment, the Base / Start
Alignment button must be green. When a base/start alignment is
changed, the nominal values of all of the features in the current
measurement plan will be changed. The position of the base/start
alignment relative to the workpiece will be changed.
The position of the workpiece on the CMM will also be changed if
only measured features are used.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-59
Moving or rotating the base / start

alignment
Sometimes, the coordinate values of a workpiece feature needed to
define the base/start alignment do not have the value 0, or the
features are not parallel to a part alignment axis, but are rotated. In
these situations, the base/start alignment can be moved (offset) or
rotated to the desired position.
In such cases, the base/start alignment is always moved first, and then
rotated.
Moving the base/start
alignment
An offset also enables you to move the origin of the part alignment to
a point that cannot be probed. You can define an offset in any and all
of the three coordinate directions.
Rotating the base /

start alignment
Using the rotation function, it is possible to rotate a part alignment

around a coordinate axis. There are two methods for entering the
rotation angle:
Rotate by an angle:
The desired rotation angle is entered directly in degrees.
Rotate by distances:
The rotation angle is entered via vector coordinates.
The rotation of the reference axis by secondary reference is
described separately (see Rotate Distance on page 4-66).
How to offset a base / start alignment

Shifting a part alignment is part of the special Offset function.
To offset a part alignment:
button.
The Load, create or change base alignment dialog box appears
on the screen. The Base Alignment tab is at the front.
2 To offset a start alignment: Click on the Start Alignment tab.
3 Select Change active Base Alignment or Change current Start
Alignment and click on OK.
4 Click on Special in the Base Alignment or Start Alignment
dialog box.
The Special functions window will open.
4-60
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5 Click on the Offset button.

The Offset entry and input fields for the coordinates are added to
the Special Functions dialog box.
6 Enter the amount by which you want to offset the origin:

To do so, click on the X, Y or Z field or fields, as appropriate.
Enter the corresponding value or values.
7 Once you have entered the coordinates for the origin, click on OK.
The offset is saved and the window is closed. The new position of the
part alignment is displayed in the CAD window.
How to rotate a part alignment by an angle

Rotating a part alignment about a selected axis is part of the Add
Rotation special function. After the alignment has been computed,
you can rotate the part alignment through the desired angle.
To rotate a part alignment by entering an angle:
button.
2 To perform a Cartesian rotation (by distance) of a start alignment:
Click on the Start Alignment tab.
4 Click on the Special button.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-61
5 Click on the Rotate by an angle button.

The Around entry and input fields for the spatial axis and the
rotation angle will appear in the Special Functions dialog box.
6 Enter the spatial axis around which you want the alignment to be
rotated, and the angle:
Click in the Around list and select the spatial axis of your
choice.
The list entry is not updated until after you have closed the
window.
Click in the Angle field and enter the angle of rotation (in
degrees).
7 Repeat steps 6 and 5 if you want to define rotations about other
spatial axes as well.
8 After you have entered all of the desired rotations, click on OK.
The rotations are saved and the window is closed. The new position
of the part alignment is displayed in the CAD window.
How to rotate a part alignment by distances

When a part alignment is rotated by distance (Cartesian), the rotation
angle is specified using vector coordinates.
To perform a Cartesian rotation (by distance) of a part alignment:
button.
2 To perform a Cartesian rotation (by distance) of a start alignment:
Click on the Start Alignment tab.
4-62
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

5 Click on the Rotate by distances button.
The Around entry, a selection field for the spatial axis and input
fields for the respective complementary coordinates are added to
the Special Functions window, along with a field for displaying
the resulting rotation angle.
6 Enter the spatial axis around which you want the system rotated,
and the vector for rotation:
In the Around list, select the corresponding spatial axis.
The coordinate input fields immediately change accordingly.
The list entry, however, is not updated until you have closed the
window.
Specify the vector with its two coordinates in the coordinate
system of the plane of rotation (the plane of rotation depends
on the selected axis of rotation).
The associated angle will appear immediately in the display
field, calculated as the arc tangent of the quotient of coordinate
2 divided by coordinate 1.
7 Repeat steps 6 and 5 if you want to define rotations about other
spatial axes as well.
8 Once you have entered the rotations, click on OK.
The rotations are saved and the window is closed. The new position
of the part alignment is displayed in the CAD window.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-63
Rotate reference axis by secondary reference

In addition to the offset (movement) and rotation of a base / start
alignment, there are other, special options for changing a base / start
alignment.
To access these, click on Special in the Special Functions dialog in
the definition template for the workpiece coordinate system. Here
you will find three options for using a secondary reference to set the
reference axis.
Option
Function
Rotate Distance
(to a given axis)
Rotates the coordinate system about a given axis so that a specific

coordinate of a specified feature reaches a given size.
Rotate to origin line
Rotates the coordinate system about a given axis so that a line

passing through the origin and the nominal coordinate intersects the
tertiary reference (measured point) in the plane.
After this rotation, the X value and Y value of the nominal point and
the tertiary reference have same ratios.
Rotate to equal deviation Rotates the coordinate system about a given axis until a line
between a point in the plane (the nominal coordinate) and the
tertiary reference has a slope of 45.
After this rotation, the delta-X and delta-Y of the nominal point and
the tertiary reference are equal (delta-X (delta-Y) is the difference
between the two X values (Y values)).
4-64
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Rotate to Origin line

Actual point (measured)
Nominal coordinates
Y act
X act
Y nom
X nom
Rotate to equal deviation

Actual point (measured)
Nominal coordinates
X
The options only appear in the Special Functions dialog box if they
would be reasonable to use and the base / start alignment satisfies
certain preconditions.
Prerequisites
To be able to use the Rotate reference axis by secondary

reference, the following preconditions must be met:
The secondary reference of the base / start alignment was defined
by either a circle, a slot, a rectangle, an ellipse or a point.
For both coordinates of the plane in which the base alignment is
rotated, the tertiary reference must be
defined with the same feature, or
with 2 planes, or
with two 2D lines, or
remain unchanged in both coordinates.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-65
Rotate Distance
Use the Rotate Distance function to define a value (distance)
separating a defined coordinate of a given feature from the part
alignment. In this case, Calypso rotates the part alignment until it is
set to this distance.
Example
The example below illustrates the Rotate Distance function:

The zero point of the part alignment is in the bore on the left. The
center of the bore on the right is 50 mm away in the X axis. After
activating the Rotate Distance function, this distance should
maintain the nominal of 40 mm.
50
Calypso rotates the part alignment around the origin in the left bore
until the distance you specified is achieved.
40

The Rotate to origin line function can only be performed when
certain conditions are met (see Rotate reference axis by secondary
reference on page 4-64).
4-66
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
This allows rotating the coordinate system such that a line going
through the coordinate origin will go through the point that was used
as the third reference when the base alignment was defined.
When using the Rotate to origin line function, Calypso rotates the
part alignment until the specified line touches the defined point.
In the new coordinate system, the relationships between the X values
and the Y values for both points (the one defined by the line and the
point for the tertiary reference) are exactly equal. The Rotate to Origin
Line is in a sense a Rotate to Equal Relationships.
Example
The example below illustrates the Rotate to origin line function:

center of the bore on the right delivers the third reference for both
the X and Y axes.
With (20,30), a line is defined in the X-Y plane, which passes through
the origin and the point at X = 20 mm, Y = 30 mm.
After the Rotate to origin line function has been performed, the
line should also pass through the center of the bore on the right.
until the line touches the center of the bore on the right.

The Rotate to equal deviation function can only be performed
when certain conditions are met (see Rotate reference axis by
secondary reference on page 4-64).
This allows rotating the coordinate system such that a specified line
with the slope 1 (equals 45) will go through the point that was used
as the third reference when the base alignment was defined.
When using the Rotate to equal deviation function, Calypso rotates
the part alignment until the specified line touches the defined point.
In the new coordinate system, the difference between the X values
(between the just defined point and the point of the tertiary
reference) equals the difference between the Y values which is why
it is called Rotate to equal deviation.
Example
The example below illustrates the Rotate to equal deviation

function:
center of the bore on the right delivers the third reference for both
the X and Y axes.
A line is defined with (20,30) in the X-Y plane of the coordinate
system; it will pass with the slope 1 through the point at X = 20 mm,
Y = 30 mm.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-67
After the Rotate to equal deviation function has been performed,

the line should also pass through the center of the bore on the right.
until the line touches the center of the bore on the right.
How to rotate the reference axis

To rotate the reference axis:
1 Make sure that the necessary requirements for rotating the
reference axis have been met.
button.
3 To rotate the reference axis in a start alignment: Click on the Start
Alignment tab.
The Special Functions dialog box appears on the screen. Once
the prerequisites are met, additional options and input fields will
appear in the upper part for Setting reference axis with a
secondary reference.
Enter
distance
6 Select the desired option:

Rotate Distance
7 Rotate to distance: In the Rotate distance input field, enter the
distance to be achieved by rotating (caution: pay attention to sign).
4-68
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
8 In Rotate to origin line or equal deviation: In the input fields, enter

the coordinates of the point through which the line should pass.
10 Click on OK to close the Definition template (coordinate
system) dialog box of the base / start alignment.
You can observe the rotation of the base alignment directly in the
CAD window.
Loading a secondary alignment for a base /

start alignment
You can take the secondary alignment for a base alignment/start
alignment from another base alignment/start alignment.
Example of application
This can be necessary in the following case, for example: During the
alignment of a workpiece, the primary and the tertiary alignment is to
be measured on the workpiece. The secondary alignment, however, is
to be measured on a fixture that is no longer accessible after clamping
down the workpiece.
As a result, the feature for the secondary alignment can no longer be
measured as soon as the workpiece is clamped onto the fixture.
The base / start alignment can nonetheless be created. To do this,
measure the secondary alignment in a separate measurement plan
before the CNC run. You then define the base alignment / start
alignment of the workpiece initially without secondary alignment,
taking it instead from the existing base / start alignment of the
separate measurement plan.
To do this, apply the Load alignment for secondary reference
function in the Special Functions dialog window for the base
alignment / start alignment.
Particular aspects when loading the secondary

alignment
Prerequisites
You can load the secondary reference for a base alignment/start

alignment from another base alignment/start alignment under the
following circumstances:
The current base/start alignment is a standard coordinate system
(no alternative alignment method such as 3D Best Fit, RPS Method,
P6 Method).
The primary alignment in the current base/start alignment has
already been defined.
The secondary alignment in the current base/start alignment has
not yet been defined.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-69
NOTE
hss
Measurement plan
already exists
Both the Load alignment for secondary reference and the

Reference axis setting in secondary reference options thus cancel
one another.
Also in an already existing measurement plan it is possible to load the
secondary reference of the base/start alignment from another
base/start alignment. This, however, is only practical if the following
conditions are met:
The primary alignments of the current and stored base/start
alignment are approximately the same.
Otherwise, the nominal data is offset so much by the transformation
after the loading of the secondary reference that no normal
measurement is possible any longer.
!
hss
Sequential order during

adjustment
Important
It is not admissible to enter just any base alignment as secondary
alignment and then do the qualifying of the alignment thereafter.
If the workpiece on the machine has been displaced and it thereby
becomes necessary to requalify the base/start alignment, you must
always qualify the base/start alignment first and load its secondary
reference afterward. Not until afterward do you redefine the
base/start alignment in which you want to load the secondary
reference.
How the new axis is determined when loading the

secondary reference
How does Calypso determine the new coordinate axis of the
base/start alignment from the existing base/start alignment?
4-70
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Determining the space

axis
The first coordinate axis of the new base/start alignment that has
already been determined is compared with the six directions of the
axes from the existing base/start alignment. Among these six axis
directions, the axis is found that forms the smallest angle to the new
primary alignment.
Stored
alignment
Z
Y
Spatial
orientation
and origin in
Z
Origin in
X and Y
The determined axis direction of the existing system forms, together

with the primary alignment of the new base/start alignment, an angle
smaller or equal to 45.
For the secondary alignment, one of the two other axes of the
existing base/start alignment is used:
nearest direction of the existing system
axis of existing system used for secondary reference
It is now important for the new coordinate system to know for which
axis direction (in the new coordinate system) the axis of the existing
system determined above is to be used.
primary axis of the new system
the existing axis becomes an axis in the new system
The primary direction (of the new alignment) is found in the first line,
the secondary axis is below it.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-71
How to load the alignment for the secondary

reference
Prerequisites
A base/start alignment exists whose secondary alignment is the same

as the desired secondary alignment of the new base/start alignment.
The secondary reference for the new base/start alignment has not yet
been defined.
To load the alignment for the secondary reference:
1 Determine the primary alignment of the new base/start alignment.
2 Determine the tertiary alignment of the new base/start alignment.
button.
4 To load the secondary reference into a start alignment: Click on the
Start Alignment tab.
The Special Functions dialog box appears on the screen. Once
the prerequisites are met, additional input fields will appear in the
upper part under Alignment for secondary reference.
7 Activate the Load alignment for secondary reference check

box.
8 Select in the selection list the base alignment/start alignment
whose secondary reference you want to accept for the current
base alignment/start alignment.
4-72
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

If the base alignment file cannot be loaded, a remark window
appears on the screen.
If Calypso is in CNC mode, the stop is switched over to red instead,
and the CNC run is discontinued. A line is displayed in the status
monitor with a corresponding error text.
Particular aspects when loading the secondary

reference
When you want to use the Load alignment for secondary
reference, observe a few special aspects.
Coordination with the rotate special function

In case you have loaded the secondary alignment from another
base/start alignment and, for example, you rotate the system by the
primary alignment, the secondary axis of the resulting base/start
system will point in a direction other than the loaded secondary axis.
As soon as the base alignment is calculated a second time, the axis for
the secondary alignment can no longer be determined correctly.
The rotate function is not blocked, however, because, e.g., rotating
around the axis of the secondary alignment may be useful.
Other requirements
The following situation is presented as an example: There are two
measurement plans one, to measure the plane rotation on a fixture,
and a second, to measure the workpiece on the fixture.
If the base alignment of the plane rotation was requalified
(e.g., because the fixture was moved or turned about) and now it is
switched over to the other measurement plan, a very difficult
situation develops.
The plane rotation was changed but the base alignment of the
workpiece is still in the same position. This can be compared to the
following: A workpiece was defined on the machine by probings
(with complete base alignment). Now the workpiece is turned about
and a new plane is measured. This plane is now replaced by the
feature of the current plane rotation of the base alignment. The
consequence is: When the base alignment window is opened and
closed again, all nominal geometries are calculated again (shifting of
the CAD model) due to the fact that the actual features of the
primary and tertiary alignments were not likewise measured again.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-73
To compensate for this, the base alignment is calculated from the

nominal geometries again when the base alignment window opens. If
the stored alignment has not changed, the nominal base alignment
has a zero vector and a universal matrix. If it has changed, however,
the difference between the existing alignment and the new alignment
in relation to the current alignment is added and saved.
The calculation and saving of the base alignment when opening the
window is only carried out in the case where the Load alignment for
secondary reference function is activated.
Calculating base alignment back to CAD

origin
For certain applications in the automobile industry (especially for
horizontal-arm machines), a base alignment is needed whose origin
coincides with the origin of the CAD model. For this purpose, Calypso
offers the Keep CAD Origin function that takes a base alignment
that has already been calculated back to the CAD origin.
Additionally, special automatic functions (offset, rotate by an angle
and rotate by coordinates) are calculated that compensate a shift or a
wrong turn.
Prerequisite: The base alignment exists already and possesses the
correct alignment.
How to calculate a base alignment back to the CAD

origin
To calculate a base alignment back to the CAD origin:
button.
2 Select the Change active Base Alignment option and click on
OK.
The Special Functions dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Tick the Keep CAD Origin check box.
Calypso calculates the special functions (offset, rotate by distances
and rotate by an angle) that are necessary to take the current base
4-74
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
alignment back to the CAD origin and thereby maintain its

alignment.
The names of the special functions calculated are listed. Besides

OK and Cancel, all buttons and input fields are set to inactive.
NOTE
hss
If you disactivate the Keep CAD Origin check box, the calculated
special functions remain in the list. The buttons and input fields are
active again.
5 Click on OK to change the base alignment as displayed and to
close the dialog box.
How to delete a base alignment

In Calypso, you can delete a part alignment when you no longer need
it.
!
hss
Important
If you delete a base alignment, you must define new part alignments.
See How to adapt a base / start alignment on page 4-54.
To delete a part alignment:
1 Choose Delete Base Alignment from the File menu.
The Delete Base Alignment dialog box appears on the screen,
with a list of all the base alignments defined in Calypso.
2 Select the name of the base alignment that you want to delete.
3 Click on OK.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-75
The base alignment is deleted from Calypso.

Only the base alignment as such is deleted, not the references and
features on which it is based.
How to set a base alignment to zero

If you want to undo the settings made in defining a base alignment to
set it up again, you can set it to zero.
To reset a base alignment to zero:
1 Select Resources Utilities Set Base Alignment to zero.
The base alignment will be reset and can be set up again.
Alternative alignment methods

Apart from the standard method (see How to create a new base /
start alignment on page 4-51), you have a choice of three other
alignment methods:
3D Best Fit
NOTE
hss
The 3D Best Fit can be used to calculate the alignment for

workpieces for which no clear references have been defined. This is a
situation frequently encountered in freeform measurements.
If you are using the Calypso Light version, you cannot use this
function.
The 3D best fit is a method that delivers the best possible fit between
any number of points or geometric elements and their specified
geometry.
Number of
points
at least 1,
no upper limit
Description
The errors between specified and actual points
are squared and added up. The base alignment
is changed until this value is minimized.
If you select the Best fit on CAD model option, the actual points are
first aligned with the nominal points (according to Gauss) and the
perpendicular base points of the actual points aligned in this way are
then calculated on the CAD model. Finally, the actual points are
aligned with the perpendicular base points (according to Gauss).
4-76
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
RPS Method
The RPS Method is primarily used for measuring body panels for
motor vehicles.
Number of
points
at least 3,
maximum 6
Description
A coordinate (e.g. Z) is fixed 3 times
A coordinate (e.g. Y) is fixed 2 times
A coordinate (e.g. X) is fixed 1 time
RPS alignment is usually an iterative process
performed with the aid of a loop.
RPS is short for Reference Point System. RPS alignment is based on the
3-2-1 rule. Unlike other methods, RPS alignment is based on the
points that are specified in the drawing of the workpiece.
Alignment is therefore subject to rules and is not wholly userdefinable. One of the advantages is therefore that different results
obtained with a given workpiece are comparable because they are all
based on the same system of coordinates.
P6 Method
The P6 Method is particularly suitable for the alignment of pipes.

Number of
points
exactly 3
Description
The first point defines the origin in X, Y, and Z.
The first and second points together define the
primary axis. The third point defines rotation
about this primary axis.
How to use an alternative alignment method

To perform a 3D best fit (not with Calypso Light) or an alignment
according to RPS or P6:
1 To add a new coordinate system to the measurement plan, select
the alignment method from the submenu Resources Utilities
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-77
and double-click on the symbol added to the list of features for

a coordinate system.
- or To create a new part alignment, click on Base / Start Alignment
in the list of the prerequisites in the measurement plan area and
then select the desired procedure from the list.
The definition templates for all these methods are very similar in
appearance. The illustration shows the 3D Best Fit, called from the
prerequisites (base alignment).
The dialog box for RPS alignment has X, Y and Z check boxes that
you must use to define which feature constrains which degrees of
freedom.
4-78
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2 Click on Select Features to define the features you want to use

for alignment.
This opens the Selection (features) dialog box.
Here all of the features that have been defined will be displayed.
3 Press and hold down the Ctrl key and click on the features you
need for alignment.
The features you select in this way are listed in the definition
template for alignment.
4 If you have to define reference features in addition to those already
listed:
In the first column, click to the left of the name of the feature
for which you want to define a reference.
An arrow appears, indicating the active line.
Click on the Select References button.
The selection dialog box opens. Here all of the features that
have been defined will be displayed.
Click on the feature you want to define as a reference.
Click on OK to transfer the reference to the definition template.
Repeat this step as often as necessary until all the references
you need have been defined.
5 If you want to fit actual values to nominal positions as part of
alignment:
Click in the field you want to change.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-79
Define the position in the columns headed Nominal X,

Nominal Y and Nominal Z.
Repeat this step as often as necessary to define specified
positions for other features.
6 The next step in RPS alignment is to define the fixation direction
for each feature you selected:
Click on the X, Y or Z check box, as appropriate, to select the
fixation direction.
Repeat this step for each feature in the list until all fixation
directions have been defined.
7 If (during alignment with 3d Best Fit) you want to perform the best
fit on the CAD model, activate the Best fit on CAD model check
box.
Qualification is then a three-step procedure:
The actual points are fitted in the conjugated nominal points
according to Gauss.
The perpendicular base points of the fitted actual points on the
CAD model are calculated.
The actual points are fitted in the conjugated perpendicular
base points according to Gauss.
8 Select the alignment method to be used in the CNC run (for more
information, see Definition template (coordinate system) in
the Calypso Online Help).
9 If you are ready to execute the alignment you just defined, click on
the Execute manual run now button.
Calypso will guide you through the alignment procedure and
prompt you to take probings (see Basics about manual control
on page 8-12).
10 Click on OK.
The dialog box is closed and the coordinate system is saved.
See also Loops for alignment to RPS on page 15-26.
4-80
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Prerequisites for the rotary table

You can also use Calypso to measure workpieces on a rotary table.
The following contains explanations of the steps required in the
prerequisites as well as the basic principles and instructions for using
the rotary table for measurements.
Please read the following:
General information on using the rotary table
Installation of a new rotary table
Manual positioning of the rotary table
Qualifying the rotary table axis
Measuring features with a rotary table
Using the rotary table passively
RT clearance planes
Measuring features in several rotary table settings
Rotational pattern of a feature with rotary table coupling
General information on using the rotary

table
For measuring rotationally symmetrical workpieces (shafts, cogs), but
also prismatic workpieces, use of a rotary table provides the following
advantages:
Use of simpler stylus systems.
All sides of a workpiece can be measured with the same stylus.
Less effort is required for qualification of the styli.
Shorter clearance paths.
Enlargement of the usable measuring range.
Straightforward programming.
The programming is simpler because you can always program on
the operator screen.
NOTE
hss
The rotary table is a fourth axis for the CMM and thus contributes to
the expected measuring uncertainty. For an accuracy estimate in the
case of features measured with the rotary table, the permitted fouraxis deviation of the CMM must always be used.
In particular, the quality of the qualification of the rotary table axis has
a strong influence on the accuracy that can be achieved. For this
reason, you should proceed with great care (see Qualifying the
rotary table axis).
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-81
How to log in the rotary table

A mobile rotary table is fastened horizontally or vertically on the
workbench of the CMM and connected electrically to the control
system. The clamping surface of the rotary table must point towards a
device axis.
NOTE
hss
Exact mechanical alignment is not required, as minor angle errors can

be compensated for in calculation.
To enable Calypso to make measurements with the rotary table and to
evaluate, the rotary table must be logged into Calypso and, besides
this, a mobile rotary table must be connected to the control unit.
To log in the rotary table:
1 Select Extras Workroom CMM and open in the CMM
Configuration notebook the Rotary Table page.
2 Select the rotary table type.

3 Activate the Connect rotary table with control check box for a
mobile rotary table.
4 Activate the Release rotary table functionalitycheck box.
The rotary table illustration is no longer crossed off.
4-82
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5 Click on RT Reference Point.

The rotary table rotates into the starting position and resets the
reference point.
6 Click on Accept and then click on OK to confirm.
The CMM Configuration notebook is closed.
After the login and the enabling of the rotary table, two additional
icons appear in the Calypso user desk:
The Rotary Table icon in the prerequisites
The RT travel commands symbol in the toolbar.
You can now use the functionality of the rotary table.
How to set the RT position

If an integrated rotary table is being used for the first time or a mobile
rotary table is installed at a different position on the CMM, you have
to inform Calypso of the rough position of the rotary table in the
measuring range.
To set the RT position:
1 Measure the rotary table top as a circle in a new measurement
plan.
2 Select Resources RT position.
3 Select the corresponding circle from the list and confirm with OK.
Calypso now knows the rough position of the rotary table in the
measuring range of the CMM. This is required for later automatic
qualification of the rotary table axis.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-83
NOTE
Setting the RT position is only necessary after mechanical movement

of a mobile rotary table or first use of the rotary table with Calypso.
hss
RT homing
In the same way as the three linear axes of the CMM (X, Y, Z), the
rotary table also has a home position. This is automatically reached
after every homing of the CMM. However, it can also be reached in
measuring operation manually or automatically.
In contrast to the linear axes, the rotary table has no mechanical limit
stop. During homing, the zero marking on the scale is reached by the
shortest path and the counter is set to zero. The maximum rotation
angle on the rotary table is not restricted by a mechanical limit stop
either; it is restricted by the memory of the counter. Depending on the
type of rotary table, 10 to .... revolutions are possible.
It therefore makes sense to run an automatic RT homing prior to each
CNC run.
How to position the rotary table manually

You can position the rotary table manually with Calypso or using the
joystick.
Positioning with
Calypso
In Calypso, use the RT travel commands window.

1 Select Resources RT travel commands or click on the RT
travel commands icon in the toolbar.
The RT travel commands dialog box appears on the screen.
2 To move to a certain absolute position: In the Rotate to field,

enter the desired angle position and click on the Rotate to button.
3 To execute a relative angle increment: In the Rotate by field, enter
the desired angle increment and click on the Rotate by button.
Manual positioning
You can also use the joystick of the control console to move the rotary
table.
1 To do so, hold down the button in the left joystick and move it to
the left or right.
4-84
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2 To display the position you have reached, click on the Read

button.
Entering patterns
Via File Current status of RT axis, you can also enter increments.
1 Enter the pattern number in the input field.

Calypso uses this to calculate the required incremental angle and
displays this in the field below.
2 Use the + and buttons to set which feature the pattern is to be
positioned on.
The required angle position is displayed in the Rotate to field.
3 Position the rotary table by clicking on Rotate to according to the
displayed angle position.
Example
As an example, there is a cog with 25 teeth, and its 6th tooth is to be

measured.
360/25 = 14.4
6x14.4= 86.4
Enter 25 as the pattern number, click six times on + and then on
the Rotate to button. The rotary table positions itself to 86.4 and
thus to the sixth tooth.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-85
Qualifying the rotary table axis

The rotary table axis defines the exact position of the rotary table in
relation to the device zero point as well as the tilt in relation to the
CMM axes, that is, the position in the device coordinate system.
Workpiece
coordinate system
Rotary table axis

Device coordinate
system
When the rotary table rotates, all features, characteristics and

coordinate systems are turned around the RT axis. Errors in qualifying
the RT axis thus have an immediate effect on the measurement
accuracy.
Practical notes on qualifying the rotary table axis

When qualifying the rotary table axis, note the following practical
information:
For qualification of the rotary table axis, always use a stylus that is
as rigid as possible (e.g. the master stylus).
Make sure that the stylus and normal and/or workpiece are as
clean as possible for the axis qualification.
If the workpiece to be measured can only be measured with a
single stylus system, also use this for qualifying the RT axis. This
enables you to avoid inaccuracies caused by qualification errors or
stylus system changes.
How often does the RT axis have to be qualified?

The rotary table axis must be qualified on the basis of the following
factors:
As a general principle, after every homing of the CMM.
The RT axis defines the position of the rotary table in relation to
the device zero point. However, this is reset during homing and
cannot be reproduced exactly.
4-86
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Regularly, depending on accuracy requirements and ambient

temperature:
In general, for each stylus qualification, the rotary table axis should
also be requalified.
In the case of strong temperature fluctuations, it frequently makes
sense to requalify the rotary table axis prior to every workpiece
measurement.
Comparison of qualification methods

For qualifying the rotary table axis, there are four methods available,
each with advantages and disadvantages:
Method
Advantages
Disadvantages
1-sphere method
No additional normals are

required.
Measurement can be run with
the master stylus.
All measurements are carried out in the

same Z height of the CMM. Residual
perpendicularity errors of the CMM can
lead to serious measurement errors in the
case of measurements at other Z heights.
Depending on the position of the rotary
table in the measuring range, it might
occur that the complete rotation range is
not covered.
2-sphere method
The RT axis is qualified over the

entire height of the workpiece.
This compensates for residual
perpendicularity errors of the
CMM and they have less of an
effect on the measurement
inaccuracy.
master styli.
Relatively long qualification period.

Either special attachment required on
which both spheres are fastened, or
laborious manual setting of the base
alignment for each run.
not covered.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-87
Method
Advantages
Disadvantages
Measurement
cylinder method
Measurement cylinder required.

The RT axis is qualified over the
entire height of the cylinder. This Master stylus can not be used.
compensates for residual
perpendicularity errors of the
CMM and they have less of an
effect on the measuring
uncertainty.
Short measurement period
Simple attachment; the cylinder is
fastened to the rotary table in a
way that can reproduced at any
time.
Self-centering
method
Very fast method.

master styli.
All measurements are carried out in the

same Z height of the CMM. Residual
perpendicularity errors of the CMM can
lead to serious measurement errors in the
case of measurements at other Z heights.
not covered.
Accordingly, these methods are suitable for different applications:

Method
Application
1-sphere method
Standard method for relatively low accuracy requirements.

Ideal for flat workpieces with large diameters (e.g. ring gears). The highest
accuracy is achieved if the workpiece is located at approximately the same
measurement height as the sphere was for determination of the axis.
2-sphere method
For tall workpieces.
Measurement
cylinder method
For tall workpieces.

This method can also be used for the measurement of shafts with low
deviations in shape. Instead of using a measurement cylinder, the rotary table
axis is set directly on the workpiece prior to each run.
Self-centering
method
Use in proximity to production

The feature for qualifying the rotary table axis can be secured directly onto the
workpiece palette. This makes it possible to requalify the rotary table axis prior
to every workpiece measurement without wasting a great deal of time.
These four methods are described below.
4-88
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Qualifying the rotary table axis using the 1-sphere

method
In the 1-sphere method, the rotary table axis is qualified using a
sphere (e.g. reference sphere) with a precise shape. The sphere is
measured in a number of rotary table positions (usually six).
CMM
Rotary table axis
CMM
CMM
To qualify the rotary table axis with the 1-sphere method:

1 Secure the reference sphere onto the rotary table top, as far to the
outside as possible.
2 Use the master stylus or another qualified stylus.
3 Open a new measurement plan.
NOTE
hss
An RT axis measurement plan is supplied with Calypso that

corresponds to the procedure described below.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-89
4 Select Resources Prepare rotary table or click on the Rotary

Table button in the list of Prerequisites.
The Rotary Table dialog box appears on the screen.
5 Tick the RT activated for this Meas. Plan check box.

6 Click on RT home position to move the rotary table to its home
position.
7 Select Measure RT axis.
This specifies that the RT axis is qualified with this measurement
plan.
You receive the following message:
4-90
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9 Click OK to confirm the message.

10 Measure the reference sphere with 6 points.
Make sure that the Base alignment does not rotate with RT
entry is selected in the definition template of the sphere under
Nominal Definition.
11 Use this sphere to form a base alignment.
12 Open the definition template for the sphere and use Nominal
Definition Pattern Rotational pattern to place a loop
over the sphere.
13 Enter 0/0/0 for the Center.
The coordinates of the sphere are required here. As this sphere sets
the base alignment, the coordinates are 0/0/0.
14 Under Angle increment, enter the desired value (e.g. 60) and
under Real number the matching number of sphere
measurements (e.g. 6).
15 Select Turn rotary table and confirm with OK.
(This means the base alignment can no longer be run.)
16 In the toolbox or via Measure, select a circle and a plane.
17 Under Nominal Definition, select Recall at the two features.
18 For the circle and the plane, select all spheres in the loop.
19 Link the circle and the plane into a perpendicular.
Table button in the list of prerequisites.
21 Click on the square Feature for RT axis button and select the
perpendicular in the list.
22 Click on OK to confirm your input.
A message appears on the screen.
23 Click on YES to confirm.
24 Define the clearance planes for the sphere.
25 Start the CNC run.
You can either select all features and set the current selection as
measurement scope, or you create features by, for example,
specifying tolerances for the angles of the perpendicular.
After the CNC run, the RT axis is qualified and saved on the computer
(not in the measurement plan). This RT axis can now be used for
workpiece measurements.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-91
Qualifying the rotary table axis using the 2-sphere

method
In the 2-sphere method, the rotary table axis is qualified using two
spheres (e.g. reference spheres) of exact shape at different
measurement heights. Both spheres are measured in a number of
rotary table positions (usually 6).
Mechanical
rotation axis
CMM
Rotary table axis

qualified with Z'
CMM
CMM
CMM
To qualify the rotary table axis with the 2-sphere method:

1 Secure the reference spheres onto the rotary table top at different
heights, as far to the outside as possible.
The different heights should approximately represent the size of
the workpiece to be measured.
4-92
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)


position.
plan.
8 Click on OK to close the screen.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-93
9 Confirm with OK.

10 Measure the two spheres manually with 6 points each.
NOTE
hss
Make sure that the Base alignment does not rotate with RT menu
item is enabled in the definition template of the spheres under
Nominal Definition.
11 Use the spheres to form a base alignment.
In doing so, place the zero point in the upper sphere; use the lower
sphere for the planar rotation.
12 Open the definition template for the upper sphere and use
Nominal Definition Pattern Rotational pattern to place a
loop over the sphere.
13 Enter 0/0/0 at Center.
The coordinates of the sphere are required here. As this sphere sets
16 Repeat step 12 for the lower sphere. However, 0/0/0 must not be
set under Center, rather the actual coordinates of the spheres in
the base alignment.
17 In the toolbox or via Measure, select a cone.
18 Under Nominal Definition, select Recall.
19 Select all spheres in the loops.
20 Select Resources Prepare RT or click on the Rotary Table
button in the list of prerequisites.
cone in the list.
24 Define the clearance planes for the upper sphere.
You can either select all the features and set the current selection
as the measurement scope, or you create features by, for example,
specifying tolerances for the angles of the cone.
4-94
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Qualifying the rotary table axis using the

measurement cylinder method
In the measurement cylinder method, the rotary table axis is qualified
using a measurement cylinder with an exact shape in two rotary table
positions.
Mechanical
rotation axis
xwz
Computed rotary
table axis at
Z' = Z+xwz
180
CMM
xwz
CMM
CMM
CMM
To qualify the rotary table axis using the measurement cylinder

method:
1 Secure the measurement cylinder onto the rotary table top using,
for example, 3-jaw clamps).
2 Insert a qualified stylus that you can use to probe the cylinder as
far towards the top and bottom as possible.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-95


position.
plan.
4-96
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9 Confirm with OK.

10 Measure the cylinder manually in 2 sections that are as far apart as
possible.
NOTE
hss
In doing so, make sure that the Base alignment does not rotate
with RT menu item is enabled in the definition template of the
cylinder under Nominal Definition.
11 Open the definition template for the cylinder and use Nominal
over the cylinder.
13 Under Angle increment, enter 180 and under Real number
2.
-->translation follows!
15 Probe a point on the measurement cylinder from above.
16 Using the cylinder and the point, set the base alignment.
NOTE
hss
Make sure that you only use the first cylinder in the loop
(Cylinder1(1)) for the base alignment.
17 Link the two cylinders into a symmetry cylinder.
19 Click on the square Element for RT axis button and select the
symmetry cylinder in the list.
20 Enable the Rotationally symmetrical part near RT center and
Retract to current side check boxes.
23 Define the clearance planes for the cylinder.
You can either select all the features and set the current selection
as measurement scope, or you create features by, for
example, specifying tolerances for the angles of the symmetry
cylinder.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-97
NOTE
hss
If your CMM is equipped with a scanning probe, you should record

the cylinder using scanning paths instead of discrete-point
measurement (see Scanning). This leads to more stable results and
thus more exact rotary table measurements.
How to qualify the rotary table axis using the selfcentering method
In the case of the self-centering method, the rotary table axis is
qualified by means of self-centering probing of an entity (hole, cone,
triple cone, etc.) in a number of rotary table positions (usually 6).
To qualify the rotary table axis using the self-centering method:
1 Secure the entity to be measured onto the rotary table top as far to
the outside as possible.
4-98
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

position.
7 Select Measure RT axis. This specifies that the RT axis is qualified
with this measurement plan.
9 Confirm with OK.

10 Select Resources Probe Self Centering.
11 Set the values shown above and confirm with OK.
12 Probe the entity from Z.
NOTE
hss
In doing so, make sure that the Base alignment does not rotate
with RT menu item is enabled in the definition template of the point
under Nominal Definition.
13 Use this point to form a base alignment.
14 Open the definition template of the point and use Nominal
over the point.
The coordinates of the point are required here. As this point sets
18 In the toolbox or via Measure, select a circle and a plane.
19 Under Nominal Definition, select Recall at the two features.
20 For the circle and the plane, select all points in the loop.
21 Link the circle and the plane into a perpendicular.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-99

Table button in the list of prerequisites.
perpendicular in the list.
26 Define the clearance planes.
You can either select all features and set the current selection as
measurement scope, or you create features by, for example,
specifying tolerances for the angles of the perpendicular.
Measuring features with a rotary table

You will find more information on the following topics related to
measuring with the rotary table:
Setting the rotary table axis for measurements
Display of the current status of the RT axis
Mechanical alignment of the workpiece
RT prealignment at start of the CNC run
Definition of the clearance paths
Rotary table position at end of the CNC run
Setting the rotary table axis for measurements

If you want to measure manually or in the CNC run, the setting of the
rotary table axis depends on the type of workpiece:
The workpiece permits direct qualification of the rotary table
axis (e.g. shafts with minor defects in shape).
In this case, select the Measure RT axis option in the Rotary
Table window and proceed with the workpiece in the same way as
described for the measurement cylinder method (see Qualifying
the rotary table axis using the measurement cylinder method on
page 4-95).
For the CNC run in this case, you can also import an existing
measurement plan for qualification of the rotary table axis and
thus insert it in your measurement plan (see How to import a
4-100
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
measurement plan for qualifying the rotary table axis on

page 4-101).
The workpiece does not permit direct qualification of the
rotary table axis, because it only contains features that are not
suitable for setting the rotary table axis (prismatic parts, flat turned
parts, shafts with major defects in shape).
In this case, select the Load existing RT axis option in the Rotary
Table window. A requirement here is that the RT axis has been
qualified beforehand with a corresponding measurement plan (see
Qualifying the rotary table axis on page 4-86).
How to import a measurement plan for qualifying

the rotary table axis
If a workpiece permits direct qualification of the rotary table axis and
you want to use an existing measurement plan to qualify the axis, you
can import this measurement plan into the current measurement plan
for the workpiece concerned.
NOTE
hss
The imported measurement plan must have the same base alignment
as the current measurement plan.
To import a measurement plan to qualify the rotary table axis:
1 Click on the Rotary Table button in the list of prerequisites and click
on the Import Measurement Plan button in the Rotary Table
window.
2 Select the measurement plan that is suitable for the axis
qualification.
Groups with the features of the imported measurement plan are
inserted in both the list of features as well as the list of
characteristics.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-101
Displaying the current status of the RT axis

In the RT travel commands dialog box, you can display the
information on the rotary table axis using File Current status of
RT axis.
Mode:
Current mode: measure workpiece or qualify RT axis.
Date RT axis:
Date and time of the last axis setting as well as position and
orientation of the rotary table axis in the machine coordinate
system.
RT pos absolute:
Current counter status of the rotary table. It is set to zero with RT
home position, not with Set RT position to zero.
Wobble angle and Eccentric specify the position of the current
base alignment in relation to the rotary table axis.
The Angle to main axis is the tilt of the base alignment in relation
to the machine coordinate system.
Presetting for new features:
The mode used to record new features is displayed here.
4-102
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to mechanically align the workpiece

Prior to the measurement, it frequently makes sense to align the
workpiece mechanically with the axes of the CMM using the rotary
table.
To align the workpiece mechanically:
1 Secure the workpiece onto the rotary table and open a new
measurement plan.
2 Probe a feature on the workpiece that should be aligned at a right
angle to the CMM axes (for example, plane, cylinder or 2D line).
4 Click on the Feature button.
5 Select the desired feature for the RT alignment from the list.
Calypso now indicates how many degrees the rotary table has to
be rotated.
6 Move the probe out of the collision area and confirm with OK.
The rotary table is positioned in such a way that the probed feature
lies parallel to a CMM axis.
7 Click on Set RT position to zero.
The current position of the rotary table is set to zero. All other RT
positions in this measurement plan now refer to this home
position.
For this mechanical alignment, you can also use a complete base
alignment. This makes sense when you want to align the workpiece
parallel with the CMM axes after manual setting of the base
alignment.
To align the workpiece mechanically using the base alignment:
1 Open the measurement plan of the desired workpiece.
2 Qualify the base alignment manually.
4 Click on the Base Alignment button.
Calypso now indicates how many degrees the rotary table has to
be rotated.
5 Move the probe out of the collision area and confirm with OK.
The rotary table is positioned in such a way that the base
alignment lies parallel to the CMM axes.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-103
6 Click on Set RT position to zero.

The current position of the rotary table is set to zero. All other RT
positions in this measurement plan now refer to this home
position.
RT pre-alignment at start of run

In Calypso, you can define how the rotary table is to behave at the
start of a CNC run.
2 In order to carry out homing with the rotary table at the start of
each CNC run, enable the RT home position check box.
NOTE
hss
The RT does not move to the home position immediately, only when
the CNC starts.
3 To mechanically align the workpiece for the CNC run, enable the
corresponding check box.
In this case, after setting the base alignment, the rotary table is
positioned in the CNC run in such a way that the axes of the base
alignment run parallel to the CMM axes.
Definition of the clearance paths

In order to be able to turn the rotary table, Calypso must move the
stylus out of the collision area. You can define how this is to take
place in the Rotary Table dialog box (via Resources Prepare RT).
The clearance plane in Calypso is always rectangular. In order to
position the stylus outside the clearance plane for rotary table
rotations, it must be retracted to the length of the diagonals.
However, this is not required in the case of shafts or other rotationally
symmetrical parts secured in the center of the rotary table.
In this case, activate the Rotationally symmetrical part near RT
center check box in the Rotary Table window.
The stylus is now no longer retracted to the diagonals of the clearance
planes, it is now retracted only to the corresponding clearance plane.
Furthermore, by activating the corresponding check boxes, you can
specify whether the stylus is to be retracted to the current side or
upwards (+Z) when the rotary table rotates.
4-104
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Rotary table position at end of the CNC run

It is frequently required that the rotary table be turned to a certain
position at the end of a CNC run (e.g. in the case of manual or
automatic loading systems).
In this case, a characteristic that is measured in this rotary table
position must be at the end of the characteristic list and at the end of
the feature list.
Using the rotary table passively

If you use the rotary table only to place things upon, without using
the actual rotary table function, measuring errors could
occur eventually if the rotary table drifts.
You can automatically have this measuring error corrected by
activating the Passive RT mode before the measurements.
With the aid of the drift correction, measuring errors caused by a

drifting rotary table are avoided because the base alignment rotates
along with the rotary table.
Calypso does not use the nominal position of the rotary table for this,
but the very precisely measured rotation angle of the rotary table.
Measuring features on a passive rotary table

Prerequisites
When measuring a workpiece on a passive rotary table, the following

prerequisites apply:
The RT axis of the rotary table is qualified.
The drift correction is switched on.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-105
If you use features later in the base alignment, reset the RT position of
the rotary table to zero.
Important
When you reset the base alignment of the rotary table to zero, the
relationship to previous results is lost for all further measurements.
For this reason, set the base alignment of the rotary table to zero
before beginning with measuring.
!
hss
RT clearance planes
A few particularities are involved for the clearance planes when a
rotary table is used in a measurement plan.
As soon as the rotary table is active, additional new clearance planes
and clearance groups are available for the features. The designations
of these clearance planes are composed of RTSE or RTG and an axial
direction.
If you use the rotary table with rotationally symmetrical objects such
that the workpiece is always measured from the same direction
(direction of the CMM) as the rotary table is turned, it is
recommended to use these RT clearance planes (RTSE...) or RT
clearance groups (RTG...).
If you use the usual clearance plane (SE), bear in mind that this
clearance plane is linked to the base alignment. In other words, it
rotates about the rotary table axis together with the workpiece (see
illustration).
The RT clearance planes or -groups do not rotate with the base
alignment (and thus the workpiece) but are fixed instead. The position
of the RT clearance planes is referred to the unrotated base alignment
at a RT position of 0 degrees (see illustration).
RT position 45 degree
RT position 0 degree
Y
0
Probing direction
Probing direction
SE +X
SE +X RTSE +X
4-106
61212-2010602
RTSE +X
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Rotary table parameters in the feature

Two additional parameters are important for measurement with the
rotary table: the rotary table position (RT position) and the rotation or
non-rotation of the base alignment.
RT position
When features are measured with the rotary table, exactly one
rotary table position is assigned to each feature. This position is
saved together with the feature.
The rotary table can thus move to the required position for each
measurement, irrespective of the sequence of features in the
measurement plan.
Base Alignment rotating / not rotating
The values received in the machine coordinate system are
converted to the base alignment of the workpiece after correction.
When measurements are made on the workpiece, the base
alignment must virtually be rotated along as well, of course.
If the measurements are to be used to determine the deviations of
the RT axis, however, there would be no difference if the base
alignment were to rotate. In this case, the base alignment must
remain fixed. This is the only way to determine deviations of the
reference feature from the expected position of an ideal axis.
You can change these RT parameters for a feature at the individual
feature and in the Measurement Plan Editor Features.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-107
Changing RT parameters in the feature

RT position
In order to enter, check or change the RT position for the

measurement of a feature, open the definition template of the
feature, click on the Strategy button and double-click to open the
Clearance Data.
The RT position input field is contained in the Clearance Data

dialog box.
Base Alignment
rotating / not rotating
Open the definition template of the feature to set Base Alignment

rotating / not rotating.
To switch off rotation of the base alignment, select the BA not
rotating with RT entry under Nominal Definition.
This setting is suitable for defining the RT axis.
To switch on rotation of the base alignment, select the Nominal
Input entry under Nominal Definition.
This setting is suitable for measuring the workpiece.
Changing RT parameters in the Measurement Plan

Editor Features
You can enter, check and, if necessary, change both additional
parameters in the Measurement Plan Editor Features.
4-108
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
For this purpose, choose the RT position or Base alignment

rotating with RT entry in the menu.
After you have marked the desired feature, enter any angle in the Set
to box or select one of the default incremental angles. Select On or
Off for base alignment rotating.
Measuring a feature in a number of rotary

table positions
It can occur that you require a number of rotary table positions for
measurement of a feature (e.g. when probing a plane from below (
Z)). A distinction must be made here as to whether or not the stylus
has to be moved into the clearance position when the rotary table
rotates.
Case 1: No clearance paths required
The rotary table can be turned without the stylus having to be
moved to the clearance plane (see Example: Probing a bevel
wheel from below (1) on page 4-110).
Case 2: Clearance paths required
For certain or all rotary table rotations, the stylus must be moved to
the clearance plane (see Example: Probing a bevel wheel from
below (2) on page 4-110).
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-109
Example: Probing a bevel wheel from below (1)

Case 1: No clearance paths required
The rotary table can be rotated without the stylus having to be moved
to the clearance plane.
1 Take a plane from the toolbox.
2 Open the Strategy.
3 Click on the RT position button.
Rotary Position is inserted after the clearance data.
4 Open this Rotary Position and enter the desired angle.
5 Click on Run now.
The rotary table moves to the specified position.
7 Probe the first point from on the plane.
8 Click again on RT position or RT step.
Another Rotary Position or Rotary Step is inserted.
9 Open this rotary step.
10 Enter the desired angle increment and click on Run now.
11 After the rotary table has reached the position, confirm with OK.
12 Repeat this procedure until all desired points have been probed.
NOTE
hss
Only the first RT position is displayed in the clearance data as well as

in the Measurement Plan Editor Features.
Example: Probing a bevel wheel from below (2)

Case 2: Clearance paths required
For certain or all rotary table rotations, the stylus must be moved to
the clearance plane.
1 Take a plane from the toolbox.
2 Open the Strategy.
3 If the stylus is not to be moved to the clearance plane, click on the
RT position or RT step button (see Case 1).
4 If the stylus has to be moved to the clearance plane, click on the
Clearance Data button.
5 Select the clearance group (Use RTSE) and the desired RT position
and confirm with OK.
4-110
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Rotational pattern of a feature with rotary

table coupling
With the rotational pattern, you measure similar features or
workpieces that are arranged in a rotationally symmetrical
configuration. All features must possess the same orientation with
respect to the center of rotation (see illustration).
Center of symmetry
If you wish to measure one or several workpieces with rotational

pattern, you can use the rotary table for this purpose. If this
procedure is used, the rotary table always moves in several phases to a
position in which the respective feature (or workpiece) is probed from
the same direction.
Rotate rotary table as
well
In order to use the rotary table for the rotational pattern, select the
Rotate rotary table as well option in the Rotary pattern dialog
box.
Clearance planes
An RT clearance plane that defines the direction for probing the

workpiece is to be selected as the clearance plane.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-111
Angle on workpiece
and RT position
A particularity arises from the different reference systems for angles

on the workpiece and the angle specification for the RT position (see
illustration).
270
90
180
Probing direction 180
0
270
Rotary table
Workpiece
90
270
90
180
180
Probing direction
270
Workpiece
Rotary table
90
If the rotary table (e.g. with a quadrant pattern) is to measure a part

feature that is at an angle of 90 on the workpiece, the rotary table
must rotate in the opposite direction, i.e. to the RT position 270.
4-112
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Defining the clearance planes

Clearance planes enable CMMs with CNC capability to move styli
around the workpiece without risk of collision. These clearance planes
form together a safety cube that acts as a kind of imaginary box
around the workpiece and clamping device, protecting the stylus
against collision.
Additionally, to avoid collisions with other workpieces or objects on
the CMM table, you can define an outer clearance plane (How
to define the outer clearance planes on page 7-39).
Clearance planes
Names of the clearance
planes
The names of the clearance planes, of which the safety cube is

composed, begin with the abbreviation SE, followed by the direction
to be protected. For example, SE +X. The names of clearance planes
that are additionally defined when a rotary table is used consist of the
abbreviation RTSE and the direction to be protected. For
example, RTSE +X.
Do not make the clearance planes unnecessarily large, because in
some cases this could lead to unfavorable routing or even collisions.
!
hss
Prerequisites
Important
Any time the part alignment is changed such that a new origin or axis
alignment is defined, you must redefine the clearance planes. Failure
to do so may result in collisions with the part.
The preconditions that have to be satisfied before you can define the
clearance planes are as follows:
All styli of the current stylus system must be qualified. See How
to qualify a stylus manually on page 4-29.
The size of the probe must be defined in the system setup under
Extras Workroom CMM (on the Probe page).
Method
There are various methods for defining the clearance planes:

You can define the Corners of the cube with the CMM.
You can type in the X, Y and Z locations of the corners manually.
If you do not have a CMM position (or I-POS) button on your CMM
control console (which allows you to record the current position of
the stylus), then you can use the CMM to probe the outside edges
of the part itself as its clearance planes.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-113
If you use a CAD model, you can generate the clearance planes
automatically. All you have to do is tell Calypso how far you want
the clearance planes to be from the workpiece.
These methods are described in the following sections.
Blocking edges
Blocking edges is a way of further restricting stylus travel without the

need to change the size of the clearance planes. This can be useful,
for example, if you have two or more workpieces positioned on the
table or the design of the clamping device is such that it could cause a
collision at an edge. The new route is calculated automatically. See
How to block edges of the clearance plane on page 4-118.
How to define the clearance planes with the

CMM
If you want to use the CMM to define the corners of the clearance
planes, your CMM joystick must have a button that can be used to
confirm the current position of the stylus.
To define the corners of the clearance planes:
1 In the list of Prerequisites, click on the Clearance Planes button.
The Clearance planes window will open.
2 Under Alignment. select the reference alignment for the
coordinates.
The side areas of the safety cube are aligned according to this
reference alignment.
3 Move the CMM to a position approximately 10 millimeters outside
the top rear right corner of the workpiece (position 1):
(1)
(2)
4-114
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4 Press the position button on the right-hand joystick three times to

save the current position.
5 Move the CMM to a position approximately 10 millimeters outside
the opposing diagonal (bottom front left corner) of the workpiece
(position 2):
6 Press the position button on the right-hand joystick three times to
save the current position.
7 Click on OK to accept these values.
The Update Clearance Plane Settings For Defined Features?
message is displayed.
8 Click on YES if you want to update the clearance planes for all
defined features, or on NO if you want to retain the original
clearance planes.
You will find more information on updating clearance planes in
Clearance planes in the Calypso Online Help.
The Clearance Planes button is now green.
How to define the clearance planes manually

If you want to define the corners of the clearance planes manually,
you must enter the x, y and z coordinates for two corners.
2 Under Alignment, select the reference alignment for the
coordinates.
3 Type the coordinate values into the X, Y and Z boxes.
clearance planes.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-115
How to define the clearance planes by

probing
If you want to define the two corners of the clearance planes by
probing, you have to define the X, Y and Z coordinates by probing.
(1)
z y
x
!
hss
(2)
Important
The clearance planes generated by this strategy are very close to the
workpiece.
In order to avoid the risk of damaging a stylus, you should set a
clearance distance of at least 10 mm (see How to move the
approach position closer to the feature on page 7-40).
The Clearance Planes window is opened.
coordinates.
3 Define the first corner (1).
You do this by probing the workpiece in Z, X and Y, consecutively.
Calypso automatically enters the values in each field in turn and
highlights the next field so that you can determine the value by
probing.
NOTE
hss
If a corner is inaccessible, you can move to the corresponding position

on the clearance plane, select the stylus, highlight the appropriate
input field and use the intermediate position.
4 Define the second corner (2).
The procedure is the same as in step 2, but you probe in the
opposite direction.
4-116
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
clearance planes.
How to generate the clearance planes

automatically
If you want to have the clearance planes generated automatically, you
must have the workpiece's CAD file open in the CAD window. All you
have to do is specify the clearance distance (offset) in millimeters.
coordinates.
3 Click on the Clearance Planes from CAD model button.
The dialog box in which you can enter the offset appears on the
screen.
4 Type in the offset in millimeters (e.g. 10) and click on OK.
The computed values appear in the input fields. The clearance
planes appear around the CAD model.
clearance planes.
How to test the clearance planes

Calypso has a function called Test Drive To The Selected Clearance
Plane that you can use to validate the clearance planes.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-117
!
hss
Important
Check that you have defined all the clearance planes (depending on
the geometry of the workpiece, the CMM might not be able to reach
each plane directly).
When you are ready to test drive to a clearance plane:
2 Highlight the clearance plane of your choice (e.g. +Z) by clicking in
the appropriate input field.
3 Click on Test Drive To The Selected Clearance Plane.
The CMM moves to the clearance plane.
!
hss
Important
The stylus will always first travel out in the direction of the +Z axis,
before the CMM moves in the selected direction (e.g. +X).
4 If necessary redefine the value.
5 Select, if necessary, the Coordinate system again.
clearance planes.
How to block edges of the clearance plane

When you block an edge of the clearance planes in this way you
prohibit the CMM from moving along the edge. It is advisable to
block edges if
You have positioned more than one workpiece on the table, or
the clamping device could cause a collision at an edge.
Under these circumstances, blocking the edges can prevent collisions
without the need to change the size of the clearance planes.
4-118
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
To block edges:
1 Select Plan Navigation Block Edges.
The Blocking edges window will open.
Check box for

blocking an edge
NOTE
hss
The bottom edges (the edges of the face on the table) are always
blocked. The -Y or +Y edge is also blocked if the measuring machine
is of the horizontal-arm type. You cannot revoke these settings.
2 Tick the check boxes for the edges you want to block.
3 Click on OK.
The edges you selected are blocked with immediate effect.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-119
Editing measurement plan settings

The measurement plan settings define how actual values, target
values and results are presented. The settings are based on the scales
and units of measure of various geometric elements and are always
saved together with the current measurement plan.
These settings are edited in the Feature representation dialog box:
You can view and edit settings for the entire measurement plan or for
You will find more information on the Features representation
dialog box in the Calypso Online Help.
How to edit measurement plan settings

To check and/or change the settings:
1 To open the settings for the entire measurement plan:
In the list of prerequisites, click on the Feature representation
button, or
In the list of features, select No feature and select Resources
Feature representation.
4-120
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Editing measurement plan settings
2 To open the settings for a single feature:

Mark the entry in the list of features and select Resources
Feature representation.
The Features representation window will open. It shows the
default output settings for the available features (or for the feature
you marked in the list, as applicable).
Be sure to check all settings at the global radio buttons Position,
Angle and Size.
3 If you want to change the setting for a feature, open the picklist of
the feature in question in the Mode column and select Change.
This activates the radio buttons on the right-hand side of the
window.
4 Make all the necessary changes.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you have made all your changes.
6 Click on OK.
The settings are saved and the window is closed.
This dialog box is fully described in Features representation in the
Calypso Online Help.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-121

The measurement plan editor provides you with a quick and easy way
of checking and, if necessary, changing important measurement plan
settings. You can choose whether to apply your changes to the entire
measurement plan (global) or to selected features only.
There are two separate editors, one for features and one for
characteristics:
Measurement Plan
Editor - Features
Use this editor to check and, if necessary, change settings for features.
The settings in question are primarily those relating to clearances in a
CNC run.
For more information, see Measurement plan editor features in
the Calypso Online Help.
Measurement Plan
Editor - Characteristics
Use this editor to regulate how characteristics are output in the

custom printout and define whether characteristics are to be
executed in the CNC run.
For more information, see Measurement plan editor
characteristics in the Calypso Online Help.
4-122
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Temperature compensation
You can configure Calypso to consider the temperature-related
expansion/contraction of the workpiece and the X, Y and Z scales of
the CMM when taking the measurements. Additionally, you may
establish temperature limits that trigger a warning when going above
or below the limits at the start of the CNC run.
The Temperature compensation is of great significance for
precision of the measurements, since the nominal values are generally
based on a workpiece and ambient temperature of 20 C, and the
different materials expand/contract to different degrees as the
temperature varies.
Therefore, the expansion/contraction must be compensated in
accordance with the respective material, if the workpiece cannot be
brought to the reference temperature.
Calypso receives the information about the temperature,
depending on your CMM's equipment, from sensors on the scales
or temperature sensors on the workpiece, through probing with a
temperature probe or simply manually entering the temperature
value.
In any case, you must enter the coefficients of expansion for the
workpiece materials directly.
Most manuals on materials science give the coefficients of
expansion. The following table shows the coefficients of expansion
of certain usual materials:
Material
Coefficient micrometers/C)
Aluminum (2024-T3)
22.7
Aluminum (6061-T6)
24.3
Aluminum (7079-T6)
24.7
Cast iron
11.7
Copper
16.6
Magnesium (HK31A-H24)
25.2
Nickel
13.0
Steel (AISI C1020)
15.1
Steel (AISI 304)
17.8
Carbon steel
11.3
Titanium (B 120VCA)
61212-2010602
9.4
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-123
NOTE
Since the coefficient of expansion depends on the alloy, the values

may vary slightly from one table to another.
hss
Thermal plate bending
Differences in temperature above and below the granite plate of a

CMM can cause a slight curvature of the plate. In high-precision
CMMs, the thermal plate bending effect is also compensated.
The compensation for thermal plate bending of the measuring table is
automatically activated as soon as Calypso calculates the temperature
compensation for the CMM scales. In this case, the plate will be
simulated by a beam model.
How does Calypso learn the coefficients of

expansion?
The coefficients of expansion must always be entered manually if
the workpiece material does not change, just once per measurement
plan How to enter temperatures manually on page 4-130.)
Same workpiece
from different
materials
If you use multiple materials to manufacture the same part,

for example a cast-iron version and an aluminum version, you have
two options:
Create two measurement plans that are identical except for the
coefficients of expansion for temperature compensation.
Use the same measurement plan for both versions, but always
remember to enter the coefficient of expansion for the respective
material before starting a new series.
How does Calypso learn the temperatures?

There are three ways for Calypso learn the actual temperatures:
The CMM has temperature sensors on the scales in the X, Y and Z
directions or on the workpiece. In this case, you need only start the
temperature compensation How to activate temperature
compensation on page 4-125.
Have the CMM do a temperature probing of the workpiece (only
on CMMs with a VAST probe). To do so, you must configure the
temperature probing How to configure automatic temperature
probing (CNC) on page 4-127).
The CMM has neither a temperature sensor nor temperature
stylus. In this case, enter the temperature(s) of the workpiece or
scales that you measured or determined yourself How to enter
temperatures manually on page 4-130).
4-124
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to activate temperature compensation

If the temperature of the workpiece to be measured or the room
temperature is not 20 C (68 F), you can only measure accurately
with temperature compensation activated.
To activate temperature compensation:
1 Click on the Temperature Compensation button.
The Temperature Compensation dialog box appears on the
screen.
2 To activate temperature compensation, tick the Temperature

Compensation on/off check box.
The Temperature probing on/off check box will now appear in
the window.
3 Set under Workpiece temperature of sensor which
temperature sensor should determine the workpiece temperature.
4 Under Workpiece, click in the Coefficient input field and enter
the applicable coefficient of expansion for the workpiece.
5 Activate the Warning if workpiece temperature falls above ...
or below ... check box if such a warning should be displayed at
CNC Start, and enter the upper and lower limits for the
temperature.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-125
6 Activate the Warning, if the difference between workpiece

temperature and qualification temperature of the stylus
used is greater than ... check box if such a warning should be
displayed at CNC Start, and enter the maximum admissible
difference.
Once you have activated temperature compensation, this means the
following:
If your CMM has automatic temperature sensors, the measured
temperatures will be used automatically to correct the
measurements.
If your CMM does not have automatic temperature sensors,
Calypso will automatically display the Temperature
Compensation window before you run a measurement plan. You
can then perform or configure a temperature probing or enter the
measured temperatures yourself.
How to determine the temperatures by

manual probing
If your CMM is equipped with the VAST probe and a stylus with
temperature sensor (temperature stylus), you can use Calypso to
determine the precise workpiece temperature by probing.
To do so, proceed as follows:
screen.
2 Tick Temperature Compensation on/off, followed by the
Temperature probing on/off check box as well (if the
temperature stylus has already been selected, both check boxes are
ticked automatically).
The Probe with temperature sensor at one or several workpiece
points! prompt will appear.
3 If the temperature stylus has not yet been selected: select it now.
4 If the temperature stylus has not yet been qualified: qualify it now
by probing the reference sphere once in line with the shaft.
For the temperature probing, you only need a rough, not a highly
precise qualification of the stylus (Qualifying the styli on
page 4-28). To do this, select the Manual mode and, under
Geometry, the Temperature stylus option.
4-126
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5 Probe the workpiece with the temperature stylus.

In a temperature measurement, the probe travels until it detects
contact with the workpiece and then another 3 mm against the
measuring force.
After the first probing, an entry called Temperature probing will
appear in the list of features.
6 Probe other points on the workpiece.
After each probing, the temperature and the location of the point
will be determined and displayed.
The data regarding the location of the points will be stored in the
technology list for the Temperature probing feature. This can be
edited (How to configure automatic temperature probing
(CNC) on page 4-127).
The measured temperatures will be determined and displayed in
the Temperature Compensation window.
Calypso calculates the average of all of the measured temperatures
and enters this value in the Temperature Compensation
window. This value will be used (instead of the temperature from
any possibly present temperature sensor) for the temperature
compensation for the workpiece.
All of the measured temperatures and the calculated average will
be included in the printed work listing.
How to configure automatic temperature

probing (CNC)
If your CMM is equipped with the VAST probe and a stylus with a
temperature sensor (temperature stylus), you can let the system
perform a Temperature probing automatically in the CNC run.
Temperature probing at
the beginning of a run
If automatic temperature probing is enabled (How to activate

temperature compensation on page 4-125), Calypso will begin
probing the appropriate points on the workpiece with the
temperature stylus at the start of the CNC run (in other words before
the CNC alignment) and will thus determine the temperature of the
workpiece to a high degree of precision.
Adding a temperature
probing feature
The simplest way to add a Temperature probing feature to the

measurement plan is to perform a manual temperature probing
(How to determine the temperatures by manual probing on
page 4-126). A Temperature probing entry with the probed points
will be automatically added to the list of features.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-127
The Temperature probing feature added to the measurement plan

can be edited like any other feature; for example, you can change the
point probed if necessary. You can also copy or delete it. In this
manner, you can add several temperature probed points to a
measurement plan.
NOTE
hss
At the beginning of a CNC run, the system will only perform the
Temperature probing feature that is entered under Feature in the
Temperature Compensation window.
How to configure the temperature probing in a measurement plan:
screen.
2 Tick Temperature Compensation on/off, followed by the
Temperature probing on/off check box as well (if the
temperature stylus has already been selected, both check boxes are
ticked automatically).
The Probe with temperature sensor at one or several workpiece
points! prompt will appear.
3 Cancel and click on the Switch to feature menu button next to
Feature.
The Selection window will open. In contrast to the usual window
for selecting features, this one only lists the Temperature
probing features for selection.
(If the measurement plan does not yet contain any Temperature
probing features, the New option will be preset and the Edit
check box will be ticked.)
4-128
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4 To activate the desired Temperature probing feature, select it

and confirm with OK.
The selected feature will now be shown under Featurein the
Temperature Compensation window.
5 To edit a specific Temperature probing feature, select it, tick the
Edit check box and confirm with OK.
The definition template for the Temperature probing feature will
open and you can begin editing.
To define the probing strategy, click on the Strategy button

and specify the probing method in the Strategy window.
Here you can define a list of points, preset probing and
intermediate points, define CMM steps with and without
probing and insert programmed stops.
Furthermore, you can edit the Clearance data.
With OK, you will be returned to the definition template
6 Confirm the changes with OK.
The selected and edited Temperature probing feature appears
under Feature in the Temperature Compensation window.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-129
Temperature probing
during a CNC start
At the start of the CNC run, the temperature probing is conducted

automatically in accordance with the selected feature. After the
measurement, Calypso calculates the average of all of the measured
temperatures and enters this value in the Temperature
Compensation window. This value will then be used (instead of the
temperature from any possibly present temperature sensor) for the
temperature compensation for the workpiece.
Warnings when
temperature limits are
exceeded
If you have enabled the issuing of a warning when the workpiece

temperature limits have been exceeded, a warning will be issued
accordingly before the run begins. You may decide either to cancel or
to continue the run.
If you have enabled the issuing of a warning when the difference
between the qualification temperature and the current stylus
temperature is exceeded, a warning will be issued accordingly before
the run begins. You may decide either to cancel or to continue the
run.
All of the measured temperatures and the calculated average will be
included in the printed work listing.
Printout
How to enter temperatures manually

If your CMM does not have automatic temperature sensors, you must
enter the actual temperatures yourself. This is done in the following
two situations:
If you have activated temperature compensation and your CMM
does not have automatic temperature sensors, Calypso will display
the Temperature Compensation window before you run a
measurement plan.
If the temperatures displayed are correct, simply click on OK. If
not, enter the actual temperatures and start the measuring plan.
!
hss
Important
While the measurement plan is running, you cannot change the
temperature values.
If your CMM does not have automatic temperature sensors and
you do not conduct a temperature probing, you must activate the
temperature compensation before starting the measurement plan.
At this point, it would be convenient to go ahead an enter the
actual temperatures manually.
To enter the temperatures manually:
4-130
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

screen.
2 Tick the Temperature Compensation on/off check box.

3 If the workpiece temperature is not exactly 20 C, click in the
Temperature input field under Workpiece and enter the actual
temperature (e.g. the temperature of the room in which the
workpiece was stored).
4 If the workpiece is made of a material with a expansion coefficient
different from the one specified, click in the Coefficient input field
under Workpiece and enter the correct coefficient of expansion
for the workpiece.
5 If the temperature in the room which contains the CMM is not
exactly 20 C (68 F), click on the Scales fields and enter the
temperatures from the X, Y and Z scales. (The coefficients of
expansion for the scales are already known to Calypso.)
The compensation values are calculated automatically and
displayed.
6 Confirm the changes with OK.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4-131
4-132
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Chapter
Defining features
.................................................................................................................................
Together with the prerequisites, the features and the characteristics

form the framework of the measurement plan.
There are three ways of defining features. You can probe the
workpiece manually and determine the geometry via the automatic
feature recognition. Alternatively, you can define the nominal values
manually by taking the data from a technical drawing or the CAD
model or importing it from a file.
You can also use patterns for regularly arranged features.
To define geometric objects that cannot be probed, you must interlink
the features.
The measurement strategy is defined together with the feature, in
other words the sequence and the type of probings is defined.

Defining features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Details on definition of the features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Linking features in constructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Defining a measurement strategy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
Path generation measuring features automatically. . . . . . . . . . 5-95
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5- 1
Defining features
Defining features
What is a feature?
A feature is a regular geometric element, or an element that is

defined in a different manner, that is to be measured by the CMM.
Features contain the nominal geometry, which is used for the purpose
of evaluating the size, shape and position. The features are assigned
to the associated characteristics.
NOTE
The various methods for defining features in general are listed below.
Details on the individual features (e.g. how many probing points does
a cone need?) can be found in Details on definition of the
features on page 5-20.
hss
Defining features
Features must be defined before Calypso can work with them. There
are several ways to do this. The alternative that is selected will depend
on the measuring job you wish to perform with Calypso.
How to define features using automatic feature recognition on
page 5-7.
Use Calypso's automatic feature recognition and probe the feature
with the CMM directly on the workpiece. Calypso will recognize
the geometry of the probed feature and will fill the appropriate
This procedure is recommended in most cases.
If necessary, you can deactivate the automatic feature recognition
for each feature type (How to define the automatic feature
recognition on page 5-7).
How to define a feature using definition templates on
page 5-4.
Enter a feature into the measurement plan first and then continue
work with the definition template. This enables you to use the
processing options for measured-value acquisition that are
available in the definition tem-plate (e.g. scanning).
This possibility is also quite useful if you have already devised a
measurement plan or if programming is to be effected away from
the machine.
Importing features from CAD files on page 5-9.
Import an existing CAD file and extract its features into your
measurement plan.
This possibility is also useful if you want to program away from the
machine.
In addition to the above-mentioned possibilities for defining the
feature, you also have the option of defining a feature as a
5-2
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Defining features
construction as a constructed theoretical feature that cannot

be probed by the CMM.
A feature of this kind consists of features that have already been
defined, e.g. an intersection of two features (see Linking
features in constructions on page 5-50).
Another way to define features is by DMIS import. If you have
purchased this option, you can import runs programmed in DMIS
to Calypso and thereby create a regular Calypso measurement plan
with features (see Chapter 13 DMIS import (option) on
page 13-1).
You can use the Characteristic Input option to import features
together with the characteristics from the ProE and UG CAD
systems into Calypso if they are available in a given format (STEP
file in the AP 203 or AP 214 format and ASCII data in the Q-DAS
format, specification of WEPROM) (see Chapter 19
Characteristic input (option) on page 19-1).
Checking use
NOTE
hss
Special measurement
plan elements
During your work, if you forget which features you assigned to which
characteristic, you can check the usage of each feature with Calypso.
Use the Check use of selected Features command which you can
find in the context menu in the list of features. This opens a list of all
characteristics associated with the feature in question.
Details on the individual features (e.g. how many probing points does
a cone need?) can be found in Details on definition of the
features on page 5-20.
In addition to the actual features, you can include special
measurement plan elements in the list of features:
Branch to GEAR PRO (Additional features Holos and Gear on
page 5-43)
HOLOS macros (Additional features Holos and Gear on
page 5-43)
XML files for Blade PRO (Turbine Blade additional feature on
page 5-45)
Macro measurement plans (Using macros in the measurement
plan on page 7-18)
Definition template for features

A definition template offers you the following editing options:
Enter comments.
Define a measurement strategy.
Restrict the degrees of freedom for coordinates.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-3
Defining features
Change clearance groups.

Change the mode for nominal value definition.
Assign a different part alignment.
Define characteristics and their tolerances.
You will find more information under Definition template (feature)
in the Calypso dialog reference in the Online Help.
The appearance of the definition template in the Features window
will depend on the features that have been selected. This illustration
shows the definition template for the Plane feature as an example.
How to define a feature using definition templates

When you define a feature, a definition template will be displayed in
the measurement plan area. This template is always displayed:
When Calypso recognizes a feature automatically
When you choose an entity from a menu or a toolbox and doubleclick it
When you edit a feature
When you define a feature for your part alignment.
5-4
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Defining features
To copy the feature into the measurement plan and then probe it:
1 Click on the Features button to view features in the measurement
plan area.
2 Select the required feature in the Features submenu or under
Features Additional features.
The feature appears in the measurement plan.
3 Double-click on the feature to open its definition template.
Calypso is ready to record measured values.
4 Probe the feature.
The values that are determined by Calypso are automatically entered
in the corresponding fields of the definition template.
If you do not wish to probe a feature manually, Calypso can take care
of this for you. See Path generation measuring features
automatically on page 5-95.
Automatic feature recognition and

automatic feature end
Calypso is already able to recognize the probed feature automatically
after just a few probings. Automatic feature recognition is possible for
the following features:
Settings
Feature
Min. probings:
Point
2-D Line
Plane
Sphere
Symmetry Point
Circle
Cylinder
Cone
Ellipse
Rectangle
Slot
The automatic feature recognition is defined in the system setup. This

is where you define the features for which automatic feature
recognition is to be used (How to define the automatic feature
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-5
Defining features
This can be useful to exclude certain error codes or to define only

certain features, for example, in optical measurements of bores where
bores are just to be identified as circles.
Procedure
If you want to use the automatic feature recognition, simply probe

the geometric element on your workpiece. Calypso enters the
recognized feature in the list of features and opens the definition
template (see How to define features using automatic feature
The definition template offers you several options for working with
the feature (see Definition template for features on page 5-3).
Automatic feature end

If you activate the Automatic Feature End function, you can define
how many times Calypso should probe the feature to determine it.
The automatic feature recognition can, therefore, not be used in this
case.
Settings
Procedure
The automatic feature end is defined in the system setup. You can
specify the number of probings. The default setting is as follows:
Feature
Max. probings:
Point
2-D Line
Plane
Sphere
Circle
Cylinder
Cone
12
Ellipse
Rectangle
Slot
When it probes, Calypso must know which feature you want to

measure. Begin by adding the feature to the measurement plan, then
open the definition template and take probings.
The CMM will stop the measurements automatically when the
specified number of measuring points for a particular feature have
been taken.
5-6
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Defining features
How to define the automatic feature recognition

To define automatic feature recognition:
1 Select Extras Workroom Measurement.
The System Set Up dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Click on the Features bookmark.
3 Click on the arrow in the top right corner in the notebook.
4 Click on the Feature Recognition tab.
The notebook page for defining the automatic feature recognition

is opened. Automatic feature recognition for all features is
activated by default.
5 Deactivate the Allowed check box for each feature that you want
to exclude from the automatic feature recognition.
6 Accept the settings with OK.
Automatic feature recognition is thus configured for the entire
measurement plan.
How to define features using automatic feature

recognition
In the case of automatic feature recognition, simply probe the
geometric element on your workpiece. Calypso enters the recognized
feature in the list of features and opens the definition template. The
definition template offers you several options for working with the
feature (see Definition template for features on page 5-3).
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-7
Defining features
To define features using automatic feature recognition:

1 Click on the Features button to view features in the measurement
plan area.
(The features used for the definition of the base alignment should
already be displayed.)
2 Select the stylus you want to use for probing, if the correct stylus is
not already illuminated on the control console of the CMM.
3 Using the joysticks, move the stylus to the feature and probe the
first point.
Example: If the feature is a sloping plane on the side of a
workpiece, move with the X/Y joystick over one corner of this
plane and then probe in the Z axis.
Once you have probed the point, Calypso will show the Point 1
feature in the template for the feature definition. (For detailed
information on the features template, see How to define a
feature using definition templates on page 5-4.
4 Probe the next point.
Example: On a sloping plane, move over another corner of the
plane and probe again in the Z axis.
In the template, Calypso will update the feature to a 2-D line.
5 Probe the number of additional points required to define the
feature in question (at least 3 points for a plane, for example; 5
points for a cylinder, and so on).
Example: On a sloping plane, move to the remaining two corner
points and probe each in the Z axis. Make sure that the points are
not on the same line. (You should therefore move the stylus a little
in the X and Y axes). Calypso recognizes the plane this way and
displays it in the evaluation field.
6 If Calypso does not recognize the right feature, you can choose it
manually from the features in the CAD Entities selection list.
!
hss
Important
You cannot change the type of geometric element subsequently.
7 Click on OK to confirm your choice.
You now have defined a feature to be measured on the workpiece (in
addition to those already defined for the part alignment).
To define additional features for this workpiece, repeat the same
steps. When following this normal procedure, Calypso will
automatically recognize which feature you wish to measure.
5-8
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Defining features
Importing features from CAD files

The data for a workpiece is frequently available in the form of a CAD
file. As well as loading and displaying the CAD model, Calypso also
enables you to extract all recognizable features from the file. A large
part of a measurement plan can therefore be created directly from a
CAD file (see also How to create a measurement plan from a CAD
file in the Online Help).
Prerequisite
NOTE
hss
Procedure
Calypso can convert CAD files with the following file name
extensions:
Extension
Creating program
.sat
ACIS (standard)
.exp
CATIA (optional)
.model
CATIA (optional)
.CATPart
CATIA V (optional)
.prtxx, .prt
Pro-E (optional) / Unigraphics (optional)
.asm
Pro-E (optional)
.igs
IGES (optional)
.vda
VDAFS (optional)
.dxf
CAD systems such as AutoCAD and Caddy, etc.
.stp
STEP (optional)
.sldprt
Solid-Works
When you load an .asm file, the individual parts must also be in the
same directory. Calypso assembles the individual parts automatically
to form a CAD model.
Perform the following steps:
Load a CAD file,
define the parameters of the global measurement strategy
(optional), and
extract the features.
NOTE
If you have loaded 2D data (e.g. from IGES, VDA or DXF format), you
will have to define the third coordinate manually either by entering
an offset in the Modify CAD Model dialog box or subsequently by
changing the nominal geometry.
NOTE
(Only for Calypso older than version 3.8:) If you have a ProE or
Unigraphics license, you are not permitted to change the hostname
hss
hss
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-9
Defining features
and server code of the computer, as otherwise your license becomes

invalid. If the license is lost, the interface no longer functions.
How to load a CAD file

Before you can load a CAD file, a measurement plan must be open.
Note that features are added to the measurement plan when the CAD
file is loaded and the features are extracted in other words, the
measurement plan is expanded.
To load a CAD file:
1 Open a new measurement plan. (See How to create a new
measurement plan on page 4-4 or How to open an existing
measurement plan on page 4-4.)
2 Select CAD CAD File Load.
The Open CAD File dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Select the CAD file of your choice and click on Open.

The file will be loaded. If this is an .asm file of Pro-E, Calypso
searches for the respective individual parts in the same file
directory and combines these automatically to form a CAD model.
If you are loading an IGES file, the progress of the data conversion
will be shown in a window.
The model will then be shown in the CAD window.
NOTE
hss
When converting an IGES file, a log file with information on the

converted features that are contained in the file will be created. Select
CAD Logfile IGES to display this file.
Once the model has appeared in the CAD window, you will be able to
include the features in the measurement plan. You might want to edit
the CAD file beforehand, refer to Working with the CAD window
on page 3-1.
You will find more information under Working with CAD data in
the Online Help.
5-10
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Defining features
You can now proceed to specify metrology parameters.
How to specify metrology parameters for the CAD

features to be loaded
Before extracting features from an open CAD file, you can specify the
strategy Calypso will subsequently employ to measure the features in
question.
The procedure for specifying the parameters is as follows:
1 Select CAD Filter Set Default Measurement Strategy.
The Technology defaults window will open.
2 Activate the check box of the feature for which you want to
specify the parameters and then click on the Settings button.
The appropriate strategy dialog box opens:
3 One after the other, double-click on each list entry for which you
want to make strategy settings. Alternatively, you can select the
entry and click on the magnifier .
The appropriate definition dialog box opens.
4 Close each definition dialog box again by clicking on OK.
5 When you have finished defining the strategy, click OK.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-11
Defining features
6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 for all other types of feature that you want to
assign.
As soon as you extract a solid geometry from the CAD model or
extract a feature via the filter (using CAD Filter ...), Calypso
assigns the strategies that you predefined to these features.
How to extract features from the CAD model

Extraction is the process by which Calypso detects the regular
geometric elements in the CAD model, as well as the elements
defined in a different manner, and adds them to the list of features. To
do this, it will be necessary to load a CAD file and, if necessary, define
the measurement strategy (see General settings for the path
generation method on page 5-97).
The procedure for defining features with the CAD model is as follows:
1 Select CAD Filter All Features (or alternatively, planes,
circles, cylinders, cones or points only, as applicable).
The features are displayed in the measurement plan area in a
separate window (example: test cube):
2 Select Edit Select All or highlight the individual features you

want to insert into your measurement plan.
5-12
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Defining features
Important
Calypso assigns the stylus currently activated on the control console
or via the CAD window to all features.
hss
3 Click on Apply.
The features are extracted and transferred to the measurement
plan. This can take a few seconds to complete.
4 When transfer is completed, confirm by clicking on OK.
You have now transferred the features defined in the CAD file to your
measurement plan. You can edit the individual features in the usual
way.
Bear the following in mind:
You must define the probing points if there are none defined in the
strategy list of the feature. You can do this with the CMM or using
only the CAD window (you will find more information in the
Online Help under How to define a probing point in the CAD
window).
Calypso assigned all features to the same stylus. You will have to
assign a more suitable stylus for some features, i.e. one with which
the CMM can probe the features in question (see Editing a
measurement plan on page 7-11).
How to import features from the CAD model

to the measurement plan
You can import complete features from the CAD model displayed on
the screen into the measurement plan. To do so, use the menu
options from the Selection list on the CAD toolbar.
1 To import a plane, cylinder or cone into the measurement plan:
Select Extract features from the menu.
Click on the required feature in the CAD model
The feature is highlighted and immediately added to the list of
features.
2 To define a discrete point:
Select Define a Space Point from the menu and click on the
point of your choice on the surface of the CAD model.
The point is now defined.
3 To define a line on a plane:
Select Define Line on a Plane.
Click on a point on the line you want to define.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-13
Defining features
Use the mouse to drag the line.

The line is shown on the screen.
4 To define two mutually opposite space points:
Select Distance check.
Click on a point on the model.
The two space points and the connection between them are
shown at the selected position on the screen. With the aid of these
two points, you can check the wall thickness or the material
deviation at the place in question, for example.
5 To define a circle on a cylinder:
Select Define Circle on a Cylinder.
Click on a point on the cylinder in question.
The circle is shown at the corresponding level on the screen.
6 To define a probing point:
Open the feature in question.
Click on Strategy and select the appropriate stylus.
Select Define Points.
Click on the probing point of your choice on the surface of the
CAD model.
The probing point is now defined.
Multiplying features by patterns

If a feature exists on a workpiece more than once in a regular pattern,
there is no need to define it separately.
The feature can be defined once and multiplied by means of a
pattern. You can define the pattern for a feature in the definition
template under Nominal Definition.
NOTE
hss
Patterns are not permitted for the following features:

General curve
General surface
Curve
3D Curve
All constructions
5-14
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Defining features
Pattern procedure
Calypso supports regular and free pattern types. The available regular
pattern types are linear and circular patterns:
Linear patterns
Circular patterns
Free patterns
1-D Linear Pattern
Polar Pattern Offset
Pattern with position list
2-D Linear Pattern
Rotational Pattern
In the case of linear patterns, the feature is repeated at regular
intervals along one or more axes.
In the case of circular patterns, the feature is arranged with a certain
angle offset around a centre.
In the case of polar pattern offset, the local feature coordinate
system keeps its orientation with respect to the workpiece
coordinate system.
In the case of a rotational pattern, the local feature coordinate
system keeps its orientation with respect to the center of rotation.
With free patterns, the additional positions of the feature can be
freely defined. To do so, complete a position list in Calypso.
Pattern types
You can also work with pattern types. If you require a certain pattern
type not only on one individual feature, define this pattern type with
its parameters and save it under a new name.
You can then use this pattern type for other features.
!
hss
Switching a pattern on
and off
Important
If you edit a pattern type, all patterns that are based on this type will
also be changed.
If a pattern is defined, you can switch it on and off again via the
context menu or via the Measurement Plan Editor Features.
Pattern for group of features

You can also define a pattern for a group of features in the same way
as for individual features.
The pattern is then used for all features and sub-groups of the group
unless a pattern has already been defined and activated for them.
If a feature or a group is removed from a group with pattern, it loses
its pattern.
If a feature or a group is placed into a group with a pattern, it adopts
the pattern unless another pattern has been defined and activated
beforehand.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-15
Defining features
Switching a pattern on
and off
The pattern for a group can be defined and activated via the context
menu or via the Measurement Plan Editor Features.
How to define a pattern

To define a pattern for a feature:
1 Open the definition template for the feature.
2 Go to Nominal Definition and select the Pattern menu item.
The Selection window will appear on the screen.
3 To use a new pattern, click on New, select the desired pattern type
and click on OK. Enter the parameters in the corresponding dialog
box.
For more information, please see in the dialog reference in the
Calypso Online Help under Polar pattern offset, 1-D Linear Pattern,
2-D Linear Pattern, Rotational pattern and Pattern with position
list.
By using a pattern, this will be entered automatically in the list of
patterns with the name Patternx (x = , 1, 2, ...). You can rename
the feature via the context menu.
4 To use an already existing pattern type, click on Selection of
Pattern, select the desired pattern type and click on OK.
For more information, please see in the dialog reference in the
Calypso Online Help under Polar pattern offset, 1-D Linear Pattern,
2-D Linear Pattern, Rotational pattern and Pattern with position
list.
5-16
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Defining features
5 To edit an already existing pattern type, click on Selection of

Pattern, select the desired pattern type and click on Edit and
make your changes.
Copying properties of features

You can copy certain properties of a feature and assign them to one
or more other features. This means that the information in question
has to be defined only once, while at the same time you can be sure
that the common properties are exactly the same for all the features
concerned.
The following are the properties you can copy to all features:
Coordinate system
Clearance plane
Stylus system
Stylus (only if different styli were not used for the points of the
feature)
Retract Distance
Clearance Distance
The following are the properties you can copy only to like features:
Projection Plane (if defined)
Evaluation settings
Measurement Strategy (measured features only)
Features are referred to as like features if they are of the same type
(e.g. circle, cylinder) and their nominal values have been defined in
the same way (e.g. via recall).
How to copy properties of a feature to other

features
The procedure for copying properties of a feature to other features is
as follows:
1 Click on the feature from which you want to copy properties.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-17
Defining features
2 Click on the Transfer format button in the upper toolbar.

The Copy properties from <Feature_name> dialog box appears
on the screen. All the check boxes are activated by default.
3 Deactivate the check boxes of the properties that you do not want
to copy to other features.
4 Highlight the feature or features to which you want to copy the
properties.
Press and hold down the Shift or Ctrl key if you want to highlight
more than one feature.
5 Click on OK.
Copying is started.
Color-coding of features buttons

When a feature is listed in the measurement plan area, the
background color of its button tells you its status:
Light gray (same as measurement plan area): The feature has not
yet been defined fully.
Dark gray: The feature has been defined fully.
Green / red: The feature has been defined and measured results
have been gathered.
5-18
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Defining features
Tips and tricks for defining features

You can cancel the definition of a feature at any time, even while
probing is in progress: Click on Reset and then click on OK.
You can restart the definition of a feature at any time, even while
probing is in progress: Click on Reset and then repeat probing.
If the CAD model of the part's features is not fully on the screen or
is not displayed at all, the image may have been zoomed or shifted
in the CAD window. Click on the Fit button to resize the model to
fit into the CAD window.
If the feature does not seem to be properly defined but you have
clicked OK to save it, you can delete it from the measurement plan
and then define it again. See How to delete features or
characteristics on page 7-7.
If you want to change the order in which features are displayed,
you can easily move a feature to a new location. Click on the
feature (either its button or its name) and hold the left mouse
button down, then drag the feature to the new location.
If the probing point you used is unsuitable, you can delete it by
clicking on the Undo last probing button (or pressing F3 on the
standard control console).
If you want to delete a probing point defined some time in the
past, proceed as described in the section entitled How to use
the context menu of the strategy list on page 5-86.
Probing or position points can be added to a feature at any time.
First, open the definition template of the feature.
To add a probing point, probe the point with the CMM. The
point is added automatically.
If you want to add an intermediate position, you must check
that the original stylus is activated.
Move the stylus to the appropriate position, then press the
button on the right-hand joystick to accept the position or click
on the Position CMM without probing icon in the strategy
dialog box
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-19
Defining features
Details on definition of the features

Basics of probing
When you define features, two basic rules apply to probing:

Produce as large a measurement basis as possible. If, for example,
you define the face of a cube as a plane, probe close to the corners
of the workpiece.
Probe as many points as possible (taking into account the time
within which you want the CNC run to complete). This is
particularly important when you record and evaluate shapes on a
workpiece.
Inside or outside
feature?
In most instances, Calypso can automatically identify the feature as an

inside or outside feature from the probing direction.
You also have the option of defining a feature as an inside or outside
feature. However, always bear in mind that this affects the
combination of the routes and the calculation of the tangential
features.
You define a feature as an inside or outside feature in its definition
template by clicking on the Inside/Outside Feature button.
The button indicates whether the inside feature or outside
feature property is currently valid (illustration: inside feature on the
left, outside feature on the right).
Correction of stylus tip

radius
The measured value of a measurement sent to the CMM is always the

center coordinates of the stylus tip. The coordinates of a measured
value, therefore, always differ from those of the contact point the
measured value you want at the time of measurement by the radius
of the stylus tip.
probing
direction
probing
radius
measured
value
desired
measured value
Calypso automatically corrects the measured value, so you always

receive the coordinates of the actual contact point. There may be a
residual error despite this correction, but you can usually prevent this.
5-20
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Selecting angle
orientation
In the Tolerance For: group, you can immediately enter a tolerance

for the corresponding nominal value if you activate a check box here.
Calypso also automatically adds a characteristic to the measurement
plan that checks the specified tolerance.
If you activate the A (for angle) check box, you can freely select both
the reference axis and the orientation for specification of the angle.
One of eight possible angle symbols indicates which reference axis
and orientation are currently valid.
To change the set orientation of the angle, click on the button with
the angle symbol and select the desired orientation in the Select
angle format dialog box.
Point feature
Menu: Features Point
Use the Point feature to determine the coordinates of individual
points on the workpiece, in order to size the workpiece, for example.
Probing strategy
You can measure a point anywhere on a surface.
probing direction
measured
value
correction
To obtain the right correction for the stylus tip radius for normal
vector directions which are non-parallel to the coordinate system, it is
possible to switch to the space point procedure by clicking on
Evaluation in the definition template. In case of an unknown normal
vector direction, the correction will be automatically defined.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-21
Defining features
Evaluation
Click on the Output button to open the Evaluation dialog box in

which you can enter details relating to the conversion and correction
of the measured values. Under Space Point Mode, you can now
select the manner in which the point is to be calculated:
Mode
Type of correction/conversion
Touch Point
Radius correction in the direction of a coordinate system axis

corresponding to the probing direction.
Here, probing is effected in a coordinate axis direction; otherwise the
radius correction will be effected in the direction of the coordinate
axis which is closest to the probing direction.
(default setting)
Plane Point
Radius correction in normal vector direction.
Space Point
Radius correction in normal vector direction,

followed by projection onto the normal of the nominal point.
The radius (length of the tripod) used to measure the normal can be
set using the Radius for space point normal measurement menu
item in the Measurement Plan Editor Features.
Net Point
Radius correction in normal vector direction,

followed by projection onto the coordinate system axis which
corresponds to the reference axis of the nominal plane.
Midpoint
No radius correction.
This can be useful, for example, in the case of self-centering probing
(see Alternative probing methods (self-centering probing) on
page 5-88) between two teeth of a gear wheel in order to use this
point for alignment (plane rotation).
5-22
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
The corrections that are made for the respective point type are shown
in the diagram.
Probing direction
Nominal
normal
Nominal contour
Actual
normal
5
1
Actual conto
1
2
3
4
5
NOTE
hss
Nominal point
Touch Point
Plane-Point
Space Point
Net Point
Midpoint
The contact point on the surface must always be entered as the

nominal position for a point, regardless of the desired Space Point
Mode.
Circle feature
Menu: Features Circle
Using the Circle feature, you can probe bores, plugs and shafts with a
circular cross section or workpiece parts with arcs. You can project the
circle or arc onto any measured plane. Calypso uses the probed points
to compute the circle or arc which best fits the probing points.
The start angle and angle segment (for an arc) are specified in the
Probing strategy
The minimum number of points is 3. The probing points should be on

a section perpendicular to the axis of the circle you want to measure.
It is advisable to probe at least 4 points.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-23
Defining features
Automatic feature
recognition
Make sure that all the points you probe are at approximately the same
height. If the height differences between the individual points are
excessive, Calypso will compute a cylinder instead of a circle. If this
happens, you can reconstruct a circle manually in the Geometry
menu.
Feature's local
coordinate system
The origin of the feature's local coordinate system is in the center of

the measured circle (not in a projection plane of the coordinate
system).
origin of LA
Gage correction
qualification
NOTE
hss
Gage correction qualification is a method by which you can determine

the dynamic bending parameters for circles and cylinders occurring
during measurement and correct them mathematically during further
measurements.
Gage correction qualification is only useful for scanning with a
measuring probe.
Plane feature
Menu: Features Plane
Use the Plane feature to probe plane surfaces of the workpiece the
position or inclination of which you want to determine.
Calypso computes the plane from the points which you probe. In the
definition template the computed length and width of the plane are
displayed along with the coordinates of the probing points.
Probing strategy
Probe at least 3 points. Take care to spread the points as evenly as

possible over the plane.
Automatic feature
recognition
If the points are all in a line (an arc of minimal curvature), Calypso will
compute a line instead of a plane. If this happens you can reconstruct
a plane manually in the Geometry menu.
5-24
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
This illustration shows the positions of the projected angles W1 and

W2.
Result output
projection into the Z/X plane

normal
spatial view
A1=0
plane
surface normal
projection into the Z/Y plane
example plane
A2
normal
plane
Y
Feature's local
coordinate system
The origin of the feature's local coordinate system depends on the

position of the plane relative to the axes of the coordinate system:
Bottom left for a viewing position in +X, -Y and +Z.
Bottom right for a viewing position in -X, +Y and -Z.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-25
Defining features
The illustration below is an example showing how this applies to 5

planes of a cube.
Z
Y
X
origin of the respective LA
2-D Line feature

Menu: Features 2-D Line
The 2-D Line feature is primarily for probing lines and straight lines on
any plane on the surface of the workpiece. Calypso computes a
mean-value line through the points you probe.
Types of display
The 2-D line can be defined and represented in two different ways:
with X, Y and Z values for the start and end points of the line,
with one point (X, Y, Z) of the line, the specified length and the
projected angles W1 and W2.
You can toggle between the two types of display in the Feature
representation dialog box, which you can open from the
prerequisites or via Resources Feature representation.
Probing strategy
Probe at least two points (three are recommended, however).
Automatic feature
recognition
Make sure that all the probing points are roughly in line. Otherwise,
Calypso will compute a plane instead of a line. If this happens, you
can open the Geometry menu and regenerate the feature as a line.
5-26
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Feature's local
coordinate system
The origin of the feature's local coordinate system (FLCS) is at the first
point on the line which defines the line fully when first registered in
these examples points 1, 4 and point 3.
or
1
or
Result output
After measurement, the following results are output in the definition

template and in the printout.
Results
Meaning
X, Y, Z
Coordinates of the origin of the local coordinate

system
W1 (Z/X)
Projected angle 1. Projection in this case is in the

X/Z plane; the reference axis is X.
In the printout the projected angles are
referenced to the position of the feature
In the definition template the projected angles
are referenced to the position of the feature's
plane normal (the 2-D line corresponds to a
reduced plane).
W2 (Y/X)
Projected angle 2. Projection in this case is in the

X/Y plane, the reference axis is X.
In the printout the projected angles are
referenced to the position of the feature
In the definition template the projected angles
are referenced to the position of the feature's
plane normal
Sigma
Scatter referenced to the best-fit computed

feature
Min/Max
Minimum and maximum deviation, referenced to

the best-fit computed feature
Form
Difference between minimum and maximum

deviation, referenced to the best-fit feature.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-27
Defining features
The illustration below shows the positions of projected angles W1 and

W2 for a straight line on a cube. The reference axis is always the
coordinate axis with which the projected angles are both less than
45 in this case the X axis.
projection into the X/Y plane
spatial view
Z
A1
X
example line
projection into the X/Z plane
A2
3-D Line feature

Menu: Features 3-D Line
A 3-D line cannot be measured: it is computed from a recall of at least
two features. You can, for example, employ a 3-D line to represent
the axis of a shaft by using several circles for the purpose of
definition.
Open the Nominal Definition selection list and select Recall. This
opens the Selection dialog box and you can select the features of your
choice.
The resulting 3-D line is placed through the center point of the
selected features.
5-28
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Cylinder feature
Menu: Features Cylinder
You can use the Cylinder feature to probe bores, plugs and shafts. As
opposed to the circle, a cylinder yields information about height and
depth as well.
Probing strategy
You must probe at least five points in order to identify a form as a

cylinder:
1 Probe a circle first, i.e. at least the first three points on a section
perpendicular to the cylinder axis.
The axis of this section will be the provisional cylinder axis.
2 Probe at least two more points on another section perpendicular to
the axis of the first section.
Calypso computes the data of the cylinder from the circular sections
at the different levels. The axis of the cylinder is computed
perpendicularly through the centers of the two circular sections.
If you probe nine or more points, there is no need for a probing
strategy.
Automatic feature
recognition
If geometrical error is excessive for a cylinder, Calypso computes a

cone instead of a cylinder. This also happens if the two circular
sections are too close together. If this happens, you can reconstruct a
cylinder manually in the Geometry menu.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-29
Defining features
Result output

W2.
Z
spatial view
Z
X
A1
Y
example cylinder
Z
Y
A2
Feature's local
coordinate system
5-30
The origin of the feature's local coordinate system is on the plane

with the lowest probing point (not on a projection plane of the
coordinate system).
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Gage correction
qualification
NOTE
hss
Gage correction qualification is a method by which you can determine

the dynamic bending parameters for circles and cylinders occurring
during measurement and correct them mathematically during further
measurements.
Gage correction qualification is only useful for scanning with a
measuring probe.
Cone feature
Menu: Features Cone
Use the Cone feature to probe the location and position of insideand outside cones, the direction of the cone axis and the cone's taper
angle.
Probing strategy
You must probe at least 6 points in order to identify a form as a cone.

1 Measure three points on a circular section parallel to the axis of the
cone.
2 Move the CMM to another height.
3 Measure three points at this height.
4 Measure other sections, as in steps 2 and 3.
Calypso computes the data of the cone from the circular sections at
the different heights. The axis of the cylinder is computed
perpendicularly through the centers of the circular sections.
If you probe nine or more points, there is no need for a probing
strategy.
Automatic feature
recognition
If cone angle CA is very small, Calypso might compute a cylinder

instead of a cone. The measuring uncertainty for the cone axis will be
too high if the height difference between the circular sections is very
small, and Calypso might compute a circle instead of a cone.
If this happens you can reconstruct a cone manually in the Geometry
menu.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-31
Defining features
Result output

W2. In this example, the reference axis is -Z.
Z
spatial view
Z
X
A1
example cone
Z
Y
A2
Feature's local
coordinate system

the circle of smaller diameter. The direction of the axis is from the
smaller toward the larger circle.
Sphere feature
Menu: Features Sphere
Calypso uses the Sphere feature to compute the diameter and the
center coordinates of a sphere, spherical cap or spherical zone.
5-32
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Probing strategy
Probe at least 4 points distributed as uniformly as possible over the

surface of the sphere. If the stylus system and sphere position allow
this, it is best to probe from different directions. The first two points
should be probed near the sphere's pole and the remaining points
along the equator of the sphere.
Automatic feature
recognition
If you fail to probe the points in the recommended manner, Calypso

will not automatically recognize a sphere. If this happens you can
reconstruct a sphere manually in the Geometry menu.
Result output
There are no projected angles for a sphere. D represents the diameter

of the sphere.
3-D Curve feature

Menu: Features Curve
You can use the Curve feature to measure planar sections of bodies
and lift curves (planar curves on the surface of a cylinder). This feature
is extremely versatile and, consequently, it is described in a separate
section (see Curve measurement (option) on page 16-1).
Bear in mind that this feature is not included in the normal Calypso
scope of supply and must be obtained as an option.
3D Curve feature
Menu: Features 3D Curve
You can use the 3D Curve feature to measure freeform surfaces. This
feature is extremely versatile and, consequently, it is described in a
separate section (see Curve measurement (option) on page 16-1).
NOTE
hss
function.
Bear in mind that this feature is not included in the normal Calypso
scope of supply and must be obtained as an option.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-33
Defining features
Ellipse feature
Menu: Features Additional features Ellipse
You can use the Ellipse feature to probe bores, plugs and shafts
having axes not parallel with an axis of the base alignment, as well as
true ellipses. Bear in mind that automatic feature recognition is not
available for ellipses.
The ellipse can be defined in two different ways:
by specifying the center (with X, Y and Z) and the two diameters D
(major diameter) and D2 (minor diameter),
by specifying the two focal points (with X1, Y1, Z1 and X2, Y2, Z2)
and one of the two diameters (diameter D and note indicating
whether this is the larger diameter).
You can toggle between the two types of display in the Feature
representation dialog box, which you can open from the
prerequisites or via Resources Feature representation.
In the definition template, the angles W1 and W2 indicate the
position of the ellipse in relation to the respective plane (X in XY
plane, Y in YZ plane and Z in ZX plane).
If the defining specifications (second type of representation) do not
produce an actual ellipse, the second diameter is set to 0 and the
ellipse is no longer shown.
Probing strategy
5-34
Probe at least 5 points in a planar section. Distribute the points as

uniformly as possible around the circumference of the section.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Result output
The following illustrations show the definition of the minor diameter

D2 and the major diameter D, as well as the location of the focal
points.
M (X, Y, Z)
D2
D large
Dsmall
Feature's local
coordinate system
(X1, Y1, Z1)
(X2, Y2, Z2)

the ellipse. It is not projected onto a plane of the coordinate system.
Slot feature
Menu: Features Additional Features Slot
You can use the Slot feature to measure the length, width, depth and
position of a slot. Projected onto a plane, a slot consists of two
opposite semicircles and two opposite straight lines.
Probing strategies
NOTE
hss
You can use two different probing strategies to measure the slot. In
both cases, you must probe at least five points (in any order).
If there are several points on a segment, make sure that they are
distributed as uniformly as possible.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-35
Defining features
How to distribute the probing points according to the first strategy:

2
5
4
at least two points on one side of the slot,

at least one point on the other side of the slot,
at least one point on each of the semicircles.
How to distribute the probing points according to the second
strategy:
1
at least three points on one semicircle,

at least two points on the other semicircle.
You can distribute other probing points as you wish.
Feature's local
coordinate system
The origin of the feature's local coordinate system is in the slots

center of gravity, i.e. its center point.
5-36
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Rectangle feature
Menu: Features Additional Features Rectangle
You can use the Rectangle feature to probe the length, width, depth
and position of all elements of hollow rectangular geometry.
Probing strategy
Probe at least 6 points. Make sure that all points are spaced as
uniformly as possible over the sides of the rectangle. Probe at least
two points for each side of the rectangle. You must enter the value
for the depth of the rectangular hollow manually in the Length field.
Offset Plane feature

Menu: Features Additional Features Offset Plane
You can use the Offset Plane feature to define from three reference
points a plane which does not actually exist on your workpiece. You
can offset the datum points at will along the probing direction. Bear
in mind that automatic feature recognition is not available for offset
planes.
Probing strategy
You must probe no more and no less than three points and then enter
the offsets:
1 Probe the 3 points.
2 Click on the Output button.
3 In the Point Modification group, click on the Edit button.
The Points offset dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Enter an offset for each point you want to modify. The points are
offset along the probing direction.
5 Close the dialog box to accept the modified settings.
Automatic feature
recognition
An offset plane is not recognized automatically by Calypso. Begin by

adding the feature to the measurement plan and then take probings.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-37
Defining features
Symmetry Point feature

Menu: Features Additional Features Symmetry Point
You can use the Symmetry Point feature to have Calypso compute a
point which is symmetrical with two probing points. Calypso
computes the coordinates of the symmetry point and displays the
distance between the two points.
Probing strategy
You must probe no more and no less than two points in order to
compute a symmetry point.
1 Open the definition template.
2 Probe the first point.
3 Probe the second point from the opposite direction.
4 Close the definition template.
Automatic feature
recognition
Calypso automatically recognizes a symmetry point.
Result output
Calypso computes the coordinates and the normal vector of the

symmetry point and the distance between the original two probing
points.
Radius Point feature

Menu: Features Additional Features Radius Point
Using the radius, sphere and angle points features, you can select the
applicable radius correction in different situations with discrete-point
measurements in order to define the point of contact correctly.
5-38
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
The Radius Point feature is intended for probing cylindrical elements.

The measured value is corrected in the measuring plane towards the
connecting line between the center of the stylus tip and the specified
center point.
Measuring
plane
R
Cylinder axis
Perform the following steps to measure a radius point:

2 Specify a point on the cylinder axis and the vector of the cylinder
axis.
3 Probe a point.
The actual radius and the coordinates of the probing point are read
out in the definition template.
Automatic feature
recognition
A radius point is not detected automatically by Calypso. First, insert

the feature in the measurement plan, define a center point and then
perform probing.
Sphere Point feature

Menu: Features Additional Features Sphere Point
applicable radius correction in different situations with discrete-point
With the sphere point, the measured value is corrected towards the
connecting line between the center of the stylus tip and the specified
center. The sphere point is intended for probing sphere surfaces. Use
the radius point for cylindrical features.
Perform the following steps to measure a sphere point:
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-39
Defining features

2 Enter the coordinates for the sphere center point and the desired
radius in the Center Point column.
3 Probe a point.
The actual radius of the sphere, the vector from the sphere center
point to the probing point and the coordinates of the probing point
are read out in the definition template.
Using the sphere point feature, you can define the radius of a sphere
with a single probing and specification of the sphere center point.
pre-defined
center of circle
Automatic feature
recognition
Calypso cannot automatically detect a sphere point. First, insert the

feature in the measurement plan, define the sphere center point and
then perform probing.
Angle point feature

Menu: Features Additional Features Angle Point
appropriate radius correction in different situations with discrete-point
With the angle point, the measured value is corrected towards the
normal for the probed plane.
Probing strategy
To measure an angle point, you must specify a reference plane

through the plane origin, a space axis and an angle and then probe
exactly one point.
The actual angle of the probed plane and the coordinates of the
probing point are read out in the definition template.
Perform the following steps to measure an angle point:
2 Enter the values for the for the location of the plane origin in the
left column.
5-40
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
3 Select how you want the reference plane to lie by specifying a

space axis and an angle.
4 Probe a point on the plane that has to be measured.
Using the angle point feature, you can compute the angle between
two planes, for example, by probing. Specify one plane first. Calypso
computes the second plane from a probing and the origin of the
specified plane. Remember that automatic feature recognition is not
available for the angle point.
A
origin of
planes
Automatic feature
recognition
Calypso cannot automatically recognize an angle point. First, insert

the feature in the measurement plan, define the plane origin and then
perform the probing.
General surface feature

Menu: Measure Additional Features General surface
The General surface feature was integrated in Calypso to allow runs
programmed in DMIS to be imported to Calypso.
The General surface corresponds to the FEAT/GSURF DMIS feature.
For the evaluation of a general surface, a mathematically defined
freeform surface is not computed in order to obtain the result of a
nominal-actual comparison between two surfaces. The general
surface feature is merely a container for a set of points belonging
to a surface.
Special aspects
Each point of a general surface is therefore probed, measured and

processed individually. Each point possesses its own strategy and
resources.
The entries in the strategy list are thus structured as trees in the
Strategy dialog box. The associated clearance data and technology
information can be found under each entry of a point. If no feature or
technology is selected, clicking on the probing point icon will produce
a new point here.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-41
Defining features
NOTE
hss
The actual values of individual points are shown neither in the

definition template nor in the point list; they appear only in the
printouts and protocols (default printout, compact printout and
custom printout).
Nominal definition
Nominal input and the definition as a theoretical feature are options

for the nominal definition. A change in the nominal definition refers
to all associated points of the general surface.
Point from
CAD model
You can add a nominal point to the general surface by clicking on the
desired position of the CAD model in the CAD window (the definition
template must be open when you do this).
Point by probing
You can add a point to the general surface by probing with the CMM.
Automatic feature
recognition
Calypso cannot automatically recognize a general surface. Enter the

feature in the measurement plan before probing.
General curve feature

Menu: Measure Additional Features General curve
The General curve feature was integrated in Calypso to allow runs
programmed in DMIS to be imported to Calypso.
Special aspects
The General curve feature corresponds to the DMIS feature

FEAT/GCURVE. No mathematically defined curve shape is computed
from splines in the evaluation of a general curve to obtain the result
of the nominal-actual comparison of two curved lines. The general
curve feature is merely a container for a set of points belonging to
a curve.
Strategy
Each point of a general curve is therefore probed, measured and

processed individually. Each point possesses its own strategy and
resources.
The entries in the strategy list are thus structured as trees in the
Strategy dialog box. The associated clearance data and technology
information can be found under each entry of a point. If no feature or
technology is selected, clicking on the probing point icon will produce
a new point here.
The points may be in any spatial location. The actual values result
after projection of the data onto a plane specified in the definition
template of the general curve (with X, Y, Z, NX, NY, NZ).
NOTE
hss
5-42
The actual values of individual points are shown neither in the

definition template nor in the point list; they appear only in the
printouts and protocols (default printout, compact printout and
custom printout).
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Nominal definition
Nominal input and the definition as a theoretical feature are options

for the nominal definition. A change in the nominal definition refers
to all associated points of the general curve.
Point from the

CAD model
You can add a nominal point to the general curve by clicking on the
desired position of the CAD model in the CAD window (the definition
template must be open when you do this).
Point by probing
You can add a point to the general curve by probing.
Automatic feature
recognition
Calypso cannot automatically recognize a general curve. Enter the

feature in the measurement plan before probing.
Additional features Holos and Gear

You can add the Holos or Gear feature to the measurement plan
with Features Additional Features Holos or Features
Additional Features Gear or via the toolbox of the Utilities page.
In this manner, you can integrate any HOLOS or GEAR macro into a
measurement plan and have it executed during the CNC run. The
programmed macro is started by the CMM OS during the CNC run.
You can add the Holos or GEAR utility to both the list of
characteristics and the list of features. In this manner, the selected
macros can be executed after either a characteristic or feature is run.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-43
Defining features
Important
Before starting a measurement, either HOLOS or GEAR must have
been started, otherwise the CNC run will be canceled.
hss
Entries for HOLOS or

GEAR
Enter the following in the definition template:

the macro to be executed
You can either enter the macro directly or by selecting it from a
catalog.
the coordinate system for the macro
You can select a coordinate system in Calypso, which will be
passed to HOLOS or GEAR. The manner in which the coordinate
system will be used must be specified in HOLOS.
a coordinate system from the macro
You can receive a coordinate system from the macro and use it
further in Calypso. To do so, enter the name under which the
coordinate system should be used in Calypso.
5-44
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Free Form Surface additional feature

With Measure Additional Features Free Form Surface or by
using the Tool Box under Measurement Free Form Surface, you
can enter the Free Form Surface feature in the measurement plan.
You can use the Free Form Surface feature only in connection with
the appropriate CAD model. Only if a CAD model is loaded and the
assignment to the surface is valid, the Free Form Surface icon has a
green background. Otherwise, the icon has a gray background.
Special aspects
A free form surface is connected with a surface in the appropriate

CAD model and is thus a theoretical element that does not possess
any nominal value definitions. The Free Form Surface feature is limited
by the CAD model and has no infinite expansion. The free form
surface can be interrupted by bores.
Coordinate system
The free form surface feature does not posses an own coordinate
system but uses the coordinate system of the appropriate CAD model.
That is why you cannot assign a coordinate system to the free form
surface feature. However, you can copy the coordinate system of the
free form surface to another feature.
Turbine Blade additional feature

With Measure Additional Features Turbine Blade or by
using the toolbox on the Utilities page you can enter the Turbine
Blade feature in the measurement plan.
Use of the feature
The Turbine Blade feature is used to transfer nominal data and

measured data for turbine blades to the Blade PRO program for
evaluation. It creates several XML files that are processed in the Blade
PRO program.
The import of nominal data, the definition of the measuring
technology as well as the measurement itself are carried out in
Calypso. Use the curve feature for this. The Blade PRO program is
used for evaluation only.
Printout header
variables
Together with the nominal data and the measuring results, all printout
header variables belonging to the measurement plan are also
transferred to Blade PRO. The variables of the SYS data group are
assigned the type=static in the XML file, all other variables receive the
type=dynamic.
Example in an XML file:
<Property operid="Master" type="static" />
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-45
Defining features
<Property creationswi="3.8.00" type="dynamic" />
Entries
Enter the following in the definition template:
Group
Entries
Specification File
For additional information, please refer to the Blade PRO document.
Results
Activate the check box for the formats in which you want the output
of the results.
Elements
Shows all curves of the measurement plan. Select those curves that
you want to evaluate with Blade PRO as turbine blades.
CNC run with the Turbine Blade additional feature

Prior to the CNC run
Prior to the CNC run, export the nominal data to Blade PRO if
necessary. For this purpose, you open the definition temple for the
corresponding turbine blade feature, mark the desired intersections
and click on Export Nominals.
The nominal data for each of the selected intersections is written in an
XML file named Section_xxx_nominal.xml. The printout header
variables are also transferred.
The files are saved in the directory that is defined as BladeNomPath
in the ...\calypso\home\om\curveParameter.txt file.
5-46
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Run after start
After starting the CNC run, the following files are created and
transferred to Blade PRO.
Startup.xml: File with a referral to the blade specification file. The
specification file is used by Blade PRO but must have been selected
beforehand in Calypso.
Section_xxx_actual.xml: Measured data files corresponding to
Section_xxx_nominal.xml. After each measurement of a curve
selected in the definition template, the corresponding data is
written in the measured value file. The files are saved in the
directory that is defined as BladeNomPath in the
...\calypso\home\om\curveParameter.txt file. The printout header
variables are also transferred.
Finish.xml: End code of the measurement Blade PRO will only start
evaluation if this file is available. The data for the result output in
Blade PRO is transferred to this file. Once the evaluation has been
completed, this will will be deleted by Blade PRO.
The Blade PRO program starts the calculation and evaluation once the
Finish.xml file has been created.
The results are created in the formats specified in the definition
template.
Once Blade PRO has deleted the Finish.xml file, Calypso continues the
CNC run.
Greater accuracy by gage correction

qualification
Gage correction qualification is a method by which Calypso can
measure circles and cylinders to a very high degree of precision and at
very high scanning speed.
NOTE
hss
function.
For gage correction qualification, Calypso must first record the
bending parameters of the stylus used. When a circle or arc or a
cylinder is subsequently measured, you can instruct Calypso to correct
the result by applying the bending parameters.
Prerequisites
The preconditions for recording and correcting bending parameters

are as follows:
A new measurement plan for the reference workpiece is open and
you have defined the clearance planes.
How to create a new measurement plan on page 4-4
Defining the clearance planes on page 4-113
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-47
Defining features
You know how to start a CNC run.

Defining the scope of measurement on page 8-2
The circle or cylinder is measured on the same primary plane of the
workpiece coordinate system as was used in recording the bending
parameters.
How to record the bending parameters

In order to record the bending parameters, you need a workpiece
with a reference bore or a reference plug.
NOTE
hss
function.
The bore or plug must be of known diameter.
NOTE
hss
The bending parameters have no effect unless you have installed a

measuring probe.
The plug or bore is measured as an overlapping full circle in a separate
measurement plan.
To record the bending parameters:
1 Position the base alignment in the center of the reference bore or
plug.
2 Select the Gage Correction Qualification utility by selecting
Resources Utilities Gage Correction Qualification.
Calypso adds the icon for gage correction qualification to the list
of features.
3 Double-click to open the definition template.
4 Enter the qualified diameter of the bore or the plug in the D field.
5 Select the scanning method for the circle:
Click on Strategy.
Click on the Full circle button.
In the list, double-click on Circle Auto Path.
This opens the dialog box where you define the scanning speed.
6 Enter the scanning speed in the Speed field.
7 Click on OK to close all dialog boxes
Click Yes at the prompt shown below.
5-48
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
8 Perform a CNC run of the measurement plan so that Calypso can

measure the bending parameters.
Now that Calypso knows the bending parameters of the stylus, it will
be possible to correct future measuring results of full circles and arcs
accordingly (see the next section How to apply the bending
parameters).
How to apply the bending parameters

You can use the definition template of the circle or cylinder to have all
future full circles and arcs corrected with the bending parameters.
Prerequisites
The prerequisite is that for the measurement the values for the
diameter, measuring location, orientation and scanning speed are as
close as possible to the values of the bending parameter definition.
However, the height for the cylinder measurement is not decisive.
To activate correction by application of the bending parameters:
1 Open the definition template of the circle or cylinder to which you
want to apply the bending parameters.
2 Click on the Output button.
The Evaluation (feature) window will open.
3 Activate the Gage Correction check box.

4 Click on OK to close the Evaluation dialog box.
5 Click on OK to save the settings and close the definition template.
The next time you measure a circle or cylinder, the measuring results
are corrected by the bending parameters.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-49
Defining features
Linking features in constructions

Constructions are constructed features that cannot be probed directly
on a workpiece, e.g. the center of a bore or the intersection of two
features.
Calypso can, however, mathematically construct regular geometric
elements and, in this way, define the element you require. You can
use either the actual or nominal geometry for the construction.
As constructions cannot be probed, automatic feature recognition is
not available here.
In the measurement plan, a construction is indicated by the blue
border around the icon. Calypso supports 13 different constructions:
Perpendicular construction on page 5-60
Intersection construction on page 5-61
Symmetry construction on page 5-73
Edge Point construction on page 5-74
Projection construction on page 5-75
Minimum Point construction on page 5-76
Maximum Point construction on page 5-76
Minimum Result construction on page 5-77
Maximum Result construction on page 5-77
Average-Feature construction on page 5-77
Cone Addition construction on page 5-78 (not in Calypso
Light)
Plane with Offset construction on page 5-79
Circle in contour best fit construction on page 5-80 (available
only if the Curve Measurement option is enabled)
How to define constructions

The procedure for defining a construction is very similar to that for
defining a feature:
1 Add the construction of your choice to the measurement plan by
selecting it in the Construct menu.
2 Double-click on the icon of the construction or select it and click
on the Magnifier icon.
This opens the definition template of the construction.
5-50
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
3 Use the Feature buttons to select the features for which the
construction is required.
When selecting a feature, you can specify that the nominal
geometry is to be used for the evaluation.
4 Click on OK to confirm your choice.
The features you selected are now interlinked in a construction.
Special aspects
Certain special aspects have to be borne in mind with the following

constructions:
Cone Addition (Cone Addition construction on page 5-78)
Circle in contour best fit construction (Circle in contour best fit
construction on page 5-80)
Defining features by recalling

The recall is a special type of construction. You can use a recall to
derive a new feature from one or more features.
Let us suppose you have measured four circles. You would now like to
learn the circle on which the center points of the measured circles are
located. To this end, define a new circle from the recalled center
points of the four measured circles.
circle 2
resulting
pitch circle
r
circle1
circle3
circle4
You can realize the following recall types with Calypso:

Recall: Returns the reference point(s) (the origin of the feature's
local coordinate system) of one or more features.
Recall One Feature: Returns the entire feature.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-51
Defining features
Recall Feature Points: Returns individual points, individual paths,

specific areas (specified in coordinates) or all points of one or more
features.
Proceed very carefully when defining a feature by recalling.
Theoretically, you could recall any number of features but this would
not make any sense.
Recall and pattern

You can combine recall and pattern for the nominal value definition:
For each of the three recall types, you can also select features with
patterns, and you can also define a new feature with a pattern via the
recall function.
You can define yourself how the patterns are to be evaluated when
they are recalled.
Recall One Feature

In the case of Recall One Feature, Calypso takes over the pattern of
the selected feature even if you have not yet assigned a pattern to the
new feature.
Once you have assigned a pattern to the new feature, an individual
feature or an individual pattern feature will be used as original feature
of the new pattern. However, a feature with pattern keeps its
pattern and overwrites the assigned pattern of the new feature.
Recall and points recall

The behavior for Recall and Recall Points is different. The
behavior depends on the fact whether the new feature has already
been assigned a pattern and on the way in which the features to be
recalled are shown in the selection window.
Loop and index transfer
If a potential feature for the points recall has a pattern, this can be
shown in the selection window in two ways:
with loop: with brackets and start and end index,
with index transfer: with brackets and asterisk.
This representation determines the recall.
To change between these representation types, use the menu items of
the context menu:
Add loop to all marked features: the marked features with
pattern are shown with loop .
Delete loops from all marked features: the marked features
with pattern are shown with index transfer.
5-52
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Select loops individually: the window shows all marked features

of the list with pattern and you can individually select each entry:
New feature without

pattern
If the new feature does not yet possess any pattern, the following
applies:
If you select a feature with the with loop pattern, the reference
points or the specified points of all pattern features of the feature
are recalled.
If you select a feature with the with index transfer pattern, you
are prompted whether a pattern is to be assigned to the new
feature. A pattern with the minimum actual number of all marked
features with the with index transfer pattern is offered as
default.
By confirming this, the reference points or the specified points of
the original feature of the patterns are recalled and the proposed
pattern is assigned.
If you reject this, a pattern with only one pattern feature is created.
If you select one individual pattern feature, the reference points or
the specified points of all pattern features of the selected pattern
feature are recalled.
New feature with

pattern
If a pattern has been assigned to the new feature beforehand, the

following applies:
If you select a feature with the with index transfer pattern, the
reference points or the specified points of the original features are
recalled and the pattern of the new feature is assigned.
If you select a feature with the with loop pattern, the reference
points of all pattern features of the feature or the specified points
of all pattern features of the feature are recalled.
If then the assigned pattern of the new feature contains more
actual pattern features than the minimum of all actual numbers of
patterns (of all marked features), you are prompted whether the
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-53
Defining features
pattern with the smallest actual number is to be used for the

feature.
By confirming this, the new feature will receive the corresponding
pattern.
By rejecting this, the previous pattern will be maintained.
!
hss
Important
This leads to a stop of the CNC run. Since the number of pattern
features of the newly defined feature is larger than the number of
pattern features of the individual recalled features, some of the
pattern features of the new feature are not defined.
If you select one individual pattern feature, the reference points or
the specified points of all pattern features of the selected pattern
feature are recalled.
How to recall reference points of features

The Recall function makes it possible to recall the reference points
(the origines of the local coordinate system) of one or movre already
defined features and to determine a new feature.
Thus, two circles define a straight line that goes through both center
points of the circles.
To recall the reference points of features:
1 Open the definition template of the geometric element that you
require to be created by a recall.
5-54
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2 Open the Nominal Definition list and select the Recall recall
type.
You then see the Selection dialog box with the features.
3 Activate Show all Features in Patterns or Loops to recall

individual pattern features.
Features with loop are shows with brackets and the specification
of the index range, e.g. Circle1(1-4).
Features with index transfer are shown with brackets and asterisk,
e.g. Circle2<*>.
4 To adapt the features with pattern, mark the corresponding entries
and use the context menu:
Add loop to all marked features: All marked features with
pattern are shown with loop and with the index range.
Delete loop from all marked features: The loops of all
marked features with pattern are shown with index transfer
(with asterisk).
Select loops individually: Opens a window with all marked
features with pattern. Here, for each individual feature, you can
select or deselect loop and index transfer.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-55
Defining features
5 Select the feature or features you require press the Ctrl or shift
key if necessary.
You can define the evaluation method, filtering and outlier
elimination for the required features.
Filter and outlier elimination are valid equally for all selected
features.
The reference point(s) is (are) are accepted.
How to recall a feature in its entirety

You can recall a feature in its entirety. In this way, you recall the whole
selected feature (possibly transformed into a different coordinate
system) and derive from it a new feature of identical geometry.
NOTE
hss
The result is a theoretical feature that accesses the original feature

with the getActual formula.
To define a complete feature by a recall:
2 If the new feature should posses a certain pattern, select or define
this via the Nominal Definition menu and the Pattern menu
item.
5-56
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
3 Open the Nominal Definition list and select the Recall One
Feature recall type.
You then see the Selection dialog box with the features.
Only those features are displayed that are of the same type as the
feature to be defined.
You can then access individual features of a pattern.
5 Select the corresponding feature and confirm with OK.
The feature is accepted and determines the new feature.
Recall one feature and
pattern
Once you have accepted a feature with a pattern, the new feature will
also receive this pattern, regardless of whether you have assigned a
pattern to this new feature beforehand or not.
Once you have assigned a pattern to the new feature and you have
accepted an individual pattern feature, this becomes the original
feature of the assigned pattern.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-57
Defining features
How to recall individual points and ranges

The Recall Points function supports the recall of any measured
points of other already defined features to evaluate them in a
different manner. You can recall individual points, individual paths,
specific areas (specified in coordinates) or all points of one or more
features.
To define a feature by a points recall:
2 From the Nominal Definition list, select the Recall Points recall
type.
The Recall Points window with all available features is displayed.

At the same time, two icons named Mark and Lasso function
appear in the upper right corner of the toolbar.
All the potential features for the points recall are listed in the
Recall Points window.
5-58
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

Features with loop are shown with brackets and the
specification of the index range, e.g. Circle1(1-4).
Features with index transfer are shown with brackets and
asterisk, e.g. Circle2<*>.
4 To adapt the features with pattern, mark the corresponding entries
and use the context menu:
Add loop to all marked features: All marked features with
pattern are shown with loop and with the index range.
Delete loop from all marked features: The loops of all
marked features with pattern are shown with index transfer
(with asterisk).
Select loops individually: Opens a window with all marked
features with pattern. Here, for each individual feature, you can
select or deselect loop and index transfer.
5 To add the individual arcs of a cylinder to the list, click on the
cylinder and select Open in the context menu.
You have two options to recall points:
You can recall all points of one or more features.
You can recall certain points of one or more features.
6 To recall all points from one or several features into the new
feature: Select the feature or features you require press the Ctrl
or shift key if necessary and confirm with OK.
7 To recall certain points from a single feature into the new feature:
In the list, select the feature with the points from which (or with
some of the points from which) the new feature is to be
produced.
Click on the Mark symbol to represent the measured points of
the feature with crosses in the CAD window.
Click on the Lasso button and use the mouse to drag a
rectangle (a cuboid is internally generated from the rectangle)
around the desired points.
In the list of features, the box (X,Y,Z,+X,+Y,+Z) entry
appears behind the name of the feature in question. The
coordinates of two diagonally opposite corner points of the
cuboid are specified in the brackets.
NOTE
hss
The sides of the cube are aligned with the base alignment.
To change the corner points of the cuboid if necessary: Select
Add limits in the context menu and overwrite the coordinates
offered in the Range limits for point selection dialog box.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-59
Defining features
To take over only a few points if necessary: Select Add limits in

the context menu and specify the desired points in the Range
limits for point selection dialog box.
Examples of the specification of the range limits:
Formula
Meaning
points(1,5)
Point 1 to point 5
point(1), point(4), point(5) Points 1, 4 and 5

angles(10,90)
The points in the angle range from 10

to 90
(only for circle segments)
path(2)
The points of the 2nd circle segment
Click on OK.
The selected points are included in the new feature.
Perpendicular construction
Menu: Construct Perpendicular
Using the Perpendicular construction, you can have Calypso
compute the shortest distance between two features.
Feature 1
With Feature 1 in the definition template, define the point from

which the perpendicular will be struck. You can select any feature as
Feature 1. The table below shows which coordinates are used by
possible features:
Feature 1
Use of the coordinates
Point (probing)
Coordinates of probing point
Circle
Coordinates of center point
Line
Coordinates of the origin of the local

coordinate system
Plane
Coordinates of the origin of the local

coordinate system
Feature 2
With Feature 2 in the definition template, set the direction of the

perpendicular. The perpendicular is vertical on feature 2. Therefore,
feature 2 must be a spatially defined element.
Interpretation of results
The following is read out as the result of the computation:

The straight line on which the perpendicular is located by the
specification of two projection angles. You can modify the
reference of the projected angles under Spatial axis.
5-60
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
The length (distance) of the perpendicular. The calculated distance

of the perpendicular is the distance of the point in Feature 1 to
Feature 2.
Intersection construction
Menu: Construct Intersection
With the Intersection construction, you can intersect straight lines,
planes, free form surfaces, circles, cylinders, spheres and cones with
each other and have tangents computed.
To do this, you enter the two features and obtain one or more results.
Depending on which feature you entered first, not all options are
available to you for the second one.
Intersection with wall
or axis?
NOTE
If you select an axial element, such as a cylinder or cone, for the

intersection, Calypso assumes that you want to intersect the axis of
the element with a different element. If, however, you want to
intersect the section surface of the element instead of the axis of the
axial element, you must select the Wall check box in the definition
template of the intersection.
Free form surfaces can only be intersected with axes.
hss
Depending on the intersection, one to four results are shown in the

Result Selection group of the definition template, and you select the
intersection result you want to proceed with.
Automatic correction
With this construction, Calypso supplies results even if the objects do

not intersect geometrically but a meaningful, different interpretation
(for example, tangent) is possible.
When a cylinder or cone intersects a plane, Calypso performs
automatic corrections under certain circumstances the plane is
interpreted as vertical or parallel (refer to Intersection of a plane
with a cylinder on page 5-68 and Intersection of a plane with a
cone on page 5-69).
When rotationally symmetrical, three-dimensional surfaces intersect,
Calypso performs automatic corrections under certain circumstances
the surfaces are interpreted as concentric or coaxial.
The following sections describe the different intersections and their

results.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-61
Defining features
Intersection of a straight line with a straight line

The straight lines can be located in any part plane. However, they
must not be parallel or antiparallel.
Line 1
Intersection
Line 2
Calypso delivers four points as results.

If you select the Spatial option in the definition template, you
obtain as the intersection the center of the perpendicular between
the two straight lines - the point closest to the two straight lines.
If both straight lines are in one plane, this point coincides with the
actual intersection of the two straight lines.
If you select one of the other results in the definition template, you
obtain in each case the intersection of the projections of the two
straight lines to one of the three part coordinate system planes.
Intersection of a plane with a plane

The normals of the two planes must not be parallel or antiparallel.
The result computed by Calypso is the spatially defined intersection

line. The point of the computed intersection line that is closest to the
origin is used as the origin of the feature's local coordinate system
(reference point) of the intersection line.
5-62
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Intersection of a circle with a circle

Both circles must lie in one plane. A distinction must be made here
between two possibilities:
Two intersections are present.
intersection 1
intersection 2
In the Result Selection group of the definition template, specify

the intersection you require as the result: Result 1 for intersection
1 and Result 2 for intersection 2.
If exactly one intersection is present because the circles are
touching, two identical points are read out.
There is no intersection between the circles.
center
Calypso cannot compute a result in this case.
Intersection of a straight line with a circle

The straight line and the normal of the circle must not be parallel or
antiparallel. This means that the projection of the straight line into the
plane of the circle is again a straight line.
Line
Circle
P2
P1
P rojection line
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-63
Defining features
Calypso calculates as a result the intersections of the projected

straight line with the circle. If the straight line only touches the circle
and does not intersect it, two identical points are determined.
Differentiation has to be made between the following two
possibilities:
Two intersections are present.
intersection 1
intersection 2
In the Result Selection group of the definition template, specify

the intersection you require as the result: Result 1 for intersection
1 and Result 2 for intersection 2.
There is no intersection between the (projected) straight line and
the circle.
Perpendicular
Lotfupunkt
Calypso cannot compute a result in this case.
5-64
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Intersection of a straight line with a sphere

Calypso computes as a result the intersections of the straight line with
the sphere. If the projected straight line only touches the sphere and
does not intersect it, two identical points are determined.
If computation is not possible, an error message is issued.
Intersection of a straight line with a plane

The straight line and the normal of the plane must not be
perpendicular to each other.
penetration
point
Calypso computes as a result the piercing point of the straight line

through the plane.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-65
Defining features
Intersection of a straight line with a cylinder

The straight line and the cylinder axis must not be parallel or
antiparallel.
If the check box

Wall has been activated, Calypso will calculate: the piercing points
of the line through the cylinder wall
Otherwise: the intersection point of the line with the axis of the
cylinder.
Intersection of a straight line with a cone

If the check box
Wall has been activated, Calypso will calculate: the piercing points
of the line through the wall of the cone
Otherwise: the intersection point of the line with the axis of the
cone.
5-66
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Intersection of a plane with a circle

The normals of the plane and of the circle must not be parallel or
antiparallel.
Calypso computes as a result the intersections of the circular line with

the plane.
Intersection of a plane with a sphere

Calypso computes as a result the intersection of the sphere with the
plane.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-67
Defining features
Intersection of a plane with a cylinder

If the check box
Wall has been activated, Calypso will calculate: a circle
Otherwise: an intersection point.
z, k
K
E
In the case of a wall intersection, Calypso will not create the exact
mathematical ellipse as the intersection element but will
automatically adjust this to form a circle if the plane does not deviate
too greatly from the perpendicular position, i.e. if the angle between
the normals of the plane and the axis of the cylinder is less than 45.
In this case, the circle - the center point of which represents the
intersection point of the cylinder axis with the section plane - which
intersects the cylinder vertically will be calculated.
No intersection is measured in all other cases.
5-68
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Intersection of a plane with a cone

If the check box
Wall has been activated, Calypso will calculate: a circle
Otherwise: an intersection point.
E
E
Here, Calypso will not create the exact mathematical ellipse as the
intersection element but will automatically adjust this to form a circle
if the plane does not deviate too greatly from the regular position, i.e.
if the angle between the normals of the plane and the axis of the
cone is less than 45.
In this case, the circle - the center point of which represents the
intersection point of the cone axis with the section plane - which
intersects the cone vertically will be calculated.
No intersection is measured in all other cases.
Intersection of a free form surface with an axis

NOTE
hss
function.
You can intersect a free form surface with an axis. You can use one of
the following features to define the axis: cylinder, cone, torus, 3D line.
NOTE
hss
The ACIS 3D Toolkit program must be open for the intersection

calculation of a free form surface with one axis.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-69
Defining features
When intersecting a free form usrface with an axis, Calypso supplies a

3D point. If several intersections are possible (since the free form
surface has for example a wavy profile), only the first determined
intersection point will be output.
The axes of the following features can be intersected with the free
form surface:
Cylinder (wall intersection not activated)
Cone (wall intersection not activated)
Torus
3D Line
When defining the intersection, you can specify the free form surface
as first or second characteristic.
Intersection of a sphere with a cylinder

The intersection of the sphere and the cylinder is the intersection of a
sphere of identical size whose center point is the projection of the
sphere center point onto the cylinder axis.
The distance between the center point of the sphere and the cylinder
axis must be less than half the cylinder radius.
5-70
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Intersection of a sphere with a cone

The intersection of the sphere and the cone is the intersection of a
sphere of identical size whose center point is the projection of the
sphere center point onto the cone axis.
The distance between the sphere center point and the cone axis must
be less than half the radius of the theoretical resulting circle. No
intersection is determined in all other cases.
Intersection of a sphere with a sphere
Calypso computes the exact intersection of the two spheres.
Intersection of a cone with a cylinder

If the check box
Wall has been activated, Calypso will calculate: the intersection of
the cylinder with the projected cone this is a cone of the same
aperture, the point of which is the projection of the cone point
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-71
Defining features
onto the cylinder axis and the axis of which runs parallel to the
cylinder axis.
The angle between the (actual) cone axis and the cylinder axis
must not be greater than 45. The distance between the
intersection of the cone axis and the theoretical resulting circle
must be less than half the radius of the theoretical resulting circle.
No intersection is determined in all other cases.
Otherwise: the intersection point of the two axes.
The same conditions apply here as for the intersection of two lines.
Intersection of a cone with a cone

The intersection of a cone with another cone is generated in the
following manner: The cone with the blunter opening angle is set
coaxially to the other cone, the tip of the new cone results as the
projection of the old tip onto the cone axis of the cone having the
more pointed opening angle. The circle resulting from this is
generated as the intersection of the two cones.
A condition for this is that the angle between the two cone axes is
smaller than 45. The distance between the axis of the blunter cone
and the plane of the theoretical resultant circle and the center point
of the circle must be less than half the radius of the circle.
S acute
S obtuse
h
R
5-72
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
The two cones can lie parallel or antiparallel to each other. Calypso
computes the intersection in both cases.
Symmetry construction
Menu: Construct Symmetry
You can use the Symmetry construction to determine a symmetry
feature between your selected Feature 1 and Feature 2. You can
then use the symmetry feature obtained in this way freely in other
constructions.
Feature 1
You can select any feature as Feature 1.
Feature 2
You can select any feature as Feature 2.
The computed symmetry feature is output in the form of coordinates

common to the two features.
The examples below will facilitate interpretation of the results:
Symmetry point of two circles
symmetry point
Calypso computes the coordinates of the symmetry point.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-73
Defining features
Symmetry plane of two planes
As the result, Calypso computes the position, length and width of

the symmetry plane on which the symmetry point from the two
start points of the two planes is located.
Symmetry axis of two lines
line1
line2
symmetry axis
As the result, Calypso computes the coordinates of the symmetry

axis on which the symmetry point from the two start points of the
two lines is located.
Edge Point construction

Menu: Construct Edge Point
Use the Edge Point construction to have Calypso compute a corner
between two features. This corner is the intersection of two imaginary
extensions of the two features.
5-74
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Feature 1
Point (generally a space point) is the only feature you can use as the
first feature. The spatial axis of this first point defines the first plane
on which the edge point will be situated. This plane must intersect
with the plane of feature 2.
Feature 2
Point (generally a space point) is the only feature you can select as
the second feature. The spatial axis of this second point defines the
second plane on which the edge point will be situated. This plane
must intersect with the plane of feature 1.
Feature 3
You can specify a plane or a point as feature 3. If you specify a point,

this also defines a plane via the normal. The edge point is computed
as the intersection of this plane with the intersection of plane 1 and
plane 2.
Calypso computes the coordinates of the edge point as the result.

The example below illustrates how an edge point is computed for two
planes in order to yield the coordinates of the imaginary corner. The
third plane here is the drawing plane.
element 1
contour point
element 2
If the third plane is not defined, the edge point is defined centered
between Feature 1 and Feature 2 (Feature 1 and Feature 2 usually
differ at least slightly in height).
Projection construction
Menu: Construct Projection
You can use the Projection construction to determine the position of a
feature that was projected onto another feature (e.g. the position of a
point projected onto a plane).
Feature 1
Define the feature you want to project as Feature 1.
Feature 2
Specify as Feature 2 the feature onto which you want Feature 1

projected.
Result output depends on the feature that results from the projection.
The examples below will facilitate interpretation of the results:
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-75
Defining features
Projection of a circle onto a plane

The projection of a circle onto a plane shifts the circle
perpendicularly to the plane until it is on the plane.
Calypso computes the coordinates of the center of the circle on
the plane.
Projection of a cylinder onto a plane
Projection of a cylinder onto a plane produces a straight line
formed by the two end points of the cylinder's axis on the plane.
Calypso computes the two projected angles and the coordinates of
the origin of the local coordinate system.
A special case is a cylinder normal to the projection plane: in this
case, projection produces a point on the plane.
Calypso computes the coordinates of the point on the plane.
Minimum Point construction

Menu: Construct Minimum Coordinates
You can use the Minimum Coordinates construction to have Calypso
compute the coordinates of the point at which negative deviation in
feature geometry is at its maximum. You can reference the deviation
to the feature's actual geometry or its nominal geometry.
Feature 1
Click on the Feature 1 button to open the Selection dialog box,

where you can select a regular geometric feature of your choice.
As a result, Calypso calculates the coordinates of the point having the

largest negative deviation.
Maximum Point construction

Menu: Construct Maximum Coordinates
You can use the Maximum Coordinates construction to have Calypso
compute the coordinates of the point at which positive deviation in
feature geometry is at its maximum. You can reference the deviation
to the feature's actual geometry or its nominal geometry.
Feature 1
Click on the Feature 1 button to open the Selection dialog box,

where you can select a regular geometric feature of your choice.
Calypso computes the coordinates of the point where positive

deviation is at maximum.
5-76
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Minimum Result construction

Menu: Construct Minimum Result
You can use the Minimum Result construction to have Calypso
determine which is the smallest in a group of similar features.
Feature selection
Click on the Feature Selection button to open the Selection dialog

box, where you can select the features you want to have compared.
Selection list
From the selection list, select the characteristic (radius, angle etc.) of
the selected features for which you want the minimum computed.
The list contains all the main characteristics.
Calypso computes the minimum for the characteristic you selected

and displays the feature in question in the CAD window.
For example, you can ascertain which cylinder in a group of three has
the smallest diameter.
Maximum Result construction

Menu: Construct Maximum Result
You can use the Maximum Result construction to have Calypso
determine which is the largest in a group of similar features.
Feature selection
Click on the Feature Selection button to open the Selection dialog

box, where you can select the features you want to have compared.
Selection list
From the selection list, select the characteristic (radius, angle etc.) of
the selected features for which you want the maximum computed.
The list contains all the main characteristics.
Calypso computes the maximum for the characteristic you selected

and displays the feature in question in the CAD window.
For example, you can ascertain which cylinder in a group of three has
the largest diameter.
Average-Feature construction
Menu: Construct Average-Feature
Using the Average-Feature construction, you can have Calypso
calculate the average value of several measurement results. The
features from which the results originate must all be of the same kind
(e.g. only cylinders).
Feature selection
Click on the feature selection button to select the features for whose
measured values you want to compute the average.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-77
Defining features
Selection list
In the selection list, define the characteristic (radius, angle, etc.) for
which you want the average computed. The list contains all the main
characteristics.
Cone Addition construction

Menu: Construct Cone Addition
Calypso uses the Cone Addition construction to compute the
following data for the Cone feature:
Diameter Definition: The diameter of the cone at a defined
height.
Position Definition: The cone height at a defined diameter.
NOTE
hss
function.
Feature
The only feature you can select is a cone, because cone additions are
computed exclusively for cones.
Diameter definition
If you have selected the Diameter Definition option, you can either
enter the height directly or determine this indirectly using another
feature. Calypso will require that you make the following entries:
At L: Enter height L, the height at which the diameter should be
calculated, and enter the reference point of the height entered
under Referenced To:
Height L can be referenced to the Cone Origin.
cone axis
cone origin
reference plane
Height L will be measured from the cone origin (the intersection

point of the cone axis with the surface area closest to the cone
center).
5-78
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Height L can be referenced to the Part Alignment.
cone axis
cone origin
L
workpiece system
Here, the coordinate axis which lies closest to the cone axis will
be computed first. The diameter will be output on the point of
the cone axis for which the coordinate on this axis is equal to L.
Or at: If you do not wish to enter the height directly, you can use
this button to determine a feature that (if necessary, via the
intersection point with the cone axis) defines the height of the
required diameter. Only the Point, 2D Line and Plane features are
suitable here.
Position definition
If you have selected the Position Definition option, you can either
enter the appropriate diameter or determine the required height
indirectly using another feature. Calypso will require that you make
the following entries:
At D: Directly enter the diameter for which the appropriate height
should be calculated.
Or at: If you do not enter a diameter, you can use this button to
determine a feature to indirectly determine the height at which the
position will be defined (the height above the cone origin). Only
the Circle, Circle on Cone, Cylinder, Cone and Ellipse features are
suitable here.
Calypso will either calculate a specific diameter or a specific height on

the cone depending on what you have selected.
Plane with Offset construction

Menu: Construct Plane with Offset
You can use the Plane with Offset construction to define a plane
offset a certain amount above a reference plane.
Feature 1
Planes are the only feature you can select. The plane you select here is
the origin or reference plane for computing the plane with offset.
Offset
In the Offset input field enter the value by which the offset plane
should be offset compared to the plane selected in Feature 1.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-79
Defining features
Calypso computes the coordinates of the plane with offset as the

result. Please note that the offset plane is usually a plane which does
not really exist and, consequently, no probing points can be taken.
Circle in contour best fit construction

NOTE
hss
The Circle in contour best fit construction is available only if the

Curve Measurement option is enabled.
Menu: Construct Circle in contour best fit
With the Circle in contour best fit construction, you receive
(according to your selection) a circle or a space point that is
determined through the best fit of a circle in a plane profile of
gothic or elliptical shape.
You can use this construction in practice to determine how a sphere
of a given diameter behaves in a path with a certain profile, for
example.
You define the contour, the circle and the desired result in the
definition template for the Circle in contour best fit.
5-80
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
You select a curve or a 3d curve as the feature. The curve must be

gothic or elliptical in shape, otherwise best fit of a circle cannot be
calculated.
Feature
Elliptical shape
Gothic shape
Sphere
Sphere
Angle
Angle
Gap
Contact points
Calypso internally calculates a compensating plane for the curve and

projects the curve points into this plane. Best fit is then performed
with the planar contour.
NOTE
hss
You cannot change the filter, outlier and evaluation settings in the
selection window for the curve. You can change filters and outliers
only in the feature itself.
You enter the diameter of the circle for the best fit process under
Diameter.
Diameter
NOTE
You can also have Calypso calculate the diameter with a formula.
hss
Wavelength for filter
For a better fit, you can enter a wave separation length (WTL) for
filtering the profile (no filtering if you enter 0). Filtering can avoid
excessive deviations between the determined and actual contact
points.
Consideration of the wave separation length differs from the filtering
of measured values otherwise used in Calypso. It is a special method
for the circle in contour best fit.
Minimum contact angle
You can also specify a Minimum contact angle. This can exclude
ambiguities during the best fit process (in case of real, distorted data
records). Contact points that are no further apart than by this angle
are regarded as a single contact point.
If one of the following error messages appears at the bottom of the
window, you can attempt to achieve an unambiguous result by
increasing the minimum contact angle.
No two-point contact with contact point greater than minimum angle
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-81
Defining features
There are several possible positions of the circle with contact

angle greater than the minimum angle
NOTE
hss
The minimum contact angle is not taken into consideration if the

curve contains points from measurements performed with different
stylus tip radii.
Result selection
You select the desired result type by clicking on the appropriate

symbol under Result Selection. You can choose from four different
result types and receive a circle or a space point depending on your
selection:
Result
Icon
Output (features highlighted)
Left tangential point
Space point X, Y, Z (the left circle-curve contact point

positioned closest to the start point of the curve)
Circle in contour best fit
Circle with center (X, Y, Z), diameter and normal (of the
compensating plane)
Gap (the radial distance between circle and curve at the
position of the bisecting line of the angle between the
two contact points)
Start angle (angle of the right contact point on the circle)
Angle range (angle between the right and left contact
points)
Right tangential point
Space point X, Y, Z (the right circle-curve contact point

positioned closest to the end point of the curve)
Point at maximum gap width
Space point X, Y, Z (the curve point with the maximum

radial distance to the circle)
Gap (the maximum radial distance between circle and
curve)
Starting best fit
When you click on OK, Calypso performs the best fit and calculates
the results.
If the initial data is insufficient for the best fit or is conflicting, an error
message will appear at the bottom edge of the window.
Details on circle in contour best fit

Results of the plane
calculation
Prior to the best fit process, Calypso uses the points of the specified
curve to calculate a compensating plane and then projects the curve
onto this plane.
The greater the form deviation, the less precise the result of the best
fit will be. So that you can estimate the accuracy of the best fit, the
following results from the calculation of the compensating plane are
displayed on the right side of the dialog box:
5-82
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Form deviation (distance between minimum and maximum

deviations)
Number of points
Minimum deviation (largest negative deviation)
Number of the point with the largest negative deviation
Maximum deviation (largest positive deviation)
Number of the point with the largest positive deviation
These results are also output in the default printout and compact
printout.
Characteristics from the
definition template
You can automatically add characteristics to the measurement plan by

activating the corresponding check boxes.
Gap
The special Gap characteristic is used for evaluating the gap
width between the circle and profile. Depending on the result
selection, the gap width at the angle bisecting line or the
maximum gap width can be evaluated using this characteristic.
Start Angle
The Start Angle characteristic checks the angle between the first
contact point and the reference axis.
Angle Range
The Angle Range characteristic checks the angle between
contact points. Only circles can be used as the features in this case.
End angle
The End angle characteristic checks the angle between the
second contact point and the reference axis.
You can also subsequently edit the definition templates of these
characteristics. However, the results will make sense only in
combination with the Circle in Contour Best Fit.
Error types and error

messages
Two types of error can occur with the circle in contour best fit:
Primary errors are errors that prevent results from being
calculated. Examples of these errors include contours with fewer
than three points or an incompletely defined nominal geometry.
Secondary errors occur if it was not possible to reach a result
during calculation of the best fit due to insufficient input
parameters.
Secondary errors are displayed in the error line at the bottom edge
of the window (below the geometry).
This error message is preceded by an indication of whether the
error occurred in the calculation of the nominal geometry or the
actual geometry. If both geometries are faulty, only the error text
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-83
Defining features
for the actual geometry is output and printed in the

protocol/printout.
If Calypso is able to calculate the actual geometry but not the nominal
geometry, 0 will be entered for Vector, Diameter/Radius,
Normal, Gap and Start Angle and 360 will be entered for the
angle range for a circle.
5-84
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Defining a measurement strategy

The nature of the feature and the location of the measurement must
be known before Calypso can perform a measurement with the
CMM. In most instances that is enough, because Calypso
automatically performs the measurements required for the
characteristics when the measurement plan starts.
The term measurement
strategy
Not infrequently, however, other decisions have to be made because

of special considerations relating to measurement or the material, for
example, or on account of other, specific requirements. The term
measurement strategy describes all the additional definitions you
make so that Calypso and the CMM can return an optimum
measuring result.
The measurement strategy derives from the measuring task as such: A
measurement strategy refers only to the corresponding feature, not to
an entire measurement plan.
Tasks
The tasks that defining a measurement strategy can involve are as

follows:
Selecting Utilities and inserting them in the strategy list (Stop,
Position CMM without Probing, Stylus System Change, Clearance
Data, etc.)
Using technology macros (discrete-point mode)
Selecting a path generation method
(See Path generation measuring features automatically on
page 5-95).
Editing the Point List
(See Point list on page 5-87).
Editing the Travel
(See Editing the travel paths on page 7-29).
Checking and editing Clearance Data
(See Checking the travel paths on page 7-32).
You can take care of all these tasks in the Strategy dialog box that
you open from within the definition template of the feature in
question.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-85
Defining features
The diagram shows an example of the Strategy window with a Circle

feature.
Path generation
Point list
Utilities
Edit
technology
Discrete points
(single points) /
scanning (paths)
Technology
macro
Strategy list
You will find more information on this window under Strategy in the
Calypso dialog reference in the Online Help.
How to use the context menu of the strategy

list
The strategy list contains certain entries (e.g. probing points, tools
used and scanning methods) for all the points and tasks that Calypso
is to execute when measuring a feature (in the sense of the travel
paths).
To edit a list entry through the context menu:
1 With the mouse, select the list entry that you want to work on.
2 With the right mouse button, click on the list entry.
The context menu opens with the following options:
Execute Now!: The CMM runs the list entry immediately. First
make sure that the CMM can move freely.
Copy: Copies the marked list entry.
Cut: Removes the marked list entry from the list.
Paste: Inserts a previously copied or cut element below the
marked list entry.
Edit: Opens the window with the parameters for the list entry.
This can also be done with a double click on the list entry.
5-86
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
3 Click on the command of your choice.

The command is executed.
Point list
The point list contains the coordinates for all the points together with
the normal vectors that have been collected for the feature. You can
edit these coordinates and, for example, define optimum probing
points.
Additionally, the styli to be used are included in the list of points.
The illustration below shows an example of the Point List window
with a plane measured at 4 points.
How to change the point list

In the point list, you can change the stylus used for measuring and
change the coordinates or the normal vectors of the probing points.
!
hss
Important
Be careful when changing the list, because the CMM goes to each
point in the list as soon as you run the measurement plan.
To display or change a point list of a feature:
1 Double-click on the feature to open its definition template, and
click on the Strategy button.
The dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Click on the button with the icon for the point list.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-87
Defining features
3 To change a coordinate, click in the corresponding entry field, and

overwrite the old value.
4 Click on OK.
The settings are accepted.
Alternative probing methods (self-centering

probing)
The probe is usually unlocked only in the probing direction. This
means that the probe can move in one direction only, namely the
direction corresponding to the movement of the joystick on the
control console.
probing direction
Z
Y
locking
mechanism
X
In this example, self-centering probing of the V-groove necessitates

cancellation of the lock in the X axis in order to avoid faulty probing.
probing direction
Z
Y
locking
mechanism
X
5-88
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Important when performing self-centering probing

Certain restrictions apply to the self-centering probing: For example,
self-centering probing of right angles is not possible. Consider also:
Probing points can only be measured as discrete points.
Lines and circle paths can only be scanned.
Tangential approaches (with the VAST Navigator) are not possible.
If possible curves should have one rotation direction similar to a
circle path.
If a circle path or curve is to be measured with a rotary table, the
circle path must be in a rotationally symmetrical position with
respect to the rotary table axis. Otherwise, the control unit cannot
measure the circle path.
How to activate self-centering probing

NOTE
Self-centering probing is an option only for measuring probes.
hss
To activate probe self centering:

1 If you want to activate this function for a particular feature:
Highlight the feature in the measurement plan.
Select Resources Probe Self Centering.
The Self Center Probing dialog box is opened. Skip to step 4.
2 If you want to activate this function only for individual probing
points of the feature:
Open the definition template of the feature.
Click on the Strategy button.
Highlight the probing point in the strategy list.
Click on the Self Center Probing button.
The Self Center Probing dialog box is opened. Skip to step 4.
3 If you want to activate this function for all features of a
measurement plan:
Check that no features are highlighted in the measuring plan.
Select Resources Probe Self Centering.
The Self Center Probing dialog box is opened.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-89
Defining features
4 Tick the Probe Self Centering check box.
5 Set the parameters for self-centering probing.

Define the axes that you want to lock.
Select the type of measuring force activation and enter the
values in mN.
For a circle path, also select the angle between the force
direction and the rotational axis.
6 Click OK to save the settings.
The next time it probes, Calypso will use the settings you just
activated.
Automatic stylus search

The automatic stylus search is best suited for use with an RDS, but
it can also be used with other sensors.
Purpose
5-90
There is a difficulty involved if geometric elements with rotational

pattern are to be measured on a CMM without rotary table and
without RDS-CAA: The identical features of the pattern cannot be
measured with one and the same stylus because the probing direction
is different for each feature.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Example: 8 bores
Eight bores are to be measured on a rotationally symmetrical part;

these bores are defined in Calypso as cylinders with rotationally
symmetrical pattern. This pattern cannot be measured at first without
a rotary table and without RDS-CAA, as it is unclear which styli are to
be used for the individual positions.
If you have activated the automatic stylus search and a stylus is
available for each required direction, Calypso can measure the
cylinder without difficulty.
Principle of the
automatic stylus search
This is how the automatic stylus search works: Calypso searches

through all qualified positions of a stylus system and compares the
shaft direction of each stylus with the planned probing direction.
For a cylindrical or circular feature, Calypso uses the axis of the
feature.
In the case of a planar feature, Calypso uses its normal.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-91
Defining features
Calypso uses the stylus with the smallest angle between stylus shaft
and axis or normal to perform the measurement. In order to make the
result unambiguous, you have to specify how this angle is to be
measured i.e. whether the axis or normal is to be oriented nearly in
the direction of the shaft or in the opposite direction of the shaft.
Angle at "shaft against normal"
Angle at "shaft along normal"
NOTE
hss
The shaft direction is defined as the direction from the fastening point
to the tip of the stylus.
Calypso minimizes either the angle between the stylus shaft and the
axis or normal, or the angle in the opposite direction of the axis or
normal.
The direction you have to choose depends on the geometry of your
workpiece.
Maximum angle
5-92
To reduce the danger of shaft probing (e.g. in the case of cylinder

measurements), you can restrict the permitted angle between the
shaft and normal or axis.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
If there is no stylus in the permitted angle range, Calypso is unable to

probe. The CNC run is halted, and you receive a corresponding
message.
How to activate automatic stylus search

If you want to measure a feature with rotational pattern on a CMM
without rotary table and without RDS-CAA, you must activate the
automatic stylus search. This is done when the stylus is selected in
the measurement strategy of the feature in question.
NOTE
hss
A requirement for the automatic stylus search is that all the required
styli or stylus positions must be qualified.
The shaft direction must also be specified for qualification. (A query
appears asking for the probing angle if probing has not been in the
direction of the main axis of the CMM.)
To activate the automatic stylus search:
1 In the definition template of the relevant feature, open the
strategy dialog box by clicking on Strategy.
2 Double-click to open the relevant technology window for the
probing, e.g. Probing point.
3 Under Stylus, select one of the two Auto entries:
Auto1: Shaft away from normal: The stylus whose angle
between shaft direction and opposite direction to the normal or
axis of the feature is the smallest is set.
Auto2: Shaft along normal: The stylus whose angle between
shaft direction and normal or axis of the feature is the smallest is
set.
NOTE
hss
The shaft direction is defined as the direction from the fastening point
to the tip of the stylus.
In the CNC run, the corresponding styli are dynamically selected
and assigned.
NOTE
hss
You can also make the Auto1 and Auto2 entries via the
Measurement Plan Editor Features.
Restricting the angle range

To reduce the danger of shaft probing (e.g. in the case of cylinder
measurements), you can restrict the maximum permitted angle
between the shaft and normal or axis.
To do so, enter the maximum permitted limit angle under Angle
range for stylus search in the Measurement Plan Editor Features.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-93
Defining features
An error message appears if the restriction of the angle range means

that no suitable stylus is found in the CNC run. The CNC run is
cancelled.
5-94
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Path generation measuring features automatically
Path generation measuring features

automatically
Unlike the probing of individual points, path generation procedures
feature rapid multi-point measurement in a single operation. Path
generation will help you arrive at optimum and highly accurate
measuring results.
NOTE
hss
You must have qualified your stylus with the Tensor setting in order
to use path generation for scanning (see Installing and qualifying
stylus systems on page 4-17).
The measurement strategy depends on a number of parameters, from
the group of the characteristic (shape, position, size) through
tolerance up to the stylus used. Calypso uses these parameters to
calculate starting parameters of the CMM that lead to the best
possible compliance with the tolerance you demand. You only have to
enter the minimum data.
With path generation you can
continuously record measuring points and generate paths from
discrete points, if you have a CMM with measuring probe.
Or you can just generate a path from discrete points, if you have a
CMM with trigger probe (pseudo scanning).
Path generation is a macro that automatically measures a feature with
set parameters, for example a certain number of surface lines or
screws on a cylinder or cone. With this you can reach a high point
density and thus adequate information about the workpiece surface.
High point densities are the prerequisite for standardized, extremely
accurate evaluation of your features.
To use a path generation method, follow these steps:
Set the global settings for evaluation of the characteristics groups
in the System Set Up (you will find more information in the Online
Help under How to change the measurement parameters of the
CMM).
Enter the feature in the measurement plan and probe its geometry.
Alternatively, you can load a feature from a CAD file. See
Defining features on page 5-2.
Assign a path generation method.
Check and/or change the settings of the path generation method.
Assigning the path generation method is split into three steps:
Adding the path generation method to the strategy list.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-95
Defining features
Making general settings.

These settings are common to all path generation methods.
Setting values for the path generation method.
These settings are described separately because they depend on
the chosen path generation method.
How to add a path generation method to the

strategy list
First, the path generation method has to be added to the strategy list
of the feature, so it can be taken into account when generating travel
paths.
To adopt a path generation method for a feature:
1 Make sure that the feature is part of your measurement plan and
that the definition template is open.
In the definition template you see the Strategy button.
2 Click on the Strategy button.
The Strategy dialog box is opened.
Path generation
method
Strategy list
3 Choose the path mode.

To change the setting, click on the displayed button. (You have
chosen path generation if the points are displayed connected.)
4 Click on the button for the path generation method you want.
5-96
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
The path generation method is entered in the strategy list. At the

same time, Calypso immediately generates the path from the discrete
points if you choose this in step 3.
General settings for the path generation

method
You can now change general settings for the method irrespective of
which path generation method is set for a feature.
Calypso supplies default values for the fields in the dialog box of the
chosen path generation method. The data comes from:
the geometric data of the feature,
the default values and
the tolerances from
the characteristics and
the feature.
If you have not defined any tolerances yet, you can do it in this
section.
Calypso calculates the parameters according to the narrowest
tolerance which you entered for testing the feature and the point
density for the characteristics group (see Basics about
characteristics on page 6-2).
A description of these parameters for each path generation method
can be found in:
Path generation methods for circle, cylinder and cone on
page 5-99
Path generation methods for planes: the Polyline on
page 5-103
Path generation methods for planes: the Grid on page 5-105
Path generation methods for planes: the Circle Path on
page 5-106
Path generation of lines on page 5-107
Unknown Contour path generation

The Unknown Contour method is available for the following
features:
Circle
Ellipse
Slot
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-97
Defining features
Rectangle
Cylinder
Sphere
Cone
Curve
For the curve, the Unknown Contour method is activated in the
technology window:
For all other given features, you can insert a path in the strategy list
using the Unknown Contour icon.
Enter the start point and end point of the travel path in the
technology window for the unknown contour.
Calypso executes the measurement between the start and end points
using the shortest path while, of course, observing the feature
and keeping in contact with the workpiece.
5-98
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Path generation methods for circle, cylinder and

cone
The screens offered for entering the parameters for the path
generation methods (for the features circle, cylinder and cone) do not
differ from each other. In the following illustration, you see the input
field for a circle segment.
Generating the path

from the CAD model
You can extract the data for path generation straight from the CAD
model. When you use this method, the system returns a series of
either start and end angles or start and end points.
Open cylinders and cones are taken into account: Each new path is
checked directly against the CAD model in order to identify material
flaws, if any, and eliminate them from the path. The path can thus be
generated with restrictions, or you may be able to generate different
paths. (At this time, the function is implemented only for the circle
and arc.)
If you make subsequent, manual changes to the path data, Calypso
does not recheck the information. This means that you have a great
deal of latitude in defining paths.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-99
Defining features
Assembling a circle
path
If the workpiece does not allow scanning the circle path with a single
stylus (e.g. in the case of a full circle on a camshaft), you can split the
circle path into arcs to scan each arc individually with an appropriate
stylus. The individual arcs can be combined in a circle path by means
of the Group Circle Sections function.
After the measurement, the circle path is assembled from the selected
arcs and evaluated.
Entering formulas for

path parameters
The entries for path generation can be parameterized. To do so, click

on the corresponding fields with the right mouse button and then
select Formula in the context menu. In the Formula dialog box, you
can use the variables that are defined in the measurement plan to
make formulas and enter PCM commands.
The following entries can be parameterized.
Scanning speed
Step distance
Start angle (input in decimal degrees!)
Angle range (input in decimal degrees!)
Stylus System
Stylus
Parameterizing discrete
points and
intermediate positions
Single probing points and intermediate positions can also be

parameterized. Here, it will be necessary to define the basis system for
the purpose of clarity. To do so, click on the PCM-Reference button
in the Point List dialog box.
In the Reference system for PCM variables dialog box, you can
define which of the three relevant coordinate systems should be used
a basis for the conversion of parameters to numerical values.
This coordinate system will apply to all parameters of the feature that
is currently open. All technological parameters of this feature will
always be calculated on the basis of this coordinate system
irrespective of the view that has been selected.
5-100
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Measuring range
The meanings of the term measuring height and the resulting

measuring range are explained by the illustration below:
Ursprung lokales
ElementeKoordinatensystem
X
minimale Mehhe
Mebereich
maximale Mehhe
Scanning a circle path with several styli

If the workpiece does not allow scanning the circle path with one
stylus, then you can probe the circle path using several styli. The arcs
determined in this way can be combined in a circle path by means of
the Group Circle Sections function.
You can use this method for the following features:
Cylinder
Cone
Circle
Circle on cone
Prerequisites
The parameters of the features to be measured are known.
Procedure
To scan a circle path using several styli, you must define which arc is to
be scanned with which stylus. Keep in mind:
An arc may not contain any discrete points.
The direction of rotation of the first arc must correspond to the
direction of rotation of the assembled circle path.
The other arcs can have any direction of rotation.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-101
Defining features
The assembled circle path begins after the largest gap between
adjacent circle paths
(2)
(1)
(2) (2)
(1) (2)
(1)
(3)
(1)
Grouping circle sections
To group arcs, select these in the strategy window using the mouse
and click on Group Circle Sections.
The selected arcs are assigned to a group. The grouped arcs are
treated and evaluated the same way as a circle path scanned with a
stylus.
If one of the selected arcs is already included in a group, this will be
removed from the group and added to the new group. Under certain
circumstances, the old group might thus be deleted.
Removing a group
To remove a group, choose Select Group in the context menu. Click

on Group Circle Sections.
To remove individual arcs from a group, highlight the desired arcs and
mark Remove From Group.
5-102
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Path generation methods for planes: the Polyline

Automatic measurement of a polyline is a valuable tool which helps
you measure a track of lines, circle segments and full circles on planes.
This helps you measure planes very easily that are strongly segmented
or ruptured.
You see the input window for the generation of polylines in the
following picture.
Coordinate list
Marking frame
Make sure that you have entered a value for the rounding-off of
corners in the system setup. Check this value by pressing on the Basic
Settings button and then on the SCAN Limits tab.
How to create a polyline

To create a polyline:
1 Probe the points on the plane from which you want to create the
polyline. You can do this with the CAD window (you will find more
information in the Online Help under How to define a probing
point in the CAD window) or the CMM.
Each measuring point that you entered is displayed in the
coordinate list (from bottom to top) with its X, Y and Z
coordinates. Calypso connects these points with lines by default.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-103
Defining features
2 You always need three points if you want to create a circle

segment or full circle from the collected points (start point,
direction point and end point). The corresponding three points
have to be displayed in the coordinates list. Use the arrow buttons
next to the Number field to do so.
3 Click on the circle segment icon or full circle icon, depending how
you want to connect the points.
The green border now encloses the three points from which the
circle segment or full circle was calculated. You see the new
connection in the CAD window.
4 Continue in this way with all following points.
The order does not matter for this: You can probe new points at
any time and/or choose/edit connection types between any points.
5-104
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Path generation methods for planes: the Grid

With the grid measurement, you can create a plane right down to
very small sections.
The input window for path generation of planes with a grid can be
seen in the illustration below.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-105
Defining features
Path generation methods for planes: the Circle Path

You can have a plane calculated from a circle path using the path
generation method for the circle path.
The input window for path generation of a circle path on a plane can
be seen in the illustration below.
There are four ways to define the circle path:

Accept the default setting: The center of the circle is in the center
of the plane; the minimum of the length and width of the plane as
set as the diameter, corrected by 1.5 times the stylus tip radius.
Enter the values for the circle center and diameter.
Click on 3 points on the plane on the CAD model.
Click on a cylinder or a cone on the CAD model. This generates a
circle path around the cylinder. You can modify the circle path in
the CAD window by moving the circle center with the mouse or by
changing the diameter by grasping the circle line with the mouse.
5-106
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Scanning with rotary

table
The curve on the plane can be scanned with the rotary table. The
check box Scan circle section with rotary table must be activated
for this purpose. The preconditions for this are that the rotary table is
activated for the current measurement plan and the spatial axis of the
plane is in the direction of the rotary table axis.
Path generation of lines

With the path generation method for lines, a line is scanned whose
points are already defined in the feature. Calypso therefore does not
need any more information, and you merely see the parameters of the
CMM and the tolerance in the input window of the path generation
method.
The input window for the generation of straight lines can be seen in
the illustration below.
How to set parameters for a path generation

method
To enter tolerances and make general settings:
1 Double-click on the corresponding entry in the strategy list to open
the window for the path generation method.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-107
Defining features
2 Click on the Basic Settings button if you want to enter required

point densities.
You switch to the corresponding page in the system setup (you will
find more information on this in the Online Help under How to
change the measurement parameters of the CMM).
3 If you have not defined a tolerance yet, enter it in the Expected
Tolerance field for the feature.
4 Click on the Calculate button.
Calypso runs a new calculation with the parameters of the
Settings group. The scanning speed proposed by the system
depends on the required accuracy.
5 Enter the number of the stylus with which the CMM is to perform
the path generation method in the Stylus field.
6 Enter the values for the path generation method. See Path
generation measuring features automatically on page 5-95.
7 Click on OK to save the settings and close the dialog box.
You are returned to the Strategy window.
8 If you do not want to set any more path generation methods for
this feature, click OK. Otherwise repeat the steps from Features
you can measure with path generation on page 5-108.
The path generation method has now been fully defined and will be
executed once a CNC run is initiated.
Features you can measure with path

generation
The available path generation methods are automatically offered with
every feature. The choice of a path generation method emerges from
the required measuring jobs. The following path generation methods
are available:
Feature
Icon
Path generation method/discrete-point measurement
Various features
Unknown contour
Measurement takes place from point 1 to point 2 using the
shortest path (see Unknown Contour path generation on
page 5-97).
Line
Line measurement
5-108
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Feature
Plane
Icon

Grid measurement
The plane is acquired in a grid of user-definable pitch.
Polyline measurement
A polyline is measured on the plane.
Circle path on plane
A circle path is measured on the plane.
Polyline paths
Polylines at a distance from the edge
Circle, Cylinder,
Cone
Four-Point Circle Macro

This measurement is semiautomatic. To execute this
measurement, move the stylus to the center of the circle
(cylinder, cone) that is to be measured. Calypso takes 4 probings
and calculates the values for the circle from them.
Grouping circle sections
Combines the selected arcs in a group and undoes the existing
grouping. A group is evaluated the same way as a circle path
scanned with a stylus.
Support function for special applications, e.g. if a circle is to be
measured with several styli.
Circle
Circle Auto Path Definition (Circle Auto Path Measurement).

The start angle and angle range can be set.
Helical path (screw line measurement)
Suitable for special applications (threads). Gradient, number of
turns, start angle and rotation direction can be set.
Cylinder
2 Circle Auto Paths.

Two circles are measured the first at the top of the cylinder and
the second at the bottom of the cylinder. The measuring heights
can be set individually.
1 Circle Auto Path.
This intersection is measured at the center of the cylinder. The
measuring height can be set.
Form lines.
The number of surface lines is editable.
Helix Path (helical path/screw line measurement).
Gradient, number of turns, start angle and rotation direction can
be set.
Helix Path Variable (screw line measurement with VAST
Navigator).
Gradient, number of turns, start angle and rotation direction as
well as the number of additional circles can be set.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5-109
Defining features
Feature
Sphere
Icon

Define Sphere Position.
Calypso probes the sphere and in so doing defines the position
of the sphere. The probing locations cannot be influenced. In
CNC runs, you will also be requested to take manual probings.
Sphere Macro.
You can enter the taper angle for the area in which these
probings are to be taken.
Cone
2 Circle Auto Paths.

Two circles will be measured the first at the top of the cone and
the second at the bottom of the cone. The measuring heights
can be set individually.
1 Circle Auto Path.
One or more intersections will be measured between the base
surface and top surface of the cone. The number of intersections
and their measuring heights can be set.
Curve
Curve segment measurement:

Only for the Curve option (see Curve measurement (option)
on page 16-1). The segment to be measured is defined by three
or more points:
If you define three points, they represent start point, end
point and direction of curvature (direction around
circumference) of the curve segment, in that order.
If you define more than three points, they represent a full
circle; the first point defines the start point and the direction
around circumference is clockwise (from the top or
outside).
5-110
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Chapter
.................................................................................................................................
The characteristics enable you to check the tolerance limits that your
workpiece and its features should meet. You integrate the required
characteristics in the measurement plan and link them with the
measured features. If those features are already defined, will be
defined or maybe are to be imported from a CAD file later on, it
makes no difference. Calypso supports any given order in which you
define the features or characteristics of your measurement plan.
You should be familiar with the basic concepts of Calypso before you
proceed with this chapter. If you are not, you should read Calypso
user desk on page 1-5 and Measurement plan-oriented
measuring with Calypso on page 1-14.

Basics about characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Calculation of geometric elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Defining characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
List of characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6- 1
Basics about characteristics

Once you have defined the features, you can set the characteristics
for measuring the size (dimensions), form, position, and so on, of
these features. In this way you can ascertain whether the features are
within the limits you specified.
You can also add a characteristic to the list of characteristics without
immediately defining the associated feature. You can select the
associated feature later when entering the settings for the
characteristic.
The characteristics are split into three groups (see table below). To
evaluate these characteristics, different point densities are required for
each group, depending on which best-fit method is used (see Bestfit methods on page 6-3 and in the Online Help to check the settings
under How to change the measurement parameters of the CMM).
Group
Point density Comment
Size
Small
Characteristics
Normally these characteristics are rated by a small number of

measuring points. It is recommended to use more points than
required to also get a statement about the standard deviation
(Sigma). For a function-oriented evaluation (pairing-dimension
evaluation), a higher number of points is required.
Location
Medium
Characteristics
These characteristics require a higher point density, because the

position deviation overlaps the form deviation of the features.
Form
High
Characteristics
The evaluation of the characteristics needs a high point density

on their measurement plane. Low-pass filtering of the measuring
points is also recommended to minimize the influence of the
surface roughness.
You can add other special features to the list of characteristics. In this
case, they are not actually characteristics, but they will be processed
during the CNC run. For more information, refer to Utilities on
page 6-9.
6-2
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Calculation of geometric elements

To understand and correctly interpret measured results, you need to
know how Calypso calculates the corresponding standard geometric
element from CMM's measured points.
Using the measured points, Calypso calculates a computed feature.
Mathematically, the computed feature is the feature which best fits
the resulting measured values in terms of the standard geometry. The
computed feature is the basis for the evaluation of the measured
results. Depending on the fit method used, the features determined in
this manner can differ slightly from each other. Thus, there are also
different deviations of the measured feature from the specified
nominal feature.
This is why the computed feature and the corresponding best-fit
method are fundamental to the accuracy of nominal-actual
comparisons carried out via the characteristics.
NOTE
hss
The optimum best-fit methods are the default settings for the
respective characteristic groups.
This section shows and explains the advantages and disadvantages of
the mathematical best-fit methods. This means that for each
measuring requirement that arises within the framework of a
measuring strategy you can now select the best-fit method which is
best suited to your individual requirements.
Best-fit methods
Calypso uses the following best-fit methods:
Gauss
Tschebyscheff (minimum criterion)
Calculation as circumscribed or inscribed feature
Calculation as tangential element (outside/inside).
Specifying the best-fit
method
In Calypso, you can specify which best-fit method to use for which
feature at two places:
in the Evaluation dialog box, which you can access from the
definition template for the respective feature using the Settings
button.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-3
in the Evaluation dialog box, which you can access from the
feature selection for the characteristic using the Settings button.
The selected method will be used to calculate the characteristic
when the data is evaluated. If you select Default, the best-fit
method defined in the feature will be used.
Not all best-fit methods are available, only those suitable for the
selected feature (see Using the best-fit methods on page 6-6).
You can view and change the parameters for the best-fit method in
the system set-up by selecting Extras Workroom
Measurement. The current settings are on the Point Density tab.
Example
The following diagram shows the actual shape of a scanned circle

with the ideal geometric shapes. Those shapes result from the
different best-fit methods.
outlier
Gauss fitting-in
Minimum fitting-in (Tschebyscheff)
Hull Element
Fitting-in element
X
Actual outline
As can be seen from the illustration, depending on the best-fit

method used, results can differ when dimensions (e.g. diameter),
form deviations and position (e.g. center) are checked.
6-4
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Best fit according to Gauss

The Gauss best-fit method calculates the average best-fit element.
From the calculated ideal outline and the actual probed outline, a sum
of square distances is calculated. The minimum of this sum results in
the best-fit element.
This means that a best fit according to Gauss is insensitive against
outliers and forms a clear result by using limited calculations. If there
is just a small amount of points, the Gauss method is always the
standard evaluation method for dimension, form and location testing.
Best fit according to Tschebyscheff

The best fit according to Tschebyscheff calculates the geometric
element in such a way that there is the smallest maximum deviation
between calculated ideal outline and actual probed outline results.
Therefore, the extreme values of the probing have an impact on the
result of calculation. This makes this best-fit method very susceptible
to outliers. A high number of measured values can improve matters. It
may, however, be advisable to eliminate outliers, depending on the
measuring requirements (see How to eliminate outliers on
page 6-38). Used for ISO 1101 shape testing.
Calculation as circumscribed/inscribed feature

When calculating as circumscribed feature, the feature is as small as
possible and positioned in such a way that no probing point is outside
the feature. When calculating as inscribed feature, the feature is as
large as possible and positioned in such a way that no probing point is
inside the feature.
This method is useful for pairing-dimension evaluation and for
evaluating the references in case of position tolerances.
Prerequisite: Large number of points.
Recommendation: Outlier elimination, because the circumscribed or
inscribed feature can only be mapped on the basis of the extreme
points.
Calculation as tangential element

The tangential element is the largest possible element outside which
no probing points of the element are situated, or the smallest possible
element inside which no probing points of the element are situated.
Prerequisite: Large number of points.
Recommendation: Outlier elimination, because the tangential
element can only be mapped on the basis of the extreme points.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-5
Using the best-fit methods

For each feature, the table below shows the best-fit methods you can
select for the feature.
Circumscribed/
inscribed
Tangential
element
Gauss
Minimum
2D Line
3D Line
Plane
Circle
Sphere
Cylinder
Cone
Ellipse
Rectangle
Slot
Point
Feature
6-6
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
To go from merely obtaining measurements to their evaluation, it is
necessary to define the characteristics.
This is performed as following:
You integrate the characteristics into the measurement plan, a
procedure for which you have three options:
You can choose characteristics from the menu bar of the user
desk.
You can choose characteristics from a toolbox of Calypso.
You can define characteristics implicitly in the definition
template of a feature. Refer to the section entitled Definition
template for features on page 5-3 for a description of the
check boxes of the Tolerance For: group.
You can assign the features to the characteristics, please see
Connecting a characteristic to a feature on page 6-16.
You can find more detailed information regarding the different
characteristics in List of characteristics on page 6-43.
How to insert characteristics into the

measurement plan
To insert characteristics into a measurement plan:
1 Click on the Characteristics button to view the list of
characteristics in the measurement plan area.
2 Choose the characteristic you want:
To select the characteristic from the menu bar of the user desk,
click either on Size or Form and Location and select the
characteristic from the submenus. You can add other special
features to the measurement plan using Resources
Utilities.
To select the characteristic from a toolbox, open the toolbox
(How to work with a custom toolbox on page 7-27). Click
on the characteristic and drag it to the measurement plan area.
The selected characteristic is added to the list of characteristics.
You can repeat these steps to add more characteristics or immediately
link a feature to the inserted characteristic.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-7
Characteristic definition templates

When you select a characteristic from the Size or Form and
Location menu or from the toolbox, it will be listed in the
measurement plan area. If you wish to assign features and select their
tolerances, the corresponding definition template must be open.
NOTE
hss
The content of the characteristic definition template varies with the

selected characteristic.
There are three ways of opening a definition template:
Select the characteristic and click on the Change View button.
Right-click on the characteristic to open the context menu and
then select Open.
Double click on the icon of the characteristic.
The template of this characteristic will open. Here, the fields for
tolerance and actual value are shown. The buttons for the required
references of this characteristic will still be shown as empty.
Example: After you select and double-click on the True Position
characteristic, the following dialog box will appear on the screen:
6-8
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Utilities
In the Utilities group in the toolbox and under Resources Utilities
in the menu, you can find some special elements that, strictly
speaking, are not characteristics but are required for the
measurement plan in certain circumstances:
Alignment
3D Best Fit (not in Calypso Light)
RPS Method
P6 Method
Stylus qualification
Gage Correction Qualification (not in Calypso Light, see Greater
accuracy by gage correction qualification on page 5-47).
Erosion Module (option)
Textelement
Save Alignment
Load Alignment
Delete Alignment
Zero Base Alignment (see How to set a base alignment to zero
on page 4-76)
The utilities are described with the runs, characteristics and features
for which they are needed. Only the following utilities are described
here.
Alignment, 3D Best Fit, RPS Method, P6 Method
Stylus System Qualification
Erosion Module
Textelement
Save Alignment
Load Alignment
Delete Alignment
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-9
Utilities for alignments

Use Resources Utilities Alignment to add the Alignment
utility to the measurement plan.
This alignment is determined according to the default method using
the features that you predefine in the definition template.
If you want to determine an alignment in the measurement plan
according to an alternative alignment method, you must select the
method of your choice under Resources Utilities.
You also obtain the same definition templates, extended by some
functions, if you create a new base/start alignment under Preparations
(for the start alignment, use the default method only).
For details on the determination of alignments, see How to create
a new base / start alignment on page 4-51 and Alternative
alignment methods on page 4-76.
Stylus System Qualification utility

Use Resources Utilities Stylus System Qualification to add
the Stylus System Qualification utility to the measurement plan:
You can use this utility to define the qualification settings for any
(already defined) stylus or stylus system.
Calypso automatically performs qualification during the CNC run of
the measurement plan. If you use a stylus system changer, Calypso
automatically uses the correct stylus system. Otherwise, you will be
prompted to insert the stylus system.
6-10
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Erosion Module utility

NOTE
The erosion module is an option you can purchase and have enabled.
hss
You can add the Erosion Module utility to the measurement plan by
selecting Resources Utilities Erosion Module or via the
toolbox on the Utilities page.
The erosion module provides a file with translation and rotation

values for two related alignments which is suitable for erosion
machines.
It will be necessary to enter the type of erosion machine that is being
used along with the name and directory of the file that will be
created.
NOTE
The directory path must be available. It is not created automatically.
hss
These alignments refer to the clamping device on the one hand and
to the erosion electrode on the other. Here, the alignment of the
workpiece or tool (erosion electrode) (Xe, Ye, Ze) will be determined
on the basis of the alignment of the clamping device (X, Y, Z).
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-11
NOTE
Here you cannot select alignments with index that are based on
references with pattern.
Important
If you specify the alignments in an order that is the wrong way
around, you receive other compensation values.
hss
hss
During the CNC run, i.e. when measuring the feature, the alignments
will be formed - if this has not already been executed - and the
parameter file of the erosion module will be saved on the hard disk or
a floppy disk.
Procedure
NOTE
hss
Result
First, your inputs and the manufacturer-specific entries in the Conf.dat

configuration file are used to create an Erodier.Edm initialization file
as an ASCII file.
By editing the entries in the Conf.dat configuration file, you can
control the output of the file for the erosion machine.
Once the erosion module has been executed, an ASCII file will be
available in a format that can be used with the erosion machine.
Conf.dat configuration file for the erosion module

The entries in the Erosion machine selection list and the specific
settings for the coordinate transformation are controlled by the
manufacturer-specific settings in the Conf.dat file, which is stored in
the same directory as the Epost.exe file.
The Conf.dat file is an ASCII file that you can edit with an ASCII editor.
If required, you can make new entries here and change the existing
settings.
Description of Conf.dat
file
The file contains the names of the erosion machines and a special
code for the coordinate transformation in each case. For each erosion
machine type, there are two lines in the following form:
;MachName<serial number> = <machine name>
<machine-specific switch>
The details for the coordinate transformation are in the machinespecific switches, an 8-digit binary number.
Example:
;MachName01 = Erode de luxe
11110000
6-12
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
The 8 digits of the switch (counted from the left) have the following
functions:
Digit
Function
1 changes sign of X
1 changes sign of Y
1 changes sign of Z
1 changes sign of C
1 changes the reference system
Manufacturer-dependent
Not used
Code electrode/tool; e.g.:

0 = ELEKEle,X-38.611,Y34.783,Z50.202,C-7.023
1 = WKSEle,X-38.611,Y34.783,Z50.202,C-7.023
A 1 in the 5th digit thus has the same effect as swapping the
alignments of the clamping device and the erosion electrode.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-13
Textelement utility
With Resources Utilities Textelement or by using the toolbox
on the Utilities page, you can enter the Textelement utility on the
current page in the measurement plan.
The Textelement utility appears with its symbol in the list of
characteristics. Double click to open a window which will allow you to
enter a text.
Text output
In the case of a CNC run of the measurement plan, the text will be
output in the printouts and protocols (the default printout, the
compact printout and the custom printout).
Only the text itself is output in the default printout and compact
printout. The custom printout also includes the name of the
characteristic (e.g. Textelement7).
The text will only be written in the printouts and during CNC run and
not when opening or closing the definition template (as is usual in the
case of characteristics).
6-14
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Saving alignments
Calypso can save, load and delete alignments again during a CNC
run.
In the definition template for the Save Alignment utility, enter the
file name and select the alignment to be saved. If the alignment has a
pattern, you must determine the desired index.
When the utility is executed in the CNC run, the actual alignment
(calculated from the actual values) is saved on the hard disk in the
...\Calypso\home\om\workaera\basesystems directory. A subdirectory is
created with the name that was entered in the definition template. If
you entered backslashes \ here, further subdirectories will be
created under this directory.
If there is no actual alignment of the set alignment, this will be
calculated during the CNC run and, if necessary, measured.
If the alignment cannot be measured and calculated, the symbol for
the utility will turn red in the measurement plan.
Loading alignments
run.
In the definition template for the Load Alignment utility, enter the
file name for the alignment to be loaded. If the alignment has a
pattern, you must determine the desired index.
When the Load Alignment utility is executed in the CNC run
(e.g. because a feature refers to this alignment), the alignment is
loaded from the hard disk. The directory for alignments is
...\Calypso\home\om\workarea\basesystems.
If the file name contains backslashes \, the program will branch to
the appropriate subdirectories.
If a Load Alignment utility is contained in the measurement plan, it is
treated as a normal alignment. Its name (not identical to the file
name) appears in the geometry reference system lists and the lists for
linked alignments, for example.
No distinction is made between nominal values and actual values
when loading. Nominal values and actual values are equal in this case.
In the case of a DMIS run, the loaded alignment is used as the current
alignment.
Special aspects
The name of the alignment to be loaded need not necessarily be the

file name.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-15
An error message will be issued if an alignment cannot be loaded

(because the file is not present). In addition, a message stating this
will appear in the status window, and the CNC run will be interrupted
if necessary.
The base alignment is returned for critical calls, such as the nominal
alignment for the nominal geometry.
Deleting alignments
run.
In the definition template for the Delete Alignment utility, enter the
file name for the alignment to be deleted.
All alignments are listed in the
...\Calypso\home\om\workarea\basesystems directory.
If the file name contains backslashes \, the program will branch to

the appropriate subdirectory.
The file you specified in the definition template is deleted during the
CNC run.
If the file is not present, the run will continue without a message. The
symbol for the utility in the measurement plan will turn red. If the file
is write-protected, an error message will appear stating that the file
cannot be deleted. The CNC run is resumed.
Connecting a characteristic to a feature

A characteristic must receive information relating to the feature in the
measurement plan which will be used as a basis for the check. You
have several different ways of connecting the characteristic to the
feature of your choice:
Enter the name of an already existing feature directly in the input
field.
After the entry, two icons are displayed on the right-hand side. The
name is accepted by clicking on the checkmark. The name is not
accepted by clicking on the cross, pressing Esc or by changing to
another dialog box.
If the entered name does not exist, the first name in the list of
features that contains the entered character string is shown.
Use the CAD window to assign an already defined feature.
Click on the feature of your choice in the CAD window. Don't
forget to make sure, however, that Select Already Extracted
Features is set in the CAD window (you will find more information
6-16
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
in the Online Help under How to select features in the CAD

model).
The first feature you click on will be adopted as the Feature, the
second as Primary Datum, the third as Secondary Datum etc.
corresponding to the sequence of the buttons.
You use the Automatic Feature Predefinition function. To do
this, you must have activated the Automatic Feature
Predefinition check box on the Features notebook page under
Extras Workroom Measurement. If this check box is
ticked, when a new characteristic is opened, the last feature that
was open will be entered automatically.
Example: You create a Circle1 and close the window. You then add
diameter, roundness, X value and Y value, etc., to the
measurement plan in the list of characteristics. When you open
these characteristics one after the other, Circle1 is already entered
for the first feature of each characteristic.
Use the displayed button in the template window. In this way you
can connect new features or features that have already been
defined to the characteristic.
You establish the connection to the characteristic in the Selection
dialog box.
Input field
List of
existing
features
Overview
If the measurement plan is large, you might find it useful to have an

overview of how a feature is used in the various characteristics. You
can obtain an overview of this nature by opening the list of features,
highlighting a feature and selecting the Check use of selected
features command in the context menu. This opens a list of all
characteristics in which the feature you selected is used.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-17
Characteristics with
indexes
You can assign indexes to characteristics. Thus, you define with one
definition template several characteristics of the same type. For
details, please refer to Characteristics with indexes on page 6-22.
How to assign a defined feature via selection

To assign a feature to a characteristic using the definition template,
follow these steps:
1 Open the definition template by double-clicking the characteristic
of your choice.
2 Click on the Feature (or Feature1) button.
The Selection (features) window will open. All Features is
generally activated by default.
3 In the list, click on the feature that you want to assign.
NOTE
hss
You can limit the scope of the model of the features by, for example,
clicking on the appropriate buttons.
4 If you want to filter the measured values: activate the Filter check
box and if necessary, click on the Settings button to define the
filter.
You will find more information on filters and filtering in the section
entitled How to set and activate a filter on page 6-36.
5 If you want to eliminate outliers: activate the Outlier Elimination
check box and if necessary, click on the Parameters button to
define parameters for eliminating outliers.
You will find more information on outliers in the section entitled
How to eliminate outliers on page 6-38.
6 If you want to use a best-fit method other than the default, click
on the Parameters button and select the method you want in the
dialog box.
Note that all best-fit methods are not necessarily available for all
features.
7 Click OK to assign the values in accordance with your settings.
This takes you back to the definition template. If the characteristic
requires more than one feature, you can define the rest of them by
repeating the steps described above.
You will find more information on the Selection dialog box under
Selection (features) in the Calypso Online Help.
6-18
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to assign a feature that has not yet been

defined via selection
When you entered the characteristic in the measurement plan, maybe
you did not define the feature. Or maybe you noticed that you need
more features. It does not take much effort to create a new feature
within the definition template of the characteristic and directly assign
it.
of your choice.
3 Select the New option.
A list of all the types of feature possible for the characteristic in
question is displayed.
4 Select the feature type and click OK to confirm your choice.
This opens the definition template of the feature.
5 Define the feature.
The procedure is exactly as described in How to define a feature
using definition templates on page 5-4.
6 When you have probed all the points, click OK.
This closes both the definition template and the Selection window,
so you return to the definition template of the characteristic.
If the characteristic requires more than one feature, you can define
the rest of them by repeating the steps described above.
How to assign and edit a defined feature

If you are about to assign a feature to a characteristic and notice that
something in the definition of the feature has to be changed
(measuring strategy, additional probings, etc.), you can do so in the
course of defining the characteristic.
To assign and edit a defined feature:
of your choice.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-19
3 Activate the Select existing Features radio button, if it is not

already activated.
4 Click on the feature you want in the list.
NOTE
hss
You can limit the scope of the model of the features by, for example,
clicking on the appropriate buttons.
5 Activate the Edit check box.
6 Click on OK.
This opens the definition template of the assigned feature.
7 Make the necessary alterations to the feature (see Definition
template for features on page 5-3).
8 Click on OK.
The changes you made to the feature are saved and the definition
template for the characteristic reappears on the screen.
If the characteristic requires more than one feature, you can define
the rest of them by repeating the steps described above.
How to assign characteristics to certain

features
You can assign one or more characteristics to certain features in a
single step.
This means that the information in question has to be defined only
once, while at the same time you can be sure that the common
properties are exactly the same for all the features concerned.
To assign characteristics to certain features:
1 Open the list of characteristics.
2 Click on the characteristics you want to assign.
more than one characteristic.
6-20
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
3 Click on the Transfer format button in the upper toolbar.

The Characteristics assign to Features dialog box appears on
the screen.
At the same time, the list of features is opened in the background.

NOTE
hss
The dialog box contains a second page on which you can copy the
properties of characteristics. To open the second page, click on the
symbol for the characteristics at the bottom left of the dialog box or
on the user desk.
4 Set a radio button in the Naming block to specify whether the
characteristics will be entered with standard names or whether you
will define the names in a dialog.
If you do not want to be prompted to enter names, Calypso will
assign each new characteristic a standard name.
5 Set a radio button in the Existing characteristics block to specify
whether or not existing characteristics will be overwritten.
6 In the list of features, highlight the feature or features to which
you want the characteristics assigned.
more than one feature.
7 Click on OK to start the assignment.
If you activated the Request all names radio button, the number
of boxes suggesting names will be equal to the number of
characteristics you selected times the number of features. If a
characteristic already exists, the default is the current name,
whereas a standard name (see above) is suggested for new
characteristics.
8 Overwrite the names suggested by the system, if applicable.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-21
The new characteristics are added to the list of characteristics. If this

list already contains the same characteristic for a feature the original
characteristic will be overwritten or not, depending on which radio
button you activated in the Existing characteristics block.
Characteristics with indexes

You can assign indexes to characteristics in the same way as to
features. To do so, place a loop around the characteristic. Then, the
loop parameters are included in the name of the characteristic.
Example: You place a loop with the start index 1, end index 5 and the
step width 2 around the X-Value1 characteristic. The characteristic
generated in this way is named (1,5,2)X-Value1.
Purpose of the function
This characteristic represents a series of characteristics that differ only

in the value of the corresponding loop variable (in this case LOOP1).
The LOOP1 loop variable must, of course, have been used for the
definition of the characteristic to make sure that these characteristics
differ from each other.
Example: You use the LOOP1 loop variable in the name of the feature
to which the characteristic refers. This gives a 1:1 relation between
several features (of the same type) and several characteristics (of the
same type).
Special aspects with patterns: index exchange

For certain characteristics and constructions, a function is required
instead of a 1:1 relation between the feature and characteristic or
construction.
Example: The characteristic has a loop from 1 to 4. The characteristic
has a rotational pattern (rotation by 45) with an index of 1 to 8. The
four first pattern features of the characteristic should not be used as
pattern features for the characteristic but only every second pattern
feature (rotation by 90).
You can achieve this via the index exchange. You assign parameters
for the index exchange to the feature in question, whereas a certain
value of the loop variables of the feature is assigned to each value of
the loop variables of the characteristic.
You define the index exchange in the Loop (index exchange) dialog
box. Here, you can create several groups of parameters for the index
exchange. While the loop variable of the characteristic runs through
its values from start to end, the parameters for the index exchange
group are run through, in parallel thereto, group by group. Thus, you
can define any desired index sequence via one or more groups with
parameters for the index exchange.
6-22
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Example: You defined the (1,8,1)Roundness1 characteristic. You

want the following representation of the characteristic on the feature:
Characteristic
Feature
Roundness1(1)
Circle1(4)
Roundness1(2)
Circle1(6)
Roundness1(3)
Circle1(8)
Roundness1(4)
Circle1(4)
Roundness1(5)
Circle1(2)
Roundness1(6)
Circle1(8)
Roundness1(7)
Circle1(6)
Roundness1(8)
Circle1(4)
You define for the Circle1 feature an index exchange with three
groups:
Start index
End index
Step width
-2
-2
In the characteristic, the characteristic is referred to as

Circle1(4,8,2;4,2,-2;8,4,-2).
NOTE
hss
The example shows that the relation between the characteristic and
the feature may not be clear after the index exchange: The Circle1(4)
feature is not only measured in the Roundness1(1) characteristic but
also in the Roundness1(4) characteristic.
Only the first use found is recorded in the compact printout.
How to define the index exchange

To define the index exchange for a characteristic:
1 Open the definition template of the characteristic and click on the
Feature button.
The Selection (feature) dialog box appears on the screen.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-23
2 Select the feature with pattern to be measured and select Index

exchange in the context menu.
The Loop window will appear on the screen.
3 Enter the definitions for the index exchange in the list of loop
values and confirm with OK.
4 Click on OK to close the Selection (feature) window.
A loop or construction is automatically assigned to the
characteristic and the defined index exchange is entered.
NOTE
hss
By selecting Delete Index Exchange in the context menu, you delete

the index and the index exchange as well as the loop placed over the
characteristic.
Example: Determining the distances between circles

of two patterns
The distance between two circles with pattern is to be determined.
Without any specific entries, a loop would be placed automatically
over the Distance characteristic and Calypso would calculate the
following distances:
Distance1(1) between Circle1(1) and Circle2(1)
Distance1(3) between Circle1(3) and Circle2(3) etc.
The following distances should be calculated:
Distance1(3) between Circle1(3) and Circle2(4) etc., i.e.
Distance1(i) between Circle1(i) and Circle2(i+1) with i = 1, ...,7.
6-24
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
An index exchange is carried out between the current loop index of

the characteristic and the Circle2(*) characteristic. Open the
Selection (feature) window in the definition template of the
Distance characteristic.
In the context menu of the Circle2(*) feature, select Index
exchange... and enter the parameters for start, end and step in the
Loop window: Start = 2, End = 8, Step = 1.
Now, the distance is calculated as shown above.
How to define nominal values and

tolerances
You can now match each nominal value and tolerance that the
characteristic has to check to the specifications.
NOTE
hss
The tolerances determine the calculation of the scanning speed for

the measuring strategy. See Path generation measuring features
automatically on page 5-95.
To enter tolerances and nominal values:
1 Open the definition template by double-clicking the characteristic.
The Definition template (characteristic) 2 is opened (taper
angle of a cone is shown here by way of example).
2 Enter the required nominal value (or several for locations) in the
Nominal (or Nominal Position) field.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-25
3 Now enter the tolerance values:

You can choose the tolerance group from the selection list
(below the name of the characteristic).
Once you have made your selection, the corresponding values
appear in the Upper Tolerance and Lower Tolerance boxes.
Or you can type the tolerance values directly into the Upper
Tolerance and Lower Tolerance if you need your own
tolerance values.
4 Activate the None check box if you do not want tolerances taken
into account in measurement evaluation.
5 Select Last input from the menu if you again need the most
recently selected tolerance.
6 Click on OK to close the definition template of the characteristic.
You have now defined all the characteristic parameters Calypso needs
for the evaluation of measuring results.
The elements in this dialog box are fully described in Definition
template (characteristic) 1 in the Calypso Online Help.
Keep in mind that the icon of the characteristic is now displayed with
either a green or red background, depending on whether it is inside
or outside of the tolerance. If the feature has not been measured yet,
the icon has a dark gray background (indicating that it is completely
defined).
Tolerance specifications for characteristics

Calypso has a multi-level menu that enables you to select the correct
tolerance specification in the definition template for the characteristic.
Tolerance type
Tolerances
General tolerances
fine, medium, coarse, very coarse
DIN 1680 Rough

castings
General tolerances GTA 12 to GTA 21

group GTA
General tolerances GTB 12 to GTB 21
group GTB
DIN 1683 Rough steel

castings
Lengths
DIN 1683 Linear measures GHTB 20 to GTB 16.5
Thickness measures DIN 1683 Thickness measures GHTB 20 to GTB 16.5

DIN 1684 Rough
castings of malleable
iron
6-26
GTB 17/5
moulding/not
moulding
61212-2010602
DIN 1684 GTB 17/5 m. linear measures / not m.

linear measures
DIN 1684 GTB 17/5 m. thickness measures / not m.
thickness measures
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Tolerance type
Tolerances
GTB 17
moulding/not
moulding
DIN 1684 GTB 17 m. linear measures / not m. linear

measures
DIN 1684 GTB 17 m. thickness measures / not m.
thickness measures
GTB 16/5
moulding/not
moulding
DIN 1684 GTB 16/5 m. linear measures / not m.

linear measures
DIN 1684 GTB 16/5 m. thickness measures / not m.
thickness measures
GTB 16
moulding/not
moulding
DIN 1684 GTB 16 m. linear measures / not m. linear

measures
DIN 1684 GTB 16 m. thickness measures / not m.
thickness measures
DIN 1685 Rough

Linear measures /
DIN 1685 Linear measures GTB 20 to GTB 15
castings of cast iron
thickness measures DIN 1685 Thickness measures GTB 20 to GTB 15
with spheroidal graphite
DIN 1686 Rough
castings of cast iron
with foliated graphite
Linear measures /
DIN 1686 Linear measures GTB 20 to GTB 15
thickness measures DIN 1686 Thickness measures GTB 20 to GTB 15
DIN 1687 Rough

castings of heavy metal
alloys
Sand rough
DIN 1687 GS GTB 20 to GTB 16 m. / not m.
Gravity die casting
DIN 1687 GK GTB 15 to GTB 14 m: / not m.
Pressure die casting DIN 1687 GD L GTB 14 m. / not m.

Linear measures /
thickness measures
for high-melting
and low-melting
alloys
DIN 1688 Rough
castings of light metal
alloys
Sand rough
DIN 1688 GS GTB 20 to GTB 16 m. / not m.
Gravity die casting
DIN 1688 GK GTB 20 to GTB 16 m. / not m.
Pressure die casting

DIN 16901 Plastic
tolerances
General tolerances DIN 16901 Gen. 160 A / 160 B

DIN16901 Gen. 160 B / 160 B
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-27
Tolerance type
Tolerances
Tolerances for
DIN 16901 with directly entered A. 160 A / 160 B
values with directly
entered deviations
DIN 169091 with directly entered A. Precision Techn.
A/B
Select General tolerances (fine, medium, coarse, very coarse) or
special, material-specific tolerances (cast blanks, plastic parts) with the
appropriate DIN standard (for information on how to add tolerance
tables of your own to this menu, see Defining custom tolerance
tables on page 6-30).
Specifying tolerances with MMC/LMC

You can apply the most-material condition or the least-material
condition as necessary when you specify tolerances of form and
position.
The most-material principle is laid down in DIN ISO 2692. It applies to
axes and mid-planes and allows for the interrelationships between
dimensional tolerance and tolerance of form and position. When the
most-material condition (MMC) or the least-material condition (LMC)
is applied, tolerance extensions are permissible for tolerances of
position for which diameter tolerances are not fully exploited.
The procedure for applying MMC or LMC to tolerances of position is
as follows:
1 Open the definition template for the characteristic.
6-28
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2 If you have not assigned features, click on the Feature button and
select the feature whose position you want to check.
This illustration shows the template for the True Position
characteristic for checking a cylinder.
Selection list
3 From the RFS (= Regardless Feature Size) selection list, select the
entry:
MMC to apply the most-material condition, or
LMC to apply the least-material condition.
The Nominals button now appears beside the selection list.
4 If Diameter has not been defined as a characteristic for the
feature, click on the Nominals button.
Calypso adds Diameter as a characteristic for the feature to the
measurement plan and opens the definition template:
Enter the nominal value for the diameter.
Click on OK to close the definition template for the diameter.
5 Define reference features, if necessary.
You can apply MMC or LMC to the reference features as well. To
do this, click on the button of the reference and proceed as
described above, starting at step 3.
6 Click on OK.
The settings are saved and the definition template is closed.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-29
Defining custom tolerance tables

When you have to define tolerances for a characteristic, you have a
choice of entering the tolerance directly or selecting the Tolerance
group from a selection list (with the name of the characteristic) (see
How to define nominal values and tolerances on page 6-25).
Calypso supports you with a multi-level menu in which you will find
General Tolerances and a number of material-specific tolerances
(Rough castings of various manufacturing methods, Plastic parts).
You can expand this table as the need arises, in order to avoid the
necessity of having to enter custom tolerances in the Upper
Tolerance and Lower Tolerance fields.
The tolerances offered in the menu are saved in XML files named
dinxxxx.xml in the calypso\opt\om\data\toldat directory.
If you want to add a tolerance table to the menu, you must create an
XML file of your own named userXXXX.xml
(e.g. userworkroom1.xml) and copy it into this directory.
The manner in which the file should be structured can be seen in the
following example .
6-30
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
XML file with custom tolerances (example)
<?xml version="1.0" ?>

<!DOCTYPE tolerancesDefinitionFile SYSTEM "tolerancesDefinitionFile.dtd">
<tolerancesDefinitionFile>
<userNorm name = "Feinmessraum" group = "3" description = "Feinmessraum1">
<range stop= "18">
<value name = "UT" value = "+4.5"/>
<value name = "LT" value = "-4.5"/>
</range>
<range start = "18" stop="30">
</range>
<value name = "UT" value = "+8"/>
<value name = "LT" value = "-8"/>
</range>
</range>
</range>
</range>
</range>
</range>
</range>
</range>
</userNorm>
</tolerancesDefinitionFile>
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-31
When you copy this file into the calypso\opt\om\data\toldat directory,

the tolerances menu will have another item called Feinmessraum1,
and this item, in turn, will offer you a total of 10 tolerances.
Meanings of the entries
The following entries in the file are customizable:

group=3
The standard entry is group=1. If there are two or more userdefined tolerance tables, this number defines the position at which
the submenu will appear when the User defined tolerance
pulldown menu is opened.
description=Feinmessraum1
The text displayed in the pulldown menu.
range stop=18
Nominal range from 0 mm to 18 mm, inclusive.
value name = UT value = +4.5
Upper tolerance of nominal range 0 to 18 (+4.5mm).
value name = UT value = -4.5
Lower tolerance of nominal range 0 to 18 (-4.5mm).
range start = 18 stop=30
Nominal range from 18 mm to 30 mm, inclusive.
Filtration and outliers

Calypso enables you to edit measured values and exclude certain
values from further analysis. A variety of filters are available for this
purpose, along with the functionality for eliminating outliers.
Filters can segregate the waviness profile of a geometric element
from the effects of surface roughness. Filters, therefore, are of
assistance in maximizing measuring accuracy. The following filter
types are available: Gauss (ISO 11562), Spline (ISO/TS 16610-3)
and 2 RC (ISO 4291). The filter methods are low-pass, band-pass
and high-pass.
The new statistical data of the geometric element is obtained from
the filtered measuring data after compensation.
Individual measuring points of the geometric elements 2D Line,
Plane, Circle, Cone, Cylinder and Sphere can be purged from the
measured values as Outliers.
The number of outliers eliminated is documented in the printout.
Basics about filtration and outliers

Minimum number of
points for filters
The use of filters is recommended only for a large number of points,

i.e. only for scanned features.
6-32
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
The current standard calls for at least seven points (earlier standards:
five points) as the prerequisite for using filters. This value is set as the
default value for measurement plans in version 3.8 and higher. You
can toggle the minimum number of points between 7 and 5 for the
current measurement plan in Measurement plan editor
characteristics.
!
hss
Important
Once the minimum number of points has been changed to 7, filtering
might no longer be possible for certain features in measurement plans
created with older versions of Calypso. The No result message
appears.
Using filter types

The available filter types have the following effects:
Low-pass
Filtering a profile with a low-pass filter (low frequencies pass the filter,
high frequencies do not) yields an average line in which waviness and
other long-wave profile components are present, while the effects of
surface roughness are largely eliminated.
The average line is produced by analyzing measuring points within
equal sections (double the wave length): The measuring points are
analyzed with weighting within each section. The profile obtained in
this way is compensated and serves as the basis for calculating
parameters of waviness.
High-pass
Filtering with a high-pass filter (high frequencies pass the filter, low
frequencies do not) yields an average line in which waviness is
suppressed, while the effects of the surface roughness are still
present.
Band-pass
A band-pass filter results from the combined use of a low-pass and a

high-pass filter. This suppresses both the long-wave (waviness) and
short-wave (surface roughness) profile components that exceed the
respectively specified limit.
Eliminating outliers
Outliers are geometric points that differ significantly from the
geometric form yielded by the other measured points and as such,
they can produce a large error when the computed feature is
calculated. An error of this nature would easily propagate through the
actual-value determination of the corresponding characteristic.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-33
Prior to the actual outlier recognition, the measured points are filtered
through a band-pass that is composed of low-pass and high-pass
filters. Thus, measured values that are otherwise not detectable as
outliers can likewise be eliminated. You define yourself the
characteristic of the band-pass (How to eliminate outliers on
page 6-38).
Blockage
Passage
Low-pass
Band-pass
Blockage
1/2
High-pass
s/100
s/2
100
UPR
A measured (prefiltered) point is tagged as an outlier if it is further

than a defined threshold (threshold = factor * standard delta) from
the computed Gaussian element. You also predefine the factor.
Defining filters and outlier elimination

There are several different points in Calypso at which you can
parameterize and activate filtration and outlier elimination:
For an individual characteristic
For an individual feature
As defaults for the characteristic groups and the references and
alignment elements of the coordinate systems.
Which setting is valid?
The setting for the characteristic always takes priority. If

filtration/outlier elimination is not activated for the characteristic, the
setting for the feature applies. If filtration/outlier elimination is not
activated for the feature, Calypso refers to the default settings for the
characteristic groups.
Bear in mind that filtration requires a minimum number of points to
be probed. If the number of probings is less than this minimum
number, the filter is not activated and a message to this effect is
issued.
A feature obtained by recall from a feature filtered beforehand is
automatically not filtered subsequently, even if filtration is activated.
6-34
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to select general settings for filter and outliers

You can define general settings for filtration and outlier elimination
per characteristic group. Unless another setting is defined elsewhere
for individual features, Calypso uses these general settings.
The procedure for defining filtration and outlier elimination for
characteristic groups is as follows:
1 Select Resources Filter/Outlier Elimination.
The Filter/outlier elimination default settings window will
open.
2 Click on the appropriate Settings button.

3 Set the parameters as necessary in the Filter or Outlier mode
dialog box and activate your settings, if applicable.
The current setting is displayed beneath the corresponding check
box.
4 Click on OK.
The dialog box is closed and the settings are accepted. The filter or
outlier elimination activated in this way applies with its parameters to
all the features required for the characteristic, unless a setting to the
contrary is made in a given feature's definition template.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-35
How to set and activate a filter

To activate a filter:
1 Open a corresponding characteristic in the measurement plan and
click on the Switch to Feature Menu button.
The Selection dialog box appears on the screen. At the bottom
left, you can see whether or not a filter is activated. If a filter is
active, its parameters are shown.
2 Activate the Filter check box to activate the filter.
6-36
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
3 Click Settings to define the settings for the filter.

The Filter window will open.
4 Select Filter Method and Filter Type, then enter the limit values
for the selected filter.
You can specify the filter parameters via Undulations Per
Revolution or via Wavelength Lc.
You must enter a value range if you have entered the Band-pass
filter type everything exceeding this range will be filtered out.
5 Activate the Filter on check box if you would like for it to be
possible to activate the filter from the Reference (feature for
characteristic) dialog box.
This returns you to the Characteristics window, which is still open. If
you activated a filter, the filter method and the filtration parameters
now appear below the Filter check box (e.g. Gaussian 150).
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-37
How to eliminate outliers

To activate outlier elimination:
1 Open a corresponding characteristic in the measurement plan and
click on the Switch to Feature Menu button.
At the bottom right you can see whether or not outlier elimination
is activated. If it is active, its parameters are shown.
2 Activate the Outlier Elimination check box to activate
elimination, or deactivate the check box to deactivate elimination.
6-38
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
3 Click Parameters to define the parameters for outlier elimination.

The Outlier mode dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Enter the Factor for Outlier inside and outside the workpiece
with two decimal places.
5 Select the range of data reduction:
Only Outlier: Only the real outliers are eliminated.
Include Adjacent Points: The number of adjacent points to be
eliminated in addition to the outliers can be determined in tests for
manual measurement.
To Computed Feature: For CNC operation, it has been shown to
be effective to eliminate adjacent features until the first probing
point again lies beyond the computed feature.
Include
Adjacent
Points
Outliers
Include
Adjacent
Points
+3s
Computed Feature
-3s
Permitted value range
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-39
6 Enter the prefilter:

For circles, cylinders, cones and spheres, you enter the lower and
upper value for the Undulations Per Revolution.
For all other features, you enter the lower and upper value for the
Wavelength Lc.
For more information about the function of the prefilter, see
Filtration and outliers on page 6-32.
This returns you to the Characteristics window, which is still open. If
you activated outlier elimination, the words Outlier Elimination now
appear below the No Outlier check box.
Copying properties of characteristics

You can copy certain properties of a characteristic and assign them to
one or several other characteristics. This means that the information
in question has to be defined only once, while at the same time you
can be sure that the common properties are exactly the same for all
the characteristics concerned.
The following are the properties you can copy to all characteristics:
Nominal
Tolerance class
ISO286
Upper tolerance
Lower tolerance
How to copy properties of characteristics into other

characteristics
The procedure for copying properties of a characteristic to other
characteristics is as follows:
1 Click on the characteristic from which you wish to copy the
properties and click on the Transfer format icon in the toolbar.
The Characteristics assign to Features dialog box appears on
the screen.
6-40
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2 Click on the characteristics icon at the bottom of the dialog box.

The Copy Properties from <characteristic name> dialog box
3 Activate the check boxes of the properties of the selected

characteristic that you want to copy to other characteristics.
4 Highlight the characteristic or characteristics to which you want to
copy the properties.
more than one characteristic.
5 Click on OK.
Copying is started.
About the color-coding of Characteristics

buttons
When a characteristic is listed in the measurement plan area, the
background color of its button tells you its status:
Light gray (same as measurement plan area): The characteristic has
not been defined yet and no nominal data has been recorded.
Dark gray: The characteristic has been defined and nominal data
has been recorded. The characteristic is ready to run.
Green: The characteristic has been defined, nominal data has been
recorded, measuring results have been gathered, and the results
are within the tolerances.
Red: The characteristic has been defined, nominal data has been
recorded, measuring results have been gathered, and the results
are outside of tolerances.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-41
Details on defining characteristics

In this section, you will find, among other things, the list of all
characteristics with the necessary information for defining the
characteristic.
For some characteristics, you can find more detailed information in
separate sections.
Concrete instructions on the use of certain characteristics help you to
make the best use of the possibilities of Calypso.
Setting references for characteristics

Whenever you define a characteristic, you must always assign it one
or two features in its definition template. Frequently, you will also
have to define primary references, and less frequently secondary or
even tertiary references as well.
The most common approach to reference definitions is as follows: A
primary reference generally constrains two of the rotational degrees
of freedom and one or two translational degrees of freedom for the
evaluation of a characteristic. In order to satisfy these requirements,
the primary reference must be set by a three-dimensional feature: a
plane, a 3D line, a cylinder or a cone.
If required, a secondary reference usually further constrains the
remaining rotational degree of freedom. A secondary reference can
be a plane, 2D line, 3D line, cylinder or cone. All other features are
insufficient to establish rotation frames of reference. Lastly, a single
additional feature provides the remaining one or two degrees of
translational constraint.
6-42
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
List of characteristics
The table below lists the items of information you need to define the
characteristics for size, form and location:
Characteristic
Menu
Location in
command toolbox
Description
X value
Size
Standards
Size
Determines the position of a given feature in X.
Characteristics The location of each feature is stated in
coordinates for X, Y and Z. The position of a
circle, for example, is defined by its center. The
values are referenced to the part alignment.
Y value
Size
Standards
Size
Determines the position of a given feature in Y.
Z value
Size
Standards
Size
Determines the position of a given feature in Z.
Diameter
Size
Standards
Size
Determines the diameter of a round feature
Characteristics such as a circle, cylinder, cone, or sphere.
Radius
Size
Standards
Size
Determines the radius (= half the diameter) of
Characteristics a round feature such as a circle, cylinder, cone,
or sphere.
Radius
measurement
Size
Standards
Size
Determines for a feature the radius and the
Characteristics angle (specified in the feature's local
coordinate system) of each individual probing
point. This corresponds to presentation of the
probing points in the polar coordinates. In this
way the results for a small arc segment can be
enhanced.
Note: The angles are only output, if
Additional Position Result is activated in the
Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics.
Length of Axis
Size
Standards
Size
Determines the length of the axis of a
Characteristics rotationally symmetrical body.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-43
Characteristic
Menu
Location in
command toolbox
Polarposition
Radius
Size
Standards
Size
Determines the position of a given feature with
Characteristics the Radius polar coordinate.
The location of each feature can be defined in
terms of the polar coordinates (Radius, Angle,
Height). The position of a circle, for example, is
defined by its center. The values are referenced
to the part alignment.
Polarposition
Angle
Size
Standards
Size
Characteristics the Angle polar coordinate.
Polarposition
Height
Size
Standards
Size
Characteristics the Height polar coordinate.
Projection
Angle One
Size
Angle
Size
Determines the first projected angle of a
Characteristics certain feature based on the part alignment. In
a spatial system of coordinates, the axial
direction can be defined by two projected
angles. A projected angle is an angle on a
workpiece plane viewed from the third axis.
Projected angle no. 1 is based on the reference
axis (the axis common to the two planes of
projection) of the feature.
Description
Feature axis
X
Y
Z
6-44
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Angle 1
Y/X
Z/Y
X/Z
Characteristic
Menu
Location in
command toolbox
Projection
Angle Two
Size
Angle
Description
Size
Determines the second projected angle of a
Characteristics certain feature based on the part alignment. In
a spatial system of coordinates, the axial
direction can be defined by two projected
angles. A projected angle is an angle on a
workpiece plane viewed from the third axis.
Projected angle no. 2 is based on the reference
axis (the axis common to the two planes of
projection) of the feature.
Feature axis
X
Y
Z
Angle 2
Z/X
X/Y
Y/Z
Cone Angle
Size
Angle
Size
Determines the angle of aperture of a cone.
Characteristics
Half Cone
Angle
Size
Angle
Size
Determines the half angle of aperture of a
Characteristics cone (the angle between the axis of the cone
and the cone's lateral surface).
Angle of
Inclination
Size
Angle
Size
Determines a features angle of inclination
Characteristics from the Z axis of the part alignment.
Rotation
Angle
Size
Angle
Size
Determines a feature's angle of rotation about
Characteristics the Z axis, referenced to the X axis of the part
alignment.
Feature Angle
Size
Angle
Size
Calculates the angle that the axis of rotation of
Characteristics a feature assumes with the part alignment.
Polar 2d
Location
Size
Characteristics
Distance
and
Form and
Location
Distance
Determines the two-dimensional distance

between the midpoints of two features.
This characteristic is used to determine the
distance between the projections of two twodimensional features on a datum plane.
Polar 3d
Size
Location
Distance
Characteristics
and
Form and
Location
Distance
Determines the direct three-dimensional

distance between the midpoints of two
features.
This characteristic is generally used for two
points defined in all three dimensions (e.g. the
centers of spheres).
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-45
Characteristic
Menu
Location in
command toolbox
Description
Cartesian
Size
Location
Determines the distance between two features
Distance
Characteristics in Cartesian coordinates (along the X, Y and Z
axes).
and
Form and
Location
Distance
Distance
Symmetry
Point
Size
Size
Determines the distance between the two
Distance
Characteristics reference features of a symmetry point.
and
Form and
Location
Distance
Space Point
Distance
Size
Size
Determines the distance of a space point or
Distance
Characteristics net point referenced to its nominal value.
and
Form and
Location
Distance
Simple
Distance
Size
Size
Distance
Characteristics
and
Form and
Location
Distance
Diameter Two
Size
More
Size
Determines the second diameter of an ellipse.
Characteristics The first diameter of the ellipse is measured
with the Diameter command.
Curve Slope
Size
More
Size
Determines the height difference between two
Characteristics given points of the curve.
Curve Stroke
Size
More
Size
Determines the axial and radial deviations of a
Characteristics lift curve.
Curve
Distance
Size
More
Size
Determines the distance between two curves.
Characteristics
Curve
Expansion
Size
More
Size
Determines the expansion of a curve in a
Characteristics predefined direction.
6-46
61212-2010602
Determines the distance of a point feature

from the origin of a coordinate system or the
distances of two point features from each
other.
The distances output are those along the
Cartesian axes, along with the point-to-point
distance (radius) and the vector angle.
The reference point for a circle, ellipse, sphere,
rectangle or slot is always the midpoint.
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Characteristic
Menu
Location in
command toolbox
Description
Radius 2
Size
More
Size
Determines the second radius of an ellipse
Characteristics feature.
The first radius of the ellipse is measured by
the Radius characteristic.
Slot Length
Size
More
Size
Determines the length of a slot or a rectangle.
Characteristics
Slot Width
Size
More
Size
Determines the width of a slot or rectangle.
Characteristics
Average
Size
More
Size
Determines the average of multiple length
Characteristics measurements.
DIN ISO 1101

Roundness
Form and
Location
Form
Determines the roundness or circularity of a
Characteristics given circular feature. The circle can be on a
cylinder, a sphere, or a cone. The definition
template includes a button labeled Graphic
for form plots (see How to display variations
in form and location graphically on
page 9-33).
DIN ISO 1101

Flatness
Form and
Location
Form
Determines the flatness of a flat feature. The
Characteristics definition template includes a button labeled
Graphic for form plots (see How to display
variations in form and location graphically on
page 9-33).
Flatness In A
Zone
Form and
Location
Form
Defines for a flat feature the flatness within
Characteristics given rectangular zones.
The definition template includes a button
labeled Graphic for form plots (see How to
display variations in form and location
graphically on page 9-33).
DIN ISO 1101

Straightness1
Form and
Location
Form
Determines the straightness of a line.
Characteristics The normal tolerance direction reflects
straightness in the probing direction; the
parallel tolerance direction reflects
straightness parallel to the surface of the
workpiece.
The definition template includes a button
labeled Graphic for form plots (see How to
display variations in form and location
graphically on page 9-33).
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-47
Characteristic
Menu
Location in
command toolbox
DIN ISO 1101

Cylinder form
Form and
Location
Form
Determines the cylinder form of a cylindrical
Characteristics feature. The definition template includes a
button labeled Graphic for form plots (see
How to display variations in form and
location graphically on page 9-33).
Form
Form and
Location
Form
From the extreme values of features,
Characteristics determines form deviation as the difference
between the maximum and minimum
measured values normal to the feature
(e.g. cone form or sphere form).
Curve Form
Form and
Location
Form
This characteristic is optional. It defines the
Characteristics deviation of a defined curve (see Curve
measurement (option) on page 16-1).
GDT Profile
Form and
Location
Form
Defines the deviation of a plane from its
Characteristics nominal geometry. Its value depends on the
selected shape of zone (see DIN ISO 1101
Profile on page 6-50).
DIN ISO 1101

Position
Form and
Location
Location
Determines the position of a given feature in
Characteristics relation to a datum reference frame. You have
the choice of defining the reference features,
the base alignment, or one of the systems of
coordinates. Each defined part alignment can
be used as the datum reference frame.
When you define the position tolerance, you
can click on the Special button to apply the
Offset and Rotate functions with
reference to the base alignment (see
Moving or rotating the base / start
alignment on page 4-60).
Alternatively, you can use the best fit of bore
pattern function (see How to use best fit
of bore pattern on page 6-54).
DIN ISO 1101

Concentricity
Form and
Location
Location
Determines the concentricity of a given feature
Characteristics (e.g. of a circle) relative to one or two
reference features.
DIN ISO 1101

Coaxiality
Form and
Location
Location
Determines the coaxiality of a given feature
Characteristics (e.g. of a cylinder) relative to another feature.
DIN ISO 1101

Perpendiculari
ty
Form and
Location
Location
Determines the perpendicularity of a planar,
Characteristics cylindrical, conical or a straight-line feature
relative to one or two reference features.
DIN ISO 1101

Parallelism
Form and
Location
Location
Determines the parallelism of a planar,
Characteristics cylindrical, conical or a straight-line feature
relative to one or two reference features.
6-48
61212-2010602
Description
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Characteristic
Menu
Location in
command toolbox
DIN ISO 1101

Symmetry
Form and
Location
Location
Determines the symmetry of a feature relative
Characteristics to two reference features.
Angularity
Form and
Location
Location
Determines the deviation of a feature from a
Characteristics reference feature and a defined angle.
DIN ISO 1101

Radial Runout
Form and
Location
Determines the deviation of a feature (circle,
Location Characteristics circle on cone, cylinder, cone) normal to the
Runout
reference axis in the radial direction.
If the reference feature has no axis (point or 3D
point), Calypso uses, as the reference axis, the
axis of the characteristic that is moved to the
position of the reference feature.
A measured point is only useful as reference
feature, if it is acquired by self-centering
probing.
DIN ISO 1101

Axial Runout
Form and
Location
Determines the deviation of a feature in the
Location Characteristics direction of the reference axis.
Runout
Angle
between
Features
Form and
Location
Gap
(from the Circle in Contour

Best Fit construction)
Determines the gap between the profile and

circle for the Circle in Contour Best Fit
(Circle in contour best fit construction on
page 5-80).
Feature Angle

Determines the start angle for the Circle in

Contour Best Fit (Circle in contour best fit
construction on page 5-80).
Angle Range

Determines the angle range between the

contact points for the Circle in Contour Best Fit
(Circle in contour best fit construction on
page 5-80).
End angle

Determines the end angle for the Circle in

Contour Best Fit (Circle in contour best fit
construction on page 5-80).
Description
Location
Determines the angle between two features.
Characteristics You have a choice of results: acute angle, this
angle's supplement to 180 and the
supplementary angles of both to 360.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-49
DIN ISO 1101 Profile

Characteristics
The profile can be determined for the following characteristics:

Plane
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Point
General surface
NOTE
hss
The DIN ISO 1101 Profile corresponds to the TOL/PROFS defined in

DMIS.
Shapes of zone
When defining the DIN ISO 1101 Profile, you can choose from four
shapes of zone:
Shape of zone
The following are observed:
Bilateral
The deviation from the nominal surface to the inside and outside
(with the same values)
One-sided (inside)
The deviation from the nominal surface to the inside
One-sided (outside)
The deviation from the nominal surface to the outside
Bilateral (unequal
distribution)
The deviation from the nominal surface to the inside and outside
(with unequal values)
For the bilateral tolerance with unequal distribution, a further input
field is activated for the Tolerance (one side), in which you
additionally specify the side to which the tolerance applies with the
Inside / Outside Switch button.
Result of profile
The result of the profile depends on the shape of zone.
Shape of zone
The following are output:
Bilateral
The largest deviation (inside and

outside) times 2P
One-sided (inside)
The largest deviation inside the

workpiece
6-50
61212-2010602
Example
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Shape of zone
The following are output:
One-sided (outside)
The largest deviation outside the

workpiece
Bilateral (unequal
distribution)
The largest deviation (inside and

outside) from a calculated center
line times 2
Calculation of
deviations for the
general surface
Example
The General Surface feature contains only a set of points and not a
mathematical description of the surface. Therefore, the points can be
evaluated only individually: Each actual point is compared with its
associated nominal point. The stylus touch point is calculated based
on the stylus tip center, stylus tip radius and the normal vector of the
nominal point.
The deviation D of the point is formed from the nominal point and
actual point along the normal vector of the nominal point. The
deviation perpendicular to the normal vector of the nominal point is
ignored. This corresponds to the procedure for the space point.
The greatest absolute deviation of all point comparisons is then used
as a measure for the profile.
Restrictions
The following restrictions apply to the profile:

No restrictions may be set for the best fit.
Negative tolerances are not permitted.
Particularities for the

general surface
The following particularities apply to the profile of a general surface:

No filters or outlier elimination.
Only the Gauss evaluation method is possible.
Profile with reference

features
As in general, the following applies to profile with reference features:

Either no reference feature or all three reference features are
defined. Otherwise, no result will be output.
DIN ISO 1101 Flatness In A Zone

For planes, the DIN ISO 1101 Flatness In A Zone can be
determined. In contrast to DIN ISO 1101 Flatness, the flatness of
partial rectangles of the plane concerned is checked. You can set the
size of these rectangles and their degree of overlap.
In addition, you can specify a limit that the angle between an
individual part rectangle and the entire plane must not exceed.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-51
The measured values received from the flatness check of the

rectangles can be evaluated in different ways:
Flatness relative to a part plane
For each rectangle, the difference between the maximum and
minimum distance of the actual points of the rectangle to the
fitted part plane of the rectangle is specified.
Flatness relative to the overall plane
For each rectangle, the difference between the maximum and
minimum distance of the actual points of the rectangle to the
fitted overall plane is specified.
This provides you with a measure for the flatness of each rectangle.
For output, you can specify which of these single results is to be
displayed:
all flatnesses
all flatnesses that exceed the given tolerance
the maximum flatness.
A flatness plot is possible in the same way as with the conventional
DIN ISO 1101 flatness. Minimum and maximum of the rectangle with
the greatest flatness are shown in the plot with *.
DIN ISO 1101 True Position with Best Fit of

Bore Pattern
The True Position characteristic offers options for best fit of bore
pattern.
Initial values
The nominal points and the appropriate actual points can lie in one or
more parallel planes. For the best fit, the nominal points are moved by
means of plane coordinate transformation so that the selected best-fit
condition is fulfilled.
Results
As the result of this operation, Calypso computes the rotation and

offset of the bore pattern. Additionally, the best fit data is used to
generate another coordinate system. You can access the origin of this
coordinate system using PCM functions.
Best-fit methods
The following best-fit methods are available for the best fit of bore
pattern:
Gauss Best Fit. With this method, outliers have only a minimal
influence. Limitations due to reference features are not taken into
consideration. Optimum setting parameters can be derived from
this for the machine tools.
Minimum Best Fit (Tschebyscheff). Outliers have a significant effect
on the result when this method is used. Limitations due to
6-52
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
reference features are not taken into consideration. Optimum

setting parameters can be derived from this for the machine tools.
Tolerance Best Fit. Iterative attempts are made to bring all values
into tolerance. Possible movement and rotation ranges are limited
due to the reference features. This corresponds to a good/bad
evaluation of a mechanical gauge with an additional evaluation of
the single deviations.
L1 Best Fit. Outliers have less effect with this method than is the
case with the Gauss method. Limitations due to reference features
are not taken into consideration. Optimum setting parameters can
be derived from this for the machine tools.
Evaluation mode
The evaluation method for the features used to calculate the best fit
of bore pattern can be changed in the multiple selection dialog box
for features.
The Outer Tangential Element evaluation method is set by default.
Some results may not be reproducible, because this method is very
susceptible to outliers. Better reproducibility can be achieved using
the Gauss feature evaluation method.
Filter and outliers
In addition to the evaluation method, you can select filtration and

outlier elimination for the selected features.
Coordinate system from best fit of bore pattern

When you use best fit of bore pattern, Calypso automatically
computes a coordinate system using the rotation and offset of the
bore pattern.
The coordinate system is named after the best fit of bore pattern
(default: Best Fit of Bore Pattern x, with x being a serial number in
the measurement plan). You can access the origin of the coordinate
system using PCM functions.
Coordinate system calculation method

The coordinate system is created as soon as the Best Fit of Bore
Pattern option is selected in the True Position characteristic. This
coordinate system is initially identical to the current base alignment.
Once you have selected the references of the True Position, a nominal
coordinate system is calculated using the nominal values of the
geometries.
After measurement and computation of the best fit of bore pattern,
the result of the best fit of bore pattern (rotation angle, Y translation
and Z translation) are added to this coordinate system.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-53
If there are no references for the True Position, the result of the best
fit of bore pattern (rotation angle, Y translation and Z translation) is
added to the nominal reference system of the best fit of bore pattern.
Display in CAD window

When a best fit of bore pattern is selected in the CAD window, the
associated coordinate system and the references of the True Position
used to calculate the bore pattern are also displayed.
Access to the origin

It can be useful to have access to the coordinate system origin for
further operations in the measurement plan, e.g. constructions. This is
possible if you have the PCM option ( Chapter 15 Introduction to
PCM on page 15-2).
You can use the following PCM functions to obtain the coordinate
system origin:
getActual("bore pattern name").characteristic
getNominal("bore pattern name").characteristic
"characteristic" is a dummy for the following:

Characteristic
Returns:
Origin in x of the coordinate system (calculated from the bore pattern)
Origin in y of the coordinate system (calculated from the bore pattern)
Origin in z of the coordinate system (calculated from the bore pattern)

NOTE
These functions can also be used for any other coordinate system.
hss
You can thus access the x, y and z origin of the best fit of bore pattern
in the definition template of any feature by entering a formula. This
also allows you to use constructions (e.g. recall) on the bore pattern
Restricted selection of coordinate systems

Coordinate systems whose calculation depends on the currently open
feature are not offered in the selection menus for coordinate systems.
Otherwise, a circular statement would result.
How to use best fit of bore pattern

To proceed with best fit of bore pattern:
1 Add the True Position characteristic to your measurement plan.
2 Double-click on the button for the characteristic to open the
6-54
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
3 Activate the Best Fit of Bore Pattern radio button.

This automatically generates the coordinate system with the name
of the best fit of bore pattern it is initially identical to the base
alignment.
4 Enter the tolerance. Use the buttons labeled Primary Datum,
Secondary Datum and Tertiary Datum to specify the reference
features so that the bore pattern can be computed later.
This automatically defines the coordinate system with the name of
the best fit of bore pattern.
If you do not enter a reference, the base alignment is used by
default.
5 Click on the Bore Pattern button to define the settings for
evaluating the bore pattern.
This is the dialog box in which you define the settings.
6 Click on the Select Features button to select the features you

need for best fit of bore pattern.
- and/or Use the Select Bore Pattern selection list to include bore patterns
(i.e. feature groups) defined beforehand.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-55
NOTE
hss
In the multiple selection window for features, you can change the
evaluation method for the features (default: Outer Tangential
Element) and set the filtration and outlier elimination.
All the features you select are listed in the Features List. The
coordinates as shown here are referenced to the constraints
selected beforehand. The values are editable and can be shown in
Cartesian or polar form.
7 Select a best-fit method from the Best-Fit Methods group:
Select the best-fit method of your choice from the selection list.
Select Translation and/or Rotation for the means of fitting.
8 Start computation by clicking on the Execute button.
When computation is completed, the result is displayed in the
Result of Fit group.
NOTE
hss
The coordinate system with the name of the best fit of bore pattern is
automatically corrected by the result of fit.
To see a graphic representation of the best fit bore pattern, mark
the Graphic check box (see How to display variations in form
and location graphically on page 9-33).
9 Click on OK.
Characteristics in practice (instructions)

The following instructions are intended to show you how to work
with the measurement features, characteristics and prerequisites of
Calypso in practice.
In the process, you use the possibilities of the desktop and CAD
window of Calypso.
The following section contains these instructions:
How to check wall thickness and wall deviation on page 6-56
How to check wall thickness and wall deviation

With the aid of the selection menu items in the CAD model, you can
define two space points with a click of the mouse and use these
points to check the wall thickness or the material deviation at this
point.
6-56
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to define two space points for the distance

check
1 Turn the CAD model, so that the position with the wall thickness
to be checked can be seen in the foreground.
2 Click on the Selection list in the CAD toolbar.
3 Select the Distance Check menu item.
4 Click on the position on the model at which you wish to check the
wall thickness.
The two opposite space points and the connection between them
are shown at the selected position on the screen.
Two new features of the Space Point type appear in the list of
features.
With the aid of these two points, you can check the wall thickness or
the material deviation at the place in question.
How to check the wall thickness

You have created two opposite space points using the Distance
Check menu item.
1 Add a Symmetry Point to the list of features with Measure
Additional Features Symmetry Point.
2 Select the Recall entry in the Nominal Definition selection list in
the definition template of the symmetry point.
3 Select the available space points for the definition of the symmetry
point.
4 Add the Distance_Symmetry Point characteristic to the list of
characteristics and assign it to the symmetry point that was just
created.
The wall thickness will be checked at the desired position during the
measurement plan run.
How to check the wall deviation

You have created two opposite space points using the Distance
Check menu item.
1 Add two "Space Point Distance" characteristics to the list of
characteristics and assign them the space points just created.
During the measurement plan run, it will be checked whether there is
too much or too little material at the desired position.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6-57
6-58
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Chapter
.................................................................................................................................
You must define characteristics and features, but there are also a
number of things you can do which, although not absolutely
essential, will streamline the work of measurement and make your job
easier.
You must already have created a measurement plan and defined
features and/or characteristics in order to proceed with this chapter.

Managing measurement plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Editing features of the measurement plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Editing the entire measurement plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Using macros in the measurement plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Toolboxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Editing the travel paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Stylus system changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Multimedia user information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7- 1
Managing measurement plans

The following topics describe how to work with measurement plan
files.
How to save a measurement plan

Do not forget to save your measurement plan after you have edited it.
You can either overwrite the original measurement plan or save the
edited plan in another file.
To save a measurement plan:
1 Click on the Save Current Measurement Plan button if you
want to overwrite the old measurement plan.
The measurement plan is saved.
2 If you want to retain the original measurement plan,
Select File Save As.
Enter a new name and press Enter to confirm.

The original measurement plan is retained, and the new
measurement plan is also saved to hard disk.
How to rename a measurement plan

Calypso does not have a direct command for renaming a
measurement plan. You can, however, assign the measurement plan a
new name in the Save As dialog box.
Calypso saves each measurement plan as a file called inspection in a
separate directory that bears the name of the measurement plan.
Follow these steps to rename a measurement plan:
1 Select File Save As.
7-2
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Managing measurement plans
2 Overwrite the name in the File name field with the desired new
measurement plan name.
You have now created a new measurement plan under another name;
the original (old) measurement plan still exists. You may have to
delete the old plan.
How to copy a measurement plan to a floppy

disk
You may want to copy a measurement plan to a floppy disk to back it
up or to work with it on another computer. To copy the measurement
plan, you need to use Windows Explorer.
Follow these steps to copy a measurement plan to a disk:
1 Minimize Calypso by clicking on the Minimize button in the upper
right corner.
2 Insert a diskette into the drive.
3 In the Windows taskbar, click on Start Programs Windows
Explorer.
4 View the contents of the folder called
...\calypso:\home\om\workarea\inspections.
This is the default path for Calypso. A subfolder is created in this
folder for each Calypso measurement plan. To copy a
measurement plan, you must copy its entire folder because it
contains a number of additional files.
5 Click on the folder that is the name of the measurement plan that
you want to copy.
6 Select Edit Copy.
7 Change to the view of the floppy disk drive.
8 Select Edit Paste.
The measurement plan folder and its contents are copied to the
floppy disk.
9 Close Windows Explorer and return to Calypso.
How to delete a measurement plan

You can delete measurement plans that are no longer needed.
To delete a measurement plan:
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-3
1 Select File Open.

The administration dialog for the measurement plans will open. A
subfolder is created in this folder for each Calypso measurement
plan.
2 Select the measurement plan that should be deleted, right-click
and, in the context menu that appears, select Delete.
The selected measurement plan will be deleted.
You can also use the Windows Explorer to delete measurement plans.
7-4
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Editing features of the measurement plan

Once you have set up a measurement plan, you can edit it later at any
time.
In particular, you can add, edit, copy, move or delete features or
characteristics and restore them from the Waste Basket.
You can group features or characteristics (not with Calypso Light) and
rename features, characteristics or groups. You can undo unsaved
changes and search for measurement-plan features in the
measurement plan.
NOTE
Remember to save the measurement plan after you make changes to

it (select item File Save).
NOTE
All of the following sections assume that you have a measurement

plan open on the Calypso user desk.
hss
hss
Adding features or characteristics to a

measurement plan
You can add a feature to your measurement plan at any time. You
have several options. For more information, see Defining features
on page 5-2.
You can add a characteristic to your measurement plan at any time.
You have three options. For more information, see Defining
characteristics on page 6-7.
The screen will display either the list of features or the list of
characteristics, but not both together. However, you can define
characteristics and features irrespective of which list is open:
Calypso automatically places new features into the list of features,
even if this list is not open.
Calypso automatically places new characteristics into the list of
characteristics, even if this list is not open.
The button above the list is a toggle for switching from one list to the
other.
How to edit features or characteristics

To edit a feature or characteristic, you first have to highlight it:
1 Click with the left mouse button on the icon in the measurement
plan area.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-5
2 To highlight several features or characteristics that are not listed

one after the other, press and hold down the Ctrl key and click on
each feature or characteristic in turn.
You deselect by clicking on a highlighted feature or
characteristic.
To undo the entire selection, release the Ctrl key and click on
any point outside the highlight.
3 To highlight a block of several features or characteristics listed one
after the other:
Click on the first feature or characteristic you want to highlight.
Press and hold down the shift key and click on the last feature
or characteristic you want to highlight.
When you highlight a feature or characteristic, the button and text
are highlighted by a dark gray background. When you select a
characteristic, its features in the CAD window turn a different
color.
4 Double-click with the left mouse button on the icon in the
measurement plan area.
The feature or characteristic definition template appears on the
screen.
How to copy features or characteristics

You can make copies of a feature or characteristic and then paste
them into the corresponding list. This is a quick way to add another
feature or characteristic of the same type.
What does a copy
contain?
A copy does not contain the measured data of the original feature
only the properties, nominal data and tolerances.
To copy features or characteristics:
1 Highlight the feature you wish to copy, or hold down the Ctrl key
to highlight several features.
2 Press Ctrl+C or click on the Copy button.
3 Click on the new position in the list and then click on the Paste
button.
The features or characteristics will be pasted into the list at the
position you selected.
To insert the copy or copies multiple times, press Ctrl+V or click on
the Paste button a corresponding number of times.
4 You can also copy the features or characteristics into a different
measurement plan. To do this, open the desired measurement plan
7-6
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
and insert the features or characteristics at the desired position

with Ctrl+V or the Paste button.
How to move features or characteristics

You can change the order of the features and characteristics in the list
in the measurement plan area. The order of features is more
important, because it determines the order of measurements when
the measurement plan is executed.
To move one or several features or characteristics:
1 Highlight the feature (or hold down the Ctrl key to highlight
several features) you wish to move.
2 Press Ctrl+X or click on the Cut button.
3 Click on the new position in the list and press Ctrl+V or click on the
Paste button.
The features or characteristics will be pasted into the list at the
position you selected.
How to delete features or characteristics

You can remove features and characteristics from the measurement
plan in a variety of ways:
Cut an element
The element that was last cut can be pasted into the same or
another location using Paste.
Move an element to the Waste Basket
All of the elements which were dragged with the mouse to the
Waste Basket icon will be gathered in the Waste Basket (spanning
all measurement plans). They can be moved to any location in any
measurement plan.
Delete an element for good
To cut a feature or characteristic:
1 Click on the feature or characteristic you want to delete.
2 Click on the Cut button.
The feature or characteristic is removed from the measurement
plan and is placed in the clipboard.
To place a feature in the Waste Basket:
1 Use the mouse to drag the feature to the Waste Basket icon.
Items in the Waste Basket can be reinserted with the mouse at any
position if necessary.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-7
To delete a feature or characteristic for good:

1 Click on the feature or characteristic you want to delete forever.
2 In the context menu, select Delete.
The feature or characteristic will be deleted.
How to work with the Waste Basket

All of the elements which were dragged with the mouse to the Waste
Basket icon are gathered in the Waste Basket (spanning all
measurement plans).
To view the contents of the Waste Basket:
1 Click on the Waste Basket button.
To recover an item from the Waste Basket:
The contents are displayed.
2 Select the corresponding item and drag it to the measurement
plan area.
A copy of the feature will be added in the measurement plan area
while the original copy will remain in the Waste Basket.
To delete an item from the Waste Basket:
2 Select the desired item and select Delete in the context menu.
The item is deleted from the Waste Basket.
Grouping and ungrouping characteristics

Sometimes a measurement plan has so many characteristics that it
gets cumbersome to view and edit. In that case, you can group
certain characteristics, which combines all the individual
characteristics that you select into one single group characteristic.
NOTE
hss
function.
If you want to evaluate only certain characteristics, you can define a
characteristic group, known as a mini-plan, within the measurement
plan. This allows you to check, edit and run this mini-plan, but leaves
the other characteristics unchanged in the measurement plan area.
You can read about how to create these groups and ungroup them in
Defining the scope of measurement on page 8-2.
7-8
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to rename features, characteristics and

groups
You can name each symbol in the measurement plan area.
NOTE
hss
You should name features before you define them (probe them, in
other words).
When you subsequently rename a feature, you have to redefine a
characteristic associated with it.
To rename a feature, characteristic or feature group listed in the
measurement plan area:
1 Click on the button of the feature or characteristic.
2 Double click on the icon. This opens the definition template of the
element.
- or Right-click and select Rename from the context menu. The
Name/Comment window is displayed.
3 Overwrite the name of the element in the Name field.
You can also use the Comment field to enter a comment, which
will appear on any measurement plan report that contains this
characteristic.
The button now has the name you just entered.
How to undo changes in the measurement

plan
There is no way of undoing an action in Calypso while the
measurement plan is being edited.
NOTE
hss
The Undo command in the Edit menu is used exclusively for deleting
individual probing points within a feature.
However, you can revert to the last saved version of your
measurement plan.
!
hss
Important
All changes made since the last time the measurement plan was
saved will be lost.
1 Save the measurement plan without saving it beforehand.
2 Reopen the measurement plan.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-9
The contents of the measurement plan are now as they were when
last saved.
How to find a measurement plan feature

You can look for a specific feature or characteristic in a measurement
plan.
NOTE
hss
Calypso always checks in the currently displayed list, i.e. either in the
list of characteristics or list of features.
To look for an item in a measurement plan:
1 Click on the Search button.
The Search dialog box will appear.
2 Enter the name of the desired item in the Find what field.
If you want to differentiate between cases, activate the Match
case check box.
If you want to look for complete words only, activate the Match
whole word only check box.
3 Click on the Find Next button.
Calypso looks through the list from top to bottom. When a
matching item is found, it is marked in the list.
4 If Calypso did not find the item you were looking for, click on Find
Next until the item is found.
Calypso always starts the search from the last highlight in the list
going downwards.
5 If you want to start from the beginning, click on the Start at top
button.
The items found in the search are displayed in a selection list.
7-10
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Editing the entire measurement plan

The measurement plan editors are available for editing the
measurement plan in its entirety.
You can also mirror the entire measurement plan on a selected axis
(not with Calypso Light).
You can also combine several individual measurement plans to obtain
combined evaluations.
Editing a measurement plan

The measurement plan editors (for features and characteristics)
provide you with a quick and easy way of checking and, if necessary,
changing important settings.
You can choose whether to apply your changes to:
the higher-order measurement plan setting or
selected features or characteristics.
Calypso has an editor for features (Resources Measurement Plan
Editor Features) and an editor for characteristics (Resources
Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics).
For more information about the dialog elements in both dialog boxes,
please see Measurement plan editor features and Measurement
plan editor characteristics in the Calypso Online Help.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-11
Example: Checking and changing the operating

mode in the Settings Editor
This example demonstrates how to check and change the operating
mode:
1 Select Resources Measurement Plan Editor Features to
open the features editor.
List of settings
List of defaults
Feature type
Column of
currently valid
settings
Feature name
2 Go to the list of settings at the top left and select the section for
which you want to view or change the settings.
The currently valid settings appear in the column on the right.
3 To change the current settings, select the feature to which you
want the change to apply:
For the higher-order measurement plan setting:
Activate the Apply to all defaults of this plan check box.
For selected features:
Click on the feature of your choice in the column on the left.
You can select a block of features (e.g. Feature 1 to Feature 5)
by holding down Shift and highlighting them with the mouse,
or you can mark several individual features by holding down
7-12
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Ctrl and highlighting them with the mouse (e.g. Feature 1,

Feature 3, Feature 5).
4 Select the value for the new setting from the Set To list.
The highlighted features are immediately updated in the list of
currently valid settings.
5 Restart the procedure at step 2 if you want to view or change
settings for other sections as well.
6 Click on OK.
The changed settings are accepted and the Measurement Plan
Editor Features is closed.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-13
Mirroring a measurement plan

You can mirror an entire measurement plan along a coordinate axis of
the base alignment.
NOTE
hss
function.
Mirroring a measurement plan along a coordinate axis means that all
features with their strategies (e.g. probing points) are mirrored on the
plane formed by the other two coordinate axes.
About mirroring
Bear the following in mind:

No actual values are mirrored. The actual values are deleted prior
to mirroring.
After mirroring, the nominal values of the characteristics that
mirroring can change (these include distances and X values, for
example) are updated.
You have to assign styli to the mirrored measurement plan
manually.
7-14
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
The coordinate systems are not mirrored, because the mirrored

direction of rotation would be counterclockwise. The coordinate
systems are transformed: only the coordinate origin (zero point) is
mirrored; the directions of the axes remain unchanged, relative to
the base alignment.
NOTE
The base alignment is unaffected by this transformation.
hss
!
hss
Important
Parameters and patterns are not mirrored. If your measurement plan
contained parameters or patterns, they have to be reentered after the
measurement plan has been mirrored.
How to mirror a measurement plan

NOTE
hss
function.
To mirror a measurement plan:
1 Open the measurement plan you want to mirror.
2 Select Plan Advanced Mirror Measurement Plan.
The Mirror Measurement Plan dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Under Mirror in Plane, select the coordinate axis perpendicular to

the mirror axis.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-15
4 Go to Change Stylus Data and select a different stylus, if

applicable.
The data applicable to your selection is listed in the display area.
5 Click OK to confirm your selection.
The measurement plan is mirrored.
The image in the CAD window is refreshed; the new view shows
you the workpiece after mirroring.
6 Save the mirrored measurement plan by selecting File Save or
by selecting File Save As if you want to keep the original,
unmirrored measurement plan as well.
Combining several measurement plans

You can combine measurement plans and thereby create combined
evaluations. The measurement plans combined in this way can also
have been created and run on different interlinked CMMs.
The primary use of this function, however, is to generate a common
log for measurements on a horizontal-arm CMM with two measuring
columns.
NOTE
hss
If you want to combine the measurement plans of a horizontal-arm

CMM with two measuring columns, you should, if possible, use the
same features for alignment (definition of the base alignment).
In order to combine measurement plans you must create a master
measurement plan on a CMM designated for the purpose, and
import the measurement plans from other CMMs into this master.
How to create a master measurement plan

To create a master measurement plan:
1 Create a new measurement plan and assign it a name beginning
with the character $.
This $ tells Calypso that this is a master measurement plan.
2 Select Resources Import Measurement Plan.
A dialog box appears in which you can import the measurement
plans run to date on individual networked CMMs onto your
computer.
All nominal values, actual values and tolerances are imported into
the master measurement plan.
The names of the individual features and characteristics have to be
unique only within a single measurement plan incorporated into
the master: In the master measurement plan itself, each name of a
7-16
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
feature or characteristic is preceded by the name of the original

measurement plan, with a period as separator.
Example: Two features of the same name, Cylinder1, from the
measurement plans Testblock1" and Base are named
Testblock1.Cylinder1 and Base.Cylinder1 in the master
measurement plan.
3 Edit the measurement plan: Delete superfluous characteristics and
add constructions of features across individual measurement plans.
4 Save the master measurement plan.
NOTE
hss
When saved, the $ will be removed from the name. To make it

easier to distinguish the master measurement plans from regular
ones, you should save them in a separate directory.
How to obtain the combined evaluation

The master measurement plan is not used to measure features: its
purpose is only to calculate combinations of several measurement
plans.
To perform the calculation with a master measurement plan:
1 Open the master measurement plan.
2 Select Plan CNC-Start CNC-Start to start the CNC run.
The Start Measurement window is displayed.
3 Under CMM, go to the Navigate-Feature To Feature field and
select Use Position Points Only.
4 If individual measurement plans have been run in the interim and
you want to update the results: Tick the Clear Existing Results
check box.
In this case the current values (actual values, nominal values and
tolerances) of the individual measurement plans that make up the
master measurement plan are reimported and the results are
updated.
5 Click on OK to start the CNC run.
NOTE
hss
No further measurements take place in this CNC run. Instead, the

process is used for calculations only, and the results are printed out or
generated as result files.
If the Clear Existing Results check box was marked, the latest
results of the individual measurement plans will be imported.
If this option was not selected, the results are recalculated from the
individual measurement plans' results already available on the
computer.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-17
Using macros in the measurement plan

Calypso allows you to use macros in a measurement plan. Simply put,
such a measurement plan macro is nothing but a small, selfcontained measurement plan in a larger measurement plan.
Once you have created a macro, you can use it over and over again. If
the macro contains variables, you assign values to them in accordance
with the intended purpose of the macro.
Advantages of macros
What benefits arise from including macros in a measurement plan?
Macros make it easier for you to create and handle recurring
measuring tasks:
You can measure several identical components in assemblies (e.g.
valve seats in an engine block).
You can measure multiple features, i.e. features with recurring but
varying fundamental quantities (e.g. stepped cylinders, stepped
pyramids, rows of holes with increasing radius).
You can program measuring tasks that are repeated on different
workpieces.
This also facilitates distributed preparation of measurement plans by
several employees.
Parameterizing the macro measurement plan

If you wish to use a macro in a flexible manner, you must
parameterize its variable fundamental quantities. In the example
involving the valves in the engine block, this would be the X
coordinate of the cylinder axis. In the case of the stepped cylinders,
this would be the cylinder radius and the heights.
During integration into a measurement plan, you assign the currently
required values to the parameters.
Storage location for macros

Similar to the measurement plans, the macros created and stored in
Calypso are saved in the subdirectories of the path
...\calypso\home\om\workarea\macros.
The subdirectory bears the name of the macro; the macro itself is
contained in the subdirectory as a file named inspection.
7-18
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Basics about macros in measurement plans

A macro is treated the same way as a group in the CNC run. Macro
characteristics call the associated macro features.
Macro in the measurement plan

The name of the macro in the measurement plan is formed from the
name of the macro measurement plan and a running counter.
Example: If the macro measurement plan is named Deep Hole, the
(first such a) macro in the current measurement plan is named Deep
Hole_1.
The names of features in a measurement plan consist of the name of
the macro measurement plan and the name of the feature in the
macro measurement plan, separated by a period. For example, the
Plane5 feature from the Deep Hole macro is called Deep
Hole.Plane5 in the measurement plan.
You can treat the macro the same way as any other elements in the
measurement plan, i.e. you can move and rename them.
Access to features of the macro

In the measurement plan, you can directly access the features and
characteristics of the integrated macro. For example, you can use
macro features to recall points.
However, you can no longer edit the features of the macro itself.
Processing the macro parameters

The PCM parameters and the transfer parameters of the macro are
processed in the following order:
the PCM parameters (presettings) that you assigned to the macro
(as a measurement plan feature) in the measurement plan.
the transfer parameters of the macro.
the presettings of the macro measurement plan.
Execution of the macro
the postsettings of the macro measurement plan.
the PCM parameters (postsettings) that you assigned to the macro
(as a measurement plan feature) in the measurement plan.
The order thus results from the nesting of the individual units.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-19
Separate parameters
The transfer parameters and PCM parameters of the macro are

logically separated from the parameters of the measurement plan.
This permits parameters with the same name to exist in both the
measurement plan and in the macro without this leading to
misinterpretations.
Calypso treats them as two different parameters: Parameter a of
the macro named Test is known as Test.a parameter in the
measurement plan. This allows Calypso to access the PCM parameters
of the macro by reading them from the measurement plan.
Using macros in Calypso

You should familiarize yourself with the following procedures in order
to use macros in Calypso:
Creating a macro
Using a macro in a measurement plan
Editing a macro
Updating a macro
These procedures are explained in the following sections.
How to create a macro

To create a macro, first create a normal measurement plan and
then save it as a macro.
Parameterizing variable
values
If the measurement plan contains variable values, these must be listed

for the macro and assigned initial values.
To create a macro:
1 Open the measurement plan you wish to use as a macro.
7-20
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2 Select File Macro Define Macro Parameters.

The Parameter definition window will open.
You can edit the list of macro parameters in this dialog box.
3 To create the Parameter column of the parameter list
automatically: click on the Automatic button.
Calypso searches for all parameterized values in the measurement
plan and enters them in the Parameter column.
Every variable in the measurement plan that you wish to use as a
macro must be contained in the parameter list and must have been
assigned an initial value.
4 Enter a default value for each macro parameter.
5 You can also enter a comment for each parameter.
You can save the measurement plan as soon as it contains all
necessary entries.
6 Select Edit Save Measurement Plan as Macro.
The measurement plan is saved together with the transfer
parameters as a macro with the name of the original measurement
plan.
- or Select Edit Save Measurement Plan as Macro as....
You can rename the macro in the Save Measurement Plan As...
dialog box.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-21
How to integrate a macro in a measurement plan

You can integrate a macro in any measurement plan in order to
measure and evaluate certain features or groups of features.
With a parameterized macro, you must enter the specific values that
the object to be measured has on the workpiece.
NOTE
hss
The macro is not integrated as a reference. Instead, it is

permanently integrated as a copy of the selected macro. This means
that changes in the original macro measurement plan are not
automatically made in the integrated macro.
Follow these steps to add a macro to a measurement plan:
1 Open the measurement plan into which you want to integrate the
macro.
2 Open the list of characteristics or the list of features.
3 Highlight the element behind which you want to add the macro in
the list.
4 Select File Macro Integrate macro.
You can see the Load Measurement Plan window with the list of
directories under ...\Calypso\home\om\workarea\macros, in which
the macros are contained as files named inspection.
7-22
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5 Open the subdirectory containing the desired macro and doubleclick on the inspection file.
Calypso first permanently adds all features and characteristics of
the selected macro into the current measurement plan and then
opens the definition template for the macro.
6 Enter the currently valid value for each of the transfer parameters,
if necessary, or select menu item Formula in the context menu
and then write the appropriate formula in the Formula dialog box.
NOTE
hss
As with the content of the comment field, you can no longer change
the names of the transfer parameters here.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-23
A symbol for the macro is displayed both in the list of
characteristics and in the list of features.
Furthermore, the elements of the macros are shown in the CAD

window.
NOTE
hss
During integration into the measurement plan, only the features, the
characteristics and the parameters are taken over from the macro. The
settings (e.g. clearance planes, stylus system, printout/protocol
definitions and CAD data, etc.) of the measurement plan apply.
You can access the individual macro elements via the measurement
plan editor and, for example, define the clearance plane or stylus.
How to edit a macro measurement plan

You can change a macro even after it has been created. All you need
to do is to call up and edit the macro.
To edit a macro:
1 Select File Macro Open Macro Measurement Plan.
The Select Macro dialog box appears on the screen. By default,
the macros are stored in the subdirectories of the
...\calypso\home\om\workarea\macros directory that bear the
corresponding macro name.
2 Select the desired subdirectory and double-click on inspection.
The macro opens and appears on the drawing area the same way
as a measurement plan.
3 Edit the macro measurement plan.
You can save the measurement plan as soon as it contains all
necessary entries.
7-24
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4 Select Edit Save Measurement Plan as Macro.

The macro measurement plan is saved together with the transfer
parameters as a macro under its current name.
- or Select Edit Save Measurement Plan as Macro as....
You can rename the macro in the Save Measurement Plan As...
dialog box.
!
hss
Important
A macro integrated in a measurement plan is not automatically
updated when the original macro measurement plan is changed.
If you have made changes to a macro and want these changes to
work in a measurement plan in which the macro has already been
integrated, you will therefore have to update the macro.
How to update macros
!
hss
To update an individual macro in a measurement plan:

1 Right-click on the macro entry in the list of characteristics or list of
features and select Update in the context menu.
To update all macros of a measurement plan:
1 Select File Macro Update all macros.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-25
Toolboxes
With toolboxes, you can easily insert features and characteristics into
your measurement plan. Toolboxes contain the respective symbols.
You can use the drag&drop functionality to create custom toolboxes
that contain only the items that you most frequently use.
The master toolbox includes all features, characteristics and utilities. It
is embedded in the Tool Box Builder dialog box. The Toolbox Builder
also allows you to create custom toolboxes.
Here are the details on working with toolboxes:

The available element groups are listed in the column on the left.
When you select an element group, its contents are listed in the
middle column.
To move an item from the toolbox to your measurement plan, you
simply click and hold the left mouse button on the symbol and
drag it over to the measurement plan.
The right column of the Toolbox Builder is where you set up
custom toolboxes.
Just like any other dialog box in Windows, you can close a toolbox
by clicking on the Close button in the title bar.
Creating and using custom toolboxes

To create a custom toolbox, you first need to open the Toolbox Builder
and the Master Toolbox.
7-26
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Toolboxes
NOTE
hss
Once you have saved a custom toolbox and then exited the Toolbox
Builder, there is no way to edit the custom toolbox (other than
deleting it and starting again from scratch).
To create a custom toolbox, follow these steps:
1 Click on the Open Selected Toolbox(es) button.
The Tool box selector window will open.
If you have not defined any custom toolboxes, only the Master
Toolbox is listed here.
2 Highlight Master Toolbox and click on Open.
3 Name your new toolbox:
Delete the unnamed label and type a name for the toolbox.
4 Now you can assemble your elements: Click and hold the left
mouse button on the desired toolbox button and drag it over to
the right column.
Keep in mind:
Custom toolboxes do not have groups. All buttons are in the
same list.
You cannot change the order of items in the custom toolbox.
To delete an item, click on the item to highlight it and select File
Delete from the menu bar of the dialog box.
5 Select Toolbox Builder File Save.
The toolbox configuration you put together is saved.
How to work with a custom toolbox

A custom toolbox contains the items you need most frequently in
your day-to-day work.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-27

2 Highlight your toolbox and click on Open.
The Tool box builder window will open.
3 To move the items you need from the toolbox to your
measurement plan, click an item, hold down the left mouse button
and drag the item to the measurement plan area. Release the
mouse button.
4 As soon as you click anywhere else on the user desk, the toolbox is
hidden. To display it again, click on the Select Toolboxes button.
Deleting a custom toolbox

To delete a custom toolbox, follow these steps:
2 Highlight Master Toolbox and click on Open.
3 Select File Delete from the menu bar of the dialog box.
4 In the list of custom toolboxes, click on the toolbox you wish to
highlight, then click on OK.
The toolbox has now been deleted.
Sizing and moving toolboxes

Just as with any window in Windows NT, you can enlarge custom
toolboxes or the Toolbox Builder window, and you can also make
them smaller or move them:
To resize a toolbox, follow these steps:
1 Move the mouse pointer to the corner of the window in question
until it changes to an arrow with two points.
2 Then click with the left mouse button and drag the window in or
out to make it smaller or larger.
To move a toolbox, follow these steps:
1 Click on the left mouse button on the title bar, and hold down the
mouse button.
Move the mouse to drag the box to another position.
2 Release the mouse button when the box is where you want it.
7-28
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Editing the travel paths

Calypso needs travel paths in order to move the stylus around the
workpiece without colliding during automatic runs (CNC).
Automatically
generated travel paths
Calypso generates the routes automatically provided clearance planes

have been defined around the workpiece (see Defining the
clearance planes on page 4-113).
To avoid collisions with other objects on the table, you can generate
outer clearance planes in addition.
Optimizing travel paths
You may be able to optimize the routes, depending on the geometry

of the workpiece and the resulting positions of the features.
You also have the option of changing the coordinates for a route to a
feature. This is useful, for example, if you want to ensure that the
probing points for a cylinder are uniformly spaced.
You have the following options for checking and optimizing travel
paths:
Checking the travel paths on page 7-32
Editing travel paths between features on page 7-33
Editing travel paths within a feature on page 7-40.
About travel paths

Travel paths in Calypso can be divided into two groups: routes
between features and routes within features. Terms closely related
with this concept include clearance plane, clearance group, retract
plane, clearance distance and retract distance these terms are
explained briefly below.
Travel paths contain all the relevant data for the CMM to reach and
probe the feature without collision. Along with the coordinates of the
probing points, this data set can also include data for intermediate
positions, for table control, for stylus changes, and so on.
Paths between features

The paths between features define how the probe moves from one
feature to the next. These paths are computed during a CNC run and
depend on the following parameters:
Current status (current position referenced to the stylus, associated
clearance group, current stylus, etc.)
Settings for the clearance group (retract plane defined or not, etc.)
Clearance planes (dimensions, edge blocking)
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-29
Outer clearance planes (dimensions),

Other stylus-specific data, position of a stylus system changer rack,
etc.).
Automatic navigation
check
When the navigation check is switched on, the end positions, the
outer clearance planes and the rack with the stylus systems are taken
into the calculation of the travel paths between the features, each
according to the settings.
Paths within a feature

The travel paths within a feature influence the path traced by the
probe in carrying out the measurement strategy defined for a feature.
These paths comprise:
Defined probing points, intermediate positions, scanning paths as
well as
approach and departure positions of the probe relative to a feature
and possible intermediate positions between the probing points.
These components of the path are computed during the CNC run
and depend on the following parameters:
the clearance distance, i.e. the height of the first
intermediate position in the direction of the axis or normal,
the retract distance, i.e. the distance of the generated
intermediate position from the probing point in the probing
direction.
Clearance planes/clearance groups

When it is defined, each feature is automatically assigned a particular
clearance plane. This allocation defines the approach position, i.e. the
side of the clearance planes on which the probe is located when
approaching the feature. The orientation of the feature (e.g. direction
of cylinder axis or normal of the plane) is of no consequence in this
respect, and the same applies to the probing direction at the feature.
Calypso distinguishes between clearance planes (CP) and clearance
groups (SCP).
The clearance planes are assigned when the clearance planes are
defined (see Defining the clearance planes on page 4-113).
The normals of the clearance planes bear designations
7-30
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
corresponding to the directions of the coordinate axes (positive or

negative), referenced to the base alignment of the workpiece.
Clearance group
SG+Z1
Clearance plane
SE+Z
Clearance group
SG+Z2
A clearance group is akin to a local clearance space in which two

or more features can be combined. This is a way of avoiding
unnecessary retractions of the probe to the clearance plane. A
clearance group, hierarchically speaking, is below a clearance
plane (parent group) from which the features of the clearance
group in question are reached.
Retract planes
The illustration below shows what a retract plane signifies:
SE+Z
Retract plane
SG+Z2
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-31
It is not necessary to define a retract plane if the approach and

departure positions of all features in a clearance group are such that
they can be reached without collision when the head moves from one
to the other. This means that features on different sides of a common
interior space can be assigned to the same clearance plane.
Loop clearance groups
Generally, a feature has only one clearance plane/group. Activate the

CNC Loops-Safety Group check box if the feature is measured in a
loop and you want to use the same movements as for a new
clearance group (retract to parent group).
This makes sence if the feature is in a feature group with pattern.
Afterward, the travel paths are optimized.
Checking the travel paths

When a measurement plan is created, some settings of crucial
importance in terms of navigation are automatically entered in the
feature.
These settings (e.g. clearance group, clearance distance, etc.),
however, are merely defaults; prior to the first CNC run, you must
check and, if necessary, change these settings.
!
hss
Important
There is no guarantee that the run will be collision-free if you fail to
check the defaults.
The most practical procedure for checking the defaults is described
below:
When you program the feature, check the clearance plane, the
clearance distance and the retract distance. Change the default
settings if necessary. (For more information, see Clearance data
in the Calypso Online Help).
The criterion for the correct clearance plane is the position of the
probe relative to the clearance planes (on the approach to the first
intermediate position of the feature in question).
When you finish programming the measurement plan, select
Resources Clearance Planes and click on the Test Drive To
The Selected Clearance Plane button to perform a test move
(see How to test the clearance planes on page 4-117).
This is your opportunity to recheck the assignment of features to
clearance planes in the displayed CAD model.
!
hss
7-32
Important
Other travel paths might be generated, depending on the
characteristics selected or if the run takes place without a result reset.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Perform the first CNC run at reduced speed.

If routing turns out to be poor, click on the Help button in the
Start Measurement dialog box and proceed in accordance with
the instructions.
Editing travel paths between features

On travel paths between features, the intermediate position for the
probe is computed from the current position and the approach
position for the next feature.
NOTE
hss
Consider edge blocking: It could be either a hindrance or a help,

depending on the circumstances (see How to block edges of the
clearance plane on page 4-118).
The activities which influence the paths between features are as
follows:
How to define clearance groups on page 7-33
How to delete a clearance group on page 7-34
Assigning clearance planes and clearance groups on
page 7-35
How to define the retract plane in a clearance group on
page 7-36
How to activate the navigation check on page 7-38
How to define the outer clearance planes on page 7-39
How to define clearance groups

When you define clearance groups, remember that all the features in
a group must be reachable from each other and from a higher-order
clearance plane.
To define a clearance group:
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-33
1 Select Plan Navigation Sub Clearance from the menu bar.

The Define sub clearance window will open.
2 Click on New and enter a name for the new clearance group in
the input box.
After you confirm with OK, a list with the clearance planes will
open.
3 Select the appropriate clearance plane under Parent Group and

then click on OK.
4 Confirm the Define Clearance Groups dialog box with OK.
The window will be closed.
How to delete a clearance group

You can delete a clearance group when you no longer need it.
7-34
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

2 In the Clearance Group list, select the group you want to delete.
3 Click on Delete.
4 Click on OK.
The clearance group is deleted.
Assigning clearance planes and clearance groups

A feature can often have different clearance planes. Automatic
assignment does not always result in optimized travel paths, so you
have the option of changing the assignment or defining new
clearance groups.
To assign clearance planes or clearance groups:
1 Double-click on the icon of the feature to which the assignment
will apply.
2 Click on Strategy.
The Strategy dialog box is opened.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-35
3 In the strategy list, double-click on Clearance Data.

The Clearance Data dialog box appears on the screen.
The elements that make up this dialog box are described in

Clearance data in the Calypso Online Help.
4 To reassign the clearance plane or clearance group, click on the
arrow beside the Clearance Group selection list.
5 Hold down the mouse button and select the clearance plane (CP)
or clearance group (SCP) of your choice by highlighting it and then
releasing the mouse button.
The new clearance plane or clearance group is now assigned to the
feature and is taken into account in the next automatic CNC run.
Editing several features
Use the Features Settings Editor if you want to assign clearance

planes or clearance groups to several features at a time (see How
to edit measurement plan settings on page 4-120).
How to define the retract plane in a clearance group

All features in a clearance group must be reachable from each other
and from the higher-order clearance plane. To ensure this collisionfree accessibility, you can define a retract plane within a clearance
group.
To define a retract plane within a clearance group:
7-36
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

2 Activate the Retract To Inner Plane check box.

The field labeled Clearance Distance Probe Part Or Enter Data
is now active.
3 Type in the height of the retract plane relative to the datum of the
base alignment (perpendicular to the higher-order clearance
plane).
4 Click on OK.
The retract plane is defined and the dialog box closes.
Automatic navigation check

During the CNC run, you can check the travel paths between the
features and change them if necessary. This avoids collisions with
outer obstacles (other workpieces, the stylus system changer rack) as
well as traveling to the end positions.
If the navigation check is switched on, Calypso attempts to probe
around the obstacles. The form of the stylus is also considered; under
certain circumstances, long, narrow styli can only pass over the
workpiece on the side, and short, wide styli can only pass over the top
of workpiece.
If it is not possible to pass over at all, the run is stopped and you
receive a message regarding the obstruction. You can then either
continue or cancel the run.
What is checked?
The navigation check takes the following information into account:

61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-37
the end positions of the CMM (measuring range limits)

The values are takes from the system settings.
the outer clearance planes
You can determine the outer clearance planes by entering 6
coordinates.
the stylus changer rack
The stylus changer rack and the stylus system in the rack are
considered automatically. The stylus of each rack projecting the
farthest into the measuring range specifies the plane on which the
travel path is checked.
Each of these three criteria can be switched on or off individually.
How to activate the navigation check

To activate the navigation check:
1 Select Plan Navigation Navigation Check.
The Navigation Check dialog box appears on the screen.
7-38
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2 Activate the desired checks:

CMM End Positions
Outer Clearance Planes
Rack with stylus systems
The CAD window shows the measuring range and outer clearance
planes as a wire frame model. A transparent volume cube
represents the clearance planes. The foremost styli of the stylus
system changer rack are shown as points.
During the CNC run, Calypso checks the specified path with regard to
lack of collisions and changes the path if necessary.
How to define the outer clearance planes

To avoid collisions with other workpieces or objects on the CMM
table, you can define outer clearance planes. Then Calypso performs
movements between the features only within the space between the
two clearance planes.
To determine the outer clearance planes:
1 Select Plan Navigation Outer Clearance Planes.
The Outer Clearance Planes window will open.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-39
2 Select the coordinate system.

The selected coordinate system determines the inclination of the
boundary planes of the outer clearance planes with respect to the
workpiece and its clearance planes.
3 Enter the 6 required coordinates.
Editing travel paths within a feature

The paths within a feature define the path followed by the probe
from one probing point to the next.
Your options for editing the routes within a feature are described in
the following sections:
How to move the approach position closer to the feature on
page 7-40.
How to approach the clearance distance after probing on
page 7-41.
How to change the point list on page 5-87. This will help you,
for example, to define optimum probing points.
How to move the approach position closer to the

feature
The distance separating an approach position from the feature is
defined by the Clearance Distance parameter. If the clearance
distance for a feature is excessive, the result can be collisions in
narrow grooves or gaps, because when it attempts to move to the
clearance distance, the stylus comes into contact with the material
opposite.
To move the approach position closer to the workpiece:
1 Open the definition template of the feature in question by doubleclicking on the features icon.
The Strategy window will open.
7-40
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
3 In the strategy list, click on Clearance Data.


4 Check that the correct clearance group is selected.
5 Click on the Clearance Distance check box to deactivate the
default.
6 Type the new clearance distance into the input field.
The approach position should now be close enough to the feature to
improve the travel paths.
How to approach the clearance distance after

probing
For certain measurements of circles, cylinders and circle segments
with discrete points, you can set the travel paths so that the stylus
moves back to the clearance distance after each probing.
This avoids having to insert additional intermediate positions,
e.g. when measuring circular grooves with ridges or other obstacles.
To set the approach after each probing:
1 Open the definition template of the feature in question by doubleclicking on the features icon.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-41
3 In the strategy list, click on Clearance Data.

4 Under Move to ..., select the with each probing setting.
The stylus now moves forward and, after each probing, it moves to an
additional intermediate position at the height of the clearance
distance.
7-42
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Stylus system changer

The CMMs automatic stylus system changer allows you to change
stylus systems without any manual intervention. Before you execute
automatic changing of stylus systems, you need to define for Calypso
the exact configuration and location of the stylus system changer
rack.
Calypso saves the stylus system used to measure a feature along with
the feature. If it is necessary to change stylus systems between
features, Calypso can do this automatically. The following
preconditions, however, must be satisfied:
Prerequisites
Calypso must know that there is a stylus system changer.

Additionally, the appropriate stylus system must be in the stylus
system changer.
Procedure
To configure the stylus system changer:

Specify the stylus system changer in the system setup
(once-only operation)
Determine the length of the master stylus
(once-only operation),
(not applicable to RDS, MCR20 and SCR200)
RDS only: determine the RDS geometry
In the Stylus System Change dialog box, insert an icon for each
holder
(MCR20 and SCR200: for one holder only, all others are
automatically created when the rack is qualified)
Set the approach parameters
Determine the position of each holder
(MCR20 and SCR200: qualify the rack)
Assign the stylus systems to the holders
These points are described in detail in the following sections. Once
these steps have been performed, they do not have to be repeated as
long as the stylus system changer is not changed in any way, for
example by being moved.
When the automatic stylus system changer is properly configured, you
can execute an automatic change of stylus systems.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-43
Renishaw MCR20 stylus system changer

The MCR20 stylus system changer rack consists of a stand and a
horizontal beam with six holders. It can be approached from the four
approach directions (+X, -X, +Y, -Y).
!
hss
NOTE
hss
Important
Always comply with the instructions in the user guide supplied with
the MCR20.
The Renishaw user guide states that the MCR20 has to be aligned
with a machine coordinate axis. Deviation of up to 0.25 mm from the
machine axis over the width of the rack (200 mm) is tolerated.
If the MCR20 stylus system changer is selected, only MCR20 holders
are displayed. Holders of other types for this machine configuration
are deleted.
Special aspects
On account of the special design of the MCR20, you must bear the
following in mind:
After the Store Stylus operation, the probe moves only to the
transfer point, because without a measuring module movement is
restricted to the zone of magnetic force movement without a
measuring module outside the MCR20s zone of magnetic force
causes the controller to issue collision messages.
No machine operations are triggered by a manual stylus system
change with the MCR20. If the RDS is used with TP20, you cannot
change the RDS plate manually.
In the pickup process, the stylus system change solenoids of an
index head, if fitted, are not actuated.
!
hss
Important
Never change the stylus system without calling up the manual or
automatic stylus system change (e.g. by selecting another stylus
system in the qualification dialog and changing the stylus system
manually).
Strong solenoids affect the TP20 probe. If probing fails, switch off the
solenoids if necessary or consult the user guide supplied with the
TP20/Renishaw.
Whenever possible, always use the manual or automatic stylus
system change function to change stylus systems with the TP20
and MCR20, because this is the only way that Calypso can monitor
the status of the probe (stylus system in probe or stylus system not
in probe).
7-44
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
SCR200 stylus system changer

The SCR200 stylus system changer rack consists of a stand and a
horizontal beam with six holders. It can be approached from the four
approach directions (+X, -X, +Y, -Y).
If the SCR200 stylus system changer is selected, only SCR200 holders
are displayed. Holders of other types for this machine configuration
are deleted.
Important
Always comply with the instructions in the user guide supplied with
the SCR200.
Special aspects
On account of the special design of the SCR200, you must bear the
following in mind:
hss
The SCR200 has a photoelectric barrier that is interrupted when a

stylus system change takes place. Movements between individual
holders take place inside the space delimited by the photoelectric
barrier. The stylus system does not move out of this space until the
change has been completed.
!
hss
Important
If the photoelectric barrier is interrupted during a CNC run, the
controller switches permanently to closed contact with probe. If this
happens, the probe no longer recognizes probings and collision is
inevitable.
Movement without a measuring module outside the zone
delimited by the photoelectric barrier is possible, but there is no
protection against collision. Consequently, it is best not to perform
movements with the machine if you change stylus systems
manually.
Use of a PH10
If the machine is equipped with an articulated probe from Renishaw

(PH10), you must also bear the following in mind:
If you have qualified stylus positions that could cause a collision
with the stylus system changer rack when stylus systems are
subsequently changed, you must use Approach Parameters to
change the parameters for the holders in question.
The travel path above or in front of the holder must be
parameterized in such a way that the probe can rotate before and
after the stylus system change without any risk of collision.
!
hss
Important
Never change the stylus system without calling up the manual or
automatic stylus system change (e.g. by selecting another stylus
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-45
system in the qualification dialog and changing the stylus system

manually).
Whenever possible, always use the manual or automatic stylus
system change function to change stylus systems with the TP200
and SCR200, because this is the only way that Calypso can
monitor the status of the probe (stylus system in probe or stylus
system not in probe).
ACR3 stylus system changer

Calypso can also be used with the Automatic Change Rack System
ACR3 of Renishaw and the motorized PH10M head.
!
hss
Important
Always comply with the instructions in the user guide Installation
and User's guide H-1000-5787-01-A ACR3 autochange rack
system!
The described instructions for the definition of holders and change
operations apply.
If the ACR3 stylus system changer is selected, only ACR3 holders are
displayed. Holders of other types for this machine configuration are
deleted.
Operation of the ACR3
The ACR3 can only be operated horizontally. Maximum two systems

may be interconnected with each other (max. 8 positions). When
using extensions, only the changer located directly at the head of the
PH10M may be used. Otherwise, the resulting force at the PH10M
becomes too high.
Meeting tolerances
Reliable operation of the stylus changer is only garanteed if the

tolerances for probe alignment are met. These are 0.2 in pitch, roll
and yaw. If this is not possible, you must use the AM1 module of
Renishaw.
NOTE
hss
When using the AM1, measuring range is sacrificed and you have to
take an amount of kinematic uncertainty into account.
7-46
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Stylus system changer for RDS

The illustration shows you what distances you need between the
holders as well as the stylus system movement when removing a
stylus.
Stylus system movement

when removing a stylus
The movement strategy to a holder is set up so that the stylus system

changer is outside of the measuring range.
Please be aware that a minimum distance of 150 mm (6 in.) between
the holders is necessary.
An empty area of 120 mm (4 in.) below the holder is necessary.
Without the empty area, it is not possible to mount a lateral stylus in
the RST stylus system.
Defining the RDS geometry

Before you can qualify the stylus system changer rack for the RDS, you
first have to define the RDS geometry.
Procedure
To define the geometry:

Compute the offset from the virtual axis intersection of the RDS
axes.
Qualify the four preset angular positions for the RDS. Calypso uses
this information to compute the intersection of the axes.
How to define the RDS slot distance

The slot distance is necessary only for the startup of the RDS stylus
system changer and need only be defined once.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-47
The illustration below shows an overview of the definition of the slot

distance X. The probe is shown from above, e.g. from +Z.
Probe from above

in position 2
Reference edge
Probe from above

in position 1
RDS stylus from

above in position
Calypso helps you when defining the slot distance with a dialog. If
you know the value of the slot distance (offset), you can enter this
directly in the Slot Distance field.
To define the RDS slot distance:
1 Find an appropriate vertical reference edge in the measuring
range.
An appropriate reference edge must be parallel to the machine
coordinates.
2 Position the RDS stylus system so that the outer slot wall is in a
plane with the reference plane.
In the above illustration, this is position 1.
3 Click on Read Position.
Calypso saves the current stylus position.
4 Turn the RDS 180 around its A axis.
In the illustration, this is position 2.
5 Position the RDS stylus system so that the outer slot wall is in a
plane with the reference plane.
6 Click on Read Position.
Calypso saves the current stylus position.
7-48
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7 Check the results in the Slot Distance field. Typical values are
around 38 mm (1 in.).
How to define the axis
intersection
The position of a holder is always based on the axis intersection of the

two rotational axes of the RDS. Calypso must therefore first calculate
the intersection of these axes. Before Calypso can do this, you must
qualify the four additional stylus positions of the CZ master stylus
(refPos1 to refPos4) (styli 2 to 5):
A/B = 0/90
A/B = 0/90
A/B = 90/0
A/B = 90/0
Setting up the initial stylus system changer

configuration
You must inform Calypso that an automatic stylus system changer is
installed, and define the type. All other settings (e.g. defining holders)
and functions of the stylus system changer are defined with
Resources Automatic Stylus System Change.
To start an automatic stylus system change:
The System Set Up dialog will be opened with the CMM
Configuration notebook.
2 Click on the Stylus Change tab.
3 Activate the Stylus system changer available check box if it is
not already activated.
4 Click on the arrow for the Construction list, hold down the
mouse button and select the correct entry for your holder:
Scanning Head, Old Scanning Head or ProMax (MT) for a
measuring probe
Trigger Head for a trigger probe (ST / ST3 from Zeiss)
RDS for an RDS
MCR20 for an MCR20
SCR200 for an SCR200
5 Click OK if you are ready to save the settings and close the
window.
6 If you want to make more changes to the CMM configuration,
click Apply.
7 Select the Controller bookmark and click on the Connect button
to initialize the CMM.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-49
The CMM now also has the information it needs about stylus system
changes.
Defining the master stylus length

If you are using a rack for measuring or trigger stylus systems, you
have to define the length of the master stylus.
This is important, because the position of every single holder in the
stylus changer is defined relative to the machine coordinate system
and the adapter plate on the probe. To locate a holder, use the master
stylus. Calypso knows the length of the master stylus from this
procedure.
NOTE
Racks for RDS stylus systems can be measured with any qualified
stylus.
NOTE
You cannot use the automatic stylus system change functionality for
RDS with an MCR20; only the TP20 stylus modules can be changed.
hss
hss
Follow these steps to define the length of the master stylus:

1 Insert the master stylus (see How to install a stylus system on
page 4-18).
2 Select Resources Automatic Stylus System Change.
The Automatic stylus system change window will open.
3 Click on Length of Master Stylus.

4 A prompt appears, asking you whether the master stylus has been
inserted. Check the control console to make sure that stylus 1 is
selected and click on OK.
7-50
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5 At the prompt to probe on the adapter plate, use the joysticks to

touch the adapter plate to the surface of a holder.
You should probe the area in which the adapter plate would
normally contact the holder.
6 At the prompt to probe with the stylus, use the joysticks to probe
the same place on the holder, using the stylus tip this time.
The length of the master stylus is shown in a separate box.
Calypso now knows the length of the master stylus. The locations of
the holders can now be defined.
How to add holders to the configuration

The holders in the stylus system changer that you want to use have to
be added to the configuration of the stylus system changer on your
system. When you add a holder it appears as an icon in the
Automatic Stylus System Change window.
NOTE
hss
You can use only one MCR20 or SCR200 with 6 holders in

conjunction with the CMM. You do not need to add a holder in the
case of the MCR20 or SCR200 Calypso automatically adds six new
holders in the Automatic Stylus System Change dialog box.
To add a holder:
The Automatic Stylus System Change window opens.
2 Click on the arrow for the Edit list and select Add Holder.
You are prompted to enter a name for the holder.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-51
3 Click in the input field, enter a new name and click OK to confirm
your entry and proceed.
If you defined AN RDS with SP600 as probe under Extras
Workroom CMM, you are prompted to enter the type of the
new holder: RDS or SCP600.
An icon for this holder, accompanied by the name you assigned,
appears in the Automatic Stylus System Change window.
4 Add more holders as necessary, until the configuration of your

stylus system changer in the system matches that at the CMM.
When you create a new holder, a default is defined for the
intermediate position before and after stylus system change: this is a
safety precaution. You can change the default if a lower value is
preferable (see How to check or change approach parameters on
page 7-54).
Before you can set the positions of the new holders in the machine
coordinate system, you first have to determine the approach
parameters.
Approach parameters for the stylus system

changer
Configuring the automatic stylus system changer also involves setting
the approach parameters that are used to define the clearance
distances from the stylus system rack.
7-52
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
These distances are defined from each given position (e.g. before
entry into the rack) to the midpoint of the probe. The Position Over
Holder distance is from the stylus system adapter plate (on the
bottom of the probe) to the top of the rack. The default value is
0 mm.
You can change the settings for each holder. If you need to change
these distances because of part or stylus clearance problems, please
be aware of how close the movements are around the probe holders
and the rack.
Reference for approach parameters

The approach parameters for all stylus system changers are referenced
to the transfer point to the macro in front of the holder, and not to
the holder point itself. If you enter Position Before Holder = 0, the
probe moves directly to the transfer position.
The Approach In direction is the direction the CMM must approach
from to access the stylus system holder. If your rack is at the back of
the CMM, the approach direction will be the positive Y axis. If it is on
the left side of the CMM, the approach will be the negative X axis.
!
hss
Important
An articulating probe rotates the stylus to the intermediate position.
The values for Position Before Holder, Position After Holder and
Position Over Holder must be set such as to ensure collision-free
rotation for every stylus used.
Approach for RDS

The illustration shows a stylus system changer rack for RDS stylus
systems. The arrow shows how the approach has to be defined.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-53
How to check or change approach parameters

Follow these steps to view or change the approach parameters:
The Automatic stylus system change dialog box appears on the
screen.
2 Click on the holder you want to change.
3 (MCR20 only): In the Edit list, select Edit Orientation of Changer
and enter the approach direction.
This setting applies to all the changers holders.
4 In the Changer list, select Approach Parameters. The window
with the approach parameters is opened.
!
hss
Caution: risk of destruction!

Unsuitable inputs in this window can lead to collisions and thus to
destruction.
5 Enter the applicable values for the position before, over and after
the holder.
6 Select the Approach In direction.
If you have an MCR20 or an SCR200, the Approach In direction is
set to a default that you cannot change here.
7 (only for the master user): Under Distance to stylus system
rack during empty running, enter the distance to the holder
during the run after storing the stylus system until picking up a
new one.
This input is necessary to avoid collisions for certain stylus system
changers with stylus system that project a great distance.
7-54
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
8 (only for the master user): If necessary, move the position in the
holder by a certain amount under Offset.
This allows subsequent compensation for slight shifts compared to
the initially measured reference position.
NOTE
hss
After indirect qualification, you can also use Offset to add and assign
approach parameters to holders with probing points that are so far
out that they cannot be directly approached.
9 Click on OK.
How to define the position of a holder

Every time a holder is created in a stylus system changer, the position
has to be defined in the machines system of coordinates. In the case
of the MCR20 and the SCR200, all holders are qualified jointly in a
single operation (see How to define the holder positions of an
MCR20 on page 7-58).
!
hss
Important
The approach direction has to be set before you define the position of
a holder (see Approach parameters for the stylus system changer
on page 7-52). Risk of collision if this procedure is not adopted.
To define the position of a holder:
screen.
2 Click on the icon of the holder whose position you want to define.
The icon turns green.
3 In the Changer list, select Define Holder Location.
4 When you see the prompt asking whether you want to overwrite
the existing position, click on OK.
You are prompted to select the name of the stylus system for this
holder.
5 If no stylus system has been qualified yet and you merely want to
define the position of the holder, click on Cancel.
If you already know which stylus system you want to assign to the
holder, select the name of the stylus and click on OK to confirm.
NOTE
hss
Do not click on OK as long as you have not completed the following

step. In addition, ensure that the dust cover is open.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-55
6 Calypso reacts differently, depending on which type of probe is

installed:
With a trigger probe you are asked to move the stylus to the
center of the circle. Ensure that you measure the holder location
in the area between the hexagon screw head and the surface.
With a measuring probe, a cone on the side of the holder is
located by self-centering probing.
With Renishaw probes (TP20 and TP200), you are prompted to
probe points on the MCR20 or SCR200.
With an RDS probe, the back and side reference surfaces are
automatically probed after probing the upper reference surface.
When the measurement is finished, you will see a symbol for the
stylus system in the holder symbol. The name is below the symbol.
7 Repeat these steps for every holder which has not yet been
defined.
How to define the holder positions of an

SCP600
The SP 600 probe of Renishaw enables two-stage stylus change:
The stylus change of the RDS is the first stage.
The second stage is the change of the plate of the SP 600 and the
stylus change port 600 (SCP 600) holder.
To define the holder positions of the SCP600:
screen.
2 Click on a holder icon in the Automatic Stylus System Change
window.
The information about the stylus system refers only to the holder
active at the start of the qualification procedure.
If you defined an RDS with SP600 as probe under Extras
Workroom CMM, you are prompted to enter the type of the
new holder: RDS or SCP600.
the existing holder, click on OK.
7-56
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
!
hss
Important
Always use Reduced Speed (potentiometer) for movement, as
otherwise there is a risk of collision.
If no SP600 is loaded in the RDS, the following prompt appears:
Please use an SP600 for the qualification.
5 In this case, insert an SP600 in the RDS.
If this stylus has not yet been used for qualifying an SCP600 rack,
you must determine its length. Proceed in the same way as for
determining the master stylus length (Defining the master stylus
length on page 7-50).
6 Open the cover of the SP600 as prompted, lock it by means of the
retention pin and confirm with OK.
Calypso checks the current angular position of the RDS. The
nominal angles of both axes depend on the approach direction set
beforehand.
If the angles do not correspond, an error message appears. After
confirmation of this message, Calypso stops the qualification
operation.
7 If the angles correspond: Probe a point in the approach direction as
prompted.
Calypso takes care of everything else automatically.
8 Remove the retention pin and close the cover.
The covers have to be closed so that the solenoids mounted in
them can function correctly and keep the switching contact closed
during stylus system changes.
9 Click on OK.

ACR3
NOTE
hss
With the ACR3, it is only possible to create four holders. Use the
Delete Group function to delete holders.
To define the holder positions of the ACR3:
screen.
window.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-57
the existing holders, click on OK.
If the ACR3 stylus system changer is selected, only ACR3 holders
are displayed. Holders of other types for this machine
configuration are deleted.
!
hss
Important
A query Is the rack in the locked position? (On the right of the
swivel range) appears.
5 Set the rack to the locked position (as shown in the dialog) and
confirm with OK.
6 Lock the covers with the tool and insert the autojoint gage in
holder 1.
7 Remove the stylus from the probe as prompted.
8 Approach the position using the joystick. With Accept point you
record the current position and close the window.
9 Remove the gage as prompted and insert the probe again.
By confirming, the creation of probing points is activated again.
The position of the next measured point is shown.
10 Probe a point at the left corner of holder 1 in the Z axis.
Calypso takes care of everything else automatically. When the
measurement is finished, you will see all holders of the ACR3 in the
stylus system change window.
11 Remove the retention pin and close the cover.
12 Click on OK.

MCR20
All the holders of an MCR20 are calibrated at once.
!
hss
Important
Before you define the holder positions of the MCR20, the covers must
be opened and the approach direction set (see Approach
parameters for the stylus system changer on page 7-52). Risk of
collision if this procedure is not adopted.
To define the holder positions of the MCR20:
1 Open the covers of the MCR20.
7-58
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

screen.
window.
!
hss
Important
Always use the PS2R stylus system without extension (2 mm head, 20
mm shank) for the qualification procedure.
The deviation between P1 and P2 in the Y coordinate (for
approach direction in Y) must not be more than 0.2 mm (see the
user guide for the MCR20).
You are prompted to enter the name of the stylus system for this
holder.
6 Click OK when you see the prompt asking you whether you want
to overwrite the existing holders and add undefined holders.
If the MCR20 stylus system changer is selected, only MCR20
holders are displayed. Holders of other types for this machine
!
hss
Important
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-59
7 Probe point 1 on the left end face of the MCR20 as prompted.

P5
P4
P3
1
P1
P6 P7
Z+
Y+
P2
X+

qualification is completed, all six holder positions of the MCR20
are labeled from 1 to 6.
8 Close the covers when prompted.
The covers have to be closed so that the magnets mounted in
them can function correctly and keep the switching contact closed
during stylus system changes.
9 Click on OK.

SCR200
All the holders of an SCR200 are calibrated at once.
!
hss
7-60
Important
Before you define the holder positions of the SCR200, the covers
must be opened and the approach direction set. The cable between
SCR200 and SI200 (controller for TP200) must be disconnected for
the qualification process, in order to interrupt the signal from the
photoelectric barrier (see Approach parameters for the stylus
system changer on page 7-52). Risk of collision if this procedure is
not adopted.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
To define the holder positions of the SCR200:

1 Open the covers of the SCR200.
screen.
window.
!
hss
Important
Always use the PS2R stylus system without extension (2 mm head, 20
mm shank) for the qualification procedure.
The deviation between P1 and P2 in the Y coordinate (for
approach direction in Y) must not be more than 0.25 mm (see the
user guide for the SCR200).
You are prompted to enter the name of the stylus system for this
holder.
6 Click OK when you see the prompt asking you whether you want
to overwrite the existing holders and add undefined holders.
If the SCR200 stylus system changer is selected, only SCR200
holders are displayed. Holders of other types for this machine
!
hss
Important
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-61
7 Probe point 1 on the left end face of the SCR200 as prompted.

qualification is completed, all six holder positions of the SCR200
are labeled from 1 to 6.
8 Close the covers when prompted and reconnect the cable
between the SCR200 and the SI200 to reactivate the photoelectric
barrier.
9 Click on OK.
How to assign a stylus system to a holder

In this step, you define which stylus system will belong to which
holder.
NOTE
hss
A stylus system has to be qualified before you can assign it to a

holder. Qualify the stylus system in accordance with the instructions in
How to qualify a stylus manually on page 4-29.
To assign a qualified stylus system to a holder:
screen.
7-62
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2 Select the holder to which you want to assign the stylus system by
clicking its icon.
3 In the Changer list, select Set stylus system to holder.
A list of all qualified stylus systems is displayed.
4 Select the name of the stylus system you want to assign to the
holder, and click on OK to confirm your choice.
The stylus system is assigned, and by way of confirmation the
stylus system name appears below the icon for the holder.
5 Repeat the above steps for the holders to which no stylus system
has been assigned as yet.
How to perform an automatic stylus system

change
!
hss
Important
When storing or getting a stylus system for the first time, you should
be prepared to cancel the procedure quickly. If the approach
parameters are incorrect, you can avoid a possible collision by
canceling.
To automatically change between stylus systems that are both stored
in the changer rack, follow these steps:
screen.
2 Click on the holder icon that contains the stylus system you would
like to install.
3 Click on the Changer drop-down list and select the Change
Stylus System entry.
The CMM first stores the stylus system that is currently installed, then
picks up the stylus system you selected.
How to perform a semiautomatic stylus

system change
!
hss
Important
When storing or getting a stylus system for the first time, you should
be prepared to cancel the procedure quickly. If the approach
parameters are incorrect, you can avoid a possible collision by
canceling.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-63
To automatically store an installed stylus system and then manually

install a different stylus system, follow these steps:
screen.
2 Click on the stylus system holder icon where the currently installed
stylus system should be stored (the icon for an empty holder on the
rack).
3 Click on the Changer drop-down list and select the Remove
Stylus System entry.
The CMM places the stylus system in the selected holder. There is
then no longer a stylus system installed in the probe.
4 Click on OK to close the Automatic Stylus System Change
dialog box.
5 Proceed with the steps for manually changing a stylus system, as
described in How to install a stylus system on page 4-18.
How to change the stylus system assigned to

a holder
To change the stylus system that is assigned to a particular holder,
follow these steps:
1 Make sure the stylus system is qualified and is currently installed on
the CMM (see Installing and qualifying stylus systems on
page 4-17).
The Automatic stylus system change window will open.
3 Click on the icon for the new holder to which you want to assign
the stylus system.
4 In the Changer list, select Set stylus system to holder.
A list of all qualified stylus systems is displayed.
5 Click on the name of the stylus system you now want to assign to
this holder.
The stylus system is assigned, and by way of confirmation the stylus
system name appears below the icon for the holder.
7-64
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Multimedia user information

In Calypso, you can include additional information in audiovisual form
in a measurement plan. Users can then access this information prior
to running the measurement plan. For example, you can integrate a
video dealing with correct clamping of a workpiece or a photograph
or drawing with the right alignment of the workpiece.
NOTE
hss
If you have the appropriate utilities installed on your computer, you

can view files of the following formats: *.txt, *.rtf, *.doc, *. bmp,
*.avi, *.flc, *. pdf and *.gra.
The information is saved in a file, whereby each measurement plan
can be assigned its own file for user information. You can also use the
same file for different measurement plans.
You can create video files on any PC with a video grabber board and a
video camera.
NOTE
hss
Files created using Microsoft Word (*.doc) should be saved in Word in

the Rich Text Format (RTF), and subsequently this file (*.rtf) should
be used. This has the advantage that the document is opened as
write-protected with the CZViewer.
You can view the added information in the Start Measurement
dialog box by clicking on User Information.
How to add user information to a

measurement plan
Follow these steps to select a user information file for a measurement
plan:
1 Make sure you have created an audio-video file of the proper
format and have stored it in the
...\Calypso\opt\om\pictures\userinfo directory.
2 Open the measurement plan in which you want to include the user
information (for example, by selecting File Open).
3 Select Plan User Information Select.
The File Selection dialog box is displayed, listing all files currently in
the folder.
4 Click on the file that you want to include in the measurement plan.
5 Click Open.
The file is now available to everyone who uses the measurement plan.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-65
Only one user information file can be selected for each measurement
plan. You can change which file is selected simply by following the
same directions for selecting a file the first time.
How to view user information for a

measurement plan
After you have selected a user information file to use with a
measurement plan, you or other users can view it when running the
measurement plan. Follow these steps:
1 Make sure the correct measurement plan is open.
2 Click on the Start Measurement button.
The Start measurement / measurement plan definition
window will open.
An icon is displayed at the top left corner for each measurement

plan, if the folder of the current measurement plan (.../workarea,
inspections) includes a file called icon.bmp which contains the
icon.
3 Click on User Information.
A window pops up that shows the selected user information.
If the file contains a drawing, a picture or a photograph, you can
return to the Start Measurement dialog box by clicking on
Apply.
If it is a video, the Windows Media Player appears. You can change
the playback speed, fast forward or rewind, and perform other
7-66
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
functions. Refer to your Windows documentation for instructions

on using the Media Player.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7-67
7-68
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Chapter
.................................................................................................................................
The preconditions listed below must be satisfied before you can run a
measurement plan:
The CMM must be initialized (you will find more information in the
Online Help under How to initialize the CMM).
The scope of measurement must be defined.
A measurement plan defines what is to be measured, whether or not
a custom printout will be generated, and how the CMM will perform
the measurement.
Calypso automatically measures all the features you defined and
calculates the characteristics in the order you specified.
Before you run a measurement plan, you should always make sure
that the CMM is clear for automatic movement around the part and
fixture. Use the joysticks to move the stylus above the part and fixture.
If you want to combine two or more measurement plans (and
evaluate them together), you do so by starting a master measurement
plan.

Defining the scope of measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Entering printout header data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Starting a measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Monitoring measurement plan runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
8- 1
Defining the scope of measurement

If you do not want to measure all the characteristics in the
measurement plan, you have the option of running only selected
parts of the plan. You can do this by combining characteristics in
groups or selecting individual characteristics.
Current selection
If you want to test characteristics only once or twice, you can mark
the characteristics in question and start the measurement plan.
Calypso runs only your selection.
Measurement plan
group
If you want to measure a large number of characteristics repeatedly,

you can highlight the characteristics in question and combine them in
a measurement plan group.
This group behaves like a single characteristic. It is represented by a
button of its own in the measurement plan and can be assigned a
name.
NOTE
hss
Feature group
NOTE
hss
Masked
function.
If you test certain characteristics frequently, independently of the
overall measurement plan, but you prefer not to combine the
characteristics in a measurement plan group, you can highlight the
characteristics in question, combine them in a characteristic group,
save and run this group.
function.
If you want certain characteristics repeatedly omitted from
measurement, you can mask the characteristics in question. Masked
features are highlighted light gray in the measurement plan list.
You will find more information in Measurement plan editor
characteristics in the Calypso Online Help.
Features
If you do not want to run the entire measurement plan, you can
measure without characteristics in order to obtain initial information
on the features.
How to define a current selection of characteristics

It is advisable to group characteristics whenever you want to test a
small combination of characteristics or a measurement plan group on
a single occasion.
To define a current selection:
8-2
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Press and hold down Ctrl key and click on the characteristics you
want to select.
In the Start Measurement dialog box you can activate this selection
by clicking on Current Selection under List Of Characteristics (see
Starting a measurement on page 8-9).
How to create a measurement plan group

You can combine characteristics to form groups.
NOTE
hss
function.
You can run a group of this nature separately, i.e. without the other
characteristics in the measurement plan.
NOTE
hss
The grouped characteristics no longer appear individually in the

measurement plan. You have to open the grouping if you want to see
the individual characteristics again.
To create a measurement plan group:
1 Press and hold down the Ctrl key and click on each characteristic
you want to have in the group.
2 Open the Edit menu and select Group.
The characteristics you selected are grouped and the group is
represented by a button in the measurement plan.
3 Click on the group in the measurement plan and then click on the
right mouse button to open the context menu.
4 In the context menu, click on Rename and type in the new name.
It is always a good idea to assign meaningful names to the groups.
5 Press OK to confirm the new name.
by clicking on Current Selection under List Of Characteristics (see
How to ungroup a measurement plan group

You have to ungroup the characteristics in the measurement plan
group in order to view them singly in the measurement plan again.
NOTE
hss
function.
To ungroup a measurement plan group:
1 Highlight the group in the measurement plan.
The line is grayed.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
8-3
2 Open the Edit menu and select Ungroup.

The characteristics are again listed individually in the measurement
plan.
How to view the content of a measurement plan

group
You can view the contents of a group in order to check, for
example, that you have not omitted any characteristics.
To view the content of a measurement plan group:
1 Click with the left mouse button on the group in the list of
characteristics.
2 Click on the Magnifier button.
The members of the group are listed after a few moments. The
members of the group are slightly indented in the list to indicate that
they belong to the group.
How to create a feature group

NOTE
hss
function.
If you prefer not to create a measurement plan group (for example
because you do not want a group named in the work printout), but
you want to repeat certain characteristics, you can create a feature
group.
NOTE
hss
A feature group has a name, but this name does not appear in the
measurement plan.
To create a feature group:
1 Press and hold down the Ctrl key and click on each characteristic
you want to have in the group.
2 Select Plan Mini-Plan Define.
Calypso prompts you to assign a name to the group.
3 Assign the group a name and click on OK.
The feature group is now defined.
by clicking on the feature group under List Of Characteristics (see
8-4
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to select individual features

Instead of running an entire measurement plan or individual
characteristics, you can also test individual features. Measuring
without characteristics is a useful way of collecting advance
information about the features.
To measure selected features:
1 Click on the Features button to open the list of features
2 Press and hold down Ctrl key and click on the features you want to
select.
You can then open the Start Measurement dialog box, select the
Current Selection entry under List Of Characteristics and start the
measurement plan (see Starting a measurement on page 8-9).
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
8-5
Entering printout header data

If you want to document the measurement in a custom printout, you
must enter the printout header data before you run the measurement
plan.
As regards entering printout header data, a distinction has to be
drawn between:
Global printout header data
Global printout header data refers to the entire measurement plan
and has to be entered only once for each measurement plan.
The global printout header data includes, for example, the name
of the operator and the name of the measurement plan.
Local printout header data
Local printout header data refers to the respective measurement
and has to be entered before measurement starts each time a
measurement plan is run.
The local printout header data includes entries such as lot ID and
order.
When you enter printout header data, the system prompts only for
the items that are contained in the currently selected format file (see
Preparing header data on page 9-21).
You can either enter printout header data as desired, by selecting it
from a list of values or by combining these two input types. You
specify the input type for each parameter in an INI file (see INI File
for Printout Header Data on page 9-24). If nothing else is defined,
Calypso expects free input.
How to enter global printout header data

Global printout header data belongs to a measurement plan and only
has to be entered once for each measurement plan.
8-6
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Entering printout header data
To enter global printout header data:

1 Select Resources Report Header Parameters.
The Input parameter window will open.
2 Click on the field you want to complete and enter the appropriate
values or plain text.
3 If you want the system to prompt for the local printout header
data at the start of the CNC run, activate the Force Input at Start
check box.
4 Click on OK.
The entries are saved and the window is closed. The data you entered
is included in the custom printout when the measurement is
completed.
How to enter local printout header data

Local printout header data belongs to a measurement and therefore
must be entered before the measurement plan is run.
To enter local printout header data:
window will open.
2 Make sure that the Include Header check box is activated.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
8-7
3 Click on the Data Input button.

The Input parameter window will open.
4 Click on the field you want to complete and enter the appropriate
values or plain text.
5 Click on OK.
The entries are saved and the window is closed. The data you entered
is included in the custom printout when the measurement is
completed.
8-8
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Starting a measurement
As regards measurement, a distinction is drawn between two process
modes:
CNC run
The CMM is under the fully automatic control of Calypso. The
prerequisite is that the CMM must have CNC capability.
Manual run
In a manual run Calypso administers only the measurement plan
and tells you which feature you must probe next, and how many
probings to take. As well as probing the features, you also control
the CMM.
Both modes of measurement are started from the Start
Measurement dialog box. This where you set the options for the
measurement plan run, and where you start measurement. It contains
the parameters you use to
define the scope of measurement,
set the parameters for the printout, and
define the settings for the CMM.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
8-9
How to start a CNC run

Before you can start a CNC run, you have to define the details of the
run in the Start Measurement dialog box.
To start a CNC run:
1 Click on the Run Measurement Plan button.
The Start Measurement dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Set the parameters as necessary for measurement.

You will find more information on setting these parameters in
Start measurement / measurement plan definition in the
3 Click on OK to start the measurement plan.
Calypso commences probing.
4 When measurement is completed, you can click on the Show
Default Printout button.
The results of measurement are displayed.
5 Once you have checked the results, click anywhere in the open
part of the User Desk to hide the listing.
8-10
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to start a manual run

In a manual run, Calypso guides you through the measurement
process, but you have to make all the probings manually.
This section explains how to run a measurement plan manually with
Calypso. You have to do this if, for example, you work with a manual
CMM. In a manual run Calypso is in control, and you probe the
workpiece.
The procedure for starting a manual run is as follows:
window will open.
2 Set the parameters as necessary for measurement.
You will find more information on setting these parameters in
Start measurement / measurement plan definition in the
3 Tick the Custom Printout check box, if you want the system to
generate a custom printout.
4 In the Run Mode list, select Manual.
5 If you want to measure the coordinate system manually as well, go
to the Selection group and select Manual run for the coordinate
system.
6 Click on OK to start the measurement plan.
Calypso steps you through the process: This is achieved directly via
the Manual CNC dialog box.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
8-11
7 When measurement is completed, you can click on the Default

Printout button.
The results of measurement are displayed.
8 Once you have checked the results, click anywhere in the open
part of the User Desk to hide the listing.
Basics about manual control

You can influence a manual run in a number of ways while it is in
progress.
You can declare the manual run as an automatic run at any time.
You can delete the last probing point if it was unsatisfactory.
You can change the number of nominal probing points if, for
example, some points are not accessible, or more points should be
probed.
You can cancel the manual run.
You will find more information on these actions in Manual CNC in
the Calypso Online Help..
8-12
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Monitoring measurement plan runs

Irrespective of whether the run you start is automatic (CNC) or
manual, Calypso always does some of the work for you, which means
that it is active the entire time that a measurement plan is running.
You can intervene in the process while the measurement plan is
running. For example, you can interrupt the run or cancel it if this is
necessary for some urgent reason.
Calypso's Stoplight dialog box is the communication interface
between you and the system. This stylized stoplight helps control
process flows and displays important status information.
The Stoplight window is always on view after you start measurement.
It controls communication between the CMM and Calypso. It is also
the interface that enables you to intervene in a measurement plan
run.
NOTE
hss
Never close the Stoplight window, because if you do Calypso will lose
contact with the CMM. However, you can always minimize the
window or put it behind another window. You can display the
Stoplight window permanently in the foreground.
In addition to controlling the process, the Stoplight window also
enables you to activate various views that show additional
information while the measurement run is in progress. They are:
Base Alignment,
Move in Part Alignment System,
Stylus Information,
Display Position
Probing On/Off
Task bar
Status Monitor
You can also display the Stoplight window in the Always on top
mode.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
8-13
The illustration below shows the Stoplight window:
How to switch views on and off in the Stoplight

window
The Stoplight window enables you to activate various views that show
information about the measurement plan run. These views can be
activated at the same time.
To switch a view on or off:
1 In the toolbar of the Stoplight window, click on View.
A tick preceding the name indicates which views are active.
2 Click on the view you wish to switch on/off.
3 If you want to move the views or arrange them neatly, click on the
Arrange button and move the views as you wish.
When you are finished, exit the arrange mode by clicking on an
unoccupied part of the window.
4 To save the arrangement of views, click on the Save button.
The size and position of the Stoplight window are also saved.
How to cancel a run

There are many reasons why a run might have to be canceled. Bear in
mind, however, that certain preconditions have to be satisfied before
you can restart a canceled run.
8-14
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
To cancel a run:
Click on red in the Stoplight window or press the Esc key on the
control console (not in case of Dynalog P!).
The CMM immediately cancels measurement.
You have to click on green before you can start a measurement plan
again.
How to interrupt a run

Interrupting means that the CMM comes to an immediate standstill,
but can continue at some subsequent point in time.
To interrupt a run:
1 In the Stoplight window, click on the amber light.
The CMM comes to an immediate stop, the green light flashes.
2 Click on green.
The run is resumed.
Reaction following a collision

In the case of a collision between the stylus and the workpiece, the
CMM control switches all drives off. This is designed to prevent
damage to the workpiece and the stylus. In the Stoplight window, the
stoplight goes red.
Measurement can only be resumed if not all the buttons in the list of
features are red or green.
Special aspects of collision with RDS

If your CMM is equipped with an RDS (stepping articulating probe
holder), keep the following aspect in mind should a collision occur.
If the RDS collides while the CMM is not in motion and if the disk
contacts open, the collision will not be detected when the machine
subsequently moves (because the contacts are open).
A collision can be detected only if the disk contacts are opened by
movement of the CMM.
How to clear the CMM after a collision

You have to clear the CMM if the stylus collides with the workpiece or
the fixture.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
8-15
!
hss
Important for SP600

If you use an SP600, you must clear the stylus before you set the
stoplight to green. Otherwise, the weight of the stylus itself would be
determined incorrectly.
To clear the CMM:
1 In the Stoplight window, click on the green light.
This reestablishes the connection between controller and CMM.
2 Using the joysticks, carefully move the stylus away from the
workpiece until it reaches a safe position.
You can now resume your work. To be on the safe side, check the
stylus system and make sure that the stylus is not twisted or
damaged.
How to restart a run after cancellation

You can restart an interrupted measurement run if not all the buttons
in the list of features are red or green.
!
hss
Important for SP600

If you use an SP600, you must clear the stylus before you set the
stoplight to green. Otherwise, the weight of the stylus itself would be
determined incorrectly.
To restart an interrupted run:
1 Set the stoplight to green.
window will open.
3 Deactivate the Clear Existing Results option.
4 Click on OK to restart the run.
Calypso reruns the measurement plan. This time around, however, it
measures only the features for which no measured values were
recorded.
8-16
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Chapter
Viewing, presenting and

editing measuring results
.................................................................................................................................
Every time you perform a measurement, the results you obtain are
presented in the default printout and the compact printout.
Calypso also offers a custom printout that you can use specifically for
presenting the results of measurement.
If you want to save results in files as backups or for processing in
subsequent evaluation runs, you can use Calypso's export
functionality that supports a number of mainstream formats.

Result printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Preparing custom printouts and compact printouts . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
How to display variations in form and location graphically . . . . . 9-33
Saving measuring results to files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Programmed access to measuring results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Converting measuring results for qs-STAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-1
Result printouts
The printouts are logs that are generated while the measurement plan
is running. Calypso offers logs of three different kinds, known as the
default printout, the compact printout, and the custom printout.
Additionally, the measuring results can also be output to MS Excel.
The Default Printout is a detailed log of all results obtained in
measurement. You cannot change the way in which this
information is presented.
If you want to output the deviations in the Amount mode, the
column has the heading Dev. <->.
The Compact Printout is shorter than the default printout. It lists

the characteristics together with the measured features for speedy
9-2
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Result printouts
assessment. The contents and representation of the compact

printout can be configured.
The results of the characteristics are color-coded: green means

within tolerance, red means out of tolerance, brown means
warning limits violated (color can be deactivated).
If the deviation is output in the Amount mode, the column has
the heading Dev. <->.
The compact printout is saved in the measurement plan directory
as an ASCII file (without color-coding information) called
cprotocol.txt.
The Custom Printout allows you to decide which elements you
want to include and to arrange the sequence in which they are
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-3
presented, along with the mode of presentation. Furthermore, you

can influence the layout of parts of the custom printout.
Selecting the printout
By default, Calypso creates a default printout after each evaluation

and displays it on the screen. You can also move it to the background.
If you want another printout to be created, make the necessary
setting in the Start Measurement dialog box that opens by selecting
Plan CNC-Start CNC-Start.
Combined evaluations
You can also combine two or more measurement plans and so create
combined assessments (see Combining several measurement
plans on page 7-16). The measurement plans you combine in this
way need not necessarily be on the CMM they can be created and
run on CMMs at different points in the network.
Output in the form of

an Excel report
If you have installed Excel 2000, you will also be able to output the
measuring results in the form of an Excel report. Three predefined
reports are available in the ...\calypso\home\om\excel-report directory.
9-4
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Result printouts
The type of report required can be selected in the Format Custom

Printout window (see How to define the output of the printout
on page 9-5). You must then activate the output to MS Excel in the
Start Measurement window.
After execution of the CNC run, the results will be output in an Excel
document in the ...Calypso\home\om\workarea\results directory. The
name of the document is a combination of the measurement plan
name and the part number.
Defining printout
The contents and form of printout can be selected in the Format
Custom Printout window.
You specify what (e.g. characteristics) the custom printout is to
contain and how (e.g. in what order) it is to appear.
Enter the warning limits for the features and characteristics.
Define the desired printout type for output to Excel.
For the result output in DMIS format (Saving measuring results
to files on page 9-45), you can select a dmi file for the DMIS
head.
How to define the output of the printout

To define the printout:
1 Select Resources Define Printout.
The Format custom printout window will open.
2 Set the parameters defining the scope and sequence of the
features in the custom printout.
NOTE
hss
If you want to output measurement plan groups in the custom

printout, you must set the Group in Custom Printout setting to On
in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics.
3 To define the DMIS header for result output in DMIS format
(Results to file) related to the specific measurement plan: Click on
the Select DMIS header button to select the desired file.
Otherwise, a default printout header will be used.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-5
4 To allow the measuring results to be output to an Excel file: click

on the Select EXCEL Report button and select the required report
type.
Three predefined reports are located in the
...\calypso\home\om\excel-report directory:
Characteristic.xls for output of the characteristic data
Feature.xls for output of the feature data
FeatChar.xls for output of characteristic and feature data
NOTE
hss
You can only use this function if you have installed Excel 2000 on your
system.
Prerequisite: The ReportINI.xls file must be available in the same
directory as the reports.
!
hss
NOTE
hss
Important
The file names of the measurement plans used must not contain any
special characters (based on DOS conventions) or blanks.
Experienced Excel users can modify the existing report files or to
create their own.
The settings will be accepted and the window will close.
You can determine which report is to be output in the Start
Measurement window before you start your measurement plan.
For more information, see Format custom printout in the Calypso
Online Help.
How to display printouts

The printouts created during a measurement are saved together with
the measurement plan. You can display them on the screen in
different ways.
How to view the default printout

If you have not selected the custom printout option, the default
printout window is automatically displayed on your screen after the
measurement plan has been carried out.
However, you can move it to the background via a check box under
Format Custom Printout.
If you hide the window behind the user desk, it stays hidden while the
measurement plan is running.
9-6
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Result printouts
To display the measuring results in the default printout:

Click on the Show Default Printout button.
The default printout is displayed.
NOTE
hss
You can also click on this button to display the results even if you have
closed the Default Printout window.
How to view the compact printout

To have the compact printout displayed by default, you must activate
the Compact Printout check box in the Start Measurement dialog
box (select Plan CNC-Start CNC-Start).
To view the compact printout:
Select View Compact Printout.
The compact printout is displayed.
You can search the compact printout for character strings. You have a
choice of two font sizes for on-screen display.
How to view the custom printout

As soon as results have been calculated after a measurement, you can
view and print the custom printout.
Select View Custom Printout.
Calypso opens the custom printout in a separate window.
You can customize the way in which the custom printout is laid out to
suit your needs and preferences (see Preparing custom printouts
and compact printouts on page 9-14).
How to print the measuring results

To send the measuring results to a printer, check the Send To Printer
radio button in the Start Measurement dialog box.
1 To print the default printout, click on the Print Results icon in the
toolbar.
2 To print the custom printout,
select View Compact Printout and
in the dialog box of the printout, select File Print.
3 To print the custom printout,
select View Custom Printout and
in the dialog box of the printout, select File Print.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-7
The printout is output on the printer that has been defined as the
standard printer in the Windows settings.
Examples of printouts
In the following you will see some examples of printouts.
Example: Standard custom printout

Color highlighting is used for emphasis in the custom printout.
9-8
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Result printouts
Example: VDA printout (without values)

The test report is output in a VDA printout. This printout does not
contain any features.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-9
Example: Standard custom printout (condensed)

The condensed form of the custom printout does not feature color
highlighting.
9-10
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Result printouts
Example of Excel reports

Example of an Excel report of the Characteristic.xls type for output
of characteristic data:
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-11
Example of an Excel report of the Feature.xls type for the output of

feature data:
9-12
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Result printouts
Example of an Excel report of the FeatChar.xls type for the output

of characteristic and feature data:
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-13
Preparing custom printouts and compact

printouts
Custom printout
The custom printout is your way of presenting measuring results,

for example, to a customer or client. You can generate your own
custom printouts tailored to your needs and preferences or to those
of your client, and present the results of measurement in detail.
Custom printouts are ideal for attractive graphical presentations.
Consequently, they consist of various graphics files. You can edit these
graphics files as necessary.
Compact printout
The compact printout offers less possibilities for layout.

The output format of the compact printout is automatically
predefined by selecting the output format for the custom printout.
You can customize the header of the compact printout via the
Header Editor.
For using and modifying custom printouts and compact printouts, the
following steps are necessary:
How to define the output of the printout on page 9-5
Designing printouts with the Header Editor on page 9-17
Structure of custom printouts and compact

printouts
The custom printout consists of various sections that you can include
in or exclude from the printout and arrange to suit your preferences.
NOTE
hss
If you are using the Calypso Light version, you cannot use these
functions.
9-14
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Preparing custom printouts and compact printouts
The data for each section is saved in separate files in the directory
called calypso\opt\om\protform\default\.... These sections are listed in
the table below, alongside brief descriptions of their contents.
Section
Contents
Edit under
Printout header
Automatic fields with

information on:
Resources Result Presentation

Printout Header
File name: vphead.gra
workpiece
measurement data
etc.
Header line
Specifications for
presentation of the results.

Header Line Editor
File name: header.gra
Printout area
The printout area contains

the characteristics and the
measuring results as well as
coordinate systems, etc.
Characteristics
Contains the icons, the

names and the results of the Characteristic Editor
characteristics.
File name: cffra.gra
Features

names and the results of the Feature Editor
features.
File name: me.gra
Characteristic Group Editor
File name: grpcf.gra
Characteristic groups
Coordinate systems

names and the references of Characteristic Editor
the coordinate system.
File name: cfpos.gra
User-definable pages
any

User Defined Header
Printout Header Compact Printout
File name: cphead.gra
Printout header
compact printout
Automatic fields in the custom printout

The printout header contains automatic fields or dummies, as they are
also known. Dummies are inserted once only. Subsequently, they are
replaced by Calypso or by you when you run a measurement plan.
This arrangement saves time and trouble, and the data on the
measurement and the workpiece is always current.
There are two kinds of dummy:
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-15
global dummies. You enter these dummies once for each

measurement plan (such as the part number, for instance), while
others (e.g. time, measurement plan name) are filled in
automatically by Calypso.
local dummies. These dummies are filled in by you or by Calypso
before each start of the measurement plan; they include the order
number and remarks, for example.
For more information, see Preparing header data on page 9-21.
Results presentation in the custom printout

The custom printout presents the measuring results as follows (shown
here without the printout header):
Icon of
characteristic
Histogram
Name of
characteristic
Deviation from
tolerance
Along with the actual value and nominal value and upper and lower
tolerances, the printout contains further information, indicated by the
arrows in this illustration. This information includes:
Icon of the characteristic: The icon of the characteristic can assume
one of several colors:
red: Characteristic is out of tolerance
yellow: Characteristic is in the defined warning range (if
defined)
green: Characteristic is within tolerance.
Histogram: The vertical line in the histogram represents the middle
of the tolerance range. The dashes represent the tolerance limits.
9-16
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Each dash represents 25% of the tolerance limit. The illustration

below, for example, represents 50% of the upper tolerance limit.
If the value is out of tolerance, the numerical value of the deviation

is displayed instead of the histogram.
Designing printouts with the Header Editor

When creating an individual printout, you can freely choose the
representation for the measuring results. Here, you can create various
custom printout templates which can be called up in accordance with
the measurement task which is to be executed for the result
presentation.
The Header Editor is a tool that you can use to create and edit
graphic elements and insert measurement plan variables into the
printout.
NOTE
hss
function.
This illustration shows the Header Editor for features.
Menu bar
Toolbar
Info bar
Graphic
toolbox
Drawing area
Special toolbox
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-17
You can change the following structural aspects:

Printout header (also for the compact printout)
Header line,
Characteristics,
Features,
Characteristic groups,
Coordinate systems and
Additional, user-defined pages.
For this purpose, use the individual editors under Resources
Result Presentation.
NOTE
hss
You need some experience with drawing programs in order to use the
editor.
Header Editor
The functions of the Header Editor are not described in detail in the
following as they do not differ greatly from those of conventional
drawing programs.
NOTE
hss
function.
The drawing area is where you lay out the custom printout. The
special toolbox provides a number of variables or fields that you can
insert into the custom printout; the choice varies, depending on the
editor. These are filled either automatically by Calypso while the
measurement is in progress, or manually by the operator.
The graphic toolbox contains icons representing the usual graphics
tools for drawing simple graphical elements, and for inserting
complete graphic files (such as a company logo, for example) into the
custom printout.
The info bar contains information on size of image, working
directory and current scaling.
The toolbar contains a selection of commands for controlling the
Header Editor:
9-18
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
The commands available in the menu bar are as follows:

Menu
Menu Item
Function
File
New
Creates a new custom printout
Save
Saves the current custom printout.
Save As
Saves the current printout under a new name.
Open
Opens an existing printout.
Format
Opens the Page layout dialog box.

This dialog box is fully described in Page layout in the
Print
Prints the current printout.
Close
Closes the dialog box
Copy
Copies the selected element to the Clipboard.
Cut
Copies the selected element to the Clipboard and removes it

from the drawing area
Paste
Pastes the contents of the Clipboard back into the printout.
Select All
Selects all elements in the drawing area.
Duplicate
Duplicates the selected element.
Make Polygon
Not yet available
Edit
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-19
Menu
Menu Item
Draw
New
Function
Number Field
Inserts a number field for numerical inputs.
Text Field
Inserts a text field for alphanumerical inputs.
Output Field
Inserts an output field.
Data Output Field
Inserts a data output field.
Table Output Field
Inserts a table output field.
Graphic
Inserts a graphic (file, OMView or form and location plot)
Fill Color
Defines the fill color for an object
Border Color
Defines the color for an object's border
Line Width
Defines the line width for an object's frame
Properties
Opens the Properties (Header editor) dialog box.

This dialog box is fully described in Properties (Header
editor) in the Calypso Online Help.
Width...
Defines the width of an object
Height...
Defines the height of an object
Object Name...
Defines the name for the object
Object Visibility...
Prompts whether you want to create a new view of the

object
Bring
To Front
Brings an object into the foreground
Forward
Brings an object one layer forward
Send
To Back
Sends an object to the background
Backward
Sends an object one layer back
Group
For Symbols
Creates a group for symbols
For Statistics
Creates a group for statistics
For Comments
Creates a group for comments
For References
Creates a group for references
Grouping
Groups the selected objects
Ungrouping
Ungroups a group
Align...
Aligns selected objects vertically and/or horizontally
9-20
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Menu
Menu Item
Function
View
Refresh
Not yet available
Zoom In
Zooms in the view
Zoom Out
Zooms out the view
Grid Off
Switches the grid on and off
Define Grid
Defines the size of the grid
Scale feature
Scales an object by the defined scaling factor
Reset Page
Not yet available
Select Objects
Lists all objects that occur in the printout template
Preparing header data

The printout header part can accept data relating to the measurement
environment, the operator, or the workpiece. You decide which data
to include in the printout header when you structure your printout.
NOTE
hss
function.
There are two types of printout header data:
Local data: You have to enter this data each time you start a
measurement plan
Global data: You enter this data once only for each measurement
plan.
Calypso also provides other information for the printout header data
(such as tester, date, etc.), which cannot be modified.
In addition to the fields provided by Calypso, you can define your own
printout header fields and, if necessary, their input mode and value
selection (Defining your own printout header data on page 9-22).
To define which data is incorporated into the printout header, select
Resources Result Presentation Printout Header and
Resources Result Presentation Printout Header Compact
Printout.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-21
The available printout header data is listed in a column reserved for

this purpose.
Printout header
data
Within the column, the printout header data is arranged in groups, as

follows:
Data group
Type
Subsequently entered
SYS
local/global
automatically by Calypso
EDIT
global
once only per measurement plan under Resources

Printout Header Parameters.
START
local
for each measurement plan start in the Start

Measurement dialog box, see How to enter
local printout header data on page 8-7.
OTHER
local/global
automatically by Calypso
Defining your own printout header data

Calypso uses the two userfields.txt and userfields.ini files when
querying the printout header data.
INI file overwrites TXT file

If a userfields.txt file exists, Calypso first refers to this file to determine
which data is to be queried in the Input Parameter dialog box. You
can activate and edit the userfields.txt file yourself (TXT file for
printout header data on page 9-23).
9-22
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
If a userfields.ini file exists, Calypso then refers to this file to

determine which data is queried in the Input Parameter dialog box
and which values can be acquired for the individual printout header
parameters. You can also activate and edit this file yourself. For
convenient and reliable input of the printout header data, you can
define selection lists with a given, limited scope, for example (INI
File for Printout Header Data on page 9-24).
NOTE
hss
If a variable defined in the userfields.ini file was already defined in the

userfields.txt file, the definitions in the userfields.ini file will overwrite
those from the userfields.txt file.
TXT file for printout header data

Input fields can be freely defined for the printout header. These fields
will then be available for selection for the printout header.
NOTE
hss
Activating file
NOTE
hss
Supplementing file
function.
The additional input fields will have to be defined in the
userfields.txt ASCII file. You can obtain this file by renaming the
xxx_userfields.txt file you received in the
...\Calypso\opt\om\protform directory to userfields.txt.
If a file called userfields.ini is present in addition to theuserfields.txt
file, its settings will overwrite those of the userfields.txt file.
To define the additional input fields, add one further line with the
following elements, separated by commas, for each required input
field:
Element
Meaning
ID
will be used in the result file, must begin with

u_
Designation
will be displayed in dialogs
Display control
E = appears in the dialog when editing,

R = appears in the dialog at CNC start,
RE = appears in both dialogs
You can, for example, append the following three lines in the
userfields.txt file:
u_field1,FELD 1,RE
u_field2,FELD 2,R
u_field3,FELD 3,E
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-23
Once you have called the Report Header File Editor using Resources
Result Presentation Printout Header you will notice that the
newly defined fields have been added to the left selection column of
the printout header fields. These fields can now be added to the
printout header in the same manner as standard fields in Calypso.
The values for the added fields are entered in two dialogs:
for the fields in the Input Parameter dialog that are highlighted
with R (during CNC run, after clicking on the Printout Header
Data button, or mandatory at the start),
for the fields in the dialog under Resources Printout Header
Parameter that are highlighted with E,
for the fields in both dialogs highlighted with RE.
The entered values will appear in the printout header of the custom
printout and the compact printout.
The identifications (e.g. u_field1) and the appropriate values will be
output in the result header file (*_hdr.txt).
INI File for Printout Header Data

If a userfields.ini file exists, Calypso refers to this file to determine
which data is queried in the Input Parameter dialog box and which
values can be acquired for the individual printout header parameters.
Overwrites definitions
of userfields.txt
The settings in this file will overwrite the settings of any existing file
named userfields.txt.
If no INI file is active (default state), any parameter can be entered for
the printout header data.
Name and location of

the INI file
The INI file must first be activated and edited as a text file in the
...\Calypso\opt\om\protform directory.
Activating file
Calypso comes with the zzz_userfields.ini file (it contains an

example of self-defined printout header fields). You can activate the
supplied zzz_userfields.ini file by renaming it to userfields.ini.
Format of the INI file
The format of the userfields.ini file largely corresponds to that of a

normal Windows INI file:
The file consists of individual sections, each of which is introduced
by a line with the section name in square brackets.
Each section consists of lines in the form <option>=<value>.
The names of the options are firmly assigned. A number of values
for one option are entered with separating commas. If a value
itself contains one or more commas, this value must be placed in
quotes (").
Example:
9-24
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
<option>=X,Y,Z means three individual values

<option>="X,Y,Z" means one value
All characters that follow a semicolon are regarded as comments

and ignored. Exception: The semicolon is located between two
quotes (";").
A line that starts with REM is regarded as a comment and ignored.
For the userfields.ini file, the following has been agreed for the
section and option names:
Structure of the
userfields.ini file
The [Fieldnames] section contains the names of the other sections

defined in this file that can represent an input field, a value list or a
combo box.
Deviating from the usual format, this section consist of lines of the
form <option>.
For each of the options defined in the Fieldnames section, there is
a separate section with this name.
Each section that represents an input field, a selection list or a
combo box contains lines with the following options:
<option>
<value>
Mandatory for each input field

name
= <pname>
The name of the input field (is displayed in the Input

Parameters dialog box to the left of the input field or list)
editMode
= true
When you are editing the measurement plan and a value for the
field is to be entered (menu item Resources Report Header
Parameters)
Otherwise
false
runMode
When a value for the field is to be queried on CNC start
= true
Otherwise
false
selectiveList
For input via combo box or selection list
= true
Otherwise
false
Additionally mandatory for combo boxes and selection lists

selectiveListValues = <aname>
The name of the section with the entries of the combo box or
selection list
editable
Combo box
= true
Selection list
false
Additionally possible as an option

defaultValue
= <dwert>
The value to be displayed before a selection is made.

Important: If the default value is to be an entry from a list
(combo box or selection list), it is not the actual entry that
should be here, but its option name.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-25
Evaluation of the
entries for lists
Each combo box and each selection list is assigned as a value of the
selectiveListValues option the name of the section in which the
individual entries of the list appear line by line.
Each of these lines has the form <option>=<value>. The options
are entered in the protheadpara file; the assigned values, on the
other hand, are displayed in the relevant list.
NOTE
hss
This enables, for example, the entry of numerical values as UserIDs in

the protheadpara file for further processing, whereas the user names
are displayed in the Input Parameters dialog box.
What follows is an example of a userfields.ini file.
Example: INI file for printout header data

The following shows you and example of an INI file for printout
header data: Calypso comes with this example in the
...\Calypso\opt\om\protform directory, under the zzz_userfields.ini
file name.
REM This is an example for the userfields.ini-File
[Fieldnames]
REM By convention the userfieldnames begin with "u_"
u_field1
u_field2
u_field3
u_field4
u_field5
; Now defining the first userfield named u_field1
[u_field1]
name=Month
; the text which is shown as the name for the inputfield/list
editMode=true
; this field shall be edited while editing the inspection
; Menu Prepare - Protocol Header Parameters
runMode=false
; this field shall not be edited before starting CNC
selectiveList=true
; it is a list - either a drop down list or a combo box
selectiveListValues=u_field1_valueList ; the values for this list are found in the
; profile named "u_field1_valueList"
editable=false
; there's no keyboard input possible for the user - it is a
; drop down list (not a combo box)
defaultValue=1
; the default value to be shown is the value with the
; optionname "1"
REM Now defining the second userfield named u_field2
[u_field2]
name=Greeting
editMode=false; this field shall not be edited while editing the inspection
runMode=true o
; this field shall be edited before starting CNC
selectiveList=false
; it is not a list, so it must be an input field
defaultValue=Hello
; this value is shown as long as no other input has been made for this
; field
9-26
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
[u_field3]
name=Weekday
editMode=true
runMode=true
selectiveList=true
selectiveListValues=u_field3_valueList
editable=false
defaultValue=3
[u_field4]
name=Amount
editMode=true
runMode=false
selectiveList=false
defaultValue=0.0
[u_field5]
name=Currency
editMode=true
runMode=true
selectiveList=true
selectiveListValues=u_field5_valueList
editable=true
; the user can type in values using the keyboard (and not only
; selecting the values from the given list)
defaultValue=Euro
REM Now defining the valuelist for the userfield with the name "Month"
[u_field1_valueList]
1=January
; this is also the default value - see option defaultValue
; at definition for u_field_1
2=February
3=March
4=April
5=May
6=June
7=July
8=August
9=September
10=October
11=November
12=December
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-27
REM this is the valuelist for the userfield named "Weekday"
1=Monday
2=Tuesday
3=Wednesday
4=Thursday
5=Friday
6=Saturday
7=Sunday
REM the following value list doesn't need special keys for the values. So the keys are the
REM same as the values.
Euro=Euro
Dollar=Dollar
Yen=Yen
Franc=Franc
DM=DM
How to work with the custom printout template

The template for the printout header is used here by way of example
to illustrate how to create a custom printout template and what to
bear in mind when you save your work.
NOTE
hss
function.
To work with a custom printout template:
1 Open the editor for the section you want to edit by selecting
Resources Result Presentation.
2 Open the template sketch by selecting File Open and then
clicking on OK.
The template is displayed as a sketch.
3 You can edit the sketch in accordance with your needs and
preferences to create the template for your own custom printout:
Highlight the object you want to use in the graphic toolbox or
the special toolbox.
In the drawing area, click on the position where you want to
insert the object.
4 Save the template:
Select File Format to define the format.
Select File Save As.
9-28
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Calypso displays the following message:
!
hss
Important
Do not, under any circumstances, change the name of the file,
because Calypso always uses the same name.
Change the name of the directory called default if you want to
create two or more versions of the printout.
Overwrite the default name with the name of a directory you
have created for this purpose with Windows NT Explorer.
Click on OK.
Your template is now saved.
Example: Programming a custom printout with

input prompt
You can program a custom printout in such a way that before the
printout is printed, the user is prompted to enter certain items of
information destined for inclusion in the printout. You do this with
the aid of the variables in the printout header (see Printout header
data (reference) on page 9-31) and the Inquire query function in the
PCM language (see PCM functions: Input and output on
page 15-57).
NOTE
hss
function.
In this example, we want to have Calypso prompt for the pallet
number when the measurement plan is started and include the
number entered by the user in the custom printout.
1 Select Resources Result Presentation Printout Header.
The file now shown under Sketch should now be vphead.gra.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-29
2 Select File Open.

The printout header is now displayed on the user desk.
3 In the list of fields on the left, go to the START section, mark the
Tool field and click in the printout header at the point where you
want to position the field. Delete the word Tool from the label
and type Pallet number instead.
4 Close and save the printout header you edited.
5 Open the list of characteristics.
6 Make sure that no characteristic is highlighted, right-click to open
the shortcut menu, and select Parameter.
The Settings dialog box appears on the screen.
7 Under Presettings, enter the following:
PALETTE=inquire(Enter the pallet number: ")
setRecordHead("tooldf",PALETTE)
Explanation: What is found in the tooldf variable is output into

the palett number printout head field.
The effect of the first line is that a prompt box opens and the user
is prompted to enter the pallet number.
The effect of the second line is that the number entered in this way
is assigned to the tooldf variable and is thus subsequently
printed in the printout under pallet number.
Commands entered in PCM apply to the entire measurement plan,
which means they are executed when the measurement plan starts.
9-30
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Printout header data (reference)

All the printout header data is listed in the table below. The IDs are
used to identify the header data in the table result file (...hdr.txt).
Data group
Name of field
ID
SYS
CMM No.
dmesn
Time
time
From
nrpgs
Date
date
Meas. Plan Name
planid
Software Revision
dmeswv
Department:
vda_departm
Software
dmeswi
Telephone/Fax:
vda_phone
No.
vda_number
Control Type
Controller
Sheet
actpgnr
CMM Type
dmeid
Operator
operid
Run
measRun
Tolerance Mode
deviationmode
Clamp No.
clmpsn
Comment:
vda_remark
Clamp
clmpid
Name
partid
Previous Operation
prevop
Workpiece Ser. No.
partsn
Meas. Plan Comment
partcomment
Subject Number:
vda_subjno
Fixture No.
fixtsn
Name:
vda_name
Version:
vda_version
Fixture ID
fixtid
Workpiece Rev.
partrv
Autdit-No.
vda_auditno
Drawing No.
drawingno
EDIT
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-31
Data group
Name of field
ID
START
Start Comment
startcomment
Comment:
vda_remark
Name
procid
Test ID
lotid
Lot ID
partnbLong
Subject Number
vda_subjno
Name:
vda_name
Process Plan
mfgdev
Order
order
Incremental Part Number partnbinc
OTHER
9-32
61212-2010602
Version:
vda_version
Audit-No.:
vda_auditno
Tool
tooldf
Signature:
vda_signature
Changed By (operator)
changeoper
Creation Of Software
Rev.
creationswi
Revision Date
changedate
Created By (operator)
produceoper
Creation Date
creationdate
Creation Of CMM Type
creationdme
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to display variations in form and location graphically
How to display variations in form and

location graphically
Calypso can graphically display the deviations that are determined by
form and location checks on the measured geometric elements as a
form plot or location plot and can output them to your printer. The
CAD view can also be output as a plot.
Form plots for
characteristics
Form plots are available for the following characteristics:

Straightness
Flatness
There is also a Fourier analysis plot for this.
Roundness
There is also a Fourier analysis plot for this.
Cylindricity
Best Fit of Bore Pattern
Curve Form (curve measurement is an option of Calypso).
Curve Slope (curve measurement is an option of Calypso).
You can either select an existing format file or a format file that you
have created yourself (*.gra) to display the deviations in graphical
form.
Location plots for

characteristics
Location plots are available for the following characteristics:

Parallelism, Perpendicularity, Inclination
Line - Line
Line - Plane
Plane - Axis
Plane - Plane
Runout
Radial runout of circles
Total radial runout of cylinders
Axial runout or total axial runout of planes
You can either select an existing format file or a format file that you
have created yourself (*.gra) to display the deviations in graphical
form.
CAD window as a plot
You can also freeze the representation in the CAD window and
output it as a drawing with spatial effect in a plot (Outputting the
CAD view as a plot on page 9-38).
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-33
Output of form or location plot

You can manually call and output form or location plots or have them
displayed in the CNC run.
Calling form or location plot manually

Actual values must be available before a form or location plot can be
output manually. Therefore, the features required for the
characteristic in question must already have been measured (manually
or in the CNC run).
You can then output the plot by calling the window for form and
location plots from the definition template of the characteristic,
making the necessary settings and starting the printout (How to
output a form or location plot manually on page 9-36).
Having the form or location plot output in the CNC

run
Several preconditions must be met before the desired form or location
plot can be output in the CNC run:
Output of a form or location plot must be activated in the
characteristic in question (How to activate a form or location
plot on page 9-35).
The desired type of plot (the format file) must be selected and the
desired properties of the form plot must have been set (How to
set the type and properties of the plot on page 9-35).
The feature must exceed at least one of the values set in
Measurement plan editor characteristics:
Minimum standard deviation
Min. tolerance deviation in %
Both values are set to zero by default so that an activated form or
location plot without additional entries will always be displayed.
Using the criteria in Measurement plan editor characteristics,
you can thus restrict the display of form or location plots to only
those cases that interest you.
Once these preconditions have been met, the Form and location
plot window will be displayed with the set plots during the CNC run.
After the CNC run, you can view the plots and, if necessary, edit and
print them (Working with the form and location plot Window on
page 9-41).
9-34
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to activate a form or location plot

To activate a form or location plot:
1 Open the definition template for the characteristic in the
measurement plan.
The definition template will appear.
2 Complete the Tolerance and Feature fields if they do not already
contain the applicable data.
3 Activate the check box next to the Graphic button.
This activates the form or location plot. The form or location plot
will be displayed during the CNC run if the characteristic exceeds
the values set in the measurement plan editor.
You now have to set the type of plot and type of format file.
How to set the type and properties of the plot

Prerequisite: The form or location plot has been activated.
To set the type and properties of the plot:
1 Click on the Graphic button in the definition template of the
characteristic in question.
The selection window for the form or location plot is opened. The
appearance differs, depending on the characteristic from which
the form or location plot is called. The illustration shows the
window using the Roundness characteristic as an example:
Selection list for the type of plot

Format file selection list
Selection list for characteristics
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-35
2 Select the type of plot you require for the characteristic from the
upper selection list.
3 From the selection list below that, select the format file which
should be used to display the form or location plot.
Default refers to the standard Zeiss format file.
CAD View means output of the CAD window as a plot.
All characteristics for which the type of form or location plot can
be used are listed in the Characteristics selection list. You can
select two or more in the case of some characteristics.
4 Select the characteristic.
The Form Plot window opens with the type of plot you selected.
The editing options in the Form Plot window are described in
detail in Working with the form and location plot Window on
page 9-41.
5 Click on OK when you are ready.
You can always bring the form or location plot window back to the
foreground again if you need it.
How to output a form or location plot manually

If the characteristic for which the form or location plot is to be created
has already been measured, you can display form and location plots
manually and print them if necessary.
To output the form or location plot manually:
1 Open the definition template for the characteristic in the
measurement plan.
The definition template will appear.
2 Complete the Tolerance and Feature fields if they do not already
contain the applicable data.
3 Click on the Graphic button.
The selection window for the form or location plot is opened. The
appearance differs, depending on the characteristic from which
9-36
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
the form or location plot is called. The illustration shows the

window using the Roundness characteristic as an example:
Selection list for the type of plot

Format file selection list
Selection list for characteristics
4 Select the type of plot you require for the feature from the upper
selection list.
5 From the selection list below that, select the format file which
should be used to display the form or location plot.
Default refers to the standard Zeiss format file.
CAD View means output of the CAD window as a plot.
All characteristics for which the type of form or location plot can
be used are listed in the Characteristics selection list. You can
select two or more in the case of some characteristics.
6 Select the characteristic.
The Form Plot window opens with the type of plot you selected.
The editing options in the Form Plot window are described in
detail in Working with the form and location plot Window on
page 9-41.
7 Click again on the selection window for form or location plots if
you want to view other form or location plots.
This moves the Form Plot window to the background. You can
now display the form or location plots of other characteristics
together with the current form or location plot. Repeat step 6 for
this.
8 Click on OK when you are ready.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-37
You can always bring the form or location plot window back to the
foreground again if you need it.
Outputting the CAD view as a plot

You can output the current model or any other view in the CAD
window as a plot. This provides you with a drawn model with spatial
effect.
Prerequisites
A condition for output of a certain CAD model is that you have

previously created the desired CAD model with its parameters (zoom
factor, scope of model, rotation angle, offset, magnifying factor etc.)
in the CAD window and saved it under a certain name using CAD
View Save View.
Activating the output
You activate the output of the CAD window as a plot in exactly the
same way as the form or location plot using the Graphic button in
the definition template of the characteristic. Then select CAD View
as the format, acisView as the subdirectory and acis_3d.gra as the
format file.
A selection of possible CAD views appears. The current view has the
name model. Other previously saved views appear with their file
names.
Format files for form and location plots

Calypso provides several standard format files for displaying the form
and location plots. Additionally, you can also create your own format
files.
You select the file you want for the form or location plot in the dialog
box for the form or location plot. The format files which are offered
here can be found under
...\Calypso\opt\om\pictures\formplott\calypso or in certain
subdirectories of this directory.
Only the format files that have been provided in the respective
subdirectory (or, if none available, in the
...\Calypso\opt\om\pictures\formplott\calypso directory) and are
appropriate for the plot type can be selected in the selection window
for the form and location plot.
9-38
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
If you create your own format files, you must, for this reason, store
them in the subdirectory with the corresponding name (see list). If the
subdirectory does not yet exist, create it.
Plot type
Subdirectory
File name
Multiroundness
multiroundness
cz_mr.gra
Multiple roundness transposed
multiroundness
cz_mr_t.gra
Multiroundness with diameter
multiroundness
cz_mr_dia.gra
Fourier analysis
fourieranalysis
cz_fo.gra
3D Flatness View
flatness3d
cz_fn3d.gra
Flatness of Circle Segments
circlemulti
cz_fn_mc.gra
Flatness of Line Segments
linemulti
cz_fn_ml.gra
Multi-Flatness of Circle segments
multiflatnesscircular
cz_mfn_c.gra
Multi-Flatness of Line segments
multiflatnesscircular
cz_mfn_c.gra
Fourier analysis
fourieranalyse
cz_fo.gra
Straightness
straightness
cz_sn.gra
Multistraightness
multistraightness
cz_msn.gra
Cylinder form of Circle segments in 3D
Cylinderformcircular3d
cz_cf_3dc.gra
Cylinder form of Line segments
Cylinderformline
cz_cf_l.gra
Cylinder form of several circle segments
Cumradialrunoutmulticircle
cz_crro_mc.gra
Cylinder form of single circle segments
Cumradialrunoutsinglecircle cz_crro_sc.gra
Roundness
Flatness
Straightness
Cylindricity
Curve Form
Curve form linear
curveformline
cz_cu_li.gra
Curve form 2D
curveform2d
cz_cu_2d.gra
Curve form 3D
curveform3d
cz_cu_3d.gra
Multi-Curve form 2D
multicurveform2d
cz_mcu_2d.gra
Multi-Curve form linear
multicurveformline
cz_mcu_li.gra
Slope Type 1
CurveformSlope
cz_cu_sl_Type1_ls.gra
cz_cu_sl_Type1_p.gra
Slope Type 2
CurveformSlope2
Curve Slope
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-39
Plot type
Subdirectory
File name
Slope Type 3
CurveformSlope3
borepattern
borepattern_new.gra
Perpendicularity
perpendicularity
cz_pe.gra
Perpendicularity 3D
perpendicularity3d
cz_pe3d.gra
Multi perpendicularity on circle segments
multiPerpendicularityOnCircl cz_pe_mc.gra
e
Position
Bore Pattern
Perpendicularity
Parallelism
Parallelism
parallelism
cz_pa.gra
Parallelism 3D
parallelism3d
cz_pa3d.gra
Multi parallelism on circle segments
multiParallelismOnCircle
cz_pa_mc.gra
Angularity
angularity
cz_an.gra
Angularity 3D
angularity3d
cz_an3d.gra
Angularity of circle segments
multiAngularityOnCircle
cz_an_mc.gra
Axial runout 3D
axialRunout3d
cz_ar3d.gra
Cumulative axial runout 3D
cumAxialRunout3d
cz_car3d.gra
Cylinder form using many circle segments
Cumradialrunoutmulticircle
cz_crro_mc.gra
Angularity
Runout
Cylinder form using a single circle segments Cumradialrunoutsinglecircle cz_crro_sc.gra

Multi axial runout line
multiAxialRunoutLine
cz_ar_ml.gra
Multi cumulative axial runout line
multiCumAxialRunoutLine
cz_car_ml.gra
Multi radial runout
multiRadialRunout
cz_rro.gra
Multiple radial runout circle
radialRunoutOnCircle
cz_rro_sc.gra
AcisView
acis_3d.gra
CAD window (for all form and location

plots)
CAD View
Designing Your own format files for form and

location plots
In addition to the format files provided by Calypso for displaying form
and location plots, you also have the option of creating your own
format files. To do so, use the Header Editor which can be called using
Resources Result Presentation Characteristics Editor.
9-40
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
You can customize the printout header of the plots via the Header
Editor. Call up the editor via Resources Result Presentation
Report Header and then open the mbhead.gra file in the directory
...\Calypso\opt\om\pictures\formplott\calypso.
NOTE
hss
function.
Details on how to work with the Header Editor can be found under
Header Editor on page 9-18.
Fourier Analysis for flatness and roundness

In the case of the Fourier representation for flatness and roundness,
the amplitudes for the different harmonics as well as a table with the
largest amplitudes and the associated harmonics are displayed.
Output
The amplitudes are shown in radial direction in the Fourier analysis of

roundness and the amplitudes are shown in normal direction with
respect to the plane in the Fourier analysis of flatness.
NOTE
hss
Presentation format
The precondition for Fourier analysis of flatness is that the plane was
measured with a circular path.
You can enter the number of harmonics to be shown. The maximum
number of harmonics that can be shown is equal to half of the
measured points.
The graphic automatically fits into the intended space. The scale of
the X axis is logarithmic and starts at 1 = fundamental wave.
Calculation process
To determine the values to be shown, all measured points are filtered

first, if necessary, and outliers are eliminated. Then, to calculate the
various amplitudes, a Fourier analysis is carried out, taking into
account unequal distances between the measured points.
In the Fourier analysis of roundness, the valid deviation is the
deviation in the direction of the normal with respect to the plane.
Working with the form and location plot

Window
The form and location plot window allows you to define the
appearance of your form and location plots yourself to a great extent.
You also use it both when manually calling and printing out plots for
characteristics that have already been measured and when defining
the appearance of plots that are to be displayed automatically during
the CNC run.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-41
The illustration below shows the Form Plot window for a roundness
plot for a circle.
In this window, you can edit the representation of the form and
location plot and print the current representation.
The window consists of three areas:
The form plot header, containing the data from the printout
header.
The form plot area. It shows the validated specified form along
with the actual contour as derived from the measured points. The
two red lines represent the upper tolerance limit and the lower
tolerance limit. You can see at a glance where a measured point
deviates from specification, and in which direction.
A data table with the name of the characteristic, the actual value,
the tolerance, the number of points, and the data for the filter, if
used.
Marking extreme
points
You can mark the extreme points. To do so, select Edit Plot Type
in the form plot window and enable the Extreme Points check box.
You then have a choice of different marking symbols.
How to print a form and location plot

To print the form and location plot:
9-42
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
1 In the Form Plot window, select the command File Print.

The Windows Print dialog appears on the screen.
How to change form and location plot settings

temporarily
In the form and location plot settings, you can, among other things,
specify the scope of the model of the form and location plot.
To change the form and location plot settings for the next output:
1 In the Form Plot window, select Edit Modify Chart Settings.
This opens a notebook laid out like the notebooks containing the
system settings.
2 Make the desired settings on the respective pages.

3 Click on OK to accept the modified presettings only for the current
plot.
The Form Plot window reappears on the screen.
How to change form and location plot settings

permanently
In the form and location plot settings, you can, among other things,
specify the scope of the model of the form and location plot.
To incorporate the form and location plot settings permanently into
the measurement plan:
1 Open the definition template for the characteristic.
2 Click on the Graphic button.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-43
3 In the Form Plot window, select Edit Modify Chart Settings.

This opens a notebook laid out like the notebooks containing the
system settings.
4 Set the parameters as necessary.

5 Click on OK to accept the modified presettings for all further runs.
The Form Plot window reappears on the screen.
6 Click on OK to close all sub-windows along with the definition
template for the characteristic.
NOTE
hss
This dialog box is fully described in Form plot properties in the

9-44
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Saving measuring results to files

In addition to saving measuring results in the protocol file in the
standard manner, Calypso also supports additional file types in which
the measuring results can be saved as required.
You can determine the mode in which Calypso saves the data in these
additional files.
NOTE
hss
function.
Standard path and

name
The table below describes the file types supported at this time with
the standard file names and paths used by Calypso.
File type
Contents, form, standard path and name
Table
The measuring results are saved in a text file in table format. The
results are therefore available for use in other programs, especially
spreadsheet programs.
Files of this type are saved under
...\calypso\home\om\workarea\results under the name of the
measurement plan which corresponds to the measuring results,
including part number indices.
Merge file
When you save the measured values in a merge file, the measured
values of different CNC runs are saved sequentially in a common file.
Before you can save the measured values in a merge file you have to
initialize them.
Merge files always have table format.
They are saved in C:\calypso\home\om\workarea\results under the
name merge.
DMIS
The measuring results are saved in a file in DMIS format and are
suitable for the CMM accept processes.
Files of this type are saved in C:\calypso\home\om\workarea\dmisout
under the name of the measurement plan that belongs to the
measuring results.
Note: DMIS recognizes only one single tolerance mode. The
deviations are therefore output as in the Number String mode,
even if the Amount mode is set.
QDAS
Available as option only!
The measuring results are saved in a file in QDAS format and are
suitable for QDAS statistics programs (e.g. qs-STAT, procella).
The system only saves the results of those characteristics that
correspond to the characteristic set in the measurement plan editor
(Characteristic to Statistic on).
Files of this type are saved in the C:\calypso\home\om\workarea\qdas
directory under the name of the measurement plan that belongs to
the measuring results.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-45
File type
Contents, form, standard path and name
PDF
The measuring results are saved as a PDF file (Portable Document

Format) in the ...\calypso\home\om\workarea\results directory.
Note: You can limit the number of stored PDF files.
The custom printout is saved together with all created form and
location plots and/or the compact printout.
The file names consist of the name of the measurement plan, the
part number and a fixed extension:
*_gra.pdf for custom printouts with plots
*_txt.pdf for compact printouts
Note: This option can only be used if one of the following programs
is installed on the Calypso computer:
Adobe Acrobat Writer
Ghostscript
FinePrint / pdfFactory
PostScript
The measuring results are saved as a PostScript file (*.ps) in the

...\calypso\home\om\workarea\results directory.
ASCII file curve
The measuring results for curves are output as an ASCII file under
C:\calypso\home\ASCII\measurement plan name\element name.txt.
You can select which data should be written to the ASCII file:
Nominal values or actual values with or without normals and
deviation.
You can also select an export in VDA format: The curve points
corrected by the stylus tip radius are written in a file as MDI (pointvector sequence).
Individual path and file

names
You can define individual paths and names for the following data
types:
Printout (default and compact printout)
Table file (characteristics, features, printout header)
PDF file (graphic and text)
DMIS file
Q-DAS file
How to define paths and names individually

for output files
You can define the paths and name for output files generally for all
activated measurement plans as well as separately for a certain
measurement plan.
9-46
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
For an individual measurement plan, you can then select either the
default name or the generally defined individual names or the
separately defined individual names for each type of output files.
NOTE
You must have the right Define Paths.
hss
To define paths and names of output files:

1 Select Resources Name for output files for this
measurement plan if you want to define individual names only
for the active measurement plan.
The Name definitions for output files for this measurement
plan window opens.
2 Select Resources Name for output files for all activated
measurement plans if you want to define individual names as
default for all measurement plans.
The Name definitions for output files for all activated
measurement plans window opens.
3 In the Output File selection list, select the file type whose name
you want to define.
4 Activate Name of output file variable.
5 Only in the Name definitions for output files for this
measurement plan window: To ensure that the set assignments
are active for all measurement plans, you must activate Name
from setting for all measurement plans.
You can only make the individual settings for the active
measurement plan if you do not activate this check box.
6 Enter the name of the output file with the appropriate extension in
the Name definition of output file in PCM Syntax (with or
without path) input field and confirm you entry by pressing the
Return key.
NOTE
hss
If you do not enter any path, the path of the current measurement
plan is used.
The name is entered in the Current Name output field. If the
name contains parameters (e.g. part number) to which no
values have been assigned, these parameters are not displayed.
All file types, for which you defined an individual name, as well as
the names themselves, are shown in the All name definitions
deviating from default output field.
7 Select another file type if you want to define additional names for
output files or close the window with OK.
The defined names will be used for the selected output files.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-47
NOTE
hss
If a file already exists under a name used for the output files, the file
will be overwritten with the new output file.
The default printout is created in addition under a default name
(protocol) irrespective of the name definition.
How to save the measuring results as files

NOTE
hss
function.
To define which file type the results will be saved under:
1 Select Resources Results to File.
The Results to File dialog box appears on the screen:
2 Use the radio buttons to set saving on or off for each file type.
Activate the appropriate radio buttons or initialize the merge file.
!
hss
Important
Initialization deletes existing entries in the merge file.
Activate the Select at CNC Start radio button if you want Calypso
to prompt for confirmation before saving to this type of file.
3 If necessary, set an upper limit for the number of PDF files saved.
Calypso will then automatically delete the oldest PDF file in the
directory before the upper limit is exceeded.
4 Click on OK to accept the settings and close the dialog box.
9-48
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
The measuring results will be saved after the CNC run in accordance
with the settings that have been made.
NOTE
The custom printout with all form and location plots and/or the
compact printout are only displayed as a PDF if the corresponding
check boxes have been enabled in the Start Measurement dialog
box.
NOTE
In a QDAS file, only the results for which the selection point of the
characteristic Characteristic to Statistic is set to On or Default
in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics are stored.
hss
hss
This dialog box is fully described in Results to file in the Calypso

Online Help.
Copying the measuring results file

The results in the default printout and the compact printout are
automatically saved in files on your computer's hard disk. Each time
you run a measurement plan, these files are overwritten with the new
results.
The names of the files are protocol.txt and cprotocol.txt, respectively.
They are saved in the folder created for the measurement plan in the
...\calypso\home\om\workarea\inspections\ main folder.
You can use the Windows Explorer to copy these files to a floppy disk
or to another folder on the hard disk.
Custom printouts are not saved on hard disk. Consequently, they
cannot be copied to floppy disk or to other folders on your hard disk.
How to configure the PDF output

If the target directory for the PDF output is not known, the computer
may stop while outputting the custom printout and compact printout.
The reason is that the system waits for the Save as dialog to be
closed.
You can avoid this by configuring the PDF output correspondingly.
1 Select Settings Printer in the Windows Start menu.
The Printer dialog box is opened.
2 Click on Adobe PDF and select Print Settings from the context
menu.
The Print Settings for Adobe PDF dialog box is opened.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-49
3 Activate the Adobe PDF settings tab and deactivate the Show
Adobe PDF results and Input prompt for Adobe PDF file
name check boxes.
Deactivation of the check boxes inhibits the prompting for the
directory in which the PDF output is to be saved.
Adobe saves the output in the directory in which the last PDF output
of Calypso was saved.
To define the directory for the PDF output, proceed as follows:
1 Select Settings Printer in the Windows Start menu.
The Windows printer dialog is opened.
2 Click on Adobe PDF and select Properties from the context
menu.
The Adobe PDF Properties dialog box is opened.
3 Activate the Connections tab and add a connection of the
Adobe PDF Port type if necessary or configure an already
available connection of this type.
4 Select the desired target directory for the PDF output in the
Browse for Folder dialog.
Now, Calypso saves the PDF files in the selected target directory.
9-50
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Programmed access to measuring results

Calypso possesses a communication interface for transferring
measured results to other programs. This interface was developed in
Visual Basic 6.0, and its application represents an extension of the
BASIC vocabulary.
You can use this interface with the aid of a process you program
yourself. This will give you access to the measured results of a
measurement plan that is currently running or is loaded.
NOTE
hss
Opening and closing of the communication interface, as well as

launching of the external process, are performed by means of PCM
commands. You therefore must possess the PCM option in order to
access the measured results.
The external process may be programmed in one of the following
languages:
VisualBasic
VBA (VisualBasic for Applications)
VisualBasicScript (WSH) [WSH = Windows Scripting Host]
Calypso provides a DLL with the name CalypsoInterface.dll as the
interface. Using this interface, a CalypsoInterface object can be
produced with the corresponding access methods.
This CalypsoInterface ActiveX component does not have an
interface of its own. It is installed on any computer and waits for its
application.
The CalypsoInterface with its properties and functions (Syntax
of the CalypsoInterface on page 9-54) is used in the external
process to access the measuring results and data of the measurement
plan.
Access procedure
If all preconditions have been met, access to the measured values

takes place in three steps:
Calypso opens a communication channel (socket) to the outside
world.
Calypso starts the accessing external process and waits until it is
complete.
Calypso closes the communication channel (socket) again.
Calypso adds three commands to the measurement plan for this
purpose (Permitting access to measuring results on page 9-52).
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-51
Permitting access to measuring results

Prerequisites
Before you can access the measured results of the current

measurement plan in Calypso from the outside, the following
preconditions must be met:
The PCM option has been enabled for Calypso.
You have installed and registered the CalypsoInterface (How
to install and uninstall CalypsoInterface on page 9-52).
You have programmed a process that can access the desired
measured results using the functions of the interface (Syntax of
the CalypsoInterface on page 9-54).
Calling the process
The external process will then run as soon as it is called by Calypso.

For this purpose, three PCM commands must be entered in the
measurement plan settings, for example (it makes sense to enter
them in the postsettings).
openSocket()
systemCallForResultAccess("<executable program>")
closeSocket()
The content in <executable program> depends on the programming

language you used.
Example
If you wrote a Visual Basic script with the name

getValuesFromCalypso.vbs, the three lines would look like this :
openSocket()
systemCallForResultAccess("Wscript C:\getValuesFromCalypso.vbs")
closeSocket()
How to install and uninstall CalypsoInterface

Before you can use CalypsoInterface, the communication interface
of Calypso, CalypsoInterface must be present on the destination
computer and must be registered.
How to install CalypsoInterface:
1 Copy the file with the name CalypsoInterface.dll into any directory
on your destination computer.
2 Open the MS-DOS input prompt or select Run in the Windows
Start menu.
3 Using cd\, change to the directory containing the
CalypsoInterface.dll file.
4 Enter the following:
regsvr32 CalypsoInterface.dll
9-52
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
If you no longer need the communication interface of Calypso, you

can uninstall it in order to free up space on your computer.
How to uninstall CalypsoInterface:
1 Open the MS-DOS input prompt or select Run in the Windows
Start menu.
2 Using cd\, change to the directory containing the
CalypsoInterface.dll file.
regsvr32 /u CalypsoInterface.dll
4 Select the directory of your destination computer into which you

copied the CalypsoInterface.dll file and delete this file.
Programming the CalypsoInterface

Programming
languages
You can program a process in one of the following languages in order

to access the measured values via the communication interface of
Calypso:
VisualBasic
VBA (VisualBasic for Applications)
VisualBasicScript (WSH) [WSH = Windows Scripting Host]
CalypsoInterface must have been installed on the destination
computer on which you program the process and must be registered
(How to install and uninstall CalypsoInterface on page 9-52).
Structure of the
program
Your program should have the following structure:

Construction of the CalypsoInterface object
Define a host name if necessary
Define the timeout
Setup of the connection to Calypso
Accept measured values; generate messages if necessary
Cleardown of the connection to Calypso
End of the program
Example
You can find an example of a VBScript with a similar structure under

Example: VBScript Application (WSH) on page 9-61.
Syntax
The necessary properties and functions are listed in the following

sections .
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-53
Syntax of the CalypsoInterface

The syntax of CalypsoInterface is listed in this and the following
sections .
NOTE
hss
The examples for using the syntax refer to programming with

VisualBasicScript.
Construction of CalypsoInterface
The syntax for constructing the CalypsoInterface object is as
follows:
CreateObject("CalypsoInterface.Calypso")
Creates an interface object and returns an object of the type

CalypsoInterface.
NOTE
hss
Example
It makes sense to create only a single instance of the Calypso object

data exchange can take place through only one port of the server.
Set MyCalypso = CreateObject("CalypsoInterface.Calypso")
Properties and Functions

You have the following options for programming the accessing
external process:
Properties of CalypsoInterface
Connection functions of the CalypsoInterface
Measurement plan functions of the CalypsoInterface
Access functions of CalypsoInterface to measured values
Access functions of CalypsoInterface to characteristics
These options will be explained in more detail in the following
sections.
9-54
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Properties of CalypsoInterface
The CalypsoInterface object has the properties listed in the table
below.
Property
Function
HostName
Specifies the host name of the server on which Calypso is

running.
Default: "localhost"
If the client (VBS, VB or VBA program) is located on a different
computer than that of Calypso, this property must be assigned
the computer name or the IP address of the server before the
connection is established.
Example:
MyCalypso.HostName =
"160.4.11.146"
TimeOutConnect
Specifies the latest time after which a connection setup attempt

with Calypso will be aborted.
Default: 10. [seconds]
Example:
MyCalypso.TimeOutConnect = 10
TimeOut
Example: MyCalypso.TimeOut = 10
Port
Specifies the amount of time after which a timeout is to take

place when waiting for a reply from Calypso.
Default: 5 [seconds]
Port number of the socket via which Calypso awaits contact.
Default: 9998
Example: MyCalypso.Port = 9998

ErrNo
(Read access only)
Contains an error code.

Meaning:
0 No error
-1 Error when calling the implemented object functions
Returned value of the respective function:
0 for numerical values
False for Boolean values
Empty character string for string values
If data exchange was successful but the requested
element is not present, "nil" is returned in the case of
string values.
11 CalDataSent Data sent, but no response
-9 CalNoDataSent No data sent
-10 TimeOut. No response from Calypso
-11 No connection to Calypso
-12 Timeout during communication setup
-13 TimerError
7 Value immediately after connection setup (see State)
???? Windows system errors and their numbers
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-55
Property
Function
ErrName
(Read access only)
Calypso.ErrName is assigned the "Description" parameter of a

system error.
Specific errors of the Calypso object (-9 to -13, 11) currently
contain no designation of the error.
ErrMessage
Permits a message to be issued: If the property

Calypso.ErrMessage = True, a message window (MsgBox) with
the error code will be displayed as soon as the condition
Calypso.ErrNo < 0 is met.
Default: False
Important! The use of a MsgBox in ActiveX components can
cause problems: A MsgBox interrupts program execution and
must be acknowledged by the user.
Example:
MyCalypso.ErrMessage = False
WaitResponse
Example:
MyCalypso.WaitResponse = True
State
Defines whether to wait for a response for the data exchange

functions. The waiting duration then depends on the property
Calypso.TimeOut.
Default: True
Returns a numerical value for the status of the socket
connection. Meaning:
0
SckClose
SckOpen
SckListening
SckConnectionPending
SckResolvingHost
SckHostResolved
SckConnecting
SckConnected
SckClosing
SckError
ConnectCalypso and CloseCalypso are assigning functions.
9-56
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Connection functions of the CalypsoInterface

The CalypsoInterface object has the connection functions explained
below.
Function
Purpose
Sets up the connection to Calypso. Successful execution is a

precondition for all access functions.
The return value is the State property (type: long). The ErrNo
Example:
e = MyCalypso.ConnectCalypso property is possibly assigned an error number.
State = 7 means: connection has been set up
If e <> 7 Then
err
= MyCalypso.ErrNo
Any other return value indicates an error. See property State above.
ConnectCalypso
errTxt = MyCalypso.ErrName
MsgBox( err & " " & errTxt)
End If
CloseCalypso
Ends a connection between the client VB/VBA program and the

Calypso server.
The return value is the State property (type: long; see property
State above).
The ErrNo property is possibly assigned an error number.
Measurement plan functions of the

CalypsoInterface
The CalypsoInterface object has the following measurement plan
functions:
Function
Purpose
GetInspectionName
Returns the name of the measurement plan currently loaded in

Calypso.
Type: string
The result is "Default" if no measurement plan is loaded.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-57
Access functions of CalypsoInterface to measured

values
The table below lists all functions of the CalypsoInterface object
that are used for access to actual and nominal values in the features.
The name of the respective feature is designated in the table with
Identifier.
Function
Used for
Returned
GetMeasElement("Identifier")
Determining whether the

feature is present.
Boolean
GetGeometry.XYZ("Identifier")
Position
Reading X, Y, Z nominal value
Vector
ErrNo = -1 if
invalid
GetGeometry.ActualXYZ("Identifier")
Position
Reading X, Y, Z measured
value
Vector
GetGeometry.NormalVector("Identifier")
Normal Vector
Reading NX, NY and NZ
nominal value
In the case of the 2D line, this
is the normal of the plane on
which the line is located.
ErrNo = -1 if
invalid
GetGeometry.ActualNormalVector("Identifier")
Normal Vector
Reading NX, NY and NZ
measured value
Vector
GetGeometry.IoSign("Identifier")
Nominal value
Inside/outside identifier
Double
-1 = inside
0 = outside
ErrNo = -1 if
invalid
GetMeasElements.Geometry.Radius("Identifier")
Reading radius nominal value
Double
ErrNo = -1 if
invalid
Example:
Set MyCalypso.Vector =
MyCalypso.GetGeometry.XYZ("Cone1")
X = MyCalypso.Vector.X
Y = MyCalypso.Vector.Y
Z = MyCalypso.Vector.Z
Example:
Set MyCalypso.Vector =
MyCalypso.GetGeometry.NormalVector("Cone1")
NX = MyCalypso.Vector.X
NY = MyCalypso.Vector.Y
NZ = MyCalypso.Vector.Z
9-58
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Function
Used for
Returned
GetMeasElements.Geometry.ActualRadius("Identif Reading radius measured value Double

ier")
ErrNo = -1 if
invalid
GetLineDirection("Identifier")
Nominal direction of line
Vector
ErrNo = -1 if
invalid
GetActualLineDirection("Identifier")
Actual direction of line
Vector
GetEllipseDiameter2("Identifier")
Reading D2 nominal value

Ellipse
Double
ErrNo = -1 if
invalid
GetActualEllipseDiameter2("Identifier")
Reading D2 measured value

Ellipse
Double
ErrNo = -1 if
invalid
GetConeAngle("Identifier")
Reading AC nominal value
Double
Angle in
radian
measure
ErrNo = -1 if
invalid
GetActualConeAngle("Identifier ")
Reading AC measured value
Double
Angle in
radian
measure
GetLength("Identifier")
Reading length nominal value
Double
ErrNo = -1 if
invalid
GetActualLength("Identifier")
Reading length measured

value
Double
GetWidth("Identifier")
Reading width nominal value
Double
ErrNo = -1 if
invalid
GetActualWidth("Identifier")
Reading width measured value Double
GetHight("Identifier")
Reading height nominal value
Double
ErrNo = -1 if
invalid
GetActualHight("Identifier")
Reading height measured

value
Double
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-59
Access functions of CalypsoInterface to

characteristics
The table below lists all functions of the CalypsoInterface object
that are used for access to values in characteristics.
The name of the respective characteristic is designated in the table
with Identifier.
Function
Used for
Type
GetCFNominal("Identifier")
Reading nominal value
Double
(for angles: radian measure)
GetCFActual("Identifier")
Reading measured value
Double
(for angles: radian measure)
GetCFupperTolerance("Identifier")
Reading upper tolerance
Double
GetCFlowerTolerance("Identifier")
Reading lower tolerance
Double
GetCFInTolerance("Identifier")
Query whether the result is

within the tolerance zone or
not
Boolean
GetCFType("Identifier")
Type of the characteristic.

e.g.: X, Y or Z
String
9-60
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Example: VBScript Application (WSH)

The following program is an example of access to measured values
using CalypsoInterface. It is written in Visual Basic Script.
Set MyCalypso = CreateObject("CalypsoInterface.Calypso")
MyCalypso.HostName = "192.68.0.1"
MyCalypso.TimeOut = 10
If MyCalypso.ConnectCalypso <> 7 Then
err
= MyCalypso.ErrNo
errTxt = MyCalypso.ErrName
MsgBox( "No connection to Calypso")
MsgBox( err & " " & errTxt)
WScript.Quit[1]
End If
Set MyCalypso.Vector = MyCalypso.GetGeometry.ActualXYZ("PointTop")
If MyCalypso.ErrNo <> 0 Then
MsgBox("Error with: GetGeometry.ActualXYZ")
Else
X = MyCalypso.Vector.X
Y = MyCalypso.Vector.Y
Z = MyCalypso.Vector.Z
MsgBox ( "X-Actual Pos of PointTop :
" & X)
MsgBox ( "Y-Actual Pos of PointTop :
" & Y)
MsgBox ( "Z-Actual Pos of PointTop :
" & Z)
End If
X = MyCalypso.GetGeometry.Radius("CylFroCe")
MsgBox("Error: GetGeometry.Radius")
Else
MsgBox ( "Nominal Radius of CylFroCe :
End If
" & X)
X = MyCalypso.GetGeometry.ActualRadius("CylFroCe")
MsgBox("Error: GetGeometry.ActualRadius")
Else
MsgBox ( "Actual Radius of CylFroCe :
" & X)
End If
If MyCalypso.CloseCalypso = 0 Then
MsgBox( "Connection closed")
Else
MsgBox ( "Could not close the connection to Calypso")
End If
WScript.Quit[1]
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-61
Converting measuring results for qs-STAT

You can evaluate measuring results that have been saved by Calypso
in the QDAS format in the qs-STAT statistics program.
NOTE
hss
function.
Calypso supports the catalog structure of qs-STAT.
Important
Sub-catalogs are not supported.
hss
How to convert into QDAS

Calypso automatically produces a results file after a CNC run.
CNC run
of CALYP S O measurement
plan with activated
QDAS output
QDASCONV.CON
Configuration file
CALYPSO Results file
CNC-E nd
QDASCONV.EXE
Conversion file for file
exchange format
QDAS Description file

(*.DFD)
QDAS Value file

(*.DFX)
Statistics software
qs-STAT
If conversion to QDAS has been activated, the QDASCONV.EXE

conversion program converts this results file into a QDAS description
file and a QDAS values file.
The conversion program uses the file structures defined in the
configuration file QDASCONV.CON.
9-62
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
NOTE
hss
QDAS description file

The name of the description file consists of the first 8 characters of
the measurement plan and the extension *.DFD.
The description file contains data particular to the part and
characteristics that describes the workpiece and the separate features.
The contents of this data can be taken from the printout header, the
printout or the configuration file.
Every time QDASCONV.EXE is called, a check is run to ascertain
whether or not the description file already exists. If it does not exist, it
is created and thereafter remains valid for all subsequent
measurements.
In the data acquisition module of the qs-STAT statistics program, you
can perform changes, such as adding features or entering information
that was not known at the time of the measurement. If you give the
Calypso computer a modified description file, the QDASCONV.EXE
conversion program recognizes the changes (e.g. new features) and
takes them into account for the next conversion.
Key structure
The description data in the DFD file starts with a 4-character key that
indicates the data type in the file.
0 ... 999
Description of the value formats
1000 ... 1999
Part data
2000 ... 2999
Characteristic data
3000 ... 3999
Measurement plan data
Example: K1001 Engine block

Where:
K = Key
1001 = Part number
Engine block = Information content
QDAS values file

The name of the values file consists of the first 8 characters of the
measurement plan and the extension *.DFX.
The actual measurements, the identification for the validity of the
dimensions and the date saved are saved in the value file.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-63
During the first run, all characteristics should be sent to qs-STAT, so

that a complete data model can be created in qs-STAT. If only certain
selected elements are sent to qs-STAT later, the data model is
updated; all elements which are not measured stay at counter status
1.
NOTE
hss
If only part of the measurement plan is sent to qs-STAT during the first
run, but all characteristics are then sent as a later run, the data model
created earlier is not updated.
Additional data, such as batch number, operator, and machine
number can be added to any run in additional data records as
necessary.
The sequence of the characteristics in a file is determined by the
measurement sequence. If characteristics are missing due to focusing
of the CNC run, the measurement value is set to zero and the
dimension is labeled as invalid.
Configuration file QDASCONV.CON

The QDASCONV.CON conversion file controls the conversion of the
Calypso measuring results into the QDAS format.
QDASCONV.EXE needs the data from this file for the conversion.
QDASCONV.CON must be located in the ...\calypso\home\om
directory.
You can modify QDASCONV.CON to influence the conversion (see
Controlling the conversion with QDASCONV.CON on page 9-65).
How to save Calypso measuring results in

QDAS format
To save the Calypso measuring results in QDAS format:
1 Make sure that QDASCONV is installed.
The QDASCONV.EXE program is located in the
...\calypso\opt\om\bin\winnt directory.
2 Save the results as described in Saving measuring results to
files on page 9-45. Set the QDAS option to On (Save without
query) or Select at CNC Start (Save with query).
NOTE
hss
9-64
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
After execution of a CNC run, the measuring results will be saved as

the description file (*.dfd) and the value file (*.dfx) in the directory
...\calypso\home\om\workarea\qdas and under the name of the
corresponding measurement plan.
Controlling the conversion with

QDASCONV.CON
To control the conversion of the Calypso measuring results into the
QDAS format, you just need to adapt the QDASCONV.CON
configuration file.
Line format of the
QDASCONV.CON
configuration file
Every relevant line of the configuration file has the following line
format:
KXXXX LLL T H:<Name>
The wildcards have the following meanings:

K
Key
XXXX: 4-character key for

indication of type of contents
LLL
Length of field
1 ... 255
Type of data
A = Alphanumeric
I = Number
F = Floating point number
D = Date
H:<Name>
Origin and field

name
P = Key word from the header file,

Example: P:planid
W = directly from this file;
Example: W:Prismo7
Spaces and tabs are used as separators.

Spaces at the beginning are not allowed.
Comments begin with #.
Sections of the QDASCONV.CON configuration file

The file is divided into four sections, which are labeled with the letters
B, C, D and E.
Each section is opened with a separator, for example:
$C------------------------------------
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-65
Sections B, C and D contain the keys (including definition) to be

requested from the customer which are necessary for the description
file and the value file, as well as a description of how the data fields
are to be filled. The values defined here are valid for all workpieces.
You can, however, individually adapt the QDAS information part in
the custom printout for every workpiece.
Section E defines the extra data fields to be created in the values file.
Section B: Parts data to
be created
In this section of the configuration file, all part information which is to

be requested from the customer is specified here with key, length and
type and, in some cases, contents.
Frequently used keys and their labels for parts data:
K1001
Part number
K1002
Part label
K1003
Part short label
K1004
Part modification status
K1005
Product
K1007
Part number short label
K1040
Drawing catalog
K1041
Drawing number text
K1042
Drawing change
K1043
Drawing index
K1900
Remarks
You do not necessarily need to use the keys listed here. You can add
new keys at any time.
Section C: Constant
feature data to be
created
Some of the specifications needed to describe features are not known

by the user or machine, and are not contained in the measurement
protocol.
Some of this data has the same values for all features. This data is
therefore defined as constant feature data in this section of the
configuration file.
9-66
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Frequently used keys and their labels for constant feature data:
K2004
Type of feature
K2005
Feature class
K2007
Type of control
K2211
Type of distribution
K2212
Normal number text: Comparison normal
K2213
Normal label
K2214
Normal temperature
K2215
Normal number
K2220
Number of tester
K2221
Number of measurements
K2303
Section/Bookkeeping
K2305
Machine number
K2306
Area in plant
K2307
PTM number
K2342
Measurement plan name
K2343
Measurement plan creation date
K2344
Measurement plan creator
K2401
Test equipment number text
K2402
Test equipment label
K2404
Test equipment resolution
K2405
Test equipment number
K2406
Test equipment manufacturer
K2407
SPC device number
K2408
SPC device label
K2409
SPC device type
K2410
Test location
You do not necessarily have to insert values for these keys in the
configuration file, because you can enter them in the data module of
the qs-STAT statistics program.
Section D: Variable
feature data to be
created
NOTE
Some of the feature data can be taken directly from the measurement
protocol. Values for this data do not have to be entered in this section
of the configuration file.
Do not change data in section D.
hss
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-67
Frequently used keys and their labels for variable feature data:
Section E: Additional
data fields to be
produced
K2001
Feature number
K2002
Feature label (additional text from configuration file)
K2003
Label short text (Calypso feature type)
K2100
Nominal value/Target value
K2101
Nominal value
K2110
Lower limit
K2111
Upper limit
K2112
Lower deviation
K2113
Upper deviation
K2120
Type of lower limit
K2121
Type of upper limit
K2142
Unit label
K2151
Tolerance as text (tolerance width)
For every measurement, additional data can be saved in the value file.
This data is valid only for the corresponding measuring run.
Keys and their labels for additional data fields
K0005
Events
K0006
Lot number/Identification number
K0007
Nest number/Spindle number
K0008
Tester (number from catalog)
K0009
Text
K0010
Machine number (number from catalog)
These values can change with each measuring run. It is therefore

useful to use the columns from the printout.
The keys in this section affect only the first measuring run. They
should be evaluated only if they are valid for all measurements, for
example if all workpieces come from a certain machine.
To save all corresponding data with the measurement run, these keys
can also be listed in the QDAS information section of the
measurement protocol.
9-68
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Example of a QDAS configuration file
##############################################################################
# File: QDASCONV.CON
# Configuration file for QDASCONV.EXE
##############################################################################
$B---------------------------------------------------------------------------##############################################################################
# Section B: Parts data to be created (K1000 - K1099)
# (see also QDAS data formats)
# All customer-required data must be specified here
# CALYPSO: The data is taken from the header file
#----------------------------------------------------------------------------K1001 30 A P:planid
K1002 80 A P:partcomment
K1004 20 A P:partrv
K1007 20 A P:partsn
K1041 30 A P:drawingno
K1053 20 A P:order
K1081 20 A P:mfgdev
K1086 20 A P:tooldf
K1101 40 A P:vda_departm
K1201 20 A P:dmesn
K1202 40 A P:dmeid
K1900 255 A P:startcomment
$C---------------------------------------------------------------------------##############################################################################
# Section C: Feature data to be created that is the same for all features
# All customer-required data must be specified here, the format is
# the same as in section $B
# CAUTION: Values from the characteristic file are not allowed here.
#----------------------------------------------------------------------------K2004 1 I W:0
K2005 1 I W:3
K2007 1 I
K2011 4 I
K2013 22 F W:0.0001
K2022 1 I W:4
K2142 40 A W:mm
K2301 20 A P:mfgdev
K2302 40 A P:mfgdev
K2342 40 A P:planid
K2343 20 D P:creationdate
K2344 20 A P:produceoper
K2401 40 A P:dmesn
K2402 80 A P:dmeid
K2406 40 A W:Carl Zeiss Oberkochen
K8500 5 I W:3
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
9-69
$D---------------------------------------------------------------------------##############################################################################
# Section D: Feature data to be created that is specific for all features
# No value identifications are defined, the values are taken from the
# characteristic file.
# If no source is given, the values will be calculated.
##############################################################################
K2001 20 A C:
K2002 80 A C:id
K2003 20 A C:type
K2100 22 F
K2101 22 F C:nominal
K2110 22 F C:lowertol
K2111 22 F C:uppertol
K2112 22 F C:lowertol
K2113 22 F C:uppertol
K2120 1 I
K2121 1 I
K2130 22 F
K2131 22 F
K2141 5 I
K2151 20 A
K2213 22 F C:actual
$E---------------------------------------------------------------------------##############################################################################
# Section E: Additional data fields to be created in the values file
##############################################################################
#K0001 22 F C:actual
#K0006 14 A P:lotid
#K0007 5 I P:tooldf
#K0008 5 I P:operid
#K0009 40 A P:startcomment
9-70
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Chapter
10
Duplex mode
.................................................................................................................................
Very large workpieces can be measured using CMMs with two

measuring columns (duplex CMMs) to obtain almost twice the usable
measuring volume offered by a CMM with only one column.
Each of the two columns measures, but computations and
evaluations take place on only one of the two computers.
Calypso enables you to prepare, perform and evaluate duplex
measurements of this nature. Note that to do so, you must have
Calypso running on both computers.
The sections included in this chapter explain the basics of working
with duplex CMMs, and step you through the procedures involved.

Duplex mode with Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Preparing for duplex mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Using duplex mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
10- 1
Duplex mode
Duplex mode with Calypso

Very large workpieces can be measured using CMMs with two
measuring columns to obtain almost twice the usable measuring
volume offered by a CMM with only one column.
Each of the measuring columns is connected to a computer for
correction and evaluation of the measurements; one of these
computers is the master, the other is the client.
Calypso enables you to prepare, perform and evaluate duplex mode.

Note that to do so, you must have Calypso running on both
computers.
Run mode
There are two different types of duplex mode run control:

Synchronous mode
The measurement plan runs on the master. The master controls
both measuring columns, with only one moving at any time. The
client is only a conveyor of commands and results.
Asynchronous mode
The measurement plan runs on both computers. The measuring
columns move relatively independently of each other, controlled by
the relevant computer. However, if data from the other measuring
column is required for calculating a specific feature, the measuring
column will wait until this data has been provided by the other
measuring column.
10-2
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Duplex mode with Calypso
The sections included in this chapter explain the basics of working in

duplex mode, and step you through the procedures involved:
You have to prepare duplex mode in order to take measurements
with two measuring columns. In particular, Calypso must know
how the two measuring ranges, originally independent, relate to
each other (see Preparing for duplex mode on page 10-4).
Important when measuring in any given run: log on, measure, log
off (see Measuring with a duplex CMM on page 10-15).
NOTE
hss
In the same way as in duplex mode, you can also control more than
two measuring columns in multiplex mode. In this way, you can
increase the measuring range again and you can save additional
measuring time in asynchronous mode. The procedure is principally
the same as in duplex mode; you have a master and several
clients.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
10-3
Duplex mode
Preparing for duplex mode

The preconditions for duplex mode are as follows:
The files for duplex mode are available and correct
Both computers are connected via the network
Both measuring ranges are coupled
Files for duplex mode

Some Windows NT system files have to be configured for duplex
operation. These files are pre-configured on both computers of a
system designed for duplex operation.
The files are in the ...\winnt\system32\drivers\etc directory and are
called services and hosts. The lines required for duplex mode are
listed here just in case the system files are modified in some way.
services file
Examples of entries in the services" file:

qmaster
czcol1
czoemint
acis
counter
holos
ZVICONTROL
col0
col1
col2
col3
oscssd
10012/udp
9996/tcp
9999/tcp
9998/tcp
9888/tcp
4959/tcp
8888/tcp
9800/tcp
9801/tcp
9802/tcp
9803/tcp
5019/tcp
# Double Column CNC
# CADLINK-UX
# CALYPSO
# Double Column MAN
# Column1
# Column2
# Column3
# VERSANT connect service
It is important to make sure that the czcol1 line is in the file.
10-4
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
hosts file
Entries in the hosts file (example):

####################################################
#
#
SubNet 192.4.1
Testroom
#
#
192.4.1.65
cnc1
CNC1
# Master
192.4.1.66
cnc2
CNC2
# Client
#
192.4.1.55
dynalog1 # computer1 -> Master
192.4.1.56
dynalog2 # computer2 -> Client
#
192.4.1.200
cmm_1 CMM_1 # controller1 -> Master
192.4.1.201
cmm_2 CMM_2 # controller2 -> Client
192.4.1.202
cmm_3 CMM_3 # controller3
192.4.1.203
cmm_4 CMM_4 # controller4
#
####################################################
In this example cnc1 CNC1 is the name of the master PC.
dynalog1 is the name of the control console connected to the master
CMM.
cmm_1 CMM_1 is the name of the master CMM's controller.
Establishing the connection and coupling

the measuring ranges
The two measuring ranges have to be coupled so that Calypso can
combine the results from both. Reference probings have to be taken
at one or three reference spheres in the zone that is common to both
measuring ranges, so that the two can be coupled.
The results are combined in calculation and yield the basis for
common measurements and evaluations for the two measuring
columns.
A coupling matrix is computed on the master and sent to the client,
and the client uses the matrix to convert its measured coordinates into
the coordinate system of the master CMM.
Selecting the method of coupling for duplex

operation
The reference spheres must be set up in such a way that they can be
reached and probed by both measuring columns.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
10-5
Duplex mode
Coupling methods
There are two possible methods:

Translational coupling
A reference sphere is positioned in the center of the common
zone.
Translational coupling involves computing the offset of the two
device zero points.
Translational and rotational coupling
Three reference spheres are arranged to form a triangle in space.
They should delimit the common zone of the measuring space
vertically and horizontally.
Translational and rotational coupling involves computing the
residual angle of the two device coordinate systems relative to
each other remaining despite alignment.
Calypso has a measurement plan for each method with which you
can proceed with coupling.
Stylus
Install the appropriate master stylus in each column for coupling. This
ensures maximum precision. You have the option of using some
other, qualified styli if less precision is sufficient.
Subsequent coupling
Once the two measuring ranges have been coupled for the first time,
the relevant data is stored in Calypso and is evaluated for
measurements in duplex mode. The coupling has to be readjusted
under the following circumstances:
Reason for coupling
Method
Always after a mechanical alteration
Translational + rotational
From time to time in operation

(e.g. once a week if use is frequent)
Translational + rotational
Every time the system is restarted
Translational
Every time a measuring column homes
Translational
How to prepare coupling for duplex operation

A number of preconditions have to be satisfied before you can
proceed with coupling the measuring ranges.
The preparations are as follows:
1 On each computer, select Extras Workroom CMM and
open the notebook to the Dual Arm page.
This page is available only if the machine is defined as a horizontalarm CMM.
10-6
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2 On the designated master computer, select the Master option.
3 Enter the requisite information for coupling the systems:

Under Columns: enter the number of columns (in duplex mode
usually 2).
The port number is taken from the services file in the
..\winnt\system32\drivers\etc directory.
The measuring columns are correlated to the computers on the
basis of the computer names in the hosts file, in this case, for
example, cnc1.
You can overwrite the defaults, listed here by way of illustration:
Master
Client
Arm 1 = Column1
Arm 2 = Column2
Controller 1 = CMM_1
Controller 2 = CMM_2
Computer 1 = CMMWS_1 = local Computer 2 = CMMWS_2

PC
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
10-7
Duplex mode
4 Select Client as the option for the other computer.
5 Enter the requisite information for coupling the systems on this

computer:
The port number is taken from the services file in the
..\winnt\system32\drivers\etc directory.
Correlation is on the basis of the computer names in the
hosts file, in this case, for example, cnc2.
It is advisable to check the connection before coupling the
measuring ranges.
10-8
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6 On the client, click on the Interface button.

The Interface page appears on screen. The page shown here is
the Interface page on the master:
7 Check the settings for the connection:

Address for controller on client: cmm_2,4712
Address for control console on client: cmm_2,4712
Note the comma after the digits.
IP address of controller on client: IP address found:
192.4.1.201
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
10-9
Duplex mode
8 If you wish to control the columns in asynchronous operation: On

the client computer, select Extras Workroom Environment
and open the notebook to the Dual Arm page.
9 In the first line, enter the path for the measurement plans on the
master PC and in the second line the path for the base alignments
on the master PC.
Enter the locally valid path designation under Directory path and,
under Mounted as... , enter the valid network designation under
which the client system can access the path.
10 Click on OK.
The notebook is closed and the settings are accepted.
How to set up the connection between the

computers
Once you have completed all preparations, you can set up the
connection between the computers.
Connection setup
NOTE
hss
10-10
1 Close Calypso, but do not close the taskbar and the Stoplight
window.
The connection is set up in the Stoplight window only.
Always proceed exactly as described below, otherwise the connection
will not be successful.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2 In the Stoplight window on the client computer, select View

Multi Arm and click on the Initialize... button.
The Wait for Master... message is displayed on the client.
3 In the Stoplight window on the master computer, select View

Multi Arm.
4 Tick the Connected with Clients check box to establish the
connection to the client computer.
The prompt shown here is displayed:
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
10-11
Duplex mode
5 Do not click OK to confirm until the client reports that its status is
Wait for Master...:
When the connection is successfully established, the following

dialog box appears on the screen:
Important: Make sure that the Column1 entry is labeled in black

(not gray).
You can now proceed to redefine the connection or, if this has already
been done, you can start measuring.
How to check the measurement plans before

coupling the measuring ranges
Once you have set up the connection, the next step is to couple the
two measuring ranges. Calypso provides two measurement plans for
this purpose:
The col2_trans" plan for exclusively translational coupling,
The col2_rotate" plan for rotational and translational coupling.
It is best to check the measurement plan before using it, if you are
unsure whether all the settings are correct.
The procedure is as follows:
1 Select File Open and select the measurement plan for the
coupling you are going to use.
10-12
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2 Select Resources Measurement Plan Editor Features.

3 Make sure that the setting for Stylus is MasterStylus (or the
qualified stylus you are going to use) for all features.
4 Make sure that the setting for Man CNC Mode is MAN for all
features.
5 Make sure that the entry under Columns is column 2 for all
features that will be measured with column 2.
6 In the list of characteristics, open the 3-D Best Fit1 characteristic.
The Definition template (alternative alignment methods)
window will open.
7 Make certain that the Column2 (arm ID slave) entry is set under
Receiver.
How to define the coupling

When you are satisfied that all settings in the measurement plan
(stylus, base alignment, MAN or CNC, name of the second measuring
column, etc.) are correct, you can run the measurement plan for the
coupling.
1 Open Calypso on the master computer.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
10-13
Duplex mode
2 In the Stoplight window, click on the Define Coupling button and

select Translate or Translate and Rotate.
3 In response to the prompt, manually probe six points in succession
on a sphere using measuring column 1 (the master).
The number of the point to be probed appears in the dialog box
under Next Probing Point.
4 In response to the prompt, manually probe six points in succession
on the same sphere, this time using measuring column 2 (the
client).
If you selected translational and rotational coupling, you must
repeat this procedure at two more positions on the measuring
plate.
5 In response to the prompts, probe sphere 2 and sphere 3 in
succession, first with measuring column 1 (master) and then with
measuring column 2 (client).
When measurement is completed, the master sends its computed
coupling matrix to the client.
The client uses the coupling matrix to convert its measured points into
the coordinate system of the master before sending this information
back to the master.
As soon as this process is completed, you can start measuring in
duplex mode. Alternatively, you can clear down the connection
between the two computers and set it up again later when
measurements are to be made.
How to reset the coupling

Coupling corrects the coupling matrix on the client, but the matrix is
not entirely rebuilt.
If you want to delete the coupling matrix on the client in order to
rebuild it from scratch, proceed as follows:
1 In the Stoplight window, go to Multi Arm and click on the
Special button.
2 Click on the Reset connection data button that now appears.
The matrix is deleted. You have to redefine coupling before you
can use duplex mode again.
10-14
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Using duplex mode
Using duplex mode

It is very important to bear the following points in mind when you
measure in duplex mode:
Each feature can be measured with only one measuring column.
This means that large holes, for example, have to be interlinked by
means of individual points. (Each feature is assigned to exactly one
measuring column).
Unless otherwise defined in the Strategy dialog box, the master
(measuring column 1) is generally used for measuring a feature.
Note the geometry of the features. When you assign features,
remember to make sure that measurement must be collision-free,
and that this applies to both measuring columns.
Measurements in the common measuring range of the two arms
merit special care and attention. Make sure that there is no risk of
an arm colliding with the other arm as it retracts or moves to an
intermediate position.
Asynchronous mode
We recommend the following general procedure for measuring in

asynchronous operation:
Set up the measurement plan for asynchronous operation.
First test the measurement plan in synchronous mode
(Measurement Plan Editor Features: set Duplex run mode to
Synchronous).
Only then test the measurement plan in asynchronous mode
(Measurement Plan Editor Features: Duplex run mode set to
asynchronous).
Measuring with a duplex CMM

The procedure for measuring in duplex mode consists of log-on,
measuring, and log-off phases.
You do not have to log on if you have just finished coupling the
measuring ranges; the two measuring columns are already coupled.
You can skip to Measuring in duplex mode on page 10-16. In all
other circumstances, you have to start by setting up the connection.
The log-on phase is described in detail inHow to set up the
connection between the computers on page 10-10.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
10-15
Duplex mode
Measuring in duplex mode

The recommended procedure for measuring in duplex mode consists
in successively constructing the measurement plan by manual
probings and generating features, before starting the measurement
plan in CNC mode.
The measurement can also be constructed offline using empirical
values, but this requires specialist knowledge and experience.
It is, therefore, best to proceed by working on the master computer as
if you were measuring with a single-arm CMM, while bearing the
following additional points in mind:
Each feature can be measured with only one of the two measuring
columns.
The point and the position know" where they come from;
probing the first point or the first position defines the measuring
column to which the feature belongs.
You can view this information in the Measurement Plan Editor
Features under Columns (default or column1 means master;
column2 means client).
Clearance planes: The measuring column flagged as active by
the stop light is the arm that executes the go to clearance plane
movement.
Important risk of collision

Do not forget the intermediate positions, as otherwise there would be
a risk of collision.
Important
If you are preparing a measurement plan for asynchronous operation,
you must make absolutely sure that the measuring columns cannot
collide under any circumstances. That is to say, the areas in which the
measuring columns move must never overlap.
As long as the areas of movement overlap, the possibility of a collision
cannot be excluded, because the measuring columns move
independently of each other in asynchronous mode.
hss
hss
Please check the following functions and settings in particular

using the Measurement Plan Editor Features:
Columns
Stylus System
Stylus
Clearance Group
RDS angles
10-16
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Using duplex mode
If you are measuring in asynchronous mode, you have to save the

measurement plan after every alteration. Otherwise the client will
not be able to read the current alterations.
How to start the duplex mode

After you have completed all the preparations and you have
connected the two computers together, you can start the duplex
mode.
To start duplex mode:
1 Select Plan CNC-Start CNC-Start.
2 If you want to work in asynchronous mode: Under Order of Run,
select the mode From Feature List.
If you select From Characteristic List, the CMM will proceed as in
synchronous mode.
A warning message will appear, which you must confirm.
The run begins.
How to clear down the coupling for duplex

operation
Clear down the connection between master and client when
you have finished measuring.
The procedure for logging off and terminating the duplex mode is as
follows:
1 On the master computer, deactivate the Connected with
Clients check box.
2 On the client computer, deactivate the Connected to the Master
check box.
This clears down the connection.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
10-17
Duplex mode
10-18
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Chapter
11
Managing Calypso
.................................................................................................................................
This chapter is intended primarily for system administrators (e.g. the

Master user) or experienced users, who are authorized to change the
Calypso system settings.
This chapter explains how to check and, if necessary, change system
settings. This includes, for example, defining users or initialization of
the CMM.

Installing Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Installing a Service Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
If a software error occurs the error report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Modifying the system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
11- 1
Managing Calypso
Installing Calypso
Calypso is automatically installed on your computer when you receive
the system. However, the installation instructions are included here in
case you need to reinstall the software for any reason.
The installation requires:
the Calypso software CD
the CMM floppy disk
System requirements
To guarantee the error-free running of Calypso, your system must at
least fulfill the following requirements:
Hardware requirements
Windows-compatible Siemens, Compaq, Hewlett-Packard or DELL PC

with
2.5-GB hard drive
CD-ROM drive
17 SVGA monitor
3.5" floppy drive
LAN card
Mouse
Keyboard
Performance
parameters
Minimum requirements:
Pentium IV processor with 1.7 GHz clock frequency
256 MB RAM
32 MB OPEN-GL-compatible display board
Recommended configuration:
512 MB RAM
Recommended configuration for CAD applications:
1 GB RAM
Software requirements
The PC must run one of the following operating systems:

Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
11-2
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Installing Calypso
Windows XP
System settings
If your system was configured by Zeiss service personnel, you will not
have to modify the settings. If this was not the case, click on Start
Settings Control Panel and select Display and set True Color
under Colors on the Settings tab.
How to install Calypso

NOTE
hss
Before you can install or uninstall Calypso, you must have

administrator rights.
Uninstalling existing
version
If you already have an older version of Calypso installed on your

computer, run the uninstall program before you install a new version.
NOTE
hss
Existing data such as measurement plans, stylus data, base alignments

or other CMM-specific data will not be deleted during the
uninstallation process. It is, however, recommended, that a backup
copy of the existing Calypso directory be made using Windows
Explorer.
Follow these steps to uninstall Calypso:
Windows will start automatically.
2 Select Start Settings Control Panel in the Windows Start
menu and click on Software.
3 Select the Calypso program on the Install/Uninstall tab, click
on Add/Remove and follow the instructions on the screen.
4 In the Program Administration dialog box, select the Remove
Program option and click on Continue.
5 In the next window, click on Remove.
Uninstallation will be effected automatically. The current status will
be displayed.
6 Confirm completion of uninstallation with Finish.
7 Confirm the computer restart message with Yes.
Your computer will be restarted. Calypso has now been uninstalled.
Installing a current or
new version
Once you have removed an existing version of Calypso, you will be

able to install the current version.
Follow these steps to install the software:
Windows will start automatically.
2 Insert the CMM System Disk into the floppy disk drive.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
11-3
Managing Calypso
NOTE
The write protect on the floppy must be off.

You can also copy the CMM floppy disk to a directory on the hard
disk and specify this directory later.
hss
3 Place the Calypso software CD in the CD-ROM disk drive.

If the CD starts automatically, the Calypso installation window will
appear immediately. Skip to step 7.
4 If this is not the case, select the Windows command Start Run.
At the prompt for a file name to run.
5 Click on Browse, select the CD drive and, on this CD, the
Calypso.exe file.
6 Click on Open and then click on OK.
After a few moments, the Calypso installation window will appear.
7 Select the language for the installation and click on Continue.
8 Click on the Install button and then on Calypso.
The installation program checks if there is enough space on the
hard drive of your computer and prompts you to insert the CMM
floppy disk.
9 Click on Yes if the floppy disk is inserted. Otherwise, select the
path for the CMM floppy disk in the next window and click on OK.
A Welcome screen appears.
10 Click on Proceed to accept the copyright agreement and
continue.
The User Information window will open.
11 Enter the user information and click on Proceed.
The Setup Type window will appear on the screen.
12 Select Standard if you do not wish to alter any of the presettings
and then click Proceed.
- or Select Changed and click on Proceed if you wish to change the
following settings in the windows that follow:
Drives and target directories for installation
Features to be installed
NOTE
hss
The settings as you define them in this step are subsequently

proposed as the defaults for the next Standard installation.
After a short time the system indicates that it is Ready to install
the program.
11-4
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Installing Calypso
13 Click on Install.
Calypso will now be installed automatically. The current status will
be displayed. Afterwards, the message InstallShield Wizard
completed will be displayed.
14 Click on Finish.
15 Confirm the restart message with Yes and remove the floppy disk
from the drive.
Your computer will now be restarted. Calypso has now been correctly
installed.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
11-5
Managing Calypso
Installing a Service Pack

From time to time, you may receive program modifications and
additions as Service Packs. Service Packs can arrive by e-mail, on
floppy disk or on CD-ROM. The following instructions assume that
you have received the Service Pack on floppy disk. Broadly speaking,
though, the procedure is the same for all distribution media.
The name of the service pack file contains information relating to the
corresponding program version. zeiss_sp3412.exe, for example, is
Service Pack 12 for Version 3.4 of the program.
Installation consists of two steps:
Unzipping the files of the Service Pack
Installing the files of the Service Pack
How to decompress the Service Pack files

The program files on the shipping medium are compressed to take up
as little storage space as possible. You have to unzip the files before
you can install them.
1 Boot your computer if you have not already done so.
2 Insert the Service Pack disk into the floppy disk drive.
3 Open Windows Explorer:
Point to Start and click on Programs.
Click on Windows Explorer.
Delete the contents of C:\TEMP.
4 Click on the 3 1/2" floppy disk drive (A:).
11-6
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Installing a Service Pack
5 Double-click on the file called calypso_spxxxx.exe.
1. Drive A: :
2. Double-click on the file name
This opens the WinZip Self-Extractor window.
The default folder is C:\TEMP.

6 Click on Unzip.
The files are unzipped. A message appears on the screen when all
files have been unzipped.
7 Click on OK to acknowledge this message and click on the Close
button in the WinZip Self-Extractor dialog box.
The program files are now in the C:\TEMP directory on your hard disk,
waiting to be installed (see How to install the program files
contained in the Service Pack on page 11-8).
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
11-7
Managing Calypso
How to install the program files contained in

the Service Pack
Once they have been unzipped, the files of the current Service Pack
will be on your hard disk (see How to decompress the Service Pack
files on page 11-6).
To install the program files:
1 In the Windows Start menu, select Start Programs Zeiss
Calypso Service Pack.
You are prompted to select a language for the installation routine.
2 Select the installation language and then click on OK.
The installation program now asks you to confirm the path for the
unzipped files. The default folder is C:\TEMP.
3 Click on OK if the unzipped files are located in C:\TEMP.
Should this not be the case, enter the correct path and then
click on OK.
When installation completes, the following prompt will appear on
the screen.
4 Click on OK to close the message box.

Calypso's system files will be updated the first time the program is
called after installation of the Service Pack. This may take some time.
You will then be asked to close and restart Calypso.
11-8
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
If a software error occurs the error report

Calypso is a program which undergoes continuous development. The
target of the development is to make Calypso better with every
revision. You can support this process by using the error report.
An error report can be generated automatically by Calypso, or you
can trigger the process manually (see How to use the error report
on page 11-10).
The generated error report contains at least the following data:
the type of device
the current Service Pack version
the system's error messages
A description of a situation (what was the lead-up to this error?),
which you will be required to enter.
The error report can be saved as a file and sent to Zeiss. If you wish,
you can also add the current measurement plan to this file which
makes analysis easier.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
11-9
Managing Calypso
How to use the error report

The automatic error report appears anytime Calypso runs into an
internal program error.
To complete and send the error report:
1 Click on the Error Report button in the System Error window.
- or Select Extras Error Report.
The last error report is opened.

2 In the Comment field, please enter as precisely as possible the
circumstances which led to the error.
NOTE
hss
You must type in a comment before you can print or save the error
report.
3 In the Address area, select the appropriate address from the
Selection list.
4 Enter your name, address, phone and fax numbers, and your email address.
5 If you wish to forward the error report to Carl Zeiss by fax: Select
File Print and fax the error report to the number stated under
Address.
11-10
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6 If you wish to forward your error report to Carl Zeiss by e-mail and
also wish to forward the measurement plan: Select File Save.
You will be asked if you also wish to save the measurement plan as
some errors can only be analyzed with the help of the
measurement plan.
7 Confirm with Yes if customer support at Zeiss has requested that
you forward the measurement plan.
The error report will be compressed and saved (if necessary, with
all the data from the current measurement plan directory and from
the actual values directory) on your hard disk as a file called hotl
in the ..\calypso\var\opt\om\hotline directory.
8 Send this file by e-mail to the address stipulated under Address.
NOTE
hss
The other menu items under File are used for special service
purposes: Open can be used by Zeiss employees to unzip the
forwarded measurement plan. The Record geometric calculation
menu item should only be used when instructed to do so as this
triggers resource-intensive processes.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
11-11
Managing Calypso
Modifying the system settings

Click on Extras Workroom to open the menu for the system
setup. Each menu item in this menu (with the exception of Status
Monitor) opens a notebook together with a matching group of
settings:
User
Here, you can define new users and manage the existing users.
This notebook can only be processed by the Master user.
CMM
Here you can set up the configuration of the CMM (control type,
probe, control console, etc.) and the software drivers. You also
initialize the CMM here.
Status Monitor
You can view all important events which occurred during the
current measurement.
Environment
You can modify the user-specific settings (language of the user
desk and printouts/protocols, units of measure, font, start
conditions, colors of the Calypso windows).
Measurement
Here you can set the measuring parameters of the CMM (working
speed, clearance distance, retract distance, scanning parameters,
etc.).
Miscellaneous
You can view the CMM-OS copyright and version information.
When you open one of these menu items, you can check or modify
Calypsos system settings.
Most settings are valid globally, i.e. equally for all users. Exceptions
here are the settings for language, units of measure, font and color.
Each user who has logged in can select these specifically. The same, of
course, applies to the user settings (privileges).
You will find an overview of the settings in Settings you can view
or modify on page 11-12.
Settings you can view or modify

The following table lists all of the system settings you can modify in
Calypso: All the menu items listed in this table can be found under
Extras Workroom.
11-12
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
The instructions (column headed See) are in the corresponding

sections in the Online Help system.
Setting
Menu item
Tab
See
Retract Distance
Measurement
Travel
How to change the

measurement parameters of
the CMM
Beeping upon probing
CMM
Probe
How to change the CMM

configuration
Users logged in
User
Administration How to view or enter a user

description
Decimal precision
Environment
Language
How to change your

environment
Expansion coefficients of the

scales
CMM
Temperature

configuration
Automatic login at start
User
Administration How to activate automatic

login
Automatic feature predefinition Measurement
Features
How to change the

the CMM
Automatic feature end
Measurement
Features
How to change the

the CMM
Automatic opening of a
measurement plan at program
start
Environment
Start
How to change your

environment
Automatic path measurement
Measurement
Methods
How to change the

the CMM
Control console type
CMM
Panel

configuration
Add user
User
Administration How to add new users
Delete user
User
Administration How to delete a user
Rename user
User
Administration Renaming a user
User
User
Administration Basics about users
Copyright of Calypso
Miscellaneous
Copyright
How to view general

information about the
program version
Articulating probe
CMM
Probe

configuration
Rotary table
CMM
Rotary table

configuration
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
11-13
Managing Calypso
Setting
Menu item
Tab
Dynalog keys
Environment
Dynalog
How to change your

environment
Discrete-point measurement
Measurement
Methods
How to change the

the CMM
Window colors
Environment
Colors
How to change your

environment
Device administration
CMM
Administration How to change the CMM

configuration
Speed of CMM for positioning

and scanning
Measurement
Speed
How to change the

the CMM
Hardware and drivers
CMM
Control

configuration
Home directory (for storing user- User

specific settings)
Profile
How to check the home

directory
Initialization of the CMM
CMM
Control
How to initialize the CMM
Internal parameters of the

software installation
Miscellaneous
Internals
How to view general

information about the
program version
Coefficients (expansion) for

scales
CMM
Temperature

configuration
Machine type (CMM type)
CMM
Machine

configuration
Master in duplex operation
CMM
Duplex

configuration
Measure unit of length (mm or

Inch) (user interface)
Environment
Language
How to change your

environment
Measure unit of length (mm or

Inch) (printouts)
Environment
Language
How to change your

environment
Maximum diameter of probe
CMM
Probe

configuration
Measured points (for automatic

feature recognition)
Measurement
Features
How to change the

the CMM
Measuring range of CMM
CMM
Machine

configuration
Nominal mode
Measurement
Nominal value How to change the

the CMM
Reread (internals)
Miscellaneous
Internals
11-14
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
See
Setting
Menu item
Tab
Home position of the CMM
CMM
Machine

configuration
Path (directory) for actual values Environment
Paths
How to change your

environment
Path (directory) for

measurement plans
Environment
Paths
How to change your

environment
Path (directory) for table files
Environment
Paths
How to change your

environment
Computer allocation in duplex

operation
CMM
Duplex

configuration
Assigning privileges
User
Privileges
How to assign general user

privileges
Master stylus in sensor system
CMM
Master stylus

configuration
Rounding measure for preset

nominal value
Measurement
Nominal value How to change the

the CMM
Scanning speed
Measurement
Speed
How to change the

the CMM
Interface type and address
CMM
Interface

configuration
Font
Environment
Font
How to change your

environment
CMM serial number
CMM
Machine

configuration
Clearance distance
Measurement
Travel
How to change the

the CMM
Client in duplex operation
CMM
Duplex

configuration
Rounding to nominal value

(rounding dimension)
Measurement
Rounding to
nominal
How to change the

the CMM
Language (user interface)
Environment
Language
How to change your

environment
Language (printouts)
Environment
Language
How to change your

environment
Start conditions
Environment
Start
How to change your

environment
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
See
11-15
Managing Calypso
Setting
Menu item
Tab
Start procedure (automatic

login)
User
Administration How to activate automatic

login
Status log for system
Status monitor
How to view the system status

monitor
Control type (hardware and

drivers)
CMM
Control

configuration
Stylus system holders
CMM
Stylus system
change

configuration
CMM
Stylus system
change

configuration
Probe configuration
CMM
Probe

configuration
Diameter of probe
CMM
Probe

configuration
Temperature unit (Celsius or

Fahrenheit) (user interface)
Environment
Language
How to change your

environment
Temperature unit (Celsius or

Fahrenheit) (printouts)
Environment
Language
How to change your

environment
Positioning speed
Measurement
Speed
How to change the

the CMM
Assigning file with default name Environment
Default name
How to change your

environment
Angle unit (measure unit) (user

interface)
Environment
Language
How to change your

environment
Angle unit (measure unit)

(printout)
Environment
Language
How to change your

environment
11-16
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
See
Chapter
12
Auto-Run interface
.................................................................................................................................
As system administrator, you can use the Auto-Run function to

create and edit Auto-Run interfaces. In an Auto-Run interface, you
no longer work in a measurement plan but rather with measurement
plans as objects.
You combine the prepared measurement plans created with Calypso
and thus map typical measuring configurations and sequences.
An Auto-Run interface prepared in this way allows measurement
plans to be run automatically without the measurement plans
themselves having to be edited. Thus, even users who do not have
specialist knowledge of how to work with Calypso can run
measurement plans.

Basics about Auto-Run interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Working with Auto-Run. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Auto-Run for system administrators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
12- 1
Auto-Run interface
Basics about Auto-Run interfaces

Auto-Run interfaces are saved in files with the extension .arn. After
you call the Auto-Run function, you can open, edit and save these
Auto-Run interfaces.
Purpose of Auto-Run
On an Auto-Run interface, you no longer work with features and

characteristics but with complete measurement plans instead. You
thus map the desired measuring configurations and sequences.
For this purpose, you edit the Auto-Run interface you create desks,
place your icons for measurement plans and icons on the desk and
determine the scope and sequence of measurement. The CNC start
parameters are determined for each measurement plan.
Finally and this is the purpose of Auto-Run you can have the
measurement plans in the Auto-Run interface executed in a CNC run.
Important Auto-Run
terms
A certain number of new terms are encountered in the context of

Auto-Run interfaces. These terms are important for understanding the
functions of Auto-Run.
Auto-Run interface
In an Auto-Run interface, you no longer work in a measurement
plan but rather with measurement plans as objects. The
measurement plans are represented by measurement plan icons
(see Layout of the Auto-Run interface on page 12-3).
Desks
An Auto-Run interface can contain one or more hierarchically
linked desks. A desk can contain measurement plan icons and
pallets (see Basics about desks on page 12-3).
Measurement plan icon
A measurement plan icon is a symbol that represents a
measurement plan (see Basics about measurement plan icons
on page 12-4).
Pallet
You can space several workpieces over a defined grid on a pallet
and then measure them all at once (see Basics about pallets on
page 12-5).
Branch
A branch is a direct link between desks (see Basics about
branches on page 12-6). The hierarchical structure of the desks is
mapped by branches.
Keyword
Each icon (measurement plan or pallet) can have its own unique
keyword. Keywords allow a desired icon to be found quickly.
12-2
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Layout of the Auto-Run interface

The illustration below briefly describes the major features of the AutoRun interface.
Measurement plan icon and comments here
Toolbar
Buttons for controlling

measurements
Desks
Basics about desks

An Auto-Run interface can comprise more than one desk, and you
can switch from desk to desk. This allows you to map various
measuring configurations, workpieces or measurement plans within a
single Auto-Run interface.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
12-3
Auto-Run interface
You can structure your Auto-Run interface with the aid of desks. A
desk contains measurement plans and pallets that belong together. By
means of branches, you can change to different desks along a tree
structure.
Measurement plan icon
Pallet
Branch
You can thus recreate the following structure, for example:

Machine processing stage type workpiece.
On every level, you then create as many branches as there are levels
below it. By selecting the appropriate branch, you can quickly follow a
path to the desk with the measurement plan for the desired
workpiece.
Basics about measurement plan icons

There must be a measurement plan for each workpiece to be tested
with the Auto-Run interface. In order to map a workpiece on the
Auto-Run interface, add the associated measurement plan there.
12-4
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
On the Auto-Run interface, however, you see only an icon a symbol

labeled with the name of the measurement plan instead of the
entire measurement plan as such. You can set the size of the icon
yourself.
Several icons from the same measurement plan can be contained in
one desktop, distinguished, for example, by different start
parameters. Calypso then assigns a serial number in brackets to the
name of the measurement plan (e.g. test block1 (2)).
When you select a run in the CNC start parameters, the name of the
run is appended with a hyphen to the measurement plan name
(e.g. test block1 - test run).
Basics about pallets

You can also map pallets on an Auto-Run interface.
You can arrange several similar workpieces at regular intervals on a
pallet and then measure them all at once. The pallet is loaded into the
measuring range of the CMM as a complete unit for this purpose.
Two preconditions have to be met so that Calypso can determine the
positions of the workpieces on the pallet:
Calypso requires the position of the pallet. This means you have to
define a base coordinate system for the pallet and this, in turn,
means that each pallet requires its own measurement plan.
Calypso must be able to locate the individual workpieces on the
pallet with good accuracy. This involves dividing the pallet into
columns and rows, forming a grid in other words. The intersections
of columns and rows are the reference points for the position of
the workpieces. The illustration below, that shows a pallet from
above (Z direction), clarifies this relationship.
columns (X-division)
lines (Y-division)
Y
X
palette alignment
reference points on which

the parts are situated
You can define how the pallet is divided so you can map each
pallet in full.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
12-5
Auto-Run interface
NOTE
An irregular pattern is also possible via the LOS Position function.
hss
Basics about branches

A branch is a button that you can place on a desk in addition to the
measurement plan icons and pallets. If you have defined multiple
desks, a branch is a way of going from one desk directly to another
desk.
Application
This makes sense, for example, if you want to map the workpieces in
a tree structure. You can thus recreate the following structure, for
example: Machine processing stage type workpiece.
For this purpose, you create as many branches on each level as there
are levels below it. By selecting the appropriate branch, you can
quickly follow a path to the desk with the measurement plan for the
desired workpiece.
Basics about keywords

Each icon (measurement plan or pallet) can have its own unique
keyword. A keyword allows an icon to be found quickly in a complex,
extensive Auto-Run interface.
If all measurement plans and pallets have their own keywords, you
can also use the barcode reading technique to search for an icon.
12-6
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Working with Auto-Run

Your system administrator has already configured the Auto-Run
interface for you. This interface makes it much easier for you to run
measurement plans, since most of the work has already been done.
You can start measuring right away in most cases.
You will find basic information about the Auto-Run interfaces under
Basics about Auto-Run interfaces on page 12-2.
Your user privileges

The system administrator who configured the Auto-Run interface for
you will be able to tell you what tasks you have to perform before or
during measurement.
The scope of tasks you have to perform depends on the privileges
(and obligations) your system administrator has assigned you.
At some point during your work with the Auto-Run interface, you
might encounter the message shown below:
It appears when you have attempted to execute a command for

which you do not possess access privileges. Consult your system
administrator if the command in question is one you urgently require.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
12-7
Auto-Run interface
Preparing a measurement start for Auto-Run

The illustration below shows what could be a typical Auto-Run
interface.
Prerequisites
The preconditions that have to be satisfied before you can start a

measurement are as follows:
Your Auto-Run interface must be loaded (see How to load an
Auto-Run interface on page 12-9).
The correct desk must be selected (see How to select a
measuring configuration on page 12-10).
The correct measurement plan must have been found and marked
beforehand.
The scope of measurement must be defined (see How to define
scope and sequence in Auto-Run on page 12-10).
These preconditions must be satisfied before measurement can be
started.
12-8
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to load an Auto-Run interface

Each Auto-Run interface is stored in a separate file. You have to load
your Auto-Run interface before you can start measuring. Your
system administrator will tell you which interface is yours.
To load an interface:
1 Check the name of the current interface.
The name is at the bottom left in the status bar.
2 Click on the Open button.
If changes were made and not saved in the current Auto-Run
interface, Calypso will display the following query:
3 If the name of the currently open interface is noname.arn, click

on Open.
4 If a name other than noname.arn appears in the status bar:
Click on Save and Open.
Save the original interface. Consult your system administrator if
you encounter difficulties with saving.
The original interface is saved and the File Open dialog box
5 Highlight the name of the desired interface and click on Open.
The selected Auto-Run interface is loaded.
How to find the measurement plan using a keyword

The measurement plan for your workpiece is represented by an icon
in the Auto-Run interface.
If the system administrator has assigned keywords to all icons and you
know the list of keywords, you can quickly find the necessary icon in
the Auto-Run interface.
NOTE
hss
If you possess the necessary equipment, you can also scan the
required keyword using a barcode reader.
To find an icon via a keyword:
1 Make sure that your Auto-Run interface is loaded.
2 Check whether the workpiece to be measured is at the correct
position on the CMM.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
12-9
Auto-Run interface
3 Select Tools Looking for icons.

The Looking for icons dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Enter the keyword for the desired icon

- or If you have the appropriate equipment: scan the keyword with a
barcode reader.
5 Confirm with the Enter key or by clicking on Search.
The icon with the keyword is searched in all desks. If the icon is
found, the desk is changed if necessary and the icon is highlighted.
The name of the highlighted icon is displayed behind the text
Selected icons: in the search window. If no icon is found with
the entered keyword, the text (Nothing) will be displayed in red.
How to select a measuring configuration

Your Auto-Run interface might consist of several desks. Each desk
displays a different configuration of workpieces to be measured.
If no keywords were assigned to the icons in your Auto-Run interface,
you will have to find the correct icon manually. To do this, you must
first find the correct desk.
To select a desk:
1 Make sure that your Auto-Run interface is loaded.
2 Check whether the workpiece to be measured is at the correct
position on the CMM.
3 Check the current desk and its icons. If you need a different
measuring configuration, click on the arrow buttons in the toolbar
until you have found the configuration.
The name of the desk is displayed in the selection box beside the
arrow buttons.
Once you have selected the appropriate desk, the next step is to select
the workpieces to be measured.
How to define scope and sequence in Auto-Run

You can also add several measurement plans or pallets to a desk. This
allows you to measure several workpieces one after the other if they
are already on the CMM table.
12-10
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
You have to define which workpieces of a desk will be measured in a

CNC run.
To select workpieces for measurement:
1 Make sure that you have selected the correct desk.
2 While holding down the Ctrl key, click on the icon of each
measurement plan (or each pallet) to be run.
A narrow black border appears around each icon you select. The
Start button is activated.
After the start of the CNC run, the marked icons will be executed in
the order in which you marked them.
To check or change the order:
1 Select Measurement Sequence or click on the Define
Sequence icon in the toolbar.
The Define Sequence dialog box with the currently valid
sequence of processing appears.
2 Mark the line to be moved and click on the arrow buttons to move
the line to the desired position.
3 As soon as you are satisfied with the changed sequence, confirm
with OK.
See How to start a measurement in Auto-Run on page 12-11 for
instructions on starting a CNC run.
Starting a measurement in Auto-Run

You can start the measurement once you have selected the desired
measuring configuration and defined the scope and sequence for
processing the measurement plans.
How to start a measurement in Auto-Run

To start a measurement:
1 Click on the Run button.
A green border appears around the selected icons of the
measurement plans. Calypso begins by checking the CNC
parameters.
Calypso starts measuring. Two windows are opened: the Stoplight
window and the default printout.
Once a CNC run has been started, the message Measurement plan
xyz running appears in the status bar.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
12-11
Auto-Run interface
If measurement fails to start in Auto-Run

An error message is issued if a measurement does not start in AutoRun.
If you have privileges to enter CNC parameters, define the CNC
parameter settings (see How to define CNC parameters on
page 12-32). Then restart the measurement.
If you do not have privileges to define CNC parameters, notify your
system administrator.
Entering printout header parameters

If the Force Input at Start setting was activated via Resources
Report Header Parameters in the measurement plan in Calypso,
you are prompted to enter the values for the printout header data
after the measurement plan has been started.
The Input Parameter window will open. Enter the desired values to
be displayed in the printout.
If you run several measurement plans one after the other, you can
enter the printout header parameters for all started measurement
plans for which the forced input upon CNC start was activated. This
saves you from entering the parameters at the end of one and prior to
the start of the next measurement plan.
Use the Continue> and < Back buttons to page in the Input
Parameter window through the input pages for all concerned
measurement plans and make your settings. On the last page, the
description changes to OK, and you can start processing of the
marked icons.
12-12
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
After clicking on Cancel and confirmation of a query, the CNC run for
all marked icons is started. All entries confirmed with Continue > will
be accepted. For all other measurement plans, the available printout
header parameters will be used.
!
hss
Important
If, in your measurement plan, the Forced Input of Printout Header
Parameters at CNC Start has been used for a forced stop of the
CMM (to insert new components, for example), you can no longer
use these measurement plans in version 4.0 and higher.
However, the stopping of the CMM can be defined in the preparameters of a measurement plan.
Controlling measuring runs in Auto-Run

A measurement started by means of an Auto-Run interface can take
some time to complete.
While Calypso is measuring the selected workpieces, you can
intervene at any time. Intervention on your part could be necessary if
a collision is imminent or if you have to interrupt measurement for
some other reason.
You use the Stoplight window to control the measuring run in AutoRun.
If the Stoplight window is hidden, you can return it to the foreground
via Tools Stop Light or by clicking on the Stop light to front
symbol.
If you want to interrupt a running measurement, click on yellow.
If you want to resume an interrupted measurement, click on green.
If you have to cancel a measurement, click on the Cancel button
or on red.
You will find more information on the Stoplight window in
Monitoring measurement plan runs on page 8-13.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
12-13
Auto-Run interface
When a measurement in Auto-Run is

complete
When measurement of the workpieces is complete, the default
printout appears on the screen. It lists all the measured results in the
sequence in which they were computed.
Depending on how the CNC parameters were set, the measured
results are saved in a custom printout and/or in special files.
The custom printout is displayed on screen the result files are for
evaluation by other means and are not directly viewable.
Displaying printouts subsequently

You can subsequently open and display the custom printout and the
default printout of the last CNC run that was started by Auto-Run. It
is not necessary to close Auto-Run.
You cannot access additional printouts, such as the penultimate run
of a pallet, from within Auto-Run. Only the last run is displayed even
when the measurement plan was started with different characteristic
groups.
If the CNC run of a measurement plan was canceled, the printouts for
the features processed prior to cancellation are displayed.
Prerequisite
To do so, you must have the privilege Show Custom Printout or

Show Default Printout.
Procedure
You must first select the measurement plan or pallet icon whose last
default printout or custom printout you want to open by clicking with
the mouse.
Under Edit <Type of Icon> and in the coantext menu of the icon
you will find the Printout of Last Run <Printout Type> menu
item.
If you selected Custom Printout, the measurement plan will be
loaded before the custom printout is displayed. This can take a few
seconds. The custom printout of the last run that was started by
Auto-Run is loaded.
The Default Printout is usually displayed immediately regardless of
whether the run was started by Calypso or Auto-Run. The contents of
the protocol file in the measurement plan directory is shown. If this
file is empty (size = 0 KB), an empty printout window appears.
12-14
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Contents of the printout

Default printout
The contents of the protocol file in the measurement plan directory is

shown. If this file is empty (size = 0 KB), an empty printout window
appears.
Custom printout
The printout header data of an Auto-Run icon may differ from those
of the original measurement plan. The printout header data of the
Auto-Run icon is shown.
NOTE
hss
The assignment of pallet location and saved actual values of the last
CNC run is not possible with pallets, since the pallet location is not
saved or defined. Thats why the printout header data of the original
measurement plan is used with the exception of the part number,
whose count is incremented by Auto-Run.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
12-15
Auto-Run interface
Auto-Run for system administrators

One of your functions as system administrator is to set up an AutoRun interface, so that inexperienced users have a convenient way of
running measurement plans. You will be familiar with some of the
tasks involved from Calypso, and others will be new to you.
As system administrator, you need to
configure Auto-Run, i.e. assign privileges to the future users and
check the settings of the CMM in the system configuration (see
Configuring Auto-Run on page 12-16).
map the possible measuring configurations of the CMM, each in a
separate interface (known as a desk) (see Mapping the
workpieces on page 12-21).
prepare the measurement, i.e. make the settings for the CNC run
(see Preparing a measurement on page 12-31).
administrate Auto-Run, i.e. save and edit Auto-Run interfaces or
modify the directory names for the corresponding features after
copying or moving Auto-Run interfaces (*.arn) (see
Administrating Auto-Run on page 12-39).
Configuring Auto-Run
With the aid of Auto-Run interfaces, Calypso processes are defined
and mapped so that even inexperienced users will have no trouble
running them.
Before you start mapping desks, the first thing to do is assign
privileges to the future users. You also have to check the parameters
set in the system settings for measurement and for the CMM and
make any changes that might prove necessary.
How to start Auto-Run

To start Auto-Run:
1 Close all open measurement plans.
2 Select Plan Auto-Run.
Auto-Run is started and opens the Auto-Run interface window with
a new, empty Auto-Run interface named noname.arn.
How to assign user privileges for Auto-Run

As the system administrator, you determine which tasks a user may
perform by assigning privileges.
12-16
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
NOTE
hss
Only the Master user may set up new users.

To assign privileges:
1 Select Configuration Users Privileges.
The User rights window will open.
The names of all defined Calypso users are listed on the left.
2 Highlight the name of the user for whom you want to define
privileges.
All privileges available for the Auto-Run interface are now listed on
the right.
3 To assign a privilege, activate its check box in the Status column.

A tick means that the user in question can execute the action
specified under Privileges.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
12-17
Auto-Run interface
4 Once you have defined the privileges for this user, click on OK.
The settings are saved and are active for this user with immediate
effect.
NOTE
hss
For purposes of documentation, you can output the list of privileges

of the selected user on the set printer. To do this, click on the printer
symbol in the upper left corner of the window.
If you do not mark an individual user, the privileges of all users will be
printed.
Details on the user privileges

The table below shows the privileges you can assign to users in the
order they appear in the User rights window.
Privileges that every user should have are highlighted in gray.
Right
Special aspects
Changing user privileges
May change the user privileges (except those of the

master).
Ending the Auto-Run interface
Privilege to end the Auto-Run interface
Terminating/starting Calypso
Creating a new document
You can change to Calypso without changing the user if

the Start with Auto-Run system setting is activated.
Privileges for creating, saving and opening an Auto-Run
interface.
Saving a document
Saving a document under a different
name
Opening a document
Changing paths in a document
Privileges for adapting the fixed paths after copying the

Auto-Run interfaces.
Copying/inserting icon(s)
Privileges for working with icons.
Removing icon(s)
Moving/resizing icon(s)
Loading/removing picture(s)
Creating a new desk
Creation of new elements of the Auto-Run interface.
Removing desks
Creating a new measurement plan icon
Creating a new pallet
12-18
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Right
Special aspects
Defining parameters for the

measurement plan in a pallet
Privileges to pallets
Defining pallet parameters

Defining measurement sequences in a
pallet
Inserting a measurement plan in a pallet
Creating a new branch
Creation of new elements of the Auto-Run interface.
Defining sequence
Privileges for the measurement sequence.
Starting/aborting measurement
Defining keywords
Privileges for keywords.
Opening a search window

Blocking the workspace when a Search
dialog is open
If you assign this privilege, mouse actions will be disabled

in the workspace when theLooking for icons window is
open.
This is intended to prevent an unintentional focus change
(and thus unintentional runs) when barcodes are being
scanned.
Displaying coordinate system
Menu items under Tools.
Displaying Stop lights

Configuring stop lights
Privileges for additional functions in the Stoplight

window.
Cancel, Continue and Reconnect are also possible
without these privileges.
Defining CNC parameters
Access to the parameters Speed, Results, Base Alignment,

List of Characteristics, Printout Header Data, information
on the measuring run and Parameter File in the Start
Measurement window, irrespective of which privileges
are set for the individual parameters.
Defining the Speed CNC

parameter
Access to the speed parameters and to information on

the measuring run in the Start Measurement window,
even if the privilege for Defining CNC parameters is
not set.
Defining the Results CNC

parameter
Access to the results parameters and to information on

the measuring run in the Start Measurement window,
even if the privilege for Defining CNC parameters is
not set.
Defining the Base Alignment

CNC parameter
Access to the base alignment parameters and to

information on the measuring run in the Start
Measurement window, even if the privilege for
Defining CNC parameters is not set.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
12-19
Auto-Run interface
Right
Special aspects
Defining the List of

Characteristics CNC parameter
Access to the List of Characteristics parameters and to

information on the measuring run in the Start
Measurement window, even if the privilege for
Defining CNC parameters is not set.
Defining the Parameter File CNC Access to the Parameter File in the Start Measurement
parameter
window, even if the privilege for Defining CNC
parameters is not set.
Defining printout header data
Defining printout
Access to the printout header data parameters and to

information on the measurement run in the Start
Measurement window.
Note: The forced input of printout header data upon CNC
start as set in the measurement plan is not affected by the
blocking of this privilege.
Privileges for printouts
Opening last custom printout

Opening last default printout
Configuring CMM
Privileges for system setup.
Configuring measurement
Configuring environment
Changing styli
Privileges to stylus data.
Qualifying styli
How to check the system settings

The parameters for the CMM, the measurement and the work
environment are usually defined already in the system settings. For
safety's sake, however, you should at least check the settings and
adjust them as necessary.
To check the system settings:
1 Select Configuration CMM to check the parameters for the
CMM configuration.
There is an explanation in the Online Help under How to change
the CMM configuration.
NOTE
hss
On the Machine page of the CMM Configuration notebook, make

sure that the measuring range is defined completely and correctly.
2 Select Configuration Measurement to check the parameters
for the measurement method.
the CMM configuration.
12-20
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
3 Select Configuration Environment to check the parameters

for the environment of the users.
your environment.
How to load and remove a background image

You have the possibility to assign a background image to the AutoRun interface or to remove such an image. To do so, you must have a
picture in a common Windows-compatible image format.
Loading a background
To load a background image:

1 Make sure that no icons are marked.
2 Select Edit Background image... Create New
Background Image... or click on the Enter new background
image icon in the toolbar.
The standard Windows dialog box for file selection opens.
3 Select the desired background image in the file selection dialog.
All common Windows-compatible image formats are permitted.
4 Click on Open to confirm.
The image is placed on the workspace of the Auto-Run interface
below any icons present there.
The image is initially fitted in without distortions or cropping so
that it completely fills the workspace in at least one direction.
Size of the background

image
To change the size of a background image:

1 Select Edit Background image... Change Size of
Background Image.
The Defining Icon Size dialog box opens.
2 Enter the new height and width values and confirm with OK.
The background image with its new dimensions is placed under
the workspace.
Deleting a background
To remove a background image:

1 Select Edit Background image... Remove Background
Image.
The background image is removed after a confirmation prompt.
Mapping the workpieces

You can streamline the process of measuring different workpieces by
grouping them on the table or on the base plate of the CMM. You
can map the arrangement of these workpieces accurately in the AutoRun interface you do this by defining what are known as desks.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
12-21
Auto-Run interface
The tasks involved in mapping the measuring configuration are as

follows:
Defining desks
Adding a measurement plan
Positioning a measurement plan icon
Setting the size of an icon
Placing a graphic on the measurement plan icon
How to define a desk

You can structure your Auto-Run interface with the aid of desks. A
desk contains measurement plans and pallets that belong together.
You can change to different desks via branches.
This makes sense, for example, if you want to map the workpieces in
a tree structure. You can thus recreate the following structure, for
example: Machine processing stage type workpiece.
To define a desk:
1 If no desks have been defined as yet in this Auto-Run interface:
Select Desk Rename.
(Each time a new Auto-Run interface is defined, Calypso creates
a desk named No Name, which you should rename before
use).
Enter a new name for the desk.

Click on OK.
The desk now has a new name.
2 If you have already created a desk:
Select Desk New.
Enter a name for the desk.
12-22
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Click on OK.
The name of the new desk appears in a selection list in the toolbar.
You have now defined a desk, in other words a two-dimensional map
of the empty CMM measuring range.
How to add a measurement plan to a desk

To map a workpiece in the measuring range, add the measurement
plan that was defined for the workpiece to the desk.
NOTE
hss
Make sure that no measurement plan is open in Calypso, because it

would be overwritten in an Auto-Run process.
To add a measurement plan:
1 Click on the Measurement Plan symbol.
2 Select the desired measurement plan in the Windows file selection
dialog.
3 Click on OK to load the measurement plan and close the dialog
box.
Calypso creates an icon for the measurement plan and initially places
it in the top left corner of the desk. All you have to do is position the
icons and check the CNC parameters.
How to position measurement plan icons on the

desk
You can position the measurement plan icon anywhere on the desk.
To improve the appearance, you can choose the position of each
measuring plan icon in such a way that it corresponds to the position
of the workpiece on the measuring table or base plate.
To position a measurement plan icon:
1 Click the left mouse button on the icon and hold down the button.
You can now drag the icon with the mouse.
2 Drag the icon to the desired position on the desk.
How to place a bitmap image on a measurement

plan icon
For the sake of improved clarity and recognition, you can superimpose
an image (e.g. of the relevant workpiece) on an icon on the desk. To
do so, you need a bitmap image (*.bmp, *.jpg, *.gif) of the
workpiece taken using a digital camera, for example.
If you load an image for each icon, you can more easily distinguish
between the individual runs.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
12-23
Auto-Run interface
To place a bitmap image on a measurement plan or run icon:

1 Highlight the icon.
2 Select Edit <Type of Icon> Load Icon Image...
3 Select the desired image file in the file selection dialog.
The image is then placed on the measurement plan icon or on the run
icon.
With the menu item Edit <Type of Icon> Remove Icon Image,
you can display the icon again with the standard bitmap.
How to define the size of an icon

You can define the size of an icon:
1 Highlight the icon.
2 Select Edit <Type of Icon> Define Icon Size...
The Defining Icon Size dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Enter the height and width you want the icon to have on the desk.
4 Click OK to save your entries.
The dialog box closes and the icon is resized to your specifications. All
subsequently created measurement plan icons automatically receive
the same size.
NOTE
hss
12-24
You can also use the mouse to define the size of the icon: if you move
the mouse pointer to the edge of the icon, the mouse pointer
changes into a double arrow and, with the left mouse button pressed,
you can then drag the border of the icon in the displayed arrow
direction.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Mapping a pallet
Multiple workpieces of similar type are mounted on a pallet. Calypso
determines the position of the pallet on the table by computing the
pallet's base alignment. The position of the workpieces is derived
from the alignment of the measurement plan and the column and
rows of the pallet.
How to prepare a pallet

Preparing a pallet entails creating a new measurement plan. This step
does not involve dividing the pallet into rows and columns.
To prepare a pallet:
In Calypso, create a measurement plan specially for the pallet.
It is important that the pallet should have a unique base alignment
so that the program can unequivocally determine the location of
the pallet.
How to add a pallet to a desk

You can add a pallet to a desk. Workpieces of a similar type are
mounted on a pallet, arranged in a uniform grid of rows and columns.
To add a pallet:
1 Click on the Pallet button.
The Pallet Parameters dialog box appears on the screen:
Selection list for pallet
base alignment
Input field for pallet
name
Input fields for

number and pitch of
grid lines in X and Y
axes
2 Select the base alignment for the pallet from the Pallet System
selection list.
3 In the Pallet Name input field, enter a name for the pallet.
4 Define the grid for the pallet:
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
12-25
Auto-Run interface
In the Group Columns column, enter the Distance and the

Number of columns.
In the Group Rows column, enter the Distance and the
Number of rows.
5 Click on OK.
The icon is created and appears in the top left corner of the desk. You
still have the option of defining the size of the icon (How to define
the size of an icon on page 12-24).
How to add a measurement plan to a pallet

The workpieces on the pallet are all similar. You must now select a
measurement plan that suits this type of workpiece and add it to the
pallet, so that Calypso can subsequently perform the CNC run.
To add a measurement plan to the pallet:
1 Highlight the icon of the pallet.
2 Select Edit Pallet Add Measurement Plan....
3 Select the desired measurement plan in the Windows file selection
dialog.
4 Click on OK to load the measurement plan and close the dialog
box.
The name of the measurement plan is displayed below the pallet.
12-26
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Defining measuring runs for a pallet

There are two ways of defining the workpieces on the pallet to be
measured in the CNC run:
Define a loop.
In this way, for example, you can measure every third workpiece on
the pallet take samples, in other words.
Select individual positions on the pallet with the mouse.
This is a straightforward means of selection and enables you to
exclude specific positions on the pallet from measurement, e.g. if
there are positions on the pallet that do not contain workpieces.
If you want to approach a pickup position after a pallet run to replace
the measured workpiece with the next workpiece, you can use PCM
commands.
How to define measuring runs for a pallet with a

loop
To define the measuring run as a loop:
1 Highlight the icon of the pallet.
2 Select Edit Pallet Define Loop....
The dialog box for entering loop parameters is opened.
3 Enter the loop parameters:

Select the Add command from the context menu if there are no
input lines in the dialog box.
Click in the From: input field and enter the start value for the
loop.
Click in the To: input field and enter the end value for the loop.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
12-27
Auto-Run interface
Click in the Step: input field and enter the step width of the
loop.
4 If you want to define another section for the loop:
Select the Add command from the shortcut menu.
A new line is inserted.
Repeat the definition of the loop in step 4 for the new line.
6 Activate the Loops radio button to prepare the pallet for the CNC
run.
At this point, you should define the CNC parameters (see

Preparing a measurement on page 12-31), so that the pallet can
be measured.
How to define measuring runs for a pallet

individually
To select individual positions on the pallet:
1 Click on the pallet positions you want to have measured during the
measurement run.
The color of the positions you click on changes to green.
2 Activate the User defined radio button to prepare the pallet for
the run.
At this point, you should define the CNC parameters (see

Preparing a measurement on page 12-31), so that the pallet can
be measured.
12-28
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to move to the home position after measuring

the pallet
NOTE
hss
To take full advantage of this function, you must have the PCM
option.
After a pallet run, a pickup position should be approached to replace
the measured workpiece with the next workpiece. However, the
pickup position should not be approached after every pallet location
run as this would be very time consuming. The pickup position should
only be approached after the run of the last pallet location has been
completed.
This can be accomplished with the aid of PCM commands.
In the case of a single pallet, the current pallet location number and
the number of the last pallet location are additionally included in the
printout header data.
Add a query to the post-parameters of the measurement plan. This
query is used to check whether the current pallet location number
corresponds to the last pallet location number. When the numbers
correspond to each other, the CMM should move to a defined
position.
Example:
if (getRecordHead("palletlocationnumber") ==
getRecordHead("lastpalletlocationnumber")) then
positionCMM(100,-100,-50)
endif
NOTE
hss
The query functions in any case, regardless of whether the pallet was
started via a loop or via selected pallet locations.
Keywords for icons

As the system administrator, you can assign unambiguous keywords
for the icons of a specific Auto-Run interface.
This can speed the search for measurement plan icons and pallet icons
for the user in an extensive Auto-Run interface. This also makes it
more likely that the correct icon will be chosen.
Automated selection
with barcode
The assignment of keywords also permits automated selection of the

correct measurement plan for the workpiece or pallet of workpieces
in question.
Precondition:
You possess the required barcode readers.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
12-29
Auto-Run interface
The barcode of the measurement plan icon or of the pallet icon

with which the workpiece is to be measured is affixed to each
workpiece or pallet.
How to assign and change keywords

To assign or change keywords:
1 Highlight the measurement plan icon or the pallet and select Edit
<Type of Icon> Define keywords, or select Define
keywords in the context menu.
The Define keywords dialog box appears with a list of all icons
from all desks of the current Auto-Run interface.
The line with the previously marked icon is selected.

2 To generate the keywords automatically for all icons: Click on the
Default button.
A keyword formed from the name of the icon is automatically
generated for each icon. If there are icons of the same name,
Calypso assigns a serial number in brackets, starting with the
second icon.
3 To enter or change a keyword: click on the corresponding line in
the table and enter the keyword.
Branches between desks

You can use the selection in the toolbar to move from one desk to
another at will. However, you will need the branch if you want to
switch from one desk to another specific desk quickly and reliably.
12-30
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to create branches between desks

To create a branch:
1 Make sure that the desk displayed on the screen is the one from
which you want to link to another desk by means of a branch.
2 Click on the Desk button.
An input window for the desk name appears.
3 Enter the name of the desk to which the branch is to lead.
If you want to go to a new desk that has not been defined yet,
enter the new name.
4 Click on OK.
Calypso creates the icon for the branch (together with the name of
the destination desk) and adds it to the upper left corner of the
current desk.
Preparing a measurement
Only after you have defined desks with measurement plans or pallets
can you prepare for measurement. You can perform all preparations
for measurement or only some that depends on the privileges you
have assigned to the user who is going to perform measurement.
You have the following options for evaluating results:
Displaying the position of the probe
Defining CNC parameters
Defining the input of printout header data
Defining stylus settings
Changing the sequences in desks
Defining printout
How to view the position of the probe

In some situations it can be helpful to know the current position of
the probe. You can view the position expressed in machine
coordinates.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
12-31
Auto-Run interface
To view the position of the probe:

1 Click on the Display Alignment symbol or select Tools
Display Alignment.
The current machine coordinates for the position of the probe are
displayed in the Stop Light Name - Position dialog box.
2 Click on Close.
How to define CNC parameters

You must define the CNC start parameters before a measurement
plan can be run.
This is the job of the system administrator or of a user to whom the
Define CNC start parameters privilege has been assigned.
To define the CNC start parameters for a measurement plan (or pallet
measurement):
1 Highlight the icon of the measurement plan or the pallet that you
want to run.
2 Open the Measurement Plan Definition dialog box:
If you want to set parameters for a measurement plan icon,
select Edit Measurement Plan Define Run Parameters
or click on the Define Run Parameters button.
If you want to set parameters for a pallet, select Edit Pallet
Define Measurement Plan Parameters or click on the
Define Run Parameters button.
12-32
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
The Measurement Plan Definition dialog box appears on the

screen.
You will find more information on CNC runs and on this dialog box
in How to start a CNC run on page 8-10 and in Start
measurement / measurement plan definition in the Calypso
Online Help.
3 Open the Base Alignment selection list and select the base
alignment in which the measurement plan will run.
4 Define the scope (see Defining the scope of measurement on
page 8-2).
5 With a variable measurement plan, select under Parameter File
the appropriate parameter file if necessary.
In the case of a single pallet, it is only possible to assign the same
parameter file to all pallet locations.
For detailed information about the parameter files, please refer to
Variable measurement plans in PCM on page 15-4.
6 Define the other parameters in the Result and CMM groups.
7 Click on OK when you have made all the settings.
The window will be closed. The parameters are saved along with the
measurement plan and the desk.
How to define the scope of measurement

You must also define the scope of measurement under the CNC start
parameters before a measurement plan can be run.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
12-33
Auto-Run interface
To define the scope of m easurement for a measurement:

1 Highlight the icon of the measurement plan or the pallet that you
want to run.
2 Open the Measurement Plan Definition window (How to
define CNC parameters on page 12-32).
3 Define the scope of measurement in the left group Selection.
To add all characteristics to the scope of measurement, select
All Characteristics.
To add only a certain number of characteristics to the
measurement scope, select Current Selection and click on the
Feature selection from measurement plan icon.
The Feature selection from measurement plan window
opens with a tree structure of all characteristics of the current
measurement plan.
NOTE
hss
If the Feature selection from measurement plan window has

already been opened for the current measurement plan, the
characteristics selected during the last call are preset.
Select the characteristics to be added to the scope of
measurement and confirm with OK.
You can unfold and fold groups of characteristics by doubleclicking or by clicking on the symbol in the upper right corner.
To add only a certain group of characteristics to the
measurement scope, select the option under Current
Selection and select the desired group of characteristics in the
list box located next to it on the right-hand side.
This determines the scope of measurement.
12-34
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to define the input of printout header

parameters
The printout header parameters for a CNC run from within Auto-Run
can be entered as follows:
in the CNC standard settings for an icon,
upon CNC start by answering a query.
The appearance of this query must be set in the measurement plan
in Calypso.
To define the input of printout header parameters:
1 Open the corresponding measurement plan in Calypso.
2 Select Resources Printout Header Parameters.
The Input Parameter window will open.
3 Enter the global printout header parameters if necessary.

4 If you want the user to enter certain (local) printout header
parameters only directly before the measurement, activate Force
Input at Start.
In the CNC start parameters, the system administrator or the user can
enter additional printout header parameters, overwrite default
parameters or accept the data of the original measurement plan after
clicking on Data Input in the Input Parameter window.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
12-35
Auto-Run interface
As soon as the user carries out the CNC start for one or more icons,
the Input Parameter window opens for all measurement plans that
were activated by Force Input at Start, one page for each icon
involved. In this way, the user can determine the printout header data
for all following measurements upon CNC start.
!
hss
Important
If in your measurement plan the Forced Input of Printout Header
Parameters at CNC Start has been used for a forced stop of the
CMM (to insert new components, for example), you can no longer
use these measurement plans in version 4.0 and higher.
However, the stopping of the CMM can be defined in the preparameters of a measurement plan.
How to define stylus settings in the Auto-Run

interface
The dialog boxes for changing and qualifying styli are conveniently
available under the Auto-Run interface. This is the job of the system
administrator or of a user, depending on how the corresponding
privileges have been assigned.
To start an automatic stylus change:
Select Stylus Change Automatic.
The dialog box for automatic stylus changes is opened. For more
information, see How to perform an automatic stylus system
change on page 7-63.
To change a stylus manually:
Select Stylus Change Manual....
The dialog box for manual stylus changes is opened. For more
information, see How to install a stylus system on page 4-18.
To start stylus qualification:
Select Stylus Qualify Manual.
For information on how to qualify a stylus, see How to qualify a
stylus manually on page 4-29.
How to change the sequence of measurement plan

runs in desks
The desks of an Auto-Run interface will generally contain several
measurement plans that are to be run. By default, the measurement
plans of a desk are run in the order in which they were defined. You
can, however, change this sequence in accordance with your needs
and preferences.
12-36
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
To define the sequence:

1 Highlight the measurement plans to be performed in a CNC run.
If you want to highlight multiple measurement plans, press and
hold down the Ctrl key and click on the respective icons.
2 Click on the Define Sequence symbol.
3 The Define Sequence dialog box is opened. All the measurement
plans you highlighted are listed in this box.
The measurement plans are listed in the sequence in which they

are run.
4 To change the sequence:
Highlight the name of a measurement plan in the list.
Click on the Up / Down button until the measurement plan is
in the desired position in the sequence.
Repeat the process for the other measurement plans, until the
sequence is correct.
5 Click on Undo if you decide you want to restore the original
sequence.
6 Click on OK to accept the sequence as it is.
As soon as you start measuring, the measurement plans are run in
your custom sequence. Calypso retains this sequence until such time
as you define another.
How to define the output of the printout

You can define the printout header output specifically for each
measurement plan and each pallet in the Auto-Run interface.
Privileges
The user privileg for defining the printout is called Define Printout.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
12-37
Auto-Run interface
The printout output via Auto-Run is icon-related. Settings which are

changed in a measurement plan icon are only valid for this specific
icon even if the same measurement plan applies to another icon.
If you want to change the printout for several icons of the same
measurement plan, edit the original measurement plan and load the
settings of the measurement plan for the individual icons.
These settings are also active when the last custom printout is opened
subsequently. Thus it is possible to open for one measurement several
custom printouts with different formats and settings one after the
other.
To define the printout for an icon:
1 Highlight exactly one measurement plan or pallet icon.
2 Select Edit <Icon Type> Define Printout... or Define
Printout... in the context menu.
The Format Custom Printout dialog box appears on the screen.
The name of the selected measurement plan or pallet is shown on

top of the window. The three tabs Compact Printout, Custom
Printout and Warning Limit are displayed below.
3 Make the desired settings for the printout on the three tabs.
The settings correspond to those in the Format Custom Printout
window for the original measurement plan. The settings fort he
default printout, the selection of the Excel and DMIS report and
the printout reset are not included.
12-38
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4 To transfer the settings for these icons from the original

measurement plan to Auto-Run, click on the Load settings from
measurement plan button.
5 Activate the Apply settings for next run check box if you would
like that the settings made should only apply to the next CNC run.
The settings made here will be reset after the next CNC run of this
icon.
The check box is activated by default.
6 To accept your changes, confirm with OK.
Administrating Auto-Run
One of your functions as system administrator is to set up the AutoRun interface and make sure it remains up to date.
The tasks involved are summarized in this section.
How to load an Auto-Run interface

Each Auto-Run interface is stored in a separate file with the file name
extension .arn.
To save an a new, unsaved Auto-Run interface:
1 Select File Save or click on the Save current auto run file
button.
The File Save window is opened.
2 Select the path for saving the file.
3 Enter a file name, complete with an .arn extension.
4 Click on OK.
To save a changed Auto-Run interface:
1 Select File Save or click on the Save current auto run file
button.
The Auto-Run interface is saved, but remains open.
How to edit paths for measurement plans

In an Auto-Run interface (.arn), the directory names of the
measurement plans, image files and parameter files are saved in an
absolute form.
In case an Auto-Run interface is copied to another computer or the
measurement plan directories are restructured, Auto-Run can, under
certain circumstances, no longer find the measurement plans because
the directory names saved no longer correspond to the actual names.
In this case, you must adapt the paths for the measurement plans.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
12-39
Auto-Run interface
To adapt the paths for the measurement plans:

1 Select Edit Replace paths for measurement plans.
The Replace paths for measurement plans window will open.
This window shows a list of all desks, measurement plans and

icons of the Auto-Run interface and the actual paths. The Valid
column shows whether the path exists.
NOTE
hss
The setting Yes under Valid means that the path exists. This must
not necessarily be the path which contains the object displayed,
however. The setting No under Valid means, in contrast, that this
path is not the correct path for the displayed object.
The list shows all desks in the same way in succession.
The first line is a subheading with the name of the desk.
The second name contains the path for the background image
if available.
The following lines contain the desk, pallet and measurement
plan icons included in this desk as well as the paths of the pallet
and measurement plan icons. Additionally with regard to
pallets, if no measurement plan has been inserted in a pallet,
the path cannot be entered and the column with the validity
always indicates No.
If an icon is linked to an image, a line with the text (Image)
and the path of the image file appears after the line with the
icon name.
If the icon contains the absolute path for a parameter file (see
Loading parameter file in the CNC run), an additional line with
the text (Parameter File) and the path of the parameter file
appears after the line for the image.
2 Modify the paths entered in the table by overwriting them.
- or -
12-40
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Select those lines that you want to edit in one go (if applicable by
using multiple selection). To do so, use the context menu with its
menu items.
Use the Find what and Replace with fields to replace the
incorrect character strings in the paths with the new character
strings in the selected (or, if applicable, all) lines.
to complete the Replace with field, you can use the Reset and
Looking for directory buttons.
Start replacement by clicking on Replace or with OK.
The replacement process is executed.
When activating the Request Each Replacement check box, you
have the option to confirm or to retract each individual
replacement or to cancel the entire process.
Otherwise, a message about the number of replacements made
appears upon completion of the replacement.
NOTE
hss
The names of the image files and measurement plans are not
changed by the replacement. Calypso ensures that these names
remain unchanged.
This prevents, for example, a measurement plan change. Thus, it is
not possible to transfer CNC start parameters or printout header data
accidentally from one measurement plan to another measurement
plan.
If a measurement plan is to be replaced, you must assign the
corresponding icon again. The same applies to images.
How to rename a desk

If you want to change the name of a desk, you can rename the desk:
1 Make sure that the desk you want to rename is displayed on the
screen.
2 Select Desk Rename.
3 Enter a new name for the desk.

4 Click on OK.
The desk is renamed.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
12-41
Auto-Run interface
How to delete a desk

You can delete a desk that you no longer need from the Auto-Run
interface.
To delete a desk:
1 Make sure that you are in the desk you want to delete.
2 Select Desk Delete.
3 Click on Yes to delete the desk.

4 Click on OK.
The desk is deleted from the Auto-Run interface.
How to copy icons

To copy an icon:
1 Highlight the icon you want to copy.
2 Select Edit Copy.
The icon is copied to the clipboard.
3 Select the desk into which you want to paste the icon.
4 Select Edit Paste.
The icon is pasted into the current desk.
How to delete an icon

You can remove icons you no longer need from a desk.
To delete an icon:
1 Highlight the icon you want to delete and select Edit Delete.
2 Click on Yes to delete the icon.

3 Click on OK.
The icon is deleted from the current desk.
12-42
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Chapter
13
.................................................................................................................................
Calypso can import DMIS files and convert them into measurement
plans. To achieve this, a DMIS post processor runs and processes the
DMIS commands.
The DMIS import is an option of Calypso. You can license this
functionality and have it enabled in your system if it would be of use
to you. Contact your Carl Zeiss Service for more information.
The sections included in this chapter explain the basics of importing
DMIS measurement plans, and step you through the procedures
involved.

Basics about DMIS measurement plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Configuring DMIS import. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Importing measurement plan from DMIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
13- 1
Basics about DMIS measurement plans

Calypso is able to import a DMIS program and to have it run as a
Calypso measurement plan.
What is DMIS?
DMIS stands for Dimensional Measuring Interface Standard. DMIS is a
programming language used for programming mechanical, optical,
laser and video measuring systems. DMIS is designed to be a
programming language for all or at least many measuring machines.
The vocabulary of DMIS is very large and resembles that of a genuine
programming language: there are language elements for declarations
and definitions of variables, loops, conditional jumps, mathematical
functions, coordinate transformations and of course commands for
measuring machine control such as positional movements, probing,
geometric elements, measurements, stylus system changes,
temperature compensation, etc.
DMIS-compatible measuring machines read the DMIS commands
from an ASCII file and then perform the measuring run.
DMIS and Calypso

DMIS files must be translated to ensure that they can also be used by
measuring machines which are not DMIS-compatible. The translator
tailored to the relevant measuring software is referred to as the post
processor, because it becomes active after the production of the DMIS
file.
The option Calypso DMIS which is described here is just such a
DMIS post processor for Calypso.
DMIS and Calypso

UMESS measurement plans cannot be directly converted into Calypso
measurement plans. You can convert an UMESS measurement plan
into a DMIS program first and then import this DMIS file to Calypso.
Which DMIS commands are supported?

Not every DMIS command is understood by every measuring machine.
DMIS itself was developed in stages and is available in various
versions. Therefore, a characterization file belongs to every post
processor, in which the commands supported by the post processor
are listed, and there is optionally also a specification of the supported
version of DMIS.
13-2
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Requirements for the

DMIS program
The DMIS post processor integrated into Calypso can translate DMIS
commands of Version 3.0, with certain restrictions.
If the DMIS measuring program has been created taking this
requirement into account, there should not be any implementation
problems.
Characterization file
The characterization file for Calypso is located on your system at

the path ..\Calypso\home\om and has the CHARACTERISATIONFILE file
name.
Displaying the characterization file

You can either display the characterization file directly with a text
editor or by selecting File Import DMIS and clicking on the Info
tab.
In particular, all features are listed here which can be converted by the
post processor into Calypso features.
Special features of measurement plans

imported from DMIS
DMIS programs and Calypso measurement plans are actually quite
dissimilar. As a result, Calypso measurement plans generated from
DMIS measurement runs have certain special features compared to
conventional Calypso measurement plans.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
13-3
Run control via input parameters

DMIS is designed to be sequential and Calypso is more objectoriented. In order to allow the sequential structure of the DMIS
measurement run to be represented in Calypso, some parts of the
DMIS program are written into the input parameters of the new
Calypso measurement plan.
This mainly involves the commands needed for run control. The input
parameters therefore control the sequence of the run as specified by
the DMIS file. You can also find all variables, jumps or possible loops
here.
The run control which you know from Calypso is, therefore, only
available to a certain extent.
You can display the input parameters by opening the list of
characteristics without highlighting any of the characteristics and then
clicking on the list with the right mouse button. Then select
Parameters in the context menu.
No clearance planes
DMIS does not recognize any clearance planes used to define
implicitly the clearance moves in Calypso. In DMIS, all movements are
specified explicitly.
13-4
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Therefore, when carrying out a CNC start of a measurement plan

generated from DMIS under Navigate-Feature to Feature, you
must never run the start with the Automatic setting. In this case,
select the Use Position Points Only setting.
Saving, loading and deleting the coordinate system

DMIS always defines only one current coordinate system. The other
coordinate systems are based on the relevant current coordinate
system.
Therefore the iterative alignment in DMIS works in a different way
from that in Calypso. To avoid putting the current coordinate system
into a loop in an unexpected way, it is necessary to save the current
coordinate system in the intermediate memory.
For this reason, there are DMIS commands to save, load and delete a
coordinate system. These commands are converted into
corresponding Calypso features, which you can find in Calypso in the
Utilities section.
NOTE
The stated measurement plan features are intended specially for the
translation of DMIS programs. However, if adequate care is taken,
they can also be used in other Calypso measurement plans.
Important risk of collision

Extreme care is needed when adding such features to measurement
plans imported from DMIS, because the coordinate systems were
defined in the features at the time of import and should only be
changed there.
hss
hss
Other special features

These and other differences not listed here (for example in the
definition of features) are implemented by the post processor so that
a valid Calypso measurement plan is produced.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
13-5
Configuring DMIS import

You have the option of making various presettings for the DMIS
import. To do so, select File Import DMIS and click on the Config.
tab.
NOTE
hss
This tab is only intended for special circumstances. For standard

installations, you do not need to do anything here; the settings are
correct.
On this tab, the paths for the language library and the Calypso
messages are displayed on the left-hand side, while the settings for
the import are displayed on the right-hand side.
You can make the following settings:
Language library (DLL)
After clicking on Browse..., you can assign a directory if necessary.
Calypso host name or IP address
This is the name or the Internet protocol address of the computer
on which Calypso is running and for which the import function is
waiting.
Port
Displays the port of the DMIS post processor.
Directory of Calypso messages
If necessary, you can overwrite the directory in this box directly.
13-6
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Configuring DMIS import
Take GOTOs which are outside of MEAS-ENDMES blocks

This check box is activated by default.
If you deactivate it, no clearance commands will be accepted
during the translation into the Calypso measurement plan (the
movement commands within the features will be retained). The
clearance paths must then be generated by Calypso during the
CNC run itself. The advantage is: if a DMIS measurement run is
designed from the outset to be used only for Calypso, you can
omit the clearance paths when setting up the run.
At the CNC start of a measurement plan generated from DMIS,
you must select the Automatic setting under Navigate-Feature
To Feature.
Dont ask for error confirmation. Just go on.
Activate this check box if you do not want the DMIS post processor
to ask you whether to continue the process if it discovers errors or
inaccuracies in the DMIS program during the translation process.
You can also check up on the errors in the reports after the import
process.
Update the graphic in Calypso with every feature
This check box is activated by default.
Deactivate the check box if the CAD window of Calypso is not to
be updated constantly during the translation process. This will save
up to 20% of the reading time.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
13-7
Importing measurement plan from DMIS

In order to import a measurement plan from DMIS, simply choose the
DMIS Import menu item and select the relevant file.
The procedure for certain parameters depends on your settings for
the DMIS import configuration.
Saving measurement
plan
After the import, you should save the measurement plan immediately,
because at first it is only stored in the main memory of the computer.
During the import, the post processor creates reports, which you can
read and save, if required.
You can start the measurement plan immediately after the import, or
edit the measurement plan and run it later.
How to import and start a DMIS program

With DMIS Import, you can import a DMIS program and convert it
immediately into a measurement plan. If you want to run the
measurement plan immediately after that, you should make certain
preparations first:
Click on Extras Workroom CMM and set up the connection
to the CMM by clicking on Connect.
If you import the DMIS program without connecting Calypso to
the CMM, the stylus data cannot be taken over.
Make sure that the styli defined in the DMIS program are located
on the CMM.
If no stylus system with the same name as the measurement plan
exists, a stylus system is created during the import. All used styli
with the names used in the DMIS file are allocated to this stylus
system.
You can define and use this stylus system later in Calypso.
13-8
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
In order to import a DMIS program:

1 Select File Import DMIS.
The Import of DMIS-Inspection-Files to Calypso dialog box
appears.
2 Click on the Selection of DMIS File... button.

The standard Windows dialog box for opening files appears on the
screen.
3 Select the desired DMIS file (file name extension .dmi) and click
on Open.
The import starts running; you can follow its progress and the
creation of the Calypso measurement plan. A message confirming
the end of the import appears.
NOTE
hss
If Calypso is not connected to the CMM, you will be given a message

and can decide whether you want to continue with the import or not.
4 If printouts have been created during the import, you can view
them and save them.
5 After a successful import, click on End.
Calypso is displayed on the screen; the measurement plan that has
just been imported is opened.
7 In the Prerequisites phase, click on the Qualification icon and
qualify the styli.
8 Select Resources Select Stylus for this Measurement
Plan..., click on the For Measurement Plan option in the
Measurement Plan Editor Features and choose from the list the
stylus that has just been imported.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
13-9
9 Start the CNC run by clicking Plan CNC-Start CNC-Start.

10 Under Navigate-Feature To Feature, select the relevant entry:

Use Position Points Only: in this way, the automatic
consideration of the clearance planes by Calypso is switched
off. The reason for this is that there are no clearance planes in a
DMIS program: all clearance paths are programmed and
entered directly.
Automatic: the movement paths are generated by Calypso.
Only select this entry if you have configured the DMIS import so
that no GOTOs are adopted in the measurement plan by the
post processor.
!
hss
Important
If you do not switch off automatic movement path generation in spite
of the translated movement commands, the movement commands
will be incorrect and there will be a risk of collision.
The imported measurement plan is processed.
13-10
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Evaluating reports about the DMIS

If a DMIS command cannot be processed by the post processor or by
Calypso during the translation, a message is displayed. You must then
decide whether you can ignore the misunderstood instruction in the
Calypso measurement plan or not.
The translation is resumed by clicking OK. You can end the process
with Cancel. A message is displayed as soon as the end of the DMIS
file has been reached.
Displaying reports
All problems that occur during the translation are logged. Two
different reports are generated:
Syntax report
The DMIS File Report on Syntax Check printout is produced
before the actual translation. Any syntax errors in the DMIS file are
logged here.
If the syntax errors are too serious, the DMIS import will abort. This
printout can be useful for the creator of the DMIS measurement
program for evaluation purposes.
Import printout
The Calypso Import Printout contains all messages about special
features relating to the measurement plan which have been noted
during the import by the post processor, e.g. the inability to assign
a stylus because there is no connection to the CMM.
The printouts are displayed on the Printout tab.
Saving printouts
If you would like to evaluate the printouts at a later stage, you can
save them as a text file (.txt). To do so, click on the Save printouts
button and select a directory. The file name is preset, but can be
overwritten.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
13-11
13-12
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Chapter
14
.................................................................................................................................
Calypso can export measurement plans and convert them into DMIS
files of the format DMIS 3.0. To do so, an integrated DMIS
preprocessor runs to create and correctly compile the DMIS
commands.
The DMIS export is an option of Calypso. You can license this
functionality and have it enabled in your system if you want to use it.
Contact your Carl Zeiss Service for more information.
The sections that follow explain the basic principles and the procedure
for exporting measurement plans to DMIS.

Basics about DMIS export. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Exporting measurement plan to DMIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
14- 1
Basics about DMIS export

Calypso can export a measurement plan as a DMIS program (format
DMIS, Version 3.0).
What is DMIS?
DMIS stands for Dimensional Measuring Interface Standard. DMIS is a
programming language used for programming mechanical, optical,
laser and video measuring systems. DMIS is designed to be a
programming language for a large number of measuring machines.
The vocabulary of DMIS is very large and resembles that of a genuine
programming language: there are language elements for declarations
and definitions of variables, loops, conditional jumps, mathematical
functions, and coordinate transformations. There are also commands
for measuring machine control such as positional movements,
probing, geometric elements, measurements, stylus system changes,
temperature compensation, etc.
DMIS-compatible measuring machines read the DMIS commands
from an ASCII file and then perform the measuring run.
Calypso and DMIS

DMIS-compatible measuring machines cannot run measurement
plans generated by Calypso unchanged. Calypso measurement plans
must first be converted to DMIS format so that they can be processed
by DMIS-compatible measuring machines as well.
A translator suitable for this purpose is called a preprocessor, because
it becomes active before the DMIS file it creates is processed.
The Calypso DMI Export option which is described here is just such
a DMIS post processor for Calypso.
14-2
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Exporting measurement plan to DMIS
Exporting measurement plan to DMIS

In order to export a measurement plan to DMIS, you must simply
choose the DMIS Export menu item and specify the relevant file
name of the DMIS file.
The requirements for DMIS export must have been met.
What does the
preprocessor do?
The preprocessor first internally converts the Calypso measurement

plan into a sequential procedure and then translates it into DMIS
format. The file created as a result can be used in any measuring
machine with DMIS capability.
Requirements for the DMIS export

So that the preprocessor is able to transform the measurement plan
into a valid DMIS run, the Calypso measurement plan must be
complete and free of errors, i.e. it must be possible for Calypso to
process the measurement plan.
That means, in particular, that the measurement plan must have the
following elements that have been defined without errors:
Definition of the styli
Definitions of the features
Definitions of the characteristics
Runs (technologies)
Discrete points
Scanning paths
Intermediate points
Navigation
Clearance distance
Retract distance
Coordinate systems
Stylus system change (optional)
Patterns (optional)
Settings (optional)
Loops (optional)
NOTE
hss
DMIS regognizes only one tolerance mode (Number String in

Calypso). The setting for Amount will therefore not be exported.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
14-3
How to export a measurement plan to DMIS

You can use the DMIS export to export a measurement plan to DMIS.
It is necessary that the measurement plan meets the above
requirements for DMIS export.
To export a measurement plan to DMIS:
1 Select File Export DMIS.
A file selection window appears.
2 Select the file name extension of the DMIS file to be created
(*.dmi).
NOTE
hss
The DMIS file is a text file that you can view and edit, e.g. with
WordPad.
3 Click on Save.
The Designator assignment: Calypso -> DMIS dialog box is
opened. You see the names of the features in the Calypso
measurement plan and the corresponding automatically generated
DMIS labels (maximum 10 characters).
NOTE
hss
Unlike Calypso, DMIS does not recognize any stylus systems. It only
recognizes styli. Stylus names are furthermore automatically
shortened to 10 characters, and their reference to the respective
stylus system can thus be lost.
4 If required, change the DMIS labels according to your wishes.
For example, you can specifically change the stylus name so as to
restore the reference to the respective stylus system.
The export runs; in the Progress... Translating PCM to DMIS
window, you can follow the creation of the DMIS program.
A message confirming the end of the export appears.
6 After the export, click on End.
14-4
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Chapter
15
Parameter-coded measuring
runs (option)
.................................................................................................................................
In Calypso you can define parameter-coded measuring runs using
PCM, the programming language developed expressly for this
purpose.
This chapter explains how to define variables, set parameters and use
parameterized measuring runs.
On account of the complexity involved, programming in PCM is only
recommended if you have basic knowledge of programming
structures (e.g. Pascal or C).
PCM is one of Calypsos optional features. You can license this option
and have it enabled in your system if the PCM functionality would be
of use to you. Contact your Carl Zeiss sales partner for more
information.

Introduction to PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Using PCM in Calypso first steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Variables, parameters and formulas in Calypso. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Entering parameters and formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15
Working with PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-35
Examples for PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-37
PCM quick reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-51
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-1
Introduction to PCM
Calypso uses the PCM programming language for variable control of
measuring runs. Of course you can use Calypso without PCM, but
PCM offers you a powerful toolset for simplification and automation,
along with part-variant programming and parameter-supported and
interactive control of measuring runs.
What is PCM?
PCM is a programming language for parameterizing measuring runs.

PCM is short for parameter-coded measurement".
PCM enables you to simplify and rationalize measuring runs in
Calypso: You can program measurement plans in such a way that you
can measure various workpiece variants, and you can set parameters
to influence the automatic run of a measurement plan.
PCM has functions for calculating values, for controlling the CMM,
and for interactive input/output dialogs. You can vary the way in
which a measurement plan runs by programming loops and
conditions. In certain situations you can have Calypso generate special
messages.
NOTE
hss
A yellow input box in Calypso always contains a parameter or

formula.
In Calypso, you use PCM when you enter a Formula in an input box
for a feature. By so doing, you automatically define a variable and
assign it parameters. The color of the input fields changes, in this case
to yellow. By the same token, when you set a condition in Calypso or
define a loop, you automatically create PCM code.
Once you have familiarized yourself with the syntax, you can employ
the PCM code to enter conditions and loops or other commands
directly or generate files for import into Calypso.
15-2
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Using PCM in Calypso first steps

The easiest and most reliable way of generating variable
measurement plans is to begin by creating an ordinary measurement
plan with fixed coordinates and values in Calypso in the usual way.
You can then substitute variables for the specific coordinates that vary
from workpiece to workpiece.
The various measurement plans you need derive from the formulas
and parameters you enter for the variables.
Programming with PCM

Besides parameterization of measurement plans, PCM provides an
extensive programming functionality:
You can program dialogs that Calypso uses in the course of a CNC
run to query the operator for quantities, so that the figures
supplied in this way can subsequently be used in different ways as
the run progresses.
You can determine measured values and system parameters and
reuse them in the measurement plan.
In the case of conditions or loops, you are not bound to the forms
specified in the dialogs you can enter them directly with PCM.
You can issue direct control and motion commands to the CMM.
Finally, you can also make external access to measured data via an
interface possible.
You can use these functions in many different ways, individually and
in combinations, so these instructions cannot cover all possible
circumstances in detail remember that PCM is a programming
language, designed for you to use to the best possible effect.
This chapter, therefore, describes the basics of the run structures of
Calypso and the syntax of PCM, tells you how to enter parameters
and formulas in Calypso, and contains a reference library of functions
and commands.
The examples (see Examples for PCM on page 15-37)
demonstrate the versatility of PCM and show you how to utilize the
performance of this programming language.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-3
Variable measurement plans in PCM

Calypso employs the principle of parameterization so that you can use
a single measurement plan to measure workpieces that are similar but
not identical. This principle is based on the premise that the quantities
that are the same for both workpieces are defined in the
measurement plan in Calypso as fixed quantities; the quantities that
vary from workpiece to workpiece, on the other hand, are defined as
variables.
In this way one and the same measurement plan can be used to
measure and test different workpieces: for example, a plate with
either one or two holes even if the radii are different. Different
geometries, differences in the number of certain features, the
presence or absence of features all these can be parameterized.
Parameters for variables in PCM

Note, however, that a measurement plan with variables cannot be run
unless the variables are assigned specific values. These specific values,
the parameters in other words, have to be known to Calypso: you
define them in the measurement plan before it is run. Calypso then
uses the coordinates or values entered for the variables in processing
the measurement plan.
15-4
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Example
The two workpieces in the illustration above are different, but

similar: they have some identifying characteristics in common,
while others are unique to each. The first workpiece in the illustration
has a central hole with a radius of 20, while the hole in the second
workpiece, while of the same depth, has a radius of 10 and is offcenter. This workpiece, moreover, has a second hole.
The variables that could be used here are as follows: positions of the
holes (hole1_center, hole2_center), their radii (hole1_radius,
hole2_radius) and the number of holes (number_holes). These
variables have to be assigned values for each workpiece, so that a
measurement plan can be run:
Variables
Parameters for
workpiece No. 1
Parameters for
workpiece No. 2
Number_holes
hole1_center
point(-40,30,40,0,0,1) point(-20.30,40,0,0,1)
hole2_center
any
point(-60.30,40,0,0,1)
hole1_radius
20
10
hole2_radius
any
10
Set up in this way with only five different parameters, the

measurement plan is able to measure two different workpieces.
Parameters in parameter files

The process is even more straightforward when you provide Calypso
with the parameters of the current workpiece or the measurement
plan variant you intend to use in the form of a prepared, reusable
ASCII file. All you have to do when a new version of a workpiece is
due for measurement is load a new ASCII file containing the required
information.
Another advantage is that ASCII files can be edited independently of
Calypso.
Parameterizing characteristics with PCM

Characteristics can sometimes be the same despite differences in
features, as is the case, for example, with the diameter of a circle of
the same size that only has to be measured at a different position on
the workpiece. Other characteristics can vary as a function of the
parameterized measurement plan.
This, in turn, means that if the value of the characteristic, and not just
the measured values of a given feature, varies from workpiece to
workpiece, you have to parameterize the characteristic as well.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-5
You do this by defining a variable for the characteristic in question

and assigning it the corresponding value.
Parameter files for measurement plans

The advanced way of setting up variable measurement plans is to use
parameter files. A parameter file contains the set of value
assignments for the variables in a measurement plan.
When you parameterize fixed defining aspects of a workpiece you are
in a position to measure different workpieces with a single
measurement plan: all you have to do is enter different parameters,
either directly in Calypso or by specifying and loading a parameter
file.
You can create different parameter files for a particular measurement
plan and load whichever file you need for a given workpiece and the
aspects you want to measure. You need a dedicated parameter file for
each workpiece.
*.para
Workpiece1.para
Measurement
Plan
*.para
Workpiece2.para
*.para
Workpiece3.para
The parameter files can be created in two ways:

You save the entered parameters of a measurement plan.
15-6
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
You create the parameter file directly with an ASCII editor.

To do so, you need experience with measurement plans and
reliable knowledge of the PCM syntax PCM uses, a functional
syntax similar to the programming languages Basic, C, Fortran etc.
(see PCM syntax on page 15-51).
When you create a parameter file it is important to remember that
the file name extension has to be .para, so that Calypso can
recognize it as a parameter file.
Conditions and parameters for the run

structure of Calypso
After the CNC start, Calypso runs the measurement plan. PCM
commands and parameter assignments come into effect at a very
wide variety of points.
You can define input and output parameters for each feature
and each characteristic, and for the measurement plan as a whole.
This means that you can enter PCM commands when these
elements are defined.
The input parameters are processed before the element is run,
the output parameters are processed after the run.
You also have the opportunity of setting start parameters once
or loading a file before the measurement plan is run.
You can set a condition and a loop for each characteristic.
You can enter input and output parameters for each condition
and each loop.
Utilizing these Calypso functions in this way, therefore, you can
construct complex, nested structures.
Wherever you set input parameters, output parameters or start
parameters, moreover, you can program conditions and queries
directly with PCM.
Sequence of measurement plan processing in PCM

The sequence adopted by Calypso to process the data is as follows:
1 The input parameters are evaluated before the measurement plan
is run; the output parameters are evaluated when the run
completes.
2 Calypso checks each characteristic in succession, in the order in
which it appears in the list of characteristics. The condition and the
loop are processed first (depending on the order in which they
were entered) followed by the input parameters of the
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-7
characteristic. Once the characteristic has been determined, its

output parameters are evaluated.
3 Before a feature defined for a characteristic is measured, its input
parameters are evaluated. The features output parameters are
evaluated when measurement completes.
4 If input or output parameters are set for a condition or loop, the
input parameters are evaluated before the condition is checked or
the loop is run. The output parameters are evaluated after the
element referenced by the condition or loop.
If the condition results in a stop, the output parameters are not
evaluated.
You might find it useful to visualize the input and output parameters
as parentheses bracketing the objects in question.
15-8
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Variables, parameters and formulas in Calypso
Variables, parameters and formulas in

Calypso
When you want to run variable measurement plans for different
workpieces in Calypso, you have to use variables instead of absolute
values to describe the workpiece.
What are variables?

Variables, by definition, are quantities that can vary. In Calypso and in
PCM all defining aspects required in descriptions of workpieces or
runs in measurement plans can be characterized as variables.
The variables are stored locally together with the element (feature,
characteristic, condition, loop) for which they were defined.
The assigned values, the parameters in other words, are stored
centrally for the entire measurement plan.
Types of variables
PCM recognizes four types of variable: number, point, vector and

string. Each variable has a name consisting of alphanumeric
characters (without blanks; first character is no number), and different
variables have different names.
Examples: radius_1, set-down point, message_354
You are not allowed to use reserved names, in other words strings
that are required in the PCM syntax: X, Y, Z, the names of
functions and commands, and so on.
Arrays
Groups of variables are called arrays. The only difference in the names
of variables in an array is the array index. Example:
radius[1], radius[2], radius[3], radius[4]
In this case, radius is an array with four variables.
What are parameters?

Parameters are specific values for variables. When variables are used
in a measurement plan instead of fixed numbers or texts, you can vary
the measurement plan by assigning certain fixed values (parameters)
to the individual variables.
You assign values either by entering them directly or by means of
statements in a file. Use the following syntax:
Variablename=value
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-9
You can enter the value using one of the following formats:
NOTE
hss
Variable type
Format for values (example)
number
-3.141529
vector
vector(10,12,0)
point
point(-10,12.5,0,0,0,1)
string
"circle"
The last three components of a variable of the point type represent

the coordinates of a normalized vector. This means that the root of
the sum of the three squares (= the length of the vector) must always
be 1.
Value assignments and variable definitions

It follows that the PCM commands listed below are value
assignments:
P1=10
vektor_1 = vector(10,20,30)
eckpunkt_1 = point(10.1,20.5,30.02,0,0,1)
text_1=This is a text in the text_1 variable
A value assignment also defines the variable and makes it known to
Calypso. There are no explicit variable definitions (constructors) in
PCM.
Variables in the arrays can be defined either individually one by one
or in a loop instruction. Example:
array[1] = point(-10,12.5,0,0,0,1)
array[2] = point(-12,12.5,0,0,0,1)
array[3] = point(-14,12.5,0,0,0,1)
array[4] = point(-16.12.5,0,0,0,1)
Here, array has been defined as an array consisting of four variables
of type point.
Formulas and functions in PCM

As well as using individual variables in measurement plans, you also
have the option of using functions of variables and formulas with
variables.
15-10
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Return values
The return value is an important function of a variable: the individual
parts of a parameter have to be addressed so that you can work
with them.
The return values of variables of the point type are defined as
follows:
Function
Return value
variable_name.x
x value of the point variable
variable_name.y
y value of the point variable
variable_name.z
z value of the point variable
variable_name.nx
x value of the normal vector of the point

variable
variable_name.ny
y value of the normal vector of the point

variable
variable_name.nz
z value of the normal vector of the point

variable
You can access variables of the vector type as follows:

Function
Return value
variable_name.x
x value of the vector variable
variable_name.y
y value of the vector variable
variable_name.z
z value of the vector variable
Arithmetic operators and functions

The most important operators and functions with variables are:
Arithmetic operators:
+,,*,/
Comparative operators (used in conditions and loops):
<,>,==, <>, <=, >=
Mathematical and trigonometric functions:
sqrt, squared, abs, exp, int, ln, log, mod, round, sign,
sin, cos, tan, arcsin, arccos, arctan, arctan2
Functions for determining values (query):
getNominal, getActual
Character string functions:
asc, chr, format, inStr, len, mid, strElement, val
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-11
There are also a number of functions for input and output, for run
control and for working with files, plus measurement-specific and
CMM-specific commands, system commands and CMM movement
commands (see PCM quick reference on page 15-51).
Programming with PCM

You can vary the way in which the measurement plan runs by setting
conditions and loops.
A characteristic or feature with a condition is not executed unless
the condition is satisfied. The characteristic is either calculated or
not calculated depending on the truth value returned for the
condition, which means that the measurement plan run either
proceeds or is interrupted.
A loop around a characteristic or a feature results in the
characteristic or feature being run repeatedly, possibly with
changed variables for each run.
You trigger these functions by selecting Condition or Loop in the
context menu and entering the settings for the condition or loop, as
applicable (see Setting conditions on page 15-19 and Inserting
loops on page 15-22).
Programming conditions and loops

Over and above the options at your disposal in Calypso, you can use
PCM to insert conditions and loops explicitly in parameter files or in
the input and output parameters of features or characteristics.
In this way you can utilize conditions and loops much more
comprehensively you are in control of the measuring run. During the
CNC run, the truth values of the conditions are determined, the loop
index is incremented automatically and the definitions, the value
allocations and the commands are processed accordingly.
The following control elements are available for both the input and
output parameters:
The simple operation (if - endif)
The condition with alternative (if - else)
The defined loop (for - next)
The conditional loop (repeat - until)
15-12
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Simple condition
The syntax of the simple condition is as follows:
if CONDITION then
DEFINITION
endif
Meaning:
If CONDITION is satisfied, DEFINITION is processed.
If CONDITION is not satisfied, DEFINITION is not processed.
The DEFINITION can be formulas, value assignments, functions or
other conditions or loops of your choice, always with line breaks as
separators.
Condition with alternative

The syntax of the condition with alternative is as follows:
if CONDITION then
DEFINITION1
else
DEFINITION2
endif
Meaning:
If CONDITION is satisfied, DEFINITION1 is processed.
If CONDITION is not satisfied, DEFINITION2 is processed.
DEFINITION1 and DEFINITION2 can be formulas, value assignments,
functions or other conditions or loops of your choice, always with line
breaks as separators.
Example
In the example below, the result variable is assigned the diameter

of circle circle_1. A message corresponding to this quantity is then
output on the screen:
Result=getActual("Circle_1").diameter
if result>10 then
message(Diameter circle_1 is greater than 10)
else
if result<10 then
message("Diameter circle_1 is less than 10")
endif
endif
Defined loop
In the case of the defined loop, the number of loops is defined
unequivocally. The syntax of the defined loop is as follows:
for index=start to end [step]
DEFINITION
next index
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-13
The following must be inserted:

for index the name of the loop variables (random),
for start, end and step whole numbers,
for DEFINITION random formulas, value assignments, functions or
separators.
Meaning: the functions or commands under DEFINITION are
processed (end - start + 1)/step times, whereby step is set to 1 if no
other specification is made. At the same time, the specific value for
index is always entered in DEFINITION: at first start, then start+step,
start+2*step etc. up to end. With next i, the loop index is
incremented by step each time.
Example
for i=1 to 4
message(i,". step: ",step[i])
next i
Conditional loop
In the case of the conditional loop, the number of runs depends on
the fulfillment of a condition, whereby the condition is only tested
after the first run. Therefore a conditional loop must run at least once.
The syntax of the conditional loop is as follows:
repeat DEFINITION until CONDITION
Meaning:
DEFINITION is processed. Then CONDITION is tested.
If CONDITION is fulfilled, the loop is ended.
If CONDITION is not satisfied, DEFINITION is processed again and
CONDITION is tested again.
The CONDITION can be set up as a logical combination of several
subconditions.
separators.
!
hss
15-14
Important
Please note that infinite repetitions are possible with the conditional
loop if the condition is never fulfilled.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Entering parameters and formulas

In Calypso you can use parameter-coded measuring runs as follows:
You can enter parameters for the variables of a measurement plan.
You can enter formulas directly.
You can test the value of a PCM expression.
You can set a condition for the entire measurement plan and for
each individual characteristic.
You can place a loop around the entire measurement plan and
around each individual characteristic to force repeated runs.
You can enter input and output functions for features,
characteristics, conditions and loops.
You can use the point generator to read in the points of a curve or
define them with a mathematical expression.
You enter parameters for a measurement plan in the Settings
window. In so doing you assign formulas or values to existing or
newly defined variables.
You can enter the parameters directly in the window or you can load
them from a parameter file.
You can create a parameter file by saving the parameters of a
measurement plan or explicitly by generating the file with an ASCII
editor of your choice.
NOTE
hss
In PCM and in the formula, the decimal separator is always a period

(.; example: 3.5 + 4.8, and not: 3,5 + 4,8).
The comma is used as the separator within value assignments
(example: Location = point(3.5, 4.5, 1.5, 0, 0, 1)).
How to enter parameters for a measurement

plan directly
NOTE
hss
function.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-15
To enter parameters for a measurement plan directly:

1 Select Plan Advanced Parameter.
The Parameter Input dialog box opens.
2 Click in the (white) input box and start defining the parameter:
Start with the variable name, followed by =.
Proceed with the definition. Please observe the syntax described
in Arithmetic operators and functions on page 15-11 as
well as the parameter syntax (see Example for PCM: ASCII
parameter file on page 15-50).
3 Click on OK.
The window will be closed. The parameter is now included in the list
of all available parameters (this dialog box is fully described in
Formula in the Calypso Online Help).
How to save the measurement plan parameters in a

file
Once parameters have been defined in a measurement plan, you can
save them in a file. In this way, they are readily available for
subsequent use in other measurement plans.
NOTE
hss
function.
To save the measurement plan parameters in a file:
1 Select Plan Advanced Parameter.
The Parameter Input dialog box opens.
2 If necessary, edit the parameters, value assignments and formulas
shown.
15-16
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
3 Click on the diskette icon.

The Save: Select Parameter File dialog box opens.
4 Enter the name of the file (do not omit the .para extension),
select a directory and click on Save.
The variables and parameters you selected are saved in the file.
How to load measurement plan parameters saved

beforehand
You can integrate parameters saved in a parameter file (*.para file
name) into your current measurement plan.
NOTE
hss
function.
To open a *.para file:
1 Check that the Parameter Input dialog box is open (Plan
Advanced Parameter).
2 Click on the Open icon.
The Open: Select Parameter File dialog box opens.
3 Select the appropriate file and click Open.
The parameters in the file are listed in the input window and are
available for your current measurement plan.
How to enter formulas

By entering formulas you can
calculate function values of measuring results (sin, cos...)
use operators to link measuring results with constants
use operators to interlink multiple measuring results.
The value returned by the formula is displayed in the input box from
which you called formula input.
To define a formula:
1 Open the definition template for the feature in which you want to
assign the formula to an input box.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-17
2 Right-click in the input box whose value you want to calculate with
the formula, hold down the mouse button and select the Formula
command from the context menu.
The dialog box shown below is opened:
3 In the box labeled Formula, enter the formula, making sure your
entry complies with the PCM syntax rules (see Arithmetic
operators and functions on page 15-11).
4 Click on the Function button to open the hierarchically ordered
list of all operators, functions and commands.
Open the corresponding branch and double-click on the element

of your choice to copy it to the formula input box.
15-18
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5 To insert a parameter into the formula: click on the Settings

button.
Double-click on the parameter of your choice in the Parameter
List to insert it into the formula.
6 To insert a loop variable into the formula, click on the Loop
button.
LOOP1 appears in the input box.
7 Click on Compute if you want to test your settings by computing
the formula's return value.
8 Click OK to confirm your settings and terminate formula input.
The value returned by the formula is displayed in the input box from
which you called formula input. Note that the color of this field has
changed to yellow.
Setting conditions
You can link computation of characteristics to conditions that enable
Calypso to execute jumps in the CNC run in accordance with the
measuring results.
NOTE
hss
A basic knowledge of programming structures will help you

understand the following.
You can choose whether to have the condition queried before or
after the characteristic is computed. Calypso ascertains whether
the condition is true or false.
You also have the option of linking the entire measurement plan to
a condition.
NOTE
hss
In addition to the conditions for characteristics or the measurement

plan, PCM also enables you to enter simple conditions or conditions
with alternative directly in the input/output parameters (see
Programming conditions and loops on page 15-12).
If the condition is queried before calculation, Calypso either computes
the characteristic and continues or executes the instruction linked to
compliance with the condition. This instruction can be either of the
two stated below:
cancel the automatic measurement run
do not compute the characteristic and continue.
If the condition is queried after calculation, the only alternatives are:
cancel the automatic measuring run
continue.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-19
If a loop has been defined around the characteristic, processing

depends on what was defined first.
How to link a condition to a characteristic

To set a condition for a characteristic:
1 Open the list of characteristics in the measurement plan area.
2 Highlight the characteristic for which you want to set a condition.
3 Right-click and select Condition from the context menu.
The Dialog box for conditions window will open.
4 Set the condition first:

Right-click in the yellow input box to open the context menu.
Select Formula.
The Formula dialog box appears on the screen.
Enter the condition in the Formula dialog box and click on OK
to confirm your entry (see How to enter formulas on
page 15-17).
NOTE
hss
The only possible return values for the condition are true and
false. Use the comparison operators (see Arithmetic and
comparative operators in PCM on page 15-53) for this purpose.
You can test the return values of comparison operators by clicking on
Compute in the Formula dialog box.
The condition is displayed in the input box.
5 If you wish to make the presettings or postsettings, click on the
Settings button and enter the settings.
6 If you do not want the condition to be queried until after the
characteristic has been computed, click on the box labeled Post
15-20
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
condition. The characteristic box is now right at the top of the

window.
7 If you want the automatic run canceled or measurement of the

feature to be omitted if the condition is true (satisfied): make sure
that the Yes button is beside the End program box. If it is not,
you can move it there by clicking the Yes button.
8 If you want the automatic run canceled or measurement of the
feature to be omitted if the condition is false (not satisfied): make
sure that the No button is beside the End program box. If it is
not, you can move it there by clicking the No button.
9 Click OK to confirm and terminate definition of the condition.
The condition will be checked and evaluated in the next automatic
measuring run.
How to link the entire measurement plan to a

condition
You can also link the entire measurement plan to a condition. In this
case the measurement plan is executed or not, depending on the
truth value of the condition.
To set a condition for the measurement plan:
1 Open the list of characteristics and make sure that no
characteristics are highlighted.
2 Right-click and select Condition in the context menu.
The Condition window will appear on the screen (this dialog box is
fully described in Formula in the Calypso Online Help).
3 Set the condition first: use the yellow input box to open the
Formula window (see How to enter formulas on page 15-17)
and enter the condition. Click OK to confirm this entry and close
the window.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-21
NOTE
hss
The only possible return values for the condition are true and
false. Use the comparison operators (see Arithmetic and
comparative operators in PCM on page 15-53) for this purpose.
The condition is displayed in the input box.
4 If you want to set input or output parameters, click on the
Settings button and enter the parameters.
5 If you do not want the condition to be queried until after the
characteristic has been computed, click on the box labeled Post
condition. The characteristic box is now right at the top of the
window.
6 If you want the measurement plan run canceled if the condition is
true (satisfied): make sure that the Yes button is beside the End
program box. If it is not, click on the Yes button.
If you want the measurement plan run canceled if the condition is
false (not satisfied): make sure that the No button is beside the
End program box. If it is not, you can move it there by clicking the
No button.
7 Click OK to confirm and terminate definition of the condition.
The condition will be checked and evaluated in the next automatic
measuring run.
Inserting loops
NOTE
hss
This section is intended for advanced users who are familiar with the
basics of programming structures.
Loops are used primarily in measurement plans in which identical or
similar features are arranged in regular patterns (as is the case,
for example, with a perforated plate). You can also use loops when
you configure the base alignment.
If you place a loop around a feature, characteristic or the entire
measurement plan, the feature, characteristic or measurement plan is
processed several times in succession.
NOTE
hss
Note that you cannot enter loops directly in the input/output

parameters with PCM.
You have several options for defining a loop:
15-22
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Direct loop definition

Select in the context menu of the corresponding element the Loop
menu item and enter the desired values in the Loop dialog box. A
loop is defined by a start index, an end index, and an increment.
The loop variable starts the first run with the start index. Prior to
each run, it is increased by the increment and compared with the
end index. As soon as the loop variable has exceeded the end
index (with positive increment: greater than the end index; with
negative increment: smaller than the end index), the loop will not
be repeated any more.
Indirect loop definition
You define a pattern for a feature or a group of features. Similar to
the loop, a run is repeated several times, each time with a modified
index. Additionally, another abortion condition is defined with
Actual Number: As soon as the number of runs has reached the
value of the actual number, the computation is terminated.
You can define one or multiple cycle levels in a loop (nested loops),
so you can process repetitions in the second, third or fourth level. In
each of these levels, a dedicated loop counter variable, the loop
index, is incremented in steps.
Loop variables and loop indexes

The loop variables have fixed names, and they are called LOOP1 to
LOOP4 in each loop. In the characteristic and the associated
features, you can use these loop variables in formulas to vary the way
in which the characteristic is processed.
If a condition is also linked to the object, the sequence of processing
depends on what was defined first.
Calypso uses the loop variable as an index to mark similar objects that
differ in the value of the corresponding loop variable.
Example: Circle1(1), Circle1(2), Circle1(3)).
Each of the four loop variables corresponds to a certain loop index
definition or type of brackets:
Loop variable
Loop index definition
LOOP1
()
round
LOOP2
[]
square
LOOP3
<>
angle
LOOP4
{}
brace
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-23
How to place loops around characteristics

To place a loop around a characteristic or the measurement plan:
1 Open the list of characteristics in the measurement plan area.
2 Highlight the characteristic you want to loop.
If you are going to place a loop around the entire measurement
plan, make sure that none of its characteristics are highlighted.
3 Right-click and hold down the mouse button. Select Loop from
the context menu and release the mouse button.
The Loop Interface dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Click Insert to insert a new loop level in the dialog box.
5 Set the values for Start, End and Step by clicking the
corresponding input boxes and typing in the values.
6 If necessary, repeat steps 4 and 5 to insert another loop level.

Under Nest Level, select a different type of bracket for each level
to nest the loops.
There are four types of bracket available.
7 Click on the Settings button to set input and output parameters
for the loop.
The Settings dialog box appears on the screen.
8 Perform the steps described in Entering parameters and
formulas on page 15-15 and click on OK to confirm and
terminate your entry.
This returns you to the Loop Interface window.
NOTE
hss
15-24
You can define only one abortion condition per loop.

9 If necessary, enter a abortion condition in the box provided for this
purpose.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
10 Click OK to save the loop and close the window.

You have now defined the loop. It will be executed in the next CNC
run.
To ensure that something happens each time the loop is run, you
have to use the LOOPi (i = 1,...,4) loop variables in the characteristic
and/or in the features to vary the measurement run.
For example, you could multiply the loop variable with a constant
offset in order to increase an X value step by step.
How to include features in loops

Loops are used primarily in measurement plans in which identical or
similar features are arranged in regular patterns (as is the case, for
example, with a perforated plate).
If you defined a loop by a characteristic, the data of the associated
feature has to be varied in each loop run in order to ensure that the
loop can be executed correctly.
You accomplish this by using the loop variables in the definition of the
feature, or incorporating a pattern into the feature.
To incorporate a pattern into a feature:
1 Open the list of features.
2 Double-click on the name of the feature in question.
The feature template is opened.
3 In the Nominal Definition selection list, select the Pattern
command.
The Selection (pattern) dialog box opens.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-25
4 Activate the New radio button and check the Edit check box.
5 Select the way in which you want to specify the pattern (Polar
Pattern Offset, 1-D Linear Pattern, 2-D Linear Pattern,
Rotational Pattern, Pattern with position list).
6 Click OK to confirm your choice.
The dialog box for defining the pattern of your choice (example: 1D Linear Pattern) appears on the screen.
7 Enter the values for the pattern. Make sure that the value for
Actual Number corresponds to the number of loop runs resulting
from the loop placed around the characteristic.
8 Click OK to confirm and close the window.
9 Click OK to close the feature template.
The loop is executed as soon as you start an automatic measuring run
(see Running a measurement plan on page 8-1).
Loops for alignment to RPS

You can place a loop around a base alignment. If you do this, the
alignment is repeated for the defined number of loop repetitions
unless the abortion condition is satisfied beforehand.
RPS alignment, for example, only works with a loop. The effect of
this loop is to repeat alignment until it achieves your user-defined fit.
15-26
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
The illustration below shows the definition of the loop.
The baseSystem().valueA<0.1 abortion condition (for syntax, see

baseSystem on page 15-62) means that once measuring has
commenced, the measuring process will continue until the valueA
best-fit value is less than 0.1.
Points to note about Nest Level

The form of brackets in the Nest Level box defines the nesting of
loops: you set these brackets when you define the loop in the Loop
window. Nested loops required different brackets for each level.
You could do this, for example, by selecting round brackets ( and
) for loop 1 and angle brackets < and > for loop 2. Calypso
provides you with four forms of brackets for four loop levels.
The type of bracket can also be important for non-nested loops,
however. You have to use brackets of different types in independently
defined loops if:
you align two or more coordinate systems iteratively and
features with the same name are used in this context.
The example below is based on the assumption that a part alignment
was created after RPS alignment (see How to use an alternative
alignment method on page 4-77).
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-27
Example
If, for example, coordinate system A uses the feature called 3D

Line1 and coordinate system B also uses a feature of this name, 3D
Line1 is not measured again when coordinate system B is measured
if you used the same type of brackets when you defined the two
iterations in the Loop window. Calypso assumes that the line has
already been measured and that it does not have to be measured
again.
You have to use brackets of a different type to ensure that the 3D
Line1 is measured again when coordinate system B is aligned. You
could do this, for example, by selecting round brackets ( and )
for loop 1 and angle brackets < and > for loop 2.
Points to note about multiple measurements

If you want to use a loop to measure one and the same feature more
than once or repeat probings, you must use the LOOP1 loop variable
in the definition template of the feature.
Calypso remembers that it has already measured a feature and simply
recalls the measured value instead of probing for a second time.
Under these circumstances, however, this does not produce the
desired effect.
You can use a workaround to avoid this difficulty. In the nominal
definition, insert a formula in which you add the product 0*LOOP1
(to the X value, for example). This means that the X value remains the
same every time the loop is run, but Calypso perceives each iteration
as a new calculation and a new probing.
Basics about input and output parameters in

PCM
Input and output parameters can be set for each characteristic and
feature, and for each condition and loop. The settings in the input
and output parameters can be used to set temporary variables, print
values in the default printout, and trigger functions.
15-28
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Input and output parameters are defined in the Settings window.
You can define input and output parameters for the following objects
in Calypso:
an entire measurement plan,
a macro,
a characteristic,
a feature,
a condition,
a loop.
The entire PCM syntax is at your disposal for defining input and
output parameters.
You will find more information on the Settings dialog box in in the
Notes on evaluating input and output parameters

The commands and value assignments you enter as input parameters
are evaluated before the object in question is executed or evaluated.
The commands and value assignments you enter as output
parameters are evaluated after the object in question has been
executed or evaluated.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-29
An object, in turn, can consist of several other objects or be superior

to these lower-order objects, so this means that under certain
circumstances the input parameters and then the output parameters
of the lower-order objects might be evaluated first.
If the object in question is a condition and the condition leads to
omission of the characteristic or cancellation of the CNC run, the
output parameters of the condition are not evaluated.
How to enter input and output parameters

In Calypso, you can set input and output parameters for each feature
and each characteristic and for each condition or loop and for the
entire measurement plan. To do so, use the Settings window.
To enter input and output parameters:
1 To open the window for the entire measurement plan:
Open the list of characteristics and make sure that no
characteristics are highlighted.
Right-click and select Parameter from the context menu.
2 To open the settings for a specific characteristic:
Highlight the characteristic in the list of characteristics.
3 To open the settings for a specific feature:
Highlight the feature in the list of features.
4 To open the window for a condition:
In the Condition window, click on Settings.
5 To open the window for a loop:
In the Loop window, click on Settings.
The Settings window will open.
6 Enter the input parameters in the box at the top and the output
parameters in the box at the bottom.
7 Click on OK.
The dialog box closes and your settings are accepted.
How to enter input and output parameters using a

list
You can also enter the parameters for presettings and postsettings in
the Settings dialog box using a list. To do this, use the
inquireParameterList() command.
15-30
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Prerequisite: A line containing the following command is contained in

the respective settings:
inquireParameterList("parameter_name1","comment1",...)
All variables that are to be entered using the list must be listed in the
brackets.
To enter the input and output parameters using a list:
1 Select the line with the inquireParameterList(...) command.
2 In the context menu, select Calculate.
The Parameter Input dialog box appears on the screen with a list
of the parameters that are contained in the brackets of the
inquireParameterList command.
3 Enter the currently required values for the parameters or overwrite

the default values.
NOTE
hss
During the measuring run, you can overwrite only the entries in the
Value column.
The dialog box is closed and the parameter values are accepted.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-31
Basics about the point generator

The point generator has the same characteristics as a loop. You can
enter a variable in each input box by right-clicking, opening the
Formula window and selecting the variable:
You will find more information on this dialog box in Point generator
in the Calypso Online Help.
You can use the point generator to define a curve if the
mathematical description of the curve is known.
You can use the point generator to load parameter values into a
curve.
In this process, another point on the curve is defined in each
successive step.
How to work with the point generator

You can define a curve with the aid of a point generator. The point
generator acts like a loop in which another point on the curve is
defined in each successive step. The loop variable used by the point
generator is index.
1 In the definition template of the curve, select Nominal Definition
and then select the Parameter Data function.
15-32
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2 The Point generator window will open.
3 Enter the start index, the end index and the step (increment).
Each input box also accepts a formula. If you want to enter a
formula, right-click in the box, select Formula from the context
menu and use the Formula Interface window to enter the formula.
4 Enter the point to be defined in the step in the Point box.
If the mathematical description of the curve is known, you can
enter it here in the form of a formula.
If the points are stored in a file, you can enter the name of the
file here and import the points.
Right-click in the box, select Formula from the context menu
and use the Formula Interface window to enter the formula or
the statement.
5 You can also enter an optional comment indicating the nature of
the curve.
This comment appears only in Calypsos table file. You can activate
output to the table file by selecting Resources Results to File
in the Results to file dialog box.
NOTE
hss
function.
6 Click OK to close the Point Generator window.
You have now defined the nominals of the curve.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-33
How to test a PCM printout

You can test a PCM expression in order to ascertain whether the
results are in line with your expectations or whether the PCM
expression requires improvement.
To test a PCM printout:
1 Make sure that the Settings window is open with the PCM
expression.
!
hss
Important
Note that movement commands are executed by the CMM and that
collisions could result. Move the CMM slowly and stop in good time if
necessary.
2 Highlight the PCM expression in question and right-click.
3 Select Compute from the context menu.
The highlighted expression is computed or executed on the basis
of the currently valid values of the variables.
If an error is encountered or parameters for variables have not been
defined, messages to this effect are issued.
15-34
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Working with PCM
Working with PCM

The PCM programming language provides you with a wide choice of
functions and commands that you can use to automate many of the
routine procedures in Calypso.
You can use the search function to search for a certain PCM text (see
Searching for a PCM text on page 15-35).
Additional debug functions are useful for locating bugs in programs
(see How to test PCM commands on page 15-36).
Searching for a PCM text

You can look for certain character strings in PCM printouts
throughout all the measurement plans.
Select Plan Advanced Find PCM Text.
Enter the desired character string in the Find PCM Text dialog box
and click on Search. Calypso searches all PCM printouts of the
measurement plan and shows the character strings found.
The Use Of <pcmtext> dialog box shows all character strings found
in a hierarchically ordered tree structure. The buttons for extending
and compressing all or selected branches make it possible to
customize the tree structure to suit your requirements and to enable
fast access to the points of interest.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-35
Double-click on the icon of the characteristic or feature in this dialog

box to select the corresponding feature in the measurement plan.
How to test PCM commands

NOTE
hss
function.
The procedure for testing PCM commands is as follows:
1 Select Plan Advanced PCM-Test settings.
The PCM test functions window will open.
2 Select PCM Test Printout to log the execution of each formula.

Each time a value is assigned or a variable calculated, the new
value is output in the default printout.
Bear in mind that PCM Test Printout makes the program run
more slowly.
3 Select Activate print command to activate the print commands
in your PCM inputs.
The print command is not executed unless this check box is
activated. In this way you can print the current values of the
variables at any point in your measurement plan.
4 Click on OK.
The window will be closed. The settings are used the next time the
measurement plan is run.
NOTE
hss
15-36
You will be able to use Calypso's speed to best effect if you bear the
following in mind:
Activate the print command only for test purposes.
Activate the PCM text printout only for test purposes.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Examples for PCM
Examples for PCM

The examples below illustrate the versatility at your disposal using
PCM with Calypso.
Using variables
Principle of parameterization
Loading parameter values into a curve
Defining curve using cosine function
Rechecking characteristic after tolerance excursion
Parameterizing coordinate system
Loading a PCM file via dialog
Defining loop with linear offset
Nested loop for field (array)
Parts family and variant control
ASCII parameter file
Example for PCM: Using variables

This example shows how to define variables, how to access them, and
how to use them in computations or other operations.
The measurement plan contains the following variables:
P1=10
vector_1 = vector(10,20,30)
point_1 = point(10.1,20.5,30.02,0,0,1)
text_1= This is a text in the text_1 variable
Parameter accesses to the vector_1 vector:
vector_1.x
=>
return value is 10
vector_1.y
=>
return value is 20
vector_1.z
=>
return value is 30
Parameter accesses to the point_1 point:

point_1.x
=>
return value is 10.1
point_1.y
=>
point_1.z
=>
point_1.nx
=>
return value is 0
point_1.ny
=>
return value is 0
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-37
point_1.nx
=>
return value is 1
Examples for calculations with variables:

Pnew = P1 *2. The return value is 20
Pnew = (vector_1.xpoint_1.z)/2. The return value is 10.01
r=type051_n0.x/2
zdelta=(r1-r)/tanphi
norm=(nx4*nx4)+(ny4*ny4)
Examples for output in the default printout:
NOTE
The Print command is not executed unless you have activated the Test
printout check box in Plan Advanced PCM-Test settings.
NOTE
function.
hss
hss
print("Radius_1 has the value: ",radius_1)

Calypso outputs the following string (example):
Radius_1 has the value: 26.2655
print("r1 = ",r1,", r = ",r,",tanphi = ",tanphi)
Calypso outputs the following string (example):
r1= 23.5, r = 46, tanphi = 0.7874
Example for PCM: Condition with alternative

You can enter conditions with alternatives (IF - ELSE) in the input and
output parameters.
The syntax is:
if CONDITION then
DEFINITION1
else
DEFINITION2
endif
Meaning: If CONDITION is satisfied, DEFINITION1 is processed; if not

satisfied, DEFINITION2 is processed.
functions or other conditions of your choice, always with line breaks
as separators.
The example below shows how this syntax is used:
message("Test if with PCM")
P1 = 1
message("Value ist:" ,P1)
//----------------------------------------------------------
15-38
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Examples for PCM
if P1 == 1 then
message("is equal. Value was:" ,P1)
endif
if P1 < 1 then
message("is less than 1: Value was:" ,P1)
else
if P1 > 1 then
if P1 > 5 then
message("is greater than 5: Value was:" ,P1)
endif
endif
endif
//--------------------------------------------------------test = point(1,2,3,0,0,1)
message("X" ,test.x, "Y",test.y, "Z",test.z, "nx",test.nx, "ny"
,test.ny, "nz" ,test.nz)
if test.x == 1 then message("X value is:" ,test.x)
endif
Example for PCM: Principle of

parameterization
NOTE
hss
function.
The example below illustrates the principle of parameterization:
1 You begin by compiling an ordinary measurement plan:
Take a perforated plate, define the base alignment at the top
left front and take two probings in -Z.
For the two probing points point_A and point_B, define
the two corresponding features Z-value_A and Z-value_B.
2 Define the variables so that the positions of the probing points can
be parameterized:
Select Plan Advanced Parameter, and enter the
following:
X_value_point_A
Y_value_point_A
Z_value_point_A
X_value_point_B
Y_value_point_B
Z_value_point_B
=
=
=
=
=
=
10
25
0
30
40
0
Click on OK to terminate input.

The positions of probing points point_A and point_B can now
be parameterized.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-39
3 You do this by substituting variables for the fixed X, Y and Z

coordinates:
Open probing point point_A, click in the input field for the X
value and select Formula from the context menu.
Click on Settings in the formula window.
The variables you defined beforehand are listed.
Click on X_value_point_A.
Instead of X the measurement plan now contains a variable
with 10 as its parameter value.
Repeat the entire procedure for the Y and Z values of A.
Parameters have now been substituted for the fixed X, Y and Z
values of probing point point_A.
Proceed in precisely the same way to substitute parameters for
the fixed X, Y and Z values of probing point point_B.
4 Run the measurement plan.
The CMM moves to the coordinates.
If you now assign other parameters to the variables
X_value_point_A
Y_value_point_A
Z_value_point_A
X_value_point_B
Y_value_point_B
Z_value_point_B
=
=
=
=
=
=
18
37
0
44
23
5
and restart the measurement plan, the CMM will move to the new
coordinates.
15-40
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Examples for PCM
Example for PCM: Loading parameter values

into a curve
This example illustrates how to generate a curve from 12 individual
points, using the point generator.
1 Create the following parameter file:
type103[1]=point(-65.386, -46.674, 139.666, -0.019, -0.022, 1.0)
type103[2]=point(-81.733, -58.343, 139.007, -0.026, -0.028, 0.999)
type103[3]=point(-98.08, -70.011, 138.154, -0.034, -0.033, 0.999)
type103[4]=point(-114.426, -81.68, 137.101, -0.043, -0.039, 0.998)
type103[5]=point(-130.773, -93.348, 135.821, -0.053, -0.046, 0.998)
type103[6]=point(-147.12, -105.017, 134.29, -0.063, -0.054, 0.997)
type103[7]=point(-163.466, -116.685, 132.499, -0.073, -0.061, 0.995)
type103[8]=point(-179.813, -128.354, 130.44, -0.084, -0.069, 0.994)
type103[9]=point(-196.159, -140.023, 128.113, -0.094, -0.077, 0.993)
type103[10]=point(-216.593, -154.608, 124.829, -0.107, -0.087, 0.99)
type103[11]=point(-220.679, -157.525, 124.122, -0.109, -0.089, 0.99)
type103[12]=point(-224.766, -160.442, 123.4, -0.112, -0.092, 0.99)
These lines define the 12 points from which the curve will be
generated.
If you want to include a comment for each curve point, add the
following lines to the parameter file:
name103[1] = "type103_n1_p1"
name103[2] = "type103_n2_p2"
name103[3] = "type103_n3_p3"
name103[4] = "type103_n4_p4"
name103[5] = "type103_n5_p5"
name103[6] = "type103_n6_p6"
name103[7] = "type103_n7_p7"
name103[8] = "type103_n8_p8"
name103[9] = "type103_n9_p9"
name103[10] = "type103_n10_p10"
name103[11] = "type103_n11_p11"
name103[12] = "type103_n12_p12"
You must also open the Point Generator dialog box (see
below) and define the name103[index] variable in the
Comment box.
2 Open the definition template of the curve.
3 Go to Nominal Definition and select Parameter Data.
The Point Generator dialog box is opened.
4 Enter the following values in the Point Generator dialog box:
Start Index = 1
End Index = 12
Increment = 1
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-41
5 Click on the Point input field and use the context menu to open
the Formula dialog box.
6 Enter the following variable name:
type103[index]
You have now entered a changeable variable name. The point

generator replaces [index] with the current value of the loop
counter in each step, starting with the start index.
7 Close the Formula Interface window.
Example for PCM: Defining curve using

cosine function
You can use the point generator to define a curve by its mathematical
description. This example, by way of illustration, shows how to define
a curve with the aid of the cosine function. When you do this you are
using implicit variable definition and value assignment by means of a
formula.
To define a curve, for example:
1 In the point generator, enter 1 as the Start Index, 50 as the End
Index, and 1 as the Increment.
2 Right-click in the Point input box to open the Formula Interface
window.
point(index*10,50*cos(index*10),0,0,0,1)
This formula defines a series of 50 points with changing X and Y

values, all situated on the plane Z=0 and having the same vector
(0,0,1).
point(x,y,z,nx,ny,nz) defines a point variable. Use the index
loop counter of the point generator as the argument in the cosine
function. In each of the points the x value is index*10, the y value
is 50*cos(index*10), and the z value is 0.
4 Close the Formula Interface window.
Example for PCM: Rechecking characteristic

after tolerance excursion
You can use PCM to recheck a characteristic in the event of an
excursion past a tolerance limit. This is useful, for example, if the
excursion is due to the presence of foreign matter. Once the foreign
matter has been removed by cleaning, a repetition of the
measurement will furnish the actual values.
15-42
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Examples for PCM
The characteristic in this example is the roundness of a hole. If the

characteristic goes out of tolerance, you want to remove foreign
matter from the hole and repeat the measurement.
To accomplish this using PCM functions:
1 Place a loop with 6 repetitions around the characteristic.
2 Point to the Break Condition field, open the context menu and
select Formula...
The Formula dialog box appears on the screen.
3 In the Boolean Expression (Yes / No Test) field, define
status_5==1 as the abortion condition and click on OK.
4 Write the following program code into the field for the output
parameters of the characteristic:
//************************************************************************************************
// Measure Circle hole_5 , check roundness; if out of tolerance, interrupt CNC and request next
// task: repeat feature or measure next feature or terminate CNC run.
//************************************************************************************************
// Defining starting conditions
status_5 = 2
hole_5 = getActual("DIN Round_hole_5").actual
// If out of tolerance, open a window and inquire CNC End, Continue or Repeat
if hole_5 > 0.01 then
message("DIN Roundness of hole_5 is:" ,hole_5)
status_5 = inquire("1=CNC End, 2=Continue, 3=Repeat. Enter a number")
message(status_5,"Is your entry correct?", "DIN Roundness of hole_5 is", hole_5)
if status_5 == 2 then
message("CNC run will be continued")
status_5 = 2
endif
endif
message("The CNC run will be terminated due to excess tolerance in Circle hole_5.")
cncBreak()
endif
message("The measurement of the circle will be repeated.")
if LOOP1 == 5 then
message("CNC run will be terminated due to too many loop runs in feature hole_5.")
cncBreak()
endif
endif
print("Status ist",status_5, "DIN Roundness of hole_5 is", hole_5)
5 You can now run the measurement plan.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-43
Example for PCM: Parameterizing an

alignment
You can parameterize the angle of rotation of a system of
coordinates. This entails creating the angle as a value of a variable in
radian measure. You can also parameterize the offset of a system of
coordinates.
In this example, the system of coordinates has to be rotated 180 or 0
degrees, depending on the value of a variable.
You accomplish this by assigning a variable, for example
PartRotationActive a value of 0 or 1 in the input parameters at the
applicable points in the measurement plan:
1 Open the base alignment.
2 Select Change active Base Alignment and click on Special.
3 In the Special Functions window, click Rotate by an angle.
4 Right-click in the input field for the angle to the context menu,
open the Formula dialog box and enter the following:
3.14159265359 * PartRotationActive
In radian measure 180 corresponds to the number =

3.14159265359. The result of the formula depends on the variable
PartRotationActive:
When PartRotationActive=0 is set, the formulas return value is
3.14159265359 * 0 = 0.
The base alignment is not rotated.
When PartRotationActive=1 is set, the formulas return value is
3.14159265359 * 1 = 180.
The base alignment is rotated 180.
Example for PCM: Loading a PCM file via

dialog
You can manually load a PCM file for the current measurement plan
by clicking Plan Advanced Parameter. With the command
readPCMFile, you can have the same function run automatically.
NOTE
hss
function.
If you are using character string functions and polls, you can ask for
the required file name in the dialog.
15-44
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Examples for PCM
With the following lines, you can implement a poll for the desired
parameter file and the loading of the relevant file:
// Select file
PCM_PARA=inquireText("Which file do you want?",cr(),"File1=1",cr(),"File2=2",cr(),"File3=3")
// Compose file name
PCM_Filename="Parameterset_"+PCM_PARA
// Specify path for files
path=C:/calypso/home/om/PCMFILES
// Load PCM file
readPCMFile (PCM_filename)
Example for PCM: Defining loop with linear

offset
Let us assume that you want to parameterize a hole pattern with
linear offset in X. You can use the Pattern function or PCM to
accomplish this task. The PCM is illustrated here. You must
parameterize the X, Y and Z coordinates along with the diameter and
the offset in X.
NOTE
hss
function.
To define the loop with linear offset:
1 Select Plan Advanced Parameter and enter the following
values:
Circle_position = point(20.5,15.5,-5,0,0,1)
OffsetX = 10
Circle_diameter = 50
2 Parameterize the circle:

Define the base alignment.
Define the circle with measurement strategy.
Open the feature definition template for a circle and enter
parameters in the Formula Interface window.
Input box X: circle_position.x
Input box Y: circle_position.y
Input box Z: circle_position.z
Input box D: circle diameter
3 Define the Diameter characteristic and place a loop over it.
If more than one characteristic is needed, e.g. X value, Y value and
diameter, you have to parameterize the nominals for all
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-45
characteristics. Then combine the characteristics in a group and

place the loop around the group.
4 Parameterize the nominal.
5 Place a loop over the characteristic:
Start = 1.
End = 5
Increment = 1.
The next step is to update the feature with loop counter and offset
parameter.
6 In the Circle definition template, select Formula from the
context menu opened by right-clicking in the X Nominal field.
The field for the X value contains the circle_position.x variable.
You want to increment this value by the offsetX value each time
the loop is run.
Enter the following in the formula:
circle_position.x + ((LOOP1 1) * offsetX)
LOOP1 is the loop variable of the 1st loop; you can transfer it into
the formula by clicking on Loop. The start index for LOOP1 is the
value from the Start input box for the loop.
The loop is run. The expression for the X value assumes the following
values one after the other: 20.5, 30.5, 40.5, 50.5, 60.5.
Example for PCM: Nested loop for field

(array)
In this example a perforated plate is to be parameterized. The number
of holes and the positions of the holes are both random. Build up the
circles as an array (field) and use a loop in the measurement plan
which you use to pass through the array index.
An array can be obtained by indexing a variable with square brackets.
The array will, of course, have to be set as a parameter for the actual
processing process. In this case, use the LOOP1 loop index.
15-46
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Examples for PCM
1 Create the following ASCII file for PCM:

// Circle coordinates as points with values for x,y,z
//
CirclePos[1] = point(10,20,-5,0,0,1)
CirclePos[2] = point(15.30,-5,0,0,1)
CirclePos[3] = point(22,28.3,-5,0,0,1)
CirclePos[4] = point(40.5,30.8,-5,0,0,1)
Circle_diameter[1] = 70
NumberCircles = 4
// Comment strings for each circle
textCircle[1] = "This is circle A"
textCircle[2] = "This is circle B"
textCircle[3] = "This is circle C"
textCircle[4] = "This is circle D"
The ASCII parameter file can be generated using the Notepad in

Windows NT.
2 Save this file as perplate_A.para.
3 Create a measurement plan with base alignment and a circle.
The elements of the base alignment can also be parameterized.
They are omitted here for the sake of clarity.
4 Define a circle with measurement strategy.
5 Define each of the variables contained in the parameter file
described above as an array (with square brackets and the LOOP1
loop variable) and read in the perplate_A.para parameter file.
The parameters from the file are assigned to the variables.
6 Open the feature definition template for the circle.
In the X Nominal input field, enter CirclePos[LOOP1].x.
In the Y Nominal input field, enter CirclePos[LOOP1].y.
In the Z Nominal input field, enter CirclePos[LOOP1].z.
In the D Nominal input field, enter Circlediameter[LOOP1].
Open the commentary field with Formula in the
Name/Comment window and enter the textCircle[LOOP1]
text parameter.
7 Define the characteristics X value, Y value and diameter. The
nominal values are parameterized using Formula.
8 Combine the characteristics in a group.
9 Place a loop over the group:
Start = 1.
End = NumberCircles
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-47
You can import the NumberCircles variable into the End field
using the Formula Interface window.
Increment = 1.
10 Start the measurement plan.
Depending on the content of the parameter file, you can use this
measurement plan to measure different numbers of circles with
different positions and diameters.
Example for PCM: Parts family and variant

control
PCM enables you to measure different variants of a workpiece using a
single measurement plan.
NOTE
hss
function.
Let us assume, for example, that a workpiece has two variants, A and
B. Variant B has three extra holes with a diameter of 10 mm.
1 Generate a complete measurement plan, complete with the three
holes.
2 Combine all characteristics of the three holes in the group called
Additional hole pattern variant B".
Selection of the variant is controlled by means of a PCM parameter
as a switch.
3 Select Plan Advanced Parameter and enter the following:
// Measure additional hole pattern variant B when parameter is 1
MeasureAdditionalHolePatternActive = 1
4 Highlight the Additional hole pattern variant B" group and set a
condition:
Select Condition from the context menu.
Click in the input box for the condition to open the context
menu and open the Formula Interface window.
In the Formula Interface window, click on Settings.
Confirm the MeasureAdditionalHolePatternActive variable.
Insert == 1" as an additional entry.
The condition is now defined: the Additional hole pattern variant
B" group is measured only when the
MeasureAdditionalHolePatternActive" variable is equal to 1.
The Additional hole pattern variant B" group is measured.
15-48
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Examples for PCM
6 Select Plan Advanced Parameter and enter the following:

// Measure additional hole pattern variant B when parameter is 1
MeasureAdditionalHolePatternActive = 0
7 Run the measurement plan again.

The Additional hole pattern variant B" group is not measured in this
run.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-49
Example for PCM: ASCII parameter file

Example of an ASCII parameter file (*.PARA file):
// Text parameters ------------------------------------------who = "File generated by ZEISS-IMT Training Center"
nameOfCircle_1 = "Circle_1"
text1 = "type034_n2_p2"
nextText = "This is in Front"
// Text parameters as an array --------------------name101[1] = "type101_n1_p1"
name101[2] = "type101_n2_p2"
name101[3] = "type101_n3_p3"
name101[4] = "type101_n4_p4"
name101[5] = "type101_n5_p5"
name101[6] = "type101_n6_p6"
name101[7] = "type101_n7_p7"
name101[8] = "type101_n8_p8"
name101[9] = "type101_n9_p9"
name101[10] = "type101_n10_p10"
// Numeric parameters -----------------------------Partnumber = 10
PartRotationAktiv = 1
CREATION_DATE = 950516
CREATION_TIME = 0000
DESIGN_DATE = 950516
NUMBER = 772209709750
PART_HEIGHT = 316.000
PLACE = 2
X_Circle_1 = 10
Y_Circle_1 = 20
Z_Circle_1 = 15
D_Circle_1 = 40
X_Circle_2 = 250
Y_Circle_2 = 40
Z_Circle_2 = -15
D_Circle_2 = 25
X_Circle_3 = -12
Y_Circle_3 = -20
Z_Circle_3 = 50
D_Circle_3 = 12
// Numeric parameters as an array type vector ------------------type086[1] = vector( 10.0, 0.0, 0.0 )
type086[2] = vector( 0.0, -20.0, 0.0 )
type086[3] = vector( 30.0, 20.0, 10.0 )
type086[4] = vector( 17.5, 13.8, 50.0 )
// Numeric parameters as an array type point -------------------CurveFront[1] = point( 216.023, 0.0, 69.698, 0.984, -0.0, 0.176 )
CurveFront[2] = point( 206.34, 0.0, 102.988, 0.916, -0.0, 0.401 )
15-50
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
PCM quick reference
PCM quick reference

You need the following information in order to program with PCM:
PCM syntax on page 15-51
Variables in PCM on page 15-52
Arithmetic and comparative operators in PCM on page 15-53
Overview of PCM functions:
Mathematical functions
Contains the syntax for mathematical functions such as sine,
cosine, etc.
Character string functions
Contains the syntax for functions using character strings such as
asc, chr, len, etc.
Input and output
Contains the functions that control screen input and output.
File commands
Contains the functions that are required to work with files and
directories.
Measurement-specific functions
Contains the functions that process measured values generated
by a measurement plan run and that read stylus properties.
CMM-specific functions and movement commands
Contains the functions for querying CMM-specific data and for
controlling the CMM.
System commands
Contains the system calls.
Custom printout
Contains the functions for activating and deactivating the
custom printout and for determining the formats.
Overview of the various types of condition (IF instructions)
PCM syntax
Like the programming languages Basic, C, Fortran and so on, PCM
uses a functional syntax with the following rules:
Definitions and value assignments as follows:
variable_name=value
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-51
Blanks are not permitted in names and formulas; the syntax is

case-sensitive, so it distinguishes between uppercase and
lowercase letters.
Multiplication and division precede addition and subtraction when
formulas are resolved.
The decimal separator is the period (example 3.85).
In functions, the function parameters (the arguments) are in
parentheses and separated by commas.
In commands (procedure calls), the function parameters (the
arguments) can be omitted. Example: getActual().
Comments can be entered in each line: everything following the
//" string is ignored.
Variables in PCM
There are four types of variable in PCM. The type of variable is defined
implicitly by the value assignment:
Arrays
Variable type
Examples of value assignments
number
e = 2.71828
Variable2 = 2.0
P1 = 80
vector
Axis=vector(10,12,0)
point
CylinderB = point(-10,12.5,0,0,0,1)
string
Text_1 = "Circle"
Text_2 = Enter the number:
Arrays can also be defined with variables using special value

assignments with square brackets. Example:
array[1] = point(-10,12.5,0,0,0,1)
array[2] = point(-12.12.5,0,0,0,1)
array[3] = point(-14,12.5,0,0,0,1)
array[4] = point(-16.12.5,0,0,0,1)
In this case, array is an array consisting of 4 variables of the point
type.
15-52
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
PCM quick reference
The array index in square brackets can also be specified by a variable

(of type number, as an integer). You can therefore define an array of
any length in a single loop instruction. Example:
for I = 1 to numberTeeth
type[I] = inquireNumber("Which tooth type is in position number ",I)
next I
You can gain direct access to a specific element in an array by
specifying the array index. Example:
Length = output values[4]
Arithmetic and comparative operators in

PCM
You can use the following arithmetic operators in PCM:
Operator
Result
Sum
Difference
Product
Quotient
**
Power
You can use the following comparative operators for conditions in

PCM:
Operator
Result
<
Truth value of a<b
>
Truth value of a>b
<>
Truth value of a not equal to b
==
Truth value of a=b
>=
Truth value of a greater than or equal to b
<=
Truth value of a less than or equal to b
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-53
Mathematical functions in PCM

Angle conversions
You can use the following functions to convert angle values in PCM:
Function
Result
rad (angular degree)
Radian value of angular degrees
deg (radian angle)
Gon angle value of radian angle
angle (angular degree)
Angular degree (decimal) of angular degrees

The angular degree is indicted in
Degrees[,Minutes[,Seconds]]
Trigonometric Functions
PCM supports the following trigonometric functions:
Function
Result
sin (angular degree)
Sine value
sinRad (radiant angle)
Sine value
cos (angular degree)
Cosine value
cosRad (radiant angle)
Cosine value
tan (angular degree)
Tangent value
tanRad (radiant angle)
Tangent value
arcsin (value)
Arc-sine in degrees
radArcsin (value)
Arc-sine in rad
arccos (value)
Arc-cosine in degrees
radArccos (value)
Arc-cosine in rad
arctan (value)
Arc-tangent in degrees
radArctan (value)
Arc-tangent in rad
arctan2 (value1,value2)
Arc tangent from the quotient value1/value2 in degrees
radArctan2 (value1,value2)
Arc tangent from the quotient value1/value2 in rad
Other functions
Other mathematical functions are available:
Operator
Result
squared(value)
Value squared
sqrt(value)
Square root of value
15-54
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
PCM quick reference
Operator
Result
exp(value)
evalue
ln(value)
Natural logarithm of value
log(value)
Common logarithm of value
mod(value1,value2)
Value1 modulo value2
int(value)
Integral proportion of value
abs(value)
|Value| (=absolute value of the value)
round(value[,figures])
Value, rounded to the given number of places;

if specification of number of places omitted: 0 places
sign([value1,]value2)
Sign of value2 times value1 (default of value1 = 1):

Value1, if value2<0
+ Value1, if value2 0
signWithZero([value1,]value2)
Sign of value2 times value1 (default of value1 = 1):

Value1, if value2<0
0, if value2 = 0
+ value1, if value2>0
max(value1[,value2[, ... ]])
Maximum of the indicated values
min(value1[,value2[, ... ]])
Minimum of the indicated values
ord(boolean value)
1 for true
0 for false
Examples:
squared(3) = 9
sqrt(225) = 15
exp(0) = 1
ln(1) = 0
log(10000) = 4
mod(22,8) = 6
int(34.5674) = 34
abs(-35.335value) = 35.335
round(35.335,2) = 35,34
sign(-12,-34) = 12
sign(-12) = -1
max(1,2,5,8,3) = 8
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-55
Character string functions in PCM

You can use the following character string functions in PCM:
Function
Result
asc(character)
ASCII code (number) of specified character
chr(number)
Character with the specified ASCII code
format(number)
Character string consisting of the figures and characters

of the number
val(character string)
Number represented by the character string
len(character string)
Length of the character string
inStr([startIndex,] character string1, character

string2)
Position of the first occurrence of character string2 within

character string1 after the startIndex-th character or the
first character
mid(character string,startIndex[,length])
Character string, consisting of the characters from the

startIndex-th character to the end of the character string
or to the (startIndex+length-1)-th character
strElement(n,char,character string)
The n-th element of the character string, when char is

regarded as a separator between the elements
subStr(character string,startIndex,endIndex)
Character string, consisting of the characters from the

startIndex-th character to the endIndex-th character.
Examples:
asc("8") = 56
chr(111) = "o"
format(3278,45) = "3278,45"
val("3278,45") = 3278,45
len("This is a character string") = 26
inStr(3,"Position","o") = 7
inStr("Position","o") = 2
mid("PCM functions",1,3) = "PCM"
strElement(4,",","hello,here,we,are,again") = "are"
strElement(4,"e","here,we,are,again") = "ar"
subStr("This is a test",4,9) = "s is a"
15-56
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
PCM quick reference
PCM functions: Input and output

confirm
Displays the Question ! window on the screen and shows true after
clicking on Yes and false after clicking on No. The syntax is:
confirm("question")
display
Displays the Display window on the screen in which a character
string is shown. The CNC run is not interrupted. The syntax is:
display("message")
inquire
Corresponds to the inquireNumber command, but is supported by
PCM only for the sake of upwards compatibility. The syntax is:
variablename = inquire("Dialog text for poll")
inquireNumber
The inquireNumber command can be used to create a dialog for
querying a numeric value. The syntax is:
variablename = inquireNumber("poll text for workpiece number")
or
variablename =
inquireNumber("line1"[,cr()],"line2"[,cr()],...,"lines")
Here the optional elements "cr() each cause a line break on the
screen.
Example 1:
P1 = inquireNumber("Enter 1 to continue measuring")
if P1 == 1 then
message("You entered 1, so I will continue measuring")
else
if P1 <> 1 then
message("You do not want to continue measuring.")
endif
endif
Example 2:
number = 10
P1 = inquireNumber("Last word was: ",number,cr(), "Enter new number:")
message("You have entered the number:",P1)
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-57
Example 3:
type = inquireNumber("Cone tooth = 1", cr(),
"Cylinder form tooth = 2", cr(),
"Long cylinder tooth = 3", cr(),
"Spherical form tooth = 4", cr(),
"Please enter number")
inquireList
The inquireList command can be used to create a menu for querying
a character string. The syntax is:
variablename = inquireList("Menu title","Menu item1","Menu
item2",...,"Menu itemn")
The command causes the appearance of a menu with the given title
line on the screen. As a value, the variable is assigned the character
string of the menu item which has been selected with a mouse click
or the arrow keys and confirmed with OK.
Examples:
NameForPrintoutheader = inquireList("Name for printout header","Test printout","Default
printout",)
inquireParameterList
If the inquireParameterList command is contained in the presettings
or postsettings, the user can open a dialog box and enter the
parameters in it using a list. The syntax is:
inquireParameterList("p1","k1",...,"pn","kn")
All variables (p1 to pn) that are to be entered via the list must be
contained in the brackets together with comments k1 to kn.
To open the dialog box, the user must highlight the line containing
the command and select Calculate in the context menu.
inquirePasswordText
Opens the dialog box for entering a text. The entered text is masked
(in the form of asterisks). The function supplies the return value of the
entered text. The syntax is:
inquirePasswordText("dialog title")
The character string entered for dialog title is written in the title bar of
the dialog box.
Example:
enteredText = inquirePasswordText("password:")
15-58
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
PCM quick reference
inquireText
The inquireText command can be used to create a dialog for
querying a character string. The syntax is:
variablename = inquireText("text line")
or
variablename = inquireText("text line1"[,cr()],"text
line2"[,cr()],...,"text lines")
Here the cr() optional elements each cause a line break on the
screen.
Examples:
string1 = inquireText("Enter the name")
message
Outputs the current values of one or more variables. The syntax is:
message(variable,variable,variable,...)
Inserting cr() instead of a variable causes a line break on the screen.

Example:
message("The value of variable P1 is: ", P1, cr(), "The value of variable P2 is: ", P2)
print
Prints the current values of one or more variables in the printout.
NOTE
hss
function.
The syntax is:
print(variable;variable;variable;...)
NOTE
hss
The print command will not be active unless you have activated the
Activate print command check box after selecting Plan
Advanced PCM-Test Settings in the PCM-TestFunctions
window. This means you can use the command for test purposes.
Examples:
print("Print this dialog text in the printout")
print("Print the value of variable P1 in the printout"; P1)
redrawCAD
Recalculates all features and updates the CAD window. The syntax is:
redrawCAD()
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-59
PCM Functions: File commands

addToFile
Adds a line to a file. If the file does not exist, it will be specially
created. The syntax is:
addToFile(file name,value1,...)
Whenever the file name is used without path name, this function will
access the directory of the current measurement plan. If the name of
the drive is missing, the current directory will be used.
Example: addToFile(wd+"\info.txt","line",1)
Here wd is a variable that contains a path specification.
copyFile
Copies a file, i.e. saves a copy of the file under a name to be specified.
The syntax is:
copyFile("file name1","file name2")
NOTE
hss
If a file with the name file name2 already exists, this will be
overwritten.
Example: copyFile("test.txt","test2.txt") creates a copy of test.txt
in the current measurement plan directory and saves it under the
name test2.txt.
deleteFile
Deletes the specified file. The syntax is:
deleteFile(file name)
getActualInspectionDir
Returns the directory of the current measurement plan. The syntax is:
getActualInspectionDir()
getWD
Returns the current directory. The syntax is:
getWD()
15-60
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
PCM quick reference
Example: wd = getWD()
readPCMFile
Reads in a PCM file. The syntax is:
readPCMFile (file name)
The new parameters which are read in will, in each case, overwrite
the current parameters of the same name.
NOTE
hss
The parameters which were available before the CNC run will only be
temporarily overwritten. The original start setting will be used for the
next CNC run.
The file name can also be entered in the form of several parameters.
The parameters will, depending on the type, be put together to form
a string.
Example1:
readPCMFile("testparameter.para ")
Example2:
P1 = "c:"
P2= "\calypso\home\om\ "+"test.para "
readPCMFile(P1,P2)
Example3:
readPCMFile("c: ", "\calypso\home\om ", "test.para ")
renameFile
Renames a file. The syntax is:
renameFile("file name old","file name new")
Example: renameFile("test.txt","Test2.txt") renames the test.txt file
test2.txt.
writeActualsToVDA
Saves filtered actual values in VDA format in the specified file.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-61
NOTE
The actual values refer to the base alignment and do not contain any
radius correction.
hss
The syntax is:

writeActualsToVDA(["characteristic name"],"file name")
The characteristic name is optional. If no characteristic name is

indicated, the current characteristic will be used.
The function supplies true as soon as saving is completed,
otherwise the function supplies false.
PCM functions: Measurement-specific

functions
NOTE
hss
Coordinate values returned by getActual, getNominal and measure

always refer to the base alignment of the current feature.
baseSystem
Returns characteristics of the base alignment. The syntax is:
baseSystem().characteristic
Possible values of characteristic are: x, y, z, valueA,

euler1, euler2 and euler3:
Function
Return value
baseSystem().x
X value of base alignment
baseSystem().y
Y value of base alignment
baseSystem().z
Z value of base alignment
baseSystem().valueA
valueA value of base alignment
baseSystem().euler1
euler1 of base alignment in rads (angle of

inclination)
baseSystem().euler2

inclination)
baseSystem().euler3

inclination )
The formula for calculating the plane angle of the base alignment is:
plane angle = (euler1 euler3) * 180 / p
Example: result=baseSystem().x
The X value of the base alignment is written into the result variable.
15-62
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
PCM quick reference
getActual
In conjunction with an argument, it returns a certain current value of
a feature, coordinate system or bore pattern.
The syntax is:
getActual("feature_name").characteristic
The feature name can be indexed directly or with a variable (for

example, a loop variable):
getActual("Cone",3).x
or
getActual("Cone",LOOP3).x
characteristic is a dummy for the following:

Function
Return value
X value of the reference point

x value of the origin for coordinate systems and
bore patterns
Y value of the reference point

Y value of the origin for coordinate systems and
bore patterns
Z value of the reference point

Z value of the origin for coordinate systems and
bore patterns
a1
Angle 1
a2
Angle 2
inclinationAngle
Angle of Inclination
rotationAngle
Angle of Rotation
diameter
Diameter
radiusD2
Radius Two
radius
Radius
angle
Angle
len
Length
deviation
Deviation in the set tolerance mode
sigma
Deviation
form
Form error
coordPolRadius
Polar coordinate, radius
coordPolAngle
Polar coordinate, angle
coordPolHeight
Polar coordinate, height
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-63
Function
Return value
apexAngle
Cone angles
apexAngleHalf
Half Cone Angle
Used without an argument, it returns the current value of the

characteristic. The syntax is:
getActual()
getNominal
Returns a certain nominal of a feature. The syntax is:
getNominal("feature_name").characteristic
See the table above for the possible values of characteristic.
measure
In conjunction with an argument, it returns a certain current value of
a feature, coordinate system or bore pattern.
The syntax is:
measure("feature_name"[,loop index]).characteristic
The feature name can be indexed directly or with a variable (for

example, a loop variable):
measure("Cone",3).x
or
measure("Cone",LOOP3).x
See the table above for the possible values of characteristic.

Used without an argument, it returns the current value of the
characteristic. The syntax is:
measure()
PCM functions: CMM-specific functions and

travel commands
cncBreak
Breaks off the CNC run. The syntax is:
cncBreak()
The CNC run is broken off, the stop light changes to red.
15-64
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
PCM quick reference
displayPositionCMM
Opens the Position dialog box, in which the current coordinates of
the probe are displayed in the machine coordinate system in the same
way as with a dial gage.
The syntax is:
displayPositionCMM()
This dialog allows the user to set each coordinate or all coordinates to
0. In terms of calculation, this means that the local vector of the
position at which zeroing took place is subtracted from the
respectively current position in the displays in the further course of the
process.
After closing with OK, the dialog returns the most recently displayed
coordinate as the result.
Example: starting_point=displayPositionCMM() assigns the variable
starting_point the value 0.005443d@20.345677d@200.311123d.
getCNCMode
Supplies the travel mode of the CMM: "manual" or "cnc". The syntax
is:
getCNCMode()
getPositionCMM
Supplies the current position of the probe in machine coordinates as
the result. The syntax is:
getPositionCMM()
Example: starting_point=getPositionCMM() assigns the variable

starting_point the value 0.005443d@20.345677d@200.311123d.
getStylus
Returns characteristics of the stylus. The syntax is:
getStylus("stylus_name","plate_name").characteristic
Stylus name and plate name must be strings enclosed in straight

quotes ("). The possible values of characteristic are: radius,
diameter or angle The current stylus name can be omitted.
Examples:
Command/assignment
Return value/effect
getStylus().radius
The current stylus tip radius is returned.
getStylus("stylus_+Y").radius
The stylus tip radius of stylus_+Y is returned.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-65
Command/assignment
Return value/effect
getStylus("stylus_+Y", "plate_A").radius
The radius of stylus_+Y is returned from plate_A.
StylusDiameter=
getStylus("stylus_+Y","plate_A").radius
The StylusDiameter variable receives the radius of

stylus_+Y from plate_A.
getTemperatureCorrection
Returns characteristics of the temperature correction object. The
syntax is:
getTemperatureCorrection().characteristic
See the table for the possible values of characteristic:

Function
Return value
getTemperatureCorrection().temperatureCorrection
Boolean value: temperature

correction is active or not active
getTemperatureCorrection().coefficientPart
Thermal expansion coefficient of the

component
getTemperatureCorrection().temperaturePart1
Temperature of workpiece sensor 1
getTemperatureCorrection().temperaturePart2
Temperature of workpiece sensor 2
getTemperatureCorrection().temperatureStylus
Temperature of the temperature

stylus
getTemperatureCorrection().temperatureTableFrontBottom
Sensor temperature at the bottom

front of the table
getTemperatureCorrection().temperatureTableFrontTop
Sensor temperature at the top front

of the table
getTemperatureCorrection().temperatureTableRearBottom
Sensor temperature at the bottom

rear of the table
getTemperatureCorrection().temperatureTableRearTop
Sensor temperature at the top rear of

the table
getTemperatureCorrection().temperatureX1
Temperture of sensor 1 on the X scale
getTemperatureCorrection().temperatureX2
Temperture of sensor 2 on the X scale
getTemperatureCorrection().temperatureX
Temperature of the scale in the X axis
getTemperatureCorrection().temperatureY
Temperature of the scale in the Y axis
getTemperatureCorrection().temperatureZ
Temperature of the scale in Z axis
positionCMM
Moves the probe to the specified position (in machine coordinates). If
no axis sequence is specified, the CMM moves in Z first, then Y, and
finally X.
15-66
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
PCM quick reference
!
hss
Important
This is a direct movement command addressing the CMM. Risk of
collision. The probe moves directly to the position; the clearance
planes are ignored.
The syntax is:
positionCMM(x,y,z,["axis1","axis2","axis3"])
The parameters 4 to 6 define the sequence in which the coordinates

are executed.
Use: For example, you can define movements to pickup positions in
the output parameters of the measurement plan.
Example: positionCMM(500,-100,-200)
The CMM moves first in Z to -200 mm, then in Y to -100 mm and
then in X to +500 mm in the machines system of coordinates.
Example: positionCMM(200,-200,-10,"Y","Z","X")
The CMM moves first in Y to -200 mm, then in Z to -10 mm and then
in X to 200 mm.
positionRS
Moves the probe to the specified coordinates in the specified
coordinate system with the specified stylus. (Standard: Base
alignment). The syntax is:
positionRS(X,Y,Z,[coordinate system,stylus])
searchDistance
Sets the search distance. The syntax is:
searchDistance(distance)
In this case distance is the distance traveled by the probe before

nominal probing. This value must be entered in 0.1 mm. It applies
until it is overwritten or canceled by a reset (stop light goes from
green to red and then back to green).
Examples:
searchDistance(10.000) => Search distance before nominal probing is
1 mm
searchDistance(60,000) => Search distance before nominal probing is
6 mm
setCNCMode
Sets the travel mode of the CMM. The syntax is:
setCNCMode(mode)
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-67
Values for mode: "manual" or "cnc".
stepRS
Moves the probe along X, Y, Z relative to the current position in the
specified coordinate system (standard: base alignment). The syntax is:
stepRS(X,Y,Z,[coordinate system])
PCM functions: System commands

closeSocket
Closes the communication channel between Calypso and the external
application again. The syntax is:
closeSocket()
It is used together with the systemCallForResultAccess command. It

serves to close the CalypsoInterface, with which measured data is
taken over from Calypso.
For information on using the PCM commands and programming the
application that accesses measured data from Calypso, see
Programmed access to measuring results on page 9-51.
date
Returns the current date in the respective country language. The
syntax is:
date()
Example: date() = "07.12.03"
dateAndTime
Returns system date and time. The syntax is:
dateAndTime()
Example: date=dateAndTime(). Date and time are written into the

date variable (of type string) in the format defined by the system.
dateInNumbers
Returns the current date as numerical values. The syntax is:
dateInNumbers()
Example: dateInNumbers() = "07.12.03"
openSocket
Opens a communication channel between Calypso and an external
application. The syntax is:
15-68
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
PCM quick reference
openSocket()
It is used together with the systemCallForResultAccess command. It

serves to open the CalypsoInterface, with which measured data is
taken over from Calypso.
systemCall
Calls system commands. The syntax is:
systemCall("filename")
The filename file is called and executed. filename must be an

executable file, e.g. a batch file or a program. You can use this
function to copy results to another computer, for example.
Example: systemCall("D:\home\om\philips\main\help.bat")
The statements in the help.bat file are executed.
NOTE
hss
Calypso is not stopped during execution of the system command. Any

CNC run will continue.
systemCallForResultAccess
Calls system commands and waits for them to be processed. The
syntax is:
systemCallForResultAccess("executable command that starts an
*.exe")
Starts an application. This application can access Calypso data while

the measurement plan is not being processed further. By contrast,
systemCallWithWait does not permit access to Calypso data and
systemCall does not stop the CNC run.
This command must be used together with the openSocket and
closeSocket commands.
In the example below, commands are sent to Calypso by the
SimpleBasicTest Visual Basic Script via the Weprom interface:
openSocket()
systemCallForResultAccess("WScript c:\temp\SimpleBasicTest.vbs")
closeSocket()

61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-69
systemCallWithWait
Calls system commands and waits for them to be processed. The
syntax is:
systemCallWithWait("filename")
The filename file is called and executed. Calypso will wait until the
file "filename" has been processed.
filename must be an executable file, e.g. a batch file or a program.
Example: systemCallWithWait("D:\home\om\philips\main\help.bat")
The statements in the help.bat file are executed. Calypso will wait
until the batch file has been processed.
NOTE
hss
It is not possible to access the measured data of the current

measurement plan with this command.
time
Supplies the current time. The syntax is:
time()
Example: time() = "9:46:28"
timeInSeconds
Supplies the current time in seconds. The syntax is:
timeInSeconds()
Example: timeInSeconds() = "35246"
wait(nSeconds)
Interrupts the measurement plan run for nSeconds seconds The
syntax is:
wait(nSeconds)
Example:
wait(10)
The measurement plan run is stopped for 10 seconds.
PCM functions: Custom printout

getRecordHead
Returns the current value of a printout header variable. The syntax is:
getRecordHead("printout header variable")
15-70
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
PCM quick reference
You will find a complete list of all printout header variables in

Printout header data (reference) on page 9-31.
presentationOff
Switches off a custom printout. The syntax is:
presentationOff()
Example: You want a graphic to appear only when certain

characteristics are measured. To accomplish this, you define a custom
printout with a graphic. You switch off the custom printout by default
in the start parameters of the measurement plan. You then request
the custom printout for the characteristics in question by opening the
Settings window and specifying presentationOn() in the input
parameters.
presentationOn
Switches on a custom printout. The syntax is:
presentationOn()
setProtocolSetting
Defines the settings for the custom printout. The syntax is:
setProtocolSetting("setting","value")
The following can be set for setting and value:

setting
value
outputFormat
Name of the desired output format
userDefinedPages
Name of the file custom defined page to be attached to the custom

printout.
Prerequisite: User Defined Pages in the Format Custom Printout
dialog box is activated.
Examples:
setProtocolSetting("outputFormat","default") defines the default
format as the output format.
setProtocolSetting("userDefinedPages","userProtocol1.gra") attaches
the userProtocol1.gra page to the existing printout.
setRecordHead
Sets the value of a printout header variable. The syntax is:
setRecordHead("printout header variable","value")
You will find a complete list of all printout header variables in

Printout header data (reference) on page 9-31.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-71
Overview: Conditions in PCM

The Simple Condition
The syntax of the simple condition is as follows:
if CONDITION then
DEFINITION
endif
Meaning:
If CONDITION is satisfied, DEFINITION is processed.
If CONDITION is not satisfied, DEFINITION is not processed.
A DEFINITION can be formulas, value assignments, functions,
conditions or loops of your choice, always with line breaks as
separators.

The syntax of the condition with alternative is as follows:
if CONDITION then
DEFINITION1
else
DEFINITION2
endif
Meaning:
If CONDITION is satisfied, DEFINITION1 is processed.
If CONDITION is not satisfied, DEFINITION2 is processed.
functions, conditions or loops of your choice, always with line breaks
as separators.
15-72
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
PCM quick reference
Example of a condition with alternative
message("Test if with PCM")

P1 = 1
message("Value is :",P1)
//---------------------------------------------------------if P1 == 1 then
message("is equal. Value was:" ,P1)
endif
if P1 < 1 then
message("is less than 1: Value was:" ,P1)
else
if P1 > 1 then
if P1 > 5 then
endif
endif
endif
//---------------------------------------------------------test = point(1,2,3,0,0,1)
message("X" ,test.x, "Y",test.y, "Z" ,test.z, "nx" ,test.nx, "ny"
,test.ny, "nz" ,test.nz)
Overview: Loops in PCM

Defined loop
The defined loop has the following syntax:
for index=start to end [step]
DEFINITION
next index
The following must be inserted:

for index the name of the loop variables (random),
for start, end and step whole numbers,
for DEFINITION random formulas, value assignments, functions or
separators.
Meaning: the functions or commands under DEFINITION are
processed (end - start + 1)/step times, whereby "step" is set to 1 if no
other specification is made. At the same time, the specific value for
index is always entered in DEFINITION: at first start, then start+step,
start+2*step etc. up to end. With next i, the loop index is
incremented by step each time.
Example
for i=1 to 4
message(i,". step: ",step[i])
next i
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
15-73
Conditional loop
The conditional loop has the following syntax:
repeat DEFINITION until CONDITION
Meaning:
1.) DEFINITION is processed. Then CONDITION is tested.
2.) If CONDITION is fulfilled, the loop is ended.
3.) If CONDITION is not satisfied, DEFINITION is processed again
and CONDITION is tested again. Continues with 2.).
The CONDITION can be set up as a logical combination of several
subconditions.
separators.
As the condition is only tested after the first run, a conditional loop
must run at least once.
!
hss
15-74
Important
Please note that infinite repetitions are possible with the conditional
loop if the condition is never fulfilled.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Chapter
16
.................................................................................................................................
Geometric elements such as circle, line, plane etc. can easily be

measured with the basic version of Calypso. To measure freely formed
part surfaces, special measuring techniques are required. The Curve
and 3D curve features and the Curve form characteristic are for
measuring and evaluating known and unknown open and closed 2D
and 3D curves.
Curve measurement is one of Calypso's optional features. You can
license this functionality and have it enabled in your system if it would
be of use to you. Contact your Carl Zeiss Service for more
information.
This chapter assumes that you are familiar with the procedures for
defining features and characteristics (see Defining features on
page 5-2 and Defining characteristics on page 6-7).

Basics about curve measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Defining the curve feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
Defining tolerances for a curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-31
Defining the result calculation of a curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-36
Using curves in the CAD model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-39
Measuring strategy for the curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-41
Scanning a known contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-46
Characteristics for the curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-52
Working with the results of curve measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . 16-60
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16- 1
Basics about curve measurement

Because curves are sophisticated geometric elements, there are some
important things you should know about how Calypso evaluates their
form and location.
Definition and display of curves

In Calypso, a curve is defined by a finite set of points. Calypso uses
spline functions to interpolate between the curve points in order to
display the curve as a continuity in the CAD window.
Both the nominal and the actual values of the curve points are each
defined by 6 values:
3 point coordinates (X, Y, Z)
1 normal vector (U, V, W) or its 3 direction cosines (NX, NY, NZ).
The three curve types which can be measured and calculated by
Calypso are presented in the following examples. These examples will
help you to understand the principles.
Flat curve (2D curve)
Flat curves are produced when a plane (imaginary) intersects with a
body. Flat curves occur, for example, on workpieces such as
camshafts, which exhibit two-dimensional curves.
All the points which constitute a flat curve are on a single plane
that can (also) have any orientation in space. Consequently, the
normal vectors of the curve points, too, are all in the measuring
plane.
Z
Y
16-2
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Basics about curve measurement
Spatial curve (3D curve)

Spatial curves (3D curves) have three degrees of freedom:
theoretically, they are not constrained in any direction. You can
measure and test 3D curves with Calypso.
Lift curve (face curve)

Lift curves, also known as face curves, are special threedimensional curves that run across cylinder sections. Every point in
a lift curve can be described by means of two values: namely by
the angle of rotation on the surface of the cylinder and the
deviation of the curve from the circular line in a given direction
(e.g. radial or axial).
Therefore, the lift curve is a special 3D curve and like the 2D curve
has only two degrees of freedom.
Z
The illustration shows an axial lift curve with deviations in the

direction of the Z axis.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-3
Performing curve measurement

The procedure for curve measurement is no different from that for
other measurements. The procedure for performing measurements is
described in Running a measurement plan on page 8-1. You can
measure a complete measurement plan, a mini-plan, or a single
characteristic or feature.
16-4
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Defining the curve feature

The definition of a curve feature differs from the definition of other
features. Within the curve feature definition template, Calypso offers
four ways of defining nominal data.
You can
import a file (in VDA, ASCII, PAB or DXF format),
define the curve with the point generator,
digitize a curve from measurements,
use the keyboard to enter the nominal data of the curve,
adopt the nominal data of the curve from the CAD model.
As with other features, you use a definition template to define twodimensional and three-dimensional curves. You will already be familiar
with most of the buttons and input fields from the other feature
definition templates, but this template includes some elements that
are new.
You will find more information on this definition template under

Definition template (curve) in the Calypso dialog reference in the
Online Help.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-5
2D curves, 3D curves and lift curves

differences
The definition templates for both types of curve are, broadly
speaking, the same: they differ only in a few small points:
The definition template for the 3D curve normally does not contain
the Projection menu with the two exceptions:
Only if the 3D curve is defined as a lift curve is a Projection
menu present with the No projection and Lift curve menu
items.
Only if the 3D curve is defined as a threaded curve is a
Projection menu present with the No projection, Vertical
Projection and Helix Projection menu items.
For all practical purposes, the deviation for 3D curves can be
calculated only in the actual vector direction and the nominal
vector direction.
The Move Parallelcurve option in the Nominal Definition menu
is not available for 3D curves.
How curves are
displayed
In the CAD window, curves are displayed as continuous lines; they are
calculated as approximations with the aid of splines.
You have the option of mapping a tape coupled to the curve, in order
to highlight the spatial component of a 3D curve.
You can set the width of this tape by clicking on Evaluation in the
Evaluation dialog box at Tape width. 0 means: no tape.
Marking and unmarking lift curves

Lift curves are 3D curves which are projected onto a cylinder section.
You can see here that the Projection Lift Curve menu is contained in
the definition template of the lift curve in addition to the features of
the 3D curve.
You can mark 3D curves as lift curves (by generating the lift curve) or
cancel the marking again.
To mark a 3D curve as a lift curve, you have two options:
In the Change nominal values window, select the In vector
direction option, activate the Lift curve check box and specify
the radius and axial direction of the cylinder. Or:
In the Evaluation window at 3d curve, activate the Lift curve
check box.
To cancel the marking of a 3D curve as a lift curve, you have two
options:
16-6
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
In the Change nominal values window, select the In vector

direction option, deactivate the Lift curve check box and
enter 0 explicitly for the Length and Cylinder radius. Or:
In the Evaluation window at 3d curve, deactivate the Lift
curve check box.
Defining nominal data for a curve

When defining a curve feature, you first need to define the nominal
data of the curve you want to measure.
NOTE
hss
You can use neither automatic feature recognition nor the technology
macros for this purpose.
To define the nominal data, you can:
Import an existing file.
The file format can be one of the following: VDA (Cons, Curve,
MDI, PSET, POINT, CIRCLE), ASCII, PAB, or DXF.
For ASCII files, the values are read in the following sequence:
x-nominal, y-nominal, z-nominal, u-nominal, v-nominal, wnominal, x, y, z, u, v, w.
For ASCII files with axial lift data, the values of each line are read as
angles and appropriate heights.
Use the point generator to define the curve points: either to define
the curve points mathematically or to import external files with a
different format.
Digitize a curve. You generate the nominal values of an unknown
outline by probing.
Enter the curve's nominal data, e.g. taken from a technical
drawing, by means of the keyboard.
Extract the nominal data from the CAD model: using the CAD
Modification menu and clicking with the mouse.
Once the nominal points have been defined by one of these methods,
you can proceed with processing them and thus changing the
position and the shape of the curve.
!
hss
Risk of collision!
Always check the nominal vectors after defining the curve points, and
make sure that the vectors do not point into the material (risk of
collision).
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-7
How to import the files for nominal

definition of a curve
Calypso supports import of the following file formats:
VDA (the points in a VDA file must be described as Cons, Curve,
MDI, PSET, POINT or CIRCLE),
ASCII (for more information on ASCII files, see Defining nominal
data for a curve on page 16-7),
PAB (a format used by SOM), and
DXF (created by ScanWare DXF converters, creates only 2D curves)
To import a file in one of these formats:
1 Make sure you have the curve feature template open and
displayed on your screen, and that the chosen coordinate system
fits to the curve to be imported.
2 Select Read Nominal Value from the Nominal Definition list.
A file selection window is opened.
3 Select the desired format.

The Scanware converter must be installed on your system if you
want to import a DXF file created by a ScanWare DXF converter.
This option is not available for 3D curves.
4 Select the desired file:
Enter the complete path in the input field.
If you do not know the path, click on the small arrow.
You can select the file in the Explorer window that now opens.
16-8
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5 If you want to load a VDA file selectively, click on the Properties

button.
The VDA import settings dialog box appears on the screen.
6 Enter the criteria for selecting the points for import in the curve
and click on OK to confirm.
7 If you want to load an ASCII file with axial lift data, click on the
Properties button.
The Input parameters for axial strokes window will open.
8 Enter the additional information required for the conversion of the

lift data in Cartesian coordinates and confirm with OK.
9 Click on OK.
The data will now be read from the file.
If you specified selection criteria before importing from a VDA file,
the data in the file is imported selectively into the curve feature in
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-9
accordance with these criteria. The sequence of the curve points

derives from the sequence of the points in the VDA file.
The type and name of the converted features are written into the
Comment for the curve.
You have now defined the curve with its nominal data. Always
remember to check the direction of the nominal vectors (see
Checking the nominal vectors of a curve on page 16-27).
Format of lift data (reference)

To ensure that axial or radial lift data are loaded correctly by Calypso,
the data must be available in an ASCII file in a defined format.
Axial lift data
Axial lift data is entered in two columns. The columns require the
headings Angle and Height. In each line, the value of the angle
is stated in the first column and the respective height of stroke in the
second column.
Example:
Angle
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
...
Radial lift data
Height
10
10
10
11
13
15.5
18
20.5
22
24
25
...
Radial lift data is entered in two columns. The columns require the
headings Angle and Radius. In each line, the value of the angle is
stated before the radius belonging to the angle.
Example:
Angle
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
...
16-10
Radius
500
501
502
502
502
503
504
505
505
505
505
...
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to generate a curve with the point

generator
Calypso supports the VDA, PAB and DXF file formats. If the data you
need is in some other file format, you can program formulas to import
the information and convert the data to Calypso curve data.
You can also use the point generator to compute the points of the
curve freely from mathematical formulas.
To generate a curve using the point generator:
1 Open the curve feature definition template.
2 Select the Parameter Data command from the Nominal
Definition selection list.
The Point generator window will open.
3 You can enter formulas and parameters to suit the necessary

conversion in the Start Index, End Index and Increment input
fields. For more details, please refer to Entering parameters and
formulas on page 15-15.
4 Click on OK when you have finished programming.
Calypso evaluates the points according to your entries and loads them
into the definition template.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-11
Creating nominal values of a curve by

digitizing
You use digitization when you do not have nominal data for a curve.
Digitization means obtaining the nominal data of a curve by a series
of probings (i.e. probing an unknown contour).
!
hss
Important
If the automatic radius correction is not activated in the Digitizing
mode, you must carry out the radius correction manually. For more
details, please refer to Defining tolerances for a curve on
page 16-31 and How to change the nominal points of a curve on
page 16-23, step 3.
Take the probings on a workpiece that can be used as a pattern
(master workpiece), in other words a precision-manufactured part.
The actual values obtained by probing are subsequently converted
into nominal data. In this way, you use a master workpiece to obtain
the nominal data for other, identical curves.
You have two options: either take individual manual probings to
define the curve, or scan the curve.
To scan 2D curves, select the Unknown Cut procedure (see How
to scan an unknown contour using the Unknown Cut method on
page 16-13).
To scan a 3D curve, you have two options:
the 3D curve method you have to run three scans so that
Calypso can compute the transverse curvature of the threedimensional curve (see Digitizing 3D curves on page 16-16).
the Lift curve method (see How to scan an unknown contour
using the Lift curve method on page 16-18).
How to generate the nominal values of a curve by

manual probings
To digitize a curve by means of individual probings:
2 Click on the Nominal Definition selection list.
3 Select the Digitizing on command.
The place of the Nominal Definition selection list is now taken by
a red button labeled Digitizing off.
4 Click on the Open/Closed Curve button to select an open curve.
5 If you want to project the nominal points onto a plane, select a
projection plane from the Projection selection list.
16-12
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
6 Now start recording the measured points on the workpiece.

Every probing point is shown directly in the definition template and
in the CAD window. As soon as you have probed three points,
Calypso will calculate the curve. The entire curve is recalculated for
every new point you probe.
7 As soon as you have defined the curve by probing, click on the
Digitizing off button.
8 Click on OK to save the values and close the definition template.
You have now determined the nominal values for an unknown curve.
Note that these values correspond to the stylus center. To correct the
stylus radius, please read Working with curve nominal data on
page 16-23.
How to scan an unknown contour using the

Unknown Cut method
To scan an unknown contour as an unknown cut:
1 Open the 2D curve feature definition template.
2 In the Nominal Definition selection list, select the Digitizing on
command.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-13

The Strategy dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Select the Unknown Cut method to measure the curve as a free

planar section.
The entry Unknown contour 1 appears in the dialog box.
16-14
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5 Double-click on the entry.

The Segment window will open.
6 Enter the parameters. For the start and the end points, you can
choose the coordinate system type.
Calypso recognizes the probing direction by probing the start
point roughly. The coordinates of the probing will be entered in
the fields for the start point.
If necessary, edit the coordinates entered in the Start Point
field.
Enter the coordinates of the end point in the End Point field, or
else probe the workpiece to define the end point.
In the Space axis selection list, select a spatial axis to which the
scanning plane is to be perpendicular.
If necessary, click on the button to change the Direction.
7 Enter a speed for the CMM in the Speed field or select the
requisite accuracy.
8 Enter a pitch between points in the Step Width field or define the
number of points.
Once all the parameters have been defined in full, the red Execute
button appears and you can click it to start scanning.
9 Check that the CMM is ready to move and that there is no risk of
collision.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-15
10 Click on the red Execute button to start scanning the unknown

contour.
The CMM starts scanning the contour.
Digitizing 3D curves
When you digitize a 2D curve using the unknown cut method, the
nominal vectors are calculated by Calypso by definition, they are in
the plane of the cut.
A single digitization process is not enough to probe a 3D curve with
transverse curvatures on the workpiece, because in this case the
orientation of the nominal vectors is unknown.
When you digitize a 3D curve, therefore, you have to scan an
unknown contour in such a way as to obtain three cuts each a
certain distance above and below the 3D curve as such.
Calypso then uses this information to compute the nominal vectors
and thus the transverse curvature of the 3D curve.
Start the process by clicking on the Digitize 3D Curve button in the
Strategy window for 3D curves.
NOTE
hss
16-16
If the feature does not have any nominal values, you will have to
select the Digitizing On item under Nominal Definition before you
open the Strategy window.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
In the Segment dialog box, go to Travel Path Definition and define

the three paths, then click on Execute to start digitization.
Path specification by
probing
To specify the start and end points of the three paths by probing with
the CMM, first probe the three start points of the paths (points 1 to
3), then probe the three end points of the paths (points 4 to 6).
Directions during travel
When traveling along the three paths, the CMM moves in a

meandering style: the direction of movement alternates from one
path to the next.
Digitizing 3D curve in area

Using the 3D Curve feature, you can also digitize a three-dimensional
curve over an entire area. Calypso employs the technique of probing
surfaces along intersection lines to effect a meander-formed probing
of an entire surface area and in this way creates a 3D curve.
It will be necessary here to enter the four corner points of the surface
that is to be digitized. These four points must more or less form a
rectangle.
Start the process by clicking on the Digitize 3D Grid button in the
Strategy window for 3D curves.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-17
NOTE
hss
If the feature does not have any nominal values, you will have to
select the Digitizing On item under Nominal Definition before you
open the Strategy window.
In the Segment window, go to Travel Path Definition and define
the number of paths, then click on Execute to start digitization.
Directions during travel
When traveling along the paths, the CMM moves in a meandering

style: the direction of movement alternates from one path to the next.
How to scan an unknown contour using the Lift

curve method
To scan an unknown contour as a lift curve:
1 Open the 3D curve feature definition template.
2 In the Nominal Definition selection list, select the Digitizing on
command.
16-18
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

The Strategy dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Select the Lift curve method in order to measure the curve as a

lift curve along an annular surface (cylinder circumference).
The Unknown contour of circle face entry appears in the dialog
box.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-19
5 Double-click the Unknown contour of circle face entry.

To specify the start and end points of the three paths by probing
with the CMM, first probe the three start points of the paths
(points 1 to 3), then probe the three end points of the paths
(points 4 to 6).
NOTE
Start point indicates that the CMM will start scanning at the last end
point.
NOTE
Check the entered values and bear in mind that the lift curve is
probed on an area along the cylinder section, so that the specified
radius must be correspondingly larger than the radius of the reference
feature.
The center must also be at the central point of the lift curve. Usually,
the automatically entered center is in the center of a base area of the
reference feature.
hss
hss
6 Enter a speed for the CMM in the Speed field or select the
requisite accuracy.
16-20
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
7 Enter a pitch between points in the Step Width field or define the
number of points.
Once all the parameters have been defined in full, the Execute
button appears and you can click it to start scanning.
8 Check that the CMM is ready to move and that there is no risk of
collision.
9 Click on the red Execute button to start scanning the unknown
contour.
The CMM starts scanning the contour.
How to enter nominal data of the curve

point by point
You also have the option of defining a curve by entering the nominal
data directly into the definition template. Bear in mind, however, that
the volume of data produced in this way can rapidly become very
large.
1 Make sure you have the curve feature template open and
displayed on your screen.
The fields for entering the X, Y and Z coordinates and the NX, NY
and NZ direction cosines are on the left.
2 In the Nominal Definition selection list, select Nominal Input.
You have two options for input: point by point or with the aid of
the nominal editor. You can use the buttons to toggle back and
forth between the two display modes in the curve definition
template.
If you use point by point input, you begin by entering the first
point number and continue by entering the coordinates.
Then enter the next point number or click on the arrow to
increment the number by one, and enter the coordinates of this
point.
Click on the button if you want to use the Nominal Editor. The
tabular list is an overview in which you can use edit, copy, paste
and delete functions.
Click on the button to toggle back to the normal display mode.
3 Click OK to confirm your entries.
Note that each point on the curve must have a nominal vector. For
more details, please refer to How to change the nominal vectors of
the curve on page 16-28.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-21
How to adopt nominal data of the curve

from the CAD model
You can also adopt the nominal data for a curve from the CAD model
into the CAD window.
How to adopt nominal data of the curve from the CAD model:
1 Select CAD Modification Modify CAD Entities.
The Modify CAD Model dialog box appears.
2 To generate a 2D curve: select a line in the CAD model.
3 Under Points, enter the desired number of points and click on the
symbol for the curve.
The 2D curve is generated and entered into the measurement plan.
This can take a few seconds to complete.
The vector normal to the plane of intersection is automatically
calculated for each point on a 2D curve
4 To generate a 3D curve: Switch the CAD model to rendered mode
and select an area on which the curve should be positioned.
All edges you select subsequently will refer to this face, until
you select a different face.
5 Then change to normal mode and select one or more edges
(with the Ctrl key).
6 Under Points, enter the desired number of points and click on
the symbol for the curve.
The 3D curve is generated and entered into the measurement plan.
This can take a few seconds to complete. The curve's vectors will
be taken from the CAD surface that you clicked on:
For a cylindrical face, the vectors are calculated perpendicular
to the cylinder axis.
For a conical face, the vectors are calculated perpendicular to
the cone axis rotated around the opening angle (from the
plane).
For a planar edge, the vectors are positioned parallel to the
plane vector.
7 When the process is completed, confirm by clicking on Close.
You have now transferred the curve defined in the CAD model to
your measurement plan. You can edit the curve in the usual way.
16-22
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Working with curve nominal data

If the nominal values for a curve have already been determined, you
have the following possibilities for editing the nominal values:
Change nominal points: Here you can move the curve in various
ways, including rotating and shifting.
Adopting deviations of a reference curve.
Correcting nominal values by an offset.
Checking nominal vectors.
Changing nominal vectors.
Changing approach direction vectors.
How to change the nominal points of a curve

You can transform the nominal values of a curve in order to move the
curve to a position of your choice. For example, this could be
necessary for curves whose value you have read from a file and whose
position you would like to modify on your workpiece.
Or perhaps you have received a 3D curve by digitizing and you want
to convert it into a lift curve.
NOTE
hss
You must transform the nominal values if you want to perform stylus
tip radius correction after digitizing a curve.
The nominal points can be transformed in several ways:
Move in the direction of the normal vectors (offset curve, especially
for correcting stylus tip radius)
project in the direction of the cylinder axis onto the cylinder
section, in order to get a lift curve
move and/or turn in axis direction
modify the number of points (for instance, with a very large
number of points, which would lead to very slow probing).
!
hss
Important
If you modify the number of points and confirm with OK, you will
create new nominal values for the curve. The original curve cannot be
recreated again. For this reason, it is important that you use the
Simulation function to check the result beforehand.
Only use this function with great care and after careful thought.
To edit the nominal points:
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-23
2 Select Nominal Definition Change Nominal Points.

The Change probing points window will open. The entry boxes
of the dialog box change depending on the set option.
3 If you want to move the curve points in the direction of the normal
vectors, activate the in Vector direction radio button.
Enter the value by which you wish to move the curve under
Length.
If you have obtained the measured values of the curve by
means of digitization, click on the Stylus Tip Radius button.
The radius of the stylus used is entered in the input field.
If you want to project the points of a curve onto a cylinder
section, activate the Lift curve check box and enter the radius
and axis of the cylinder.
Please note that the reference axis or the axis of the reference
feature must always pass through the center of the lift curve.
The origin of the base alignment must also lie on this axis.
4 To move or rotate the curve in the direction of the coordinate axes,
select the Coordinate axes direction option.
Enter the value for the move and/or rotation.
5 To modify the number of nominal points, select the Number
option.
Enter the desired value for the Step Distance, the Chord
Height or the Number of Points.
- or -
16-24
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Select the Coordinates option and specify the coordinate grid

in the desired coordinate axis with starting point and distance in
mm.
New points with the specified X, Y and/or Z values are
calculated.
The nominal points are modified immediately.
NOTE
hss
Please note that the nominal points of the curve are then recalculated
internally. Applying this function again may accidentally change the
form of the curve.
How to adopt the deviations of a reference curve

In Calypso, you can adopt the actual deviations of a measured 2d
curve (the reference curve) for the nominal values of the current 2d
curve. This makes sense if the workpiece has a number of curved lines
of the same shape at different positions.
Application
This function has been conceived for use in conjunction with the
Nominal Definition Parameter Data function (see How to
generate a curve with the point generator on page 16-11). Here, you
use the point generator to create a parallel group of curves which are
then measured one after the other.
An example is two curves on the same workpiece, whereby curve 2 is
shifted exactly 100 mm from curve 1 in Y. If it turns out on measuring
curve 1 that the actual deviations always lie in a certain range
(e.g. approx. 0.5 mm), it can be assumed that the results also deviate
by this value (0.5 mm) for curve 2. In order to avoid a collision, you
can shift the nominal points of curve 2 by 0.5 mm.
Another example of the application would be to use a single
parameter file for all different sizes of workpieces of a certain line of
products (e.g. monitors). The required curves are created from a file
with only one offset for the workpiece size. In this way, the entire line
of products can be measured using one file.
To adopt the deviations of the reference curve:
1 Open the definition template of the 2d curve to which the
deviation of a reference curve is to be added.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-25
2 Click on the Nominal Definition selection list and select the

Move Parallelcurve command.
You can see the Reference Feature window in which all defined
2D curves are listed.
3 Highlight the name of the curve you want to use as a reference

curve.
If no values have yet been measured for this curve, a message is
issued.
4 Click on the OK button.
Calypso will convert the deviations of the reference curve to the
current curve immediately.
How to correct nominal curve values by an offset

You can compensate the known nominal data or workpiece errors by
correcting the nominal data by an offset value. The offset is calculated
from the determined deviations (distance between point and spline)
of the curve values and added to each nominal curve value.
You have the following options for determining the offset:
Average
Maximum value
Minimum value
Standard deviation
Arithmetic average calculated from the largest and shortest
distance
16-26
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
To correct nominal curve values by an offset:

1 Open the definition template of the curve and click on the
Evaluation button.
The Evaluation dialog box is opened.
2 Under Offset, activate the Offset check box and click on
Parameters.
The Offset window for selecting the offset calculation will be
displayed.
3 Select the mode of offset calculation and click on Execute.

NOTE
hss
By clicking again on Execute, the offset calculation (this time with the
newly calculated values!) and the addition will be repeated.
4 Close the Offset window with Cancel.
!
hss
Important
If you do not close the window with Cancel but with OK, the
calculated offset will be added to the measuring results of the curve.
5 Close the Evaluation window with OK.
The selected offset is now added to all nominal curve values.
Checking the nominal vectors of a curve

In Calypso, a curve is only defined by points and directions. Therefore,
after defining the curve's nominal data, you should check two
important things concerning the nominal vectors:
Is there a nominal vector defined for each curve point?
If there are no nominal vectors for some (or all) points, you can
enter them manually (see How to change the nominal vectors
of the curve on page 16-28).
Is the direction of the nominal vectors OK?
The nominal vectors must always point away from the part. A
nominal vector must never point into the material of the part.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-27
!
hss
Important
If a nominal vector has the wrong direction, this will invariably result
in a collision because the approach direction of the CMM will be
wrong.
To check the nominal vectors, you can:
Check out the vectors in the CAD window this is the quickest
way, and the most reliable. You can display each curve point with
its nominal vector (refer to Show/Hide Nominal Vectors on
page 16-39).
You can check the nominal vectors using the direction components
in the definition template.
If you just need to change the directions of all nominal vectors at
once, you can also use the Change Direction button.
How to change the nominal vectors of the curve

Each curve point is determined by three point coordinates and a
normal vector. For each curve you can work with in Calypso, the
normal vectors of the nominal points are in the same direction. (See
Basics about curve measurement on page 16-2).
The direction of the nominal vectors can be changed as follows:
Vertical to the axis of a reference feature
Parallel to the axis of a reference feature
Rotated through a given angle about the tangent of the curve or
Manual entry
Procedure for changing the direction of the nominal vectors:
16-28
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2 Select Nominal Definition Edit Vectors.

You define the direction in the Curve nominal vector input
window.
3 Select the option to edit the nominal vector Perpendicular to or

Parallel to a reference feature.
4 Select the feature to be used as reference for the change from the
list.
The nominal vector of this feature will be shown as Reference
Vector.
5 If you want to define a reference vector, go to Reference Vector
and enter the NX, NY and NZ directional components.
6 If you want to rotate the vectors about the tangent of the curve:
Mark the Rotation around tangent radio button.
Enter the angle of rotation in the Angle field.
The new direction for the nominal vectors will be taken over from
these values.
How to change the approach direction of a curve

The approach direction of the curve is used to position to CMM
before carrying out measurements. It is shown with a blue arrow at
the first curve point in the CAD window.
You can change this approach direction for the curve measurement.
To change the approach direction of a curve:
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-29
2 Select Nominal Definition Change approach direction

vector.
The Direction vector for approach direction window shows the

components of the current approach vector in the base alignment.
3 Define the desired approach vector:
Enter the vector components directly.
- or Click on Default to accept the default setting (with 2D curves
the normal vector of the intersection plane and with 3D curves
the normal vector of the first curve point).
- or Highlight a feature in the list.
The appropriate normal vector will be entered as approach
vector.
The direction vector will be changed automatically whenever a
change is made so that you can check the effect of your entry.
The new approach direction will be accepted according to your
entries.
Checking the clearance planes of a curve

When you define a feature, Calypso assigns clearance planes to the
feature. In the case of curve measurement, you should check this
automatic assignment to make sure that the clearance planes really
guarantee a safe approach for the CMM. If the approach is not safe,
make the requisite changes as described in Editing the travel
paths on page 7-29.
16-30
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Defining tolerances for a curve

There are two ways of entering tolerances for the Curve feature:
For the whole curve
For individual curve segments
You can also define the curve jump tolerance for the entire curve
here.
NOTE
hss
These entries in the definition template do not automatically define

any characteristics, which are added to the list of characteristics.
How to define tolerance for the whole curve

The entry of the tolerance refers to the nominal-actual comparison of
the curve points. You can enter an upper and/or lower tolerance.
upper tolerance
nominal curve
lower tolerance
To enter tolerances for the whole curve:

61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-31
2 Click on the button for tolerances.

The definition template of the curve is extended.
3 Activate the Curve check box.

This hides the chart for the tolerances of individual segments.
4 Enter a value for the Upper Tolerance and/or Lower Tolerance.
5 Click on OK to close the definition template.
The tolerance you entered will be checked the next time the curve is
measured. The curve jump tolerance is output in the default printout.
16-32
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to define tolerances for individual

segments
The entry of the tolerance refers to the nominal-actual comparison of
the curve points. You can enter an upper and/or lower tolerance for
each segment you have defined.
upper tolerance
nominal curve
lower tolerance
To set tolerances for individual segments:

The dialog box shown below is opened. In the right half of the
window, you see a chart for the tolerances of the segments.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-33
3 Select the segment for which you want to enter the tolerances by
clicking on the column to the left of the segment name.
4 Now click on the input field of the tolerance you want to enter and
enter a value for the Upper Tolerance and/or Lower Tolerance.
5 If you want to determine tolerances for further segments, repeat
the last two steps.
The tolerances you entered will be checked the next time the curve is
measured.
How to define jump tolerance for the whole

curve
The curve jump tolerance refers to the differences between the
nominal-actual deviations of the curve points. So this is, so to speak, a
second derivative the difference of the differences. The curve
jump tolerance indicates the amount by which the curve form may
deviate within a reference distance. It is generally independent of the
curve form tolerance.
In Calypso, the curve jump tolerance is always measured between two
neighboring points. The curve is out of tolerance if the difference
between the deviations of the two actual points from the respective
nominal point is greater than the specified value.
Nominal curve
Actual curve
Jump tolerance
In the illustration, the differences between the nominal-actual

deviations from one point to the next are shown as shaded columns.
As you can see, the curve jump may be greater than the actual
deviation.
16-34
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
To enter the jump tolerance for the whole curve:

The definition template of the curve is extended.
3 Activate the Curve jump tolerance check box.

The entry box then appears.
4 Enter the value for the Curve jump tolerance.
The tolerance you entered will be checked the next time the curve is
measured.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-35
Defining the result calculation of a curve

The following settings are important for the definition of the results of
the curve measurement:
the selected calculation of the deviation
the selected projection
Calculation of deviations for the curve

The calculation methos for the deviations is set in the definition
template for the curve in the selection field under the Comment
button.
The following methods are available:
Nominal Vector Direction
Actual > Nominal
Space Point Evaluation (2D curves only)
Grid Coodinates (2D curves only)
Radial Deviation (2D curves only)
Space Point Evaluation (without interpolation)
Deviation in nominal vector direction

Deviation in nominal vector direction is measured in the direction of
the normal vector at each nominal point.
Deviation in actual vector direction

Deviation in the actual vector direction is calculated from each actual
point along the normal of the corresponding nominal point on the
nominal curve.
Space point evaluation (2D curves only)

Calculating deviation with space point evaluation employs the curve
functionality to determine the point on the measured spline (before
radius adjustment) in the nominal vector direction.
The point obtained in this way is radius-adjusted in the same way as
the Space Point feature.
Deviation in grid coordinates (2D curves only)

This deviation is the distance between the actual points and the
nominal points in grid direction, where the direction of the normal
vectors is defined.
16-36
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Defining the result calculation of a curve
Radial deviation (2D curves only)

The deviation is calculated in the radial direction with respect to a
point of reference of a reference element as the distance from the
nominal points.
Fn
nominal curve
Fn
Fn
actual curve
reference
point
measured
curve
Space point evaluation (without interpolation)

The closed measuring point is searched for each curve point. This
measuring point will then be corrected by the stylus tip radius in the
nominal vector direction. The distance between the corrected
measuring point and the curve point projected on the nominal vector
is output as deviation.
Projection of the results for the curve

The selected calculation of the deviations and the set projection are
crutial for the results of the curve measurement.
Projection of 2D curves
For projection of 2D cures, enter a plane onto which the measured
curve points are to be projected. This results in a two-dimensional
curve.
You can set projection onto one of the following planes:
Linear projection (measuring only): Choice of several planes, the
points are projected plumb onto the nominal plane.
Circular projection (measuring only): Choice of several planes; the
points are projected onto the nominal plane along the rotation
face to be selected.
Measured Planes (digitizing only): Any measured planes, e.g. to
take sheet thickness values into account.
X/Y-Plane, Y/Z-Plane, Z/X-Plane (digitizing only)
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-37
Computed Plane (digitizing only): Plane derived from the measured

values of the curve.
Projection of 3D curves
No projection can be set for 3D curves with the exception of lift
cures and threaded curves.
Lift curves
You can set the following for lift curves under Projection:
No Projection: the deviations are evaluated in the nominal vector
direction.
Lift curve: the deviations are projected onto the cylinder section.
Threaded curves
In the case of threaded curves (Thread check box in the Evaluation

dialog box), you can carry out the evaluation of the deviations in
different planes. To do this, you must first set the deviation calculation
in Nominal Vector Direction and then the projection for the
evaluation of the measured points:
No Projection: the deviations are evaluated in the nominal vector
direction.
Vertical Projection: the measured values are projected onto the
plane perpendicular to the thread and evaluated.
Helix Projection: the measured values are projected in a helican
line onto the nominal plane of the profile intersection and
evaluated. The helix is predefined by the thread parameters.
Thread
Intersection plane
perpendicular
to the thread
The evaluation range is
a section of the
threading
perpendicular to the
intersection plane
16-38
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Using curves in the CAD model
Using curves in the CAD model

The principles for using the CAD model in measuring curves are the
same as those described in Working with the CAD window on
page 3-1. There are, however, a number of other, useful commands
for working with curves. You access these commands by means of a
context menu.
NOTE
hss
These additional commands are available only when you have the
curve definition template open.
The commands in the context menu for

curves
Show/Hide Nominal Points
Choose this command to view the individual nominal points. Each
point is represented by a cross.
Choose Hide if the points are visible but you want to hide them.
Show/Hide Nominal Vectors

Choose this command to view the individual nominal vectors. This is
an easy way of checking the directions of the vectors.
Choose Hide if the nominal vectors are visible but you want to hide
them.
Act. Points Show/Mask Out

Choose this command to view the individual actual points. Each point
is represented by a cross. This command is not available until after the
curve has been measured.
Choose Hide if the points are visible but you want to hide them.
Show/Hide Act. Curve

Choose this command to view the measured curve. The curve is
displayed as a continuous line. This command is not available until
after the curve has been measured.
Choose Hide if the curve is visible but you want to hide it.
Show/Hide Deviations
Choose this command to view the calculated deviations between
nominal and actual points. This command is not available until after
the curve has been measured.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-39
Choose Hide if the deviations are visible but you want to hide them.
Show/Hide Tolerance Lines

Choose this command to view the tolerance lines of the curve. These
lines are displayed along with the curve.
Choose Hide if the tolerance lines are visible but you want to hide
them.
Show Point Numbers

Choose this command to view the point numbers.
Choose Hide if the point numbers are visible but you want to hide
them.
2D View
Choose this command if you want to view the curve's plane (2D
curves only).
Magnification
Choose this option when you want to see the curve heightened.
When you highlight the Curve Magnification command and keep
the mouse button pressed, you can select the factor of magnification.
16-40
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Measuring strategy for the curve

There is no difference in layout between the Strategy window for the
curve and the Strategy window for the other features (see
Defining a measurement strategy on page 5-85).
The only difference is in the point list, which has an extended function
in itself and in connection with creating segments. Consequently, it is
described separately for the curve option.
Options for displaying points

As this illustration shows, the point list of a curve contains more
functions in the Group section.
Each nominal point of the curve is listed with its point number and its
X,Y and Z coordinates. You can use the Normal Vector, Actual Point
and Deviation buttons to decide which additional information will be
listed.
Normal Vector: Each nominal point is listed with the direction
components of its normal vector.
Actual Points: Each nominal point is compared with the
calculated actual point. If no actual points have been measured,
the actual points are represented by zero.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-41
Deviation: Each nominal point is listed together with the

deviation of the actual points in the direction of the normal vector
and its direction components.
New segment: See How to divide a curve into segments on
page 16-49.
The other elements of the point list correspond to the description in
Point list on page 5-87.
How to work with the point list

You can view and edit the points of a curve in the point list. The tasks
you can undertake in the point list are as follows:
Divide the curve into segments (see How to divide a curve into
segments on page 16-49).
Select display options for points (see Options for displaying
points on page 16-41).
Save and print the point list (see How to save and print the
point list on page 16-44).
The point list has to be open if you want to use any of these
functions.
16-42
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to open the point list:

3 Click on the Point List button.

The list will show all points defined in the curve feature.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-43
How to save and print the point list

To save or print the point list:
How to open the point list:
The Point list window will open.
4 Click on the button with the printer icon to print the point list.
The list is sent to your printer.
5 Click on the button with the diskette icon to save the point list.
A dialog box opens and you can define the parameters and format
for saving the list.
Activate the check boxes to define the data to be saved in the

point list.
16-44
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Activate the VDA File check box if you want to save the point
list as a VDA file. The list is saved as an ASCII file if this check
box is not activated.
Click on OK to save.
6 Click on OK.
The point list closes.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-45
Scanning a known contour

Curves are scanned along the segments of a curve whose points were
defined beforehand in the feature.
The procedure for defining the scanning method for curves differs
slightly from that of the other scans. You must begin by defining the
parts (segments) of the curve you want to scan.
Defining a scanning method is a three-step procedure:
Define the general settings (see General settings for the path
generation method on page 5-97).
These settings are the same in all scanning methods.
Define a segment (see How to divide a curve into segments on
page 16-49).
Check the parameters for the scanning method (see Scanning
method for curves on page 16-46).
The parameters for scanning were defined beforehand when the
segments were defined.
Scanning method for curves

The scanning method for curves employs nominal values and
segments, but points can also be measured between the nominal
points. You can also define and represent the entire curve as a single
segment.
Segments of a curve
You can measure a segment automatically with a CMM that has CNC
capability. You can divide any curve into any number of segments and
assign tolerances to each segment.
A segment contains any number of points on an existing curve: These
points can be selected as sequential points, adjacent points, or freely
selected points from the list of points.
A segment always has a defined start point and a defined end point.
A given point can be used in the definition of different segments.
16-46
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Entry box for scanning

curves
The dialog box for scanning of curves is shown below.
Pre/post travel during

scanning
The following problems can arise at the beginning and at the end of
the measuring path in the case of curve measurement and curve
evaluation:
The controller must adjust accordingly.
The calculation of the spline functions and the corresponding
vectors is difficult at the open ends of a curve.
To reduce the effects of these problems, you can define a pre/post
travel for scanning.
Scanning with rotary

table
The curve can be scanned with the rotary table. The Scan segment
with rotary table check box must be activated for this purpose. The
preconditions for this are that a known contour is scanned, the rotary
table is activated for the measurement plan and the spatial axis of the
feature on which the curve is located is in the direction of the rotary
table axis.
Unknown contour
In order to use the movements of the CMM for unknown contours

also for scanning a known curve, you can switch the technology.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-47
Measuring known curve as unknown curve

In order to use the movements of the CMM for unknown contours
also for scanning a known curve, you can switch the technology to
measuring an unknown contour in the Segment window using the
Unknown contour check box.
The window changes accordingly:
As the contour is now unknown to Calypso, the definition of the

travel path as well as an end criterion are required.
To this end, you can use the Accept points icon to adopt the start
and end points of the segment into the travel path definition and, if
required, overwrite them.
The end criterion used is usually the plane whose normal is formed by
the line between the start and end points and which runs through the
end point.
If the start and end points are identical, no line and thus no plane can
be formed. A certain course of a curve can also lead in some cases to
a rapid end of the measurement.
With the end criterion Ball = Sphere with radius around the end
point, you can avoid cases of this kind.
16-48
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to divide a curve into segments

The Strategy window offers you two ways of defining a segment of
an existing curve:
Specify start point and end point (consecutive points)
Specify individual points (free choice)
Consecutive points
To define a segment from consecutive points:

1 Click on the button of the curve-segment scanning method.
A new (as yet undefined) segment is added to the technology list.
2 Mark the new segment, right-click and select Edit from the
context menu.
3 Enter the segment name, start point and end point, and click OK
to confirm.
The segment appears in the technology list.
Freely selectable points
To define a segment from freely selectable points:

You will see the point list in which you define segments.
2 To select adjacent points for a segment:
Click on the point with which the segment should start.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-49
Press and hold the shift key and click on the end point.
All points between the first and the last point you have clicked
on are marked with an arrow.
3 To freely select distributed points for a segment:

Click on the point in the first column with which the segment
should start.
Press and hold the Ctrl key and click on all other points that the
segment should include.
All points you have clicked on are marked with an arrow.
16-50
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
4 Click on the Create Segment button.

This opens the Segment Definition window.
5 Change the name of the segment if the suggested name is not

suitable.
6 If you want to define a tolerance for the segment, enter the values
in the Upper Tolerance and/or Lower Tolerance fields.
7 Click on OK to close the definition of the segment.
The segment is automatically added to the strategy list.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-51
Characteristics for the curve

For curves, too, you can define the features for tolerance in the
definition template of the curve (see Defining tolerances for a
curve on page 16-31).
The basics of defining special characteristics for curves are common to
the other characteristics (see Defining characteristics on
page 6-7).
The following characteristics can be used as special characteristics for
the curve:
Characteristic
Menu
command
Curve Slope
Size More
The Curve Slope characteristic is used to

check the height difference between two
certain points of a curve.
Curve Stroke
Size More
The Curve Stroke characteristic is used to

check the axial and radial deviations of a lift
curve.
Curve Distance
Size More
The Curve Distance characteristic is used to

check the distance between two curves.
Curve Expansion
Size More
The Curve Expansion characteristic is used to

check the expansion of a curve in a predefined
direction.
Curve Form
Form and
Location
The Curve Form characteristic is used to

check the form of the complete curve or of
individual segements.
Description
Defining curve slope characteristics

The Curve Slope characteristic is used to check the height
difference (in mm) between two certain points of a curve. The heights
are calculated in the polar coordinate system of the lift curve (height
parallel to rotation axis).
The Curve Slope characteristic is defined via the definition
template.
To open the definition template:
16-52
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Select Size More Curve Slope.
The following table describes the buttons and fields that are not
common to other characteristics:
Dialog element
Function
Feature
Select the curve to be checked.
Primary Datum
Select here the datum that defines the rotation axis (and the centre)
of the lift curve. This is usually a circle.
Evaluation Range
Defines the two points between which the slope is determined in

one of the three ways:
by specifying two point numbers or
by specifying two point numbers or
by specifying the start and end height
If the angle or height specification does not exactly correspond to a
point, the next closest point will be used. By clicking on Entire
Curve, the evaluation from the first to the last curve point is
performed.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-53
Defining curve stroke characteristics

The Curve Stroke characteristic is used to check the axial and radial
deviations of a lift curve. The Curve Stroke characteristic is defined
via the definition template.
Select Size More Curve Stroke.
Dialog element
Function
Axial or radial stroke

evaluation
Select here the direction in which the deviations are to be

determined and enter the Tapped Radius:
Radial: perpendicular to the rotation axis
Axial: parallel to the rotation axis
Feature
Select the curve to be checked:

with radial stroke evaluation, the 2D curve to be checked (lift
curve)
with axial stroke evaluation, the 3D curve to be checked (lift
curve)
16-54
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Dialog element
Function
Primary Datum
Select the datum here:

for the radial stroke evaluation, the base diameter with the
nominal radius,
for the axial stroke evaluation, the plane perpendicular to the
rotation axis to which the nominal lift data refer (if no
specification is made, the corresponding coordinate plane of the
base alignment is used).
Deviation
Shows the extreme deviations and their difference:

Max : The maximum deviation in the positive direction of the
nominal vector (too much material).
Range : Shows the difference range between upper and lower
deviations.
Min : The maximum deviation in the negative direction of the
nominal vector (too little material).
NOTE
hss
For radial evaluation of 2D curves, the Radial Deviation deviation

calculation must be entered in the Curve feature.
For axial evaluation of 3D curves, the Nominal Vector Direction
deviation calculation must be entered in the Curve feature.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-55
Defining curve distance characteristics

The Curve Distance characteristic is used to check the distance
between two curves, e.g. the brake disk coarse of thickness. You can
check the minimum, maximum and the average distance.
The Curve Distance characteristic is defined via the definition
template.
Select Size More Curve Distance.
Dialog element
Function
Characteristics
Select the two curves to be checked.
Curve Distance
Select the distance to be checked between the two curves:

Maximum Value (the maximum distance between two points of
both curves)
Minimum Value (the minimum distance between two points of
both curves)
Average (the arithmetic average resulting from maximum value
and minimum value)
16-56
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Defining curve expansion characteristics

The Curve Expansion characteristic is used to check the expansion
of a curve in a predefined direction in the same way as with a sliding
caliper. The Curve Expansion characteristic is defined via the
Select Size More Curve Expansion.
Dialog element
Function
Feature
Select the curve to be checked.
Expansion
Choose the axis direction in which the maximum expansion is to be

calculated. The nominal and actual values of the expansion
referenced to the current coordinate system are shown on the righthand side.
Nominal Value / Actual

Value
The nominal and actual values of the expansion referenced to the

current coordinate system.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-57
Defining curve form characteristics

The Curve Form characteristic is defined via the definition template.
Select Form and Location Curve Form.
Dialog element
Function
Curve jump tolerance
The curve jump tolerance is checked when this check box is

activated. The curve jump tolerance indicates the amount by which
the curve form may deviate within a reference distance. It is
generally independent of the curve form tolerance.
In Calypso, the curve jump tolerance is always measured between
two neighboring points. The curve is out of tolerance if the
difference between the deviations of the two actual points from the
respective nominal point is greater than the specified value.
Upper Deviation
Shows the maximum deviation in the positive direction of the

nominal vector (too much material).
Lower Deviation
Shows the maximum deviation in the negative direction of the

nominal vector (too little material).
Range
Shows the difference range between upper and lower deviations.
16-58
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to define tolerance for segments separately

After defining individual curve segments you can also assign them
separate tolerances with the curve form characteristic.
Proceed as follows:
1 Define a feature for the characteristic as you have done with other
characteristics.
When you have correctly defined the feature, the following table
for the segments appears in the definition template of the
characteristic.
The chart contains all defined segments.

2 Select the desired segment by clicking into the left column of the
relevant line.
An arrow appears in this column.
3 In the same line, enter the tolerances in the Upper Tol. and/or
Lower Tol. fields.
4 Click on OK.
The settings are saved and the definition template is closed.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-59
Working with the results of curve

measurement
After measurement, the actual values are displayed in the right half of
the curve definition template. In contrast to most other definition
templates, the curve template enables you to perform additional
operations with the results.
You have the following options for evaluating results:
Calculation and display of deviations
Optimization of coordinate system with best-fit alignment
Fitting actual values to nominal values
Defining or restricting the alignment
Specifying search distances
Smoothing the curve display
Sorting the measured points
Excluding measured points from the evaluation
Eliminating outliers.
Adding an offset to results
Setting the deviation clacultion for threads
How to calculate the deviations of a curve

The deviation between the measured and specified values for a curve
can be calculated in a number of ways (see Calculation of
deviations for the curve on page 16-36).
To calculate deviation:
2 Select the mode of calculation you want from the selection list
under the Comment button.
Calculation will be carried out immediately if there already are actual
values. If not, calculation will commence as soon as actual values are
available.
How to display deviations

The actual values refer to the workpiece coordinate system. When
dealing with a curve, however, the deviation between the nominal
and the actual values in the X, Y and Z coordinates can be of greater
interest.
16-60
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Working with the results of curve measurement
To obtain this deviation:

2 Activate the Deviation check box.
The actual values on the right side of the definition template now
refer to the nominal data of the curve.
How to optimize the coordinate system with

best-fit alignment
Inaccurate coordinate systems produce inaccurate measured values.
This, in turn, means incorrect form errors following a nominal/actual
comparison. To eliminate this positional offset, Calypso automatically
performs best fit for standard geometric features when it measures
form characteristics.
You have the option of defining automatic best fit following every
measuring run. Calypso can also correct the current coordinate
system by applying the rotational and translational components of the
best-fit result.
To optimize measurement of form characteristics:
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-61
2 Click on the Evaluation button.

3 Under Best Fit, activate the Best Fit check box and click on
Alignment.
Calypso will create an alignment. You can see the Best Fit window
in which Calypso shows the translation and rotation of the feature
alignment with reference to the part alignment.
4 If you want to change the shown values, click in the relevant field
and enter the values of your choice.
5 Click on Apply to accept the local feature coordinate system.
The Enter Name dialog box appears on the screen.
6 Enter a name for the local feature coordinate system.
7 Click on OK to close the dialog box.
How to calculate the curve's center of mass

The location of the curve is calculated using the center of mass. The
coordinates of this point can be displayed.
To show the center of mass:
1 Make sure you have the definition template open and displayed on
your screen.
16-62
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2 Click on the box in front of Center of mass to place a checkmark.

The coordinates of the center of mass are displayed in the left half of
the template.
The center of mass is also displayed in the CAD window.
How to obtain a best fit

"Best fit" refers to the mathematical separation of form deviations
and location deviations. You may use best fit to make a mathematical
correction of the positive deviation referring to the applicable nominal
curve.
The measured values of the curve are shifted and/or rotated until the
sum of the deviation squares reaches a minimum (Gaussian best fit).
This operation leaves only the curve's form deviation.
To obtain a best fit:
your screen.
2 Activate the Best Fit check box.
Calypso performs the fit without changing the form.
All coordinate transformations are usually employed to fit the
measured curve to the nominal curve. You can restrict or specify the
fit if you want to exclude certain transformations (see How to
define a best-fit alignment of a curve on page 16-63).
How to define a best-fit alignment of a curve

When you activate the Best Fit check box to have the curve aligned,
Calypso separates form deviations from positional deviations by
computation. For this purpose, only the LSQ Best Fit (3D alignment) is
used.
You have several options to influence this alignment:
You have the option of restricting the alignment for certain
movements: you can prevent translation in the direction of any
axes or rotation about any axes.
This restriction applies to best fit of the measured curve to the
nominal curve and to best fit of a coordinate system.
You can specify that certain points are not to be taken into
account during the alignment by masking them.
The masked points are also not shown in the representation in the
CAD window.
For the alignment, the average deviation between actual and
nominal is minimized. Here, every curve point is compared with a
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-63
calculated curve section (a section connects two neighboring

points). This can take a long time if the curve has a lot of sections.
Usually, a comparison with some sections near the point is quite
sufficient. You can enter the size of the area that is to be
considered.
To define the alignment:
Evaluation button.
2 Activate the Best fit check box and click on Settings.
The Best Fit dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Under Translation and Rotation, deactivate the check boxes

where you do not want to permit the respective movement during
the alignment.
All the check boxes are activated by default.
4 To fill the point list under Mask points with data: click on the Use
nominal data or Use actual data (under the list of points).
16-64
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
5 Under Mask points, click on the points which you wish to mask
and so which will not be taken into account during the alignment.
Another click will cancel the selection.
You can also select a rule for the use of points in the context
menu:
NOTE
hss
If you have used the Shift or Ctrl key for multiple selections, you can
refresh the display in the CAD window by clicking on Update
Graphics.
6 Under Max. Search Distance, enter the area to be considered in
the Search distance for the fit field in millimeters or click on
Default if you wish to use the standard Calypso value.
This default is derived from the doubled sum of tolerance and
stylus tip radius.
7 Click on OK to apply the definition.
The alignment of the coordinate system or of the curve feature into
the nominal feature is then only possible in the authorized directions,
with the specified points and the entered search distance.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-65
How to limit search distances during curve

evaluation
Distance calculation
Depending on the form of the curve, there may be several

intersection points between the splines and normals in the case of
distance evaluation.
This may affect the computing time. To prevent this, you can define
the maximum permissible distance from the actual point to the curve.
Evaluation button.
The Evaluation dialog box will open.
2 In the for distance evaluation field under Max. Search

Distance, enter the maximum distance which will presumably
suffice in millimeters.
3 Click OK to save your entry and close the dialog box.
The search distances are taken into account the next time the curve is
calculated.
16-66
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Smoothing a curve
In order to display a curve in a CAD window, Calypso lays spline
functions through the nominal points of the curve. As a result, all
nominal points will lie on the curve that is calculated in this manner.
In the case of some initial values (e.g. when measured actual values
are used as nominal values), the presentation of the curve may well be
relatively rough. This can, if necessary, be smoothed.
While doing so, the spline functions are only set in the close proximity
of the points and do not actually pass through each individual point.
The degree of approximation or smoothing can be defined with a
number between 0 and 1: If 0 is selected, the splines nestle up to all
points so that no distinction can be made to the usual method. 1, on
the other hand, will produce the maximum smoothing of the curve.
Evaluation button.
2 Under Filter/Outlier, activate the Approximation check box and
click on Settings.
The Approximation window for entering the approximation
parameters will be displayed.
3 Select whether you wish to smooth the presentation of the

measured curve or the nominal curve.
4 Enter a Smooth factor between 0 and 1 by dragging the slider
with the mouse.
To check the result, click on the Simulation button the result will
immediately be displayed in the CAD window.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-67
5 If necessary, select a method for redefining the curve points under

Grid.
If you select Keep number of points, the number of points of the
initial curve will also apply to the newly calculated curve.
The curve will be recalculated in accordance with your entries. The
new nominal curve will be determined on the basis of the calculated
values and displayed in the CAD window.
!
hss
Important
As soon as you confirm with OK, you will regenerate the nominal
points of the curve. The original curve cannot be recreated again. For
this reason, it is important that you use the Simulation function to
check the result beforehand.
Sorting the points in a curve

When scanning with a high point density or in positions which display
a high degree of curvature, it may well be that measured points are
not transferred in the right sequence. Normally, this is of no great
significance.
This is, however, significant when you are measuring curves, as the
sequence of the points influences the form of the curve. Calypso
therefore sorts the points in a meaningful manner.
On the other hand, there may also be curves that actually contain a
sharp bend and, consequently, should not be sorted: Sorting curves
such as these would result in an undesirable alteration in the form of
the curve (see example).
For this reason, you can control sorting using an angle limit. Here, an
angle is determined on the basis of the last three points that were
calculated (Points 1 to 3 in the example). The points will only be
sorted if the calculated angle is smaller than the angle limit.
16-68
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Example: The run of a curve contains a bend.
Bend
in curve
3
Curve
The angle of this bend is slightly less than 50. If you set the limit to
50, point 2 will automatically be interchanged with point 3
although this is not desired here. The curve would then look as
follows:
1
2
In this case, you will have to enter a limit that is less than the angle of
the bend, i.e. approx. 45.
Evaluation button.
2 Activate the Sort measured points check box and click on
Settings.
You see the Sort measured points window for input of the angle
limit.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-69
3 Enter the maximum angle that should be accepted or click on the

Default button to enter the Calypso default value.
If larger angles occur in the curve, the appropriate points will be
sorted.
4 To check the result, click on the Simulation button the result will
immediately be displayed in the CAD window.
The curve will be sorted in accordance with your entries. The new
nominal curve will be determined on the basis of the new
sequence and displayed in the CAD window.
6 Close the Evaluation dialog box with OK.
Limiting the evaluation of the curve values

The following problems can arise at the beginning and at the end of
the measuring path in the case of curve measurement and curve
evaluation:
The controller will have to readjust to the correct nominal path.
Calculation of the spline functions and the corresponding vectors
is difficult at the open ends of a curve: A slight deviation here has a
much greater effect here than in other positions.
To reduce the effects of these problems, you can limit the number of
points that should be used for the evaluation. A distinction must be
made here between basing the calculation on the nominal points on
the measuring spline or on the measured points on the nominal
spline:
When evaluating in the nominal vector direction, all measured
points will be considered. The limitation only applies to the
nominal points.
When evaluating in the actual vector direction, all nominal points
will always be used. Here, the limitation only applies to the actual
points.
16-70
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
The number of considered points can be limited in the following

manner:
Evaluation button.
2 Activate the check box under Limit evaluation and enter the
number of points which should not be considered at the start and
at the end of the curve in the case of the nominal points and the
actual points.
During the evaluation, a correspondingly fewer number of points will
be considered at the start and at the end of the curve.
How to eliminate outliers from a curve

Outliers are measured points that differ significantly from the
geometric form yielded by the other measured points and as such,
they can produce a large error when the computed feature is
calculated. An error of this nature easily propagates through the
actual-value determination of the corresponding characteristic.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-71
There are several different points at which you can set and activate
outlier elimination for curves:
As defaults for the characteristic groups and the references and
alignment features of the coordinate systems
For an individual characteristic
For an individual curve feature.
This is how to activate outlier elimination in a curve feature:
Evaluation button.
2 Under Filter/Outlier, activate the Outlier Elimination check box
and click on Settings.
The Outlier Mode window for entering the parameters will be
displayed.
3 Enter the Factor for Outlier as well as the Range Of Data

Reduction and confirm with OK.
4 Click OK to save your entry and close the Outlier Mode dialog
box.
During the calculation, the outlier measured values that fall under the
specified criteria are not taken into account.
16-72
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to add an offset to a curve

You can add an offset that is calculated from the curve values to the
measured points of a curve. The same offset is added to each
measured cuve value.
You have a choice of the following offsets:
Average
Maximum Value
Minimum Value
Standard Deviation
Arithmetic average calculated from the largest and shortest
distance
To add an offset to a curve:
Evaluation button.
2 Under Offset Calcuation, activate the Offset check box and click
on Settings.
The Offset window for selecting the offset calculation will be
displayed.
3 Select the mode of offset calculation and click on OK.

The selected offset is now added to all measured curve values.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-73
How to set the deviation calculation for

threads
For the measurement of thread profile intersections (e.g. recirculating
ball screws), it may be necessary to calculate the deviations in the
profile intersection plane of the thread and not in the nominal vector
direction.
If the slopes prove to be slight, there is no important difference
between these evaluation modes. If the slopes are significant,
however, the differences may exceed the measuring uncertainty.
NOTE
hss
If nothing else is defined for the measurement, use measurement in

nominal vector direction and without projection. These results supply
the best indication as to whether the spheres get stuck or not.
To define the evaluation mode for thread measurements:
Evaluation button.
2 Under 3d curve, activate the Thread check box.
3 Select the feature that defines the thread axis and enter the
Pattern of the thread (lead).
4 Confirm with OK and select in the definition template for the
curve the Nominal Vector Direction deviation calculation and the
desired projection:
No Projection: the deviations are evaluated in the nominal
vector direction.
Vertical Projection: the measured values are projected onto
the plane perpendicular to the thread and evaluated.
Helix Projection: the measured values are projected onto a
helicoids that is predefined by the thread parameters and
evaluated.
How to format the printout for the curve

Calypso enables you to map the curve exactly into your printout.
The procedure is as follows:
your screen.
16-74
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2 Adjust the curve in the CAD window until it is displayed exactly as

you want it in the printout.
Use the CAD buttons (see Buttons in the CAD window on
page 3-5) and/or the commands in the CAD context menu (see
The commands in the context menu for curves on page 16-39)
to display the curve exactly as you want it in the printout. When
you are ready, click OK in the curve definition template.
Graphical evaluation of deviations for

curves
Curve form
The form plots available for the curve form characteristic are as
follows:
Curve form linear
Curve form 2D
Multi-Curve form linear
Multi-Curve form 2D
Curve Slope
The form plots available for the curve slope characteristic are as
follows:
Slope Type 1 (portrait and landscape)
Five parameters are displayed in addition in the form plots for the
curve slope:
Slope error
Form error
Total error
Minimum Deviation fmin
Maximum Deviation fmax
Calling form plot
You call up form plots and display them as described in the section
entitled How to display variations in form and location graphically
on page 9-33.
Example: Slope Type 1 form plot

The illustration shows the Slope Type 1 form plot (landscape) by way
of example.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-75
It is derived from the 2D curve form. In addition, the regression line is

shown.

The illustration shows the Slope Type 2 form plot (landscape) by way
of example.
16-76
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
It is derived from the 2D curve form. In addition, the regression line is

shown. The distorted coordinate system is shown; the angle is
selected so that the slope line is shown horizontally.

The illustration shows the Curve form 2D form plot (landscape) by
way of example.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-77
It is derived from the linear curve form. In addition, the regression line
is shown.
16-78
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Example: Curve Form form plot

The illustration shows the Curve form 2D form plot by way of
example.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
16-79
16-80
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Chapter
17
Qualifying the RDS with CAA

(option)
.................................................................................................................................
If you have the RDS-CAA option (Computer Aided Accuracy), you can
determine the stylus data for all angular positions of an RDS in a
single operation, using no more than a small number of probings.
Only a few angular settings are actually qualified physically. The data
for the other positions is derived using a mathematical model
(calculated qualification).
As a consequence, the qualification procedure is completed much
more quickly and all physically possible angular positions of the RDS
are subsequently available for probing the workpiece. Subsequent
requalification, too, is faster.
The RDS-CAA option is available for both Calypso and CMM-OS. The
procedure for both programs is described in this document.

Principles of qualifying RDS-CAA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Qualification of the RDS on the CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Qualifying the stylus system with RDS-CAA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
17-1
Principles of qualifying RDS-CAA

Given the stepping adjustment of 2.5 degrees, a stylus on the RDS
can, in theory, adopt 20,736 positions, but, depending on the device
geometry, not all of these are physically possible. Without RDS-CAA,
each position is considered as an individual stylus that must also be
qualified.
Conventional qualification has generally been restricted to qualifying
a subset of the RDS positions. Calypso/CMM-OS supports this
procedure for the RDS with a qualification table in which each of the
required positions is entered as a stylus with its own name.
If you use the RDS-CAA option, however, you can determine the
stylus data for all possible angular positions of an RDS with just a
small number of probings. Only a few angular settings are actually
qualified physically; the values for the other positions are computed
using a mathematical model.
As a consequence, the qualification procedure is completed much
more quickly and all angular positions of the RDS are subsequently
available for probing the workpiece. Subsequent requalification, too,
is faster.
Three- or four-step
procedure
Qualification is a three- or four-step procedure:

Qualification of the RDS by Zeiss (factory qualification)
Factory qualification involves generating correction files for each
individual RDS: these files are a prerequisite for subsequent,
computed qualification. The correction files are installed on your
system together with the RDS-CAA option.
Qualification of the RDS on the CMM
After the RDS is mounted on the CMM, this qualification
determines and saves the position of the RDS within the machine's
coordinate system.
Stylus qualification in twelve positions per main stylus (this is the
stylus in the direction of the ram).
Finally, the required stylus system and its stylus are inserted into the
RDS and qualified in a few positions. Calypso/CMM-OS then
calculates the correction values for all of the remaining positions.
If the stylus system has only one stylus, this completes qualification
of the RDS.
17-2
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Principles of qualifying RDS-CAA
Qualification of remaining styli on the stylus system (star styli)

If a stylus system carries multiple styli (star styli), each of the
remaining styli is then qualified in four positions.
Calypso/CMM-OS calculates the correction values for all the
positions of the remaining styli, and this completes qualification of
the RDS.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
17-3

After the RDS is mounted on the CMM, this qualification must be
performed to determine its position in the machine's coordinate
system. This is a prerequisite for qualifying the scanning stylus systems
and styli on the RDS.
This qualification need only be done once for the RDS. The stylus
systems and styli used with the RDS can then each be qualified
without requalifying the installed RDS every time.
Establishing the preconditions for

qualification of the RDS on the CMM
Your RDS has been qualified at the factory. In this case, the requisite
correction files for the RDS are available.
Reference sphere
is defined
A further prerequisite is that the reference sphere is defined. Make

sure that Calypso/CMM-OS knows the position of the reference
sphere and that the shaft of the sphere points in the direction of
45/45 angular position of the RDS.
For a bridge CMM, this is the position with a 135 angle of
inclination and a 315 angle of rotation.
For a horizontal-arm CMM, it is the position with a 135 angle of
inclination and a 45 angle of rotation for column 1 and the
position with a 135 angle of inclination and a 315 angle of
rotation for column 2.
If one of the conditions is not met (if the reference sphere's shaft
points in a different direction or its position is not known), you must
requalify the reference sphere (see Qualifying the reference
sphere on page 4-40).
The master stylus is

inserted
Fitting qualification (RDS on CMM) must be performed with the

master stylus. This must be an RST, without extension, with a 40-mmlong stylus. (If your master stylus does not meet this requirement, you
must first make a master stylus of an RST, without extension, with a
40-mm-long stylus.)
Select Extras Workroom CMM, go to the Master Stylus tab
and make sure that all the requisite parameters have been set.
The procedure for installing the CMM's master stylus in the RDS is
described in How to install a stylus system on page 4-18.
17-4
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to perform qualification

You must open a measurement plan before you start fitting
qualification in Calypso.
To perform qualification:
1 In Calypso, click on the Stylus System button in the prerequisites
list.
- or In CMM-OS, select Stylus Stylus Qualification.
You will find detailed information on this dialog box in Stylus
system qualification window in the Calypso Online Help.
2 If it is not already displayed, select the name of the master stylus
from the Stylus System selection list.
The name and number of the stylus (the master stylus system has
only one stylus) will now appear in the Stylus Name / No.
selection list. Under Taper Angle, 180 is selected.
3 From the Mode selection list, select Six Points.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
17-5
4 Click on the RDS fitting position button.

The label on this button changes, depending on the situation: the
default label is Qualify Stylus.
5 After you are prompted, move the stylus towards the reference
sphere and probe the sphere in the stylus direction. (If your stylus is
vertical, therefore, position it over the north pole of the sphere and
probe once vertically downwards.)
In accordance with the selected mode, Calypso/CMM-OS
automatically proceeds with qualification, performing probing
operations in 12 positions to determine the fitted position of the
RDS to a high degree of precision, which it then saves.
The results are shown in the R, S, X, Y and Z fields.
The position of the RDS has now been successfully determined, and
you can begin with qualification of the individual styli.
17-6
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Qualifying the stylus system with RDS-CAA

Even with the RDS-CAA option, the basic procedure for using stylus
systems remains the same: When you create a measurement plan, you
must always make sure that you have installed the correct stylus
system and that it is calibrated.
In qualifying a stylus, you indicate which stylus you are using and then
initiate a routine in which the stylus measures the reference sphere.
(In Calypso, the Stylus System button turns green if this has already
been performed for the displayed stylus system.)
Only a few angular settings are actually calibrated physically with
RDS-CAA. However, the values for all other positions are then
computed and are available for measurement.
General information about qualification

The stylus system must be qualified:
If you have installed a new stylus system that has not been
qualified.
If you want to requalify a stylus system, for example after a
collision or due to thermal changes.
To qualify a stylus, instruct Calypso/CMM-OS to use this stylus to
probe the reference sphere, mounted on the measuring table, in a
special manner (which will be explained in greater detail later). With
RDS-CAA, the probe data will be determined automatically for all
angular positions of the RDS.
Qualifying stylus systems and styli

In Calypso/CMM-OS, each stylus system and stylus is given its own
name. Styli are also assigned numbers. Calypso/CMM-OS uses the
names and numbers to identify the stylus system and stylus and when
saving their data.
Consequently, each stylus has to be defined. You cannot qualify the
angular positions of a stylus with RDS-CAA until the stylus has been
defined.
In most cases, a stylus system has only one stylus. Star styli, as the
name suggests, have more than one stylus.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
17-7
How to define a new stylus system for RDS-CAA

To define a stylus system:
1 In Calypso, click on the Stylus System button in the lists of
prerequisites.
The Create New Stylus System dialog box appears on the
screen.
3 Enter the names for the new stylus system and the first stylus.
Calypso does not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase
characters.
4 Tick the RDSCAA check box.
The names of the stylus system and the first stylus are displayed in the
Stylus System and Stylus Name / No. selection lists.
If the stylus system has other styli, you now have to add them in
Calypso (see How to add styli to a stylus system on page 17-8).
How to add styli to a stylus system

If a stylus system has more than one stylus, Calypso/CMM-OS must be
informed of the other styli. After defining a new stylus system or
modifying an existing stylus system, therefore, you must add the
additional styli, if any, and qualify them.
17-8
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
To add further styli:

prerequisites.
The Create New Stylus dialog box appears on the screen.
Under Stylus No., the next higher number will be displayed

automatically.
3 Enter a name for the new stylus in the Stylus field.
Calypso does not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase
characters.
4 In the Stylus No. field select the number of the stylus.
The name of the stylus will now appear in the Stylus Name / No.
selection list.
6 If you wish to add another stylus, repeat steps 2 through 5.
The next step is to qualify each stylus in turn (see Qualifying stylus
systems and styli with RDS-CAA on page 17-10), and bear in mind
that you must proceed in a certain sequence: beginning with the first
stylus (the main stylus), and then continuing with the others (star
styli).
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
17-9
Qualifying stylus systems and styli with RDSCAA

Qualification of a stylus system's first stylus is not the same as
qualification of the stylus system's other styli, if any.
The first (and possibly the only) stylus is qualified in 12 physical
angular positions.
NOTE
hss
The direction of this stylus must match the direction of the ram.
Each additional stylus for this stylus system is qualified in four
physical angular positions.
How to qualify the first stylus with RDS-CAA

We assume that the stylus system to be qualified is mounted and that
all of its styli are known to Calypso/CMM-OS.
To qualify the first stylus (the main stylus, parallel to the ram) of a
stylus system with RDS-CAA:
prerequisites.
or
In CMM-OS, select Stylus Stylus Qualification.
17-10
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

3 Select the name of the stylus to be qualified first from the Stylus
In the Mode selection list, select the Standard mode.
4 If the styli you use are very short, reduce the value for Taper Angle
accordingly.
The smaller the taper, the smaller is the section of the surface of
the reference sphere which is probed for qualification.
Stylus qualification now begins using the 12 angular positions set
by RDS-CAA. To start the process, you must perform the first
probing manually.
6 When prompted, move the stylus in the RDS 0/0 position over the
north pole of the reference sphere and then probe the sphere with
the stylus perpendicular to the contact point on the sphere.
Calypso checks the position of the reference sphere and the length
of the stylus (roughly). Afterwards the 12 positions are
automatically selected and qualified.
The value entered in Taper Angle is taken into account as a
maximum value in the selection of the positions and probing
operations.
The results are shown in the R, S, X, Y und Z fields (see About
the results of stylus qualification on page 4-39).
Under the heading Stylus, you will now see the symbol for a
successful stylus qualification and below that the identifier RDSCAA.
How to qualify additional styli with RDS-CAA

If you want to qualify other styli for this stylus system (as is the case
with star styli), you can do so immediately after qualifying the main
stylus.
Each additional stylus is measured in four RDS positions in order to
achieve the best possible precision. Each of these measurements can
be performed either manually or semi-automatically.
Prerequisite: The Stylus System Qualification dialog box is open and
the first stylus of the stylus system has already been qualified.
To qualify the other styli of a stylus system with RDS-CAA:
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
17-11

This is not the main stylus, so the CAA star qualification dialog
box is displayed with the list of positions.
If data has been saved for the stylus system to be qualified, the list
is already filled out.
3 Under Position (1 to 4) in the list of positions, select one of two
RDS positions in each case by clicking on Alternative.
4 If you want to estimate which position is suitable:
Click on the show button.
The RDS then rotates to the corresponding position.
5 Select the desired probing mode under Mode:
normal semiautomatic qualification: the first probing is
manual; all others are automatic,
manual manual qualification.
6 If necessary, enter additional qualification positions with Add.
Four positions are generally enough; additional positions are
necessary only if the qualification accuracy is insufficient.
7 Under recal, activate at least two positions in the list that are to be
approached during requalification in the CNC run.
8 Click on OK to start qualification.
Calypso/CMM-OS steps you through the rest of the procedure.
9 If necessary, repeat steps 1 through 8 for additional styli.
10 Click on OK to confirm your entries and close the Stylus System
Qualification dialog.
NOTE
hss
17-12
If you do not confirm by clicking on the OK button, all unsaved data

from the stylus qualification is lost. It is advisable to close the Stylus
System Qualification dialog box from time to time during the
process by clicking on OK, so as to save intermediate states.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Calypso/CMM-OS returns to the user desk. The styli have been

successfully qualified.
In Calypso, the Stylus System button is now green.
Qualification log
Calypso/CMM-OS generates a log, which you can either print out or

save as an ASCII file.
The stylus system qualified with the RDS and its styli can now be used
by all users and in all RDS positions.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
17-13
17-14
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Chapter
18
Determining measuring
uncertainty (OVCMM) (option)
.................................................................................................................................
With the OVCMM (Offline Virtual Coordinate Measuring Machine),
the possible deviations from the real value and thus the measuring
uncertainties of results of a measurement plan can be ascertained. To
this end, important error sources that can influence the result are
analyzed.
Determining the measuring uncertainty with the OVCMM is a Calypso
option. You can license this functionality and have it enabled in your
system if you want to use it. Contact your Carl Zeiss Service for more
information.
The OVCMM must be configured by Zeiss Service. Zeiss Service will
also supported you in handling this option.

Basic principles of the OVCMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Configuring the OVCMM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
Using the OVCMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
18-1
Determining measuring uncertainty (OVCMM) (option)
Basic principles of the OVCMM

Using the OVCMM, Calypso can determine the possible deviations
from the real value for all characteristics of a measurement plan, i.e. it
uses the method of the virtual CMM to determine the characteristicspecific measuring uncertainty and output this in a report.
Benefits of the OVCMM
The measurement inaccuracy calculation using the virtual CMM has

the following benefits:
It is in line with standards and objective.
It is automatic and requires no special knowledge on the part of
the user.
It is not excessively time-consuming.
It matches the complexity of CMMs with their wide variety of
influencing factors.
It takes account of flexible measuring jobs.
The method of the virtual CMM

In order to determine the inaccuracies, Calypso uses the method of
the virtual CMM to calculate an inaccuracy range for each individual
measurement.
In the case of complex measured values (construction, theoretical
element), this range consists of the inaccuracies from the entire
measurement chain. The OVCMM takes the errors and deviations of
all previous measuring jobs involved in the measurement into
account, i.e. also the alignment and the reference features.
Procedure
The OVCMM determines the measuring uncertainties in compliance

with GUM, ISO 14253 and ISO 15530. To this end, the CNC run is
simulated for all characteristics of a measurement plan.
The result of this simulation corresponds to the dispersion range of a
measurement of 128 workpieces with a random variation of the
known influencing factors.
In this way, a range that is representative for the measuring results is
calculated. Finally, the resulting variance is used to ascertain the
uncertainty for each characteristic and to output it in the
measurement report.
18-2
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Basic principles of the OVCMM
Uncertainty of measuring results

Measuring uncertainty
A measuring result can only be an estimated value of the value to be

measured. This means it is complete only if it is accompanied by a
specified measuring uncertainty. This is summarized in the following
formula:
Y=yU
Here, Y is the value to be measured, i.e. the real value; y is the
measured and possibly corrected estimated value (the measurement
result); U is the measuring uncertainty. No exact value is specified for
Y in the equation, only a range in which Y lies.
Uncertainty of
coordinate
measurements
Coordinate measuring machines are extremely complex, universal

measuring machines for practically any workpieces.
This is why coordinate measuring machines have a great many
sources of inaccuracy, whose mutual overlaps are difficult to describe
and analyze. It is not possible to describe the measurement process
for a nontrivial measuring task with a complete mathematical model.
The uncertainty of a coordinate measurement also depends on the
relevant measuring job: How many and which measurements are
included in the result? How are the individual measurements linked?
Influencing variables
The following influencing variables are taken into account by the
OVCMM:
Systematic residual deviations of the geometry of the CMM
Fluctuations of the geometry deviations due to temporal and
spatial temperature gradients
Direction-dependent systematic residual deviations of the probing
system
Random deviations of the probing system
Uncertainty caused by linear workpiece expansion
Uncertainty in qualification of the stylus tip diameter
Uncertainty in qualification of the stylus tips of a stylus system
Roughness of the workpiece surface
Uncertainty of the normals used for connection to the
international SI units
The following influencing variables are not automatically taken into
account:
Measurement deviations due to operator influence
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
18-3
Deformation of the workpiece due to clamping

Deformation of the workpiece due to probing forces
Temperature gradients in the workpiece
Shape influence of the workpiece (position and distribution of the
measured points)
These influencing variables must be set manually and individually
taken into account if it can be assumed that each influence makes a
significant contribution to the measuring uncertainty in each job.
Cooperation in determining error sources

Use of the method of the virtual CMM requires the cooperation
between a number of parties: the manufacturer, a qualification
laboratory, and the user.
What does Zeiss do?
The most important systematic errors of a CMM must be determined

in advance.
The specific errors for each CMM type (geometry, effect of ambient
influences on the geometry, dynamic effects) have been determined
by Zeiss and recorded in a device file.
What does the

accredited laboratory
do?
An accredited laboratory (e.g. Zeiss Service) measures your CMM with

great precision and creates the database of the OVCMM. To this
end, geometry deviations in the entire measuring range are recorded
using perforated-plate measurements in different positions.
Depending on the specific environment of your CMM and your
requirements for use, the laboratory generates for your CMM and its
specific purpose one or more ambient conditions as a basis for the
OVCMM.
What do you do?
To ensure the device accuracy, measure qualified workpieces or gages

at regular intervals (weekly).
In order to be able to take the uncertainty from measurement errors
of the styli used into account, the OVCMM requires the stylus
characteristics. You can determine these stylus characteristics by
probing the reference sphere.
When you set up a new measurement plan and each time the
influencing variables change, start the simulation using the OVCMM.
18-4
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Configuring the OVCMM

So that you can use the OVCMM in Calypso, you must configure it
first. To do so, determine the stylus characteristics for the stylus (styli)
used and, if appropriate, set the ambient condition.
NOTE
hss
The ambient conditions of your CMM must have been determined

and applied by Zeiss Service or another accredited laboratory.
How to determine the stylus characteristics

All of the styli used for measurement must be qualified by the
OVCMM, as each stylus has its own specific error influences. These
influences are measured by you using the reference sphere to qualify
the stylus.
For the OVCMM, you can specify determination of the stylus
characteristics: you can specify exactly how the CMM is to measure
the stylus on the reference sphere (e.g. number of axis intersection
points).
Each stylus characteristic is stored under a separate name in the stylus
administration. This means you can use stylus characteristics that have
already been determined for a similar stylus system by assigning it
that name.
Calypso offers two possibilities to determine stylus characteristics:
Standard definition: You only enter the name of the stylus
characteristic. The specific values are set as standard.
Advanced definition: You enter the name of the stylus
characteristic and change the default values for probing the
reference sphere.
Standard definition
In most cases, determining the stylus characteristics with the standard
definition is fully adequate.
To determine the stylus characteristics with the standard definition:
1 Select Extras Workroom Measurement and click on the
VCMM tab in the Measurement Methods notebook.
A notebook page opens with the Settings for measuring
uncertainty data VCMM.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
18-5
2 Click on the Default setting button in the Definition of stylus

influence group.
The Stylus Influence window will open.
3 Enter the name of the stylus characteristics and confirm with OK.
The CMM now starts qualifying the stylus.
4 Save and close with OK.
Advanced definition
For some stylus systems, the default settings are not sufficient to
determine the errors to an adequately precise extent. This is where
you use the advanced definition.
To determine the stylus characteristics with the advanced definition:
18-6
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2 Click on the Advanced setting button in the Definition of

stylus influence group.
The Stylus Influence: Extended Qualification Mode window
will open.
3 Enter the name of the stylus characteristic.

4 Change the default settings for the number of probing points in
the corresponding input field.
The CMM now starts qualifying the stylus.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
18-7
Assigning stylus characteristics

The OVCMM is now completely configured. In the stylus
administration, you can assign the corresponding stylus characteristics
to the stylus required for the measurement.
For this, you will find two additional fields in the stylus administration:
Stylus Characteristic and Base Characteristic. These two additional
fields are only visible if the OVCMM is activated.
18-8
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Using the OVCMM
Using the OVCMM

You use the OVCMM to determine the uncertainty of the results of a
certain measurement plan. To do so, you usually proceed as follows:
You activate the OVCMM and set the ambient conditions relevant
for the current measurement plan run.
Start the CNC run. After the CNC run, the OVCMM is
automatically active and determines the deviations.
The determined deviations for each characteristic are output with
the printout.
Then, deactivate the OVCMM. The deviations determined for the
current measurement plan do not change from one CNC run to
the next.
It is only when you want to run a changed or new measurement
plan or the influencing variables have changed (e.g. the
measurement location or a physically changed stylus) that it is
important to reactivate the OVCMM to determine the
characteristic-specific measuring uncertainties that now apply.
How to activate the OVCMM

So that the OVCMM takes effect after each CNC run, you have to
activate it.
If the OVCMM is to take additional error conditions (e.g. workpiece
expansion coefficient or temperature changes with a certain course)
into account, you must select the corresponding environmental
condition.
NOTE
hss
The environmental conditions must have been configured by Zeiss

Service or an accredited laboratory.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
18-9
To activate the OVCMM and set the environmental conditions:

2 Activate the Measuring uncertainty data active check box.

3 If the work of the OVCMM is to be entered in a log file, activate
the Inspection outputs check box.
This can make sense for tests and checks performed by Zeiss
Service.
4 In the Environmental conditions group, activate the Conditions
active check box.
5 In the Conditions selection list, select the relevant specific
environmental condition.
The OVCMM is now active. It is automatically started after the next
CNC run and takes the selected conditions into account for the
uncertainty calculation.
18-10
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Using the OVCMM
NOTE
hss
Do not forget to deactivate the OVCMM after the CNC run and
output of the log, as it will otherwise become active again after every
CNC run and will repeat its calculations.
Results of the OVCMM

When the OVCMM is activated, it starts automatically after each CNC
run.
The entire measurement plan is then repeated 128 times by the
OVCMM, whereby the measuring results are different every time, but
are systematically distorted.
The error analysis includes:
the results of the highly precise CMM qualification
the stylus characteristics
the environmental condition you may have selected
additional contributions to measuring uncertainty, e.g. caused by
ambient influences.
The possible deviations of the characteristics are aggregated from the
measuring results with the collated errors.
Then, the report of the CNC run is output with an additional column.
This column contains the uncertainty of each individual characteristic.
!
hss
Important
At the moment, the base alignment must not be created using a
CMM and the OVCMM option. Recommended procedure:
1.) Measure the data without activating the OVCMM option at first.
2.) Then perform the simulation in another CNC run without resetting
the results.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
18-11
18-12
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Chapter
19
.................................................................................................................................
You can use the Characteristic Input option to generate a largely

complete Calypso measurement plan from suitable CAD data
automatically. For this purpose, the geometry information, tolerances
and references are taken from the CAD model data.
You can send the executable measurement plan to the CMM
computer or export it into the DMIS format using the DMIS Out
option.
The Stylus Simulation and the Stylus System Library as well as the
DMIS Export are options. This is why they are described in separate
chapters.

Basics about the characteristic input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
Generating a measurement plan from CAD data . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
19- 1
Basics about the characteristic input

The Characteristic Input option consists of the following modules:
Module
Function
QDAS converter
Transforms characteristic data in the QDAS format into

characteristics of a Calypso measurement plan.
STEP AP 203
Loads CAD model data for conversion into features and for
representation in Calypso.
Prerequisites
The component must be constructed via a CAD system and the

component characteristics must be numbered automatically in the
drawing department using the PE-Inspect or BCT-Inspector module.
Thus, each characteristic of the component is uniquely labeled and
searching and marking of the characteristics in the drawing are no
longer required.
NOTE
hss
If identical characteristic numbers are used for the same

characteristics when constructing variables, this also forms the basis
for uniform measuring planning and measurement program creation
throughout the different branches of a company.
Requirements for the input data

Characteristic data and CAD model data must meet certain
requirements before the Characteristic Input option can convert them
into features of a Calypso measurement plan:
The data must have been created using a ProE or UG (Unigraphics)
CAD system and have been converted into a STEP file in the AP
203 or AP 214 format.
The required feature data must be available as ASCII data in the
QDAS format.
The formatting must have been created on the basis of a
WEPROM specification. The QDAS data must have been
processed using the PE-Inspect program from PTC or with the
BCT-Inspector program from BCT.
You can use the Characteristic Input option only if your input data
meets these requirements.
19-2
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Basics about the characteristic input
Requirements for the import and export

The illustration shows the function and purpose of the Characteristic
Input interface. You can see the various input data on one side and
the possible types of output on the other side.
ProE
CAD System
PE-Inspect
1
DMIS
Measurement
Program
STEP
AP 203
EXCEL Table
(ASCII)
QDAS
Data
2
Stylus Simulation
Calypso
Stylus System
Library
offline
DMIS
Measurement
Program
Calypso
Measurement
Plan
5
other
CMM Software
Calypso
on the CMM
6
QDAS
Data
Results
Statistics System
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
19-3
Data and program structure

(1) After the component has been drawn and the model has been
constructed, the ProE and UG CAD systems use the supplementary
PE-Inspect or BCT-Inspector program to create a STEP and a Q-DAS
data record in an ASCII format:
STEP-AP-203 or STEP-AP-214 data with attribute identifier
QDAS data with the nominal value, tolerance and
reference characteristic information items.
(2) As an additional supplement to the characteristics, other data
can be loaded from an EXCEL table. This data could be production
sections, for example.
(3) The Characteristic Input option reads the ASCII data records
from (1) and (2) and creates a root program in the form of a
Calypso measurement plan. With Calypso on the CMM or the
Calypso Planner, this measurement plan can be further processed.
(4) Stylus Simulation and Stylus System Library are options for
supplementing and completing the measurement plans created
remotely via the Calypso Planner.
(5) The measurement plans can be transferred directly to Calypso
that is installed on the CMM.
(6) After a measurement with Calypso, a QDAS output interface is
available if required. The data created with this interface is thus
available for further processing in statistics programs.
(7) An existing DMIS measurement program from an external
program can be loaded into the DMIS Import option. A Calypso
measurement plan can also be created from this data.
(8) A measurement program created is converted into a DMIS
ASCII format using a DMIS preprocessor (DMIS Export option).
External users can use these data records to generate and run their
own measurement programs if a DMIS processor (Version 3.0 or
higher) is present.
19-4
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Generating a measurement plan from CAD data
Generating a measurement plan from CAD

data
You can use the Characteristic Input option to generate a largely
complete Calypso measurement plan from suitable CAD data
automatically.
Here, the completeness of the resulting measurement plan and the
scope of the manual rework depend on the amount of data and
content of the interface data.
Transforming cylinders
to circles
All shafts and bores contained in the CAD data are transferred as
cylinders to the measurement plan without any special preparations.
This type of measurement for the test target is often too complex,
however, and is therefore not practical.
You can therefore define prior to the generation which cylinders are
to be transferred as circles from the CAD data to the measurement
plan. After generation you can edit this list and start the conversion of
the cylinders to circles.
Default measurement
strategies
NOTE
Prior to generation, you can define the default measurement strategy

for the line, plane, circle, cylinder and cone feature types.
hss
Thus you determine at the same time the technology settings of

Calypso which are effective throughout the measurement plan.
Procedure
To generate a measurement plan from CAD data, proceed as follows:

To prepare the generation of the measurement plan, you must
carry out the following:
Enter the rules for the conversion of cylinders
Determine the default measurement strategies
Specify the characteristic list and CAD-STEP file
Start generation
Transform cylinders to circles
Complete the characteristics
Define the coordinate system
Set the clearance planes
Insert styli into the features
Test and save the measurement plan
Add information to the measurement plan
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
19-5
How to prepare for generation of the

measurement plan
Before loading the data via the Characteristic Input interface, you
must check the following settings in Calypso:
Calypso is running in the Simulation operating mode.
Setting simulation
operating mode
To ensure that all data and settings are available for generation of the
measurement plan, you have to set Calypso to the Simulation
operating mode.
To set Calypso to Simulation:
The CMM Configuration notebook opens to the Control page.
2 Click on the Simulation tab and on Connect.
Calypso and the measurement plan generator are thus set for the
Simulation operating mode.
NOTE
hss
Creating a stylus
system
Make sure that no other connection to a CMM is active. Otherwise,

you must clear the connection down by closing the Stoplight window.
For later simulation of the CNC run, you require the stylus data of the
stylus system to be used to measure the workpiece. You have two
possibilities to obtain the stylus data:
You export the stylus data from Calypso on the CMM to Calypso
offline (Simulation operating mode).
To do so, select Stylus System Management, open the Catalog,
mark the relevant stylus system and select the Export menu item
in the Edit menu. The stylus data is saved in the intermediate
storage on your hard disk (e.g. in C:\Temp).
Then clear down the connection to the CMM. Now, create the
connection to CMM Simulation (as described above), open
Stylus System Management and import the data from the
intermediate storage.
Use the Stylus System Library to create the stylus data.
For more details, please refer to Stylus simulation and stylus
system library (option) on page 20-1.
You can use the Stylus System Management to select the stylus
system to be used for measurement in Calypso. The current stylus
system is available in the Stylus System Management catalog; it
must be selected with a double-click.
19-6
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to create a measurement plan

After you have completed all the preparations in Calypso, you can
create the measurement plan and load the feature data as well as the
STEP file.
To create the measurement plan and load the feature data:
1 Select Planner New Plan.
The Generate Measurement Plan dialog box appears, the
Generate tab is on top.
2 Assign a name to the new measurement plan.

3 Under Feature list, enter the path of the QDAS file or click on
Find and select the required file in the default Windows dialog.
4 Under STEP File, enter the path of the STEP-AP-203 or STEP-AP214 file or click on Find and select the required file in the default
Windows dialog.
5 Activate the Rules tab and enter the criteria according to which
cylinders are to be transferred from the CAD data to the
conversion list for conversion to circles.
By activating one or more of the offered characteristics, all those
cylinders are entered in the list for which no additional
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
19-7
characteristics are defined in the measurement plan than those

characteristics activated.
Additionally, you can specify a geometric rule according to which
the cylinders to be entered in the list are further specified.
6 Activate the Technology defaults tab.
7 Activate the check boxes for all feature types for which you want
to define a default strategy and click on each Settings button.
8 In the Strategy window, specify the default measurement strategy
according to which the features of the corresponding type are to
be measured.
NOTE
Thus you determine at the same time the technology settings of

Calypso which are effective throughout the measurement plan. For all
feature types which are not activated, the available technology
defaults of Calypso will be used.
NOTE
If a certain feature is to be measured using a strategy that deviates

from the default measurement strategy, you must enter this for the
feature concerned after the automatic generation.
hss
hss
9 If all entries are correct, click on Generate Measurement Plan.

The measurement plan generator loads the files and creates the
characteristics and features.
After generation, you will see on the Generate tab under
Program Status how many features and characteristics have been
created and how many of which are completely defined.
Sequence of the automatic measurement plan

generation
During loading, you can see the following on the screen:
The list of features is formed from the features in the STEP file with
the set resources.
Simultaneously, the CAD model is generated in the CAD window.
The list of characteristics is built as a root program from the
characteristics in the QDAS file.
19-8
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Converting cylinders
During generation, the Selected cylinders will be converted to

circles dialog box appears.
The list shows all cylinders of the CAD data. The designations of the
cylinders (identifiers) have been taken over from the STEP data record
of the CAD system.
If you specified rules for the conversion of cylinders to circles, those
cylinders to which the rules apply are selected. The CAD window
displays the cylinders selected purple-colored.
By pressing and holding down the Ctrl key you can mark additional
cylinders or exclude certain cylinders from the conversion. The
changes made are shown in the CAD window. Click on OK to confirm
your choice.
All selected and dark-shaded cylinders in the measurement plan are
converted to circles.
Result
After generation, you will see on the Generate tab under Program
Status how many features and characteristics have been created and
how many of which are completely defined.
After the files have been loaded, a list is generated that contains the
characteristics that require additional data. This list is set up to be
interactive, and permits the direct input of missing data.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
19-9
In the rest of the procedure, you now use this root measurement plan
to specify the coordinate systems and the clearance planes as well as
to run the automatic stylus allocation.
Reading in the features

After the STEP file has been loaded, the workpiece can be seen on the
screen as a wire frame model. As soon as you click on the button for
Render, the wire frame model is displayed as rendered.
The CAD core automatically forms the features of the measurement
plan from the geometry data of the STEP file. Subsequently, all
features are displayed in a list. The designations of the features
(identifiers) have been taken over from the STEP data record of the
CAD system.
As soon as you select a feature in the list, it is highlighted in the CAD
window in color and vice versa.
Loading the characteristics

The characteristics for the measurement plan are created
automatically from the characteristic data in the QDAS format of the
CAD system. The list of characteristics is then displayed.
The characteristics as well as the associated references are generated
automatically via the QDAS file from the CAD system.
As soon as you select a characteristic in the list, the associated
references are highlighted in the CAD window in color.
How to edit the generated measurement

plan
The measurement plan generator has automatically built up a root
measurement plan that already contains characteristics and features
as well as references (if applicable).
After the measurement plan has been loaded, you see the list of
generated characteristics. Their completeness depends on the amount
of data and content of the interface data: If the loaded QDAS data
was complete, you do not need to enter any more references,
nominal values and tolerances later.
To edit the measurement plan:
1 Check the list of characteristics.
Characteristics highlighted in gray in the list are fully defined.
All characteristics that are only highlighted in the background color
are not fully defined.
19-10
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2 Open the incompletely defined characteristics one after the other.

The reference entered as the feature in each case is highlighted in
color in the CAD window.
3 Enter the necessary references, nominal dimensions and
tolerances.
To complete the measurement plan, the coordinate system, clearance
planes and the stylus system must be defined.
Setting the base alignment

The essential rework after generation of the root measurement plan
includes setting the base alignment.
Calypso is unable to generate an alignment from the CAD data and
characteristics. This means that you have to set the base alignment
yourself.
For more details, please refer to Setting the base / start alignment
on page 4-46.
How to define the clearance planes

Calypso does not generate clearance planes from the CAD data. This
means that you have to define the clearance planes yourself.
To define the clearance planes:
1 Click on the Clearance Planes button in the list of prerequisites.
- or Select Resources Clearance Planes.
The Clearance planes window will open. You will find detailed
information on this window under Clearance Planes in the
2 Click on the Clearance Planes from CAD model button, enter
the desired offset in the window and confirm with OK.
The definition of the clearance planes is automatically calculated
from the dimensions of the CAD model.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
19-11
How to assign the styli in the generated

measurement plan
The stylus system must be the same in the generated measurement
plan and on the CMM. To ensure this, the stylus system must have
been exported or created using the Stylus System Library. The physical
stylus system that corresponds to this stylus system must exist on the
CMM.
To assign the styli automatically:
1 Select Resources Autom. select stylus for measurement
plan.
The styli are automatically determined for each feature and
entered in the definition template of the feature.
To check the allocated styli and correct them if necessary:
1 Select Resources Select Stylus for this Measurement Plan.
The Measurement Plan Editor Features appears with the Stylus
default setting.
2 Mark the feature for which you want to correct the stylus
allocation and select the desired stylus number under set to.
The feature marked in the list is highlighted in color in the CAD
window.
How to test and save the generated

measurement plan
The generated measurement plan is complete once the data about
the base alignment, the stylus and the clearance planes has been
added. You can now save and test it.
During the test, everything runs as if on the CMM, the only difference
being that there are no real movements and probings. However, you
do receive reports as in the case of actual probing.
To save the measurement plan:
1 Select File Save.
The measurement plan is saved under the name you entered in the
Generate Measurement Plan dialog box.
To test the measurement plan:
1 Set up the connection to the simulated CMM by selecting Extras
Workroom CMM and clicking on Connect.
19-12
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2 To set the stylus simulation for the measurement plan, select

Planner Simulation Stylus System.
More detailed information on stylus simulation can be found under
Stylus simulation on page 20-2.
3 Select Plan CNC-Start CNC-Start.
The measurement plan will now be processed.
If appropriate, you receive reports on errors, deficiencies or
collision risks.
4 Evaluate the reports and edit the measurement plan accordingly.
5 Then repeat steps 3 and 4.
After you have corrected any errors that might have been in the
measurement plan, you can save it and release it for further use.
You can run the measurement plan, e.g. on a CMM with Calypso, or
you can use the DMIS Export function to convert it into a DMIS
measurement program that can run on all DMIS measuring machines.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
19-13
19-14
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Chapter
20
Stylus simulation and stylus

system library (option)
.................................................................................................................................
With the Stylus Simulation and Stylus System Library option, Calypso
is able to display the location and position of the currently used stylus
in the CAD window during the CNC run. In this way, you can
conveniently trace which movements the stylus is making in the CNC
run on the screen.
So that the stylus movement can be simulated, Calypso requires a
complete geometry model of the stylus system and the associated
styli. You can use the Stylus System Library to assemble stylus systems
and styli from the cone, cylinder, sphere and cube basic features.
If Calypso knows the corresponding dimensions, the probe, base
plate, rotary table and the measuring range of the CMM can also be
shown.
Stylus Simulation and Stylus System Library are also the requirement
for starting and processing measurement plans offline, i.e. without
a connected CMM.

Stylus simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
Stylus system library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
20-1
Stylus simulation and stylus system library (option)
Stylus simulation
When you activate the stylus simulation, not only the workpiece but
also the movement of the currently used stylus system are shown in
the CAD window during the CNC run.
You can conveniently trace the stylus system in the CNC run on the
screen. You see exactly which stylus is used and which movements
and rotations the stylus makes relative to the workpiece.
If Calypso knows the corresponding dimensions, the probe, base
plate, rotary table and the measuring range of the CMM can also be
shown.
In this way, you have a completely new possibility to check the run.
Any weaknesses (risk of collision) in the measurement plan become
visible and can be corrected.
NOTE
hss
This option is particularly important for testing, for example, a

measurement plan created using the Calypso Planner away from the
machine.
Properties of the simulation

Calypso always attempts to show the stylus system in the center of
the CAD window. The view is set at an angle of 40 to the shaft
direction of the stylus.
By selecting the run mode (single steps, permanent operation) and by
stopping and restarting the simulation, you simultaneously control the
stylus system display and CNC run.
In addition, you can set the different parameters of the simulation,
such as the number of tests, display of the track and the automatic
collision recognition.
Requirements for stylus simulation

The stylus simulation is only possible if the dimensions and
configuration of the stylus system used in the measurement plan are
known. To this end, the stylus system must be assembled and saved
using the Stylus System Library.
CMM dimensions
To be able to display additional features, you must make the

cooresponding entries under Extras Workroom CMM:
Probe: Selection on the Probe page.
Base plate and measuring range: Input of the dimensions on the
Machine page.
Rotary table: Input on the Rotary Table page.
20-2
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Stylus simulation
Controlling the stylus simulation

If you have correctly assembled the stylus system used in the
measurement plan using the Stylus System Library, you can simulate
the movements of the stylus system on the workpiece in the CAD
window.
Here, you have various possibilities to control the run and display.
Activating the stylus
simulation
You activate the stylus simulation with Planner Stylus System

Simulation. The Simulation dialog box appears on the screen.
The icons have the following meanings:

Icon
Function
You can use the Stop, Start and Step recorder keys to stop the CNC
run and thus the stylus simulation, to restart it or let it run in the
single-step mode.
You use the icons for Stylus and Stylus System to control the
extent of the display: With Stylus, only the currently used stylus is
displayed.
You use the icons for the display to control the display of the probe,
base plate and rotary table.
You can also show the clearance planes on the screen.
The green semi-transparent cuboid represents the measuring range
of the CMM.
With the slider, you can control the accuracy of the collision
observation.
By activating the Collision observation icon, the dialog box is
enlarged. Calypso registers each collision and enters it in the list.
If you probe a very large workpiece, you can use the Follow stylus
icon to have the zoom window always follow the movements of the
stylus. Simultaneously, the workpiece is automatically rotated in the
CAD window in such way that you always see the stylus system in
front of the workpiece.
If the Show navigation icon is activated, the path of the stylus
movement is marked as light traces in the CAD window.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
20-3
How to position the CAD model

By positioning the CAD model in Calypso, you can simulate the
shifting or rotation of a workpiece on the base plate. Unlike the
rotation of the view of the CAD model via the buttons of the CAD
window, the CAD model is rotated mathematically by the positioning.
NOTE
hss
The base plate or the rotary table must be shown in the CAD window
(Planner CMM Dimensions).
To position a CAD model:
1 Rotate the CAD model in the CAD window so that you can click on
the desired surface.
2 Select CAD Modification Modify CAD Entities.
The Modify CAD Model dialog is opened.
3 Click on the Position button on the Edit body tab.
To cancel positioning, click on the Position button.
4 Click in the CAD model on the surface to be positioned on the
base plate.
5 Click the position on the base plate upon which the CAD model is
to be placed.
The CAD model is positioned on the base plate.
20-4
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Stylus system library

So that the run can be simulated, Calypso requires a complete
geometry model of the stylus and the associated styli. This is the
purpose of the Stylus System Library.
Creating styli
With the Stylus System Library, you have two different possibilities to
create styli:
You can load existing standard styli, and change and save them if
necessary. To this end, Zeiss supplies a library with the usual styli
and stylus parts (see Catalog 60-25-035-5 Carl Zeiss).
Individual features can be selected on the loaded stylus. The
selected feature is highlighted in color, and you can change its
dimensions as well as set the color and material attributes.
You can create completely new styli and entire stylus systems from
the cone, cylinder, sphere and cube basic features.
With the design, a 3D model of the stylus tip, stylus or entire stylus
system is created in the CAD window.
Storing styli
After you have set up or modified the stylus as desired, save it under
the name of the original. This enables Calypso to access this data
during the stylus simulation.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
20-5
Working with the stylus system library

You can use the Stylus System Library to copy all of the styli used
on your CMM on the screen and save them. This provides Calypso
with the necessary data to simulate probings and to display the
probings by the stylus in the CAD window. Saved styli can be reloaded
and edited.
Starting the Stylus System Library

You start the Stylus System Library with Planner Stylus System
Library. The Stylus System Elements dialog box opens with a menu
and different dialog elements.
This window provides you with the following possibilities:

You can load an existing stylus system to edit it.
You can assemble a completely new stylus system.
You can save an edited stylus system.
You can edit the attribute table for the stylus system elements.
A loaded stylus system is displayed beside the Stylus System
Elements window in the CAD window, as is a stylus system or stylus
you are currently defining. In this way, you can follow what you are
assembling directly on screen.
20-6
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to load, modify and save styli

If the base configuration of the stylus system to be simulated on your
CMM belongs to the stylus systems provided by Zeiss, you can load
and change it, and re-save the changed stylus system.
To load the stylus system
1 Select Planner Stylus System Library.
2 In the Stylus System Elements window, select the File Open
menu item.
3 In the file selection window, select the desired file of file type
prb.
The stylus system is loaded and shown in the CAD window. You
can use the mouse to select the individual elements.
The selected element is highlighted in color. In the list of stylus

system elements, you can change its dimensions and use
Attributes to set its color and material attributes.
4 To save the modified stylus system: In the Stylus System
Elements window, select the File Save as menu item and
enter a file name.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
20-7
Editing the table of attributes for simulated

styli
The elements of the stylus systems assembled for the stylus simulation
have various attributes such as color and material. When a stylus
system is assembled for the simulation, select the suitable attribute
from a selection list.
After the installation of Calypso, there is only one color and material
type for each basic body (e.g. silver and aluminum). You can
enter, edit and delete other elements for the selection list in the Table
of Attributes dialog box according to your needs.
You open the table of attributes after Planner Stylus System
Library from the Stylus System Elements dialog box with the menu
item in that window: Extras Attributes.
To define a new color for the selection, enter its name. You define the
color values via sliders or direct input of the color values for red, green
and blue. With Save, the color is included in the list of additional
colors.
To define a new material type for the selection, enter its name as well
as its density. The density is used to calculate the weights of the
individual stylus system elements and thus of the entire stylus. With
Save, the new material is included in the list of additional materials.
Click OK to return to the Stylus System Elements window, where
you can immediately assign the additionally defined attributes.
20-8
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Assembling a stylus
In the Stylus System Elements window, you can fully reassemble
the styli you are using and save them under different names.
To do so, take the following systematic steps:
Assemble the stylus system body
Assemble stylus and stylus parts from the stylus system elements
Add the stylus parts and styli to the stylus system body
Save the stylus system
Enable the stylus system for the stylus simulation
How to assemble the stylus system body

If you want to assemble a stylus system from scratch, it makes
sense to start by assembling the stylus system body.
To assemble the stylus system body:
The Stylus System Elements dialog box opens with a menu and
different dialog elements.
2 Click in the necessary order on the buttons for the cone, cylinder,
sphere and cube geometric basic bodies.
Elements named cone_n, cylinder_n, sphere_n or cube_n are
included in the element list, whereby n is the serial number of the
element.
Simultaneously, you see how the stylus system body is assembled
from the selected basic bodies in the CAD window.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
20-9
3 To change the dimensions set as standard:

Click on the relevant table cell in the element list and overwrite the
details of Diameter and/or Radius1, Length, Width and Height.
4 Click on the relevant element in the element list and then on the
Attributes button.
The Stylus attributes dialog box will open.
5 Select the Color and Material attributes.
Available here are the default attributes as well as the attributes
additionally defined in the table of attributes.
6 Save the stylus system body with the menu item in that window:
File Save as; assign a meaningful name that can be found
easily later.
How to assemble a stylus or stylus part

After you have set up the stylus system body, you can assemble the
required styli and stylus parts one after the other and then apply them
to the stylus system body.
To model angled styli: Create the parts of the stylus individually and
only then assemble them on the stylus system. In the case of angled
styli that have already been fully created, you are unable to set the
orientation of the attachment.
NOTE
hss
Always start constructing a stylus at the clamping point of the stylus

and never at the stylus tip.
20-10
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
To assemble the first node of a stylus:

2 Click in the necessary order on the buttons for the cone, cylinder,
sphere and cube geometric basic bodies.
Elements named cone_n, cylinder_n, sphere_n or cube_n are
included in the element list, whereby n is the serial number of the
element.
Simultaneously, you see how the first node of the stylus is
assembled from the selected basic bodies in the CAD window.
3 To change the dimensions set as standard:
Click on the relevant table cell in the element list and overwrite the
details of Diameter and/or Radius1, Length, Width and Height.
To add the stylus tip:

1 The last thing to add is a basic body in the shape of the stylus tip
(sphere, cone base, cylinder) and set its dimensions.
You can now set the attributes for the individual elements:
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
20-11
2 Click on the relevant element in the element list and then on the
Attributes button.
The Stylus attributes dialog box will open.
Select the Color and Material attributes. Available here are the
default attributes as well as the attributes additionally defined in
the table of attributes.
Only in the case of stylus tip, enter the name of the stylus and the
stylus number under Stylus name in the Stylus group. In the
CAD window, a small flag with the stylus data points to the stylus
tip.
3 Save the stylus with the menu item in that window: File Save
as; assign a meaningful name that can be found easily later.
How to configure a stylus system

You can configure a stylus system by loading a stylus system body and
fitting styli to it.
Prerequisite: You have already defined the stylus system body and all
the required styli.
To configure a stylus system:
2 Load the required stylus system body with the menu item in the
window: File Load.
The CAD window is deleted and the newly loaded stylus system
body is displayed.
3 Connect the desired stylus or the desired stylus part to the right
point with the stylus system body:
20-12
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
In the Stylus System Elements window, select the

corresponding stylus element of the stylus system body in the
table.
Select Load + Connect.
In the Select connecting point window, select the point on

the assembled stylus system to which the new stylus is to be
applied and confirm with OK.
NOTE
hss
If you are unable to see the connection point because the model is
rendered, click on the Render icon to display the wire frame model
again, or rotate the CAD model using the icons in the CAD window
and the mouse.
Select the required stylus from the file selection window. The
stylus is applied to the selected point.
4 Repeat step 3 until all the styli have been applied.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
20-13
5 As soon as all the styli have been applied to the stylus system body:
Select the File Save as menu item in the window and enter a
meaningful name for the new stylus system.
Connecting stylus system, styli and stylus system

elements
When you assemble stylus system bodies or styli, the selected basic
bodies are automatically set up in a row when clicked, thus forming a
node.
Each node is automatically given the designation node_ and a serial
number. As soon as a new stylus element appears in the CAD
window, another line with the name of the element and the input
fields for the dimensions also appears in the element list.
To change dimensions, click in the corresponding table cell, and
overwrite the value. After switching with the Tab key, the element
changes immediately in the CAD window.
Connecting nodes
To change the direction of the attachment and to create more
complex forms, use the possibilities of Connect.
Select a stylus element of a node in the table, click on Connect or on
Load + Connect and define the desired connecting point in the
Select connecting point window.
The point is displayed in the CAD window as a small, conical tip. If
you are unable to see the it because the model is rendered, click on
the Render icon to display the wire frame model again.
You have two options to continue:
Connect forms a new node (the element list is emptied), and the
next basic body you click on becomes the first element of the new
node.
Load + Connect forms a new node (the list is emptied), and the
file selection window is opened. The stylus selected there (*.prb)
is added at the connection point.
The result is immediately displayed in the CAD window; in the event
of errors, you can undo and start again.
20-14
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to display and delete a flag

If spheres are defined as stylus tips, flags with their names and
number can be displayed by clicking.
To delete these flags from the CAD view:
1 In the Stylus System Elements window, select the View
Delete flags menu item.
How to enable styli for the simulation

So that the stylus simulation can run in the CAD window realistically
and with informative results, the identically copied styli must be
made known to Calypso by the name used on the CMM.
To enable a stylus for the CMM:
1 Load the required stylus system.
2 If the currently loaded stylus fully corresponds to the stylus used on
the CMM, click on Store Stylus.
A query appears asking whether the current stylus is to be
overwritten.
!
hss
Important
If you confirm this query, the current stylus data will be overwritten
and thus will no longer be available.
3 Click on Yes to overwrite the current stylus data.
The stylus from the Stylus System Library can now be used by Calypso
for the stylus simulation in the CAD window and the collision
calculations.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
20-15
20-16
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Chapter
21
.................................................................................................................................
The VAST Navigator makes recording measured values when scanning

cylindrical features (bores and shafts) much faster and more
convenient.
Stylus movements and probing methods are faster and more
harmonious. At the same time, the interplay between sensors, control
technology, processes and software ensures maximum accuracy.

What are the capabilities of the VAST Navigator?. . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2
Ideal scanning speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4
Dynamic stylus qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-7
Tangential probing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-15
Helical path generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-18
Edge deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-21
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
21- 1
What are the capabilities of the VAST

Navigator?
The VAST Navigator is an enhancement of the known scanning
method for cylindrical parts.
It offers the advantages of improved movement dynamics and higher
measuring speed without their drawbacks. This is realized through a
clever system comprising equipment technology, sensors, control
technology and software.
Using Calypso with the VAST Navigator option will give you the
following additional options for the measurement of shafts and bores:
Ideal scanning speed
The VAST Navigator automatically calculates the ideal scanning
speed based on the accuracy specifications and makes sure that
this speed is maintained.
Dynamic stylus qualification
Dynamic stylus qualification produces stylus data that allows
scanning to take place at a higher speed while maintaining the
required accuracy.
Tangential probing
During tangential approaches, the probe transitions from the
clearance path to the probing process without abrupt stops and
starts.
Helical path generation
With the helix scanning method, a cylinder can be scanned in a
helical line and, if necessary, in several circular lines.
Rounding-off of detour
The rounding-off of detour produces a continuous movement of
the probe. Thus, the travel time between the elements to be
measured is reduced.
NOTE
hss
21-2
By using the VAST Navigator, the measuring time is reduced

considerably without affecting the accuracy or, in the same usual
time, increase the measuring certainty considerably.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
What are the capabilities of the VAST Navigator?
VAST parameters in the Measurement Plan

Editor Features
If you have the VAST Navigator, you can view and change additional
settings in the Measurement Plan Editor Features. Select
Resources Measurement Plan Editor Features to open the
The VAST menu contains the following new setting options:

Menu item
Meaning
Tangential probing
Switches tangential probing on and off.
Speed
Specification of the desired speed, or setting automatic calculation

of the ideal speed.
Step Width
Specification of the desired increment, or setting automatic

calculation of the ideal increment.
Number of Points
Specification of the desired number of points, or setting automatic

calculation of the ideal number of points.
Corner rounding within

features
Sets corner rounding to a value between 0 and 100 for

measurement of a feature.
Corner rounding between Sets corner rounding to a value between 0 and 100 for moving
features
between features.
Display styli and safety
group
Shows the styli and safety group assigned to each feature.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
21-3

If you have the VAST Navigator option, you can have Calypso
calculate the ideal speed, increment and number of points.
The correct scanning speed for a cylindrical feature depends on
various factors:
desired accuracy
diameter of the feature
weight of the stylus system
rigidity of the stylus
The VAST Navigator takes these factors into account when selecting
the speed:
You specify the accuracy and diameter yourself.
The stylus system is automatically weighed when it is picked up.
The rigidity of the stylus can be taken into account if stylus
qualification has been performed in the Tensor mode (see
Qualifying the styli on page 4-28).
Of course, you also have the option of setting your choice of speed at
any time.
21-4
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Scanning at ideal speed

Automatic calculation of the ideal scanning speed is activated in the
technology settings for path generation. Calypso then shows the text
Optimum instead of numerical values in the Speed, Step Width
and Number of Points fields.
Calypso does not calculate and determine the optimum speed until
immediately after the start of the CNC run, because the scope of
measurement (number of characteristics to be tested) is not
determined until that point.
Calculation of the ideal speed

Calypso considers the characteristics in which the current feature
occurs and which of them are active in the current run. Based on this
consideration, Calypso selects the ideal values for speed, increment
and number of points for this configuration.
The Datum Features dialog box lists all characteristics in which the
feature is used, together with their settings that are relevant for
calculation of the ideal speed.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
21-5
You call the Reference dialog box by opening the strategy window in
the definition template of the feature, the definition template of the
corresponding path generation method and clicking on the Datum
Features button.
Speed subsequently too high

In certain cases, it may occur that the measuring results with which a
characteristic is to be evaluated were recorded at an excessive speed.
As a result, it will not be possible to achieve the desired accuracy.
This can occur in the following cases:
You create a new characteristic after a measurement has already
taken place.
You would like to evaluate a characteristic that is not contained in
the list of characteristics of the measurement.
Calypso checks the speed at which the measurement was performed.
If this speed is too high for the new characteristic, the following
message will appear:
The speed is too high for this characteristic evaluation! Please remeasure the feature!
In this case, you will have to repeat the CNC run including the
characteristic in question. The optimum speed will be redetermined
taking the characteristic into consideration.
21-6
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

The position, diameter and statistic bending characteristics of stylus
are determined in the conventional static stylus qualification process.
This permits highly accurate measurement in discrete-point mode and
during low-speed scanning.
Dynamic effects arise during high-speed scanning, however. They can
be compensated only if the dynamic properties of the stylus are
known.
You will therefore have to perform in addition a dynamic stylus
qualification after static stylus qualification. Select the Dyn. tensor
mode (see Selection of the qualification method on page 4-33).
Special aspects of dynamic qualification

With dynamic stylus qualification, the reference sphere is scanned
with the stylus at two different speeds (5 mm/s and 50 mm/s).
NOTE
hss
Dynamic stylus qualification may be performed only with a 30-mmdiameter reference sphere.
The reference sphere must be positioned so that the stylus can scan
the entire sphere at the equator (the direction of the stylus
determines the axis of the sphere). This means that you must use two
reference spheres in different locations for two styli that point in
opposite directions.
Sphere 2
Sphere 1
Stylus 1
61212-2010602
Stylus 2
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
21-7
To ensure complete CNC qualification, you may need even a greater

number of reference spheres this depends on the quantity and
arrangement of the styli to be qualified. When using virtual
reference spheres, one single real qualification sphere is sufficient
(see Working with virtual reference spheres on page 21-8).
Validity
The dynamic stylus parameters remain valid for as long as the stylus
remains physically unchanged. Regular requalification (approx. every
three months) is however recommended.
Thus, it is not necessary to carry out the dynamic stylus qualification
each time when qualifying a stylus. If changes in the stylus geometry
(e.g. due to a temperature change) have to be compensated, select
the Geometry Repeat Mesurement or Tensor Repeat
Measurement each time when qualifying styli.
Dynamic stylus qualification can be performed as a measurement plan
in the CNC run.
Working with virtual reference spheres

What is a virtual
reference sphere?
The virtual reference sphere procedure is based on the premise that

the precise position of the reference sphere, which must be known
for the determination of the stylus geometry, must not be known for
the dynamic stylus qualification.
You can therefore replace the necessary additional reference spheres
required for dynamic stylus qualification with virtual spheres you
create by copying in the Reference Sphere Management. You can
also change the shaft direction in the Reference Sphere Editor
(How to create the virtual reference sphere on page 21-8). The
spheres created in this way only exist in the Reference Sphere
Management, but not in reality.
Procedure for stylus

qualification
In reality, the real reference sphere must be applied to the correct

position and turned in the direction which corresponds to the current
virtual reference sphere.
Prior to dynamic stylus qualification, you must reposition the real
reference sphere in the correct position and in the shaft direction,
determine the position of the virtual sphere roughly by probing and
carry out the dynamic stylus qualification using these position data.
How to create the virtual reference sphere

To create a virtual reference sphere:
1 Click in the Stylus system qualification window on the
Reference Sphere Management icon.
21-8
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
2 The Reference Sphere Management dialog will open.
3 Select in the Edit menu (lower right) the Copy as virtual

reference sphere menu item.
4 Enter in the dialog the number of the (real) reference sphere which
you want to copy as virtual reference sphere as well as the number
under which this new virtual reference sphere is to be saved.
Another reference sphere is entered in Reference Sphere
Management and Yes appears in the virtual reference sphere
line. Under X Offset, Y, Z the same data as in the column for the
real reference sphere appears at first.
NOTE
hss
The position to which the real reference sphere is applied is entered

only after probing from the shaft direction during the dynamic stylus
qualification.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
21-9
5 Enter under Inclination angle and Rotation angle the correct

angles according to the desired shaft direction.
6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 if you want to create additional virtual
reference spheres for other measuring positions and shaft
directions.
When using a virtual reference sphere, you must probe this manually
in the shaft direction (also in the CNC run). The position of the sphere
is then automatically determined during the qualification process.
21-10
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to perform dynamic stylus qualification

Dynamic stylus qualification must be performed in addition to
conventional (static) stylus qualification (Qualifying the styli on
page 4-28) and after conventional stylus qualification.
The following applications arise due to the special requirements of
dynamic stylus qualification on the positioning of the reference
sphere:
With regard to position and shaft direction, the reference sphere is
suitable for dynamic stylus qualification.
You can perform both qualifications in a single step (Dyn. tensor
mode) or separately.
With regard to position and shaft direction, the reference sphere is
not suitable for dynamic stylus qualification.
The static and dynamic stylus qualification procedures must be
performed separately.
You first determine the static tensor on the reference sphere
for all styli one after the other when there is more than one
stylus.
You then rotate and move the reference sphere, make it known
as a virtual sphere to Calypso without special qualification and
subsequently perform dynamic stylus qualification in Dyn.
Tensor Repeat Measurement mode for all concerned styli.
To perform dynamic stylus qualification:
1 In the list of prerequisites, click on the Stylus button.
The Stylus system qualification window dialog box appears on
the screen.
The values that have already been determined for the stylus radius
and the most recent qualification date are displayed automatically.
The current number of the reference sphere is pre-assigned.
NOTE
hss
Dynamic stylus qualification is permissible only with a reference

sphere measuring 30 mm in diameter.
4 Under Geometry, select Sphere as the shape of the stylus tip.
5 Select the Dynamic tensor qualification mode from the Mode
selection list.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
21-11
7 Specify the measuring force in mN that you would like to use with
the stylus.
%.
Here, the discrete-point probing dynamic is reduced (during
qualification and later measurements). This helps to avoid that,
for example, thin styli break.
NOTE
hss
The settings in this dialog box do not have any influence on the
dynamic stylus qualification.
8 After prompting, probe in the shaft direction.
Calypso carries out the static stylus qualification.
Calypso checks the qualification routes for possible collisions with
the reference sphere post.
The following message will appear if a collision is possible:
Dynamic qualification is not possible for the current stylus with
the reference sphere in this position. Please rotate the reference
sphere so that the entire equator can be scanned without collisions.
9 In this case, select a reference sphere in a different location and

restart qualification.
NOTE
hss
Intermediate points to possible additional reference spheres are freely

programmable for the CNC run.
or
Change the reference sphere position, select the corresponding
virtual reference sphere as the reference sphere and start in the
Dyn. Tensor Repeat Measurement mode.
Calypso qualifies the stylus according to the set mode. The results
are saved.
NOTE
hss
By proceeding according to the virtual reference sphere procedure,

you first measure all styli statically in one position of the reference
sphere and only thereafter rotate the sphere to carry out the dynamic
stylus qualification. Otherwise, you must qualify the sphere again.
The stylus has now been statically and dynamically qualified. This
allows the VAST Navigator to achieve higher scanning speeds with the
stylus without affecting accuracy.
21-12
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Results of stylus qualification

Stylus data
administration
NOTE
hss
Styli too soft
The stylus data administration displays that the stylus has been
dynamically qualified. The static and dynamic scatter are also shown.
An excessive scatter value is a sign of possible shaft probing during
qualification or indicates adhering dirt.
If the qualified stylus is too soft (rigidity 10 N/mm), the system will
indicate this with a message specifying the measured stylus rigidity in
N/mm.
The dynamic correction is also in this case valid for measurements
with this stylus. Alternatively, you can also replace the stylus with a
more rigid stylus and qualify the stylus again.
Travel paths during dynamic stylus

qualification
You perform a probing in the direction of the stylus shaft at the
beginning of dynamic stylus qualification. Calypso uses this probing
and the known shaft direction to determine the location of the
reference sphere automatically.
Calypso then performs all necessary probings independently.
The stylus moves in a semicircle from the equator over the pole
and back to the equator.
The equator is then scanned over a path angle of 450. This
produces an offset of 90 with respect to the starting point.
The stylus then moves through another semicircle over the pole of
the sphere.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
21-13
The illustration shows the scanning movements for dynamic stylus

qualification.
1st great circle,
half
2nd gr. circle,

complete
End
3rd great circle

half
Stylus
Start
After probing with a scanning speed of 5mm/s, the entire process is

repeated with a scanning speed of 50mm/s.
21-14
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Tangential probing
Tangential probing
Tangential probing is probing without an intermediate stop. This
means that the navigation speed is reduced to the defined or
calculated scanning speed just prior to stylus contact. This optimizes
the approach movement, and reducing the number of intermediate
stops saves time.
Tangential probing is possible only for circle measurements, and it
may be activated or deactivated as desired. Tangential probing is not
possible:
when scanning with a rotary table
for discrete-point measurement
for circle segments.
Path angle
Since inaccuracies are possible during approach and departure
movements, the VAST Navigator always scans circle paths with a
certain amount of overlap. VAST Navigator automatically determines
the size of the overlap.
The path angle is always 450 in the case of outside diameters
(shafts).
The path angle is variable in the case of outside diameters (shafts),
ranging from 380 for large diameters up to 500 for small
diameters.
This ideally adapts the overlap to the inside/outside feature and
reduces the measuring time for large diameters.
Check of the angle
range
When switching tangential probing on, Calypso checks the current

angle range. If this value is to small, you will be asked the question:
"Angle too small for tangential probing! Use angle anyway?" Yes / No
If you answer this question with Yes, the minimum angle range will
be calculated based on the diameter of the circle and this value will be
used. If you answer this question with No, tangential probing will be
switched off again.
NOTE
hss
The value you originally entered for the value range will be retained
for subsequent measurements performed without tangential probing.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
21-15
How to activate tangential probing

Tangential probing can be activated in two ways:
Activate tangential probing for one or all features in the
Measurement Plan Editor Features and select Tangential
probing (default) in the technology window of the respective
path generation method.
You activate tangential probing exclusively in the technology
window for the individual path generation method.
To activate tangential probing in the Measurement Plan Editor
Features:
The Measurement Plan Editor Features dialog box appears on
the screen. For detailed information, please refer to
Measurement plan editor features in the Calypso Online Help.
2 Define the features for which you wish to activate tangential
probing (either for the measurement plan or for selected
features) and, if necessary, select the features in question.
3 Select VAST Tangential probing in the selection list and set
the value to On.
21-16
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Tangential probing
To activate tangential probing in the technology window:

1 Click on Strategy in the definition template for the feature in
question.
2 Open the technology window for path generation of the circle
section.
3 Activate the Tangential probing (default) check box if you want

to use the settings from the Measurement Plan Editor Features.
Depending on the setting in the Measurement Plan Editor,
tangential probing is now activated or not.
4 Activate the Tangential probing Yes check box if you want to
activate tangential probing independently of the settings in the
If the set angle range is too small for tangential probing, you will
be asked the question:
5 By clicking on Yes, the angle range will be adapted to the required

value.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
21-17

You can use the VAST Navigator to scan cylinders with a special
helical scanning method. With this method, the cylinder is
continuously scanned in a helical line first forward and then back.
You can also add two or four circles to this continuous scanning
method.
Single points
Conventional
scanning
Helical
scanning
With this method, the scanned points are much more uniformly
distributed in space. Calypso can thus very rapidly make valid
statements concerning the diameter, shape and position of the
cylinder.
The other possibilities of the VAST Navigator are available here as
well.
You can have the ideal speed and/or increment and number of
points calculated automatically.
You can achieve higher scanning speeds with a dynamically
qualified stylus.
How to probe cylinders with the helical

method
To scan a cylinder using a helical path:
1 Open the definition template for the cylinder and click on
Strategy.
2 Click on the symbol for the helix line in the strategy window.
A path element Helix path (variable) is added to the list of paths.
21-18
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
3 Open the technology window for the helix line by double-clicking,

or click on the Magnifier symbol.
4 Make your settings.

Speed
Specify the speed or select automatic calculation.
Step Width and Number of Points
Select one of the two values or have the ideal values calculated
automatically.
The ideal numbers of points are selected so that there is
sufficient information for the respective mode and the
computing time for evaluation is kept to a minimum.
NOTE
hss
If you change the Diameter, Section height, Number of rotations

or Number of circles, this will affect the ideal number of points via
the measurement length.
Number of circles
Determines the number of additional circles to be measured.
This selection has the following effect:
0: only the helix line is scanned
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
21-19
2: a semicircle is scanned at the top, a circle is scanned at the

bottom, and the supplementary semicircle is then scanned at
the top
4: a full circle at the starting height, helix line forward up to
target height, two circles there, helix line back to starting
height, another full circle there.
NOTE
hss
Additional circles are useful especially for short cylinders this

increases the accuracy in determining the cylinder axis.
5 Click on OK to confirm the entries.
21-20
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Edge deviation
Edge deviation
You can use the VAST Navigator to activate edge deviation for the
movements when measuring a feature as well as for the movements
between features.
Edge deviation is always used for the entire measurement plan and
not for individual features.
NOTE
Edge deviation is also called rounding-off of detour.
hss
What is edge
deviation?
Without edge deviation activated, the probe approaches directly the

defined intermediate points, stops and continues to move in the new
direction.
When edge deviation is activated, the concerned intermediate points
are not approached. Instead, the probe begins to make an arc
movement according to a predefined radius shortly before the
intermediate point and then continues to move in the new direction.
The advantage is:
Edge deviation produces a continuous movement of the probe to

reduce the travel time between the elements to be measured.
With the VAST Navigator, you activate the desired type of edge
deviation for the entire measurement plan.
Corner rounding within features: Each feature has one probing
detour point (intermediate point) before and one after the feature.
These are rounded off.
Corner rounding between features: There may be additional
probing detour points (intermediate points) between the individual
features. These are rounded off.
Enter the name of rounding-off. If this value is too large, this will be
limited automatically by the VAST Navigator: The rounding-off radius
may not exceed 25% of the shortest travel path (between two
consecutive intermediate points).
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
21-21
Example: You enter 500 and the shortest travel path is 20 mm. Result:
The value 5 is used for edge deviation.
rmax = 50x25/100 = 12,5 mm

Imax = 60 mm
a
Intermediate point
Imax = 50 mm
Imax = 50 mm
rmax = 20x25/100 = 5 mm
Imax = 20 mm
a = Distance from the workpiece
!
hss
Important!
There is a risk of collision with long travel paths. Collisions can be
avoided by increasing the distance a in the clearance planes or default
range.
How to activate edge deviation

To switch the Measurement Plan Editor Features on:
The Measurement Plan Editor Features dialog box appears on
the screen. For detailed information, please refer to
Measurement plan editor features in the Calypso Online Help.
2 To activate edge deviation between features, select VAST
Corner rounding between features from the selection list.
- or To activate edge deviation within features, select VAST Corner
rounding within features from the selection list.
The apply to complete Measurement Plan option is selected
automatically.
3 Select under set to the desired radius (1 to 500 mm) or **
Default and confirm with OK.
** Default accepts the default setting from Calypso.
The next time that you run the measurement plan, the set edge
deviation will be effective.
21-22
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Chapter
22
Automation (option)
.................................................................................................................................
The Automation option (together with the CMM-OS option) permits

the use of Calypso in automation projects.

Basics about automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
Using the AAI interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
22- 1
Automation (option)
Basics about automation

You need the Automation option (and the CMM-OS option) if you
would like to use Calypso as part of automation projects.
Calypso and FACS
In an automation project, Calypso is controlled by external signals

sent to Calypso by a higher-order Flexible Automation and Control
System (FACS), for example.
In this way, Calypso can be integrated in an automated measuring
chain with infeed, measurement and evaluation systems.
AAI interface
Control of Calypso by the FACS and feedback from Calypso to the

FACS take place via the AAI interface, which must be configured and
started for this purpose.
After the AAI interface is started, Calypso will be in the mode you set
previously: automatic mode or manual mode.
You can operate Calypso in the usual manner in manual mode.
However, Calypso can be switched to automatic mode via the AAI
interface.
As soon as Calypso is in automatic mode, Calypso can be
externally controlled; control by the user is restricted.
Switchover back to manual mode can take place both by means of
an FACS command and manually by you.
22-2
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Using the AAI interface

Starting the AAI interface
In order to use Calypso in an automation project, you must perform
the following steps on the AAI interface:
configuring,
activating and
starting.
Manual and automatic modes

After the AAI interface is started, Calypso will be in the mode you set
previously: automatic mode or manual mode.
Stopping the AAI interface

When you no longer need the AAI interface you can deactivate and
stop it.
You can read the instructions on these topics in the following
sections.
How to configure the AAI interface

You must configure the AAI interface before you start it for the first
time in order to ensure that it will function properly.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
22-3
Automation (option)
To configure the AAI interface:

1 Select Extras Workroom CMM and click on the AAI tab.
2 Select the Mode after start:

Automtic mode: Calypso is in automatic mode after the start
of the AAI connection.
Manual mode: Calypso is in manual mode after the start of
the AAI connection.
3 Select Mode for opening measurement plans via AAI:
Show in Calypso User Desk: If a measurement plan is opened
via AAI, it is displayed as usual on the screen.
Open without display in background: If a measurement
plan is opened via AAI, it runs in the background without the
user desk displayed on the screen.
This mode enables fast execution of the processes.
NOTE
hss
When setting Open without display in background, the CAD view

cannot be output as plot.
4 If necessary, change the default connection settings (host name,
port number, shared path).
5 Click on Apply or OK.
22-4
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to activate the AAI interface

To activate the AAI interface:
2 Check the settings if necessary.
3 Activate the Start AAI connection check box.
As soon as you establish the connection to the CMM, the AAI
interface will also be started with the settings you made.
How to start the AAI interface

You must start the AAI interface before Calypso can be externally
controlled.
Prerequisite: The AAI interface is activated in the system setup, i.e. the
Start AAI connection check box is activated.
You start the AAI interface by establishing the connection to the
CMM:
1 Select Extras Workroom CMM and click on the Control
tab.
2 Click on the Connect button.
The Stoplight window is opened and the connection is established.
The AAI interface is started with the settings you made Calypso is
now in automatic mode or manual mode, depending on the set
Mode after start.
Calypso will be able to receive external signals as soon as the AAI
interface has started.
Manual mode and automatic mode

Depending on the setting, Calypso will either remain in manual mode
as usual or will immediately switch to automatic mode.
Automatic mode
Automatic mode is used for external control of Calypso (by an FACS)
via the AAI interface. User control is very limited in automatic mode.
You can operate only the following windows in automatic mode:
the Stoplight window
the System Set Up
the default printout
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
22-5
Automation (option)
the custom printout

All other windows cannot be used and are minimized when Calypso
switches to automatic mode.
Changing to manual
mode
Calypso changes from automatic mode to manual mode:

when the FACS sends a corresponding command via the AAI
interface.
when a new connection is established to the CMM (if manual
mode is set as the Mode after start in the System Set Up).
if there is a problem with the connection via the AAI interface.
An error message will be issued.
when you click on the Switch to manual button in the System
Set Up (AAI page).
Calypso prompts you to enter an administrator password.
The change to manual mode reactivates the Calypso user interface for
the logged on user. The program window is restored to its original
size.
Manual mode
Calypso can be manually controlled without restriction in manual
mode and cannot be externally controlled (with one exception).
The only external command that is accepted is the command to
switch over to automatic mode.
Changing to automatic
mode
Calypso changes from manual mode to automatic mode:

when the FACS sends a corresponding command via the AAI
interface.
when a new connection is established to the CMM (if automatic
mode is set as the Mode after start in the System Set Up).
When Calypso changes to automatic mode, open dialog boxes (if
necessary) and measurement plans will be closed.
!
hss
NOTE
Important
When Calypso changes to automatic mode, it closes the
measurement plans without saving them. This means that all changes
made since the measurement plans were last saved will be lost.
hss
If a measurement plan is currently in the CNC run, Calypso cannot

switch over from manual to automatic.
22-6
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
How to stop the AAI interface

To deactivate and stop the AAI interface:
2 Deactivate the Start AAI connection check box.
4 Click on the Control tab and then on the Connect button.
The connection to the CMM is established again without the AAI
interface being opened.
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
22-7
Automation (option)
22-8
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Index
0-9
1-sphere method (rotary table) 4-89
2D curve
adopting actual deviations curve 1 for
nominal data curve 2 16-25
2-sphere method (rotary table) 4-92
3D best fit 4-76
on the CAD model 4-76
3D curve 5-33
adopting from CAD model 16-22
A
AAI 22-2
AAI interface
activating 22-5
configuring 22-3
starting 22-5
ACR3
defining holder positions 7-57
particularities 7-46
Add
styli 4-22
Additional feature
GEAR 5-43
HOLOS 5-43
addToFile 15-60
Administering
Auto-Run 12-39
Alignment
3D best fit 4-76
Angle 6-49
Angle of inclination 6-45
Angle point 5-40
Angle Range
characteristic 6-49
Angularity 6-49
Approach direction
for curve 16-29
Arithmetic operators (reference) 15-53
Array
via loop (example) 15-46
Arrays 15-52
ASCII files (curve) 9-46
ASCII parameter file (example) 15-50
Asynchronous mode 10-2
Audiovisual information 7-65
Automatic feature recognition 1-12
Automatic stylus change 7-63
Automatically measuring 5-95
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Automation, basics 22-2

Auto-Run
assigning keywords 12-30
basics 12-2
branches 12-6
CNC parameters 12-32
configuring 12-16
controlling measuring runs 12-13
creating branches 12-31
defining desks 12-22
defining sequence 12-36
desks 12-3
displaying printouts 12-14
finding measurement plan 12-9
for users 12-7
keywords 12-6, 12-29
loading interface 12-9
managing 12-39
mapping pallet 12-25
measurement end 12-14
measurement plan icon 12-4
measuring configuration, selecting
12-10
pallets 12-5
placing bitmaps on icons 12-23
positioning measurement plan 12-23
preparing for measurement 12-31
specifying scope of measurement 1210
structure 12-3
user privileges 12-16
Average 6-47
Axial lift data
settings 16-9
Axial runout 6-49
B
Base alignment 1-13
adapting 4-54
basics 4-48
creating new 4-51
customizing iteratively with abortion
condition (example) 4-56
defining 4-46
editing 4-58
loading 4-50
loading secondary alignment 4-69
moving 4-60
offsetting 4-60
rotating by distances 4-62
Index
baseSystem 15-62
Basic concept Calypso 1-12
Basics 4-2
Auto-Run 12-2
characteristics 6-2
clearance planes/clearance groups 7-30
computed alignment 4-47
curve measurement 16-2
measurement plans 4-2
probing 5-20
retract planes 7-31
travel paths 7-29
Best fit
3d ~ on the CAD model 4-76
3D best fit (alignment) 4-76
as circumscribed/inscribed feature 6-5
as tangential element 6-5
Gaussian 6-5
Tschebyscheff 6-5
Best fit of bore pattern 6-52
Best-fit methods 6-3
Bore-pattern best fit 6-54
C
CAD file, importing 5-9
CAD window 3-1
Calypso
starting 1-3
Calypso Planner 1-14
Canceling
measurement plan run 8-14
Cartesian
characteristics 6-46
Changing
point list 5-87
stylus assignment 7-64
Changing the point list 5-87
Characteristic data
constant 9-66
Characteristic input (option) 19-2
Characteristics 1-12
adding 7-5
assigning to multiple features 6-20
basics 6-2
best-fit methods 6-3
calculation 6-3
color coding 6-41
copying 7-6
copying properties 6-40
defining 6-7
definition templates 6-8
deleting 7-7
finding 7-10
grouping 7-8
index exchange 6-23
Index
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
list of all ~ 6-43

moving 7-7
nominals 6-25
rechecking (example) 15-42
renaming 7-9
setting references 6-42
tolerances 6-25
ungrouping 7-8
with indexes 6-22
Characteristics, tasks, details on 6-42
angle 6-49
angle of inclination 6-45
angularity 6-49
average 6-47
axial runout 6-49
cartesian 6-46
coaxiality 6-48
concentricity 6-48
cone angle 6-45
curve form 6-48
cylinder form 6-48
diameter 6-43
diameter two 6-46
distance_symmetry point 6-46
feature angle 6-45
flatness 6-47
flatness in a zone 6-47
form 6-48
half cone angle 6-45
length of axis 6-43
parallelism 6-48
perpendicularity 6-48
polar 2d 6-45
polar 3d 6-45
polarposition angle 6-44
polarposition height 6-44
polarposition radius 6-44
position 6-48
profile 6-48
projection angle one 6-44
projection angle two 6-45
radial runout 6-49
radius 6-43
radius 2 6-47
radius measurement 6-43
rotation angle 6-45
roundness 6-47
simple distance 6-46
slot length 6-47
slot width 6-47
space point distance 6-46
straightness 6-47
symmetry 6-49
X value 6-43
Y value 6-43
Z value 6-43
Characterization file 13-3
Checking wall thickness 6-56
Circle 5-23
Circle in contour best fit 5-80
details 5-82
Circle path on plane 5-106
Clearance distance 7-40
approach each time 7-41
copying into other features 5-17
Clearance groups
assigning 7-35
defining 7-33
retract plane in 7-36
Clearance paths
rotary table 4-104
Clearance planes 1-13
assigning 7-35
closer to workpiece 7-40
RT clearance planes 4-106
Clearing after collision 8-15
Clearing the CMM 8-15
closeSocket 15-68
CMM travel commands (PCM) 15-64
CNC parameters
Auto-Run 12-32
CNC run
~structure 15-7
RT prealignment 4-104
starting 8-10
cncBreak 15-64
Coaxiality 6-48
Collision
reaction following ~ 8-15
special aspects with RDS 8-15
Color coding
features 5-18
prerequisites 4-13
Compact printout 9-3, 9-7
Comparative operators (reference) 15-53
Computed alignment
basics 4-47
Concentricity 6-48
Conditions
reference 15-72, 15-73
setting 15-19
with alternative (example) 15-38
Cone 5-31
Cone addition (construction) 5-78
Cone angle 6-45
Cone angle, half 6-45
Conf.dat 6-12
Configuration file, erosion module 6-12
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
configuring
Auto-Run 12-16
confirm 15-57
constant feature data 9-66
Constructions 5-50
average 5-77
cone addition 5-78
edge point 5-74
intersection 5-61
maximum point 5-76
maximum result 5-77
minimum point 5-76
minimum result 5-77
plane with offset 5-79
constructions 5-50
Context menu 1-8
Control console Dynalog / Dynalog P 2-1
Controlling
Controlling measuring runs
Auto-Run 12-13
Coordinate system
access to the origin 6-54
defining 4-46
deleting 6-16
FLCS 1-13
from best fit of bore pattern 6-53
loading 6-15
parameterizing (example) 15-44
saving 6-15
with index 4-47
coordinate system
Defining references 4-50
copyFile 15-60
Copying
characteristic 7-6
feature 7-6
icons 12-42
result file 9-49
Copying ISO286 6-40
Copying lower tolerance 6-40
Copying tolerance class 6-40
Copying upper tolerance 6-40
Coupling measuring ranges (duplex
mode) 10-5
Current selection 8-2
Index
Curve 5-33
adopting deviations of a reference curve
16-25
adopting from CAD model 16-22
changing approach direction 16-29
changing nominal points 16-23
defining via function (example) 15-42
deviation of threads 16-74
deviations graphical 16-75
loading parameters (example) 15-41
projection of results 16-37
Curve (2d) 5-33
Curve (3D) 5-33
Curve distance 16-56
Curve expansion 16-57
Curve form 6-48, 16-58
Curve jump tolerance 16-58
Curve measurement 16-1
3D curve 16-3
basics 16-2
changing nominal vectors 16-28
checking clearance planes 16-30
checking nominal vectors 16-27
context menu 16-39
defining nominal data 16-7
defining the curve feature 16-5
deviation in actual vector direction 16-36
deviation in grid coordinates 16-36
deviation in nominal vector direction 1636
digitizing 16-12
digitizing 3D curve in area 16-17
digitizing 3D curves 16-16
editing nominals 16-23
entering nominal data manually 16-21
face curve, definition 16-3
flat curves 16-2
formatting printout 16-74
importing ASCII file 16-7
importing nominal data from file 16-8
jump tolerance 16-34
lift curve, definition 16-3
loading axial lift data 16-9
loading VDA file selectively 16-9
lower deviation 16-58
max deviation 16-55
measurement strategy 16-41
measuring tolerance 16-31
min deviation 16-55
nominal vectors, changing 16-28
outliers 16-71
point list 16-42
radial deviation 16-37
range 16-55, 16-58
Index
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
scanning 16-46
segments 16-49
spatial curves 16-3
upper deviation 16-58
using CAD model 16-39
Curve measurement, results 16-36, 16-60
best fit 16-63
calculating deviations 16-60
center 16-62
deviation 16-60
Curve slope 16-52
Curve stroke 16-54
Custom printout 9-4
automatic fields 9-15
defining printout output 9-5
displaying 9-7
global dummies 9-16
local dummies 9-16
PCM commands 15-70
result presentation 9-16
setting up 9-14
structure 9-14, 9-15
Cylinder 5-29
Cylinder form 6-48
D
date 15-68
dateAndTime 15-68
dateInNumbers 15-68
Default names
file structure 4-6
loading file 4-5
Default printout 9-2, 9-6
Defining
characteristics 6-1
characteristics curve 16-52
clearance groups 7-33
desks 12-22
features 5-1
nominal data for curve 16-7
printout output 9-5
stylus 4-21
Defining a pattern 5-16
Defining inside 5-20
Defining outside 5-20
Defining references 4-50
Defining the master stylus length 7-50
deleteFile 15-60
Deleting
characteristics 7-7
desks 12-42
features 7-7
part alignment 4-75
toolboxes 7-28
Desks
adding measurement plans 12-23
deleting 12-42
renaming 12-41
Determining measuring uncertainty 18-1
Diameter 6-43
Diameter two 6-46
Digitizing
3D curve in area 16-17
DIN true position with best fit of bore
pattern
application 6-54
basics 6-52
display 15-57
displayPositionCMM 15-65
Distance_symmetry point 6-46
DMIS commands supported 13-2
DMIS export
prerequisites 14-3
run 14-3
DMIS files 9-45
DMIS import
configuring 13-6
reports 13-11
run 13-8
DMIS measurement plans
basics 13-2, 14-2
Dummies
global 9-16
local 9-16
Duplex mode, basics 10-1
Dynalog
configuring Calypso 2-6
function keys 2-9
general information 2-1
operating toolboxes 2-10
operation 2-6
Dynalog / Dynalog P
display 2-2
keyboard 2-2
overview 2-2
touchpad 2-2
Dynalog P
configuring Calypso 2-3
operation 2-3
special aspects 2-4
E
Eliminating outliers
general settings 6-35
Ellipse 5-34
End angle
characteristic 6-49
Entering
nominals 6-25
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
tolerances 6-25
Entering text with the mouse 1-8
Entries with the mouse 1-8
Erosion module 6-11
configuring 6-12
Error report 11-9
Evaluation settings
Excel report
examples 9-11
Export
measurement plan to DMIS 14-1
F
Feature angle 6-45
characteristic 6-49
Feature data
variable 9-67
Feature recognition, automatic 1-12
Feature's local coordinate system 1-13
Features 1-12
3D curve 5-33
adding 7-5
angle point 5-40
circle 5-23
color coding 5-18
cone 5-31
copying 7-6
copying properties 5-17
curve 5-33
cylinder 5-29
deleting 7-7
details 5-20
ellipse 5-34
finding 7-10
general curve 5-42
general surface 5-41
in loops 15-25
line, 2d 5-26
line, 3-D 5-28
measuring individually 8-5
moving 7-7
offset plane 5-37
plane 5-24
point 5-21
radius point 5-38
recall of 5-51
rectangle 5-37
renaming 7-9
rotary table parameters 4-107
slot 5-35
sphere 5-32
sphere point 5-39
splitting 5-14
symmetry point 5-38
Index
Features, defining
from CAD file 5-9
using templates 5-4
with feature recognition 5-7
File commands (reference) 15-60
Filters
activating 6-36
basics 6-32
minimum number of points 6-32
Filtration 6-32
Flatness 6-47
in a zone 6-47
Flatness in a zone
basics 6-51
FLCS 1-13
Form 6-48
Form plot 9-33
activating 9-35
CAD view as plot 9-38
changing settings 9-43
changing settings permanently 9-43
dialog box 9-41
format files 9-38
fourier analysis 9-41
printing 9-36, 9-42
setting type 9-35
Form plots
curve 16-75
Format files for plots 9-38
designing 9-40
Formulas
definition 15-10
entering 15-17
functions and operators 15-11
Functions (PCM)
character string~ (reference) 15-56
introduction 15-10
mathematical (reference) 15-54
measurement-specific 15-62
G
Gage correction qualification 5-47
Gap
GDT profile
basics 6-50
Gear 5-43
General curve 5-42
General surface 5-41
getActual 15-63
getActualInspectionDir 15-60
getCNCMode 15-65
getNominal 15-64
getPositionCMM 15-65
Index
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
getRecordHead 15-70
getStylus 15-65
getTemperatureCorrection 15-66
getWD 15-60, 15-61
Grouping
creating 7-8
renaming 7-9
ungrouping 7-8
Groups
forming 8-3
H
Holos 5-43
Homing the CMM 4-15
Horizontal-arm CMMs
combining measurement plans 7-16
in duplex mode 10-1
I
Icon
copying 12-42
deleting 12-42
labeling with bitmaps 12-23
Import
CAD data 5-9
measurement plan for RT axis 4-101
measurement plan from DMIS 13-1
UMESS measurement plan 13-2
Importing
files for curve 16-8
Importing ASCII file for curve 16-7
Importing DXF files 16-8
Importing PAB files 16-8
Index exchange 6-23
Input/output commands (reference) 15-57
Input/output parameters 15-30
inquire 15-57
inquireList 15-58
inquireNumber 15-57
inquireParameterList 15-58
inquirePasswordText 15-58
inquireText 15-59
Installation
Calypso, program version 11-3
service pack 11-6
Interrupting
Intersection 5-61
Introduction 1-1
K
Keywords
assigning 12-30
for icons 12-29
L
Least-material condition 6-28
Length of axis 6-43
Lift curve
format of nominal data 16-10
marking 16-6
unmarking 16-6
Lift data
format 16-10
Line, 2d 5-26
Line, 3-D 5-28
LMC 6-28
Loading interface
Auto-Run 12-9
Loading PCM file
via dialog (example) 15-44
Location plot 9-33
activating 9-35
CAD view as plot 9-38
changing settings 9-43
changing settings permanently 9-43
dialog box 9-41
format files 9-38
printing 9-36, 9-42
setting type 9-35
Loop
around characteristic 15-24
loop index 15-23
loop variable 15-23
Loops
alignment to RPS 15-26
features in ~ 15-25
for multiple measurements 15-28
linear offset (example) 15-45
nest level 15-27
nested 15-27
nested for array (example) 15-46
setting 15-22
M
Macro
~- parameterizing measurement plan
7-18
advantages 7-18
basics 7-19
create 7-20
editing 7-24
in the measurement plan 7-18
integrating 7-22
naming conventions 7-19
updating 7-25
using 7-20
Manual run
starting 8-11
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Manual stylus change 4-18

Master measurement plan, horizontalarm CMMs 7-16
Master stylus
entering data 4-24
MCR20
measure 15-64
Measured values
eliminating outliers 6-32
filtering 6-32
Measurement
ending, Auto-Run 12-14
preparing Auto-Run 12-31
running 8-2
starting 8-9
Measurement cylinder method (rotary
table) 4-95
Measurement plan
controlling run 8-13
editing 7-11
export to DMIS 14-1
import from DMIS 13-1
multimedia information 7-65
starting a CNC run 8-10
starting manual run 8-11
Measurement plan area 1-6
Measurement plan editor 7-11
features 4-122
features, RT parameters 4-108
Measurement plan features
finding 7-10
Measurement plan group
forming 8-3
Measurement plan run
canceling 8-14
interrupting 8-15
restarting 8-16
Measurement plan settings 4-120
Measurement plans 1-12
combining (HAM) 7-16
copying 7-3
creating 4-2, 4-4
deleting 7-3
editing 7-5
integrating user information 7-65
managing 7-2
mirroring 7-14
opening 4-4
opening existing 4-4
renaming 7-2
running 8-2
saving 7-2
variable 15-4
Index
with variant control (example) 15-48

Measurement strategy 5-85
Measuring
automatically 5-95
with rotary table 4-100
Measuring configuration, selecting
Auto-Run 12-10
Measuring offset via loop (example) 15-45
Measuring results
copying result file 9-49
printing 9-7
saving 9-45
saving as ASCII file 9-46
saving as DMIS 9-45
saving as PDF 9-46
saving as PostScript 9-46
saving as QDAS 9-45
saving in a merge file 9-45
saving in table file 9-45
Menu bar 1-5
Merge file 9-45
message 15-59
Midpoint 5-22
Minimum number of points, filters 6-32
MMC 6-28
Mode when qualifying 4-33
Most-material condition 6-28
Mouse with 2 or 3 buttons 1-6
Multimedia in measurement plans 7-65
Multiple measurements with loops 15-28
N
Navigation check
automatic 7-37
Nest level in loops 15-27
Net point 5-22
Nominal data for curve
point generator 16-11
Nominal points of a curve
changing 16-23
Nominal values of a curve
adding an offset 16-26
Nominals 6-40
defining 6-25
notational conventions 1-7
O
Offset
adding to curve values 16-73
by nominal curve values 16-26
Offset plane 5-37
Open
measurement plan 4-4
Index
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Opening
openSocket 15-68
Origin of the coordinate system 6-54
Outliers
basics 6-32
eliminating 6-32, 6-38
Output commands (reference) 15-57
Output files
defining name 9-46
Output parameters 15-30
OVCMM 18-1
basics 18-2
stylus characteristics 18-5
using 18-9
P
P6 Alignment 4-77
Pallet
mapping 12-25
Parallelism 6-48
Parameter
ASCII file (example) 15-50
loading values into curve (example) 1541
Parameters
definition 15-9
functions and operators 15-11
input and output parameters 15-30
loading 15-17
saving 15-16
Part alignment 1-13
basics 4-47
creating new 4-51
defining 4-46
deleting 4-75
loading 4-50
rotate distance 4-66
rotating 4-61
rotating by distances 4-62
Part data 9-66
Parts family, measuring (example) 15-48
Path generation
circle 5-99
circle path on plane 5-106
cone 5-99
cylinder 5-99
lines 5-107
measuring range 5-101
overview 5-108
planes 5-103, 5-105
unknown contour 5-97
Pattern 5-14
basics 5-14
Pattern procedure 5-15

PCM
debugging and testing 15-36
programming 15-12
searching for text 15-35
syntax (reference) 15-51
testing printout 15-34
variables (reference) 15-52
PDF files 9-46
PDF output
configuring 9-49
Perpendicularity 6-48
Plane 5-24
Plane Point 5-22
Point 5-21
Point generator 15-32
for curve 16-11
Polar 2d 6-45
Polar 3d 6-45
Polarposition angle 6-44
Polarposition height 6-44
Polarposition radius 6-44
Position 6-48
positionCMM 15-66
positionRS 15-67
Preparations
r otary table 4-81
Prerequisites
color coding 4-13
Prerequisites, list of 4-12
presentationOff 15-71
presentationOn 15-71
print 15-59
Printing
measuring results 9-7
Printout
displaying 9-6
Printout header data
entering 8-6
global 8-6
local 8-7
Printout header fields
defining own 9-22
INI file 9-24
TXT file 9-23
Printouts
~ defining output 9-5
INI file for header data, example 9-26
text output 6-14
Printouts, subsequently (Auto-Run) 1214
Profile 6-48
Projection angle one 6-44
Projection angle two 6-45
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Projection plane
PROVACS 9-62
PstScript files 9-46
Q
QDAS description file 9-63
QDAS files 9-45
QDAS format 9-62
QDAS values file 9-63
QDASCONV.CON 9-64
QDASCONV.EXE 9-62
qs-STAT 9-62
Qualification
indirect (holder) 7-55
Qualification method 4-33
Qualifying
mode 4-33
Qualifying styli
with measurement plan 4-36
R
Radial runout 6-49
Radius 6-43
Radius 2 6-47
Radius measurement 6-43
Radius point 5-38
Range specification, recall points 5-58
RDS
after collision 8-15
creating stylus list 4-25
defining geometry 7-47
loading a stylus list 4-27
qualifying with CAA 17-1
Recall 5-51
Recalling points with range specification
5-58
Rectangle 5-37
redrawCAD 15-59
Reference axis secondary reference
rotating 4-64
Reference sphere
determining 4-40
renameFile 15-61
Renaming
characteristics 7-9
desks 12-41
features 7-9
groups 7-9
stylus 4-22
Index
Restarting measurement plan run 8-16

Result presentation 9-16
Retract distance
Retract plane 7-36
Rotary table
defining 4-81
homing 4-84
importing measurement plan for axis 4101
login 4-82
manual positioning 4-84
measuring features 4-100
mechanical alignment 4-103
parameters in the feature 4-107
prealignment at CNC start 4-104
qualification methods 4-87
qualifying axis 4-86
rotational pattern 4-111
setting the axis 4-100
setting the position 4-83
status of axis 4-102
Rotate distance 4-66
Rotation angle 6-45
Rotation in plane 4-47
Rotation in space 4-47
Rotational pattern 4-111
Roundness 6-47
RPS Alignment 4-77
RPS alignment
with loop 15-26
RT axis
importing measurement plan 4-101
RT clearance planes 4-106
RT homing 4-84
RT parameters
measurement plan editor features 4-108
Run measurement plan 8-2
Running
individual features 8-5
measurement 8-2
printout header data 8-6
S
Saving
measuring results 9-45
parameters 15-16
Scanning 5-95
curve 16-46
Index
10
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
several styli 5-101

Scope of measurement
forming group 8-3
individual features 8-5
specifying for Auto-Run 12-10
SCP600
SCR200
searchDistance 15-67
Searching
features 7-10
for PCM text 15-35
Secondary alignment
loading 4-69
Secondary reference
rotating reference axis 4-64
Selecting coupling method (duplex
operation) 10-5
Self-centering probing 5-89
restrictions 5-89
Self-centering qualification (rotary table axis)
4-98
Service pack
installing 11-6
unzipping 11-6
setCNCMode 15-67
setProtocolSetting 15-71
setRecordHead 15-71
Setup
stylus changer 7-49
Shape of zone 6-50
Simple distance 6-46
Slot 5-35
Slot length 6-47
Slot width 6-47
Space point 5-22
Space point distance 6-46
Sphere 5-32
Sphere point 5-39
Start alignment
basics 4-49
creating new 4-51
loading 4-50
loading secondary alignment 4-69
Starting
Calypso 1-3
CNC run 8-10
manual run 8-11
Starting a measurement plan 8-9
manual run 8-11
Statistics program 9-62

stepRS 15-68
Stoplight window
canceling a measurement plan run 814
interrupting a measurement plan run
8-15
Stopping
Straightness 6-47
Stylus
adding 4-22
adding styli 4-22
angle range in automatic mode 5-93
automatic search 5-90
creating list for RDS 4-25
defining 4-21
editing 4-20
installing 4-18
qualifying for RDS with RDS-CAA 171
renaming 4-22
Stylus changer
adding holders 7-51
assigning styli 7-62
automatic stylus change 7-63
changing stylus assignments 7-64
for RDS 7-47
indirect qualification 7-55
setting approach parameters 7-52
setting up 7-49
special features of MCR20 7-44
special features SCR200 7-45
special features with ACR3 7-46
Stylus characteristics
for OVCMM 18-5
for virtual CMM 18-5
Stylus System
symbols 1-7
Symmetry 6-49
Symmetry point 5-38
Synchronous mode 10-2
System requirements 11-2
systemCall 15-69
systemCallForResultAccess 15-69
systemCallWithWait 15-70
T
configuring 4-130
general information 4-123
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)
Textelement 6-14
Three-button mouse 1-6
time 15-70
timeInSeconds 15-70
TOL/PROFS 6-50
Tolerances
defining custom 6-30
entering 6-25
file with custom 6-31
LMC 6-28
MMC 6-28
Toolbar 1-5
structuring 1-10
Toolbar editor 1-9
Toolbox
operating via Dynalog 2-10
Toolboxes 7-26
creating 7-26
deleting 7-28
moving 7-28
zooming out 7-28
Travel
editing 7-29
Travel commands (PCM) 15-64
Travel paths
basics 7-29
checking 7-32
Turbine blade
additional feature 5-45
CNC run 5-46
Two-button mouse 1-6
Types of bracket in loops 15-27
U
UMESS, importing measurement plan
13-2
Unknown contour 5-97
User desk 1-5
CAD icons 1-6
CAD window 1-6
measurement plan area 1-6
menu bar 1-5
toolbar 1-5
User information
calling 7-66
integrating 7-65
User privileges
Auto-Run 12-16
Using distance check 6-56
Utilities
erosion module 6-11
overview 6-9
stylus system qualification 6-10
textelement 6-14
Index
11
Variable feature data 9-67

Variables
definition 15-9
reference 15-52
Variant control (example) 15-48
VDA file
importing 16-8
loading selectively 16-9
Virtual CMM 18-1
configuring 18-5
stylus characteristics 18-5
using 18-9
wait(nSeconds) 15-70
Window
CAD window 3-1
writeActualsToVDA 15-61
X
X value 6-43
Y
Y value 6-43
Z
Z value 6-43
Index
12
61212-2010602
Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

CMM Calypso 4 0

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CMM Calypso 4 0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CALYPSO

This manual must not be circulated or copied, or its contents utilized

CALYPSO User guide

Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

Chapter 8 Running a measurement plan on page 8-1

Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

Chapter 19 Characteristic input (option) on page 19-1

Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

The Zeiss Training Block

Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

Textual element of graphical user interface.

The Comment button on the screen.

The file w.ini in the directory windows on

Guide your actions... A passage containing important information.

The CNC-Start item in the CNC-Start

Press and hold down the Ctrl key and press

This symbol represents important and helpful additional information.

Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

Important terms in Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Measurement plan-oriented measuring with Calypso . . 1-14

Dynalog and Dynalog P control consoles

Operating Calypso with the Dynalog control console . . . 2-6

Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

Working with the CAD window

Preparing the measurement plan

List of the prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Installing and qualifying stylus systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

Setting the base / start alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48

Prerequisites for the rotary table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

Defining the clearance planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115

Editing measurement plan settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122

Editing the measurement plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124

Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

Temperature compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

Details on definition of the features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

Sphere Point feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Linking features in constructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

Defining a measurement strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85

Path generation measuring features automatically . . 5-95

Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

Defining characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Details on defining characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42

Editing the measurement plan

Editing features of the measurement plan . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

Adding features or characteristics to a measurement plan . . . . . . 7-5

Editing the entire measurement plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Using macros in the measurement plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

Editing the travel paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

Stylus system changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43

Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

Defining the RDS geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

Multimedia user information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65

Running a measurement plan

Monitoring measurement plan runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Calypso (Rev. 4.0)

Viewing, presenting and editing measuring

Preparing custom printouts and compact printouts . . . . 9-14

How to display variations

Saving measuring results to files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45